maintenance and instruction materials part 2 (pg 525...any diagnostic system shall be an integral...

Strada WVU Shroyer Hall Renovations Electric Traction Elevators PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 142100-3

maintenance service is concluded. State services, obligations, conditions, and terms for agreement period and for future renewal options.

E. Maintenance and Instruction Materials

1. WVU shall be provided with three complete sets of all electrical schematics, including printed circuit boards, mechanical drawings, service manuals, and diagnostic/service tools that are available to elevator manufacturer’s installers and service personnel. These shall include all control wiring, shall show all solid-state circuits, and shall identify all electric and electronic components as originally installed including all field adjuster notes. The name of the manufacturer and the manufacturer’s catalog number shall be provided for all components not manufactured by the elevator installer.

2. A complete parts list, recommended lubricants and a recommended spare parts list shall also be provided.

3. The WVU Facilities Project Manager must receive all required drawings, manuals and parts lists before final payment is made to the Contractor. The fact that a drawing, manual or maintenance tool may contain proprietary information is not considered by the University to be sufficient reason for refusing to furnish any drawing or manual.

4. Furnish one (1) complete set of all diagnostic tools, equipment, and documentation required for the complete maintenance of all aspects of the control and dispatch system. Any diagnostic system shall be an integral part of the controller and provide user-friendly interaction between the serviceman and the controls. The Documentation shall include a description of component function, a hard copy of all as-built schematics, a hard copy set of source codes utilized in developing any control software, and an electronic copy of all source codes utilized. Any and all such systems shall be free from secret codes and decaying circuits that must be periodically reprogrammed by the manufacturer.

1.7 Permits, Testing, and Inspections

A. File necessary drawings for approval of all authorities having jurisdiction, obtain and pay all required fees for permits and inspections, etc., which may be required for the execution of this work. Copies of all permits shall be forwarded to the WVU Facilities Management Project Manager.

B. Obtain, arrange, and/or pay for any necessary tests and inspections. Inspections shall include initial acceptance inspection and the first required annual inspection. The first required annual inspection shall take place 11 months after acceptance testing and before the end of the warranty period. Both the acceptance testing and first required annual inspection shall be performed by WVU’s current State Elevator Inspection Company. The contractor is responsible for the cost and scheduling for the acceptance test and WVU will pay the Inspector’s fee for the first annual inspection. The contractor will be required to supply 2 each licensed elevator mechanics at no additional cost to the University to complete the first required annual inspection.

1. Furnish all test instruments and materials required at the time of final inspection. The in-spection outlines in the ASME A17.2 Inspector’s Manual (latest edition) will be followed.

2. After-hours testing of systems, such as emergency generators or fire service, shall be con-ducted at no extra cost to the Owner.

3. WV Division of Labor usage permit required to reach substantial completion.


C. At substantial completion, the contractor shall provide a minimum of 2 hours training to WVU personnel and WVU maintenance contractor. A sign in sheet shall be submitted to the PM for training to be considered valid.

1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Elevator manufacturer.

1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, and handle materials, components, and equipment in manufacturer's protective packaging. Store materials, components, and equipment off of ground, under cover, and in a dry location.

1.10 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of inserts, sleeves, block outs, elevator equipment with integral anchors, and other items that are embedded in concrete or masonry for elevator equipment. Furnish templates, inserts, sleeves, elevator equipment with integral anchors, and installation instructions and deliver to Project site in time for installation.

B. Coordinate locations and dimensions of work specified in other Sections that relates to electric traction elevators including pit ladders; sumps and floor drains in pits; entrance subsills; electrical service; and electrical outlets, lights, and switches in hoistways, pits, and machine rooms.

1.11 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair, restore, or replace elevator work that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

B. During the one (1) year warranty period, the elevator installer shall provide emergency service on a twenty-four (24) hour basis at no cost to the University. A first response of a qualified University technician shall not void the warranty. A 1-hour response time shall be required from the vendor (matching the current response time required of the University’s maintenance contractor).

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, operation or control system failure, including excessive malfunctions; performances below specified ratings; excessive wear; unusual deterioration or aging of materials or finishes; unsafe conditions; need for excessive maintenance; abnormal noise or vibration; and similar unusual, unexpected, and unsatisfactory conditions.’

2. Warranty Period: Warrant the equipment installed under these guidelines against defects in material and workmanship, and corrects any defects not due to ordinary wear and tear or improper use of car, which may develop within one (1) year from the date the elevator is completed and placed in permanent operation and accepted by the Owner.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ELEVATOR MANUFACTURERS

A. Otis Elevator Co.

Schindler Elevator

Eastern Elevator

ThyssenKrupp Elevator

Kone Elevator

B. Source Limitations: Obtain elevators from single manufacturer.

1. Major elevator components, including driving machines, controllers, signal fixtures, door operators, car frames, cars, and entrances, shall be manufactured by single manufacturer.

2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with ASME A17.1/CSA B44.

B. Accessibility Requirements: Comply with requirements for accessible elevators in the United States Access Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and with ICC A117.1.

2.3 ELEVATORS

A. Elevator System, General: Manufacturer's standard elevator systems. Unless otherwise indicated, manufacturer's standard components shall be used, as included in standard elevator systems and as required for complete system.

B. Elevator Description:

1. Basis of Design: Otis Gen2® gearless machine-room less elevator where all components fit inside the hoistway.

a. Equivalent Elevator Considered with GC making all necessary modifications to meed the need of manufacturer requirements.

2. Machine Type: Gearless traction. 3. Rated Load: 3000 lb (1362 kg). 4. Rated Speed: 200 fpm (1.0 m/s). 5. Car Enclosures:

a. Inside Width: 70 inches (1778 mm). b. Inside Depth: 60 inches (1524 mm). c. Inside Height: Not less than 93 inches (2362 mm) to underside of ceiling. d. Front Walls (Return Panels): Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish.


e. Car Fixtures: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish. f. Side and Rear Wall Panels: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish. g. Reveals: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish. h. Door Faces (Interior): Satin stainless steel, No. 4. i. Door Sills: Aluminum. j. Ceiling: Polished stainless steel, No. 8 finish. k. Handrails: 1/2 by 2 inches (13 by 50 mm) satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish. l. Floor: Sheet Vinyl per Finish Schedule. m. Floor prepared to receive resilient flooring (specified in Section 096516 "Resilient

Sheet Flooring").

6. Hoistway Entrances:

a. Width: 42 inches (1067 mm). b. Height: 84 inches (2134 mm). c. Type: Single-speed side sliding. d. Frames.

7. Hall Fixtures: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish. 8. Additional Requirements:

a. Provide inspection certificate in each car, mounted under acrylic cover with frame made from satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish.

b. Provide hooks for protective pads.

2.4 HOISTWAY ENTRANCES

A. Hoistway Entrance Assemblies: Manufacturer's standard horizontal-sliding, door-and-frame hoistway entrances complete with track systems, hardware, sills, and accessories. Frame size and profile shall accommodate hoistway wall construction.

1. Where gypsum board wall construction is indicated, frames shall be self-supporting with reinforced head sections.

B. Fire-Rated Hoistway Entrance Assemblies: Door and frame assemblies shall comply with NFPA 80 and be listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on testing at as close-to-neutral pressure as possible according to NFPA 252 or UL 10B.

1. Fire-Protection Rating: 1-1/2 hours of 450 deg F (250 deg C).

C. Materials and Fabrication: Manufacturer's standards, but not less than the following:

1. Stainless-Steel Doors: Flush, hollow-metal construction; fabricated from stainless-steel sheet.

2. Sight Guards: Provide sight guards on doors matching door edges. 3. Sills: Extruded or machined metal, with grooved surface, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick. 4. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous

grout complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M.


2.5 SIGNAL EQUIPMENT

A. General: Provide hall-call and car-call buttons that light when activated and remain lit until call has been fulfilled. Provide vandal-resistant buttons and lighted elements illuminated with LEDs.

B. Car-Control Stations: Provide manufacturer's standard car-control stations.

1. Mark buttons and switches for required use or function. Use both tactile symbols and Braille.

C. Emergency Communication System: Two-way voice communication system, with visible signal, which dials preprogrammed number of monitoring station and does not require handset use. System is contained in flush-mounted cabinet, with identification, instructions for use, and battery backup power supply.

D. Firefighters' Two-Way Telephone Communication Service: Provide telephone jack in each car and required conductors in traveling cable for firefighters' two-way telephone communication service.

1. The University insists that each elevator shall be controlled by the fire alarm system as required by the WV Division of Labor or the Fire Marshal.

2. Hands-free in-car communications system. This telephone shall operate on a dedicated telephone line.

3. Three (3) position firefighter key-operated switch, call cancel button, and illuminated/visual/audible signal system.

E. Phase II firefighter’s service operating procedures engraved directly to the care-operating panel face.

F. Car Position Indicator: Provide illuminated digital-type car position indicator, located above car door or above car-control station. Also, provide audible signal to indicate to passengers that car is either stopping at or passing each of the floors served. Include travel direction arrows if not provided in car-control station.

G. Hall Push-Button Stations: Provide one hall push-button station at each landing:

1. Provide units with flat faceplate for mounting with body of unit recessed in wall. 2. Equip units with buttons for calling elevator and for indicating desired direction of travel. 3. Provide telephone jack in each unit for firefighters' two-way telephone communication.

H. Hall Lanterns: Units with illuminated arrows; but provide single arrow at terminal landings. Provide the following:

1. Manufacturer's standard wall-mounted units, for mounting above entrance frames.

I. Hall Annunciator: With each hall lantern, provide audible signals indicating car arrival and direction of travel. Signals sound once for up and twice for down.

1. At manufacturer's option, audible signals may be placed on cars.


J. Emergency Pictorial Signs: Fabricate from materials matching hall push-button stations, with text and graphics as required by authorities having jurisdiction, indicating that in case of fire, elevators are out of service and exits should be used instead. Provide one sign at each hall push-button station unless otherwise indicated.

K. Provide a ceiling-mounted, two-speed exhaust fan with automatic shutoff during equipment nonuse. The fan shall be controlled from the car control panel via a three (3) position key switch.

L. Pit and Shaft

1. Guide rails shall be the “T” type and able to support the weight of the car. 2. The pit ladders, pit light switch and emergency stop button shall be arranged so that all

can be reached before entering the shaft. There shall be one ladder for each elevator. 3. Provide a sump pit, within the elevator pit, covered with a steel grate flush with the floor. 4. Paint the pit floor and sump with a “battleship gray” waterproof paint, made for the

purpose. 5. Single GFI convenience outlet shall be installed in the pit.

2.6 FINISH MATERIALS

A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, commercial steel, Type B, exposed, matte finish.

B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, commercial steel, Type B, pickled.

C. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304.

D. Stainless-Steel Bars: ASTM A 276, Type 304.

E. Stainless-Steel Tubing: ASTM A 554, Grade MT 304.

F. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine elevator areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. Examine hoistways, hoistway openings, pits, and machine rooms as constructed; verify critical dimensions; and examine supporting structure and other conditions under which elevator work is to be installed.

B. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Welded Construction: Provide welded connections for installing elevator work where bolted connections are not required for subsequent removal or for normal operation, adjustment, inspection, maintenance, and replacement of worn parts. Comply with AWS standards for workmanship and for qualifications of welding operators.

C. Sound Isolation: Mount rotating and vibrating equipment on vibration-isolating mounts to minimize vibration transmission to structure and structure-borne noise due to elevator system.

D. Lubricate operating parts of systems, including ropes, as recommended by manufacturers.

E. Alignment: Coordinate installation of hoistway entrances with installation of elevator guide rails for accurate alignment of entrances with car. Where possible, delay final adjustment of sills and doors until car is operable in shaft. Reduce clearances to minimum, safe, workable dimension at each landing.

F. Leveling Tolerance: 1/8 inch (3 mm), up or down, regardless of load and travel direction.

G. Set sills flush with finished floor surface at landing. Fill space under sill solidly with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout.

H. Locate hall signal equipment for elevators as follows unless otherwise indicated:

1. For groups of elevators, locate hall push-button stations between two elevators at center of group or at location most convenient for approaching passengers.

2. Place hall lanterns either above or beside each hoistway entrance. 3. Mount hall lanterns at a minimum of 72 inches (1829 mm) above finished floor.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Acceptance Testing: On completion of elevator installation and before permitting elevator use (either temporary or permanent), perform acceptance tests as required and recommended by ASME A17.1/CSA B44 and by governing regulations and agencies.

B. Operating Test: Load elevator to rated capacity and operate continuously for 30 minutes over full travel distance, stopping at each level and proceeding immediately to the next. Record temperature rise of elevator machine during 30-minute test period. Record failure to perform as required.

C. Advise Owner, Architect, and authorities having jurisdiction in advance of dates and times that tests are to be performed on elevators.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Temporary Use: Comply with the following requirements for[ each] elevator used for construction purposes:


1. Provide car with temporary enclosure, either within finished car or in place of finished car, to protect finishes from damage.

2. Provide strippable protective film on entrance and car doors and frames. 3. Provide padded wood bumpers on entrance door frames covering jambs and frame faces. 4. Provide other protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, and procedures as needed to

protect elevator and elevator equipment. 5. Do not load elevators beyond their rated weight capacity. 6. Engage elevator Installer to provide full maintenance service. Include preventive

maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleanup, and adjustment as necessary for proper elevator operation at rated speed and capacity. Provide parts and supplies same as those used in the manufacture and installation of original equipment.

7. Engage elevator Installer to restore damaged work, if any, so no evidence remains of correction. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop, make required repairs and refinish entire unit, or provide new units as required.

3.5 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, maintenance service shall include 12 months' full maintenance by skilled employees of elevator Installer. Include monthly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper elevator operation at rated speed and capacity. Parts and supplies shall be manufacturer's authorized replacement parts and supplies.

1. Perform maintenance during normal working hours. 2. Perform emergency callback service during normal working hours with response time of

one hour or less. 3. Include 24-hour-per-day, 7-day-per-week emergency callback service with response time

of one hours or less.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to operate, adjust, and maintain elevator(s).

B. Check operation of elevator with Owner's personnel present before date of Substantial Completion and again not more than one month before end of warranty period. Determine that operation systems and devices are functioning properly.

END OF SECTION 142100

General Provisions –

Strada WVU Shroyer Hall Renovations Mechanical

PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 200010 - 1

SECTION 200010 – GENERAL PROVISIONS – MECHANICAL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. The bidding requirements, Contract Documents, and Division 01 - General Requirements, are a

part of Divisions 21-23 and Contract for this Work and apply to these Divisions as fully as if

they were repeated therein.

1.2 WORK INCLUDED

A. Mechanical Work shall consist of the labor, materials and equipment required for installing the

plumbing, the fire protection, and the heating, ventilating and air conditioning systems.

B. Mechanical Work shall include the following Specification Sections and Drawings as outlined:

1. Specifications:

Section 20 00 10 General Provisions – Mechanical

Section 20 90 10 Mechanical Systems Commissioning

Section 21 10 10 Fire Protection

Section 21 96 10 Wiring of Fire Protection Equipment

Section 22 05 05 Plumbing Basic Materials

Section 22 05 10 Plumbing Pipe and Pipe Fittings

Section 22 05 15 Plumbing Piping Specialties

Section 22 05 20 Plumbing Specialties

Section 22 05 25 Plumbing Valves

Section 22 05 30 Plumbing Supports and Anchors

Section 22 07 10 Plumbing Insulation

Section 22 11 10 Plumbing Pumps

Section 22 13 10 Sanitary Drainage

Section 22 14 10 Storm Drainage

Section 22 14 20 Sump Pumps

Section 22 32 10 Water Conditioning System

Section 22 33 10 Water Heaters

Section 22 40 10 Plumbing Fixtures

Section 22 60 20 Special Piping Systems



PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 200010 - 2

Section 22 60 30 Fuel Gas Piping and Specialties

Section 22 96 10 Wiring of Plumbing Equipment

Section 23 05 05 HVAC Basic Materials

Section 23 05 10 HVAC Pipe and Pipe Fittings

Section 23 05 15 HVAC Piping Specialties

Section 23 05 25 HVAC Valves

Section 23 05 30 HVAC Supports and Anchors

Section 23 05 35 HVAC Sound and Vibration Control

Section 23 07 10 HVAC Insulation

Section 23 10 20 Variable Frequency Drives

Section 23 21 10 HVAC Pumps

Section 23 30 10 Air Distribution

Section 23 30 20 Variable Air Volume Systems

Section 23 34 10 Fans and Gravity Ventilators

Section 23 50 10 Central Heating Equipment

Section 23 52 13 Electric Boilers

Section 23 57 10 Heat Transfer

Section 23 60 10 Central Cooling Equipment

Section 23 73 10 Central Station Air Handling Units

Section 23 81 10 Unitary Equipment

Section 23 82 10 Terminal Heating Units

Section 23 90 10 Building Automation System

Section 23 95 10 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of HVAC System

Section 23 96 10 Wiring of HVAC Equipment

2. Drawings:

FP0.01 Symbols, Schedules, Abbreviations & General Notes

FP1.01 First Floor Plan – Fire Protection

FP1.02 Second Floor Plan – Fire Protection

FP1.03 Third Floor Plan – Fire Protection

FP1.04 Fourth Floor Plan – Fire Protection

FP4.01 Partial Plans

PD0.01 Symbols, Schedules, Abbreviations & General Notes



PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 200010 - 3

PD1.01 First Floor Plan – Demolition Plumbing

PD1.02 Second Floor Plan – Demolition Plumbing

PD1.03 Third Floor Plan – Demolition Plumbing

PD1.04 Fourth Floor Plan – Demolition Plumbing

P0.01 Symbols, Schedules, Abbreviations, & General Notes

P1-01 First Floor Plan – Domestic Water Service

P1.02 Second Floor Plan – Domestic Water Service

P1.03 Third Floor Plan – Domestic Water Service

P1.04 Fourth Floor Plan – Domestic Water Service

P2.01 First Floor Plan – Sanitary & Vent

P2.02 Second Floor Plan – Sanitary & Vent

P2.03 Third Floor Plan – Sanitary & Vent

P2.04 Fourth Floor Plan – Sanitary & Vent

P2.05 Roof Plan – Sanitary & Vent

P3.01 First Floor Plan – Natural Gas, Lab Gases & Vacuum

P3.02 Second Floor Plan – Natural Gas, Lab Gases & Vacuum

P3.03 Third Floor Plan – Natural Gas, Lab Gases & Vacuum

P3.04 Fourth Floor Plan – Natural Gas, Lab Gases & Vacuum

P4.01 Enlarged Plans - Plumbing

P4.02 Enlarged Plans - Plumbing

P5.01 Details - Plumbing

P7.01 Riser Diagrams - Plumbing

H0.01

HD1.05

Symbol Abbreviations & General Notes

Roof Plan – Mechanical Demolition

H1.01 First Floor Plan – Ductwork

H1.02 Second Floor Plan – Ductwork

H1.03 Third Floor Plan – Ductwork

H1.04 Fourth Floor Plan – Ductwork

H1.05 Roof Plan – Mechanical

H2.01 First Floor Plan – Piping

H2.02 Second Floor Plan – Piping

H2.03 Third Floor Plan – Piping

H2.04 Fourth Floor Plan – Piping

H3.01 Riser Diagrams



PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 200010 - 4

H4.01 Enlarged Plans

H1.02 Partial Plans

H5.01 Details

H6.01 Schedules

H6.02 Schedules

C. Mechanical Work shall be bid as subcontracts in accordance with the bidding requirements.

1.3 TERMINOLOGY

A. Wherever the term “Bidder” is used in Divisions 21-23 of the Specifications, it shall be

interpreted to refer to the person, firm, or corporation who is submitting an offer or proposal, on

the prescribed form, to perform the Work of these Divisions.

B. Wherever the term, “Contractor” is used in of the Specifications, it shall be interpreted to refer

to the Contractor responsible for Work of these Divisions.

C. Those responsible for Work covered by other portions of the Specification will be indicated by

trade, such as Electrical Contractor, General Contractor, etc.

1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. Portions or all of certain recognized industry or association standards referred to herein as being

a requirement of these Specifications shall be considered as binding as though reproduced in

full herein. Unless otherwise stated the referenced standard shall be the standard which is

current as of the date of issuance of these Specifications. Reference may be made to standards

either by full name or for the sake of brevity by letter designation only. The following is a list of

the most commonly used standards, but is not all inclusive for these Specifications:

ABMA American Bearing Manufacturers Association

ADA Americans with Disabilities Act

AGA American Gas Association

AMCA Air Moving and Conditioning Association

ANSI American National Standards Institute

API American Petroleum Institute

ARI American Refrigeration Institute

ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air- Conditioning Engineers

ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers

ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineers

ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials

AWS American Welding Society

AWWA American Water Works Association

CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute

FM Factory Mutual Engineering Corporation

I-B-R Institute of Boiler & Radiator Manufacturers



PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 200010 - 5

NEC National Electrical Code

NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association

NFPA National Fire Protection Association

OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration

PDI Plumbing Drainage Institute

SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc.

UL Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

1.5 PERMITS AND INSPECTIONS

A. Secure all permits and inspections required by applicable authorities and utilities and pay all

costs in connection with the Work.

B. Schedule all inspections required by applicable authorities and utilities. Certificates shall be in

triplicate and shall be delivered to Owner.

C. Piping work, specialties, or equipment shall not be concealed or covered until same have been

tested and inspected by municipal inspector(s) and observed by Architect. Municipal

inspector(s) record of inspections shall be delivered to Owner.

D. Architect and municipal inspector’s witnessing of tests shall not relieve Contractor of his

responsibility for concealed piping work and specialties, nor for equipment to perform in

accordance with Contract Documents.

1.6 CODES AND STANDARDS

A. Mechanical Work is subject to provisions of the Pennsylvania Uniform Construction Code and

has been designed to be in compliance with the Code. Design aspect of the Project shall not be

altered regarding building envelope or selection of HVAC, service water heating systems and

equipment. Supplemental data published by equipment and system manufacturers to

substantiate energy conservation efficiencies throughout the Project shall be furnished at request

of ArchitectError! Reference source not found..

B. Mechanical Work shall meet requirements of the National Fire Protection Association, all

federal, state, and municipal authority's laws, rules and regulations applicable to the Work and

public utilities having jurisdiction over systems specified herein.

C. Plumbing Work shall be installed in conformity with applicable portions of the International

Plumbing Code, state plumbing codes, local ordinances, and shall be approved as Project

progresses by Architect, and local plumbing inspector. Contractor shall certify domestic water

systems for compliance with Pennsylvania Plumbing System Lead Ban & Notification Act (No.

33-1989). Nothing in the Specifications shall be construed to permit deviation from

requirements of governing code(s).

D. Installation of all gas piping and gas burning equipment shall conform to recommendations of

the American Gas Association, Owner’s insurance carrier, and the local utility.

E. The handling and use of CFC and HCFC refrigerants, whether leaking, venting, recovering, etc.,

shall be in accordance with US Environmental Protection Agency regulations CFR 58 FR



PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 200010 - 6

28660, ASHRAE 15- Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration, and ANSI/ASHRAE 34 -

Number Designation and Safety Classification of Refrigerants.

F. Electrical Work shall meet requirements of the National Electrical Code and all federal, state,

and municipal authority’s laws, rules and regulations applicable to the Work.

G. Where applicable, materials and equipment shall bear the label of approval of Underwriters

Laboratories, Inc.

H. Reference to codes and standards listed herein shall constitute minimum acceptable

requirements. Where Drawings and Specification requirements exceed those of codes listed,

Drawings and Specifications shall take precedence for Work of this Project.

I. If Contractor, during the course of work, observes the existence of hazardous materials in the

structure or on the project site, Contractor shall promptly notify Owner and Architect.

Contractor shall not perform any work pertinent to the hazardous material prior to receipt of

special instructions from Owner. “Hazardous materials”, for the purpose of this Specification,

are defined as asbestos, PCB’s, petroleum, radioactive material, or hazardous waste substances.

1.7 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Specifications for each piece of equipment and each item of material are written around a

product of a specific base manufacturer. This base manufacturer is the basis of design,

dimensions and details. The base manufacturer’s name and model information are included with

the product description as the first named manufacturer under the heading “Acceptable

Manufacturer”.

B. “Substitution” manufacturers are defined as any manufacturer other than the one used as the

basis of design. “Substitution” manufacturers will be permitted, in accordance with the bidding

requirements and where indicated herein.

C. Manufacturers named in the product description, in addition to the base manufacturer, are

“substitution” manufacturers, have been determined to be manufacturers capable of

manufacturing products similar to the base manufacturer and these manufacturers are acceptable

“substitution” manufacturers to the base manufacturer. Where additional manufacturer’s names

do not appear with the base manufacturer, the Architect reserves the right to disallow any

“substitution” manufacturers. Where the base manufacturer’s name is followed by the term “no

substitution”, no “substitution” manufacturers will be considered.

D. Naming of specific manufacturers shall not be construed as eliminating products or services of

other “substitution” manufacturers having comparable items. Where permitted by these

Specifications, and where Bidder desires to use other “substitution” manufacturers, he may

submit a request for approval to use the “substitution” manufacturer in accordance with bidding

requirements.

E. Products described in Specifications are intended to set a quality level and ensure a workable

system. “Substitution” of manufacturers, including those herein named, may be made only after

approval of Architect. Bidder shall assume full responsibility for installation and dimensional

changes required by the use of all “substitution” manufacturer’s products, including revisions to

wiring, controls, piping, structural revisions, etc., and all room or space changes as required due



PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 200010 - 7

to dimension differences of the “substitution” manufacturer product. Architect [Engineer],

approval of “substitution” manufacturer’s products shall be limited to compliance with

information given on the Drawings and Specifications.

F. Whenever the term “Alternate Manufacturer” appears in the product description, Bidder is

required to submit the Bid on the basis of furnishing the product of the base manufacturer

specified and that base manufacturer’s product shall be reflected in the Bidder’s base price.

Bidder shall also submit alternate (add or deduct) prices in the bid in accordance with the

Alternates Section of the Specifications.

G. Where the Bidding requirements call for submittal for approval of substitutions prior to bids

due, all approvals given are for “substitution” manufacturers only, not approval of any

particular product. An approved “substitution” manufacturer’s product must comply with all

requirements of the specifications and drawings for the base manufacturer’s product.

1.8 SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA

A. Submit shop drawings and product data for approval to Architect. Shop drawings and product

data shall have been reviewed and approved (stamped) by Contractor furnishing the equipment.

If evidence of this Contractor’s approval does not appear on submittal data, submittals will be

returned without review. Following Architect review, submittals not approved or requiring

resubmission shall be corrected and resubmitted until satisfactory. Work indicated on shop

drawings and product data shall not be executed until submittals have been approved.

B. Submittals for equipment and material shall indicate room numbers, drawing identification

symbols, product type, capacities, accessories, connection sizes, electrical characteristics,

wiring diagrams, and installation instructions. Each shop drawing shall have specified items,

accessories and options, as applicable to this Project, clearly marked. Catalog numbers, part

numbers, etc. on shop drawings will not be reviewed for correctness, Contractor is responsible

for verifying correctness of these and that they relate to the options, accessories, features, etc.

marked on the shop drawings. Shop drawings not clearly marked as to only that which will be

provided for this Project will not be approved.

C. In as much as it is not the purpose of the submittal process to assure that the Contractor is

meeting all the requirements of the Contract Documents, submittal review by Architect is for

conformance with design concept of the Project and general compliance with information given

in the construction documents. Approval, corrections and/or comments made as part of the

submittal review do not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility from conformance with all

requirements of the Contract Documents, applicable codes and laws. Contractor is responsible

for dimensions, quantities, and performance requirements to be confirmed and correlated at the

job site; for information that pertains solely to the fabrication processes or to techniques of

construction; and for all coordination with the Work of all trades. Refer to paragraph entitled

“Substitutions” in this section of the specifications.

D. At the time of each submittal, Contractor shall give Architect specific written notice of such

variations, if any, that the Shop Drawing or product submitted may have from the requirements

of the Contract Documents, such notice to be in a written communication separate from the

submittal; and, in addition, shall cause a specific notation to be made on each Shop Drawing

and sample submitted to Architect for review and approval of each such variation. Architect’s



PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 200010 - 8

review and approval of Shop Drawings or products shall not relieve Contractor from

responsibility for any variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents unless

Contractor has in writing called the Architect’s attention to each such variation at the time of

each submittal and Architect has given written notation thereof incorporated in or

accompanying the Shop Drawing or product approval; nor will any approval by Architect

relieve contractor from responsibility for complying with the requirements of this paragraph.

E. Shop drawing submittals shall be accompanied by a transmittal sheet with the applicable

specification section number and the "name" of the item or items being submitted clearly

indicated on the transmittal. All "names" on the transmittal shall match exactly the "names"

listed in the specifications for the item being submitted.

F. The name of the supplier, distributor, subcontractor, etc., who will furnish equipment and items

to the Contractor shall appear on the shop drawings when submitted. Shop drawing submittals

without supplier’s, distributors, subcontractors, etc., name will not be reviewed and will be

returned without review.

G. If Architect is required to review any shop drawing or product data submittal more than two

times, a Change Order will be issued to the Contractor for a credit due on the Contract Price to

recoup Architect’s expenses associated with the multiple reviews.

H. One complete set of approved shop drawings and product data shall be delivered to Owner at

completion of Work. Include lists of manufacturer’s parts and part numbers.

I. Refer to General Conditions and Division 01.

1.9 COORDINATION – GENERAL

A. Work shall be governed by requirements set forth in the conditions of the Contract.

B. Provide all labor, materials, and equipment required by the Contract Documents necessary for

completion of the Work of Divisions 21-23.

C. Bidders shall visit the project site to determine actual conditions which will be encountered in

completing the work of this project.

D. Drawings are generally indicative of Work to be installed but may not indicate all bends,

fittings, elbows, etc., required to meet conditions. Where items shown on the Drawings, or

herein described, are not clearly understood, Bidders shall confer with Architect.

E. Coordinate Work of Divisions 21-23 with that of other trades so that Work will be installed in

the most direct manner and so that interference between piping, ducts, conduits, equipment, and

architectural or structural features will be avoided. Work installed in an arbitrary manner

without regard for Work of other trades or equipment servicing requirements will be rejected in

any situation where an undesirable condition or an unfair hardship for other trades, or Owner,

results.

F. Provide sufficient scaffolding and hoist or rig material and equipment into place, or arrange for

rigging by others. In any case, rigging or hoisting for Work of Divisions 21-23 shall be at the

expense of Contractor.



PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 200010 - 9

G. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, provide structural steel members as required for

support of equipment and materials furnished under Divisions 21-23. Provide all hangers and

supports, as specified, detailed, or in accordance with accepted industry standards.

H. Equipment shall be installed in accordance with equipment manufacturer’s installation

instructions. Obtain manufacturer’s installation instructions prior to roughing-in.

I. Where equipment is furnished by other trades for installation as Work under Divisions 21-23, or

where electrical service or utility connection to equipment installed by others is indicated as

Work of Divisions 21-23, obtain approved shop drawings and installation instructions from the

respective contractor prior to roughing-in. Discrepancies between installation instructions and

Contract Documents shall be brought to the attention of Architect.

J. Where equipment is indicated to be furnished as Work of Divisions 21-23 for installation by

others, or where equipment furnished and installed under Divisions 21-23 requires utility

connections by others, provide to the respective contractor one copy of an approved shop

drawing and installation instructions necessary for execution of his work.

K. Unless specifically indicated, communication between the mechanical and electrical systems

equipment and panels shall be via a dedicated wiring system furnished and installed by the

systems installers. These systems shall be separate from all other data communication networks

within the building. Contractor may request approval for providing communications on the

Owner’s building data network. If Owner’s written approval is obtained, the system installer

shall fully coordinate the necessary data network connections with the Owner, the Owner’s

technology consultant, and the contractor responsible for installing the building data network

system. The systems shall follow the Owner’s data network labeling scheme for outlets and

jacks, operation protocols, and shall adhere to all network security measures. The system

installer shall be responsible for all costs associated with equipment, materials, and labor

necessary to furnish and install the communications network including, but not limited to: jacks,

wall plates, cables, conduits and boxes, patch panels, patch cords, additional Owner switches

and equipment, additional systems equipment, and programming services.

1.10 COORDINATION – NEW CONSTRUCTION

A. Openings and recesses, including cutting, patching and finishing, necessary for installation of

mechanical equipment in new construction will be provided by General Contractor. Coordinate

locations, dimensional data, and scheduling of Work with General Contractor.

B. Where piping is run concealed in concrete masonry unit (block) walls, Contractor shall be

responsible for installing his work in cores of block for mason to wall-in as he carries up wall.

Coordinate locations and scheduling of Work with General Contractor.

C. General Contractor will provide concrete foundation pads for mechanical equipment installed

under Divisions 21-23. Provide General Contractor with approved shop drawing, dimensional

data for size of base, and insert and anchor bolt locations. Method of setting, aligning, and

anchoring shall be as recommended by equipment manufacturers.



PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 200010 - 10

D. General Contractor will furnish and install structural steel members for supporting rooftop

equipment as indicated on Drawings. Provide General Contractor with dimensional data

required for fabrication of supports.

E. General Contractor will furnish and install all base flashing for roof mounted equipment.

Furnish and install all cap flashing integral to roof mounted equipment and field fabricated.

Coordinate with General Contractor’s roofer.

F. Electrical Contractor will wire all motors, resistance coils and controllers, except as noted

otherwise in Section 26 96 10, Wiring of Mechanical Equipment. Where motor starters and

disconnect switches are supplied, and shipped loose with mechanical equipment, they shall be

mounted and wired by Electrical Contractor. Verify available power characteristics prior to

ordering equipment.

1.11 COORDINATION – EXISTING CONSTRUCTION

A. Cut all openings required in existing construction for installation of equipment and material.

Perform all cutting, patching, and refinishing as required to match surroundings, whether or not

specifically noted on Drawings.

B. Utility interruptions and tie-ins shall be coordinated with Owner a minimum of [5] <___> days

in advance of Work.

1.12 CONCRETE

A. General Contractor will furnish and install concrete for Work of Divisions 21-23.

1.13 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL

A. General Contractor will perform excavation and backfill required for Work of this Division,

inside and outside building. Coordinate extent of excavation required with General Contractor.

1.14 PAINTING

A. Equipment furnished under Divisions 21-23 that is pre-painted or pre-finished by manufacturer

shall have all nicks, scratches, blemishes, and rust spots cleaned, primed, and refinished prior to

final acceptance by Owner.

B. Painting shall be in accordance with Division 09.

C. General Contractor will paint exposed unfinished equipment, piping, ductwork, etc., installed

under Divisions 21-23.



PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 200010 - 11

1.15 RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Maintain a set of Contract Documents, i.e., Specifications, Drawings, Addenda, Modifications

and approved submittals at the site, in good order and annotated to show all changes made

during construction process. These record documents shall be delivered to Owner and Architect

either prior to or with submission of Application for Final Payment.

B. Record drawings shall be delivered to Owner in latest AutoCAD version on CD-ROM and two

(2) sets of hard copies printed using permanent “Xerox” style ink.

C. Refer to Division 01 for additional requirements.

1.16 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Two (2) complete hard copy(ies) and 1 soft copy(ies)/electronic set(s) on compact disc(s) of the

operating and maintenance manual labeled as described herein shall be submitted to the Owner

for approval in as many 3-ring loose leaf binders as required. The copies shall be submitted a

minimum of two weeks prior to any instructions and demonstrations to Owner’s personnel.

B. The manuals shall be typewritten and the information shall be arranged in a logical order for use

by the Owner in maintaining the equipment and systems installed on the project.

C. The manuals shall include, but not be limited to the following:

1. Table of contents.

2. Materials list with place of purchase.

3. List of normally replaced items, such as filters, fuses, belts, seals, screens, etc., indicating

style, rating, size, etc., and place of purchase.

4. Approved copies of submittals, including component wiring diagrams and BAS wiring

piping diagrams of all installed systems indicating all connections, color coding,

functions, locations, etc. Approved “As-Noted” submittals shall be corrected to

incorporate all approval notes prior to inclusion in the manuals.

5. Installation, servicing, maintenance and operating instructions for all systems and

components with place of original purchase, and name, address and phone number of

person servicing system.

6. Manufacturer’s guarantees and warranties.

7. System and equipment start-up, seasonal changeover, and seasonal shut-down with pre-

start checklists and precautions.

8. System and equipment troubleshooting guides.

9. Reference documents which shall include construction drawings list, record set of

drawings list, test and balance records.

10. Testing and balancing procedures for each system(s) and system(s) components.

11. Copies of all inspection certificates and approvals from all inspection agencies.

12. Copies of approved testing, adjusting and balancing reports.



PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 200010 - 12

D. Refer to Division 01 for additional requirements.

1.17 SPARE PARTS AND EQUIPMENT

A. Furnish to Owner spare parts and equipment at project closeout in accordance with each

respective specification section that requires spare parts and equipment.

1.18 TEMPORARY UTILITIES

A. Refer to General Conditions and Division 01.

1.19 FINAL PAYMENT AND ACCEPTANCE

A. Upon written notice that Work is complete and installed in accordance with intent of

Specifications, Mechanical Engineer will make a final inspection with Owner and Contractor. If

Mechanical Engineer determines that Work is incomplete, or it contains deficiencies, Contractor

shall immediately take such measures as are necessary to complete Work or remedy such

deficiencies.

B. Obligations of Contractor, when making application for final payment, are contained in various

sections of the Specifications, Addenda or modifications. These obligations consist of

furnishing instruction, record drawings, printed material, tools and devices, clean-up services,

credit, certificates, valve listings, start-up test reports and all else required by Contract

Documents.

C. If documentation required does not accompany final payment application, Mechanical Engineer

will not accept Work and will advise that final payment is not recommended. Mechanical

Engineer will indicate in writing reasons for refusing to recommend final payment.

D. If, on basis of Mechanical Engineer’s observation of Work during construction and final

inspection and Mechanical Engineer’s review of final application for payment and

accompanying documentation, all as required by Contract Documents, and if Mechanical

Engineer is satisfied that Work has been completed and Contractor has fulfilled all obligations,

Mechanical Engineer will indicate in writing his recommendation for final payment. If, through

no fault of Contractor, final completion of Work is significantly delayed and if Mechanical

Engineer so confirms, Mechanical Engineer will recommend payment to Contractor for that

portion of the Work fully completed and accepted.

E. Contractor is reminded that his obligation is a continuing one to perform and complete Work in

accordance with Contract Documents. Neither recommendation of any progress or final

payment, nor issuance of Certificate of Substantial Completion, nor any payment to Contractor

by Owner, or any use or occupancy of premises or any part thereof by Owner, will constitute an

acceptance of Work which is not in accordance with Contract Documents.



PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 200010 - 13

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. All materials and equipment shall be new, without imperfections or blemishes, and shall be

protected from the elements prior to installation.

B. Contractor shall be responsible to verify all furnished materials and equipment are suitable for

the service, temperatures, and pressures where they are installed.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Work shall be installed by mechanics skilled in the trade involved.

B. All mechanical equipment and materials shall be installed to allow access to and to facilitate

service, maintenance, repair, replacement, etc., of components to all equipment furnished and

installed under this Division of the specifications, furnished and installed under all other

Divisions of the specifications, and, where applicable, Owner furnished and installed and

Owner’s existing equipment.

C. Duct work, piping, equipment, etc., shall be installed in such a manner as to preserve access to

equipment installed under this project and, where applicable, existing equipment.

3.2 CLEANING

A. Upon completion of Work, remove all dirt, foreign materials, stains, fingerprints, etc., from all

parts and equipment.

B. Remove all construction debris and vacuum interior spaces of all compartmental equipment.

C. Conduct cleaning and disposal operations to comply with codes, ordinances, regulations and

anti-pollution laws.

D. Work shall be subject to inspection by the Architect.

3.3 PROTECTION FROM DUST AND DEBRIS

A. During patching, painting, ceiling removal and replacement, working on the ceiling or on things

above the ceiling, etc., maintain cloths or suitable building paper covers to protect building

surfaces. Protective measures (drop cloths, protective covers, etc.) shall be placed and sealed

over all furniture and equipment to keep items clean and protected against dirt, dust and debris

from entering furniture and equipment that the Owner has not removed.



PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 200010 - 14

B. Upon completion of work each day when building is occupied, remove all temporary covers,

drop cloths and debris and vacuum clean all worked-in areas to eliminate carrying of dirt

materials and dirt tracking throughout building during times construction is not proceeding.

3.4 CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCE

A. The work shall proceed in accordance with the construction work sequence narrative as issued

in Division 01.

B. Work to be installed through existing building shall be installed at other than normal occupied

hours. Coordinate installation times with Owner. Contractor shall be responsible for removing

and replacing ceilings for installing items above ceilings in these existing areas. All ceilings

removed shall be replaced prior to normal occupied hours.

3.5 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

A. Engage qualified instructors to instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain

systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system.

B. Provide instruction at mutually agreed on times. Schedule training with Owner, through

Architect, with at least seven days' advance notice.

C. Instructor shall operate system(s) in order to demonstrate fulfillment of contract requirements

and educate Owner’s personnel on the following:

1. Basis of system design and operational requirements.

2. Documentation provided in the operating and maintenance manuals.

3. Startup and normal operation instructions.

4. Warning, trouble indications, emergency operation and failure instructions.

5. Adjustments.

6. Inspection and preventative maintenance.

7. Diagnostics and repairs.

3.6 WARRANTIES

A. Where extended warranties beyond the normal one year warranty are, as specified herein, to be

applied to a particular item of equipment or system, furnish to Owner a description of the

warranty along with any required registration and signature of manufacturer’s authorized

personnel.

B. Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating with and having the manufacturer administer

these warranties for the full extent of time the warranty will be in effect.

C. Contractor shall be responsible for administering and servicing all extended warranties for the

life of each extended warranty at no additional cost to Owner. Owner’s responsibility will be for



PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 200010 - 15

additional costs for parts associated with warranties that are warranted on a pro-rated basis. All

labor for administering and servicing the extended warranty, including actual replacement of

parts, will be the responsibility of the Contractor for the extended warranty period. All

unwarranted shipping and handling costs for parts and equipment will be the responsibility of

the Owner.


Strada WVU Shroyer Hall Renovations General Provisions - Electrical

PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 200020 - 1

SECTION 200020 – GENERAL PROVISIONS – ELECTRICAL

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. The bidding requirements, Contract Documents, and Division 01 - General Requirements, are a

part of Divisions 26-28 and Contract for this Work and apply to these Divisions as fully as if

they were repeated therein.

1.2 WORK INCLUDED

A. Electrical Work shall consist of labor, materials, and equipment required for furnishing and

installing the electrical system.

B. Electrical Work shall include the following Specification Sections and Drawings as outlined:

1. Specifications:

Section 20 00 20 General Provisions – Electrical

Section 26 05 05 Basic Materials

Section 26 05 20 Wire and Cable, 600 Volts and Below

Section 26 05 30 Raceway and Fittings

Section 26 05 40 Boxes

Section 26 05 50 Wiring Devices

Section 26 05 60 Grounding Systems

Section 26 24 10 Electrical Service

Section 26 24 20 Switchboards

Section 26 24 30 Panelboards

Section 26 24 40 Disconnect Switches

Section 26 24 50 Overcurrent Protective Devices

Section 26 24 60 Surge Protection Devices

Section 26 50 10 Lighting

Section 26 50 50 Lighting Controls

Section 26 60 10 Special Systems

Section 26 90 10 Controls and Instrumentation

Section 26 96 10 Wiring of Mechanical Equipment

Section 27 05 15 Common Requirements – Telecommunications Systems

Section 27 05 25 Grounding and Bonding for Telecommunications Systems


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 200020 - 2

Section 27 05 30 Pathways for Telecommunications Systems

Section 27 11 10 Telecommunications Spaces, Equipment and Fittings

Section 27 13 10 Backbone Cabling – Telecommunications Systems

Section 27 15 10 Horizontal Distribution Cabling – Telecommunications Systems

Section 27 15 45 Faceplates and Connectors – Telecommunications Systems

Section 27 16 10 Connecting Cords, Devices and Adaptors – Telecommunications

Systems

Section 27 19 10 Telecommunications Cabling System Testing – Copper

Section 27 19 20 Telecommunications Cabling System Testing – Fiber

Section 27 41 15 Multi-media Support System

Section 27 59 10

Television System – CATV

Section 27 60 10 Telecommunications Systems Identification and Documentation

Section 28 23 30 Television Conduit Distribution System – CCTV

Section 28 31 10 Fire Alarm System

2. Drawings:

E0.01 Symbols, Abbreviations, & General Notes

E1.01 First Floor Plan – Lighting

E1.02 Second Floor Plan – Lighting

E1.03 Third Floor Plan – Lighting

E1.04 Fourth Floor Plan – Lighting

E2.01 First Floor Plan – Power & Systems

E2.02 Second Floor Plan – Power & Systems

E2.03 Third Floor Plan – Power & Systems

E2.04 Fourth Floor Plan – Power & Systems

E2.05 Roof Plan – Power & Systems

E4.01 Partial Plans

E5.01 Details

E6.01 Schedules

E6.02 Schedules

E6.03 Schedules


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 200020 - 3

E6.04 Schedules

E7.01 Riser Diagrams


C. Electrical Work shall be bid as a subcontract in accordance with the bidding requirements.

1.3 TERMINOLOGY

A. Wherever the term “Bidder” is used in Divisions 26-28 of the Specifications, it shall be

interpreted to refer to the person, firm, or corporation who is submitting an offer or proposal, on

the prescribed form, to perform the Work of these Divisions.

B. Wherever the term, “Contractor” is used in Divisions 26-28 of the Specifications, it shall be

interpreted to refer to the Contractor responsible for Work of these Divisions.

C. Those responsible for Work covered by other portions of the Specifications will be indicated by

trade, such as Mechanical Contractor, General Contractor, etc.

1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. Portions or all of certain recognized industry or association standard referred to herein as being

a requirement of these Specifications shall be considered as binding as though reproduced in

full herein. Unless otherwise stated the reference standard shall be the standard which is current

as of the date of issuance of these Specifications. Reference may be made to standards either by

full name or for the sake of brevity by letter designation only. The following is a list of the most

commonly used standards, but is not all inclusive for these Specifications:

ADA Americans with Disabilities Act

AES Audio Engineering Society

AIA American Institute of Architects

ANSI American National Standards Institute

ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials

BICSI Building Industry Consulting Services International

EIA Electronics Industry Association

FM Factory Mutual Engineering Corporation

ICC International Code Council

IEEE Institute of Electrical & Electronics Engineers

IES Illuminating Engineering Society

ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association

NEC National Electrical Code

NECA National Electrical Contractors Association

NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association

NETA National Electrical Testing Association

NESC National Electric Safety Code

NFPA National Fire Protection Association

OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration

TIA Telecommunications Industry Association

UL Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 200020 - 4

1.5 PERMITS AND INSPECTIONS

A. Secure all permits and inspections required by applicable authorities and pay all costs in

connection with the Work.

B. Schedule all inspections required by applicable authorities and utilities. Certificates shall be in

triplicate and shall be delivered to Owner.

C. Electrical inspection shall be made by the Code Official or Code Administrator as directed by

the municipality in which the work is being performed.

1.6 CODES AND STANDARDS

A. Electrical Work is subject to provisions of the West Virginia State Fire Code and has been

designed to be in compliance with this code. Design aspect of the Project shall not be altered

regarding building envelope or selection of electrical distribution and illumination systems and

equipment. Supplemental data published by equipment and system manufacturers to

substantiate energy conservation efficiencies throughout the Project shall be furnished at request

of Engineer.

B. Work shall meet requirements of the National Electrical Code, and all federal, state, and

municipal authority’s laws, rules and regulations applicable to the Work.

C. Where applicable, materials and equipment shall bear the label of approval of Underwriters

Laboratories, Inc.

D. Reference to codes and standards listed herein shall constitute minimum acceptable

requirements. Where Drawings and Specifications requirements exceed those of codes listed,

Drawings and Specifications shall take precedence for Work of this Project.

E. If Contractor, during the course of work, observes the existence of hazardous materials in the

structure or on the project site, Contractor shall promptly notify Owner and Architect.

Contractor shall not perform any work pertinent to the hazardous material prior to receipt of

special instructions from the Owner. “Hazardous materials”, for the purpose of this

Specification, are defined as asbestos, PCB’s, petroleum, radioactive material, or hazardous

waste substances.

1.7 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Specifications for each piece of equipment and each item of material are written around a

product of a specific base manufacturer. This base manufacturer is the basis of design,

dimensions and details. The base manufacturer’s name and model information are included with

the product description as the first named manufacturer under the heading “Acceptable

Manufacturer”.

B. “Substitution” manufacturers are defined as any manufacturer other than the one used as the

basis of design. “Substitution” manufacturers will be permitted, in accordance with the bidding

requirements and where indicated herein.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 200020 - 5

C. Manufacturers named in the product description, in addition to the base manufacturer, are

“substitution” manufacturers, have been determined to be manufacturers capable of

manufacturing products similar to the base manufacturer and these manufacturers are acceptable

“substitution” manufacturers to the base manufacturer. Where additional manufacturer’s names

do not appear with the base manufacturer, the Engineer reserves the right to disallow any

“substitution” manufacturers. Where the base manufacturer’s name is followed by the term “no

substitution”, no “substitution” manufacturers will be considered.

D. Naming of specific manufacturers shall not be construed as eliminating products or services of

other “substitution” manufacturers having comparable items. Where permitted by these

Specifications, and where Bidder desires to use other “substitution” manufacturers, he may

submit a request for approval to use the “substitution” manufacturer in accordance with bidding

requirements.

E. Products described in Specifications are intended to set a quality level and ensure a workable

system. “Substitution” of manufacturers, including those herein named, may be made only after

approval of Engineer. Bidder shall assume full responsibility for installation and dimensional

changes required by the use of all “substitution” manufacturer’s products, including revisions to

wiring, controls, piping, structural revisions, etc., and all room or space changes as required due

to dimension differences of the “substitution” manufacturer product. Engineer approval of

“substitution” manufacturer’s products shall be limited to compliance with information given on

the Drawings and Specifications.

F. Whenever the term “Alternate Manufacturer” appears in the product description, Bidder is

required to submit the Bid on the basis of furnishing the product of the base manufacturer

specified and that base manufacturer’s product shall be reflected in the Bidder’s base price.

Bidder shall also submit alternate (add or deduct) prices in the bid in accordance with the

Alternates Section of the Specifications.

G. Where the Bidding requirements call for submittal for approval of substitutions prior to bids

due, all approvals given are for “substitution” manufacturers only, not approval of any

particular product. An approved “substitution” manufacturer’s product must comply with all

requirements of the specifications and drawings for the base manufacturer’s product.

1.8 SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA

A. Submit shop drawings and product data for approval to Architect. Shop drawings and product

data shall have been reviewed and approved (stamped) by Contractor furnishing the equipment.

If evidence of this Contractor’s approval does not appear on submittal data, submittals will be

returned without review. Following Architect review, submittals not approved or requiring

resubmission shall be corrected and resubmitted until satisfactory. Work indicated on shop

drawings and product data shall not be executed until submittals have been approved.

B. Submittals for equipment and material shall indicate room numbers, drawing identification

symbols, product type, capacities, accessories, connection sizes, electrical characteristics,

wiring diagrams, and installation instructions. Each shop drawing shall have specified items,

accessories and options, as applicable to this Project, clearly marked. Catalog numbers, part

numbers, etc. on shop drawings will not be reviewed for correctness, Contractor is responsible

for verifying correctness of these and that they relate to the options, accessories, features, etc.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 200020 - 6

marked on the shop drawings. Shop drawings not clearly marked as to only that which will be

provided for this Project will not be approved.

C. In as much as it is not the purpose of the submittal process to assure that the Contractor is

meeting all the requirements of the Contract Documents, submittal review by Architect is for

conformance with design concept of the Project and general compliance with information given

in the construction documents. Approval, corrections and/or comments made as part of the

submittal review do not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility from conformance with all

requirements of the Contract Documents, applicable codes and laws. Contractor is responsible

for dimensions, quantities, and performance requirements to be confirmed and correlated at the

job site; for information that pertains solely to the fabrication processes or to techniques of

construction; and for all coordination with the Work of all trades. Refer to paragraph entitled

“Substitutions” in this section of the specifications.

D. At the time of each submittal, Contractor shall give Architect specific written notice of such

variations, if any, that the Shop Drawing or product submitted may have from the requirements

of the Contract Documents, such notice to be in a written communication separate from the

submittal; and, in addition, shall cause a specific notation to be made on each Shop Drawing

and sample submitted to Architect for review and approval of each such variation. Architect’s

review and approval of Shop Drawings or products shall not relieve Contractor from

responsibility for any variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents unless

Contractor has in writing called the Architect’s attention to each such variation at the time of

each submittal and Architect has given written notation thereof incorporated in or

accompanying the Shop Drawing or product approval; nor will any approval by Architect

relieve contractor from responsibility for complying with the requirements of this paragraph.

E. Shop drawing submittals shall be accompanied by a transmittal sheet with the applicable

specification section number and the "name" of the item or items being submitted clearly

indicated on the transmittal. All "names" on the transmittal shall match exactly the "names"

listed in the specifications for the item being submitted.

F. The name of the supplier, distributor, subcontractor, etc., who will furnish equipment and items

to the Contractor shall appear on the shop drawings when submitted. Shop drawing submittals

without supplier’s, distributors, subcontractors, etc., name will not be reviewed and will be

returned without review.

G. If Architect is required to review any shop drawing or product data submittal more than two

times, a Change Order will be issued to the Contractor for a credit due on the Contract Price to

recoup Architect’s expenses associated with the multiple reviews.

H. One complete set of approved shop drawings and product data shall be delivered to Owner at

completion of Work. Include lists of manufacturer’s parts and part numbers.

I. Refer to General Conditions and Division 01.

1.9 COORDINATION - GENERAL

A. Work shall be governed by requirements set forth in the Conditions of the Contract.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 200020 - 7

B. Provide all labor, materials, and equipment required by the Contract Documents necessary for

completion of the Work of Divisions 26-28.

C. Bidders shall visit the project site to determine actual conditions which will be encountered in

completing the Work of this Project.

D. Drawings are generally indicative of Work to be installed but may not indicate all bends,

fittings, boxes, etc., required to meet conditions. Where items shown on the Drawings, or herein

described, are not clearly understood, Bidders shall confer with Architect.

E. Coordinate Work of Divisions 26-28 with that of other trades so that Work will be installed in

the most direct manner and so that interference between conduits, piping, ducts, equipment, and

architectural or structural features will be avoided. Work installed in an arbitrary manner

without regard for Work of other trades will be rejected in any situation where an undesirable

condition or an unfair hardship for other trades, or Owner, results.

F. Provide sufficient scaffolding and hoist or rig material and equipment into place, or arrange for

rigging by others. In any case, rigging or hoisting for all Work of Divisions 26-28 shall be at the

expense of Contractor.

G. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, provide structural steel members as required for

support of equipment and materials furnished under Divisions 26-28. Provide all hangers and

supports, as specified, detailed, or in accordance with accepted industry standards.

H. Equipment, including electrical service and utility connection to the equipment, shall be

installed in accordance with equipment manufacturer’s installation instructions. Obtain

manufacturer’s installation instructions prior to roughing-in.

I. Where equipment is furnished by other trades for installation as Work under Divisions 26-28, or

where electrical service or utility connection, to equipment installed by others, is indicated as

Work of this Division, obtain approved shop drawings and installation instructions from

respective contractor prior to roughing-in. Discrepancies between installation instructions and

Contract Documents shall be brought to the attention of Architect before Work is begun.

J. Where equipment is indicated to be furnished as Work of Divisions 26-28 for installation by

others, or where equipment furnished and installed under Divisions 26-28 requires utility

connections by others, provide to the respective contractor one copy of an approved shop

drawing and installation instructions necessary for execution of his work.

K. Owner, through Architect, reserves the right to move any outlet or stubbed-up conduit, a

distance of twenty-five feet before roughing-in, without additional cost to Owner.

L. Unless specifically indicated, communication between the mechanical and electrical systems

equipment and panels shall be via a dedicated wiring system furnished and installed by the

systems installers. These systems shall be separate from all other data communication networks

within the building. Contractor may request approval for providing communications on the

Owner’s building data network. If Owner’s written approval is obtained, the system installer

shall fully coordinate the necessary data network connections with the Owner, the Owner’s

technology consultant, and the contractor responsible for installing the building data network

system. The systems shall follow the Owner’s data network labeling scheme for outlets and

jacks, operation protocols, and shall adhere to all network security measures. The system


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 200020 - 8

installer shall be responsible for all costs associated with equipment, materials, and labor

necessary to furnish and install the communications network including, but not limited to: jacks,

wall plates, cables, conduits and boxes, patch panels, patch cords, additional Owner switches

and equipment, additional systems equipment, and programming services.

1.10 COORDINATION - NEW CONSTRUCTION

A. Openings and recesses, including cutting, patching and finishing, necessary for installation of

electrical equipment and devices in new construction will be provided by General Contractor.

Coordinate locations, dimensional data, and scheduling of Work with General Contractor.

B. Where conduit is run concealed in concrete masonry unit (block) walls, Contractor shall be

responsible for installing his work in cores of block for mason to wall-in as he carries up wall.

Coordinate locations and scheduling of Work with General Contractor.

C. Provide concrete foundations and pads for electrical equipment installed under Division 26.

Foundations for equipment shall be as specified in subsequent Sections of the Specifications.

Inserts and anchor bolts shall be poured into foundation according to equipment manufacturer’s

instructions. Method of setting, aligning, and anchoring shall be as recommended by equipment

manufacturer. Coordinate concrete pad sizes with equipment manufacturer’s recommendations.

1.11 COORDINATION - EXISTING CONSTRUCTION

A. Cut all openings required in existing construction for installation of equipment and material.

Perform all cutting, patching, and refinishing as required to match surroundings, whether or not

specifically noted on Drawings.

1.12 CONCRETE

A. Furnish and install concrete for Work of Divisions 26-28. Concrete work shall be in accordance

with requirements set forth in Division 03.

1.13 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL

A. Perform excavation and backfill required for Work of this Division, inside and outside building.

Excavation and backfill shall be in accordance with requirements set forth in Division 31.

1. Work shall include saw cutting, trenching, backfilling, patching of all areas disturbed by

excavation.

2. Banks and excavations shall be retained by means of shoring and braces to avoid cave-

ins. Shoring shall be in accordance with state and local regulatory agencies’

requirements. Shoring shall be maintained until installation, tests and inspections are

complete.

3. Pumping equipment shall be provided and maintained to pump water from excavations.

4. Comply with applicable regulations regarding identification and location of existing

underground utility lines prior to excavation. Refer to Division 31.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 200020 - 9

1.14 PAINTING

A. Equipment furnished under Divisions 26-28 that is pre-painted or pre-finished by manufacturer

shall have all nicks, scratches, blemishes, and rust spots cleaned, primed, and refinished prior to

final acceptance by Owner.

B. Painting shall be in accordance with the Division 09.

C. Paint systems junction boxes and covers in specified color as follows:

1. Fire Alarm: Red

2. Telecommunications and Data: Yellow

3. Access Control, Security and Security CCTV: Brown

4. CATV: Purple

D. General Contractor will paint exposed unfinished equipment, conduit, etc., installed under

Divisions 26-28.

1.15 EXISTING EQUIPMENT

A. Removal of Existing Equipment and Materials: Electrical equipment and materials indicated on

Drawings as “to be removed”, shall be removed as Work of Divisions 26-28. Items of value as

determined by Owner shall be stored on site where directed by Owner. Equipment and material

that Owner does not wish to retain shall be legally disposed of offsite. Do not remove any

equipment and materials from the site without Owner’s approval.

B. Relocation of Existing Equipment and Materials: Electrical equipment and materials indicated

on Drawings as “to be relocated”, shall be removed, relocated, reinstalled, and reconnected

unless otherwise noted on the Drawings. Where indicated, existing wiring shall be extended to

relocated item. Before reinstallation, equipment and materials shall be cleaned and nicks and

scratches shall be touched-up. Broken parts shall be brought to the attention of Owner prior to

removal or any disassembly.

1.16 DEMOLITION

A. Only the trade responsible for Work of Divisions 26-28 shall perform the electrical demolition

work.

B. Trace the entire circuit of any existing circuit to be partially removed. Before removal, mark,

label or tag remaining portions of that circuit for type of circuit (normal, emergency, etc.) and

area or items served.

C. Existing conduit remaining in place may be reused, provided conduit is thoroughly cleaned and

tested for continuity before new wire is installed.

D. Existing conduit remaining in place, and to be reused, shall run in same direction that new

conduit would run, if new conduit were installed.

E. Removed conduit and wire shall not be reused.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 200020 - 10

F. If an existing electrical item to be removed is located in the middle of an existing circuit, with

other existing items on that circuit to remain, the existing circuit shall be made continuous.

G. If an existing electrical item to be removed is located on the end of an existing circuit, the

existing wire and exposed conduit back to the next active item on that circuit shall be removed.

H. If an existing electrical item to be removed is the only item on the circuit, the existing wire and

exposed conduit shall be removed back to the panelboard and, unless otherwise noted on the

Drawings, the existing breaker for that circuit shall become a spare. Existing panel schedule

shall be revised.

I. Where an existing conduit run, or portion of an existing conduit run, to be removed is partially

exposed and partially concealed, the exposed portion shall be removed to a concealed point

beyond the surface, i.e. a wall, a ceiling, a floor and the surface shall be patched and refinished

to match surroundings.

J. Requirements for existing exposed conduit, as stated above, shall also apply to existing

concealed conduit runs located above existing accessible tile ceilings or existing conduit runs

that will be above new accessible tile ceilings.

K. Unless indicated otherwise, where removal of existing wiring, or existing associated wiring, is

indicated on the Drawings, Work shall also include removal of all associated raceways.

L. In area(s) of work (including areas where ceilings will be removed), all existing exposed unused

systems cables shall be removed in their entirety (end to end) in accordance with the National

Electrical Code. Contractor shall coordinate with Owner. Verify with Owner that cables are

unused and obtain Owner’s approval to remove cables.




during construction process. These record documents shall be delivered to [Owner] [Architect]

[Engineer] either prior to or with submission of Application for Final Payment.

B. Marked up record drawings shall include:

1. The single line diagram of the building electrical distribution system provided under this

contract and;

2. Floor plans indicating location and area served for all distribution.

C. Record drawings shall be delivered to Owner in latest AutoCAD version on CD-ROM and two

(2) sets of hard copies printed using permanent “Xerox” style ink.


1.18 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Two (2) complete hard copies and 1 soft copy(ies)/electronic set(s) on compact disc(s) of the

operating and maintenance manual labeled as described herein shall be submitted to the Owner


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 200020 - 11

for approval in as many 3-ring loose leaf binders as required. The copies shall be submitted a

minimum of two weeks prior to any instructions and demonstrations to Owner’s personnel.

B. The manuals shall be typewritten and the information shall be arranged in a logical order for use

by the Owner in maintaining the equipment and systems installed on the project.

C. The manuals shall include, but not be limited to the following:

1. Table of contents.

2. Materials list with place of purchase.

3. List of normally replaced items, such as lamps, fuses, etc., indicating style, rating, size,

etc., and place of purchase.

4. Approved copies of submittals, including component wiring diagrams and BAS wiring

piping diagrams of all installed systems indicating all connections, color coding,

functions, locations, etc. Approved “As-Noted” submittals shall be corrected to

incorporate all approval notes prior to inclusion in the manuals.

5. Installation, servicing, maintenance and operating instructions for all systems and

components with place of original purchase, and name, address and phone number of

person servicing system.

6. Manufacturer’s guarantees and warranties.

7. System and equipment start-up, seasonal changeover, and seasonal shut-down with pre-

start checklists and precautions.

8. System and equipment troubleshooting guides.

9. Reference documents which shall include construction drawings list, record set of

drawings list, test and balance records.

10. Copies of all inspection certificates and approvals from all inspection agencies.


1.19 SPARE PARTS AND EQUIPMENT

A. Furnish to Owner spare parts and equipment at project closeout in accordance with each

respective specification section that requires spare parts and equipment.

1.20 TEMPORARY UTILITIES

A. Refer to General Conditions and Division 01.

1.21 FINAL PAYMENT AND ACCEPTANCE

A. Upon written notice that Work is complete and installed in accordance with the intent of the

Specifications, Electrical Engineer will make a final inspection with Owner and Contractor. If

Electrical Engineer determines that Work is incomplete, or it contains deficiencies, Contractor

shall immediately take such measures as are necessary to complete Work or remedy such

deficiencies.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 200020 - 12

B. Obligations of Contractor, when making application for final payment, are contained in various

sections of the Specifications, Addenda or modifications. These obligations consist of

furnishing instruction, record drawings, printed material, tools and devices, clean-up services,

credit, certificates, start-up test reports and all else required by Contract Documents.

C. If documentation required does not accompany the final payment application, Electrical

Engineer will not accept Work and will advise that final payment is not recommended.

Electrical Engineer will indicate in writing the reasons for refusing to recommend final

payment.

D. If, on basis of Electrical Engineer’s observation of Work during construction and final

inspection and Electrical Engineer’s review of final application for payment and accompanying

documentation, all as required by Contract Documents, and if Electrical Engineer is satisfied

that Work has been completed and Contractor has fulfilled all obligations, Electrical Engineer

will indicate in writing his recommendation for final payment, If, through no fault of

Contractor, final completion of Work is significantly delayed and if Electrical Engineer so

confirms, Electrical Engineer will recommend payment to Contractor for that portion of the

Work fully completed and accepted.

E. Contractor is reminded that his obligation is a continuing one to perform and complete Work in

accordance with Contract Documents. Neither recommendation of any progress or final

payment, nor issuance of Certificate of Substantial Completion, nor any payment to Contractor

by Owner, or any use or occupancy of premises or any part by Owner, will constitute an

acceptance of Work which is not in accordance with Contract Documents.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. All materials and equipment shall be new, without imperfections or blemishes, and shall be

protected from the elements prior to installation.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Work shall be installed by mechanics skilled in the trade involved.

B. All electrical equipment and materials shall be installed to allow access to and to facilitate

service, maintenance, repair, replacement, etc., of components to all equipment furnished and

installed under this Division of the specifications, furnished and installed under all other

Divisions of the specifications, and, where applicable, Owner furnished and installed and

Owner’s existing equipment.

C. Conduit, wire, cable, wiring devices, equipment, etc. shall be installed in such a manner as to

preserve access to equipment installed under this project and, where applicable, existing

equipment.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 200020 - 13

3.2 CLEANING

A. Upon completion of Work, remove all dirt, foreign materials, stains, fingerprints, etc., from all

parts and equipment.

B. Remove all construction debris and vacuum interior spaces of all compartmental equipment.

C. Conduct cleaning and disposal operations to comply with codes, ordinances, regulations and

anti-pollution laws.

D. Work shall be subject to inspection by the Architect.

3.3 PROTECTION FROM DUST AND DEBRIS

A. During patching, painting, ceiling removal and replacement, working on the ceiling or on things

above the ceiling, etc., maintain cloths or suitable building paper covers to protect building

surfaces. Protective measures (drop cloths, protective covers, etc.) shall be placed and sealed

over all furniture and equipment to keep items clean and protected against dirt, dust and debris

from entering furniture and equipment that the Owner has not removed.

B. Upon completion of work each day when building is occupied, remove all temporary covers,

drop cloths and debris and vacuum clean all worked-in areas to eliminate carrying of dirt

materials and dirt tracking throughout building during time construction is not proceeding.

3.4 WARRANTIES

A. Where extended warranties beyond the normal one year warranty are, as specified herein, to be

applied to a particular item of equipment or system, furnish to Owner a description of the

warranty along with any required registration and signature of manufacturer’s authorized

personnel.

B. Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating with and having the manufacturer administer

these warranties for the full extent of time the warranty will be in effect.

C. Contractor shall be responsible for administering and servicing all extended warranties for the

life of each extended warranty at no additional cost to Owner. Owner’s responsibility will be for

additional costs for parts associated with warranties that are warranted on a pro-rated basis. All

labor for administering and servicing the extended warranty, including actual replacement of

parts, will be the responsibility of the Contractor for the extended warranty period. All

unwarranted shipping and handling costs for parts and equipment will be the responsibility of

the Owner


Strada WVU Shroyer Hall Renovations Commissioning of HVAC Equipment

PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 209010 - 1

DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING

SECTION 209010 – COMMISSIONING OF HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1. Description

A. The description of Commissioning is a systematic process of ensuring that all building

systems perform interactively according to the design intent and the owner's operational

needs. This is achieved by beginning in the design phase and documenting design intent

and continuing through construction, acceptance and the warranty period with actual

verification of performance. The commissioning process shall encompass and coordinate

the traditionally separate functions of system documentation, equipment startup, control

system calibration, testing and balancing, as well as performance testing and training.

Commissioning during the construction phase is intended to achieve the following

specific objectives according to the Contract Documents.

B. Commissioning during the construction process phase is intended to achieve the

following specific objectives according to the Contract Documents:

1. Verify that applicable equipment and systems are installed according to the

manufacturer's recommendations and to industry accepted minimum standards and

that they receive adequate operational checkout by installing contractors.

2. Verify and document proper performance of equipment and systems.

3. Verify that O&M documentation left on site is complete.

4. Verify that the owner's operating personnel are adequately trained.

5. Review project during warranty period.

C. Abbreviations: The following are common abbreviations used in the Specifications and in

the Commissioning Plan. Definitions are found in Section 1.6.

A/E Architect and Design

Engineers

FT Functional performance test

CA Commissioning Agent GC General Contractor

CC Controls Contractor MC Mechanical Contractor

CM Construction Manager

(Owner’s representative)

PC Prefunctional Checklist

Cx Commissioning PM Project Manager (of the Owner)

EC Electrical Contractor Subs Subcontractors to General

TAB Test and Balance Contractor

1.2. Coordination

A. Management: The CA is hired by West Virginia University directly. The CA directs and

coordinates the project commissioning activities and the reports to the PM. All team

members work together to fulfill their contracted responsibilities and meet the objectives

of the contract documents.

1.3. Commissioning Process

A. Commissioning Plan. The Commissioning Plan, provided as part of the bid documents, is

binding on the Contractor. The commissioning plan provides guidance in the execution of

the commissioning process. Just after the initial commissioning scoping meeting, the CA

will update the plan that is then considered the "final" plan, though it will continue to

evolve and expand as the project progresses. The Specifications will take precedence

over the Commissioning Plan.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 209010 - 2


1.4. Responsibilities

A. All Parties

1. Follow Commissioning Plan.

2. Attend commissioning scoping meeting and additional meetings, as necessary.

B. Architect (of A/E)

Construction and Acceptance Phase:

1. Does not manage the Commissioning Agent’s contract; said contract managed

directly by West Virginia University.

2. Provide any design narrative documentation requested by the CA. 3. Coordinate resolution of system deficiencies identified during commissioning,

according to the contract documents.

C. Mechanical and Electrical Designers/Engineers (of the A/E)


1. Provide any design narrative and sequences documentation requested by the CA. The

designers shall assist (along with the contractors) in clarifying the operation and

control of commissioned equipment in areas where the specifications, control

drawings or equipment documentation is not sufficient for writing detailed testing

procedures.

2. Review and approve the pre-functional checklists for major pieces of equipment for

sufficiency prior to their use.

3. Review, and approve the functional test procedure forms for major pieces of

equipment for sufficiency prior to their use.

4. Correct deficiencies and schedule retesting of equipment.

D. Commissioning Agent (CA): The CA is not responsible for design concept, design

criteria, compliance with codes, design or general construction scheduling, cost

estimating, or construction management. The CA may assist with problem solving, non-

conformance or deficiencies, but ultimately that responsibility resides with the general

contractor and the A/E. The primary role of the CA is to develop and coordinate the

execution of a testing plan, observe and document performance-that systems are

functioning in accordance with the documented design intent and in accordance with the

Contract Documents. The Contractors will provide all tools or the use of tools to start,

check-out and functionally test equipment and systems, except for specified testing with

portable data-loggers, which shall be supplied and installed by the CA.


1. Coordinates and directs the commissioning activities in a logical, sequential and

efficient manner using consistent protocols and forms, centralized documentation,

clear and regular communications and consultations with all necessary parties,

frequently updated timelines and schedules and technical expertise.

2. Write and distribute pre-functional tests and checklists. 3. Witness all or part of the HVAC piping test and flushing procedure, sufficient to be

confident that proper procedures were followed. Document this testing and include

the documentation in O&M manuals. Notify owners project manager of any

deficiencies in results or procedures.

4. Witness all or part of any ductwork testing and cleaning procedures, sufficient to be

confident that proper procedures were followed. Document this testing and include


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 209010 - 3


the documentation in O&M manuals. Notify owner's project manager of any

deficiencies in results or procedures.

5. Approve pre-functional tests and checklist completion by reviewing pre-functional

checklist reports and by selected site observation and spot checking.

6. Oversee sufficient functional testing of the control system and approve it to be used

for TAB, before TAB is executed.

7. With necessary assistance and review from installing contractors, write the functional

performance test procedures for equipment and systems. This may include energy

management control system trending, stand-alone data-logger monitoring or manual

functional testing. Submit to PM for review, and for approval if required.

8. Maintain a master deficiency and resolution log and a separate testing record. Provide

the PM with written progress reports and test results with recommended actions.

9. Provide a final commissioning report.

E. General Contractor (GC)


1. Facilitate the coordination of the commissioning work by the CA, and with the GC

and CA to ensure that commissioning activities are being scheduled into the master

schedule.

2. Furnish a copy of all construction documents, addenda, change orders and approved

submittals and shop drawings related to commissioned equipment to the CA.

3. Coordinate the training of owner personnel.

1.5. Definitions

A. Acceptance Phase - phase of construction after startup and initial checkout when

functional performance tests, O&M documentation review and training occurs.

B. Approval - acceptance that a piece of equipment or system has been properly installed

and is functioning in the tested modes according to the Contract Documents.

C. Basis of Design - The basis of design is the documentation of the primary thought

processes and assumptions behind design decisions that were made to meet the design

intent. The basis of design describes the systems, components, conditions and methods

chosen to meet the intent. Some reiterating of the design intent may be included.

D. Commissioning Agent (CA) - an independent agent, not otherwise associated with the

A/E team members or the Contractor. The CA directs and coordinates the day-to-day

commissioning activities. The CA does not take an oversight role like the PM. The CA

shall report directly to the PM.

E. Functional Performance Test (FT) - test of the dynamic function and operation of

equipment and systems using manual (direct observation) or monitoring methods.

Functional testing is the dynamic testing of systems (rather than just components) under

full operation (e.g., the chiller pump is tested interactively with the chiller functions to

see if the pump ramps up and down to maintain the differential pressure set point).

Systems are tested under various modes, such as during low cooling or heating loads,

high loads, component failures, unoccupied, varying outside air temperatures, fire alarm,

power failure, etc. The systems are run through all the control system's sequences of

operation and components are verified to be responding as the sequences state.

Traditional air or water test and balancing (TAB) is not functional testing, in the

commissioning sense of the word. TAB's primary work is setting up the system flows and

pressures as specified, while functional testing is verifying that which has already been


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 209010 - 4


set up. The commissioning agent develops the functional test procedures in a sequential

written form, coordinates, oversees and documents the actual testing, which is usually

performed by the installing contractor or vendor. FTs are performed after pre-functional

checklists and startup is complete.

F. Pre-functional Checklist (PC) - a list of items to inspect and elementary component tests

to conduct to verify proper installation of equipment, provided by the CA to the Sub. Pre-

functional checklists are primarily static inspections and procedures to prepare the

equipment or system for initial operation (e.g., belt tension, oil levels OK, labels affixed,

gages in place, sensors calibrated, etc.). However, some pre-functional checklist items

entail simple testing of the function of a component, a piece of equipment or system

(such as measuring the voltage imbalance on a three phase pump motor of a chiller

system). The word pre-functional refers to before functional testing. Pre-functional

checklists augment and are combined with the manufacturer's start-up checklist. Even

without a commissioning process, contractors typically perform some, if not many, of the

Pre-functional checklist items a commissioning agent will recommend. However, few

contractors document in writing the execution of these checklist items. Therefore, for

most equipment, the contractors execute the checklists on their own. The commissioning

agent only requires that the procedures be documented in writing, and does not witness

much of the Pre-functional checklisting, except for larger or more critical pieces of

equipment.

G. Seasonal Performance Tests - FT that is deferred until the system(s) will experience

conditions closer to their design conditions.

H. Simulated Condition - condition that is created for the purpose of testing the response of

a system (e.g., applying a hair blower to a space sensor to see the response in a VAV

box).

I. Simulated Signal - disconnecting a sensor and using a signal generator to send an

amperage, resistance or pressure to the transducer and DDC system to simulate a sensor

value.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1. Test Equipment

A. All standard testing equipment required to perform startup and initial checkout and

required functional performance testing shall be provided by the Division contractor for

the equipment being tested. For example, the mechanical contractor of Division 15 shall

ultimately be responsible for all standard testing equipment for the HVAC system and

controls system in Division 15, except for equipment specific to and used by TAB in their

commissioning responsibilities. Two-way radios shall be provided by the Division

Controller.

B. Data-logging equipment and software required to test equipment will be provided by the

CA, but shall not become the property of the Owner.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1. Meetings

A. Scoping Meeting. Within 60 to 90 days, depending on bldg. size, prior to the

commencement of construction, the CA will schedule, plan and conduct a commissioning


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 209010 - 5


scoping meeting with the entire commissioning team in attendance. Meeting minutes will

be distributed to all parties by the CA. Information gathered from this meeting will allow

the CA to revise the Commissioning Plan to its "final" version, which will also be

distributed to all parties.

3.2. Reporting

A. The CA will provide regular reports to the PM, as deemed necessary, with increasing

frequency as construction and commissioning progresses. Standard forms are provided

and referenced in the Commissioning Plan.

3.3. Start-up, Prefunctional Checklists and Initial Checkout

A. Start-up and Initial Checkout Plan. The CA shall assist the commissioning team members

responsible for startup of any equipment in developing detailed start-up plans for all

equipment. The primary role of the CA in this process is to ensure that there is written

documentation that each of the manufacturer-recommended procedures have been

completed. Parties responsible for Pre-functional checklists and startup are identified in

the commissioning scoping meeting and in the checklist forms.

1. These checklists indicate required procedures to be executed as part of startup and

initial checkout of the systems and the party responsible for their execution.

2. The CA will provide generic checklists, the content of which must be reviewed by

the Contractor and supplemented with manufacturer specific requirements. The

Contractor determines which trade is responsible for executing and documenting

each of the line item tasks and notes that trade on the form. Each form will have more

than one trade responsible for its execution.

3. The subcontractor responsible for the purchase of the equipment develops the full

start-up plan by combining (or adding to) the CA's checklists with the manufacturer's

detailed start-up and checkout procedures from the O&M manual and the normally

used field checkout sheets. The plan will include checklists and procedures with

specific boxes or lines for recording and documenting the checking and inspections

of each procedure and a summary statement with a signature block at the end of the

plan.

4. The full start-up plan could consist of something as simple as:

a. The CA's pre-functional checklists. b. The manufacturer's standard written start-up procedures copied from the

installation manuals with check boxes by each procedure and a signature block

added by hand at the end.

c. The manufacturer's normally used field checkout sheets.

5. The subcontractor submits the full startup plan to the CA for review and approval.

6. The CA reviews and approves the procedures and the format for documenting them,

noting any procedures that need to be added.

B. Execution of Prefunctional Checklists and Startup.

1. Four weeks prior to startup, the Subs and vendors schedule startup and checkout with

the PM, GC and CA. The performance of the Pre-functional checklists, startup and

checkout are directed and executed by the Sub or vendor. When checking off Pre-

functional checklists, signatures may be required of other Subs for verification of

completion of their work.

2. The CA shall observe, at minimum, the procedures for each piece of primary

equipment, unless there are multiple units, (in which case a sampling strategy may be


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 209010 - 6


used as approved by the PM). In no case will the number of units witnessed be less

than four on any one building, nor less than 20% of the total number of identical or

very similar units.

3. For lower-level components of equipment, (e.g., VAV boxes, sensors, controllers),

the CA shall observe a sampling of the Pre-functional and start-up procedures. The

sampling procedures are identified in the commissioning plan.

4. The Subs and vendors shall execute startup and provide the CA with a signed and

dated copy of the completed start-up and Pre-functional tests and checklists.

5. Only individuals that have direct knowledge and witnessed that a line item task on

the Pre-functional checklist was actually performed shall initial or check that item

off. It is not acceptable for witnessing supervisors to fill out these forms.

C. Deficiencies, Non-Conformance and Approval in Checklists and Startup

1. The Subs shall clearly list any outstanding items of the initial start-up and Pre-

functional procedures that were not completed successfully, at the bottom of the

procedures form or on an attached sheet. The procedures form and any outstanding

deficiencies are provided to the CA within two days of test completion.

2. The CA reviews the report and submits either a non-compliance report or an approval

form to the Sub or PM. The CA shall work with the Subs and vendors to correct and

retest deficiencies or uncompleted items. The CA will involve the PM and others as

necessary. The installing Subs or vendors shall correct all areas that are deficient or

incomplete in the checklists and tests in a timely manner, and shall notify the CA as

soon as outstanding items have been corrected and resubmit an updated start-up

report and a Statement of Correction on the original non-compliance report. When

satisfactorily, the completed CA recommends approval of the execution of the

checklists and startup of each system to the PM using a standard form.

3. Items left incomplete, which later cause deficiencies or delays during functional

testing may result in backcharges to the responsible party. Refer to Part 3.7 herein for

details.

3.4. Functional Performance Testing

A. Objectives and Scope. The objective of functional performance testing is to demonstrate

that each system is operating according to the documented design intent and Contract

Documents. Functional testing facilitates bringing the systems from a state of substantial

completion to full dynamic operation. Additionally, during the testing process, areas of

deficient performance are identified and corrected, improving the operation and

functioning of the systems. In general, each system should be operated through all modes

of operation (seasonal, occupied, unoccupied, warm-up, cool-down, part- and full-load)

where there is a specified system response. Verifying each sequence in the sequences of

operation is required. Proper responses to such modes and conditions as power failure,

freeze condition, low oil pressure, no flow, equipment failure, etc. shall also be tested.

B. Development of Test Procedures. Before test procedures are written, the CA shall obtain

all requested documentation and a current list of change orders affecting equipment or

systems, including an updated points list, program code, control sequences and

parameters. Each Sub or vendor responsible to execute a test shall provide limited

assistance to the CA in developing the procedures review (answering questions about

equipment, operation, sequences, etc.). Prior to execution, the CA shall provide a copy of

the test procedures to the Sub(s) who shall review the tests for feasibility, safety,

equipment and warranty protection. The CA may submit the tests to the A/E for review,

if requested. The CA shall review owner-contracted, factory testing or required owner


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 209010 - 7

acceptance tests which the CA is not responsible to oversee, including documentation


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 209010 - 8


format, and shall determine what further testing or format changes may be required to

comply with the Specifications. Redundancy of testing shall be minimized. The purpose

of any given specific test is to verify and document compliance with the stated criteria of

acceptance given on the test form. Representative test formats and examples (not

designed for this facility) are found in the appendices to Divisions 15 and 16. The test

procedure forms developed by the CA shall include (but not be limited to) the following

information:

1. System and equipment or component name(s)

2. Equipment location and ID number 3. Unique test ID number, and reference to unique Pre-functional checklist and start-up

documentation ID numbers for the piece of equipment

4. Date

5. Project name

6. Participating parties

7. A copy of the specification section describing the test requirements

8. A copy of the specific sequence of operations or other specified parameters being

verified

9. Formulas used in any calculations

10. Required pre-test field measurements

11. Instructions for setting up the test.

12. Special cautions, alarm limits, etc. 13. Specific step-by-step procedures to execute the test, in a clear, sequential and

repeatable format

14. Acceptance criteria of proper performance with a Yes / No check box to allow for

clearly marking whether or not proper performance of each part of the test was

achieved.

15. A section for comments 16. Signatures and date block for the CA

C. Test Methods

1. Simulated Conditions. Simulating conditions (not by an overwritten value) shall be

allowed, though timing the testing to experience actual conditions is encouraged

wherever practical.

2. Overwritten Values. Overwriting sensor values to simulate a condition, such as

overwriting the outside air temperature reading in a control system to be something

other than it really is, shall be allowed, but shall be used with caution and avoided

when possible. Such testing methods often can only test a part of a system, as the

interactions and responses of other systems will be erroneous or not applicable.

Simulating a condition is preferable. e.g., for the above case, by heating the outside

air sensor with a hair blower rather than overwriting the value or by altering the

appropriate setpoint to see the desired response. Before simulating conditions or

overwriting values, sensors, transducers and devices shall have been calibrated.

3. Simulated Signals. Using a signal generator which creates a simulated signal to test

and calibrate transducers and DDC constants is generally recommended over using

the sensor to act as the signal generator via simulated conditions or overwritten

values.

4. Altering Setpoints. Rather than overwriting sensor values, and when simulating

conditions is difficult, altering setpoints to test a sequence is acceptable. For example,

to see the AC compressor lockout work at an outside air temperature below 55F,

when the outside air temperature is above 55F, temporarily change the lockout


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 209010 - 9

setpoint to be 2F above the current outside air temperature.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 209010 - 10


D. Problem Solving. The CA will recommend solutions to problems found, however the

burden of responsibility to solve, correct and retest problems is with the GC, Subs and

A/E.

3.5. Documentation, Non-conformance and Approval of Tests

A. Non-Conformance

1. The CA will record the results of the functional test on the procedure or test form. All

deficiencies or non-conformance issues shall be noted and reported to the PM on a

standard non-compliance form.

2. Corrections of minor deficiencies identified may be made during the tests at the

discretion of the CA. In such cases the deficiency and resolution will be documented

on the procedure form.

3. Every effort will be made to expedite the testing process and minimize unnecessary

delays, while not compromising the integrity of the procedures. However, the CA

will not be pressured into overlooking deficient work or loosening acceptance criteria

to satisfy scheduling or cost issues, unless there is an overriding reason to do so at the

request of the PM.

3.6. Operation and Maintenance Manuals

A. Commissioning Record in O&M Manuals

1. The CA is responsible to compile, organize and index the following commissioning

data by equipment into labeled, indexed and tabbed, three-ring binders and deliver it

to the GC, to be included with the O&M manuals. Three copies of the manuals will

be provided. The format of the manuals shall be: Tab I-1 Commissioning Plan, Tab I-

2 Final Commissioning Report, Tab 01 System Type 1 (chiller system, packaged

unit, boiler system, etc.), Sub-Tab A-Design narrative and criteria, sequences,

approvals for Equipment, Sub-Tab B-Startup plan and report, approvals, corrections,

blank Pre-functional checklists, Colored Separator Sheets-for each equipment type

(fans, pumps, chiller, etc.), Sub-Tab-C Functional tests (completed), trending and

analysis, approvals and corrections, training plan, record and approvals, blank

functional test forms and a recommended recommissioning schedule, Tab 02 System

Type 2 repeat as per System 1

2. Other documentation will be retained by the CA.

3.7. Deferred Testing

A. Unforeseen Deferred Tests. If any check or test cannot be completed due to the building

structure, required occupancy condition or other deficiency, execution of checklists and

functional testing may be delayed upon approval of the PM. These tests will be

conducted in the same manner as the seasonal tests as soon as possible. Services of

necessary parties will be negotiated.

B. Seasonal Testing. During the warranty period, seasonal testing (tests delayed until

weather conditions are closer to the system's design) shall be completed as part of this

contract. The CA shall coordinate this activity. Tests will be executed, documented and

deficiencies corrected by the appropriate Subs, with facilities staff and the CA

witnessing. Any final adjustments to the O&M manuals and as-builds due to the testing

will be made.

3.8. Written Work Products


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 209010 - 11


A. The commissioning process generates a number of written work products described in

various parts of the Specifications. The Commissioning Plan-Construction Phase, lists all

the formal written work products, describes briefly their contents, who is responsible to

create them, their due dates, who receives and approves them and the location of the

specification to create them. In summary, the written products are:

1

Product

Final Commissioning Plan

Developed By

CA

2 Meeting Minutes CA

3 Commissioning Schedules CA with GC and CM

4 Prefunctional checklists Subs and CA

5 Startup and initial checkout plan Subs and CA

6 Startup and initial checkout forms filled out Subs

7 Commissioning Progress Report CA

8 Commissioning record book CA


Strada WVU Shroyer Hall Renovations Fire Protection

PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 211010 - 1

SECTION 211010 – FIRE PROTECTION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. The Work of this Section shall consist of the labor, materials and equipment required for

installation of a combined sprinkler and standpipe system.

B. Water supply for the fire protection system shall be extended from main to curb stop, including

curb stop by local water company. Contractor shall make application for and incur all costs

associated with fire protection system water supply.

1.2 SYSTEM DESIGN

A. Specifications and Drawings are intended to provide a functional system. Contractor shall

prepare final design and installation documents in accordance with applicable code and agency

requirements.

B. Scaled drawings and hydraulic calculations bearing Owner’s Fire Insurance Underwriter

stamp(s) of approval shall be submitted to Architect prior to installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPE

A. Fire protection system piping (both sprinkler and fire hose piping) aboveground shall be in

accordance with applicable NFPA standards. Pipe fittings and methods of pipe joining shall be

in accordance with applicable NFPA standards. Plastic pipe and fittings will not be permitted.

B. Underground fire lines shall be in accordance with Pipe Specification No. 6. Refer to

Section 22 05 10, Pipe and Pipe Fittings.

2.2 PIPE SUPPORTS

A. Piping shall be supported by means of UL approved type hangers. Hangers shall be sized,

spaced and installed in accordance with NFPA 13.

2.3 VALVES

A. Valves for use in fire protection system piping shall be provided as required and shall be the

following types unless noted otherwise:


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 211010 - 2

1. Drain valves and test valves shall be FM/UL approved (minimum cold water pressure

rating of 175 psi, verified with actual system water pressure).

2. Control valves inside building shall be FM/UL approved valves (minimum cold water

pressure rating of 175 psi, verified with actual system water pressure).

3. Post indicator valve shall be FM/UL approved gate valve, non-rising stem, with indicator

post flange. Indicator post shall be UL listed vertical type with provision for attachment

of supervisory switch.

4. Check valves shall be FM/UL approved type with synthetic rubber discs for quiet non

return control (minimum cold water pressure rating of 175 psi, verified with actual

system water pressure).

2.4 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS

A. Fire department connection shall be wall type Siamese connection, <_____> inch size with cast

brass body and FM/UL approved. Hose coupling threads for Siamese connections shall conform

to threaded fittings used by local fire department. Fire department connection shall be lettered

STANDPIPE.

2.5 ADJUSTABLE DROP NIPPLES

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Merit Brass, Reliable, Anvil International, or CECA, no

substitutions.

B. Adjustable drop nipples shall be the following type:

1. Nipples shall be double o-ring seal. Rated to the pressure ratings of the system, with 3

inches of adjustment maximum.

2. Temperature and pressure rating shall conform to system temperature and pressure rating.

3. Shall be FM and UL approved.

C. Provide 1 spare adjustable nipple for each spare sprinkler head in the sprinkler head cabinet.

2.6 SPRINKLER HEADS

A. Sprinkler heads shall be the following types:

1. Unless noted otherwise, sprinkler heads in finished ceilings shall be adjustable, fully

concealed with white cover plate.

2. Unless noted otherwise, sprinkler heads in specialty metal grid and non-white ceilings

shall be concealed with a custom color, factory finished cover plate that matches the

ceiling material.

3. For other areas where ceilings are not installed, sprinkler heads shall be brass and of

appropriate orientation (upright, pendant, or sidewall, etc.)

4. Temperature rating shall be as noted on Drawings.

5. All heads shall be FM/UL approved.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 211010 - 3

B. Provide the minimum number of spare sprinkler heads, in a cabinet, corresponding to types and

temperature ratings of installed sprinkler heads, in accordance with NFPA 13.

2.7 FLOW ALARM SWITCH

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Simplex, or Autocall, Potter Signal Company.

B. Flow alarm switches shall be FM/UL approved with time delay mechanism, tamper switch.

C. Contractor shall coordinate voltage and power requirements with fire alarm system vendor.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Fire protection system shall conform to requirements of the National Fire Protection

Association and all applicable state and local codes.

B. Work shall be installed and tested as specified herein and required by applicable ordinances,

and shall be repeated to the satisfaction of those making inspection. Fire protection system

piping shall be flushed and tested to 200 psi for two hours duration.

C. Coordinate sprinkler piping, equipment, heads, appurtenances, etc. with that of other trades so

that sprinkler work will be installed in the most direct manner and so that interference between

piping, ducts, equipment and architectural or structural features will be avoided. Sprinkler

piping, equipment, heads, appurtenances, etc. installed in an arbitrary manner without regard for

work of other trades will be rejected in any situation where an undesirable condition or an unfair

hardship for other trades, or owner, results.

D. Pipe penetrations through walls, floors and ceilings shall be large enough to accommodate pipe

expansion. Annular space between outside of pipe and inside of pipe sleeves or openings shall

be sealed with fire stop sealing system. Refer to Section 22 05 05, Plumbing Basic Materials.

E. Provide auxiliary drains for draining low points or trapped portions of system piping.

F. Inspector's test shall be provided on each floor.

G. Control, drain and test valves shall be provided with identification tags in accordance with

NFPA 13.

H. Hydraulic design placards shall be placed at the base of each riser indicating design and

demands of the systems.

I. Adjustable drop nipples may only be used in recessed or concealed sprinkler head applications.

Adjustable drop nipple shall be installed prior to the wet pipe sprinkler head and shall be used

only for the adjustment of an individual sprinkler head. Adjustable nipples shall not be installed

in dry pipe applications. Adjustable drop nipples shall be installed prior to pressure testing the

system and according to manufacturer’s recommendations.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 211010 - 4

J. Upon project completion, contractor shall submit to the Owner two copies of the latest edition

of NFPA 25, “Standard for the Inspection, Testing, and Maintenance of Water Based Fire

Protection Systems”.


Strada WVU Shroyer Hall Renovations Wiring of Fire Protection Equipment

PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 219610 - 1

SECTION 219610 – WIRING OF FIRE PROTECTION EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. The Work of this Section shall include the power and control wiring of fire protection

equipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Fire Protection Contractor shall provide equipment with controls, starters and related items as

specified in various Sections of Division 21.

B. Electrical Contractor shall provide all power wiring unless specifically noted otherwise.

C. Fire Protection Contractor shall furnish and install all control wiring unless specifically noted

otherwise.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Fire protection equipment shall be wired in accordance with the following schedule:

Key:

Item furnished by.....

Item installed by....

Item wired by.....

the respective trade according to the following designations:

F = Fire Protection Contractor

E = Electrical Contractor

Strada WVU Shroyer Hall Renovations Wiring of Fire Protection Equipment

PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 219610 - 2

Fire Protection Equipment Wiring Schedule

Equipment

Disconnect Means Controllers Control Devices

Rem

ote

Dis

con

nec

t S

wit

ch

Inte

gra

l D

isco

nnec

t S

wit

ch

Wal

l S

wit

ch

Co

rd &

Plu

g

Mag

net

ic M

oto

r S

tr

Co

mb

inat

ion

Moto

r S

tr

Man

ual

Mo

tor

Str

VF

D w

ith

Dis

con

nec

t

Co

nta

cto

r

L

ine

Volt

age

Sta

t

Lo

w V

olt

age

Sta

t

Aq

uas

tat

Du

ct S

mo

ke

Det

ecto

r

Co

ntr

ol

Pan

el

Flo

w/P

ress

/Lev

el S

wit

ch

BA

S/A

TC

Co

ntr

ol

Flow and Tamper

Switches F

F

E

B. Unless noted, Contractor responsible for wiring of an item shall be responsible for furnishing

and installing all wiring for that item and making all connections associated with this wiring.


Strada WVU Shroyer Hall Renovations Plumbing Basic Materials

PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 220505 - 1

SECTION 220505 – PLUMBING BASIC MATERIALS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. The Work of this Section shall consist of the labor, materials and equipment required for the

installation of basic materials and motors associated with plumbing systems.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit for approval in accordance with specified submittal procedures:

1. Access Panels

2. Fire Stop Sealing System

3. Pipe Penetration Seal

4. Equipment Nameplates; including itemized listing of nameplate equipment designations

5. Motors; submit with each piece of equipment

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCESS PANELS

A. Access Panel Specification No. 1

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Milcor Style AP for acoustical plaster, Style AT for acoustical

tile, or Karp, Krieger, Bilco.

2. Type: Acoustical ceiling.

3. Construction: 16 gage galvanized steel frame, 18 gage galvanized steel panel. Recessed

to accommodate acoustical ceiling tile. Continuous hinge, steel with stainless steel pin.

4. Closing Feature: Flush, screw driver operated lock with steel cam.

B. Access Panel Specification No. 2

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Milcor Style DW, or Karp, Krieger, Bilco.

2. Type: Gypsum wallboard.

3. Construction: 16 gage steel frame, 14 gage steel panel.

4. Concealed spring hinges. Prime coat finish for field painting.

5. Closing Feature: Flush, screwdriver operated lock with steel cam.

C. Access Panel Specification No. 3


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 220505 - 2

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Milcor, or Karp.

2. Type: Fire rated.


4. Continuous hinge with stainless steel pin. Automatic panel closer. Factory attached

masonry anchors.

5. Rating: UL listed 1 1/2 hour (B label), temperature rise 30 minutes, 250 degrees F.

maximum.

6. Closing Feature: Self latching lock, direct action knurled knob, interior latch release

mechanism.

D. Access Panel Specification No. 4

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Milcor Style M, or Karp, Krieger, Bilco.

2. Type: Masonry, tile, or wood.

3. Construction: 16 gage frame, 14 gage panel. Concealed spring hinges. Prime coat finish

for field painting or stainless steel, satin finish, as required.

4. Closing Feature: Flush screwdriver operated lock with steel cam.

2.2 FIRE STOP SEALING SYSTEM

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Nelson Firestop Products CLK Silicone Sealant, or 3M Fire

Protection Products, RectorSeal, Specified Technologies (STI), Tremco.

B. Materials: Single component, ready-to-use, water-resistant, flexible elastomeric silicone sealant.

Non-sag/gunnable grade for penetrations in vertical surfaces, self-leveling grade for floor

applications.

C. Compliance: Fire endurance tested per ASTM E-814 (UL 1479). In addition to compliance as a

fire stop, the cured sealing system shall not permit smoke or water penetration.

2.3 PIPE PENETRATION SEAL

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Thunderline Link Seal.

B. Seals shall be modular mechanical type, consisting of interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped

to continuously fill the annular space between the pipe and wall opening. Each link shall have a

bolt/pressure plate tightening assembly. Final installation shall be watertight and provide an

electrical insulation between pipe and wall sleeve/opening.

2.4 EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATES

A. Laminated phenolic, two outer layers of white phenolic and an inner layer of black with

engraving depth to the inner layer.

B. Nameplate and lettering suitably sized for their location, but not less than 1/4 inch high letters.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 220505 - 3

2.5 EQUIPMENT LOCATION LABELS

A. Equipment location labels shall be self-adhering, 3/4 inch diameter, gloss vinyl circles. Labels

shall be placed on the T-bar of the adjoining ceiling tile to be removed for access to item. Color-

coding of labels shall be as directed by Owner.

2.6 MOTORS

A. Motor Characteristics:

1. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 degrees C and at an altitude of 3300

feet above sea level.

2. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected

loads at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating

sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor.

Horsepower rating shall not be less than size indicated on Drawings.

B. Single Phase Motors:

1. Larger Than 1/20 HP: One of the following, to suit starting torque and requirements of

specific motor applications:

a. Permanent-split capacitor.

b. Split phase.

c. Capacitor start, inductor run.

d. Capacitor start, capacitor run.

2. Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded-pole type. Multispeed Motors: Variable-torque,

permanent-split-capacitor type.

3. Voltage: As indicated on Drawings.

4. Bearings: Prelubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings.

C. Thermal Protection: Internal, automatically reset.

2.7 PAINT

A. General

1. Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in "MPI Approved

Products List."

2. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another

and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by

manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

B. Color: As selected by Owner from manufacturer's full range and colors conforming with

ASME 13.1 for application(s) indicated below:

1. Natural Gas Piping: Yellow


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 220505 - 4

C. Steel Substrates: Quick-drying Enamel System MPI EXT 5.1A.

1. Prime Coat: Quick-Drying Alkyd Metal Primer: MPI #76.

2. Intermediate Coat: Quick-drying enamel matching topcoat.

3. Topcoat: Quick-drying enamel (high gloss): MPI #96 (Gloss Level 7).

D. Galvanized-metal Substrates: Latex System MPI EXT-5.3A

1. Prime Coat: Waterborne galvanized-metal primer.

2. Intermediate Coat: Latex matching topcoat.

3. Topcoat: Exterior Latex (Flat): MPI #10 (Gloss Level 1).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Access Panels

1. Furnish and install access panels in ceilings and walls for service and repair access to

concealed equipment, including, but not limited to:

a. Valves: hand operated and automatic

b. Backflow preventers

c. Gages and thermometers

d. Water hammer arresters

e. Pressure regulating/reducing valves

f. Expansion compensators

g. Calibrated balancing valves

h. Line pressure monitoring gages

2. Minimum Size: 18 inches by 18 inches. Where restrictions will not permit minimum size,

verify access panel size with Architect.

3. Provide access panels in accordance with the following schedule:

ACCESS PANEL SCHEDULE

Application Access Panel Spec. No.

Acoustical tile or acoustical plaster

finishes

1

Gypsum board (dry wall) finishes 2

Fire rated walls 3

Masonry, tile, or wood finishes 4

Plastered finishes 5

Kitchens and food service areas 4 (stainless)


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 220505 - 5

4. Access panel location(s) that are indicated on drawings are of a specific concern.

However, Contractor shall be responsible to furnish and install access panels as required,

whether noted on Drawings or required by this section.

B. Sleeves and Plates

1. Furnish and install sleeves for all pipes passing through floors, walls, partitions, slabs,

grade beams and foundations.

2. Layout, size, and locate sleeves such that they be set and installed prior to pouring

concrete, or when masonry is being constructed. In event sleeves must be placed after

floor, wall, grade beam, etc., has been constructed, submit in writing to and obtain

approval from Architect on location, quantity and proposed method of core drilling and

installing.

3. Core drilled openings above grade in solid concrete need not be sleeved but must be

clean and neat without cracking or spalling.

4. For pipes passing through floors, slabs, walls, grade beams, or foundations at or below

grade and in pits, install mechanical modular link pipe penetration seal where indicated

on the Drawings.

5. For pipes passing through walls and floors above grade and with no fire or smoke rating,

the annular space between outside of pipe or insulation and inside of sleeve or concrete

shall be packed tight with batt type fiberglass insulation.

6. For pipes passing through walls and floors above grade with smoke or fire rating of one

hour or more, the annular space between outside of pipe and insulation and inside of

sleeve or concrete shall be sealed with fire stop sealing system.

C. Fire Stop Sealing System

1. All floor and interior wall penetrations with smoke or fire rating of one hour or more

shall be sealed. Refer to architectural drawings for locations of fire rated floors and walls.

2. Prepare penetration and install sealing material in accordance with the manufacturer's

recommendations.

3. Through penetration fire stop sealing systems shall be identified on both sides with

permanently mounted, preprinted vinyl labels which include the following information:

a. The words “Warning: Through Penetration Firestop System – Do Not Disturb” or

similar phrase.

b. Manufacturer’s brand name, product type or catalog number

c. Testing agency designation and rating

d. Installer’s Name

e. Installation Date

D. Equipment Nameplates

1. Furnish and install a full complement of nameplates for all items of mechanical

equipment installed as Work of this Division, including water heaters, pumps, air

compressor and vacuum equipment, mixing valves still, and control panels.

2. Install nameplates parallel to equipment lines.

3. Unless noted, nameplates shall be attached with sheet metal screws or epoxy cement.

Epoxy cement shall not be used equipment installed outdoors.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 220505 - 6

4. Coordinate with Owner for nameplate designations. Submit a complete itemized listing of

nameplate equipment designations for approval.


Strada WVU Shroyer Hall Renovations Plumbing Pipe and Pipe Fittings

PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 220510 - 1

SECTION 220510 – PLUMBING PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED


installation of plumbing piping and pipe fittings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS

A. Pipe shall conform to the materials specified herein, and shall be installed for piping systems as

scheduled in Part 3 – Execution, of this Section.

2.2 TYPE L COPPER PIPE SPECIFICATION NO. 1

A. Design Pressure: 150 psig.

B. Maximum Design Temperature: 200 degrees F.

C. Sizes 2 inches and smaller:

1. Tubing: Type L hard drawn seamless copper tube, ASTM B88.

2. Joints: Solder type with 95-5 solder, or press coupled.

3. Fittings: Wrought copper solder joint, ANSI B16.22 or cast bronze solder joint, ANSI

B16.18, or with EPDM O-rings, ASME B16.18 or ASME B16.22.

D. Sizes 2 1/2 inches and larger:


2. Joints: Flanged and solder type with 95-5 solder, or press coupled.


B16.18, or wrought copper press coupled joint. ANSI B16.22.

4. Flanges: 150 lb. class cast bronze, ANSI B16.24.

2.3 SERVICE WEIGHT CAST IRON PIPE SPECIFICATION NO. 3

A. Approvals: Cast iron soil pipe and pipe fittings shall be marked with the collective trademark of

the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (CISPI) and shall be listed by NSF International.

B. Design Pressure: Gravity.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 220510 - 2

C. Maximum Design Temperature: 180 degrees F.

D. All Pipe Sizes:

1. Pipe & Fittings

a. Below Grade: Service weight cast iron soil pipe, tar coated inside and outside,

ASTM A74.

b. Above Grade: Hubless cast iron soil pipe, tar coated inside and outside, CISPI

Standard 301, ASTM A888.

2. Joints

a. Below Grade: Hub and spigot, compression.

b. Above Grade: Hubless.

3. Adapters: Transitions from cast iron soil pipe to another pipe material shall be made with

Fernco Joint Sealer Company PVC Donut adapters, or approved equal. Hubless

transitions shall be made with an approved, shielded coupling for the purpose and

material.

E. Vent Flashing: By General Contractor.

2.4 TYPE DWV COPPER PIPE SPECIFICATION NO. 4

A. Design Pressure: Gravity.


C. Sizes 1-1/4 inches through 4 inches:

1. Pipe: Type DWV hard temper seamless copper drainage tube, ASTM B306.

2. Joints: Solder. ASTM B32, Grade 50B.

3. Fittings: Cast bronze solder joint drainage type, ANSI B16.23 or wrought copper solder

joint drainage type, ANSI B16.29.

D. Vent Flashing: By General Contractor.

2.5 SCHEDULE 40 GALVANIZED STEEL PIPE SPECIFICATION NO. 5


B. All Sizes:

1. Pipe: Schedule 40 galvanized steel, threaded and coupled, ASTM A53.

2. Joints: Threaded, ASTM B16.3.

3. Fittings: Galvanized cast iron screwed drainage type, ANSI B16.4.

C. Vent Flashing: By General Contractor.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 220510 - 3

2.6 SCHEDULE 40 BLACK STEEL PIPE SPECIFICATION NO. 8



C. Sizes 2-1/2 inches and smaller:

1. Pipe: Schedule 40 black steel, threaded and coupled, ASTM A53.

2. Joints: Threaded. (Exception: All gas piping installed in steel conduits; all gas conduit

and conduit vent pipe; all black steel pipe installations below ground; shall be continuous

butt weld joints.)

3. Fittings: 150 lb (S) 300 lb (WOG) black malleable iron.

4. Unions: 250 lb (S) 500 lb (WOG) black malleable iron, ground joint with brass seat.

D. Sizes 3 inches and larger:

1. Pipe: Schedule 40 black steel, beveled ends, ASTM A53.

2. Joints: Butt welded and flanged.

3. Fittings: Schedule 40 seamless steel, butt weld type, ASTM A234.

4. Flanges: 150 lb forged steel, welding neck or slip on, ASTM A181 Class 60.

E. All piping installed below ground shall have factory applied coal tar coating. Below ground

joints shall have a field applied coal tar coating.

2.7 SCHEDULE 40 ACID RESISTANT PROXYLENE PIPE SPECIFICATION NO. 11



C. All Pipe Sizes:

1. Pipe & Fittings: Schedule 40, fire retardant, acid resistant proxylene. ASTM D2146.

2. Joints: Mechanically joined.

3. Fittings:

a. Acceptable Manufacturer: Orion Fittings, Inc.

b. Fire retardant Blue Line proxylene mechanically joined drainage fittings.

D. Pipe material shall conform with ASTM E-84 and UL 723 for flame and smoke spread ratings.

2.8 SCHEDULE 80 CPVC PIPE SPECIFICATION NO. 12




PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 220510 - 4


1. Pipe: Schedule 80, Class 4120, chlorinated polyvinyl chloride (CPVC). ASTM D2846

with NSF seal.

2. Fittings: Schedule 80 chlorinated polyvinyl chloride ASTM D2467 with NSF seal.

Socket, factory threaded or flanged solvent cement.

2.9 SCHEDULE 40 PVC PIPE SPECIFICATION NO. 13


B. Maximum Design Temperature: 140 degrees F. at continuous flow.

C. All Pipe Sizes:

1. Schedule 40, polyvinyl chloride (PVC), ASTM D2665 with NSF seal.

2. Fittings: Schedule 40, polyvinyl chloride, DWV pattern, ASTM D2665 with NSF seal.

D. Sizes: 2 inches and smaller:

1. Joints: Socket or factory threaded solvent cement ASTM D2564.

E. Sizes: 2-1/2 inches or larger:

1. Joints: Socket or flanged solvent cement ASTM D2564.

F. Vent Flashing: By General Contractor.

2.10 SCHEDULE 40 GALVANIZED STEEL PIPE SPECIFICATION NO. 15


B. Sizes 2 inches and smaller:

1. Pipe: Schedule 40 galvanized steel, threaded and coupled, ASTM A53.

2. Joints: Threaded.

3. Fittings: Galvanized cast iron screwed type, ASTM A126, ASTM A153.

C. Sizes 2-1/2 inches and larger:

1. Pipe: Schedule 40 galvanized steel, beveled ends, ASTM A53.


3. Fittings: Schedule 40 seamless steel, butt weld type, ASTM A234.

4. Flanges: 150 lb. forged steel, welding neck or slip on, ASTM A181 Class 60, ANSI

B16.5.

D. Special Installation Requirements:


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 220510 - 5

1. Where galvanizing has been burned off from welding, clean surfaces and paint with one

coat of rust inhibiting metal primer. When dry paint with one coat of oil base aluminum

enamel.

2. Where standard weight seamless steel butt weld fittings are used, clean surfaces and paint

with one coat of rust inhibiting metal primer. When dry paint with one coat of oil base

aluminum enamel.

2.11 PVC WATER PRESSURE PIPE SPECIFICATION NO. 18

A. Design Pressure: 160 psi maximum.

B. All Pipe Sizes:

1. Pipe & Fittings: Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) water pressure pipe, ASTM D2241 and SDR

26.

2. Joints: Push on type with elastomeric joint ASTM D3139 with PVC compound ASTM

D1784.

2.12 DUCTILE IRON PRESSURE PIPE SPECIFICATION NO. 19

A. Design Pressure: 350 psi maximum.

B. Sizes 4 inches and larger:

1. Pipe: Ductile iron pressure water pipe, thickness Class 51 for sizes 12 inches and smaller,

350 psi rated working pressure, in accordance with ANSI A21.50 and ANSI A21.51, tar

coated outside. Full lengths of pipe shall be utilized to the greatest extent possible.

2. Joints: Mechanical or push on joints.

3. Fittings: Push on joint or mechanical joint type shall be cast iron or ductile iron, 250 psi

pressure rating, in accordance with ANSI B21.10, tar coated outside.

C. Flanged type shall be cast iron or ductile iron, short body, 250 psi pressure rating in accordance

with ANSI A21.10, drilled and faced in accordance with ANSI B16.1, Class 125, tar coated

outside. Pipe penetrating building walls or pit walls shall be ductile iron, thickness Class 3, 250

psi working pressure, in accordance with ANSI A21.50 and ANSI A21.51, tar coated outside.

Pipe shall terminate approximately 12 inches on either side of wall with push on joint bell end

or mechanical joint bell end on outside and ductile iron flange on inside.

2.13 UNDERGROUND POLYETHYLENE NATURAL GAS PIPE SPECIFICATION NO. 23

A. Polyethylene Pipe: ASTM D2513, SDR11.5

1. Fittings: ASTM D2683 or ASTM D2513, socket type.

2. Joints: Fusion welded.

3. Manufacturer of pipe shall be approved by local gas company.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 220510 - 6

2.14 WARNING TAPE FOR BURIED UTILITIES

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Harris Industries, Griffolyn, Inc., Stanco, Inc.

B. Type: Detectable underground marker and warning tape, fully detectable using above grade

induction conduction type locaters. Consist of either aluminum foil or stainless steel tracer wires

laminated between multiple layers of polyethylene tape, overall thickness 4.5 to 6 mils.

C. Material: Red, plastic, 6 inches wide, black lettering. Letter shall be abrasion resistant,

subsurface to be protected from being scraped off and protected from underground moisture,

acids, alkalis and other soil substances.

D. Marking: CAUTION – BURIED WATER/FIRE/GAS/PROPANE LINE BELOW, or similar

wording.

E. Colors:

1. Yellow: For gas, oil, petroleum, other gaseous materials

2. Blue: Potable water

3. Purple: Reclaimed water, irrigation lines

4. Green: Sewers and drain lines

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Piping systems shall be installed in accordance with the following pipe schedule(s).

PIPE SCHEDULE*

Service Application Pipe Spec. No.

Dom. Cold Water Above Grade 1

Dom. Hot Water Above Grade 1

Dom. Hot Water

Recirculating

Above Grade 1

Dom. Water Pipe

Connections

to Boilers/Water Heaters

All 1

Sanitary Above Grade

Below Grade, within bldg.

3, 4, 13

Sanitary Vent Above Grade

Below Grade

3, 4, 13

3, 13

Storm Drainage Above Grade

Below Grade, within bldg.

3, 7, 13 or 16

3, 13


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 220510 - 7

PIPE SCHEDULE*


Pumped Storm Discharge Above Grade

Below Grade

15

18 or 19

Natural Gas Above Grade

Below Grade, beyond 5 ft.

from bldg.

8

23

Distilled Water All 12

Laboratory Gases All 1

Laboratory Vacuum All 1

Acid Waste All 11

* Where plastic piping is used, it shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to ensure

compatibility of the installed piping system with the building’s HVAC system. Where

plenum rated materials are required by any federal, state, or municipal authority’s

construction codes, plastic piping shall be covered in its entirety by an approved fire retardant

insulating material. Fire retardant insulating systems shall be certified to meet ASTM E-84

and UL 723 standards for flame spread and smoke generation. Fire retardant insulating

systems shall be approved by the Authority Having Jurisdiction prior to installation.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Contractor shall carefully follow the Drawings in laying out and installing his work and he shall

not deviate therefrom, except for structural or interior finish interferences, and then only upon

Architect's approval.

B. All pipe and fittings shall be carefully inspected for defects in workmanship prior to installation.

Any item found unsuitable, cracked, or otherwise defective shall be rejected and removed from

the jobsite. All pipe and fittings shall have factory applied markings, stampings, or nameplates

with sufficient data for identification to determine their conformance with specified

requirements.

C. Plastic piping shall be installed in strict accordance with pipe manufacturer's recommendations

and in accordance with the recommendations of the Plastic Pipe Institute. Protect plastic piping

from damage by adjacent sharp surfaces with rubber or plastic grommets or sleeves. Plastic

underground drainage piping shall be installed in accordance with ASTM D 2321.

D. During construction all openings in piping shall be kept closed except when actual work is

being performed on that item. Closures shall be plugs, caps, blind flanges, or other items

specifically intended for this purpose. Exercise all necessary care to prevent foreign objects

from entering material.

E. Run pipe lines straight and true, parallel to building lines with a minimum use of offsets and

couplings. Use full and double lengths of pipe wherever possible.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 220510 - 8

F. Changes in direction shall be made only with pipe bends or fittings. Changes in size shall be

made with fittings only. All fittings shall be of the long radius type, unless otherwise specified.

Changes in direction on drainage pipe systems shall be made with wye fittings, combination

wye and eighth bends, or one eighth bends. Offset in soil or waste pipes will not be permitted

where avoidable. Offsets shall be made with 45 degree bends or similar fittings.

G. Provide flanges or unions at all final connections to equipment, traps and valves to facilitate

dismantling.

H. Unless otherwise indicated, install all piping to pumps and other equipment at line size with

reduction in size being made only at inlet to pump or equipment connection.

I. All pipe shall be cut to exact measurement, and installed without springing or forcing. Particular

care shall be taken to avoid creating, even temporarily, undue loads, forces or strains on valves,

equipment or building elements with piping connections or piping supports.

J. Install bell and spigot pipe, such that spigot ends point in direction of flow.

K. Unless otherwise indicated, branch take offs shall be from top of mains or headers at either a 45

degree or 90 degree angle from the horizontal plane for air and gas lines, and from top, bottom

or side for liquids.

L. Underground pressure piping shall be provided with concrete anchors and thrust blocks at ends

of runs and changes in direction.

M. Pipe joints connecting dissimilar metals shall be insulating, dielectric connections. Copper

tubing shall be protected from electrolysis at contact points with ferrous metals, including

temporary methods of support, by use of insulating, non-conductive spacers such as rubber,

fiberglass or an approved equal. Pipe hangers for bare copper tubing shall be copper plated.

3.3 PIPE JOINTS

A. Heavy-duty No-hub Coupling: Heavy duty coupling shall conform to the requirements of

ASTM C1540 with AISI 304 stainless steel bi-directional corrugated shield with AISI 304

stainless steel clamps and screw housing. Gasket shall conform to ASTMC564.

B. Compression Joints, Hub and Spigot Soil Pipe: Joint shall be one piece double seal compression

type gasket made specifically for joining cast iron soil pipe. The gasket shall be neoprene

material, permitting joint to flex as much as 5 degrees without loss of seal. Gasket shall be extra

heavy conforming to ASTM C564 and ASTM C1563. Installation shall be in accordance with

manufacturer's published instructions.

C. Mechanical Joints: Joints shall conform to ANSI A21.11 Rubber Gasket Joints for Cast Iron

Pressure Pipe and Fittings. Gasket material shall be neoprene. The standard bolts and nuts of the

pipe manufacturer shall be used and shall be coated at the factory with rust preventive lubricant

after threading and tapping. Final tightening of bolts shall be with a torque wrench to insure

equal tension in all bolts.

D. Solder Joints: Make up joints with 95 percent tin and 5 percent antimony (95-5) solder

conforming to ASTM B32 Solder Metal, Grade 95TA. Cut copper tubing so ends are perfectly


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 220510 - 9

square and remove all burrs inside and outside. Thoroughly clean sockets of fittings and ends of

tubing to remove all oxide, dirt, and grease just prior to soldering. Apply flux evenly, but

sparingly, over all surfaces to be joined. Heat joints uniformly to proper soldering temperature

so solder will flow to all mated surfaces. Wipe excess solder, leaving a uniform fillet around

cup of fitting. Flux shall be non-acid type. Remove composition discs from solder end valves

during soldering.

E. Welded Joints: The welding of all pipe joints, both as to procedures and qualification of

welders, shall be in accordance with Section IX, ASME Boiler & Pressure Vessel Code, unless

mandatory local codes take precedence. Ends of pipe and fittings to be joined by butt welding

shall be beveled, cleaned to bare metal and internal diameters aligned before tack welding.

F. Threaded Joints: Pipe screw threads shall conform to ANSI B16.3, Malleable Iron Threaded

Fittings or ASTM B687, Brass, Copper, and Chromium Plated Pipe Nipples. Ream pipe ends

and remove all burrs and chips formed in cutting and threading. Protect plated pipe and brass

valve bodies from wrench marks when making up joint. Apply thread lubricant to male threads

only.

G. Flanged Joints: Steel pipe flanges shall conform to ANSI B16.5, Steel Pipe Flanges and Flanged

Fittings. Cast iron pipe flanges shall conform to ANSI B16.1, Cast Iron Flanges and Flanged

Fittings. Steel flanges shall be raised face except when bolted to flat cast iron flange. Bolting for

services up to 500 degrees F. shall be ASTM A307, Grade B with square head bolts and heavy

hexagonal nuts conforming to ANSI B18.2.1, Square and Hex Bolts and B18.2.2, Square and

Hex Nuts. Set flange bolts beyond finger tightness with an indicating torque wrench to insure

equal tension in all bolts. Tighten bolts such that those 180 degrees apart or directly opposite are

torqued in sequence. Gaskets for flat face flanges shall form to requirements for Group I

Gaskets in ANSI B16.5. Unless otherwise specified, gaskets shall be 3/32 inch thick.

H. Mechanical Joints: Mechanical joints in proxylene acid resisting drainage pipe shall be

assembled with a torque wrench as recommended by the manufacturer. Follow manufacturer's

instructions for handling.

I. Solvent Cement Joints: Socket joints in PVC, ABS, etc., pipe shall be made by using a

manufacturer's recommended solvent cement suitable for respective pipe (CPVC, PVC, ABS,

Schedule 40, Schedule 80) and conforming to ASTM D2564. Follow manufacturer's

instructions for handling and cementing procedures. Wipe off excess cement fillet around

socket. Do not move pipe while cement is setting.


Strada WVU Shroyer Hall Renovations Plumbing Piping Specialties

PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 220515 - 1

SECTION 220515 – PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. The Work of this Section shall consist of the labor, materials, and equipment required for the

installation of plumbing piping specialties.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


1. Strainers

2. Branch Connections

3. Pipe & Valve Identification

4. Expansion Compensators, Pipe Guides, Anchors

5. Flexible Pipe Connectors

6. Dielectric Connections

7. Thermometers

8. Pressure Gages

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 BRANCH CONNECTIONS

A. Branch connections shall be made with standard tee of the type required for the service unless

otherwise specified or detailed.

B. At Contractor's option, branch connections from headers and mains may be cut into black steel

pipe using forged weld on fittings. Weld on fittings shall conform to chemical and physical

requirements of ASTM A 234 and design and installation requirements of ANSI B31.1.

C. Weld on fittings shall have a pressure rating equal to, or greater than, the maximum working

pressure of the pipe system where they are installed.

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Allied Piping Products Co. Branchlets (Shaped nipples), or

Bonney Forge Weldolet & Threadolet

D. At Contractor's option, branch connections from headers and mains may be cut into copper to be

using mechanically extracted collars. Collars shall be formed in a continuous operation

consisting of drilling a pilot hole and drawing out the tube surface to form a collar having a

height of not less than three times the thickness of the tube wall. Main pipe shall be vacuumed


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 220515 - 2

to clear all debris during collar forming procedure. Branch pipe shall be notched to conform

with the inner curve of the run tube and dimpled to insure penetration of the branch pipe into the

collar at sufficient depth for brazing. All joints shall be brazed. Mechanical formed branch

collars shall be UL listed.

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: T Drill, Division of Serlachius.

2.2 ESCUTCHEON PLATES

A. Plates shall be installed on all pipes and conduit passing through floors, walls, partitions, etc., in

exposed areas.

B. Plates installed on pipe passing through core drilled openings in solid concrete without sleeves

shall be solid ring, cast iron with one set screw for sizes up to 4 inches and two set screws for

sizes up to 8 inches.

C. Plates installed on pipe and conduit passing through openings with sleeves shall be solid ring,

cast iron.

2.3 PIPE AND VALVE IDENTIFICATION

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: W. H. Brady Company, or Seton Nameplate Corp., Brimar

Industries.

B. Shutoff valves and control equipment shall be marked by means of a brass or plastic disc

minimum of 1 inch in diameter fastened to valve wheel or stem by brass wire or chain. Each

disc shall have a legibly marked identification number. A typewritten chart listing all valve tags,

location, and service shall be included in the operating and maintenance manual. The valve

chart numbering sequence shall be approved by Owner.

C. All piping installed as Work of this Division shall be identified by legend and flow arrow.

Identification system shall conform to ANSI A13.1. Identification markers shall use ANSI

standard background colors and text size. Markers shall be attached to pipe by wrapping with

color coded banding tape. Markers shall be located as follows:

1. Near each valve and control device.

2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units.

Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.

3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and non-accessible enclosures.

4. At access doors, manhole, and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping.

5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.

6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 25 feet along each run.

2.4 EXPANSION COMPENSATORS, GUIDES, ANCHORS

A. Expansion Compensator Type EXC-2

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Flexonics, or Keflex, Metraflex, Hyspan.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 220515 - 3

2. Compensators shall be suitable for absorbing expansion and contraction in copper pipe 3

inches and smaller. Compensators shall be constructed with two ply phosphor bronze or

stainless steel bellows, brass shroud, and threaded end fittings.

3. Units shall have internal guides, internal anti torque device, positioning clip, 150 psi

maximum working pressure up to 1 inch pipe size, 125 psi over 1 inch pipe size, 400

degrees F maximum operating temperature, and 2 inch stroke.

B. Expansion Compensator Type EXC-3

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Flexonics, or Keflex, Metraflex, Hyspan.

2. Compensators shall be suitable for absorbing expansion and contraction in copper pipe 2

inches and smaller. Compensators shall be constructed with two ply phosphor bronze or

stainless steel bellows, brass shroud, and solder joint end fittings, 70 psi maximum

working pressure, and 3/4 inch stroke.

C. Expansion Compensator Type EXC-4

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Flexonics, or Hyspan.

2. Compensators shall be suitable for absorbing expansion and contraction in piping 3

inches and larger. Compensators shall be constructed of corrugated stainless steel bellows

with mated neck rings and flanged or welded end fittings and a maximum working

pressure of 50 psi, and a maximum operating temperature of 850 degrees F. Stroke as

listed on Drawings.

D. Expansion Compensator Type EXC-5

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Flexonics, Metraflex, Hyspan.

2. Compensators shall be suitable for absorbing expansion and contraction in piping 3 inch

and larger. Compensators shall be constructed of corrugated stainless steel bellows with

mated neck rings, reinforcing or control rings, and flanged or welded end fittings,

maximum working pressure of 300 psi, and a maximum operating temperature of 850

degrees F. (welded end fitting, 800 degrees F. flanged end fitting). Stroke as listed on

Drawings.

E. Provide dielectric flanges where compensators are used with copper pipe.

F. Pipe Guides

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Flexonics Pipe Alignment Guides, or Keflex, Metraflex,

Hyspan.

2. Pipe guides shall be installed as scheduled on the Drawings in accordance with

manufacturer's recommendations. Guides shall consist of steel segmented spider, sized to

the OD of the pipe, and free to move axially in a segmented steel cylinder. Guides shall

be securely attached to the building structure.

G. Pipe Anchors

1. Anchors shall be installed in accordance with pipe guide manufacturer's and expansion

compensator manufacturer's recommendations. Anchors shall securely attach the piping

system to the building structure.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 220515 - 4

2.5 DIELECTRIC CONNECTIONS

A. Pipe joints connecting dissimilar metals shall be insulating, dielectric connections. Dielectric

connections shall also be furnished for joining similar metals in order to isolate cathodically

protected pipelines from adjoining pipe sections. Such joints, including dielectric material, shall

be rated to withstand the temperature, pressure, and other characteristics of the service for

which it is to be used, including testing pressure.

B. Screwed joints shall be made with insulating [unions] [waterways].

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Victaulic Clearflow Dielectric Waterways.

C. Flanged joints shall be made up with insulating gaskets, bolt sleeves, and washers.

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Watts.

2.6 THERMOMETERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Trerice, or Weiss, Miljoco.

B. Thermometers shall be installed where indicated on the Drawings. Thermometers shall be 9

inch scale with 9 3/4 inch cast aluminum case, acrylic window, liquid-filled, and separable

socket. Socket shall be installed in path of water flow. Indication of operating temperature shall

read in middle third of scale. Thermometers installed 7 feet or more above floor shall be

adjustable type.

2.7 PRESSURE GAGES

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Trerice, or Weiss, Miljoco.

B. Pressure gages shall be installed where indicated on the Drawings. Gage shall have a 4 inch

diameter dial with indication of operating pressure read in middle third of scale. Gages shall

have phosphor bronze tube, bronze brushed movement, cast aluminum case with black finish,

and an accuracy of 1 percent of scale range. Pressure gage shall be provided with pigtail and

stop, and shall be installed vertically.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Contractor shall carefully follow the Drawings in laying out and installing his work. He shall



B. All equipment and accessories shall be carefully inspected for defects in workmanship prior to

installation. Any item found unsuitable, cracked, or otherwise defective shall be rejected and

removed from the jobsite. All equipment shall have factory applied markings, stampings, or

nameplates with sufficient data for identification to determine their conformance with specified

requirements.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 220515 - 5

C. Piping specialties shall be installed in accordance with the equipment manufacturer's

recommendations. A manufacturer's representative shall certify, in writing, any equipment

installation requested by Architect.

D. During construction all openings in equipment shall be kept closed except when actual work is




E. Provide flanges or unions at all final connections to equipment and traps to facilitate

dismantling.

F. Unless otherwise indicated, install all strainers to pumps, and other equipment at line size with

reduction in size being made only at inlet to or pump.

G. Unless otherwise indicated, branch take offs shall be from top of mains or headers at either a 45

degree or 90 degree angle from the horizontal plane for air, or gas lines and from top, bottom, or

side for liquids.

H. Pipe joints connecting dissimilar metals shall be insulating dielectric connections. Copper


temporary methods of support, by use of insulating non-conductive spacers such as rubber,

fiberglass, or an approved equal. Pipe hangers for bare copper tubing shall be copper plated.


Strada WVU Shroyer Hall Renovations Plumbing Specialties

PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 220520 - 1

SECTION 220520 – PLUMBING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED


installation of the domestic water systems and associated specialties.

B. Domestic water supply shall be extended from existing system. Contractor shall notify water

company and pay costs associated with same.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


1. Hydrants

2. Hose Bibbs

3. Water Hammer Arresters

4. Pressure Reducing Valves

5. Thermostatic Mixing Valves

6. Temperature-Pressure Relief Valves

7. Backflow Preventers

8. Solenoid Valves

9. Calibrated Balancing Valves

10. Balancing Report (refer to Part 3 – Execution)

B. Submit written verification of testing procedures specified herein.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 HYDRANTS

A. Wall Hydrant WH-1

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: J. R. Smith, or Zurn, Wade.

2. Type: Non-freeze.

3. Materials

a. Casing: Bronze or brass.

b. Cover: Hinged, locking; nickel bronze[, stainless steel].

4. Key: T-handle.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 220520 - 2

5. Inlet: 3/4 inch IPS.

6. Box: Nickel bronze,[ stainless steel, ]deep for vacuum breaker.

7. Vacuum Breaker: Integral feature.

2.2 HOSE BIBBS

A. Hose Bibb HB-1

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Chicago 13T.

2. Type: Interior.

3. Casing: Rough Brass.

4. Outlet: 3/4 inch hose thread.

5. Inlet: Flanged 1/2 inch female.

6. Vacuum Breaker: Watts No. 8A non-removable, or Chicago, T & S Brass.

2.3 WATER HAMMER ARRESTERS

A. Water Hammer Arrester for Standard Plumbing Fixtures

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: J. R. Smith Hydrotrol, or Zurn, Wade, Watts, Josam.

2. Type: Bellows surrounded by hydraulic fluid and nitrogen or argon pressurized chamber

or pre-pressurized tank with butyl diaphragm that separates air and water or free turning

brass piston with 0-ring seals that separates air and water.

3. Material: Stainless steel or steel tank with polypropylene liner surge chamber, or barrel

fabricated of type K hard drawn copper.

4. Location: Noted on Drawings.

2.4 PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Cash-Acme, or Watts.

B. Material

1. Body: Bronze.

2. Body Seat: Stainless steel.

3. Diaphragm: Neoprene or high temperature resisting.

4. Integral Strainer: Brass, stainless steel or Monel.

C. Initial Pressure: 250 psi (maximum).

2.5 THERMOSTATIC MIXING VALVE

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Powers Hydroguard, or Symmons.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 220520 - 3

B. Features: Tamperproof temperature adjustment control, union inlets, combination strainer-

check-stops, built-in shutoff in the event of hot or cold water supply failure, or thermostatic

element failure.

C. Components: Factory assembled.

2.6 TEMPERATURE-PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Watts.

B. Construction: Bronze body. ASME rated, AGA certified. Non-mechanical seat-to-disc

alignment.

2.7 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS

A. Reduced Pressure Backflow Preventer

1. Sizes 1/2 inch through 2 inches

a. Acceptable Manufacturer: Watts, Zurn, or Ames.

b. Components: Two independently acting spring loaded toggle lever check valves

with automatically operating pressure differential relief valve, two shutoff valves,

and four test cocks, arranged so each check valve can be tested. Furnish and install

with OS&Y shutoff valves in lieu of standard shutoffs where tamper switches are

shown to be installed for partial sprinkler systems.

c. All materials shall be corrosion resistant. Ferrous metal surfaces shall be protected

against corrosion by epoxy coating.

d. Accessories: Air gap fitting.

e. Maximum Working Pressure: 175 psi.

2. Sizes 2-1/2 inches through 6 inches

a. Acceptable Manufacturer: Watts Series, Zurn, or Ames, no substitutions.

b. Components: Two independently acting spring loaded toggle lever check valves

with automatically operating pressure differential relief valve, two OS&Y gate

valves, and four test cocks, arranged so each check valve can be tested.

c. All materials shall be corrosion resistant. Ferrous metal surfaces shall be protected

against corrosion by epoxy coating.

d. Accessories: Air gap fitting.

e. Maximum Working Pressure: 175 psi.

B. Processor Backflow Preventer


2. Type: Complete with brass body and stainless steel working parts throughout, primary

and secondary check valves, integral strainer and intermediate atmospheric vent.

Certified and listed by ASSE 1012.

2.8 CALIBRATED BALANCING VALVES

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Bell & Gossett Model CB, or Taco.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 220520 - 4

B. Construction: Bronze body with threaded ends, brass ball construction with glass and carbon

filled TFE seat rings.

C. Standard Features: Differential pressure readout ports across valve seat area. Readout ports to

be fitted with internal EPT inserts and check valves. Valve body provided with 1/4 inch NPT

tapped drain purge port. Valve furnished with calibrated nameplate indicating specific valve

setting. Valve shall be rated for 300 psig at 250 degrees F.

D. Line size(s) indicated on drawings does not necessarily indicate required size for calibrated

balancing valves. Contractor shall be responsible to select appropriate valve size according to

flow characteristics.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install plumbing specialties in accordance with equipment manufacturer’s recommendations.

Submit manufacturer’s printed installation instructions, operating and maintenance data, and

wiring diagrams for all electric powered equipment at completion of Work.

B. Connections to fixtures and equipment shall be according to manufacturer’s recommendations.

Piping runs shall be made in a manner to insure easy and even flow, eliminate air pockets, and

to permit drainage and venting. Provide 6 inch (minimum) separation between hot and cold

water piping.

C. Mains and principle branches shall be valved for isolation and shall have drain valves installed

at low points for system draining.

D. Rough-in and make final connections to laboratory equipment. Verify all locations for

roughing-in with equipment supplier prior to start of Work.

E. Furnish and install proper plastic-to-copper adapters for all plumbing fixture supplies.

F. Domestic hot and cold water piping systems shall be disinfected prior to use. Method to be used

shall be that method prescribed by local codes, or, if method is not prescribed by local code, the

International Plumbing Code (latest edition) method should be followed. For plastic water

piping systems verify with plastic pipe manufacturer that disinfection solution to be used will

not harm piping system.

G. Piping systems traced with electric heating cable shall be labeled ELECTRIC TRACED on

exterior of piping insulation. Refer to pipe identification, Section 22 05 15, Plumbing Piping

Specialties.

H. Thermostatic mixing valves shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s piping

installation diagram(s) and referenced details.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 220520 - 5

3.2 TESTING AND BALANCING

A. Water Lines: Test water lines in accordance with local codes. If method is not prescribed by

local codes, the International Plumbing Code (latest edition) method shall be followed.

B. Valves: Test valve bonnets for tightness. Test-operate valves at least one time from closed-to-

open-to-closed positions while valve is under pressure. Test automatic valves for proper

operation at settings indicated. Test pressure relief valves minimum of three times.

C. Other Tests: Test all piping specialties for proper operation.

D. Balancing of Domestic Hot Water Circulation System.

1. Balance flow for each calibrated balancing valve indicated on drawings.

2. Submit a tabulated report including each calibrated balancing valve and corresponding

valve size, valve dial setting, corresponding pressure drop, and flow rate.

3. Report shall include the associated nomenclature room name or other identifying

nomenclature so that each calibrated balancing valve can be identified.

4. Example balancing report:

Valve

(Location/Description)

Installed

Size

Valve Dial

Setting ΔP

Flow Rate

Design Actual


Strada WVU Shroyer Hall Renovations Plumbing Valves

PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 220525 - 1

SECTION 220525 – PLUMBING VALVES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED


installation of plumbing valves.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


1. Valves

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 VALVES

A. Furnish and install valves as specified herein and as scheduled in Part 3 - Execution, of this

Section. Insofar as possible all valves shall be of a single manufacturer.

B. Packings, gaskets, discs, seats, diaphragms, lubricants, etc., shall conform to recommendations

of the valve manufacturer for the intended service.

C. If space permits, install valves with stems horizontal or extending vertically upward unless

specifically shown otherwise. Valves shall be installed in accessible locations for operation as

well as for removal, repair, or replacement.

D. Valves installed in Insulated Piping: With stem or neck extensions of sufficient length to

accommodate insulation thickness and the following features:

1. Gate Valves: With rising stem.

2. Ball Valves: With extended operating handle of non-thermal-conductive material, and

protective sleeve that allows operation of valve without breaking the vapor seal or

disturbing insulation.

3. Butterfly Valves: With extended neck.

E. Provide Owner with one operating wrench for every ten (10) valves of each type (but not less

than 2 wrenches) not equipped with handwheels or levers.

F. Valves shall conform to the following schedules:


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 220525 - 2

BALL VALVE SPECIFICATIONS

Type Size Press.

psig

Description Acceptable

Manufacturer

BA-1 thru 2" 150S

400WOG

NSF approved for potable

water;

Threaded ends;

Bronze, 3 piece breakdown

style body;

Stainless steel ball;

Teflon seats

Anvil International

Apollo

Nibco

BA-3 thru 2" 150S

400WOG

NSF/AWWA approved for

potable water;

Socket ends;

Chlorinated polyvinyl

chloride (CPVC) body;

Ball Teflon seats AO@ ring

seals;

Teflon seats;

True union;

Full port design

Nibco

R.G. Sloane

BA-5 2" thru 8” 200WC

200

degrees F.

NSF approved for potable

water;

Flanged ends;

Epoxy coated A126 Class B

iron body;

Teflon-fused solid ball;

Full port;

100 percent lead free

American Valve

BA-7 1/2" &

3/4"

5 psig Threaded ends;

Bronze body;

Two piece body, full port

chrome plated brass ball

Apollo CB-10

Nibco GB

BA-8 1" thru 2" 5 psig Threaded ends;

Bronze body;

Full port chrome plated brass

ball

Nibco T-FP600

Jomar JMT-100


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 220525 - 3

CHECK VALVE SPECIFICATIONS

Type Size Press.

psig


Manufacturer

CK-1 thru 2" 150S Threaded ends;

Bronze body;

Regrinding swing type

Crane

Nibco

Hammond

Anvil International

Milwaukee

CK-2 thru 2" 125S

200WOG

Soldered ends;

Bronze body;

Renewable bronze

disc swing type

Crane

Nibco

Hammond

Anvil International

Milwaukee

CK-3 2-1/2"

thru

12"

125S

200WOG

Flanged ends;

Iron body;

Bronze trim;

Bronze disc swing type

Crane

Nibco

Hammond

Anvil International

Milwaukee

CK-4 2-1/2"

& over

125S

200WOG

Flanged ends;

Iron body;

Bronze trim;

Horizontal swing with

weight and lever

Crane

Nibco

Stockham

Walworth

GATE VALVE SPECIFICATIONS

Type Size Press.

psig


Manufacturer

GA-1 thru 2" 125S

200WOG

Threaded ends;

Bronze body;

Rising stem;

Solid wedge disc

Crane

Anvil International

Hammond

Stockham

Milwaukee

PLUG VALVE SPECIFICATIONS

Type Size Press.

psig


Manufacturer

PL-1 thru 2" 200WOG Threaded ends;

Cast iron body;

Lubricated plug;

Wrench operated

Walworth


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 220525 - 4

PLUG VALVE SPECIFICATIONS

Type Size Press.

psig


Manufacturer

PL-2 2-1/2"

thru 10"

200WOG Flanged ends;

Cast iron body;

Lubricated plug;

4" & under: wrench

operated;

over 4": worm gear

operated

Walworth

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Valves shall be installed in accordance with the following valve schedule:

VALVE SCHEDULE

Piping System

Valve Service

Shut-off Balancing Check

Domestic Water, Copper:

Cold, Hot, Hot Recirc.,

Make-up

BA-1, BA-5

n/a CK-2, CK-3

Distilled Water BA-3 BA-3 CK-2

Pumped Storm GA-1, GA-2 n/a CK-1, CK-4

Natural Gas BA-7, BA-8, PL-1,

PL-2

n/a n/a

Compressed Air BA-1 n/a n/a

3.2 INSTALLATION




B. All valves shall be carefully inspected for defects in workmanship prior to installation. Any

item found unsuitable, cracked, or otherwise defective shall be rejected and removed from the

job site. All valves shall have factory applied markings, stampings, or nameplates with

sufficient data for identification to determine their conformance with specified requirements.

C. Provide flanges or unions at all final connections to valves to facilitate dismantling.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 220525 - 5

D. Unless otherwise indicated, install all shutoff valves to pumps and other equipment at line size

with reduction in size being made only at inlet to pump or other equipment.


Strada WVU Shroyer Hall Renovations Plumbing Supports and Anchors

PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 220530 - 1

SECTION 220530 – PLUMBING SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED


installation of plumbing supporting devices.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


1. Roof Piping Supports

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 HANGERS – INSULATED PIPING

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Anvil International, or Penn Pipe Hanger.

B. Hangers used with insulated piping shall be sized to accommodate the pipe, and insulation and

shall have a support shield to prevent the hanger from compressing the insulation. Hanger shall

be clevis type with rod and two nuts or bolt and nut.

2.2 HANGERS – UNINSULATED PIPING


B. Hangers for uninsulated ferrous pipe shall be clevis type with rod and two nuts or bolt and nut.

Hangers for uninsulated copper pipe shall be clevis type with bolt and nut and shall be copper

plated.

2.3 INSERTS – PRECAST OR CURED CONCRETE

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Hilti HSL.

B. A high integrity, torque controlled anchor for heavy duty fastenings. Loads shall not exceed

manufacturer's recommended weight.

2.4 BEAM CLAMPS

A. For pipe sizes of 3 inches and smaller:


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 220530 - 2

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Anvil International, or Penn Pipe Hanger.

2. Clamps for attachment to I beams and/or steel joists shall be malleable iron C clamp with

hardened steel cup and point set screw and locknut.

B. For pipe sizes of 4 inches and larger:

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Anvil International.

2. Clamps for attachment to I beams and/or steel joists shall be adjustable type with

malleable iron jaw, steel tie rod, nuts, and washer.

2.5 PIPE RISER CLAMPS


B. Pipe riser clamps for both insulated and uninsulated vertical pipe risers shall be 2 piece clamp

complete with 2 bolts and 2 nuts, sized for the outside diameter of the bare pipe to be supported.

Clamp shall be carbon steel construction with galvanized finish for ferrous pipe and copper

plated for copper pipe.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. The requirements of the applicable Sections of ANSI B31, Pressure Piping shall be considered

as minimum requirements governing fabrication, installation, and support of piping systems

except where more specific or stringent requirements are stated herein or shown on the

Drawings.

B. All piping and piping connected equipment, including valves, strainers, traps, and other

specialties and accessories shall be supported in a manner that will not result in excessive stress,

deflection, swaying, sagging or vibration in the piping or in the building structure either during

erection, cleaning, testing, or normal operation of the systems. Piping shall not be so restrained,

however, as to cause it to snake or buckle between supports or anchors, or to prevent proper

movement due to expansion and contraction. Piping shall be supported at equipment and valves

such that they can be disconnected and removed without further supporting the piping. Piping

shall not introduce any strains or distortion to the connected equipment.

C. Hangers, riser clamps, and supports shall be installed complete, including locknuts, clamps,

rods, bolts, couplings, swivels, inserts, and required accessory items. Hangers for horizontal

piping shall have adequate means of vertical adjustment for proper alignment of pipe, and shall

be provided with locknuts. All hangers, riser clamps, and supports in direct contact with copper

piping shall be copper plated or plastic coated.

D. Maximum spacing of supports for horizontal piping, except plastic piping, shall be as listed

below. Provide hanger rods in diameters recommended by hanger manufacturer.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 220530 - 3

Pipe

Size

Uninsulated

Steel

Insulated

Steel

Copper

Tubing

Cast

Iron

1/2" 7' 7' 5' -

3/4" 7' 7' 5' -

1" 7' 7' 5' -

1-1/4" 7' 7' 6' -

1-1/2" 9' 9' 8' -

2" 10' 10' 8' 5'

2-1/2" 11' 10' 9' 5'

3" 12' 10' 10' 5'

4" 12' 10' 10' 5'

5" 12' 10' 10' 5'

6" 12' 10' 10' 5'

8" 12' 10' 10' 5'

E. Maximum spacing of supports for horizontal CPVC piping in distilled water systems shall be as

listed below. All pipe shall be insulated. Provide hanger rods in diameters recommended by

hanger manufacturer.

Pipe

Size

Cold

Water

Hot Water

Recirc.

Shield

Length

1/2" 3' 2' 12"

3/4" 3' 3' 12"

1" 3' 3' 12"

1-1/4" 3' 3' 12"

1-1/2" 3' 3' 12"

2" 3' 3' 12"

F. Provide additional supports where pipe changes direction, adjacent to flanged valves and

strainers, at equipment connections and heavy fittings. Provide at least one hanger adjacent to

each joint in cast iron soil pipe and grooved end steel pipe with mechanical couplings. Unless

otherwise indicated on the Drawings, support vertical pipe with riser clamps installed below

hubs, couplings or lugs welded to the pipe.

G. Refer to Section 226020, Special Piping Systems for maximum spacing of supports for acid

waste piping.

H. Inserts for supports in precast concrete slabs shall be drilled with rotary electric drill.

I. Beam clamps shall be used to attach hanger rods to structural steel.


Strada WVU Shroyer Hall Renovations Plumbing Insulation

PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 220710 - 1

SECTION 220710 – PLUMBING INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED


insulating plumbing piping and equipment.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


1. Insulation Materials, including application thicknesses

2. Sealants, Adhesives, Coatings

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FIBERGLASS PIPE INSULATION SPECIFICATION NO. 1

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Johns Manville Micro Lok, or Owens Corning Fiberglas SSL II/ASJ.

B. Material: Fiberglass pipe insulation with all purpose vapor barrier jacket for indoor installations.

C. Properties

1. Maximum K Factor: 0.23 at 75 degrees F. mean.

2. Temperature Range: 0 degrees F. to 850 degrees F.

3. Fire Hazard: FHC 25/50 per ASTM E 84 and UL 723.

4. For use on pipe sizes 1/2 inch to 12 inches

D. Seams and Joints: Self-sealing (pressure sensitive) lap seams and matching butt strips.

E. Fittings

1. Fiberglass batt inserts with premolded PVC jacket:

a. Acceptable Manufacturer: Johns Manville Zeston 2000 PVC, or Foster Speed Line,

Proto.

b. Properties: 0.28 max. K at 75 degrees F. mean, 0 degrees F. to 450 degrees F.

temperature range, FHC 25/50 fire hazard per ASTM E 84.

2. Fitting insulation shall be same thickness as adjacent insulation.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 220710 - 2

2.2 FIBERGLASS BOARD/SHEET INSULATION SPECIFICATION NO. 5

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Manville Spin Glas, or Owens Corning 700 Series Fiberglas, Certain

Teed CB 600.

B. Material: Flexible or non-flexible fiberglass board or sheet with all purpose vapor barrier jacket.

C. Properties


2. Density: 6 pcf.

3. Temperature Rating: 0 degrees F. to 450 degrees F.

4. Compliance: ASTM E84, 25 flame/50 smoke.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Insulation shall be installed in accordance with the following insulation schedule(s). (Where

more than one insulation type is scheduled, Contractor shall have the option of choosing from

types listed.)

PIPE INSULATION SCHEDULE

Service

Temp.

Range

Deg. F

Insul.

Spec.

No.

Minimum Pipe Insulation Thickness

Runouts Mains

to 2” to 1”

1-1/4”

to 2”

2-1/2”

to 4”

5” &

larger

Dom Cold

Water 50-65

1 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2

Dom. Hot

Water 100-139

1 1 1 1 1 1

Dom. Hot

Water

Recirculating

100-139

1

2

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

Dom Make-

up Water 50-65

1 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2

Horiz.

Rain Water

Conductors

---

1 N/A N/A N/A 1/2 1/2

EQUIPMENT INSULATION SCHEDULE

Equipment Insulation Spec. No. Thickness, Inches

Roof Drain Body 4 1/2


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 220710 - 3

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General

1. Surface areas of all pipe to be insulated shall be clean and dry. Insulation shall not be

installed until all tests and inspections of the specific system(s) are complete.

2. All pipe insulation shall be continuous through wall and ceiling/floor penetrations except

where specific sealing requirements are specified, i.e. fire rated separations.

3. Insulate all components in piping systems, including valve bodies, hangers, guides,

anchors, and pump housings. Do not insulate strainers, flexible connectors, or expansion

compensators in hot water systems. Maintain access to all servicing points and nameplate

data.

4. Insulation on all cold surfaces shall provide a continuous unbroken vapor seal.

5. Provide shields at all pipe hangers where protection saddles are not installed on pipes.

Shields shall be galvanized sheet metal, formed to fit insulated pipe outside diameter, and

shall extend up to the pipe centerline. Shield lengths shall be as follows:

Pipe Sizes, Inches Shield Length, Inches

1-1/2 to 2-1/2 10

3 to 6 12

8 to 10 16

12 and over 22

6. Insulation installed on plastic piping shall be installed with provisions for pipe expansion,

without effect on insulation.

7. Adhesives, mastics, sealers, and coatings shall be applied at manufacturer's required

ambient conditions and recommended minimum coverage.

B. Fiberglass Pipe Insulation

1. All piping shall be cleaned of debris prior to installation of insulation and components.

Joints shall be butted firmly together. Longitudinal laps and butt strips shall be securely

fastened as recommended by the manufacturer.

2. Fittings, insulated with fiberglass blanket and PVC jacket shall be installed in accordance

with insulation manufacturer's instructions. All butt joints between longitudinal pipe

insulation and fittings shall be taped.

3. All elbows, fittings, and valves on below-ambient piping shall be vapor-sealed with vapor

barrier coating and reinforcing mesh.

C. Fiberglass Board/Sheet Insulation

1. Insulation board/sheet shall be installed by means of weld pins or stick clips. Pins/clips

shall be located a maximum of 3 inches from all leading edges and a minimum of 12

inches on center for remainder of surface area.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 220710 - 4

2. Removable heads, cover plates, manholes, etc., shall be separately covered with unfaced

board/sheet with 1/2 inch insulating cement finish, leaving bolts and nuts accessible.

Leave nameplates visible.


Strada WVU Shroyer Hall Renovations Plumbing Pumps

PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 221110 - 1

SECTION 221110 – PLUMBING PUMPS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED


installation of plumbing pumps.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 220505, Plumbing Basic Materials: Equipment nameplates and motors.

B. Section 239010, Building Automation System: Controls.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


1. Pumps

2. Pump Controllers

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INLINE CIRCULATOR PUMP

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Bell & Gossett, or Taco, Armstrong.

B. Pump and Motor Assembly: Hermetically sealed with motor and impeller on common shaft and

designed for installation with pump and motor shaft horizontal.

C. Casing: Bronze, with threaded or companion-flange connections, rated for a minimum of 150

psi working pressure, equipped with gage parts and suitable for operation at 225 degrees F.

D. Impeller: Plastic.

E. Motor: Single speed, unless otherwise indicated. Refer to Section 22 05 05.

Strada WVU Shroyer Hall Renovations Plumbing Pumps

PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 221110 - 2

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Inline pumps shall be installed with valves, and gages as detailed on the Drawings. Provide

flanges or unions at all pump connections to facilitate dismantling.

B. Diagrammatic representation of inline pumps on the Drawings is only for clarification of pump

location. Actual positioning of pump in the piping system, orientation of pump and motor, and

location of supports for pumps shall be in accordance with pump manufacturer's

recommendations.

C. Contractor shall carefully follow the Drawings in laying out and installing his work and he shall



D. All pumps and accessories shall be carefully inspected for defects in workmanship prior to


removed from the jobsite. All pumps shall have factory applied markings, stampings, or


requirements.

E. During construction all openings in pumps shall be kept closed except when actual work is





Strada WVU Shroyer Hall Renovations Sanitary Drainage

PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 221310 - 1

SECTION 221310 – SANITARY DRAINAGE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED


installation of the sanitary drainage system.

B. Sanitary drainage shall be collected as indicated and connected to the existing drainage system.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


1. Cleanouts

2. Floor Drains

3. Drain Traps

4. Trap Guard Device

5. Funnels

6. Air Gap Fitting


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CLEANOUTS

A. Wall Cleanouts

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: J.R. Smith Fig. 4422, or Zurn, Watts, Wade, Josam.

2. Size: Cleanouts shall be full size of pipe to 4 inch and not less than 4 inch for larger pipe

sizes.

3. Plug: Bronze with tapered threads or with lead seal.

4. Cover: Stainless steel shallow cover secured to plug with vandalproof screws.

B. Exterior Cleanouts

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: J.R. Smith Fig. 4251 U, or Zurn, Watts, Wade, Josam.

2. Size: Cleanouts shall consist of wye fitting, full size of pipe to 4 inch and not less than 4

inch for larger pipe sizes.

3. Plug: Bronze, countersunk, rectangular slotted, with emulsified lead paste.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 221310 - 2

4. Cover: Cast iron, non-skid, vandalproof, gasketed, watertight secured independently of

plug.

5. Anchoring: 6 inch of concrete shall be poured around wye fitting, cleanout pipe and

cleanout cover frame. Concrete shall terminate 6 inch below grade.

C. Floor Cleanouts, For Finished Floors




3. Plug: Bronze, countersunk, rectangular slotted, with emulsified lead paste and spigot

outlet.

4. Cover: Scoriated nickel bronze top.

2.2 FLOOR DRAINS

A. Floor Drain FD-1


2. Body: Cast iron.

3. Outlet: Bottom.

4. Flashing Ring: Provided with weepholes.

5. Strainer: Adjustable, 5 inch x 5 inch square with vandalproof screws. Nickel bronze or

nickel brass.

6. Furnish with trap guard device.

B. Floor Drain FD-2


2. Body: Cast iron.

3. Outlet: Bottom.

4. Flashing Ring: Provided with weepholes.

5. Grate: Cast iron tractor grate, vandalproof.

6. Furnish with trap guard device.

2.3 DRAIN TRAPS

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: J.R. Smith Fig. 7222, or Zurn, Watts, Josam.

B. Where drains are specified without integral trap, furnish and install deep seal P trap of cast iron

construction with hub inlet, spigot outlet.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 221310 - 3

2.4 TRAP GUARD DEVICE

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Proset Trap Guard, or J.R. Smith Quad Close, Sure Seal Trap Sealer

B. Type: Barrier type trap seal protection device, inline floor drain trap sealer, elastomeric,

neoprene rubber. Prevents the evaporation of the trap seal and the emission of sewer gases.

C. Approvals: ASSE 1072-2007.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Drainage lines shall be properly vented, graded and trapped to conform to local and state

requirements.

B. Each fixture shall be vented and trapped. Each vent shall be extended through roof, or shall be

loop vented into a common main, acceptable by code. Where a vertical vent riser connects to

another vent riser, an inverted wye fitting shall be provided.

C. Cleanouts shall be provided in soil and waste piping where shown, at the ends of all mains, at

intersection of branches with mains, at base of vertical stacks, at intermediate points of long

runs not exceeding 40 feet, and at additional locations required by local ordinances.

D. Rough in and make final connections to laboratory equipment. Verify locations for roughing in

with equipment supplier prior to start of work.

E. Horizontal sanitary and waste lines shall be graded with a maximum of pitch where shown on

Drawings and connected to existing lines. Unless indicated otherwise, horizontal sanitary and

waste lines 2-1/2 inches and smaller shall be graded 1/4 inch per foot inside building.

Horizontal sanitary and waste line 3 inches and larger shall be graded 1/8 inch per foot and in

accordance with inverts indicated outside building.

F. Vertical sanitary and vent piping shall be supported at each floor with riser clamps. Pipe joints

shall not occur at floor line.

G. Abandoned sanitary piping shall be removed. All piping to be removed shall be removed back

to the remaining active stack or branch and capped.

H. Openings from vents through roofs to be removed shall be properly patched.

3.2 PURGING AND TESTING

A. Sanitary Piping, Gravity (Either of the following testing methods may be used.)

1. Water Test: The water test shall be applied to the drainage system either in its entirety or

in sections after rough piping has been installed. If testing entire system, all openings in

the piping shall be closed tightly, except for the highest opening in the system. The

system shall be filled with water to point of overflow. If system is tested in sections, each


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 221310 - 4

opening shall be plugged tightly except for the highest opening in the section under test.

Each section shall then be filled with water. A section shall not be tested with less than a

10 foot head of water. In testing successive sections, at least the upper 10 feet of the next

preceding section shall be tested so that a joint or pipe in the building (except the

uppermost 10 feet of the system) shall not have been submitted to a test of less than a 10

foot head of water. Test water shall be kept in the system, or in the portion under test for

1 hour before start of inspection. The system shall remain tight at all points throughout

inspection. If any leaks occur, those areas shall be corrected and re tested.

2. Drainage and Vent Air Test: An air test shall be made by forcing air into the system until

there is a uniform gauge pressure of 5 pounds per square inch (psi) (34.5 kPa) or

sufficient to balance a 10 inch (254 mm) column of mercury. This pressure shall be held

for a test period of at least 15 minutes. Any adjustments to the test pressure required

because of changes in ambient temperature of the seating of gaskets shall be made prior

to the beginning of the test period. If any leaks occur those areas shall be corrected and

retested.


Strada WVU Shroyer Hall Renovations Storm Drainage

PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 221410 - 1

SECTION 221410 – STORM DRAINAGE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED


installation of the storm water drainage system.

B. [Storm water drainage systems shall be connected to the site drainage system and/or

discharge to grade via a headwall, as indicated on the Drawings.]

1.2 SUBMITTALS


1. Roof Drains


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CLEANOUTS

A. Wall Cleanouts

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: J.R. Smith, or Zurn, Watts, Wade, Josam.

2. Size: Cleanouts shall be full size of pipe to 4 inches pipe size and not less than 4 inches

for larger pipe sizes.

3. Plug: Bronze, countersunk, rectangular slotted, with emulsified lead paste.

4. Cover: Chrome plated bronze face of wall cover secured to plug with vandalproof screws.

B. Exterior Cleanouts

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: J.R. Smith, or Zurn, Watts, Wade, Josam, Jones

Manufacturing.

2. Size: Cleanouts shall consist of wye fitting full size of pipe to 4 inches pipe size and not

less than 4 inches for larger pipe sizes.

3. Plug: Bronze, countersunk, rectangular slotted with emulsified lead paste.

4. Cover: Cast iron, non-skid, vandalproof, gasketed, watertight secured independently of

plug.

5. Anchoring: 6 inches of concrete shall be poured around wye fitting, cleanout pipe, and

cleanout cover frame. Concrete shall terminate 6 inches below grade.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 221410 - 2

C. Floor Cleanouts, For Finished Floors




3. Plug: Bronze, countersunk, rectangular slotted, with emulsified lead paste and spigot

outlet.

4. Cover: Scoriated nickel bronze top.

2.2 ROOF DRAINS

A. Roof Drain RD-1

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: J.R. Smith, or Zurn, Watts, Wade, Josam.

2. Type: For installation in insulated precast concrete or insulated metal roof decks where

insulation is sloped to roof deck providing a sump for roof drain.

3. Materials

a. Body: Cast iron.

b. Dome: Cast iron, rough bronze, aluminum or brass.

4. Body: Provide flashing collar and gravel stop, sump receiver and under deck clamp.

5. Dome: Lock type.

6. Outlet: Bottom, inside calk.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Horizontal rain water conductors and storm sewers within the building shall be graded 1/8 inch

per foot or in accordance with inverts indicated on Drawings. Horizontal storm lines outside

building shall be graded in accordance with inverts indicated on Drawings.

B. Cleanouts shall be provided in storm piping where indicated on Drawings, at ends of all mains,

at intersection of branches with mains, at base of vertical stacks, at intermediate points of long

runs not exceeding 40 feet, and at other points required by local ordinances.


A. Storm Piping, Gravity (Either of the following testing methods may be used.)

1. Water Test: The water test shall be applied to the drainage system either in its entirety or

in sections after rough piping has been installed. If testing entire system, all openings in

the piping shall be closed tightly, except for the highest opening in the system. The

system shall be filled with water to point of overflow. If system is tested in sections, each

opening shall be plugged tightly, except for the highest opening of the section under test.

Each section shall then be filled with water. A section shall not be tested with less than a


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 221410 - 3

10 foot head of water. In testing successive sections, at least the upper 10 feet of the next

preceding section shall be tested so that a joint or pipe in the building (except the

uppermost 10 feet of the system) shall not have been submitted to a test of less than a 10

foot head of water. Test water shall be kept in the system, or in the portion under test, for

1 hour before start of inspection. The system shall remain tight at all points throughout

inspection. If any leaks occur, those areas shall be corrected and re tested.

2. Drainage and vent air test. An air test shall be made by forcing air into the system until

there is a uniform gauge pressure of 5 pounds per square inch (psi) (34.5 kPa) or

sufficient to balance a 10 inch (254 mm) column of mercury. This pressure shall be held

for a test period of at least 15 minutes. Any adjustments to the test pressure required

because of changes in ambient temperature of the seating of gaskets shall be made prior

to the beginning of the test period. If any leaks occur those areas shall be corrected and

retested.

B. Storm Piping, Pumped

1. After installation of piping, lines shall be blown clear by means of air. Piping shall be

tested with air to 125 psi. Test shall be held for 2 hours with a maximum pressure drop of

1 psi.


Strada WVU Shroyer Hall Renovations Sump Pumps

PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 221420 - 1

SECTION 221420 – SUMP PUMPS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED


installation of sump pumps.


A. Section 22 05 05, Plumbing Basic Materials: Equipment nameplates and motors.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


1. Sump Pumps

2. Sump Pit and Cover

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUMP PUMP, OIL-SENSING

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Weil, or Hydromatic, Liberty Pumps, Stancor, Zoeller.

B. Type: Submersible, single pump unit, for elevator pits.

C. Pump and Motor

1. Motor shall be hermetically sealed, capacitor start with built-in overload protection, and

Class B insulation.

2. Bearings shall be factory sealed, grease lubricated, ball bearing type.

D. Discharge Pipe Size: 1-1/2 inches.

E. Controls: Float operated level switch and oil sensing system. Oil sensing system shall consist of

a wall mounted control panel with power cord and a self-cleaning, hermetically sealed, stainless

steel oil-sensing probe mounted on pump. The probe shall be positioned at a point above the

pump inlet so that the presence of oil can be detected and a signal can be sent to a relay which

will shut the pump off before pollutants are ejected.

Strada WVU Shroyer Hall Renovations Sump Pumps

PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 221420 - 2

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install sump pumps and complete piping connections in accordance with equipment

manufacturer's recommendations. Submit manufacturer's printed installation instructions with

operating and maintenance data at completion of Work.


Strada WVU Shroyer Hall Renovations Water Conditioning System

PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 223210 - 1

SECTION 223210 – WATER CONDITIONING SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED


installation of the domestic water conditioning system.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


1. Water Softener

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WATER SOFTENER B AUTOMATIC SINGLE SYSTEM

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Marlo, or Culligan.

B. Softener Tanks: Fiberglass tank shall be manufactured of polyester or high density polyethylene

which is wound with a continuous fiberglass roving. Tank shall have a 100 psi working

pressure, hydrostatically tested to 150 psi, and a temperature rating of 120 degrees F. Tank shall

bear ASME label.

C. Brine System: Brine tank shall be molded rigid polyethylene with a tight fitting cover. Shall

include an automatic air check assembly to prevent drawing air into the system, and a safety

float shut-off valve to prevent overfilling of the brine tank.

D. Resin: Shall be of premium quality, strong acid, sodium form caution exchange. Each cubic foot

of resin shall be capable of removing 30,000 grains of hardness as calcium carbonate when

generated with 15 lbs. of salt.

E. Automatic Controls: An automatic brass body control valve shall provide adjustable timing [for

delayed regeneration] and the intervals for all steps associated with the regeneration cycle

(backwash, brine draw, slow rinse, fast rinse, and brine refill).

1. A time clock shall be provided to allow the system to be regenerated at any hour or any

day(s) of the week. A volumetric meter shall initiate regeneration (immediately or delay

regeneration until a preset time) based on water use to increase salt efficiency and prevent

hard water bypass during periods of high water use.

F. Internal Distribution: Softener tanks shall be equipped with a lateral distributor system

consisting of a slotted PVC design. The distributor shall be covered with a gravel support bed.

Strada WVU Shroyer Hall Renovations Water Conditioning System

PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 223210 - 2

G. Pipes, Valves, and Fittings: Pipes shall be standard weight, galvanized mild steel. Fittings shall

be 125 psi class, galvanized malleable iron.

H. Pressure Relief Valve: Furnish and install a pressure relief valve in the discharge piping of the

pressure vessel(s).

I. Water Testing Equipment: Complete water testing kit shall be furnished for conducting soap

test.

J. Instructions: Manufacturer’s printed instructions covering installation and operation data shall

be delivered to Architect. Start-up and test of equipment shall be conducted by factory trained

personnel.

K. Warranty: Water Softener shall have a 1-year limited warranty against defects in materials,

workmanship, and corrosion. In addition, the fiberglass tank shall have a 5-year warranty

against internal corrosion.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install water conditioning equipment in accordance with equipment manufacturer's

recommendations. Submit manufacturer's printed installation instructions with operating and

maintenance data at completion of Work.


Strada WVU Shroyer Hall Renovations Water Heaters

PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 223310 - 1

SECTION 223310 – WATER HEATERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED


installation of the domestic water heating equipment.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


1. Water Heaters

2. Expansion Tanks

3. High Temperature Alarm System

4. Appliance Flue Pipe

5. Draft Inducers

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DOMESTIC WATER STORAGE HEATER, GAS COMMERCIAL, HIGH EFFICIENCY

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: A. O. Smith Cyclone Mxi, or Bradford White eF Series, PVI

Conquest.

B. Heater Style: Standard vertical, AGA approved, condensing, ASME labeled and National Board

number.

C. Materials

1. Tank: Welded steel, or engineered duplex alloy

2. Tank Lining: Porcelain enamel (glass lined).

3. Tank Jacket: Steel with baked enamel finish.

4. Insulation: Blanket type glass fiber or polyurethane foam.

5. Water Connections: Brass or bronze.

6. Base and Legs: Steel or cast iron.

D. Working Pressure: 150 psi.

E. Fuel: Natural gas.

Strada WVU Shroyer Hall Renovations Water Heaters

PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 223310 - 2

F.

G. Venting: PVC, ABS, or CPVC pipe. Venting options shall include horizontal, vertical, and

direct vent sealed combustion.

H. Venting Accessories: Wall/roof termination kit with exhaust and intake terminals, roof/wall

penetration accessories.

I. Gas Pressure Regulator: Integral to heater.

J. Temperature-Pressure Relief Valve: 3/4 inch, minimum, ASME.

K. Manufacturer's Guarantee: 3 years.

L. Compliance: ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.

2.2 EXPANSION TANK

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Amtrol Series ST-C.

B. Type: Diaphragm, vertical.

C. Tank: Steel, bearing ASME label for unfired pressure vessels.

D. Tank Lining: Polypropylene.

E. Diaphragm: Custom molded butyl.

F. Air Charge: Factory charged. Provide air charging valve on tank for field charging.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install water heating equipment in accordance with equipment manufacturer's

recommendations. Submit manufacturer's printed installation instructions with operating and



Strada WVU Shroyer Hall Renovations Plumbing Fixtures

PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 224010 - 1

SECTION 224010 – PLUMBING FIXTURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED


installation of plumbing fixtures and associated fittings and trim.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


1. Water Closets

2. Urinals

3. Lavatories

4. Sinks

5. Mop Receptors

6. Emergency Shower/Eyewashes

7. Wall Boxes

B. Substitute manufacturer's fixtures shall be similar in style, dimensions and quality to the basis of

design manufacturer's specified model number.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Fixtures shall be of one manufacturer, insofar as possible, and of first quality. Wall hung

vitreous china fixture backings shall be drilled and tapped for mounting carriers specified.

2.2 WATER CLOSETS

A. Water Closet WC-1

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Kohler K-4350, or American Standard, Toto, Sloan, Zurn.

2. Type: Floor mounted, flush valve type, 1.6 gallon per flush, vitreous china, siphon jet

action, elongated bowl, 1-1/2 inch top spud.

3. Seat:

a. Acceptable Manufacturers: Kohler, or Beneke, Olsonite, Bemis.

b. Extra heavy, elongated, white, open front, check hinge.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 224010 - 2

4. Electronic Flush Valve:

a. Acceptable Manufacturer: Sloan Optima 111 ES-S with EL154 transformer, or

Toto, Zurn.

b. ADA compliant, 1.6 gallon per flush, less handle opening, electronic powered

infrared sensor, diaphragm or piston valve, flush delay, override button, infrared

sensor adjustment, screw driver check angle stop with vandal resistant cap, sweat

solder adaptor, adjustable tailpiece, vacuum breaker flush connection, spud

coupling, and flange. Plumbing Contractor shall wire from transformer to valve

and make final adjustments to valve.

B. Water Closet WC-2

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Kohler K-4368, or American Standard, Toto, Sloan, Zurn.

2. Type: ADA compliant, floor mounted, flush valve type, 1.6 gallon per flush, vitreous

china, siphon jet action, elongated bowl, 1-1/2 inch top spud, 17-1/2 inch high (floor to

rim).

3. Seat:

a. Acceptable Manufacturer: Kohler, or Beneke, Olsonite, Bemis.

b. Extra heavy, elongated, white, open front, check hinge.

4. Electronic Flush Valve:

a. Acceptable Manufacturer: Sloan Optima 111 ES-S with EL154 transformer, or

Toto, Zurn.

b. ADA compliant, 1.6 gallon per flush, less handle opening, electronic powered

infrared sensor, diaphragm or piston valve, flush delay, override button, infrared

sensor adjustment, screw driver check angle stop with vandal resistant cap, sweat

solder adaptor, adjustable tailpiece, vacuum breaker flush connection, spud

coupling, and flange. Plumbing Contractor shall wire from transformer to valve

and make final adjustments to valve.

2.3 URINALS

A. Urinal UR-1

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Kohler K-5016-T, or American Standard, Toto, Sloan, Zurn.

2. Type: Wall hung, ADA compliant, siphon jet, 1.0 gallons per flush, flush valve type,

vitreous china, 3/4 inch top spud, beehive strainer, and wall hangers.

3. Electronic Flush Valve with Transformer:

a. Acceptable Manufacturer: Sloan Optima 186-ES-S with EL-154 transformer, or

Toto, Zurn.

b. Chrome plated, ADA compliant, sensor operated, 1.0 gallons per flush,

transformer, infrared sensor with indicator light, non-hold-open integral solenoid,

3/4 inch inlet, screw driver check angle stop with vandal resistant protective cap,

adjustable tailpiece, vacuum breaker, flush connection and spud coupling, wall and

spud flanges, sweat solder adaptor fitting. Plumbing Contractor shall wire from

transformer to valve and make final adjustments to valve.

4. Carrier:

a. Acceptable Manufacturer: J.R. Smith, or Wade, Watts, Zurn.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 224010 - 3

b. High strength steel uprights, hanger plate, bottom bearing plate, vandalproof trim

and block feet for bolting to floor construction.

2.4 LAVATORIES

A. Lavatory L-1

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Kohler K-2032, or American Standard

2. Type: ADA compliant, 21 inch x 18 inch vitreous china, wall hung with anti-splash rim,

drilled with centers to accommodate faucet and concealed arm carriers.

3. Faucet:

a. Acceptable Manufacturer: T&S Brass B-2711 Chicago Faucets, American

Standard, Kohler.

b. Vandal resistant, single lever control, 0.5 gpm spray, open grid drain assembly,

chrome finish.

4. Supplies:

a. Acceptable Manufacturer: McGuire 170LK, or Brasscraft.

b. 3/8 inch wall supplies, loose key angle stops, flexible tube riser, escutcheon,

chrome finish.

5. Trap:

a. Acceptable Manufacturer: McGuire 8872C or Brasscraft.

b. 1-1/4 inch, 17 gage cast brass adjustable P-trap, cleanout plug, escutcheon, chrome

finish.

6. Drain and Supply Line Covers:

a. Acceptable Manufacturer: True Bro Model 102W or Prowrap.

b. ADA compliant, flexible vinyl insulation installed on exposed drain piping, hot

water piping and cold water piping.

c. ANSI A117.1-2003.

7. Carrier:

a. Acceptable Manufacturer: J.R. Smith 700, or Wade, Watts, Zurn, Josam.

b. Concealed arms with mechanical locking device, high strength steel uprights with

block bases of bolting to floor construction.

2.5 SINKS

A. Sink S-1 (Trim Only)

1. Faucet:

a. Acceptable Manufacturer: T&S Brass BL-5704-08L-QT, Chicago, Water Saver.

b. Chrome plated, solid brass construction, rigid vacuum breaker gooseneck, serrated

tip outlet, quarter turn lever handles with color coded indexes.

2. Drain Outlet: Trap: 1-1/2 inch P-trap, constructed of acid waste piping with mechanical

joints.

3. Trap: 1-1/2 inch P-trap with cleanout, chrome plated.

4. Distilled Water Faucet: T&S Brass BL-9505-01, Chicago, Water Saver.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 224010 - 4

B. Sink S-2

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Elkay Series LR, or Just.

2. Type: Single bowl, type 304 stainless steel, 18 gage, self-rimming sound dampened

underside, holes drilled to accommodate faucet.

3. Faucet:

a. T&S Brass B-2731 Chicago Faucets, American Standard, Kohler. Chrome plated,

single lever, with aerator, 1.5 gpm, washerless.

4. Supplies

a. Acceptable Manufacturer: McGuire, or Brass Craft.

b. 3/8 inch wall supplies, loose key angle stops, flexible tube riser, escutcheon,

chrome finish.

5. Drain Outlet:

a. Acceptable Manufacturer: Elkay LK-35, or Just.

b. Chrome plated brass drain, stainless steel basket strainer, chrome plated brass 1-

1/2 inch O.D. tailpiece.

6. Trap: 1-1/2 inch P-trap with cleanout, chrome plated.

2.6 MOP RECEPTORS

A. Mop Receptor MR-1

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Fiat, or Florestone, Stern-Williams.

2. Type: One piece precast terrazzo, integral cast drain, stainless steel protective cap on

exposed sides, size as scheduled on Drawings.

3. Type: One piece molded construction, seamless, integral drain.

4. Faucet:

a. Acceptable Manufacturer: T&S Brass B-0665 BSTR Chicago Faucets, American

Standard, Kohler.

b. 8” wall mount fixing faucet with rough chrome plated brass body, spout, vacuum

breaker, 4” wrist lever handles, threaded spout with pail hook (garden hose thread),

rubber hose, reinforced wall mounted rod, loose key stops.

5. Accessories:

a. Acceptable Manufacturer: Fiat, or Florestone, Stern-Williams.

b. Mop Hanger: Stainless steel with three rubber tool grips.

c. Wall Guard: Heavy gage stainless steel.

2.7 ELECTRIC WATER COOLERS

A. Electric Water Cooler EWC-1

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Halsey Taylor HTHB-HAC8BLSS-WF, or Oasis, Elkay,

Acorn Aqua.

2. Type: Twin units, wall mounted, ADA compliant, lead free, electric water cooler shall

have a minimum capacity of 8 gallons per hour of 50 degrees F drinking water with an 80

degrees F inlet water temperature and a room temperature of 90 degrees F. Unit shall be


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 224010 - 5

equipped with front and side push bar water controls, have a stainless steel receptor, and

vinyl clad steel cabinet, color selected by Architect. Include flexible power cable with

three pronged grounded male plug. Bubbler stream shall be self-regulating.

3. Bottle Filling Station:

a. Bottle Filler features sanitary no-touch sensor activation with automatic 20-second

shut-off timer

b. Quick Fill Rate

c. Green Counter™; counts the quantity of bottles saved from waste

d. Features 3000 gallon capacity WaterSentry®; Plus filtration with visual LED Filter

Monitor to indicate when replacement is necessary

4. Trap: 1-1/4 inch P-trap with cleanout.

5. Supplies:

a. Acceptable Manufacturer: McGuire ST16, or Brasscraft.

b. 1/2 inch wall supply, brass stem, sweat inlet, 3/8 inch outlet.

2.8 EMERGENCY EYEWASHES

A. Laboratory Unit Eye Wash EEW-1

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Guardian G5022, or Haws.

2. Heads: ABS plastic eye/face wash head with integral flip top dust covers which

automatically release under water pressure.

3. Activation: Squeeze handle operates stay open chrome plated brass valve.

4. Flow Control: Steady water flow under varying pressures.

5. Hose: 8 feet long, 250 psi pressure rated hose with chrome plate swivel fitting at one end

for ease of operation.

6. Sign: Emergency sign included.

7. Shall be ADA compliant, meet ANSI Z3581.1 requirements, and be rated for “hands

free” use.

2.9 EMERGENCY SHOWER/EYEWASHES ADA COMPLIANT

A. Floor Mounted Combination Unit ESH-1

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Guardian GBF 1909PCC, or Haws.

2. ADA Compliant with Wide Area Eye/Face Wash

3. Shower: 10 inch diameter stainless steel shower head, stay open chrome plated brass ball

valve, rigid stainless steel pull rod, 30 gpm chrome plated brass flow control assembly, 9

inch diameter floor flange with 1-1/4 inch stainless steel pipe.

4. Eye/Face Wash: Spray heads which produce a spray pattern that covers entire facial area

with dust covers which automatically release when eye/face was is activated, stainless

steel push flag operates a stay open chrome plated brass ball valve with a stainless steel

ball and stem, automatic pressure compensation devices for 30 - 90 psi.

5. Sign: Emergency sign included.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 224010 - 6

6. Shall meet ANSI Z358.1 requirements.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Plumbing fixtures shall be installed square with wall, in line, and level, to give a uniform

appearance. Plumbing trim and exposed supply and waste piping, including traps, shall be

polished chrome plated brass, unless otherwise specified.

B. Each hot and cold water connection to plumbing fixtures and equipment shall be valved, if not

provided with integral stops as specified herein.

C. Calk space watertight between plumbing fixtures and wall or floor; silicone, white for all white

fixtures, clear for all other colors.

D. Contractor shall be responsible to coordinate the orientation of all plumbing fixtures (i.e. left-

hand, right-hand) with ADA requirements and general building conditions. Model numbers are

listed for plumbing fixtures to illustrate a standard of quality for materials and indicate a

specific style.

E. Bathtub and shower control valves provided with high limit stops shall be adjusted to a

maximum hot water temperature setpoint of 105 degrees F.

F. Coordinate installation of dual level flush valve instructional signs with Architect.

G. Coordinate lavatory and sink hole drilling configurations with faucets.

3.2 CONNECTIONS TO EQUIPMENT SUPPLIED BY OTHERS

A. Rough in and make final connections to laboratory equipment supplied by Owner/General

Contractor. Each hot and cold water connection shall be valved. Each waste connection shall be

capped 6 inches above finish floor or 3 inches from finished wall. Verify locations for roughing-

in with the equipment supplier, prior to beginning work.

B. Exposed water and waste piping for kitchen equipment shall be chrome plated copper tubing.

All exposed valves, fittings, and specialties for water and waste piping shall be chrome plated.

3.3 TESTING

A. Plumbing fixtures shall be filled with water and checked for leaks or retarded flow. Remove and

clean all aerators.


Strada WVU Shroyer Hall Renovations Special Piping Systems

PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 226020 - 1

SECTION 226020 – SPECIAL PIPING SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED


installation of the following piping systems:

1. Compressed Air

2. Acid Waste

3. Laboratory Vacuum

4. STILL – Distilled Water Generator

B. Compressed air piping shall be extended from air compressor and distributed to areas and

equipment indicated on Drawings or specified herein.

C. Acid waste shall be collected as indicated on Drawings, extended to neutralization tank, and

discharged to sanitary sewer system.

D. Vacuum piping shall be extended from central vacuum system and distributed to vacuum

stations indicated on Drawings.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


1. Air Compressors and Air Dryer System

2. Filters/Separators

3. Air Receiver Tank

4. Air Pressure Regulators

5. Distilled Water Generator – Still

6. Distilled Water Distribution Pump and Bladder Tank

7. Neutralization Tanks

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 AIR COMPRESSOR

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Beacon Medaes LE07-115, Ingersoll Rand.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 226020 - 2

B. Type: Floor mounted and enclosed in a steel, sound-insulated canopy. Equipped with an

integrated refrigerated dryer. Complete package, factory assembled with all necessary

equipment, including, but not limited to the following components:

1. • Inlet filter

2. • Air compressor elements

3. • Drive motor

4. • Aftercooler

5. • Refrigerated dryer

6. • Starter and regulation system

7. • Control system

8. All components are mounted within a common six-sided low sound enclosure with solid

base frame.

9. The enclosed scroll package provides air quality that qualifies to be in the category

"Class 0" in terms of oil content as defined by standard ISO 8573-1:2001 Part 1.

C. Tank: Horizontal steel air receiver, ASME. The compressor is mounted upon an internally

coated 71 gallon (270 liter) horizontal receiver. The receiver is provided with a manual drain

valve or an electronic condensate drain as an option.

D. Integral Air Dryer: Refrigerated dryer, pre-wired to the compressor power supply, inside the

canopy, controlled by the compressor's primary controller. Dryer style - air-to-air heat

exchanger to pre-cool the incoming compressed air and reheat the exiting compressed air.

Water is removed via the integrated water separator and the electronic condensate drain.

E. Provided with pressure gage, service valve, ASME relief valves, check valve, air filter, pressure

switch, oil filter, and manual drain valve.

F. Motor: NEMA, IE3 premium efficiency, totally enclosed, fan cooled. Cast iron crankshaft and

pulley, Class F insulation, permanently lubricated motor bearings.

G. Controls/Control Panel: The control panel comprises a pressure gauge, an hour meter, a start

button and a temperature gauge indicating the dew point. The compressor is started and stopped

automatically by a pressure switch. Integral across-the-line motor starter with disconnect,

pressure gage, run meter (hours), on/off/auto switch The electrical components are located in

the cubicle behind the front panel door.

1. The compressor regulation system keeps the net pressure between programmable limits

by starting and stopping the compressor modules

2. The compressor contains a temperature shut-down switch and safety valve to protect the

compressor against overheating and over-pressure. A check valve prevents blow-back of

compressed air when the compressor is stopped.

H. Enclosure: manufacturer provided, insulated sound attenuating enclosure, with removable

panels/doors for maintenance and repair access.

I. Warranty: 5 years.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 226020 - 3

2.2 VACUUM PUMP

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Beacon Medaes LVHT07S, Ingersoll Rand.

B. Type: Dry running rotary claw, tank mounted.

C. Tank: Horizontal steel air receiver, ASME.

D. Provided with vacuum gages, service valves, ASME relief valves, check valve, pressure switch,

oil filter, and manual drain valve.

E. Motor: NEMA, IE3 premium efficiency, totally enclosed. Cast iron crankshaft and pulley,

Class F insulation.

F. Purge System: Equipped with automatic purge system to flush gases from the pump to prevent

condensation with cooling.

G. Warranty: 5 years.

H. Control Panel: The vacuum system is equipped with an electrical control center that is UL listed

(UL 508) and consists of the following:

1. IEC magnetic motor starter with thermal overload

2. Low voltage control transformer with primary and secondary fuses

3. Hour meter

4. Manual-Purge/Stop-Auto switch with integral pump run light

5. Emergency stop switch

6. Programmable controller with data interface means for adjusting system set points

7. NEMA 4/12 enclosure

8. Externally mounted dual set-point vacuum switch with adjustable differential

I. Enclosure: manufacturer provided, insulated sound attenuating enclosure, with removable

panels/doors for maintenance and repair access.

2.3 AIR DRYER

A. Air Acceptable Manufacturer: Beacon Medaes, or Ingersoll-Rand, Zeks.

B. Type: Refrigerated compressed air dryer, non-cycling, hermetically sealed refrigeration system,

air cooled, hot gas bypass valve, high temperature light, full charge of CFC free refrigerant.

C. Heat exchanger tube in tube design, non-fouling assemblies.

D. Filter: Two stage separator/filter, removes water droplets and solids 3 microns or larger.

E. Cabinet: Heavy gage metal.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 226020 - 4

2.4 AIR FILTER/SEPARATOR

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Beacon Medaes, Ingersoll-Rand.

B. Type: Remove solids and liquid 3 microns and larger, housing shall be aluminum, zinc, or steel

with corrosion resistance (interior and exterior), 250 psi maximum working pressure,

internal/external automatic drain, differential pressure indicator and/or gauges, liquid level

indicator.

2.5 AIR PRESSURE REGULATOR

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Norgren.

B. Regulators shall be non-relieving type T handle adjustment and integral pressure gage.

C. Pressure Range: 2 to 125 psig.

2.6 DISTILLED WATER GENERATOR – STILL

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Thermo Fisher Scientific, Barnstead Classic Still Model A1016-D

B. Type electric, self-contained with integral control panel/controller, factory assembled, self-

standing floor mounted.

C. Certifications/Compliance UL

D. Tank : Polyethylene, NSF food grade gravity tank with reinforced sides, fitted with tappings to

facilitate installation of complete working system, inlet piping, pump suction piping, level top-

mounted level controller fitting, etc.

E. Level Controls – tank mounted level control probe that will activate still and allow tank to fill

with distilled water until desired water level is reached, at which time the controller will de-

activate the still.

2.7 DISTILLED WATER DISTRIBUTION PUMP

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Grundfos CMBE 3-62

B. Type: Compact booster pump set with integral bladder tank and on-board controls, stainless

steel pump.

C. Motor: Stainless steel housing, enclosure class IP55, Class F insulation. Stainless steel

impeller, EPDM seals. Internal thermal overload and dry-run protection.

D. Integrated Speed Controller: Maintains constant pressure in the distribution system

E. Furnish with 5-way valve, pressure gages, manometer, and low/no water cut-out and pressure

switches.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 226020 - 5

2.8 NEUTRALIZING TANK

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Town & Country Plastic Inc., or Enfield.

B. Type: Seamless high density polyethylene neutralization tank, with inlet, outlet and vent

connections. Heavy duty pedestrian lid.

C. Neutralizing Stone: Provide full charge of limestone.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install compressed air piping as indicated on Drawings with pipe, fittings, suitable drips, valves

and hangers.

B. Horizontal acid waste lines shall be sloped as indicated on Drawings. Change in direction shall

be made with wye fittings, combination wye and eighth bends or one eighth bends. Offsets in

acid waste pipes will not be permitted where offsets can be avoided. Offsets shall be made with

45 degree bends or similar fittings. Acid waste piping shall be installed in accordance with

manufacturer's recommendations. Acid waste pipe exposed to damage by sharp surfaces shall

be protected with grommets or sleeves of rubber or plastic.


A. Compressed Air Piping

1. After installation of piping, but before installation of outlet valves, connections to

compressor, lines shall be blown clear by means of oil-free dry air. Piping shall be tested

with oil-free dry air to 175 psig. Test shall be held for 4 hours with a maximum pressure

drop of 2 psi.

B. Acid Waste Piping, Gravity

1. Water Test: Water test shall be applied to drainage system either in its entirety or in

sections after rough piping has been installed. If applied to entire system, all openings in

piping shall be tightly closed, except highest opening, and system shall be filled with

water to point of overflow. If system is tested in sections, each opening shall be tightly

plugged except highest opening of section under test, and each section shall be filled with

water, but a section shall not be tested with less than 10 foot head of water. In testing

successive sections, at least the upper 10 feet of next preceding section shall be tested, so

that a joint or pipe in building, except uppermost 10 feet of system, shall not have been

submitted to a test of less than 10 foot head of water. Water shall be kept in system or in

portion under test for one hour before inspection starts. System shall then be tight at all

points. If any leaks occur, those areas shall be corrected and section shall be retested.

C. Vacuum Piping

1. After installation of piping, lines shall be blown clear by means of oil-free dry air. Piping

shall be held in vacuum for 4 hours with a maximum pressure rise of 2 inches Hg.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 226020 - 6


Strada WVU Shroyer Hall Renovations Fuel Gas Piping and Specialties

PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 226030 - 1

SECTION 226030 – FUEL GAS PIPING AND SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED


installation of fuel gas piping and specialties.

B. Natural gas piping shall be extended from the existing natural gas system and distributed to

equipment indicated on Drawings or specified herein.


A. Section 220510, Plumbing Piping and Pipe Fittings: Natural gas piping and pipe fittings.

B. Section 220525, Plumbing Valves: Natural gas valves.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GAS SOLENOID VALVE

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Automatic Switch Co. 8040 Series, or Jefferson.

B. Type: Direct acting, normally closed, 2-way one piece, molded epoxy solenoid enclosure with

conduit hub and junction box.

C. Coil: Continuous duty, molded class F.

D. Valve Body: Aluminum construction.

E. Voltage: 120 volt, 1 phase, 60 hertz.

F. Approvals: UL listed, FM approved.

2.2 GAS SOLENOID VALVE

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Automatic Switch Co., or Jefferson.

B. Type: Internal pilot operated, normally closed, 2-way, molded epoxy solenoid.

C. Coil: Continuous duty molded Class F.

D. Valve: Aluminum, free handle, manual reset shutoff or cable controlled valve and junction box.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 226030 - 2

E. Approvals: UL listed, FM approved.

2.3 GAS REGULATORS

A. Line Pressure Regulators

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Itron, Fisher, or Bellgas.

2. Type: Single stage, suitable for natural gas, steel jacket, and corrosion resistant

components.

3. Body and Diaphragm Case: Cast iron or die-cast aluminum.

4. Springs: Zinc-plated steel; interchangeable.

5. Diaphragm Plate: Zinc-plated steel.

6. Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber resistant to gas impurities, abrasion, and deformation at the

valve port.

7. Orifice: Aluminum; interchangeable.

8. Seal Plug: Ultraviolet-stabilized, mineral-filled nylon.

9. Single-port, self-contained regulator with orifice no larger than required at maximum

pressure inlet, and no pressure sensing piping external to regulator.

10. Pressure regulator shall maintain discharge pressure setting downstream, and not to

exceed 150 percent of design discharge pressure at shutoff.

11. Overpressure Protection Device: Factory mounted on pressure regulator.

12. Atmospheric Vent: Factory- or field-installed, stainless steel screen in opening if not

connected to vent piping.

13. Approvals: Comply with ANSI Z21.80.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Piping

1. Extend natural gas piping to equipment indicated on the Drawings or specified herein

with suitable drips and cocks.

2. All welding of gas piping shall be performed by welders approved by local gas company.

3. All exterior gas piping shall be primed and painted.

a. Exterior semi-gloss, acrylic enamel: 2 coats over rust-inhibitive primer.

b. Color selected by Owner.

4. Provide cathodic protection on gas piping as required by local gas company.

5. Rough-in and make final connection to Owner furnished gas fired equipment. Verify

locations for roughing-in with equipment supplier prior to start of work.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 226030 - 3

6. Rough-in and make final connection to gas fired equipment furnished and installed under

Divisions 22 and 23. Verify locations for rough-in with equipment supplier prior to start

of work.

7. Rough-in and make final connection to natural gas fired emergency generator furnished

and installed under Division 26.

B. Gas Regulators

1. The gas regulator vent shall be extended to the exterior. Vent limiting devices will not be

acceptable. Vent piping shall be installed per local codes and manufacturer’s

recommendations.

2. The gas regulator vent shall be sized as indicated on the drawings, but not less than the

connection size to the regulator.

3. Furnish and install pressure gage upstream and downstream of each pressure regulator.


A. After installation of piping, but before installation of outlet valves, natural gas piping shall be

blown clear by means of oil free dry air or nitrogen.

B. Natural gas piping shall be tested in accordance with recommendations of the National Fire

Protection Association (NFPA 54), American Gas Association, and local gas company.

C. Gas piping specialties and equipment shall be tested and inspected in the presence of the utility

inspector and representative of Architect prior to concealing or covering.


Strada WVU Shroyer Hall Renovations Wiring Of Plumbing Equipment

PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 229610 - 1

SECTION 229610 – WIRING OF PLUMBING EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. The Work of this Section shall include the power and control wiring of plumbing equipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Plumbing Contractor shall provide equipment with controls, starters and related items as

specified in various Sections of Division 22.

B. Where plumbing equipment specified without starters or controllers, Electrical Contractor shall

provide same as specified herein.

C. Electrical Contractor shall provide all power wiring unless specifically noted otherwise.

D. Plumbing Contractor shall furnish and install all control wiring unless specifically noted

otherwise.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Plumbing equipment shall be wired in accordance with the following schedule:

Key:



Item wired by.....


P = Plumbing Contractor


G = General Contractor


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 229610 - 2

Plumbing Equipment Wiring Schedule

Equipment


Rem

ote

Dis

con

nec

t S

wit

ch

Inte

gra

l D

isco

nnec

t S

wit

ch

Wal

l S

wit

ch

Co

rd &

Plu

g

Mag

net

ic M

oto

r S

tr

Co

mb

inat

ion

Moto

r S

tr

Man

ual

Mo

tor

Str

VF

D w

ith

Dis

con

nec

t

Co

nta

cto

r

L

ine

Volt

age

Sta

t

Lo

w V

olt

age

Sta

t

Aq

uas

tat

Du

ct S

mo

ke

Det

ecto

r

Co

ntr

ol

Pan

el

Flo

w/P

ress

/Lev

el S

wit

ch

BA

S/A

TC

Co

ntr

ol

Domestic Water

Heater

DWH-1

P E

P E

E E

Inline Circulation

Pump

CP-1

P E

P E

E E

Sump Pump

SP-1 P P P

P P P

E E P

Air Compressor

AC-1 P P

P P

E E

Vacuum Pump

VP-1 P P

P P

E E

Distilled Water

Generator

STILL-1

P P P E

P P P E

E P E E


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 229610 - 3


Equipment


Rem

ote

Dis

con

nec

t S

wit

ch

Inte

gra

l D

isco

nnec

t S

wit

ch

Wal

l S

wit

ch

Co

rd &

Plu

g

Mag

net

ic M

oto

r S

tr

Co

mb

inat

ion

Moto

r S

tr

Man

ual

Mo

tor

Str

VF

D w

ith

Dis

con

nec

t

Co

nta

cto

r

L

ine

Volt

age

Sta

t

Lo

w V

olt

age

Sta

t

Aq

uas

tat

Du

ct S

mo

ke

Det

ecto

r

Co

ntr

ol

Pan

el

Flo

w/P

ress

/Lev

el S

wit

ch

BA

S/A

TC

Co

ntr

ol

Water Softener

WS-1 P P

P P

E E




Strada WVU Shroyer Hall Renovations HVAC Basic Materials

PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 230505 - 1

SECTION 230505 – HVAC BASIC MATERIALS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED


installation of basic materials and motors associated with HVAC systems.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


1. Access Panels

2. Fire Stop Sealing System

3. Pipe Penetration Seal

4. Pipe Portals

5. Equipment Supports

6. Equipment Nameplates; including itemized listing of nameplate equipment designations

7. Pipe Rail System

8. Engineered Strut Support System; including structural calculations

9. Motors; submit with each piece of equipment

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCESS PANELS


1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Milcor Style DW, or Karp, Krieger, Bilco.






1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Milcor, or Karp.




PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 230505 - 2


masonry anchors.

5. Rating: UL listed 1-1/2 hour (B label), temperature rise 30 minutes, 250 degrees F.

maximum.

6. Closing Feature: Self-latching lock, flush key operated cylinder lock with two keys,

interior release mechanism.


1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Milcor Style M, or Karp, Krieger, Bilco.




4. Closing Feature: Flush screwdriver operated lock with steel cam.

2.2 FIRE STOP SEALING SYSTEM

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Nelson Firestop Products CLK Silicone Sealant, or 3M Fire


B. Materials: Single component, ready-to-use, water-resistant, flexible elastomeric silicone sealant.

Non-sag/gunnable grade for penetrations in vertical surfaces, self-leveling grade for floor

applications.

C. Compliance: Fire endurance tested per ASTM E-814 (UL 1479). In addition to compliance as a

fire stop, the cured sealing system shall not permit smoke or water penetration.

2.3 PIPE PENETRATION SEAL

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Thunderline Link Seal.

B. Seals shall be modular mechanical type, consisting of interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped

to continuously fill the annular space between the pipe and wall opening. Each link shall have a

bolt/pressure plate tightening assembly. Final installation shall be watertight and provide an

electrical insulation between pipe and wall sleeve/opening.

2.4 EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATES



B. Nameplate and lettering suitably sized for their location, but not less than 1/4 inch high letters.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 230505 - 3

2.5 EQUIPMENT LOCATION LABELS

A. Equipment location labels shall be self-adhering, 3/4 inch diameter, gloss vinyl circles. Labels

shall be placed on the T-bar of the adjoining ceiling tile to be removed for access to item. Color-

coding of labels shall be as directed by Owner.

2.6 PIPE RAIL SYSTEM

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Hollaender.

B. Construction: High tensile aluminum/magnesium alloy slip-on/bolt-on pipe fittings conforming

to federal specification QQ-A-371F ASTM B275 or QQ-A-601F ASTM B26.

C. All fittings shall be securely fastened to the pipe with knurled cup-point set screws. Set screws

meet these specifications:

1. Type FF-S-200, ANSI/ASME B18.3 - 1986 Type C counter-bored knurled cup-point

specification.

2.7 ENGINEERED STRUT SUPPORT SYSTEM

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Unistrut Corporation, or as approved.

B. General: Provide all engineering, material, fittings, anchors, and related accessories for

installation of the engineered strut support system. Submit structural calculations with design

criteria, selection of framing members, fittings, accessories, and shop/assembly drawings.

C. Channel members shall be structural grade steel conforming to ASTM A-1011 SS GR or A-653

GR 33. Fittings shall be fabricated from steel conforming to ASTM A 575, A 576, A 36, or A

635. Components shall be pre-galvanized by hot dip process prior to roll forming with G90 zinc

coating conforming to ASTM 123 or A 153.

2.8 MOTORS

A. Motor Characteristics:

1. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 degrees C and at an altitude of 3300

feet above sea level.

2. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected

loads at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating

sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor.

Horsepower rating shall not be less than size indicated on Drawings.

B. Three Phase Motors:

1. Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor.

2. Efficiency: Premium efficiency, as defined by NEMA MG 1.



PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 230505 - 4

4. Service Factor: 1.15.

5. Insulation: NEMA Class F.

6. Sound Power Levels: Conform to NEMA MG 1.

7. Bearings: Grease lubricated anti-friction ball bearings with housings equipped with

plugged provision for re-lubrication, rated for minimum AFBMA 9, L-10 life of 200,000

hours.

8. Thermal Protection: Internal, automatically reset.

9. Motors Used with Variable Frequency Drives:

a. Windings: Copper magnet wire with moisture-resistant varnish, designed and

tested to resist transient spikes, high frequencies, and short time rise pulses

produced by pulse-width modulated inverters.

b. Premium-Efficient Motors: Class B temperature rise; Class F insulation.

c. Inverter-Duty Motors: Class F temperature rise; Class H insulation.

d. Shaft grounding ring.

C. Single Phase Motors:

1. Larger Than 1/20 HP: One of the following, to suit starting torque and requirements of

specific motor applications:

a. Permanent-split capacitor.

b. Split phase.

c. Capacitor start, inductor run.

d. Capacitor start, capacitor run.

2. 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded-pole type. Multispeed Motors: Variable-torque, permanent-

split-capacitor type.


4. Bearings: Pre-lubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings.

5. Thermal Protection: Internal, automatically reset.

D. ECM, where required in equipment specifications:

a. Variable-speed, DC, brushless motors specifically designed for use with single

phase, 120 or 277 volt, 60 hertz electrical input.

b. Operated by a single phase integrated controller/inverter that operates the wound

stator and senses rotor position to electronically commutate the stator.

c. Designed for synchronous rotation.

d. Permanent magnet type motor rotor with near zero rotor losses.

e. Able to be mounted with shaft in horizontal or vertical orientation.

f. Permanently lubricated with ball bearings.

g. Direct coupled to the blower.

h. Integral thermal overload protection.

i. Minimum of 70% efficiency over its entire operating range.

j. Anti-back rotation system or provide a motor that is designed to overcome reverse

rotation and not affect life expectancy.

k. Inductors to minimize harmonic distortion and line noise.

l. Motor control module:

1) Built-in soft start and soft speed change ramps.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 230505 - 5

2) Electronics and built-in surge protectors to protect the solid state controls

from line transients.

3) Variable speed mode to receive a variable control voltage signal from a

DDC system in response to external PID outputs.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Access Panels

1. Furnish and install access panels in ceilings and walls for service and repair access to

concealed equipment, including, but not limited to:

a. Valves: hand operated and automatic.

b. Strainers and traps.

c. Backflow preventers.

d. Air vents.

e. Gages and thermometers.

f. Pressure regulating/reducing valves.

g. Dampers: volume, control, fire/smoke.

h. All control operators/devices.

2. Minimum Size: 18 inches by 18 inches. Where restrictions will not permit minimum size,

verify access panel size with Architect.




Gypsum board (dry wall) finishes 2

Fire rated walls 3

Masonry, tile, or wood finishes 4

B. Sleeves and Plates

1. Furnish and install sleeves for all pipes passing through floors, walls, partitions, slabs,


2. Layout, size, and locate sleeves such that they be set and installed prior to pouring

concrete, or when masonry is being constructed. In event sleeves must be placed after

floor, wall, grade beam, etc., has been constructed, submit in writing to and obtain

approval from Architect on location, quantity and proposed method of core drilling and

installing.

3. Core drilled openings above grade in solid concrete need not be sleeved but must be

clean and neat without cracking or spalling.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 230505 - 6

4. Sleeves shall be standard weight galvanized steel pipe having square cut ends with

anchoring lugs welded on. Horizontal sleeves through walls, grade beams, foundations,

and partitions shall be flush with finished wall faces. Vertical sleeves through floors shall

extend 2 inches above finished floor and be flush with finished ceiling or underside of

floor construction.

5. Size sleeves such that internal diameter is 2 pipe sizes or a minimum of 2 inches larger

than outside diameter of bare pipe for uninsulated lines and 2 inches larger than outside

diameter of insulation and jacket for insulated lines. Center pipes in sleeves.

6. Install mechanical modular link pipe penetration seal where indicated on the Drawings.

7. For lines passing through walls and floors above grade and with no fire or smoke rating,

the annular space between outside of pipe or insulation and inside of sleeve or concrete

shall be packed tight with batt-type fiberglass insulation.

8. For pipes passing through walls and floors above grade with smoke or fire rating of one

hour or more, the annular space between outside of pipe or insulation and inside of sleeve

or concrete shall be sealed with fire stop sealing system.

C. Fire Stop Sealing System


shall be sealed. Refer to architectural drawings for locations of fire rated floors and walls.

2. Prepare penetration and install sealing material in accordance with the manufacturer's

recommendations.




similar phrase.





D. Equipment Nameplates

1. Furnish and install a full complement of nameplates for all items of HVAC equipment

installed as Work of this Division, including boilers, chillers, pumps, air handling units,

fans and building automation system panels.



Epoxy cement shall not be used on equipment installed outdoors.

4. Nameplates located in harsh environments shall be attached with either self tapping,

stainless steel screws or No. 10/32 stainless steel machine screws with nuts, flat washers

and lock washers. Epoxy cement or other adhesives will not be permitted.




Strada WVU Shroyer Hall Renovations HVAC Pipe and Pipe Fittings

PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 230510 - 1

SECTION 230510 – HVAC PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED


installation of HVAC piping and pipe fittings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS

A. Pipe shall conform to the materials specified herein, and shall be installed for piping systems as

scheduled in Part 3 - Execution, of this Section.






2. Joints: Solder type with 95-5 solder , or press coupled. (Exception: All joints below

ground shall be solder joints).


B16.18, or with EPDM O-rings, ASME B16.18 or ASME B16.22, performance criteria

of IAPMO PS 117.

D. Sizes 2-1/2 inches and larger:


2. Joints: Flanged and solder type with 95-5 solder or mechanically coupled grooved joints.


B16.18, or mechanically coupled grooved joints.

4. Flanges: 150 lb. class cast bronze, ANSI B16.24.

2.3 SCHEDULE 40 BLACK STEEL PIPE SPECIFICATION NO. 2



PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 230510 - 2



1. Pipe: Schedule 40 black steel, threaded and coupled, ASTM A53.

2. Joints:

a. Water: Threaded or mechanically coupled grooved joints.

b. Steam: Threaded.

3. Fittings:

a. Water: 125 lb (S) - 175 lb (WOG) black cast iron, or mechanically coupled

grooved fittings.

b. Steam: 125 lb (S) - 175 lb (WOG) black cast iron.

4. Unions: 250 lb (S) - 500 lb (WOG) black malleable iron, ground joint with brass seat.

D. Sizes 2-1/2 inches and larger:

1. Pipe: Schedule 40 black steel, beveled ends, ASTM A53.

2. Joints:

a. Water: Butt welded and flanged, or mechanically coupled grooved joints.

b. Steam: Butt welded and flanged.

3. Fittings:

a. Water: Schedule 40 seamless steel, butt weld type, ASTM A234 , or mechanically

coupled fittings.

b. Steam: Schedule 40 seamless steel, butt weld type, ASTM A234.

4. Flanges: 150 lb forged steel, welding neck or slip on, ASTM A181 Class 60.

2.4 SCHEDULE 80 SEAMLESS BLACK STEEL PIPE SPECIFICATION NO. 4



C. Sizes 1-1/4 inches and smaller:

1. Pipe: Schedule 80, seamless, black steel, ASTM A53 Grade B.

2. Joints: Threaded.

3. Fittings: 250 lb. (S) - 400 lb. (WOG), black malleable iron, ASTM B16.3.

4. Unions: 250 lb. (S) - 500 lb. (WOG) black malleable iron, ground joint with brass seat.

D. Sizes 1-1/2 inches through 12 inches:

1. Pipe: Schedule 80, seamless, black steel, ASTM A53, Grade B.


3. Fittings: Schedule 80, seamless steel, butt weld type, ASTM 234.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 230510 - 3

4. Flanges: 150 lb. forged steel, welding neck or slip on, ASTM 181, Class 60, ANSI B16.5.

Welding neck type shall have bore to match pipe.





1. Tubing: Type L hard drawn seamless copper tube, ASTM B280 (ACR).

2. Joints: Brazed, AWS A5.8 B Cup silver/phosphorus/copper alloy.

3. Fittings: Wrought copper solder joint, ANSI B16.22.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Piping systems shall be installed in accordance with the following pipe schedule(s).

PIPE SCHEDULE


Boiler Blowdown All 4

Boiler Chemical Feed Water Systems

2

Boiler Feedwater All 4

Chilled Water All

1 or 2

Condensate Drainage, Cold All 1

Heating Hot Water All

1 or 2

Make-up Water All 1

Refrigerant All 5

Steam - Low Pressure. Supply

Condensate Return

2

2 or 4

Equipment Venting All 2


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 230510 - 4

3.2 INSTALLATION




B. All pipe and fittings shall be carefully inspected for defects in workmanship prior to installation.

Any item found unsuitable, cracked, or otherwise defective shall be rejected and removed from

the jobsite. All pipe and fittings shall have factory applied markings, stampings, or nameplates

with sufficient data for identification to determine their conformance with specified

requirements.

C. During construction all openings in piping shall be kept closed except when actual work is




D. Run pipe lines straight and true, parallel to building lines with a minimum use of offsets and

couplings. Use full and double lengths of pipe wherever possible.

E. Changes in direction shall be made only with pipe bends or fittings. Changes in size shall be

made with fittings only. All fittings shall be of the long radius type, unless otherwise specified.

Changes in direction on drainage pipe systems shall be made with wye fittings, combination

wye and eighth bends, or one-eighth bends.

F. Provide flanges or unions at all final connections to equipment, traps and valves to facilitate

dismantling.

G. Unless otherwise indicated, install all supply piping to coils, pumps and other equipment at line

size with reduction in size being made only at inlet to control valve or pump. Install supply

piping from outlet of control valve at full size of connection in equipment served. Install piping

in equipment outlet or return lines beyond dirt pockets the size of tapping in the trap or, if no

trap, the size of the equipment connection.

H. All pipe shall be cut to exact measurement, and installed without springing or forcing. Particular

care shall be taken to avoid creating, even temporarily, undue loads, forces or strains on valves,

equipment or building elements with piping connections or piping supports.

I. Unless otherwise indicated, branch take-offs shall be from top of mains or headers at either a 45

degree or 90 degree angle from the horizontal plane for steam lines, and from top, bottom or

side for liquids.

J. Pipe joints connecting dissimilar metals shall be insulating, dielectric connections. Copper


temporary methods of support, by use of insulating, non conductive spacers such as rubber,

fiberglass or an approved equal. Pipe hangers for bare copper tubing shall be copper plated.

3.3 PIPE JOINTS

A. Press Joints:


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 230510 - 5

1. Copper and copper alloy press connections shall be made in accordance with the

manufacturer's installation instructions.

2. Copper press fittings shall be installed using the proper tools, actuator, jaws and rings as

instructed and approved by the press fitting manufacturer.

3. Installer shall be a qualified installer, licensed within the jurisdiction, and familiar with

the installation of copper press joint systems.

4. Follow all installation instructions of manufacturer of press-joint fitting to ensure quality,

leak-tight seal.

5. Provide unions and arrangement of sufficient length of removable sections of tubing at

valves and equipment connections to allow for easy removal and reinstallation for repairs

without having to redo press connections.

B. Mechanically Coupled Grooved Joints:

1. All grooved piping shall be installed and supported in strict adherence to the grooved

manufactures installation and pipe supporting instructions.

2. Select proper gasket material that is compatible with fluid requirements.

3. Gasket lubricant shall be from the same manufacture as the couplings.

4. Pipe shall be grooved to manufactures recommended specifications.

5. Grooving tools shall be from the same manufacture as the couplings.

6. All couplings, fittings, flanges, valves and accessories shall be from the same

manufacturer. All grooved piping products (i.e. couplings, fittings, valves and

accessories) used on hot water systems shall have a temperature rating of at least 250

degrees F.

7. All couplings used up to and including 24 inches shall have a minimum pressure rating of

350 PSI.

8. All couplings shall be the rigid design except as needed or required.

9. All castings shall be date stamped for quality assurance and traceability.

10. The grooved mechanical coupling manufacturer shall have a factory trained field

representative to be available to visit the job site. That representative shall provide

training for contractor’s field personnel, and view installed product to promote

conformance to installation requirements, if requested by the Owner or Architect. The

name and contact information of that representative should be part of the submittal

package.

C. Solder Joints:

1. Make up joints with 95 percent tin and 5 percent antimony (95-5) solder conforming to

ASTM B32 Solder Metal, Grade 95TA.

2. Cut copper tubing so ends are perfectly square and remove all burrs inside and outside.

3. Thoroughly clean sockets of fittings and ends of tubing to remove all oxide, dirt, and

grease just prior to soldering.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 230510 - 6

4. Apply flux evenly, but sparingly, over all surfaces to be joined. Heat joints uniformly to

proper soldering temperature so solder will flow to all mated surfaces. Wipe excess

solder, leaving a uniform fillet around cup of fitting. Flux shall be non acid type.

5. Remove composition discs from solder end valves during soldering.

D. Brazed Joints:

1. Make up joints with silver alloy brazing filler metal.

2. Cut copper tubing so ends are perfectly square and remove all burrs inside and outside.

Thoroughly clean sockets of fittings and ends of tubing to remove all oxide, dirt, and

grease just prior to brazing.

3. Apply non-corrosive flux of the type recommended by filler alloy manufacturer evenly,

but sparingly, over all surfaces to be joined. Heat joints uniformly to proper brazing

temperatures using oxygen-acetylene torch with tip size as recommended by fitting

manufacturer. Wipe and brush joint clean after alloy has set.

4. Remove composition discs from solder end valves during brazing.

E. Welded Joints:

1. The welding of all pipe joints, both as to procedures and qualification of welders, shall be

in accordance with Section IX, ASME Boiler & Pressure Vessel Code, unless mandatory

local codes take precedence.

2. Ends of pipe and fittings to be joined by butt welding shall be beveled, cleaned to bare

metal and internal diameters aligned before tack welding.

F. Threaded Joints:

1. Pipe screw threads shall conform to ANSI B16.3, Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings or

ASTM B687, Brass, Copper, and Chromium-Plated Pipe Nipples.

2. Ream pipe ends and remove all burrs and chips formed in cutting and threading.

3. Protect plated pipe and brass valve bodies from wrench marks when making-up joint.

4. Apply thread lubricant to male threads only.

G. Flanged Joints:

1. Steel pipe flanges shall conform to ANSI B16.5, Steel Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings.

Cast iron pipe flanges shall conform to ANSI B16.1, Cast Iron Flanges and Flanged

Fittings.

2. Steel flanges shall be raised face except when bolted to flat cast iron flange.

3. Bolting for services up to 500 degrees F. shall be ASTM A307, Grade B with square head

bolts and heavy hexagonal nuts conforming to ANSI B18.2.1, Square and Hex Bolts and

B18.2.2, Square and Hex Nuts. Set flange bolts beyond finger tightness with an

indicating torque wrench to insure equal tension in all bolts. Tighten bolts such that those

180 degrees apart or directly opposite are torqued in sequence.

4. Gaskets for flat face flanges shall form to requirements for Group I Gaskets in ANSI

B16.5. Unless otherwise specified, gaskets shall be 3/32 inch thick.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 230510 - 7


Strada WVU Shroyer Hall Renovations HVAC Piping Specialties

PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 230515 - 1

SECTION 230515 – HVAC PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED


installation of HVAC piping specialties.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


1. Y-Type Strainers

2. Branch Connections

3. Pipe & Valve Identification

4. Flexible Pipe Connectors

5. Dielectric Connections

6. Thermometers, including scale range

7. Pressure Gages, including scale range

8. Pressure/Temperature (P/T) Test Plugs

B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for each type of measuring

instrument. Submit schedule showing manufacturer's model number, scale range, location, and

accessories for each type and application.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Y-TYPE STRAINERS, WATER PIPING

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Apollo (Conbraco), Armstrong International, Hoffman Specialty

ITT, Metraflex Co., Spirax Sarco, or Watts Regulator Co

B. Provide strainers full line size of connecting piping, with ends matching piping system

materials. Strainers shall be Y-pattern type having 304 stainless steel screens with

perforations/mesh sizes as follows:

Pipe Size Coarse Straining

(typically at central

Plant equipment)

Medium Straining

(typically at terminal/

control equipment)

1/4 ” to 2” 1/16” 1/32” or 20 mesh


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 230515 - 2



Plant equipment)

Medium Straining


control equipment)

2-1/2” to 4” 1/8” 1/16”

5” and larger 3/16” 1/8”

C. Type WST-1

1. 2 inches and smaller, threaded ends.

2. Cast-iron or bronze body, screwed screen retainer with centered blowdown fitted with

drain plug.

3. Pressure: 400 psig (WOG).

D. Type WST-2

1. 2-1/2 inches and larger, flanged ends.

2. Cast-iron or steel body, bolted screen retainer with off-centered blowdown fitted with

hose end drain valve.

3. Pressure: 175 psig (WOG).

E. Type WST-3

1. Grooved Ends, 2-1/2 inches and larger, grooved ends.

2. Steel, ductile-iron or malleable-iron body and access end cap with off-center blowdown

fitted with hose end drain valve.

3. Pressure: 175 psig (WOG)

2.2 Y-TYPE STRAINERS, STEAM AND CONDENSATE RETURN PIPING

A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Apollo/Conbraco, Armstrong International, Spirax Sarco, or Watts

Regulator Co.

B. Provide strainers full line size of connecting piping, with ends matching piping system

materials. Strainers shall be Y-pattern type having 304 stainless steel screens with

perforations/mesh sizes as follows:



Plant equipment)

Medium Straining


control equipment)

1/4 ” to 2” 1/16” 1/32” or 20 mesh

C. Type SST-1

1. 2 inches and smaller, threaded.

2. Construction: Cast iron or bronze body, threaded ends, screwed screen retainer with

centered blowdown fitted with drain plug,


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 230515 - 3

3. Pressure: 250 psig (S).

D. Type SST-4:

1. 2 inches and smaller, screwed or flanged ends, Class 150.

2. Construction: Type 316 stainless steel body, screwed screen retainer with blowdown

fitted with hose end drain valve.

2.3 BRANCH CONNECTIONS

A. Branch connections shall be made with standard tee of the type required for the service unless

otherwise specified or detailed.

B. At Contractor's option, branch connections from headers and mains may be cut into black steel

pipe using forged weld-on fittings. Weld-on fittings shall conform to chemical and physical

requirements of ASTM A-234 and design and installation requirements of ANSI B31.1.

C. Weld-on fittings shall have a pressure rating equal to, or greater than, the maximum working

pressure of the pipe system where they are installed.

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Allied Piping Products Co. Branchlets (Shaped nipples), or

Bonney Forge Weldolet & Threadolet.

D. At Contractor's option, branch connections from headers and mains may be cut into copper tube

using mechanically extracted collars. Collars shall be formed in a continuous operation

consisting of drilling a pilot hole and drawing out the tube surface to form a collar having a

height of not less than three times the thickness of the tube wall. Main pipe shall be vacuumed

to clear all debris during collar forming procedure. Branch pipe shall be notched to conform

with the inner curve of the run tube and dimpled to insure penetration of the branch pipe into the

collar at sufficient depth for brazing. All joints shall be brazed. Mechanical formed branch

collars shall be UL listed.

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: T-Drill, Division of Serlachius.

2.4 ESCUTCHEON PLATES

A. Plates shall be installed on all pipes and conduit passing through floors, walls, partitions, etc., in

exposed areas.

B. Plates installed on pipe passing through core drilled openings in solid concrete without sleeves

shall be solid ring, cast iron with one set screw for sizes up to 4 inches and two set screws for

sizes up to 8 inches.

C. Plates installed on pipe and conduit passing through openings with sleeves shall be solid ring,

cast iron.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 230515 - 4

2.5 PIPE AND VALVE IDENTIFICATION

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: W. H. Brady Company, or Seton Nameplate Corp., Brimar

Industries.

B. Shutoff valves and control equipment shall be marked by means of a brass or plastic disc

minimum of 1 inch in diameter fastened to valve wheel or stem by brass wire or chain. Each

disc shall have a legibly marked identification number. A typewritten chart listing all valve tags,

location, and service shall be included in the operating and maintenance manual. The valve

chart numbering sequence shall be approved by Owner.

C. All piping installed as Work of this Division shall be identified by legend and flow arrow.

Identification system shall conform to ANSI A-13.1. Identification markers shall use ANSI

standard background colors and be text size. Markers shall be attached to pipe by wrapping with

color coded banding tape. Markers shall be located as follows:

1. Near each valve and control device.

2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units.

Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.

3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and nonaccessible enclosures.

4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed

piping.

5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.

6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 25 feet along each run.

2.6 FLEXIBLE PIPE CONNECTORS

A. Metal Hose Type

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Flexonics, or Keflex, Metraflex, Flex-Hose.

2. Connectors shall be constructed of a stainless steel corrugated core covered with high

tensile tubular braiding. Ends for piping 2 inches and smaller shall be screwed or solder

joint as required. Ends for piping 2-1/2 inch and larger shall be flanged.

B. Double Sphere Type

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Thermo Tech Type F/F/DS, or as approved.

2. Style: Molded twin/double sphere.

3. Material

a. Body: Molded heat-resistant rubber with nylon reinforcement.

b. Flanges: Carbon steel 150#

4. Rating: 150 psig at 230 degrees F.

5. Control/retaining rods or wire rope to prevent over extension on unanchored systems.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 230515 - 5

2.7 DIELECTRIC CONNECTIONS

A. Pipe joints connecting dissimilar metals shall be insulating, dielectric connections. Dielectric

connections shall also be furnished for joining similar metals in order to isolate cathodically

protected pipelines from adjoining pipe sections. Such joints, including dielectric material, shall

be rated to withstand the temperature, pressure, and other characteristics of the service for

which it is to be used, including testing pressure.

B. Screwed joints shall be made with insulating unions.

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Watts, or Stockham Valves & Fittings.

C. Flanged joints shall be made up with insulating gaskets, bolt sleeves, and washers.


2.8 THERMOMETERS, LIQUID IN GLASS

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Ashcroft Inc., or Ernst Flow Industries, Marsh Instruments, Miljoco

Corporation, Trerice, H.O. Co., Weiss Instruments Inc., Weksler.

B. General: Provide stem type glass thermometers, per Standard ASME B40.200, of materials,

capacities, and ranges indicated, designed and constructed for use in service indicated.

C. Case: Die cast aluminum finished in baked epoxy enamel, glass front, spring secured, 9 inches

long, acrylic or glass window face.

D. Adjustable Joint: Die cast aluminum, finished to match case, 180 degree adjustment in vertical

plane, 360 degree adjustment in horizontal plane, with locking device.

E. Tube and Capillary: Glass with magnifying lens, blue or red organic liquid (non-mercury), 1

percent scale range accuracy, shock mounted.

F. Scale: Satin faced, non-reflective aluminum, permanently etched markings.

G. Stem: Copper-plated steel, aluminum, or brass, for separable socket, length to suit installation.

1. Design for Thermowell Installation: Bare stem.

H. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of scale range or one scale division, to a maximum of 1.5

percent of scale range.

I. Range: Full scale range shall be selected to be approximately 1.33 to 2.0 times the normal

maximum operating temperature. Use the following ranges as a guide.

1. Chilled Water (40-75 degrees F max): 0 – 100 degrees F with 1degree F scale divisions.

2. Hot Water (120-180 degrees F max): 30 – 240 degrees F with 2 degrees F scale divisions.

3. Steam and Condensate Return: 50 to 400 degrees F with 5 degree scale divisions.

4. Conditioned Air Ducts: 0 to 160 degrees F with 2 degrees F scale divisions.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 230515 - 6

J. Thermowells:

1. Standard: ASME B40.200.

2. Description: Pressure-tight, socket-type fitting made for insertion into piping tee fitting.

3. Material for Use with Copper Tubing: Brass

4. Material for Use with Steel Piping: Brass or Stainless Steel.

5. Bore: Diameter required to match thermometer bulb or stem.

6. Insertion Length: Length required to match thermometer bulb or stem.

7. Lagging Extension: Include on thermowells for insulated piping and tubing.

8. Bushings: For converting size of thermowell's internal screw thread to size of

thermometer connection.

9. Heat-transfer compound: Used to improve thermal transfer and to eliminate condensation

forming within the thermowell. Compound shall consist of synthetic, efficient thermally

conductive ceramic or metal oxides in a homogeneous, non-hardening paste with

negligible bleed and evaporation loss. Compound shall not cause catalytic corrosion

between probe material and thermowell).

2.9 PRESSURE GAGES

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Ashcroft Inc., or Ernst Flow Industries, Marsh Instruments, Miljoco

Corporation, Trerice, H.O. Co., Weiss Instruments Inc., Weksler.

B. General: Provide pressure gages of materials, capacities, and ranges indicated, designed and

constructed for use in service indicated.

C. Type: General HVAC grade, 1 percent accuracy, ANSI B40.1 grade A, glycerine filled

phosphor bronze bourdon type, rotary brass movement with front recalibration adjustment

bottom connection.

D. Case: Aluminum or nylon, glass (or acrylic) lens, 4-1/2 inches diameter.

E. Connector: Brass with 1/4 inch male NPT. Provide protective syphon when used for steam

service.

F. Scale: White coated aluminum, with permanently etched black markings.

G. Set Hands: Where pressure gages are indicated for use across pump suction diffusers or

straining / filter devices, provide adjustable set hands to indicate recommended pressure ranges

of system.

H. Range: Select for normal operating pressure to be approximately mid range of scale with full

scale range shall be selected to be approximately 1.5 to 2.5 times the normal maximum

operating pressure. The following typical ranges are suggested.

1. Water:

a. 0 - 15 psig (between 2 to 10 psig max operating pressure)

b. 0 - 30 psig (between 10 to 20 psig max operating pressure)


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 230515 - 7

c. 0 - 60 psig (between 20 to 40 psig max operating pressure)

d. 0 - 100 psig (between 40 to 60 psig max operating pressure)

e. 0 - 160 psig (between 60 to 100 psig max operating pressure)

f. 0 - 200 psig (between 100 to 130 psig max operating pressure)

g. 0 - 300 psig (between 130 to 200 psig max operating pressure)

2. Steam:

a. 0 - 30 psig (Low Pressure – up to 15 psig max operating)

I. Gage Attachments

1. Snubbers: ASME B40.100, brass; with 1/4 inch NPT, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads and

porous-stainless steel filter-type surge-dampening device. Include extension for use on

insulated piping.

2. Siphons: Loop-shaped section of brass (for normal operating pressure/temperature up to

200 psi, 325 degrees F) or stainless-steel (for normal operating pressure/temperature

greater than for brass) pipe with 1/4 inch NPT pipe threads.

3. Ball Valves: Selected for working pressure suitable for application, with 1/4 inch NPT,

ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads.

2.10 PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE (P/T) TEST PLUGS

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Peterson Equipment Co., or Sisco, Watts Regulator.

B. Construction: Brass with NPT fitting and self-sealing, dual valve core type Nordel gasketed

orifice suitable for inserting 1/8 inch O.D. probe assembly from dial type insertion thermometer

or pressure gage. Equip orifice with gasketed screw cap and chain.

C. Pressure Rating: 500 psi and 275 degrees F.

D. Size: 1/4 inch NPT for installation in pipe sizes through 2 inches. 1/2 inch NPT for installation

in pipe sizes 2-1/2 inches and larger

E. Provide extension of length equal to insulation thickness for insulated piping.

F. Accessories

1. For hydronic systems with nine or less water coils, provide one 1/8 inch OD stainless

steel gage adapter.

2. For hydronic systems with ten or more water coils, provide one system test kit consisting

of one 2-1/2 inch dial face gage 0 to 200 psig, one 1 inch dial face thermometer 0 to 220

degrees F, one 1 inch dial face thermometer 50 to 500 degrees F, one 1/8 inch OD

stainless steel gage adapter, and carrying case.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 230515 - 8

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Contractor shall carefully follow the Drawings in laying out and installing his work. He shall



B. All equipment and accessories shall be carefully inspected for defects in workmanship prior to


removed from the jobsite. All equipment shall have factory applied markings, stampings, or


requirements.

C. Piping specialties shall be installed in accordance with the equipment manufacturer's

recommendations. A manufacturer's representative shall certify, in writing, any equipment

installation requested by Architect.

D. During construction all openings in equipment shall be kept closed except when actual work is




E. Provide flanges or unions at all final connections to equipment and traps to facilitate

dismantling.

F. Install strainers in horizontal piping, full size of pipe, in accordance with manufacturer's

installation instructions and as follows:

1. Water Piping:

a. Install with screen pocket pointing downwards.

b. Where installation in horizontal piping is not possible, install in vertical piping

with the flow downwards. Installation with upward flow is prohibited.

2. Steam Piping:

a. Install with screen pocket in the horizontal plane.

b. Installation in vertical piping is prohibited.

3. Install pipe nipple and hose end drain valve in strainer blowdown connection, full size of

connection, except for strainers 2 inches and smaller installed ahead of temperature

control valves feeding individual terminals.

4. Where indicated on Drawings, provide drain line from drain valve to plumbing drain, full

size of blowdown connection.

5. Where strainers are installed in pipe branches serving multiple terminals rather than at

each individual terminal, provide isolation valves on each side of the strainer to allow for

routine blowdown service without draining the piping system.

6. Replace any temporary fine mesh start-up screens if used during initial cleaning and

flushing of systems.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 230515 - 9

G. Unless otherwise indicated, branch take-offs shall be from top of mains or headers at either a 45

degree or 90 degree angle from the horizontal plane for steam, air, or gas lines and from top,

bottom, or side for liquids.

H. Pipe joints connecting dissimilar metals shall be insulating dielectric connections. Copper


temporary methods of support, by use of insulating non conductive spacers such as rubber,

fiberglass, or an approved equal. Pipe hangers for bare copper tubing shall be copper plated.

I. Thermometers shall be installed where indicated on the Drawings and in locations where they

are easily read from normal operating level. Install thermometers in piping systems in wells in

short couplings. Enlarge pipes smaller than 2-1/2 inch for installation of thermometer wells.

Ensure wells allow clearance from insulation. Fill voids between thermowell and thermometer

and sensor stems with heat conducting compound before installing in wells.

J. Pressure gages shall be installed vertically where indicated on the Drawings and in locations

where they are easily readable from normal operating level. Pressure gages installed in steam

systems shall be installed with a pigtail and stop. Pressure gages installed in water systems shall

be installed with a ball valve.

K. Install pressure/temperature test plugs in piping tee where required to allow for balancing and

troubleshooting without requiring permanent pressure gages and thermometers. Position on pipe

at most accessible and readable position.

L. Adjust gages and thermometers to final angle, clean windows and lenses, and calibrate.

1. Adjusting: Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best visibility.

a. For gages on straining/filtering devices, adjust set hands on pressure gages to

accurately indicate when service is required (approximately 50% above pressure

differential when clean (or as otherwise recommended by strainer/filter

manufacturer).

b. After installation, zero and/or calibrate meters and gages according to

manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Cleaning: Clean windows of meters and gages and factory-finished surfaces. Replace

cracked or broken windows, repair any scratched or marred surfaces with manufacturer's

touch-up paint.


Strada WVU Shroyer Hall Renovations HVAC Valves

PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 230525 - 1

SECTION 230525 – HVAC VALVES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED


installation of HVAC valves.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


1. Valves

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 VALVES

A. Furnish and install valves as specified herein and as scheduled in Part 3 – Execution, of this

Section. Insofar as possible all valves shall be of a single manufacturer.

B. Packings, gaskets, discs, seats, diaphragms, lubricants, etc., shall conform to recommendations

of the valve manufacturer for the intended service.

C. If space permits, install valves with stems horizontal or extending vertically upward unless

specifically shown otherwise. Valves shall be installed in accessible locations for operation as

well as for removal, repair, or replacement.

D. Valves installed in Insulated Piping: With stem or neck extensions of sufficient length to

accommodate insulation thickness and the following features:

1. Gate Valves: With rising stem.

2. Ball Valves: With extended operating handle of non-thermal-conductive material, and

protective sleeve that allows operation of valve without breaking the vapor seal or

disturbing insulation.

3. Butterfly Valves: With extended neck.

E. Provide Owner with one operating wrench for every ten (10) valves of each type (but not less

than 2 wrenches) not equipped with handwheels or levers.

F. Valve body materials shall be compatible with piping system materials.

G. Valves shall have right-handed threads.

H. Valves shall conform to the following schedules:


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 230525 - 2

BALL VALVE SPECIFICATIONS

Type Size Press.

psig


Manufacturer

BA-1 thru 2" 150S

400WOG

Threaded ends;

Bronze breakdown

style body;

Stainless steel ball;

Full port;

Teflon seats

Anvil

International

Apollo

Nibco

BALANCING VALVE SPECIFICATIONS

Type Size Press.

psig


Manufacturer

BL-1 thru 2" 125S Threaded ends;

Bronze body;

Square head plug cock

A.Y. McDonald

BUTTERFLY VALVE SPECIFICATIONS

Type Size Press.

psig


Manufacturer

BF-1 2-1/2"

thru 12"

150WOG Wafer type flange;

Cast or ductile iron body;

Ductile iron disc;

EPT or EPDM seat;

Stainless steel stem;

Thru 6"-10 position locking

lever handle;

8"-12"-Weatherproof

gear operator

Anvil

International

Crane

Milwaukee

Nibco

Stockham

BF-2 2-1/2"

thru 12"

150WOG Lug type flange;

Cast or ductile iron body;

Stainless steel disc;

EPT or EPDM;

Stainless steel stem;

10-position locking lever

handle (thru 6”);

Weatherproof gear operator

(8"-12")

Anvil

International

Crane

Milwaukee

Nibco

Stockham


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 230525 - 3

BUTTERFLY VALVE SPECIFICATIONS

Type Size Press.

psig


Manufacturer

BF-3 2-1/2"

thru 12"

150WOG High performance;

Lug type flange;

Carbon steel body;

Stainless steel disc with offset

shaft;

RPTFE seat and packing;

Stainless steel stem and trim

components;

10-position locking lever

handle (thru 6”);

Weatherproof gear operator

(8"-12")

Bray /

McCannalock

Series 40,

Cooper,

Cameron,

Dezurik,

Dynacentic,

Fisher,

Jamesbury,

Keystone,

Velan, or

Xomox


Type Size Press.

psig


Manufacturer

CK-1 thru 2" 150S Threaded ends;

Bronze body;

Regrinding swing type

Anvil

International,

Crane,

Hammond,

Milwaukee,

Nibco

CK-2 thru 2" 125S

200WOG

Soldered ends;

Bronze body;

Renewable bronze

disc swing type

Anvil

International,

Crane,

Hammond,

Milwaukee,

Nibco

CK-3 2-1/2"

thru

12"

125S

200WOG

Flanged ends;

Iron body;

Bronze trim;

Bronze disc swing type

Anvil

International,

Crane,

Hammond,

Milwaukee,

Nibco


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 230525 - 4


Type Size Press.

psig


Manufacturer

CK-4 2-1/2”

thru 12”

Class 125

200WOG

Flanged ends;

Cast iron body;

Bronze seat;

Bronze disc;

Stainless steel spring (non-

slam)

Milwaukee,

Nibco


Type Size Press.

psig


Manufacturer

GA-1 thru 2" 125S

200WOG

Threaded ends;

Bronze body;

Rising stem;

Solid wedge disc

Anvil

International,

Crane,

Hammond,

Milwaukee,

Nibco

GA-2 thru 2" 125S

200WOG

Soldered ends;

Bronze body;

Rising stem;

Solid wedge disc

Anvil

International,

Crane,

Hammond,

Milwaukee,

Nibco

GA-3 2-1/2"

thru

12"

125S

200WOG

Flanged ends;

Iron body;

Bronze trim;

OS&Y

Anvil

International,

Crane,

Hammond,

Milwaukee,

Nibco

GA-4 thru 2" 150S

300WOG

Threaded ends;

Bronze body;

Rising stem;

Union bonnet

Anvil

International,

Crane,

Hammond,

Milwaukee,

Nibco


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 230525 - 5


Type Size Press.

psig


Manufacturer

GA-5 2-1/2"

thru 12"

250S

500WOG

Flanged ends;

Iron body;

Rising stem;

Union bonnet

Anvil

International,

Crane,

Hammond,

Milwaukee,

Nibco

GLOBE VALVE SPECIFICATIONS

Type Size Press.

psig


Manufacturer

GL-1 thru 2" 120S

300WOG

Threaded ends;

Bronze body;

Non-metallic disc

Anvil

International,

Crane,

Hammond,

Milwaukee,

Nibco

GL-2 thru 2" 125S

200WOG

Soldered ends;

Bronze body;

Bronze or non-

metallic disc

Anvil

International,

Crane,

Hammond,

Milwaukee,

Nibco

GL-3 2-1/2"

thru

10"

125S

200WOG

& 450

Deg. F.

Flanged ends;

Iron body;

Bronze trim;

Rising stem;

Bronze or bronze

faced iron disc

Anvil

International,

Crane,

Hammond,

Milwaukee,

Nibco

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Valves shall be installed in accordance with the following valve schedule:


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 230525 - 6

VALVE SCHEDULE

Piping System

Valve Service

Shut-off Balancing Check

Boiler Blowdown GA-4 n/a n/a

Boiler Feedwater GA-4, GA-5 n/a CK-1

Boiler Isolation GA-1, GA-2, GA-3 n/a n/a

Chemical Feed GA-6 n/a CK-5

Heating Hot Water/

Chilled Water

BA-1

GA-1, GA-2, GA-3,

BF-2, BF-3

GL-1, GL-2, GL-3

BF-1,BF-3,

BL-1 (1)

CK-1, CK-2,

CK-3, CK-4

(2)

Low & Medium

Pressure Steam &

Condensate Return

GA-1, GA-3

BA-1, GL-1, GL-3

CK-1

Make-up Water BA-1 n/a CK-2, CK-3

Note 1: Balancing valve BL-1 to be used in coil piping bypass only. Refer to Section

23 57 10, Heat Transfer for venturi balancing valves.

Note 2: Install non-slam check valves in pump discharges.

3.2 INSTALLATION




B. All valves shall be carefully inspected for defects in workmanship prior to installation. Any

item found unsuitable, cracked, or otherwise defective shall be rejected and removed from the

job site. All valves shall have factory applied markings, stampings, or nameplates with

sufficient data for identification to determine their conformance with specified requirements.

C. Provide flanges or unions at all final connections to valves to facilitate dismantling.

D. Unless otherwise indicated, install all shutoff valves to coils, pumps and other equipment at line

size with reduction in size being made only at inlet to control valve or pump. Install check

valves and shutoff valves in equipment outlet or return lines beyond dirt pockets the size of

tapping in the trap or, if no trap, the size of the equipment connection.

E. Where possible, install valves with bonnets in an upright position.


Strada WVU Shroyer Hall Renovations HVAC Supports and Anchors

PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 230530 - 1

SECTION 230530 – HVAC SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED


installation of HVAC supporting devices.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


1. Roof Piping Supports

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 HANGERS, INSULATED PIPING


B. Hangers used with insulated piping shall be sized to accommodate the pipe, and insulation and

shall have a support shield to prevent the hanger from compressing the insulation. Hanger shall

be clevis type with rod and two nuts or bolt and nut.

2.2 HANGERS, UNINSULATED PIPING


B. Hangers for uninsulated ferrous pipe shall be clevis type with rod and two nuts or bolt and nut.

C. Hangers for uninsulated copper pipe shall be clevis type with bolt and nut and shall be copper

plated.

2.3 HANGERS, ROLLER TYPE


B. Hangers for piping 4 inches and larger shall consist of a single pipe roll support with adjustable

socket, rod and hex nuts, and an insulation shield. Where pipe insulation thickness requirements

exceed allowable overall outside diameter for use with insulation shield, provide instead pipe

insulation protection saddle, suitable for pipe insulation thickness specified.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 230530 - 2

2.4 INSERTS, PRECAST OR CURED CONCRETE

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Hilti HSL, or as approved.

B. A high integrity, torque controlled anchor for heavy duty fastenings. Loads shall not exceed

manufacturer's recommended weight.

2.5 BEAM CLAMPS

A. For pipe sizes of 3 inches and smaller:

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Anvil International, or Penn Pipe Hanger.

2. Clamps for attachment to I-beams and/or steel joists shall be malleable iron C-clamp with

hardened steel cup and point set screw and locknut.

B. For pipe sizes of 4 inches and larger:

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Anvil International.

2. Clamps for attachment to I-beams and/or steel joists shall be adjustable type with

malleable iron jaw, steel tie rod, nuts, and washer.

2.6 PIPE RISER CLAMPS


B. Pipe riser clamps for both insulated and uninsulated vertical pipe risers shall be 2-piece clamp

complete with 2 bolts and 2 nuts, sized for the OD of the bare pipe to be supported. Clamp shall

be carbon steel construction with galvanized finish for ferrous pipe and copper plated for copper

piping.

2.7 OUTDOOR INSTALLATIONS

A. All components of support and anchor systems installed outdoors shall be hot dipped galvanized

or stainless steel. Apply galvanizing-repair paint to any surfaces damaged during installation.

B. Any components that are not available in galvanized or stainless steel shall be properly

prepared, primed and painted using zinc rich primer and two top coats by brushing or spraying

to a minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils per coat. Paint color shall be as selected by Owner.

C. Equipment or materials stabilized with guy wires shall have turn buckles with lock wire, all

stainless steel. Submit proposed support plans to Architect for approval prior to installation.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 230530 - 3

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. The requirements of the applicable Sections of ANSI B31, Pressure Piping shall be considered

as minimum requirements governing fabrication, installation, and support of piping systems

except where more specific or stringent requirements are stated herein or shown on the

Drawings.

B. All piping and piping connected equipment, including valves, strainers, traps, and other

specialties and accessories shall be supported in a manner that will not result in excessive stress,

deflection, swaying, sagging or vibration in the piping or in the building structure either during

erection, cleaning, testing, or normal operation of the systems. Piping shall not be so restrained,

however, as to cause it to snake or buckle between supports or anchors, or to prevent proper

movement due to expansion and contraction. Piping shall be supported at equipment and valves

such that they can be disconnected and removed without further supporting the piping. Piping

shall not introduce any strains or distortion to the connected equipment.

C. Hangers, riser clamps, and supports shall be installed complete, including locknuts, clamps,

rods, bolts, couplings, swivels, inserts, and required accessory items. Hangers for horizontal

piping shall have adequate means of vertical adjustment for proper alignment of pipe, and shall

be provided with locknuts. All hangers, riser clamps, and supports in direct contact with copper

piping shall be copper plated or plastic coated.

D. Maximum spacing supports of horizontal piping shall be as listed below. Provide hanger rods in

diameters recommended by hanger manufacturer.

Pipe

Size

Uninsulated

Steel

Insulated

Steel

Copper

Tubing

1/2" 7' 7' 5'

3/4" 7' 7' 5'

1" 7' 7' 5'

1-1/4" 7' 7' 6'

1-1/2" 9' 9' 8'

2" 10' 10' 8'

2-1/2" 11' 10' 9'

3" 12' 10' 10'

4" 12' 10' 10'

5" 12' 10' 10'

6" 12' 10' 10'

8" 12' 10' 10'

E. Provide additional supports where pipe changes direction, adjacent to flanged valves and

strainers, at equipment connections and heavy fittings. Provide at least one hanger adjacent to

each grooved end steel pipe with mechanical couplings. Unless otherwise indicated on the

Drawings, support vertical pipe with riser clamps installed below hubs, couplings or lugs

welded to the pipe.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 230530 - 4

F. Inserts for supports in precast concrete slabs shall be drilled with rotary electric drill.

G. Beam clamps shall be used to attach hanger rods to structural steel.


Strada WVU Shroyer Hall Renovations HVAC Sound & Vibration Control

PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 230535 - 1

SECTION 230535 – HVAC SOUND AND VIBRATION CONTROL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. The Work of this Section shall consist of the labor, materials, and equipment required for

installation of sound and vibration control devices and materials to prevent sound transmission

and vibration to the building structure.


A. Section 230505, HVAC Basic Materials: Piping and ductwork penetrations.

B. Section 230515, HVAC Piping Specialties: Flexible pipe connectors.

C. Section 233010, Air Distribution: Flexible duct connectors.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


1. Isolators

2. Bases

B. Vibration Isolators and Bases: Submittal data shall show type, size, and deflection of each

vibration isolator proposed. Include clearly outlined procedures for installing and adjusting

vibration isolators.


A. Vibration isolation devices shall be designed and furnished by a single manufacturer or supplier

to assure single responsibility for performance of vibration isolators installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Vibration isolators and bases for outdoor installations shall be suitably protected to prevent

corrosion. Steel bases shall be primed and painted. Springs, nuts, bolts, etc., shall be cadmium

plated and neoprene coated. Spring housings shall be neoprene coated.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 230535 - 2

2.2 ISOLATORS

A. Isolator Specification No. 3

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Kinetics Noise Control Model RD, or Amber/Booth,

Vibration Mountings & Controls, Mason Industries, Vibration Eliminator Co.

2. Type: Molded neoprene pad.

3. Description: A double deflection elastomeric mounting having a steel baseplate with

mounting holes and a threaded insert at the top of or crossout the mounting for attaching

equipment. All metal parts shall be completely embedded in elastomeric material.

Elastomeric shall be neoprene or high quality synthetic rubber with anti-ozone and anti-

oxident additives.

4. Design: Mountings shall be designed for approximately 1/4 inch deflection and loaded

so that deflection does not exceed 15 percent of the free height of the mounting.

B. Isolator Specification No. 4

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Kinetics Noise Control Model NG (neoprene), Model KIP

(fiberglass), or Amber/Booth, Vibration Mountings & Controls, Mason Industries,

Vibration Eliminator Co.

2. Type: Neoprene or fiberglass pad.

3. Description: A pad type mounting consisting of two layers of ribbed or waffled neoprene

pads bonded to a galvanized steel separator plate, or a pad type precompressed molded

fiberglass isolator, individually coated with elastomeric membrane.

C. Isolator Specification No. 5

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Kinetics Noise Control Model SFH, or Amber/Booth,


2. Type: Hanger.

3. Description: A combination spring and elastomeric or fiberglass hanger consisting of a

rectangular steel box, steel spring, and an elastomeric isolation element, with a neoprene

or fiberglass construction.

4. Design: The elements shall be designed for approximately 1/4 inch deflection and loaded

so that deflection does not exceed 15 percent of the free height of the element.

2.3 BASES

A. Base Specification No. 3

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Kinetics Noise Control Model KSR, or Amber/Booth,


2. Type: Curb rail isolator.

3. Description: Isolator shall consist of a prefabricated extruded aluminum or a formed

galvanized steel rail system, incorporating 1 inch deflection freestanding stable springs

for vibration isolation, and a continuous air and water seal.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 230535 - 3

4. Construction: Rail sections shall include integral slot anchoring springs to the bottom

section, but allow horizontal adjustment. Spring elements shall meet specified

characteristics of spring isolators, specified herein, and shall be selected and located to

maintain a level rail assembly and uniform spring deflection of 1 inch after equipment is

installed. A continuous, integral, gravity, water seal and foam or neoprene air seal shall

be incorporated into rail sections, allowing no metal contact between top and bottom

sections.

5. Installation: Curb isolator assembly may be a one piece unitized assembly or may be

provided in multiple sections, designed to fit the base of rooftop equipment and

associated roof curb. Curb isolator shall have mitered corners with an integral alignment

and connection facility for accurate joining of side and end assemblies. Curb isolators

shall be field calked in accordance with instructions furnished by curb isolator

manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SYSTEM DESIGN

A. Vibration isolation equipment manufacturer shall be responsible for proper selection of spring

rates to accomplish the specified minimum static deflections for all spring and pad type

isolators, based on weight distribution of equipment to be isolated.

B. Vibration isolation equipment manufacturer shall be responsible for structural design of steel

beam bases to support mechanical equipment specified herein.

C. Minimum spring deflections shall be selected in accordance with latest ASHRAE Applications

Handbook, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.

3.2 APPLICATION

A. Vibration isolators and bases shall be installed in accordance with the following schedule:

VIBRATION ISOLATOR AND BASE SCHEDULE

Application Isolator Spec. No. Base Spec. No.

Boiler 4 Not Req’d.

Chiller, Rotary Screw 3 or 4 Not Req’d.

Fan, Centrifugal Suspended 5 Not Req’d.

Rooftop Equipment, Curb Mtd. n/a 3

Piping, Where Specified 5 n/a

* Isolators and bases are not required on air handlers with manufacturer furnished

vibration isolation in motor/fan sections. Confirm with Engineer.

** Provide chiller vibration isolation in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations,


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 230535 - 4

VIBRATION ISOLATOR AND BASE SCHEDULE

Application Isolator Spec. No. Base Spec. No.

if manufacturer does not provide recommendations install in accordance with schedule

above. Confirm with Engineer.

B. Provide hanger isolators for piping over 1 inch OD located in mechanical equipment rooms, and

for a minimum of 50 feet or 100 pipe diameters, whichever is greater, from connection to

vibration isolated equipment.

C. Provide hanger isolators for ductwork located in mechanical equipment rooms, and for a

minimum of 50 feet from connection to vibration isolated air moving equipment.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Installation of sound and vibration control equipment and materials shall be as indicated on

Drawings and accomplished in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Rigid connections shall not exist between equipment and building structure that will degrade the

sound and vibration control system(s) specified herein.

C. Sound and vibration control equipment and materials manufacturer, or his qualified

representative, shall be responsible for providing such supervision as may be necessary to

assure correct installation and adjustment of the sound and vibration control system. Upon

completion of equipment installation and after the system is placed into operation, the

manufacturer, or his representative, shall make a final inspection and submit a report to

Architect in writing, certifying the correctness of the installation and compliance with Drawings

and Specifications.

D. Rooftop Unit In-curb Acoustical Treatment

1. Alternating layers of sound barrier and acoustic insulation shall line the top surface of the

roof deck inside the curb as indicated on Drawings to reduce the noise levels radiated

inside the curb from the bottom of the rooftop unit to the occupied spaces below.

2. Decking shall be maintained inside the curb to a clearance of 1/4 inch maximum around

the duct drops but shall not contact the duct.

3. Sound barrier shall be overlapped a minimum of 3 inches.

4. Acoustic insulation seams shall be butted and insulation shall be packed in air gaps

around duct drops.

5. Seams for every layer shall be staggered.

6. Acoustic grade calk shall be applied in the following areas:

a. Around the entire curb interior perimeter.

b. Single bead at sound barrier overlaps.

c. Around duct drop penetrations through decking.


Strada WVU Shroyer Hall Renovations HVAC Insulation

PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 230710 - 1

SECTION 230710 – HVAC INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED


insulating HVAC piping, ductwork and equipment.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


1. Insulation Materials, including application thicknesses

2. Sealants, Adhesives, Coatings

3. Removable Insulation Covers

4. Self-adhering Waterproofing Membrane

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FIBERGLASS PIPE INSULATION SPECIFICATION NO. 1

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Johns Manville Micro-Lok (indoor) Manville Micro-Lok w/Zeston

2000 PVC (outdoor), or Owens Corning Fiberglas SSLII/ASJ (indoor) Owens Corning

Fiberglas SSLII/ASJ w/ Insul Coustic Metal Clad (outdoor).

B. Material: Fiberglass pipe insulation with all purpose vapor barrier jacket for indoor installations.

For outdoor installations, insulation jacket shall be 20 mil PVC or 0.016 inch polished

aluminum.

C. Properties


2. Temperature Range: 0 degrees F. to 850 degrees F.

3. Fire Hazard: FHC 25/50 per ASTM E-84 and UL 723.

4. For use on pipe sizes 1/2 inch to 12 inches.

D. Seams and Joints: Self-sealing (pressure sensitive) lap seams and matching butt strips.

E. Fittings

1. Fiberglass batt inserts with premolded PVC jacket:

a. Acceptable Manufacturer: Johns Manville Zeston 2000 PVC, or Foster Speed-

Line, Proto.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 230710 - 2

b. Properties: 0.28 max. K at 75 degrees F. mean, 0 degrees F. to 450 degrees F.

temperature range, FHC 25/50 fire hazard per ASTM E-84.

2. Fitting insulation shall be same thickness as adjacent insulation.

2.2 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC PIPE INSULATION SPECIFICATION NO. 2

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Armacell AP Armaflex , or K-Flex.

B. Material: Flexible elastomeric thermal pipe insulation. Black in color.

C. Properties

1. Maximum K Factor: 0.27 at 75 degrees F.


3. Temperature Range: Minus 70 degrees F. to 220 degrees F.

4. For use on pipe sizes: 3/8 inch to 6 inch.

D. Fittings, Joints: Mitered cut, same thickness as adjacent insulation.

E. Adhesive

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Armstrong 520 BLV, K-Flex 720, Foster Drion 85-75, or

Childers Chil Stix C-82.

2. Toluene free, VOC no greater than 50 g/L

F. Outdoor Installations

1. For outdoor installations, insulation shall be covered with glass fiber mesh embedded in

insulation adhesive and painted with insulation manufacturer's standard protective finish.

2. Acceptable Manufacturer: Armaflex WB Finish, or Foster 30-64.

2.3 FIBERGLASS DUCT WRAP INSULATION SPECIFICATION NO. 5

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Johns Manville Microlite, or Certain-Teed Standard Duct Wrap,

Owens-Corning Fiberglas All-Service Duct Wrap, Knauf.

B. Material: Exterior fiberglass duct insulation with foil scrim kraft laminated (FSKL) facing.

C. Properties


2. Density: 1.0 pcf or 1.5 pcf.

3. Temperature Rating: 250 degrees F. (maximum)

4. NFPA Requirements: Bulletins No. 90A and 90B.


D. Adhesive for Duct Insulation Attachment


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 230710 - 3

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Foster Quick Tack 85-60 or Childers Chil Quik CP-127.

2. Water-based adhesive meeting ASTM C 916, Type II.

3. VOC no greater than 50 g/L.

E. Tape for Sealing Duct Insulation Butt Joints, 2 inches Wide

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Elgen Air-Tite EDT-2.

2.4 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC SHEET/ROLL INSULATION SPECIFICATION NO. 6

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Armstrong AP Armaflex , or K-Flex.

B. Material: Exterior flexible elastomeric thermal sheet or roll insulation. Black in color.

C. Properties



3. Temperature Rating: Minus 70 degrees F. to 220 degrees F.

D. Adhesive

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Armstrong 520 BLV, K-Flex 720, Foster Drion 85-75, or

Childers Chil Stix C-82.

2. Toluene free, VOC no greater than 50 g/L

E. Outdoor Installations

1. For outdoor installations, insulation shall be covered with glass fiber mesh embedded in

insulation adhesive and painted with insulation manufacturer's standard protective finish.

2. Acceptable Manufacturer: Armaflex WB Finish, or Foster 30-64.

2.5 FIBERGLASS BOARD/SHEET INSULATION SPECIFICATION NO. 8

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Johns Manville 800 Series, Spin-Glas, or Owens-Corning 700 Series

Fiberglas, Certain-Teed CB-600, Knauf.

B. Material: Flexible or non-flexible fiberglass board or sheet with all-purpose vapor barrier jacket.

C. Properties


2. Density: 6 pcf.

3. Temperature Rating: 0 degrees F. to 450 degrees F.



PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 230710 - 4

2.6 POLYISOCYANURATE PIPE INSULATION SPECIFICATION NO. 12

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: ITW Insulation, Duna USA, Inc., or Elliott Co.

B. Material: Unfaced, preformed, rigid cellular polyisocyanurate material intended for use as

thermal insulation. For outdoor installations, insulation shall be covered with PVC Jacketing

material.

C. Properties

1. Comply with ASTM C 591, Type I or Type IV.


3. Flame-spread index of 25 or less and smoke-developed index 50 or less for thickness up

to 1-1/2 inches as tested by ASTM E 84.

D. Adhesive:

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Foster 81-84.

2. Type: Two component, thermosetting adhesive, with a service temperature range of

minus 310 to plus 200 degrees F.

2.7 REMOVABLE INSULATION COVERS SPECIFICATION NO. 13

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Ohio Valley Industrial Services Hot Caps™, or as approved.

B. Insulation: Fiberglass or closed cell foam, rated to 550 degrees F.

C. Jacket: Silicone-impregnated fiberglass cloth, silver in color.

D. Fasteners: “Hook and loop” Velcro® to overlap seams or straps.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Insulation shall be installed in accordance with the following insulation schedule(s). (Where

more than one insulation type is scheduled, Contractor shall have the option of choosing from

types listed.)


Service

Temp.

Range

Deg. F

Insul.

Spec.

No.


to

1-1/2" 2"

2-1/2"

to 4"

5" &

larger

Domestic Make-up

Water:

50-65 1 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2

2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 230710 - 5


Service

Temp.

Range

Deg. F

Insul.

Spec.

No.


to

1-1/2" 2"

2-1/2"

to 4"

5" &

larger

Steam &

Condensate Return ≤ 305 1 2 3 3 3

Hot Water 100-160 1 1-1/2 2 2 2

2 1-1/2 2 2 N/A

Chilled Water 40-55 1

2

1-1/2

1-1/2

1-1/2

1-1/2

1-1/2

1-1/2

1-1/2

1-1/2

Refrigerant,

Suction

All 1 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2

2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 N/A

2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 N/A

Condensate

Drainage

35-70 1 1/2 1/2 1/2 1

2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1

Boiler

Blowdown &

Feedwater

160-250 1 1-1/2 1-1/2 2 2

Outdoor

Chilled Water

40-55 1

2

12

1-1/2

1-1/2

1-1/2

1-1/2

1-1/2

1-1/2

1-1/2

1-1/2

1-1/2

1-1/2

1-1/2

1-1/2

DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE

Duct Type/Service Insulation Spec. No. Thickness, Inches

Rectangular Sheet Metal, installed within building thermal envelope:

Supply Air

5 1-1/2

Return Air

5 1-1/2

Exhaust Air Not required ---

Outdoor Air

5 1-1/2

Relief Air Not Required ---

Make-up Air

5 1-1/2

Round and Oval Sheet Metal, installed within building thermal envelope:

Supply Air 5 1-1/2


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 230710 - 6

DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE

Duct Type/Service Insulation Spec. No. Thickness, Inches

Supply Air, exposed in

conditioned areas (base bid) Not Required ---

Supply Air, exposed in

conditioned areas

(bid alternate #4)

5 1-1/2

Return Air 5 1-1/2

Return Air, exposed in

conditioned areas Not Required ---

Exhaust Air Not Required ---

Outdoor Air 5 1-1/2

Relief Air Not Required ---

Make-up Air Not Required ---

Rectangular Sheet Metal, installed outdoors:

Exhaust Air Not Required ---

EQUIPMENT INSULATION SCHEDULE

Equipment Insulation Spec. No. Thickness, Inches

Air Separator, Cold 6 1-1/2

8 1-1/2

13 (1)

Air Separator, Hot 8 2

13 (1)

Condensate Receiver 7 2

8 2

Expansion Tank, Cold 6 1

8 1

13 (1)

Expansion Tank, Hot 8 2

13 (1)

Chilled Water Pump Volute 6 1

8 1

13 (1)

Note 1: Insulation thickness to be determined by insulation cover manufacturer based on insulation

material and temperature application.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 230710 - 7

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General

1. Surface areas of all pipe and ducts to be insulated shall be clean and dry. Insulation shall

not be installed until all tests and inspections of the specific system(s) are complete.

2. All pipe and duct insulation shall be continuous through wall and ceiling/floor

penetrations except where specific sealing requirements are specified, i.e. fire-rated

separations. Where pipes pass through fire-rated floors, walls, or partitions, the use of a

UL approved system for through penetrations is required. The annular space around the

pipes shall be packed with mineral wool or other noncombustible material and sealed at

each exposed edge to maintain the rating of the system in accordance with the through

penetration sealant manufacturer's recommendations.

3. Insulate all components in piping systems, including valve bodies, inline air separators,

hangers, guides, anchors, and pump housings. Do not insulate traps, strainers, flexible

connectors, or expansion compensators. Maintain access to all servicing points and

nameplate data. Edges of vapor barrier insulation at valve stems, instrument wells, unions

and other raw edges shall be adequately sealed to prevent moisture from penetrating the

insulation.

4. Insulation on all cold surfaces shall provide a continuous unbroken vapor seal. Hangers,

supports, anchors, etc., that are secured directly to cold surfaces shall be adequately

insulated and vapor sealed to prevent condensation.

5. Adhesives, mastics, sealers, and coatings shall be applied at manufacturer's required

ambient conditions and recommended minimum coverages.

B. Insulation Protective Shields

1. Insulation protection shields fabricated from galvanized steel shall be installed at all pipe

hangers and supports. Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees.

2. Provide shield lengths and thicknesses as outlined in the latest version of the International

Mechanical Code or MSS-SP69. Minimum shield lengths shall be as follows:

Pipe Sizes,

Inches

Shield Length,

Inches

1-1/2 to 2-1/2 10

3 to 6 12

3. Rigid cellular glass insulation, capable of resisting the crushing effect of the hydraulically

loaded piping, shall be placed under each shield. Jacketing material shall be wrapped

around rigid insulation and adjacent top and butt sections to maintain the jacketing

continuity.

4. Stainless steel shields shall be installed on insulated piping located on the roof.

C. Removable Insulation Covers

1. Equipment shall be insulated to the fullest extent possible. Removable insulation shall be

provided for items that will require insulation removal for periodic maintenance or

inspection, including the following:


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 230710 - 8

a. Steam: Valves, strainers, pressure reducing valves, pressure relief valves, traps,

condensate receivers/pumps, flash tanks, heat exchangers.

b. Hot Water: Valves, strainers, pumps, heat exchangers, expansion tanks, air

separators.

c. Chilled Water: Valves, strainers, pumps, heat exchangers, air separators.

2. Provide removable insulation sections to cover parts of pumps that must be accessed

periodically for maintenance (i.e. strainers, grease fittings, vent/drain plugs or valves, P/T

ports) without damaging insulation or compromising vapor barrier. Include metal vessel

covers, fasteners, flanges, frames and accessories. Ensure that the bearing assembly

grease fittings remain accessible and visible, extending as necessary beyond insulation

thickness. Any vent slots on the sides and bottom of the bearing assembly shall remain

uncovered and completely open. Insulation on pump systems operating below ambient

dew point (such as chilled water) shall be insulated with closed cell foam with all joints

and penetrations sealed to maintain vapor barrier.

D. Fiberglass Pipe Insulation

1. All piping shall be cleaned of debris prior to installation of insulation and components.

Joints shall be butted firmly together. Longitudinal laps and butt strips shall be securely

fastened as recommended by the manufacturer.

2. Fittings, insulated with fiberglass blanket and PVC jacket shall be installed in accordance

with insulation manufacturer's instructions. All butt joints between longitudinal pipe

insulation and fittings shall be taped.

E. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Pipe and Sheet Insulation

1. Insulation shall be installed neatly with oversized pipe insulation and sheet insulation

being used for fittings and valves. For outdoor installations, completely wrap insulation

surface with glass fiber mesh and fully adhere/lag glass mesh to insulation with one coat

of insulation adhesive. Inspect for bonding of glass mesh to insulation surfaces before

applying specified weatherproof finish. Consult insulation manufacturer's

recommendations for coatings and sealants.

F. Duct Wrap Insulation

1. All insulation shall be applied with edges tightly butted. Insulation shall be secured with

adhesive which shall be applied to entire metal surfaces so that insulation conforms to

duct surfaces uniformly and firmly.

G. Fiberglass Board/Sheet Insulation

1. Insulation board/sheet shall be installed by means of weld pins or stick clips. Pins/clips

shall be located a maximum of 3 inches from all leading edges and a minimum of 12

inches on center for remainder of surface area.

2. Removable heads, cover plates, manholes, etc., shall be separately covered with unfaced

board/sheet with 1/2 inch insulating cement finish, leaving bolts and nuts accessible.

Leave nameplates visible.

H. Cellular Glass Insulation

1. Insulation shall be applied with all joints fitted to eliminate voids. Large voids shall be

eliminated by refitting or replacing insulation.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 230710 - 9

2. The service temperature limits of the joint sealer shall be in the range of cycling

temperatures to which it is exposed.

3. Fitting covers shall be applied in the same manner as pipe insulation. Insulation and

jacket shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

4. All elbows, fittings, and valves on below-ambient piping shall be vapor-sealed with vapor

barrier coating and reinforcing mesh.


Strada WVU Shroyer Hall Renovations Variable Frequency Drives

PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 231020 - 1

WVU DESIGN GUIDELINES & CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS

DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING

SECTION 231020 – VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1. DESCRIPTION

A. This specification covers Variable Frequency Drives (VFD), also referred to as: VSDs, AFDs,

ASDs, Inverters, AC Drives, consisting of a pulse width modulated (PWM) inverter designed

for use with a standard NEMA Design B induction motor.

B. The drive manufacturer shall supply the drive and all necessary options as specified here. The

manufacturer shall have been engaged in the production of this type of equipment for a

minimum of ten years. All VFDs installed on a project shall be from the same manufacturer.

1.2. QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Referenced Standards and Guidelines:

1. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE)

a. IEEE 519-1992, Guide for Harmonic Content and Control.

2. Underwriters Laboratories (as appropriate)

a. UL508

b. UL508A

c. UL508C

3. National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA)

a. ICS 7.0, AC Adjustable Speed Drives 4. International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC)

a. EN/IEC 61800-3

5. National Electric Code (NEC)

a. NEC 430.120, Adjustable-Speed Drive Systems

6. International Building Code (IBC)

a. IBC 2012 Seismic – referencing ASC 7-05 and ICC AC-156

B. Qualifications: 1. VFDs and options shall be UL508 listed as a complete assembly. The base VFD shall be

UL listed for 100 kA SCCR without the need for external input fuses.

2. The entire VFD assembly, including the bypass, shall be seismically certified and labeled as

such in accordance with the 2012 International Building Code.

a. VFD manufacturer shall provide Seismic Certification and Installation requirements at

time of submittal.

3. Acceptable Manufacturers

a. ABB ACH Series with By-Pass. b. Alternate manufacturer’s requests must be approved by WVU Facilities Management

and the Engineer of record during the design phase or during the bid phase through the


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 231020 - 2

request for substitution form. Approval does not relieve the supplier of meeting

specification requirements.

4. Factory authorized start up and owner training shall be provided.

1.3. . SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals shall include the following information:

1. Outline dimensions, conduit entry locations and weight.

2. Customer connection and power wiring diagrams. 3. Complete technical product description include a complete list of options provided. Any

portions of this specification not met must be clearly indicated or the supplier and

contractor shall be liable to provide all additional components required to meet this

specification.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1. VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES

A. The VFD package as specified herein and defined on the VFD schedule shall be enclosed in a

UL Type enclosure (enclosures with only NEMA ratings are not acceptable), completely

assembled and tested by the manufacturer in an ISO9001 facility.

B. The VFD package shall include a “BY-PASS”.

C. The VFD shall provide full rated output from a line of ±10% of nominal voltage. The VFD

shall continue to operate without faulting from a line of +30% to -35% of nominal voltage.

1. VFDs shall be capable of continuous full load operation under the following environmental

operating conditions:

a. -15 to 40° C (5 to 104° F) ambient temperature. Operation to 50° C shall be allowed

with a 10% reduction from VFD full load current.

b. Altitude 0 to 3300 feet above sea level. Operation to 6600 shall be allowed with a 10%

reduction from VFD full load current.

c. Humidity less than 95%, non-condensing.

D. All VFDs shall have the following standard features:

1. All circuit boards shall be coated to protect against corrosion.

2. All VFDs shall have the same customer interface, including digital display, and keypad,

regardless of horsepower rating. The keypad shall be removable, capable of remote

mounting and allow for uploading and downloading of parameter settings as an aid for

start-up of multiple VFDs.

3. The keypad shall include Hand-Off-Auto selections and manual speed control. The drive

shall incorporate “bumpless transfer” of speed reference when switching between “Hand”

and “Auto” modes. There shall be fault reset and “Help” buttons on the keypad. The Help

button shall include “on-line” assistance for programming and troubleshooting.

4. There shall be a built-in time clock in the VFD keypad. The clock shall have a battery

backup with 10 years minimum life span. The clock shall be used to date and time stamp

faults and record operating parameters at the time of fault. VFD programming shall be held

in non-volatile memory and is not dependent on battery power

5. The VFD’s shall utilize pre-programmed application macros specifically designed to


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 231020 - 3

facilitate start-up. The Application Macros shall provide one command to reprogram all

parameters and customer interfaces for a particular application to reduce programming

time. The VFD shall have two user macros to allow the end-user to create and save custom

settings.

6. The VFD shall have cooling fans that are designed for easy replacement. The fans shall be

designed for replacement without requiring removing the VFD from the wall or removal of

circuit boards. The VFD cooling fans shall operate only when required, based on the

temperature of and run command to the drive. VFD protection shall be based on thermal

sensing and not cooling fan operation.

7. The VFD shall be capable of starting into a coasting load (forward or reverse) up to full

speed and accelerate or decelerate to set point without tripping or component damage

(flying start).

8. The VFD shall have the ability to automatically restart after an over-current, over-voltage,

under-voltage, or loss of input signal protective trip. The number of restart attempts, trial

time, and time between attempts shall be programmable.

9. The overload rating of the drive shall be 110% of its normal duty current rating for 1

minute every 10 minutes, 130% overload for 2 seconds every minute. The minimum FLA

rating shall meet or exceed the values in the NEC/UL table 430.250 for 4-pole motors.

10. VFDs through 200 HP shall have internal swinging (non-linear) chokes providing

impedance equivalent to 5% to reduce the harmonics to the power line. Swinging choke

shall be required resulting in superior partial load harmonic reduction. Linear chokes are

not acceptable. 5% impedance may be from dual (positive and negative DC bus) chokes, or

5% swinging AC line chokes. VFD’s with only one DC choke shall add an AC line choke.

11. The input current rating of the VFD shall not be greater than the output current rating.

VFD’s with higher input current ratings require the upstream wiring, protection devices,

and source transformers to be oversized per NEC 430.122. Input and output current ratings

must be shown on the VFD nameplate.

12. The VFD shall include a coordinated AC transient surge protection system consisting of 4

MOVs (phase to phase and phase to ground), a capacitor clamp, 1600 PIV Diode Bridge

and internal chokes. The MOV’s shall have a minimum 125 joule rating per phase across

the diode bridge. VFDs that do not include coordinated AC transient surge protection shall

include an external TVSS (Transient Voltage Surge Suppressor).

13. The VFD shall provide a programmable loss-of-load (broken belt / broken coupling) Form-

C relay output. The drive shall be programmable to signal the loss-of-load condition via a

keypad warning, Form-C relay output, and / or over the serial communications bus. The

loss-of-load condition sensing algorithm shall include a programmable time delay that will

allow for motor acceleration from zero speed without signaling a false loss-of-load

condition.

14. The VFD shall include multiple “two zone” PID algorithms that allow the VFD to maintain

PID control from two separate feedback signals (4-20mA, 0-10V, and / or serial

communications). The two zone control PID algorithm will control motor speed based on a

minimum, maximum, or average of the two feedback signals. All of the VFD PID

controllers shall include the ability for “two zone” control.

15. If the input reference is lost, the VFD shall give the user the option of either (1) stopping

and displaying a fault, (2) running at a programmable preset speed, (3) hold the VFD speed

based on the last good reference received, or (4) cause a warning to be issued, as selected

by the user. The drive shall be programmable to signal this condition via a keypad warning,


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 231020 - 4

Form-C relay output and / or over the serial communication bus.

16. The VFD shall have programmable “Sleep” and “Wake up” functions to allow the drive to

be started and stopped from the level of a process feedback signal.

E. All VFDs to have the following adjustments:

1. Three (3) programmable critical frequency lockout ranges to prevent the VFD from

operating the load continuously at an unstable speed. The lockout range must be fully

adjustable, from 0 to full speed.

2. Two (2) PID Set point controllers shall be standard in the drive, allowing pressure or flow

signals to be connected to the VFD, using the microprocessor in the VFD for the closed-

loop control. The VFD shall have 250 ma of 24 VDC auxiliary power and be capable of

loop powering a transmitter supplied by others. The PID set point shall be adjustable from

the VFD keypad, analog inputs, or over the communications bus. There shall be two

independent parameter sets for the PID controller and the capability to switch between the

parameter sets via a digital input, serial communications or from the keypad. The

independent parameter sets are typically used for night setback, switching between summer

and winter set points, etc.

3. There shall be an independent, second PID loop that can utilize the second analog input and

modulate one of the analog outputs to maintain the set point of an independent process (i.e.

valves, dampers, etc.). All set points, process variables, etc. to be accessible from the serial

communication network.

4. Two (2) programmable analog inputs shall accept current or voltage signals. 5. Two (2) programmable analog outputs (0-20ma or 4-20 ma). The outputs may be

programmed to output proportional to Frequency, Motor Speed, Output Voltage, Output

Current, Motor Torque, Motor Power (kW), DC Bus voltage, Active Reference, Active

Feedback, and other data.

6. Six (6) programmable digital inputs for maximum flexibility in interfacing with external

devices. All digital inputs shall be programmable to initiate upon an application or removal

of 24VDC.

7. Three (3) programmable, digital Form-C relay outputs. The relay outputs shall include

programmable on and off delay times and adjustable hysteresis. The relays shall be rated

for maximum switching current 8 amps at 24 VDC and 0.4 A at 250 VAC; Maximum

voltage 300 VDC and 250 VAC; continuous current rating of 2 amps RMS. Outputs shall

be true Form-C type contacts; open collector outputs are not acceptable. Drives that have

only two (2) relay outputs must provide an option card that provides additional relay

outputs.

8. Run permissive circuit - There shall be a run permissive circuit for damper or valve control.

Regardless of the source of a run command (keypad, input contact closure, time-clock

control, or serial communications), the VFD shall provide a dry contact closure that will

signal the damper to open (VFD motor does not operate). When the damper is fully open, a

normally open dry contact (end-switch) shall close. The closed end-switch is wired to a

VFD digital input and allows VFD motor operation. Two separate safety interlock inputs

shall be provided. When either safety is opened, the motor shall be commanded to coast to

stop and the damper shall be commanded to close. The keypad shall display “start enable 1

(or 2) missing”. The safety input status shall also be transmitted over the serial

communications bus.

9. The VFD control shall include a programmable time delay for VFD start and a keypad


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 231020 - 5

indication that this time delay is active. A Form C relay output provides a contact closure

to signal the VAV boxes open. This will allow VAV boxes to be driven open before the

motor operates. The time delay shall be field programmable from 0 – 120 seconds. Start

delay shall be active regardless of the start command source (keypad command, input

contact closure, time-clock control, or serial communications), and when switching from

drive to bypass.

10. Seven (7) programmable preset speeds.

11. Two independently adjustable accel and decel ramps with 1 – 1800 seconds adjustable time

ramps. 12. The VFD shall include a motor flux optimization circuit that will automatically reduce

applied motor voltage to the motor to optimize energy consumption and reduce audible

motor noise. The VFD shall have selectable software for optimization of motor noise,

energy consumption, and motor speed control.

13. The VFD shall include a carrier frequency control circuit that reduces the carrier frequency

based on actual VFD temperature that allows higher carrier frequency settings without

derating the VFD.

14. The VFD shall include password protection against parameter changes.

F. The Keypad shall include a backlit LCD display. The display shall be in complete English

words for programming and fault diagnostics (alpha-numeric codes are not acceptable). All

VFD faults shall be displayed in English words. The keypad shall include a minimum of 14

assistants including:

1. Start-up assistant

2. Parameter assistants

a. PID assistant

b. Reference assistant

c. I/O assistant

d. Serial communications assistant

e. Option module assistant

f. Panel display assistant

g. Low noise set-up assistant

3. Maintenance assistant

4. Troubleshooting assistant

5. Drive optimizer assistants

G. All applicable operating values shall be capable of being displayed in engineering (user) units.

A minimum of three operating values from the list below shall be capable of being displayed at

all times. The display shall be in complete English words (alpha-numeric codes are not

acceptable):

1. Output Frequency

2. Motor Speed (RPM, %, or Engineering units)

3. Motor Current

4. Motor Torque

5. Motor Power (kW)

6. DC Bus Voltage

7. Output Voltage

H. The VFD shall include a fireman’s override input. Upon receipt of a contact closure from the


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 231020 - 6

fire / smoke control station, the VFD shall operate in one of two modes: 1) Operate at a

programmed predetermined fixed speed ranging from -500Hz (reverse) to 500Hz (forward). 2)

Operate in a specific fireman’s override PID algorithm that automatically adjusts motor speed

based on override set point and feedback. The mode shall override all other inputs

(analog/digital, serial communication, and all keypad commands), except customer defined

safety run interlocks, and force the motor to run in one of the two modes above. “Override

Mode” shall be displayed on the keypad. Upon removal of the override signal, the VFD shall

resume normal operation, without the need to cycle the normal digital input run command.

I. Serial Communications

1. The VFD shall have an EIA-485 port as standard. The standard protocols shall be Modbus,

Johnson Controls N2, Siemens Building Technologies FLN, and BACnet. [Optional

protocols for LonWorks, Profibus, EtherNet, BACnet IP, and DeviceNet shall be available.]

Each individual drive shall have the protocol in the base VFD. The use of third party

gateways and multiplexers is not acceptable. All protocols shall be “certified” by the

governing authority (i.e. BTL Listing for BACnet). Use of non-certified protocols is not

allowed.

2. The BACnet connection shall be an EIA-485, MS/TP interface operating at 9.6, 19.2, 38.4,

or 76.8 Kbps. The connection shall be tested by the BACnet Testing Labs (BTL) and be

BTL Listed. The BACnet interface shall conform to the BACnet standard device type of an

Applications Specific Controller (B-ASC). The interface shall support all BIBBs defined

by the BACnet standard profile for a B-ASC including, but not limited to:

a. Data Sharing – Read Property – B.

b. Data Sharing – Write Property – B.

c. Device Management – Dynamic Device Binding (Who-Is; I-Am).

d. Device Management – Dynamic Object Binding (Who-Has; I-Have).

e. Device Management – Communication Control – B.

3. Serial communication capabilities shall include, but not be limited to; run-stop controls,

speed set adjustment, and lock and unlock the keypad. The drive shall have the capability

of allowing the BAS to monitor feedback such as process variable feedback, output speed /

frequency, current (in amps), % torque, power (kW), kilowatt hours (resettable), operating

hours (resettable), and drive temperature. The BAS shall also be capable of monitoring the

VFD relay output status, digital input status, and all analog input and analog output values.

All diagnostic warning and fault information shall be transmitted over the serial

communications bus. Remote VFD fault reset shall be possible.

4. Serial communication in bypass (if bypass is specified) shall include, but not be limited to;

bypass run-stop control, the ability to force the unit to bypass, and the ability to lock and

unlock the keypad. The bypass shall have the capability of allowing the BAS to monitor

feedback such as, current (in amps), kilowatt hours (resettable), operating hours

(resettable), and bypass logic board temperature. The BAS shall also be capable of

monitoring the bypass relay output status, and all digital input status. All bypass diagnostic

warning and fault information shall be transmitted over the serial communications bus.

Remote bypass fault reset shall be possible.

5. The VFD / bypass shall allow the BAS to control the drive and bypass digital and analog

outputs via the serial interface. This control shall be independent of any VFD function.

The analog outputs may be used for modulating chilled water valves or cooling tower

bypass valves. The drive and bypass’ digital (Form-C relay) outputs may be used to actuate

a damper, open a valve or control any other device that requires a maintained contact for

operation. In addition, all of the drive and bypass’ digital inputs shall be capable of being

monitored by the BAS system. This allows for remote monitoring of which (of up to 4)

safeties are open.

6. The VFD shall include an independent PID loop for customer use. The independent PID

loop may be used for cooling tower bypass value control, chilled water value / hot water

valve control, etc. Both the VFD PID control loop and the independent PID control loop

shall continue functioning even if the serial communications connection is lost. As default,

the VFD shall keep the last good set point command and last good DO & AO commands in

memory in the event the serial communications connection is lost and continue controlling

the process.

J. EMI / RFI filters. All VFD’s shall include EMI/RFI filters. The onboard filters shall allow the

VFD assembly to be CE Marked and the VFD shall meet product standard EN 61800-3 for the

First Environment restricted level (Category C2) with up to 100 feet of motor cable. Second

environment (Category C3, C4) is not acceptable, no Exceptions. Certified test reports shall be

provided with the submittals confirming compliance to EN 61800-3, First Environment (C2).

K. DRIVE OPTIONS – Options shall be furnished and mounted by the drive manufacturer as

defined on the VFD schedule. All optional features shall be UL Listed by the drive

manufacturer as a complete assembly and carry a UL508 label.

L. BYPASS – Bypasses shall be furnished and mounted by the drive manufacturer as defined on

the VFD schedule. All VFD with bypass configurations shall be UL Listed by the drive

manufacturer as a complete assembly and carry a UL508 label.

1. A complete factory wired and tested bypass system consisting of a door interlocked,

padlockable circuit breaker, output contactor, bypass contactor, and fast acting VFD input

fuses. UL Listed motor overload protection shall be provided in both drive and bypass

modes.

2. The bypass enclosure door and VFD enclosure must be mechanically interlocked such that

the disconnecting device must be in the “Off” position before either enclosure may be

accessed.

3. The VFD and bypass package shall have a UL listed short circuit current rating (SCCR) of

100,000 Amps and this rating shall be indicated on the UL data label.

4. The drive and bypass package shall be seismic certified and labeled to the IBC:

a. Seismic importance factor of 1.5 rating is required, and shall be based upon actual shake

table test data as defined by ICC AC-156.

b. Special seismic certification of equipment and components shall be provided by

OSHPD preapproval. 5. Drive Isolation Fuses - To ensure maximum availability of bypass operation, fast acting

fuses, exclusive to the VFD, shall be provided to allow the VFD to disconnect from the line

prior to clearing upstream branch circuit protection. This maintains bypass operation

capability in the event of a VFD failure. Bypass designs which have no such fuses, or that

incorporate fuses common to both the VFD and the bypass, will not be accepted. Third

contactor “isolation contactors” are not an acceptable alternative to fuses, as contactors

could weld closed and are not an NEC recognized disconnecting device.

[Rev-0] 08/13

230509-7

230509-8 [Rev-0] 08/13

6. The bypass shall maintain positive contactor control through the voltage tolerance window

of nominal voltage +30%, -35%. This feature is designed to avoid contactor coil failure

during brown out / low line conditions and allow for input single phase operation when in

the VFD mode. Designs that will not allow input single phase operation in the VFD mode

are not acceptable.

7. Motor protection from single phase power conditions - the bypass system must be able to

detect a single phase input power condition while running in bypass, disengage the motor in

a controlled fashion, and give a single phase input power indication. Bypass systems not

incorporating single phase protection in bypass mode are not acceptable.

8. The bypass system shall be designed for stand-alone operation and shall be completely

functional in both Hand and Automatic modes even if the VFD has been removed from the

system for repair / replacement. Serial communications shall remain functional even with

the VFD removed. Bypass systems that do not maintain full functionality with the drive

removed are not acceptable.

9. Serial communications – the bypass shall be capable of being monitored and / or controlled

via serial communications. On-board communications protocols shall include ModBus

RTU; Johnson Controls N2; Siemens Building Technologies FLN (P1); and BACnet

MS/TP.

a. Serial communication capabilities shall include, but not be limited to: bypass run-stop

control, the ability to force the unit to bypass, and the ability to lock and unlock the

keypad. The bypass shall have the capability of allowing the BAS to monitor feedback

such as, current (Amps), kilowatt hours (resettable), operating hours (resettable), and

bypass logic board temperature. The BAS shall also be capable of monitoring the

bypass relay output status, and all digital input status. All bypass diagnostic warning

and fault information shall be transmitted over the serial communications bus. Remote

bypass fault reset shall be possible. The following additional status indications and

settings shall be transmitted over the serial communications bus and / or via a Form-C

relay output – keypad “Hand” or “Auto” selected, bypass selected, and broken belt

indication. The BAS system shall also be able to monitor if the motor is running in the

VFD mode or bypass mode over serial communications. A minimum of 50 field serial

communications points shall be capable of being monitored in the bypass mode.

b. The bypass serial communications shall allow control of the drive/bypass (system)

digital outputs via the serial interface. This control shall be independent of any bypass

function or operating state. The system digital (relay) outputs may be used to actuate a

damper, open a valve or control any other device that requires a maintained contact for

operation. All system analog and digital I/O shall be capable of being monitored by the

BAS system.

10. There shall be an adjustable motor current sensing circuit for the bypass and VFD modes to

provide proof of flow (broken belt) indication. The condition shall be indicated on the

keypad display, transmitted over the BAS and / or via a Form-C relay output contact

closure. The broken belt indication shall be programmable to be a system (drive and

bypass) indication. The broken belt condition sensing algorithm shall be programmable to

cause a warning or system shutdown.

11. The digital inputs for the system shall accept 24VDC. The bypass shall incorporate an

internally sourced power supply and not require an external control power source. The

bypass power board shall supply 250 mA of 24 VDC for use by others to power external

devices.

230509-9 [Rev-0] 08/13

12. There shall be a coordinated run permissive circuit for damper or valve control. Regardless

of the source of a run command (keypad command, time-clock control, digital input, or

serial communications) the bypass shall provide a dry contact closure that will signal the

damper to open before the motor can run. When the damper is fully open, a normally open

dry contact (end-switch) shall close. The closed end-switch is wired to a bypass system

input and allows motor operation. Up to four separate safety interlock inputs shall be

provided. When any safety is opened, the motor shall be commanded to coast to stop, and

the damper shall be commanded to close. This feature will also operate in Fireman’s

override / smoke control mode.

13. The bypass control shall monitor the status of the VFD and bypass contactors and indicate

when there is a welded contactor contact or open contactor coil. This failed contactor

condition shall be indicated on the bypass LCD display, programmed to activate a Form-C

relay output, and / or over the serial communications protocol.

14. The bypass control shall include a programmable time delay bypass start including keypad

indication of the time delay. A Form C relay output commands the VAV boxes open. This

will allow VAV boxes to be driven open before the motor operates at full speed in the

bypass mode. The time delay shall be field programmable from 0 – 120 seconds.

15. There shall be a keypad adjustment to select manual or automatic transfer to bypass. The

user shall be able to select via keypad programming which drive faults will result in an

automatic transfer to bypass mode and which faults require a manual transfer to bypass.

The user may select whether the system shall automatically transfer from drive to bypass

mode on the following drive fault conditions:

a. Over current

b. Over voltage

c. Under voltage

d. Loss of analog input

16. The following operators shall be provided:

a. Bypass Hand-Off-Auto

b. Drive mode selector

c. Bypass mode selector

d. Bypass fault reset

17. The bypass shall include the ability to select the operating mode of the system

(VFD/Bypass) from either the bypass keypad or digital input.

18. The bypass shall include a two line, 20 character LCD display. The display shall allow the

user to access and view:

a. Energy savings – in US dollars

b. Bypass motor amps

c. Bypass input voltage– average and individual phase voltage

d. Bypass power (kW)

e. Bypass faults and fault logs

f. Bypass warnings

g. Bypass operating time (resettable)

h. Bypass energy (kilowatt hours – resettable)

i. I/O status

j. Parameter settings / programming

k. Printed circuit board temperature

230509-10 [Rev-0] 08/13

19. The following indicating lights (LED type) or keypad display indications shall be provided.

A test mode or push to test feature shall be provided.

a. Power-on (Ready) b. Run enable

c. Drive mode selected

d. Bypass mode selected

e. Drive running

f. Bypass running

g. Drive fault

h. Bypass fault

i. Bypass H-O-A mode

j. Automatic transfer to bypass selected

k. Safety open

l. Damper opening

m. Damper end-switch made 20. The Bypass controller shall have six programmable digital inputs, and five programmable

Form-C relay outputs. This I/O allows for a total System (VFD and Bypass) I/O count of

24 points as standard. The bypass I/O shall be available to the BAS system even with the

VFD removed.

21. The on-board Form-C relay outputs in the bypass shall programmable for any of the

following indications.

a. System started

b. System running

c. Bypass override enabled

d. Drive fault

e. Bypass fault

f. Bypass H-O-A position

g. Motor proof-of-flow (broken belt)

h. Overload

i. Bypass selected

j. Bypass run

k. System started (damper opening)

l. Bypass alarm

m. Over temperature

22. The bypass shall provide a separate terminal strip for connection of freeze, fire, smoke

contacts, and external start command. All external safety interlocks shall remain fully

functional whether the system is in VFD or Bypass mode. The remote start/stop contact

shall operate in VFD and bypass modes. The terminal strip shall allow for independent

connection of up to four (4) unique safety inputs.

23. The bypass shall include a supervisory control mode. In this bypass mode, the bypass shall

monitor the value of the VFD’s analog input (feedback). This feedback value is used to

control the bypass contactor on and off state. The supervisory mode shall allow the user to

maintain hysteresis control over applications such as cooling towers and booster pumps.

24. The user shall be able to select the text to be displayed on the keypad when an external

safety opens. Example text display indications include “FireStat”, “FreezStat”, “Over

pressure” and “Low suction”. The user shall also be able to determine which of the four (4)

safety contacts is open over the serial communications connection.

230509-11 [Rev-0] 08/13

25. Smoke Control Override Mode (Override 1) – The bypass shall include a dedicated digital

input that will transfer the motor from VFD mode to Bypass mode upon receipt of a dry

contact closure from the Fire / Smoke Control System. The Smoke Control Override Mode

action is not programmable and will always function as described in the bypass User’s

Manual documentation. In this mode, the system will ignore low priority safeties and

acknowledge high priority safeties. All keypad control, serial communications control, and

normal customer start / stop control inputs will be disregarded. This Smoke Control Mode

shall be designed to meet the intent of UL864/UUKL.

26. Fireman’s Override Mode (Override 2) – the bypass shall include a second, programmable

override input which will allow the user to configure the unit to acknowledge some digital

inputs, all digital inputs, ignore digital inputs or any combination of the above. This

programmability allows the user to program the bypass unit to react in whatever manner the

local Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) requires. The Override 2 action may be

programmed for “Run-to-Destruction”. The user may also force the unit into Override 2 via

the serial communications link.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1. INSTALLATION

A. Installation shall be the responsibility of the mechanical contractor. The contractor shall install

the drive in accordance with the recommendations of the VFD manufacturer as outlined in the

VFD installation manual.

B. Power wiring shall be completed by the electrical contractor, to NEC code 430.122 wiring

requirements based on the VFD input current. The contractor shall complete all wiring in

accordance with the recommendations of the VFD manufacturer as outlined in the installation

manual.

3.2. . START-UP

A. Factory start-up shall be provided for each drive by a factory authorized service center. A start-

up form shall be filled out for each drive with a copy provided to the owner, and a copy kept on

file at the manufacturer.

3.3. . PRODUCT SUPPORT

A. Factory trained application engineering and service personnel that are thoroughly familiar with

the VFD products offered shall be locally available at both the specifying and installation

locations. A toll free 24/365 technical support line connected to factory support personnel

located in the US shall be available. Technical support offered only through the local sales

office is not acceptable.

B. Training shall include installation, programming and operation of the VFD, bypass and serial

communication. Factory authorized start up and owner training to be provided locally upon

request.

3.4. WARRANTY

A. The VFD Product Warranty shall be 36 months from the date of factory shipment. The

warranty shall include all parts, labor, travel time and expenses. A toll free 24/365 technical

230509-12 [Rev-0] 08/13

support line shall be available.


Strada WVU Shroyer Hall Renovations HVAC Pumps

PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 232110 - 1

SECTION 232110 – HVAC PUMPS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED


installation of pumps and pump specialties.


A. Section 230505, HVAC Basic Materials: Equipment nameplates and motors

B. Section 230535, HVAC Sound and Vibration Control: Vibration isolators and bases.

C. Section 231020, Variable Frequency Drives: VFDs.

D. Section 239010, Building Automation System: Controls.

E. Section 239510, Testing and Balancing of HVAC System: Hydronic system balancing.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


1. Pumps

2. Pump Specialties


A. Source Limitations: Obtain hydronic pumps of same type from a single manufacturer.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,

Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for

intended use.

C. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 778 for motor-operated water pumps.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Manufacturer's Preparation for Shipping: Clean flanges and exposed machined metal surfaces

and treat with anticorrosion compound after assembly and testing. Protect flanges, pipe

openings, and nozzles with wooden flange covers or with screwed-in plugs.

B. Store pumps in dry location.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 232110 - 2

C. Retain protective covers for flanges and protective coatings during storage.

D. Protect bearings and couplings against damage from sand, grit, and other foreign matter.

E. Comply with pump manufacturer's written rigging instructions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INLINE PUMP

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Armstrong Pump, Bell & Gossett, or Taco.

B. Type: Centrifugal, single stage.

C. Materials

1. Casing: Cast iron.

2. Shaft: Steel.

3. Shaft Sleeve: Brass or copper furnished under the wetted area of the mechanical seal.

4. Impeller: Brass or bronze enclosed type, hydraulically and dynamically balanced, keyed

to shaft, and secured by a locking capscrew or nut.

5. Pump: Cast iron, bronze fitted, single stage centrifugal with vertical split case, rated for a

minimum of 175 psi working pressure, equipped with gauge parts and suitable for

operation at 225 degrees F.

6. Pump Seal: Mechanical seal with ceramic seal seat and carbon seal ring.

7. Bearing Frame: Cast iron, fitted with oil lubricated bronze bearings.

8. Motor: Refer to Section 23 05 05.

9. Pump internals capable of being serviced without disturbing piping connections.

10. Factory tested, cleaned, and painted.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Inline pumps shall be installed with isolation valves, gages, and appurtanences as detailed on

the Drawings.

B. Diagrammatic representation of inline pumps on the Drawings is only for clarification of pump

location. Actual positioning of pump in the piping system, orientation of pump and motor, and

location of supports for pumps shall be in accordance with pump manufacturer's

recommendations.

C. Comply with inline pump manufacturer’s installation instructions for supporting pump to

maintain proper shaft alignment.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 232110 - 3

D. Contractor shall carefully follow the Drawings in laying out and installing his work and he shall



E. All pumps and accessories shall be carefully inspected for defects in workmanship prior to


removed from the jobsite. All pumps shall have factory applied markings, stampings, or


requirements.

F. During construction all openings in pumps shall be kept closed except when actual work is



from entering equipment.

G. Provide flanges or unions at all final connections to pumps to facilitate dismantling.


Strada WVU Shroyer Hall Renovations Air Distribution

PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 233010 - 1

SECTION 233010 – AIR DISTRIBUTION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED


installation of the air distribution system ductwork, and associated specialties.


A. Section 230505, HVAC Basic Materials: Access doors.

B. Section 230710, HVAC Insulation: Insulation of ductwork.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


1. Single Wall Spiral Round Ductwork, including fittings

2. Flexible Ductwork

3. Duct Accessories

4. Diffusers, Registers, Grilles

5. Louvers

6. Fire and Smoke Dampers

B. Submit complete shop (fabrication) drawings of entire ductwork system. Ductwork shop

drawings shall be drawn at a scale of no less than 1/4” equal 1 foot. Ductwork shop drawings

shall be prepared by the ductwork fabricator, or his representative, and shall indicate

coordination with all trades installing work in proximity of the ductwork indicated on the

submittals. Drawings issued as part of the Contract Documents, altered for the purpose of this

submittal requirement, will not be acceptable. Submit quantities of prints in accordance with

specified submittal procedures.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RIGID METAL DUCTWORK

A. Rigid metal ductwork and plenum chambers shall be fabricated from galvanized sheet steel

constructed in accordance with SMACNA, HVAC Duct Construction Standards – Metal and

Flexible based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated. , and the latest

publication of the ASHRAE Equipment Handbook.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 233010 - 2

1. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC

Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 1-4, "Transverse (Girth)

Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved,

duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction

Standards - Metal and Flexible."

2. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC

Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 1-5, "Longitudinal Seams -

Rectangular Ducts," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials

involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

3. Elbows, Transitions, Offsets, Branch Connections, and Other Duct Construction: Select

types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -

Metal and Flexible," Chapter 2, "Fittings and Other Construction," for static-pressure

class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and

other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and

Flexible."

B. Duct dimensions shown on Drawings are net clear inside dimensions.

C. Distance from floor to bottom of ductwork shown on Drawings is distance from floor to bottom

of sheet metal, excluding joint reinforcements.

D. Changes in duct sizes shall be gradual with a slope of approximately 15 degrees divergence

wherever possible; maximum 30 degrees divergence upstream of equipment and 45 degrees

divergence downstream.

E. Elbows shall be radius type made with an R/D ratio of 1.5. Square elbows with turning vanes

shall be used where shown on Drawings or where space does not permit the foregoing radius.

F. Laboratory exhaust system ductwork connected to fans F-1 and F-2 shall be fabricated from

stainless steel only.

1. First quality, cold rolled annealed, pickled, ASTM A240 and A480, Finish No. 2B for

concealed work and Finish No. 4 for exposed work. Unless otherwise indicated, use

Type 304L where welded duct construction is specified and Type 304 where non-welded

duct construction is allowed.

2. Use stainless steel sheet with all joints and seams butt-welded airtight.

3. Use longitudinal seam construction with seam at top on horizontal runs. Spiral seams are

not allowed on round duct.

4. Grind and polish smooth all interior joints

G. Un-insulated ductwork installed outdoors shall be fabricated from aluminum or stainless steel.

2.2 SINGLE WALL SPIRAL ROUND METAL DUCTWORK, LOW PRESSURE

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: McGill Airflow, or Semco Mfg., Inc..


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 233010 - 3

B. Low pressure/low velocity round metal ductwork shall be factory fabricated of galvanized steel

meeting ASTM A 527 71. Ducts shall be fabricated with spiral lockseam construction. Fittings

shall be galvanized steel, shall have a flanged saddle tap or slip joint and shall be produced by

the same manufacturer. Metal gages for ducts shall be as follows:

Duct Diameter Duct Gage

3" - 8" 26

9" - 22" 24

23" - 36" 22

37" - 50" 20

2.3 SINGLE WALL SPIRAL FLAT-OVAL METAL DUCTWORK

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: McGill Airflow Corp., or Semco Mfg., Inc.

B. Flat-oval metal ductwork shall be factory fabricated of galvanized steel, meeting ASTM A 527

71. Ducts shall be fabricated with spiral lockseam construction through 20 inch minor axis.

Fittings shall be fabricated of galvanized steel with continuous welds, and shall be produced by

the same manufacturer. Metal gages for ducts and fittings shall be as follows:

Major Axis Duct Gage Fitting Gage

to 24" incl. 24 20

25" to 48" incl. 22 20 (to 36") 18(to 48")

2.4 FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK, ACOUSTIC

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Flexmaster U.S.A. Type 1M, Thermaflex M-KE, or as approved.

B. Material: Acoustical round flexible ductwork consisting of helical wound corrugated steel with

PE (polyethylene) inner film, exterior fiberglass insulation and reinforced metallized vapor

barrier.

C. Properties:

1. Thermal Conductance: Minimum R5.

2. Temperature Range: Minus 20 degrees F to 250 degrees F

3. Working Pressure: 10 inches w.g. positive, 5 inches w.g. negative thru 16 inches

diameter.

4. Listing: ETL Class 1 Air Duct

5. Compliances: NFPA 90A and 90B

6. Flame Spread: Less than 25

7. Smoke Developed: Less than 50

D. Acoustical Performance Data: Minimum straight duct insertion loss in dB for 8 inch diameter,

9-10 feet long section at 2500 fpm velocity:


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 233010 - 4

Octave Band Center Frequency, Hz

125 250 500 1000 2000 4000

11 26 32 32 29 17

2.5 DUCT ACCESSORIES

A. Duct Sealant

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Foster, Childers, or Duro Dyne.

2. Duct joints and seams shall be sealed to minimize air leakage.

B. Duct Sealant, High Velocity

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Foster, Childers, or United McGill.

2. High velocity duct joints and seams shall be sealed as specified herein. Liquid duct sealer

shall be applied to male end only of slip type fittings prior to assembly. Single slip

fittings shall be secured with sheet metal screws following application of liquid sealer

and assembly of joint. Apply liquid sealer to outside of assembled joint in a 2 inch wide

band. Flanged joints shall be sealed with either a self adhering neoprene rubber gasket or

impregnated felt gasket adhered to flanged joint with duct sealer.

C. Volume Dampers

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Young Regulator Co. for dampers with smallest dimension 10

inch or less, Louvers & Dampers, Inc. for dampers with smallest dimension 12 inch or

more.

2. Opposed blade volume dampers shall be installed where indicated on Drawings. Each

dampers shall be equipped with adjustable quadrant regulator and lock. Dampers shall be

multiple blade. Single blade damper units will not be permitted. Maximum blade width

shall be 10 inch and maximum blade length shall be 42 inch. Longer spans shall consist

of multiple damper sections.

3. On externally-insulated ducts, mount quadrant regulators on stand-off brackets to

accommodate thickness of insulation.

D. Turning Vanes

1. Turning vanes shall be provided in all square elbows unless specifically noted otherwise.

Turning vanes shall be single thickness vane style, with no trailing (flat) edges. Vanes

shall be securely fastened to runners. Runners shall be securely fastened to ductwork. For

lined ductwork, runners shall be raised hat style to prevent damage to duct liner. Turning

vanes greater than 36 inch in length shall be braced at intermediate points with tie rods.

2. All turning vanes shall be fabricated and installed in accordance with SMACNA HVAC

Duct Construction Standards.

E. Volume Extractors

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Tuttle & Bailey.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 233010 - 5

2. Volume extractors shall be installed where indicated on Drawings. Extractors shall

consist of a series of radius vanes attached to a pivoting frame and mounting bracket.

Vanes shall be gang operated in synchronized motion. Operators shall be suitable for

exposed or concealed units but not limited to the following types:

a. Push pull operator strap through branch duct sidewall.

b. External duct (or ceiling) rotary operator and shaft assembly.

c. Worm drive mechanism with removable key operator.

F. Flexible Duct Connectors

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Ductmate, Duro Dyne, Elgen, or Ventfabrics.

2. Connector: 24 or 28 gage galvanized steel.

3. Fabric: Woven fiberglass, coated with neoprene. Water proof and airtight. Designed to

meet NFPA 701, 90A and 90B.

G. Take Off Fittings

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Buckley Air Tite, or Flexmaster.

2. Take off fittings for use in connecting flexible ductwork to rectangular duct systems shall

be prefabricated, galvanized steel, bellmouth fitting, with damper. A continuous neoprene

gasket shall be factory installed on the bellmouth flange. Take off fittings shall be same

size as flexible duct.

3. In lieu of prefabricated bellmouth fittings, take off fittings may be a prefabricated conical

tap in fitting. Straight tap in fittings will not be permitted.

H. Take Off Fittings

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Clevepak Corp., Flexmaster.

2. Take off connections for use in connecting flexible ductwork to rectangular duct systems

shall be straight tap-in type, prefabricated, galvanized steel construction, with damper.

Take off connections shall be same size as flexible duct.

I. Duct Access Doors

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Cesco Advanced Air.

2. Application: Install in ductwork within working distance of all fire dampers, smoke

dampers, motor-operated dampers to permit inspections and adjustments.

3. Construction: Reinforced with angle iron stiffeners and provided with a continuous edge

gasket for airtight fit. Insulated where installed in insulateadial Flow Diffusers duct

systems.

4. Closure Method: Double cam latch.

J. Backdraft Dampers

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Louvers & Dampers, Inc.

2. Backdraft (pressure relief) dampers shall be all welded, 14 gage aluminum constructed

frame and blades. Blades shall be double crimped, front and rear, and linked to work in

unison with blade stops and adjustable counterweights. Maximum blade width shall be 6

1/2 inch.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 233010 - 6

2.6 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLES

A. Ceiling Registers and Grilles, Exhaust, Return

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Tuttle & Bailey, or Anemostat, Carnes, Krueger, Metalaire,

Price Industries, Titus.

2. Construction: Extruded aluminum.

3. Standard Features:

a. 1 inch minimum frame width with mitered corners.

b. 1/2 inch x 1/2 inch x 1/2 inch cellular grid core.

4. Accessories: Opposed blade damper (register only).

5. Finish: Baked white enamel.

B. Sidewall Registers and Grilles, Exhaust, Return





a. 1 inch minimum frame with mitered corners.

b. Fixed position horizontal bars at 35 to 45 degree deflection and spaced 3/4 inches

on center.


5. Finish: Satin anodized aluminum.

C. Sidewall and Ceiling Registers And Grilles, Supply





a. 1 inch minimum frame with mitered corner.

b. Double deflection air foil shaped bars with adjustable horizontal front bars spaced

3/4 inch on center, providing greater than 80 percent free area.



D. Sidewall Direct Spiral Grilles, Return

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Tuttle & Bailey, or Titus, Anemostat, Krueger, Metalaire,

Carnes.



a. 1 inch minimum frame.

b. Perforated face.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 233010 - 7

c. Grilles shall be constructed with radiused endcaps and foam gaskets for a tight

seal.

4. Finish: As selected by Architect.

E. Sidewall Direct Spiral Registers, Supply

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Tuttle & Bailey, or Titus, Anemostat, Krueger, Metalaire,

Carnes.



a. 1 inch minimum frame.

b. Double deflection air foil shaped bars with adjustable horizontal front bars.

c. Grilles shall be constructed with radiused endcaps and foam gaskets for a tight

seal.

4. Accessories: Air scoop/extractor damper (register only).

5. Finish: As selected by Architect.

F. Square and Rectangular Diffusers

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Tuttle & Bailey, or Carnes, Anemostat, Krueger, Metalaire,




a. Overlap (anti smudge) margins.

b. Fixed pattern, multiple orifice, flush faced, removable center core.

4. Accessories:

a. Adjustable volume damper.

b. Diffusing grid.

c. Square to round neck adaptor.

d. Plaster frame (where required).

e. Leveling clips (for suspended ceilings).


G. Round Diffusers

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Tuttle & Bailey, or Carnes, Anemostat, Krueger, Price

Industries, Titus.

2. Construction: Steel.

3. Standard Features: Adjustable cone, removable center core.

4. Accessories: Adjustable volume damper.

5. Finish: Aluminum enamel.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 233010 - 8

2.7 Radial Flow Diffusers

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Titus Radia Tec, or Tuttle & Bailey, Anemostat, Krueger, Metalaire,

Carnes.

B. Construction: Aluminum.

C. Standard Features:

1. 5-3/4 inch low-profile back pan.

2. Hinged removable face.

3. 1-way or 2-way pattern.

4. Non-aspirating radial air flow pattern.

D. Accessories:

1. Open ceiling installation.

E. Finish: Baked white enamel.

2.8 LOUVERS

A. Stationary Waterproof Louver

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: American Warming & Ventilating, or Louvers and Dampers,

Airstream, Ruskin.

2. Construction: 6 inch deep all welded extruded aluminum.

3. Frame: Not less than .081 inch thick 6063 T5 alloy.

4. Blades: 3-1/2 inch to 4-1/2 inch centers with two reinforcing V's and integral downspouts

to drain water from louver blades.

5. Finish: Kynar 500, color as selected by Architect.

6. Certification: AMCA certified for air and water penetration.

7. Accessories: 1/2 inch mesh aluminum birdscreen.

2.9 FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS

A. Fire Damper, Primary

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Ruskin, or Cesco Products, Prefco Products.

2. Type: Multiple interlocking steel "curtain" damper.

3. Construction: Galvanized steel frame and blades; blades stacking out of air stream; for

rectangular damper with smallest dimension 12 inches or less, frame and blades shall be

out of air stream. Damper shall be suitable for vertical or horizontal mounting; labeled as

a dynamic rated 1 1/2 hour fire damper; constructed in accordance with UL 555.

4. Fusible Link: UL listed 165 degrees F.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 233010 - 9

5. Wall Sleeve: Contractor's option for manufacturer's accessory wall sleeve or contractor

fabricated, in accordance with SMACNA Duct Construction Standards.

6. Compliance: NFPA 90A.

B. Fire Damper, Secondary

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Ruskin, or Cesco Products, Metal-Fab, Inc., Prefco Products.

2. Type: Secondary fire damper may be a single or multiple blade "trap door" type, a spring

actuated, heat retardant (non asbestos) blanket type, or a single blade sliding "guillotine"

type.

3. Construction: Galvanized steel frame and blades (except blanket type). Secondary fire

dampers shall be designed for use as a heat barrier in duct outlets penetrating fire

resistive membrane ceilings as defined in UL Fire Resistance Directory and shall be

constructed in accordance with UL 555. Provide accessory extended frame where flexible

duct connection to damper impairs damper operation.


5. Compliance: NFPA 90A, "ceiling" dampers, horizontal mounting.

C. Combination Fire/Smoke Damper

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Ruskin, or Cesco Products, Prefco Products.

2. Type: Combination fire/smoke dampers shall be a multiple blade "air control" type UL

555S Class I rated damper furnished with the actuator specified herein for use with

approved smoke detectors.

3. Construction: Galvanized steel frames and blades. Damper shall be suitable for vertical or

horizontal mounting; labeled as a 1 1/2 hour fire damper, constructed in accordance with

UL 555S.

4. Damper Actuator: 120 volt motor factory installed. Damper blades shall be held open by

motor and close when electric power is interrupted by a power failure or smoke sensing

device. Damper shall reset automatically when power is restored.


6. Compliance: NFPA 90A and NFPA 92A.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Rigid metal ductwork and associated specialties shall be installed in accordance with

SMACNA, HVAC Duct Construction Standards, and the latest publication of the ASHRAE

Equipment Handbook. Rigid and flexible ductwork shall be installed in sizes indicated on the

Drawings with field supplied rigid metal transitions at connections to equipment duct collars.

B. Protect open ends of ductwork during construction, either stored or installed, with plastic

covering.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 233010 - 10

C. Flexible duct connectors shall be installed on inlet and outlet of each fan (with the exception of

F-9) and air handling unit.

D. Fire and smoke dampers shall be installed in accordance with the International Building Code,

SMACNA Fire, Smoke and Radiation Damper Installation Guide for HVAC Systems, and

manufacturer’s installation requirements. The UL label shall be visible for inspection from a

duct access door which is labeled to identify the damper type.

E. Rectangular sheet metal ductwork shall be insulated externally. Duct dimensions shown on

Drawings are net clear inside dimensions, that is, the inside dimensions of the duct insulation.

Refer to Section 23 07 10.

F. Flexible non metallic ductwork shall be connected to rigid metal duct fittings and terminal unit

duct collars by draw straps. Extend flexible duct insulation and vapor barrier over completed

joint and tape securely.

G. Manual volume dampers shall be installed in all branch ducts for balancing and as indicated on

Drawings.

H. Access panels shall be installed in inaccessible ceilings for access to air distribution devices

requiring adjustment, repair, or replacement. Refer to Section 23 05 05.

I. Installation of Exposed Ductwork

1. Protect ducts exposed in finished spaces from being dented, scratched, or damaged.

2. Trim duct sealants flush with metal. Create a smooth and uniform exposed bead. Do not

use two-part tape sealing system.

3. Grind welds to provide smooth surface free of burrs, sharp edges, and weld splatter.

When welding stainless steel with a No. 3 or 4 finish, grind the welds flush, polish the

exposed welds, and treat the welds to remove discoloration caused by welding.

4. Maintain consistency, symmetry, and uniformity in the arrangement and fabrication of

fittings, hangers and supports, duct accessories, and air outlets.

5. Repair or replace damaged sections and finished work that does not comply with these

requirements.

3.2 DUCT SEALING

A. Seal ducts for duct static-pressure, seal classes, and leakage classes specified in "Duct

Schedule" Article according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and

Flexible."

B. Joints in ducts outside building shall be made weather proof by soldering or welding.

3.3 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible,"

Chapter 4, "Hangers and Supports."


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 233010 - 11

3.4 DUCT LEAKAGE TESTING

A. Perform duct leakage testing in accordance with SMACNA “HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test

Manual” and submit written letter of compliance.

1. Disassemble, reassemble and seal segments of systems as required to accommodate

testing.

2. Conduct tests at static pressures equal to maximum design pressure of system. Do not

pressurize systems above maximum design operating pressure.

3. Maximum allowable leakage shall be SMACNA Leakage Class 3 for supply air ducts and

Leakage Class 6 for return air ducts.

4. Leaking joints shall be remade and retested until leakage is equal to or less than the

maximum allowable.

3.5 DUCT CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

Air System Pressure Class SMACNA Seal Class

Supply Ducts Connected to Central

Station Variable Air Volume Air

Handling Units and Packaged

Rooftop Units

Positive 3 inches w.g. B

Supply Ducts Downstream of

Variable Air Volume Boxes

Positive 1 inch w.g. C

Return and Relief Air Ducts

Connected to Central Station Air

Handling Units and Packaged

Rooftop Units

Negative 2 inches w.g. C

Outside Air Ducts Connected to

Unitary Equipment (heat pumps, fan

coil units, split systems, etc.)

Negative 1 inch w.g. C

General Exhaust Ducts Positive or Negative

1 inch w.g.

C

Special Exhaust Ducts:

Laboratory Exhaust

Positive or Negative 3

inches w.g.

B


Strada WVU Shroyer Hall Renovations Variable Air Volume Systems

PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 233020 - 1

SECTION 233020 – VARIABLE AIR VOLUME SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED


installation of variable air volume equipment.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit

1. Variable Air Volume Air Terminal Devices (SBD)

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Variable Air Volume Air Terminal Devices (SBD)

A. Refer to specification section 23 90 10 Building Automation System for Variable Air Volume

Terminal Device specifications.

2.2 INSTALLATION

A. CSC contractor shall furnish to Mechanical Contractor for installation of all air terminals

devices, sound attenuators, reheat coils and access doors as shown on drawings and according to

manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Mechanical Contractor shall install reheat coils control valves furnished by BAS contractor, and

shall provide necessary ductwork transitions as required for mounting equipment provided by

CSC contractor

C. Install VAV equipment in accordance with equipment manufacturer's recommendations.

Submit manufacturer's printed installation instructions with operating and maintenance data at

completion of Work.

D. Provide supporting steel for support of VAV equipment from substantial building structure. Do

not support VAV equipment from adjacent equipment, piping, or ductwork.

E. Provide sheet metal transitions as required for inlet and discharge connections of VAV

equipment.


Strada WVU Shroyer Hall Renovations Fans and Gravity Ventilators

PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 233410 - 1

SECTION 233410 – FANS AND GRAVITY VENTILATORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED


installation of fans and gravity ventilators.


A. Section 230505, HVAC Basic Materials: Motors


1.3 SUBMITTALS


1. Fans

2. Gravity Ventilators

3. Roof Curbs

B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for fans, including:

1. Selection characteristics and rated capacities.

2. Fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated.

3. Sound power ratings, with an 8 octave band analysis for large, central system fans.

4. General specifications: Fan type description, material of construction, thicknesses and

finishes.

5. Motor type, ratings and electrical characteristics

6. Accessories furnished

C. Shop Drawings: Include the following:

1. Plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.

2. Details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required

clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field

connection.

3. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication, including anchorages and

attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include auxiliary motor slides and

rails, and base weights.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 233410 - 2

D. Wiring Diagrams: Submit manufacturer's electrical requirements for power supply wiring to

fan units. Submit manufacturer's ladder-type wiring diagrams for interlock and control wiring.

Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are factory-installed and portions to be

field-installed.

E. Coordination Drawings: As required to meet project complexity, show fan room layout and

relationships between components and adjacent structural and mechanical elements. Show

support locations, type of support, and weight on each support. Indicate and certify field

measurements.

F. Maintenance Data: Submit operation and maintenance instructions, including lubrication

instructions, motor and drive replacement, and spare parts lists. Include this data, product data,

shop drawings, and wiring diagrams in maintenance manuals.

G. Field quality-control reports.

H. Manufacturer's published fan curve data shall be included with shop drawing submittal data for

fans. Fan curve information shall include operating point, RPM curve for operating point,

minimum and maximum RPM curves for fan, system curve and brake horsepower curves.

Tabular fan performance charts are not an acceptable substitute for fan curve data. Shop

drawing submittals for air handling equipment will be returned without Engineer's review if the

fan curve data is not included with the submittal.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,

by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Fan rating shall be AMCA certified.

1.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Fan Sound-Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating Fan

Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Test fans according to AMCA 300, "Reverberant

Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Fans shall bear AMCA-certified sound ratings seal.

B. Fan Performance Rating: Factory test fan performance for airflow, pressure, power, air density,

rotation speed, and efficiency. Rate performance according to AMCA 210, "Laboratory

Methods of Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance Rating."

1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish one set of extra fan belt(s) for each fan. Identify unit designation on packaging sleeves.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 233410 - 3

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Fan ratings shall be AMCA certified and statically and dynamically balanced and run tested at

the factory.

B. Bearings: Fans, except power roof ventilators, shall be provided with lubricating type bearings

with extended fittings as required. Extend grease fittings to safe, accessible locations.

C. Motors: Refer to Section 23 05 05 for motor requirements.

D. Accessories:

1. Belt guards: Where required, guards shall be fabricated to comply with OSHA and

SMACNA requirements, constructed of expanded metal mesh to allow for quick visual

inspection of belts and pulleys without removal. Guards shall be attached to equipment

with hinges and/or quick release fasteners that can be turned without tools to allow for

ease of maintenance. Secure to fan or fan supports without short circuiting vibration

isolation.

2. Access for Inspection, Cleaning, and Maintenance: Comply with requirements in

ASHRAE 62.1.

3. Scroll Drain Connection: NPS 1 steel pipe coupling welded to low point of fan scroll.

4. Roof Exhaust Fan Roof Curbs: Provide manufacturers roof curb with outer finish to

match fan. Provide hinging kit to allow easy access to damper. Curb shall be insulated

with 2 inch thick sound and thermal insulation.

2.2 CABINET FAN, TYPE CFD

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Greenheck Fan Corp., or Loren Cook Company, Broan, Carnes,

PennBarry, Solar & Palau.

B. Blower: Centrifugal, aluminum.

C. Housing

1. Insulated steel with discharge duct collar.

2. Integral backdraft damper.

3. Integral terminal box.

4. Removable fan motor and wheel assembly from housing.

5. Electronic speed controller.

2.3 CENTRIFUGAL ROOF FAN, TYPE RFD

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Greenheck Fan Corp., or Loren Cook Company, PennBarry, Carnes,

Solar & Palau.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 233410 - 4

B. Housing: Heavy gage spun aluminum.

C. Motor and Fan Assembly

1. Vibration isolated motor and fan assembly mounts.

2. Permanently lubricated ball bearing type motor.

3. Prewired to integral UL listed disconnect switch within fan housing.

4. Centrifugal fan wheel, statically and dynamically balanced.

D. Accessories

1. Gravity actuated backdraft damper.

2. Bird screen.

3. Insulated roof curb, 12 inches high minimum.

4. Electronic speed controller.

2.4 CENTRIFUGAL UPBLAST ROOF FAN, TYPE UFCB

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Greenheck Fan Corp., or Loren Cook Company, PennBarry, Carnes,

Solar & Palau.

B. Housing

1. Heavy gage spun aluminum.

2. Rain and grease collection/drainage area at base of housing.

C. Motor

1. Vibration isolated.

2. Permanently lubricated ball bearing type enclosed in forced air cooled motor

compartment sealed from exhaust air stream.

3. Prewired to integral UL listed disconnect switch within fan housing.

4. Adjustable motor pulley.

D. Fan Wheel


2. Centrifugal, statically and dynamically balanced.

3. Fan F-9 to have plastic coated wheel.

E. Accessories

1. Bird screen.

2. Variable pitch motor pulley.

3. Automatic spring loaded belt tightener.

4. Insulated roof curb, 12 inches high minimum.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 233410 - 5

5. Vented curb extension, where required.

2.5 CENTRIFUGAL UPBLAST LABORATORY ROOF FAN, TYPE ULD

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Greenheck Fan Corp., or Loren Cook Company, PennBarry, Acme,

Carnes, Strobic Air.

B. Housing

1. Welded steel with polyester resin coating.

2. Rain and grease collection/drainage area at base of housing.

3. High velocity conical discharge nozzle.

C. Motor


2. Fixed roller pillow block type or ball bearing or sized for L-10 life, 100,000 hours with

extended lube lines and Zerk fittings.

3. Prewired to integral UL listed disconnect switch in NEMA 3R enclosure.

4. Premium efficiency and VFD rated motor.

D. Fan Impeller


2. Centrifugal, statically and dynamically balanced.

3. Aluminum Type B spark resistant.

E. Fan Bypass Plenum

1. Modulating 24V supply air dampers with actuators and transformer.

2. Weatherhood over bypass damper with bird screen.

3. Welded steel with polyester resin coating.

4. Side Exhaust intake

5. Gravity backdraft isolation damper.

F. Roof Curb

1. Provide fan manufacturer’s accessory roof curb.

2.6 ROOF CURBS

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Pate Co. Style PC, or Roof Products & Systems Corp.

B. Construction: Galvanized sheet steel with continuous welded seams for stiffness and moisture

protection.

C. Standard Features


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 233410 - 6

1. Wood nailer.

2. 1-1/2 inch fiberglass insulation (or 1/2 inch sprayed urethane liner).

3. 12 inch minimum height or higher as required by application.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install fans in accordance with equipment manufacturer's recommendations. Submit

manufacturer's printed installation instructions with operating and maintenance data at

completion of Work.

B. Install fans level and plumb to prohibit excessive vibration and insure longer life.

C. Protect belts, sheaves, bearings, motors and other fan parts during installation.

D. Access: Provide adequate access and service clearance space around and over fans as indicated,

but in no case less than that recommended by manufacturer. Allow adequate and safe pathway

for components and unit replacement.

E. Isolation: Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in Section

23 05 35.

F. Duct Connections:

1. Minimize Fan System Effects: Avoid poor fan inlet and outlet conditions. Comply with

manufacturer’s installation guidelines.

2. Make final duct connections with flexible connectors.

3. Install ducts adjacent to fans to allow service and maintenance.

4. Provide access door in duct below power roof ventilators to service damper.

G. Secure roof-mounted fans to roof curbs with cadmium-plated hardware.

H. Electrical Connections: Ground equipment and connect control wiring according to Division 26.

I. Roof curbs provided as Work of this Section shall be coordinated with requirements of the

roofing subcontractor. Shop drawing submittals for roof curbs, with, or without, cants will be

considered in compliance with roofer's requirements.


A. Upon completion of installation of fans, and after motor has been energized with normal power

source, perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized

service representative to demonstrate compliance with requirements:

1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 233410 - 7

2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to

ducts and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload

protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect switches.

3. Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete.

4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify fan

wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive system, make

final alignments of pulleys and belt tension, and install belt guards.

5. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.

6. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts.

7. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in

connected ductwork systems are in fully open position.

8. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Controls and equipment will be considered

defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

9. Prepare test and inspection reports.

B. Remove and replace malfunctioning units that cannot be satisfactorily corrected and retest as

specified above.


Strada WVU Shroyer Hall Renovations Central Heating Equipment

PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 235010 - 1

SECTION 235010 – CENTRAL HEATING EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED


installation of the heat generation equipment and associated support equipment.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


1. Boilers, including burners and controls

2. Flue Pipe

3. Vent Pipe and Air Intake Pipe

B. Product Data: Include performance data, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and

accessories.

C. Shop Drawings: For boilers, boiler trim, and accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections,

details, and attachments to other work.

D. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.




intended use.

B. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label boilers to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure

Vessel Code.

C. UL Compliance: Test factory-built gas appliances for compliance with UL 795, "Commercial-

Industrial Gas Heating Equipment." Boilers shall be listed and labeled by a testing agency

acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1.4 EXTENDED WARRANTY

A. 5 years on heat exchanger.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 235010 - 2

1.5 BOILER SYSTEM START UP SERVICE

A. Provide complete start-up services for each boiler. Start-up services shall include

manufacturer’s recommended boil-out procedures, boiler manufacturer inspections during

construction, and burner manufacturer supervised start-up under direction of combustion

management system manufacturer. Each component of the boiler system shall be tested by the

component manufacturer and a summary of all tests shall be submitted by Contractor to the

Architect.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 HIGH EFFICIENCY CONDENSING BOILER

A. Manufacturer

1. Basis of Design: Fulton Endura

2. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: RBI Flexcore, Mestek KN, Camus Advantas.

3. Substitutions: In accordance with Division 1.

4. Alternate Manufacturer: Refer to Division 01.

B. Type: Factory assembled packaged low pressure hot water boiler suitable for forced draft

natural gas firing. Include fuel burning system, controls and boiler trim.

C. Service: Continuous long-term operation generating hot water at all loads from minimum to

maximum output requirements in conformance to the specified performance requirements,

shown in the schedules on drawings.

D. Performance:

1. Minimum Efficiency at Required Maximum Output: Refer to schedules on drawings.

2. Boiler shall be capable of operating under variable primary pumping setup.

E. Construction:

1. Codes: Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IV.

2. Heat Exchanger:

a. Boiler heat exchanger design/construction shall be one of the following:

1) Fire tube design, constructed of a SA53 carbon steel primary heat exchanger

and a 316L stainless steel secondary heat exchanger. The fire tubes and

tube sheets shall be configured in a one-pass combustion gas flow design.

The pressure vessel/heat exchanger shall be welded construction.

b. The boiler shall be capable of handling return water temperature down to

10 degrees C (50 degrees F) without any failure due to thermal shock or fireside

condensation. The boiler shall be designed so that the thermal efficiency increases

as the boiler firing rate decreases.

c. The heat exchanger shall be ASME stamped for a working pressure not less than

150 psig. The boiler water pressure drop shall not exceed 2 psig at the design flow

rate.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 235010 - 3

d. There shall be removable access covers on the heat exchanger headers for the

purposes of inspection, cleaning or repair. The heat exchanger shall have

externally accessible boiler drains.

3. Insulation: Boiler manufacturer's standard and experience proven design except

insulation on the boiler shell shall be a minimum of 50 mm (two inches) thick. No part of

the external casing shall exceed 33 degrees C (60 degrees F) above ambient, except for

areas within 300 mm (one foot) of the casing penetrations.

4. Casing: Galvanized steel casing covering all areas of boiler shell. All openings in the

casing shall be gasketed and sealed.

5. Skids/Bases: Boilers shall be factory-installed on the factory-fabricated skids/bases.

F. Finish

1. Provide surface preparation, heat resistant prime and finish coats using standard color of

the boiler manufacturer.

G. Boiler Trim (Accessories):

1. Conform to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IV

2. Relief Valves:

a. Provide one (1) ASME rated relief valve per boiler. The valve shall be sized to

relieve full boiler capacity. Type: Bronze bodies, side outlet, threaded inlet and

outlet, lifting lever, stainless steel trim and o-ring EPDM seats.

b. Settings and Adjustments: Factory set, sealed, and stamped on nameplate. Valves

shall be set to relieve at the ASME working pressure.

3. Pressure Gage:

a. Case: Turret style, bottom connection, threaded ring, blowout disc in rear.

b. Dial: 75 mm (3-1/4 inch) minimum diameter, non-corrosive, black markings on

white background.

c. Measuring Element: Bourdon tube designed for hot water service.

d. Movement: Stainless steel, rotary.

e. Accuracy: One half percent of the full span.

f. Range: 0 - 100 psi gage.

4. Water Level Safety Controls:

a. Provide primary and auxiliary low water burner cutoffs. Primary and auxiliary low

water burner cutoff devices shall be in two separate water columns, piped

individually to the boiler water spaces. One device shall be float-type, the other

device shall be conductivity probes. Primary and auxiliary cutoffs shall require

manual reset. Auxiliary cutoff shall shut down power to the burner.

5. Factory Switch Safety Control:

a. Provide flow switch to disable burner in event of loss of flow through the boiler.

b. Type: Brass body, paddle arm and pivot shaft.

c. Electric Switch: Cam acting type with adjustable flow sensitivity.

d. Ratings: 121 degrees C(250 degrees F), 1100kPA (160 psig).

6. Condensate drain connection and manufacturer supplied kit must be supplied for all

condensing boilers.

H. Burner and Fuel Trains:


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 235010 - 4

1. Burner Type: Natural gas , packaged, forced draft, modulating firing,.

a. Gas Burner: Ring type with multiple ports or spuds.

2. Service:

a. Continuous operation at all firing rates on each fuel listed under Article, PROJECT

CONDITIONS of Part 1. Design the entire burner and fuel train system for

application to the specific boiler furnished and for service at the available fuel

pressures.

b. Main Fuels: Natural gas.

3. Performance:

a. Main flame shall ignite at lowest firing rate.

b. Main flame characteristics at all firing rates:

1) Flame retained at the burner.

2) Flame stable with no blow-off from the burner or flashback into the burner.

No pulsations.

3) No deposits of unburned fuel or carbon at any location.

4) No carryover of flame beyond the end of the first pass (furnace tube).

c. Operation:

1) Minimum turndown 5:1 for dual fuel or 3:1 for single fuel.

2) Operate at all loads on any one fuel without any manual changes to burners,

fuel trains or fuel pressures.

3) Performance at any load point shall be repeatable after increasing or

decreasing the firing rate.

4) Noise and Vibration: Refer to Section 23 05 51, NOISE and VIBRATION

CONTROL FOR BOILER PLANT for requirements on forced draft fan.

Burners shall operate without pulsation.

4. Construction:

a. Burner Access (Main Burner and Igniter): Arrange fuel valve and piping trains,

controls and other devices so that they do not interfere with the removal and

replacement of burner parts.

b. Arrangement of Fuel Valve and Piping Trains: All devices shall be accessible for

maintenance or replacement without removal of other devices. Do not attach any

piping or devices to boiler casings.

c. Coatings: Provide surface preparation, heat resistant prime and finish coats using

standard color of boiler manufacturer.

5. Natural Gas Main Fuel Train:

a. Arrangement: Comply with ANSI requirements.

b. Pressure Regulator:

1) Single seated, diaphragm operated, designed for natural gas service.

Controlled pressure shall be sensed downstream of main valve. Valve may

be self-operated or pilot-operated as necessary to comply with performance

requirements.

6. Automatic Safety Shut Off Valves:

a. Type: Motorized opening, spring closing, controlled by burner control system.

Two valves required.

b. Service: Provide open shut control of fuel flow to burner. Valves shall shut bubble

tight and be suitable for operation with upstream pressure of two times the highest

pressure at entrance to boiler mounted regulators.

c. Approval: FM approved, UL listed for burner service.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 235010 - 5

7. Automatic Vent Valve:

a. Type: Motorized or solenoid closing, spring opening, full port, controlled by

burner control system.

8. Pressure Switches: Switch settings must be within 20% of the controlled pressure.

9. Fuel Flow Control Valve:

a. Type: Throttling, controlled by combustion control system.

b. Performance and Service: Control fuel flow in exact proportion to combustion

airflow over the entire firing range of the burner.

I. Boiler Control, Burner Management (Flame Safeguard) System and Accessories:

1. The boiler control system shall be provided by the boiler manufacturer to control the

burner incorporating all required safeties. The entire system shall be UL listed and FM

approved.

2. Provide a complete automatic safety control and monitoring system for burner ignition

sequencing, operating cycle, and shut-down sequencing. System shall include

microprocessor programmer, self-checking flame scanner, burner cycle display,

diagnostic annunciation display, burner safety shut down interlocks, communication with

monitoring systems, and accessories.

3. Control Panel:

a. Controls shall be mounted in NEMA 4 enclosure on side of boiler or on burner.

There shall be no power wiring in this enclosure.

b. Electrical: Provide circuit breakers, transformers, all devices for complete control

system. All control electronics and relays shall be in waterproof UL 50 compliant

NEMA 4X panels.

c. The control panel shall include individual circuit boards in a single enclosure

which houses all control functions. Each board shall be individually field

replaceable. The combustion safeguard/flame monitoring system shall utilize

spark ignition and a rectification type flame sensor.

d. The control panel hardware shall support both RS-232 and RS-485 remote

communications. The controls shall annunciate boiler & sensor status and include

extensive self-diagnostic capabilities that incorporate a minimum of 8 separate

status messages and 34 separate fault messages.

4. The boiler control system shall incorporate the following additional features for enhanced

external system interface: system start temperature feature; pump delay timer; auxiliary

start delay timer; auxiliary temperature sensor; mA output feature which allows for

simple monitoring of either temperature setpoint, outlet temperature, or fire rate; remote

interlock circuit; delayed interlock circuit; and fault relay for simple remote fault alarm.

5. Each boiler shall utilize an electric single seated safety shutoff valve with proof of

closure switch in its gas train and incorporate dual over-temperature protection with

manual reset in accordance with ASME Section IV and CSD-1.

6. Temperature Control Modes - Boiler shall include integral factory wired operating

controls to completely control and operate the boiler. The boiler(s) shall operate in the

control modes listed below:

a. Internal Setpoint

b. Indoor/Outdoor Reset

c. 4ma to 20ma Temperature Setpoint

d. Network Temperature Setpoint


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 235010 - 6

e. Boiler Management System

The first four control modes refer to independent boiler settings, while the last control

mode refer to banks of boilers operated as a system by manufacturer supplied Boiler

Management System. The Boiler Management System shall be programmed to operate

the entire bank of boilers in either of the first four control modes.

7. Boiler Management System:

a. The Boiler Manufacturer shall supply as part of the boiler package a completely

integrated Boiler Management System to control all operation and energy input of

the multiple boiler heating plant. The Boiler Management System shall be

comprised of a microprocessor based control utilizing the open protocol to

communicate with the Boilers via the RS-485 port.

b. The controller shall have the ability to control each individual boiler throughout its

full modulating range. The Boiler Management System shall provide contact

closure for auxiliary equipment such as system pumps and combustion air inlet

dampers based upon outdoor air temperature.

8. Controls Interoperability:

a. The boiler control panel shall utilize open protocol to interface with third party

Building Automation Systems (BAS).

b. The BACnet controls interface shall utilize an interface/translator as required

between the BAS and either the RS-485 port of the boiler control panel or the RS-

232 port of the Boiler Management System.

9. Factory Testing: Install controls on boiler and burner at factory and test operation of all

devices.

10. Refer to Section 23 09 23, DIRECT-DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC.

J. Boiler Vent/Combustion Air Piping:

1. The boiler vent shall be provided in accordance with applicable national codes (ANSI

Z223.1), NFPA standards (NFPA 54) and per the boiler manufacturers’

recommendations.

2. The boiler vent shall be an approved AL29-4C stainless steel venting system and

components for cold-start condensate positive pressure Category IV stack and breeching

of the double wall construction with a 25mm (1 inch) annular insulating air space, outer

wall constructed of 304 stainless steel and inner wall constructed of type AL29-4C

stainless steel. Vent components exposed to the atmosphere shall be type 304 stainless

steel.

3. The combustion air conduit shall be PVC or CPVC pipe// utilizing a vacuum relief

damper sized equal in diameter to the intake pipe//.

4. All supports, vent caps, adapters, flashing and drain fittings shall be included by and as

recommended by the manufacturer.

2.2 VENT PIPE, HIGH EFFICIENCY BOILER

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Metal Fab Corr/Guard CG, or Metalbestos, Dura Vent Corp., Van

Packer, Ampco.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 235010 - 7

B. General: Flue pipe shall have 1 inch air space, double-wall constructed of 0.015 inch AL29-4C

stainless steel inner pipe and 0.018 inch aluminized steel outer pipe. Suitable for 550 degrees F

operating temperature.

C. Codes: Flue pipe shall be UL approved and comply with NFPA standards 37 and 211. Flue pipe

shall be installed in accordance with requirements of local utility and flue manufacturer's

recommendations.

D. Accessories: Provide required quantity of flue pipe sections and fittings to complete flue pipe

installation indicated on Drawings, including straight (fixed, adjustable or variable lengths)

sections, tees, wyes and elbows. In addition, provide the following accessories to complete the

installation in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations:

1. Stack cap

2. Increaser/reducer

3. Roof support assembly

4. Ventilated roof thimble

5. Stack closure ring

6. Storm collar

7. Ceiling Penetration

8. Ceiling support & guide assemblies

9. Guy section & guy tensioners

2.3 AIR INTAKE PIPE, HIGH EFFICIENCY BOILER

A. PVC Pipe: ASTM D1785, Schedule 40 or ASTM D1785, Schedule 80 or ASTM D2241, Class

160, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) material.

1. Fittings: ASTM D2466, Schedule 40, PVC or ASTM D2467, Schedule 80, PVC or

ASTM D2464 PVC threaded.

2. Joints: ASTM D2855, solvent weld with ASTM D2564 solvent cement. Prime joints with

a contrasting color.

B. CPVC Pipe: ASTM F441/F441M, Schedule 40 80, chlorinated polyvinyl chloride (CPVC)

material.

1. Fittings: ASTM F438, CPVC, Schedule 40, socket type or ASTM F439, CPVC, Schedule

80, socket type or ASTM F437, CPVC, Schedule 80, threaded.

2. Joints: ASTM D2846/D2846M, solvent weld with ASTM F493 solvent cement. Prime

joints with a contrasting color.

C. ABS Pipe: ASTM D2661, Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) material.

1. Fittings: ABS, ASTM D2661 or ABS, ASTM D3311.

2. Joints: ASTM D2235, solvent weld applied after cleaning.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 235010 - 8

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Boiler(s) shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's erection/installation procedures.

Submit manufacturer's printed installation instructions with operating and maintenance data at

completion of Work.

B. Consult water treatment supplier before boiler and water system are filled. Treatment chemicals

shall be added at time of initial charge.

C. Contractor shall be responsible for installation and start-up of all Owner supplied equipment.

D. Submit “Intent to Install Boiler” form to PA L&I and arrange for inspection of boiler system by

Pennsylvania Department of Labor and Industry licensed inspector. Install boiler inspection

certificate in protective frame at a visible location in boiler room.

E. Pressure relief valves for hot water boilers shall be piped to floor drain.


Strada WVU Shroyer Hall Renovations Electric Boilers

PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 235213 - 1

SECTION 235213 - ELECTRIC BOILERS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes packaged, factory-fabricated and -assembled electric boilers, trim, and

accessories for generating steam.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include performance data, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and

accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: For boilers, boiler trim, and accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections,

details, and attachments to other work.

1. Design calculations and vibration isolation base details, signed and sealed by a qualified

professional engineer.

a. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and

seismic restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases.

2. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.

3. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate

and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.

4. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based

and their installation requirements.

C. Source quality-control test reports.

D. Field quality-control test reports.

E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For boilers, components, and accessories to include in

emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

F. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.

G. Other Informational Submittals:


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 235213 - 2

1. ASME Stamp Certification and Report: Submit "A," "S," or "PP" stamp certificate of

authorization, as required by authorities having jurisdiction, and document hydrostatic

testing of piping external to boiler.

2. Startup service reports.




intended use.

B. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label boilers to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure

Vessel Code.

C. NFPA Compliance: Design and fabricate boilers to comply with NFPA 70, "National Electrical

Code," Article 424, Paragraphs G and H.

D. UL Compliance: Test boilers for compliance with UL 834, "Heating, Water Supply, and Power

Boilers--Electric." Boilers shall be listed and labeled by a testing agency acceptable to

authorities having jurisdiction.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete,

reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or

replace pressure vessels of boilers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified

warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

1. Sussman Electric Boilers

2. Bryan Steam, LLC.

3. Cleaver-Brooks; div. of Aqua-Chem, Inc.

4. Fulton Boiler Works, Inc.

5. Lattner Boiler Manufacturing.

6. Lochinvar Corporation.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 235213 - 3

7. Patterson-Kelley.

8. Precision Boilers.

9. PVI Industries, LLC.

10. RECO USA.

11. Reimers Electra Steam, Inc.

2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS

A. Description: Factory-fabricated, -assembled, and -tested electric boilers with trim and controls

necessary to generate steam.

B. Pressure Vessel: Carbon-steel pressure vessel mounted on structural-steel base.

C. Nozzles: Flanges for steam outlet and heating element inserts; threaded connections for trim

and controls.

D. Insulation: One layer of minimum 2-inch- thick, glass-fiber insulation.

E. Jacket: Galvanized sheet metal casing with baked-enamel protective finish and removable

panels with snap-in or interlocking closures for access to pressure vessel.

F. Lifting Lugs: Welded to pressure vessel, extending above jacket.

G. Heating Elements: Incoloy-sheathed, replaceable electric-resistance element, rated 20 kW

maximum, with maximum 75 W/sq. in. over heat-transfer length.

H. Mounting base to secure boiler to floor.

2.3 TRIM

A. Include devices sized to comply with ANSI B31.1, "Power Piping."

B. Pressure Controllers: Operating auto-reset high limit.

C. Safety Relief Valve:

1. Size and Capacity: As required for equipment according to ASME Boiler and Pressure

Vessel Code.

2. Description: Fully enclosed steel spring with adjustable pressure range and positive

shutoff; factory set and sealed.

a. Drip-Pan Elbow: Cast iron and having threaded inlet and outlet with threads

complying with ASME B1.20.1.

D. Pressure Gage: Minimum 3-1/2-inch diameter. Gage shall have normal operating pressure

about 50 percent of full range.

E. Water Column: Minimum 12-inch glass gage with shutoff cocks.

F. Drain Valves: Minimum NPS 3/4 or nozzle size with hose-end connection.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 235213 - 4

G. Automatic Blowdown Valves: Factory-installed bottom and surface, slow-acting blowdown

valves same size as boiler nozzle. Blowdown valves shall be combination of slow and quick

acting as required by ANSI B31.1.

1. Include blowdown separator tank to release flash steam and reduce discharge

temperature.

H. Stop Valves: Boiler inlets and outlets, except safety relief valves or preheater inlet and outlet,

shall be equipped with stop valve in an accessible location as near as practical to boiler nozzle

and same size or larger than nozzle. Valves larger than NPS 2 shall have rising stem.

I. Stop-Check Valves: Factory-installed, stop-check valve and stop valve at boiler outlet with

free-blow drain valve factory installed between the two valves and visible when operating stop-

check valve.

J. Provide with manufacturer’s condensate return system matched to boiler with condensate return

pump.

K. Tankless Heater: Carbon-steel header with copper-tube heat exchanger, mounted in an upper

port of pressure vessel and sealed with fiber gasket.

1. Tappings NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1 for

pipe threads.

2. Tappings NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Flanged ends according to ASME B16.5 for

steel and stainless-steel flanges, and according to ASME B16.24 for copper and copper-

alloy flanges.

2.4 CONTROLS

A. Refer to Division 23 Section "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC."

B. Boiler operating controls shall include the following devices and features:

1. Control transformer.

2. Step controller.

3. Recycling relay returns controller to off position after power failure.

4. Multistage thermostat.

5. Control circuit switch.

6. Visual indication for each step.

7. Supply-voltage indicator.

8. Set-Point Adjust: Set points shall be adjustable.

9. Sequence of Operation: Electric, factory-fabricated and field-installed panel to control

element sequence controller to maintain a constant steam pressure. Maintain pressure set

point plus or minus 10 percent.

C. Safety Controls: To maintain safe operating conditions, safety controls limit boiler operation.

1. High Cutoff: Manual reset stops boiler if operating conditions rise above set point or

maximum boiler design pressure.

2. Low-Water Cutoff Switch: Electronic probe shall prevent boiler operation on low water.

Cutoff switch shall be manual-reset type.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 235213 - 5

3. Audible Alarm: Factory mounted on control panel with silence switch; shall sound alarm

for above conditions.

D. Building Management System Interface: Factory install hardware and software to enable

building management system to monitor, control, and display boiler status and alarms.

1. Hardwired Points:

a. Monitoring: On/off status, common trouble alarm low water level alarm.

2.5 ELECTRICAL POWER

A. Single-Point Field Power Connection: Factory-installed and -wired switches, transformers, and

electrical devices necessary shall provide a single-point field power connection to boiler.

1. Field power interface shall be to fused disconnect switch.

2. Interlock with door to de-energize power with door open.

3. Unit shall have integral disconnect.

4. Unit to be provided with transformer to power control circuit and 120 V condensate

return pump.

B. Electrical Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure with hinged door and key-locking handle.

C. Install factory wiring outside of an enclosure in a metal raceway.

D. Comply with NFPA 70.

1. Electrical Circuits: 48 A, maximum.

E. Connectors: Mechanical lugs bolted to copper bus bars or distribution blocks with pressure

connectors.

F. Fuses: NEMA FU 1, Class J or K5; 60 A, maximum.

G. Contactors: 3-pole magnetic contactors, listed for 500,000 cycles at full load.

H. Factory-wired internal control devices and heating elements.

1. Wiring shall be numbered and color coded to match the wiring diagram.


A. Test and inspect factory-assembled boilers, before shipping, according to ASME Boiler and

Pressure Vessel Code.

B. Hydrostatic Test: Factory test assembled boiler including hydrostatic test.

C. Allow Owner access to source quality-control testing of boilers. Notify Architect 14 days in

advance of testing.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 235213 - 6

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Before boiler installation, examine roughing-in for concrete equipment bases, anchor-bolt sizes

and locations, and piping and electrical connections to verify actual locations, sizes, and other

conditions affecting boiler performance, maintenance, and operations.

1. Final boiler locations indicated on Drawings are approximate. Determine exact locations

before roughing-in for piping and electrical connections.

B. Examine mechanical spaces, including required space for element removal, for suitable

conditions where boilers will be installed.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 BOILER INSTALLATION

A. Vibration Isolation: Elastomeric isolator pads with a minimum static deflection of 0.25 inch.

B. Install electrical devices furnished with boiler but not specified to be factory mounted.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate

general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to boiler to allow service and maintenance.

C. Connect hot-water piping to supply- and return-boiler tappings with shutoff valve and union or

flange at each connection.

D. Connect steam and condensate piping to supply-, return-, and blowdown-boiler tappings with

shutoff valve and union or flange at each connection.

E. Install piping from safety relief valves to nearest floor drain.

F. Install piping from safety valves to drip-pan elbow and to nearest floor drain.

G. Install piping from equipment drain connection to nearest floor drain. Piping shall be at least

full size of connection. Provide an isolation valve if required.

H. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical

Systems."

I. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors

and Cables."


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 235213 - 7


A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to

inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and

to assist in testing.

B. Tests and Inspections:

1. Perform installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Leak Test: Hydrostatic test. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.

3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and

equipment.

a. Check and adjust initial operating set points and high- and low-limit safety set

points of water level and steam pressure.

b. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.

C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

D. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion,

provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to

one visit to Project during other than normal occupancy hours for this purpose.

E. Performance Tests:

1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect component assemblies and

equipment installations, including connections, and to conduct performance testing.

2. Boilers shall comply with performance requirements indicated, as determined by field

performance tests. Adjust, modify, or replace equipment in order to comply.

3. Perform field performance tests to determine the capacity of boilers.

4. Repeat tests until results comply with requirements indicated.

5. Provide analysis equipment required to determine performance.

6. Provide temporary equipment and system modifications necessary to dissipate the heat

produced during tests if building systems are not adequate.

7. Notify Architect in advance of test dates.

8. Document test results in a report and submit to Architect.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to

adjust, operate, and maintain boilers. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and

Training."


Strada WVU Shroyer Hall Renovations Heat Transfer

PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 235710 - 1

SECTION 235710 – HEAT TRANSFER

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED


installation of heat transfer system components and specialties.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


1. Hydronic Specialties

2. Steam Specialties

3. Chemical Water Treatment

4. Propylene Glycol

5. Glycol Feed System

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES

A. Combination Air Eliminator/Dirt Separator

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Spirotherm, Inc., or as approved.

2. Construction

a. Body: Steel.

b. Internal Bundle: Copper core tube with wound copper medium permanently

affixed to core.

c. Venting chamber with integral full port float actuated brass venting mechanism.

d. Valved side tap to flush floating dirt or liquids and for quick bleeding of large

amounts of air during system fill.

e. Vessel shall be extended below the pipe connections an equal distance for dirt

separation.

f. Air Eliminator: Capable of removing 100 percent of the free air, 100 percent of the

entrained air, and up to 99.6 percent of the dissolve air in the system fluid.

3. Dirt Separation: At least 80 percent of particles 30 microns and larger with 100 passes.

4. Pressure Rating: Minimum 150 psi.

5. Entering Velocity: 6 feet per second maximum at specified GPM.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 235710 - 2

B. Automatic Air Vents

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Hoffman No. 77, or Amtrol, Taco.

2. Body: Brass

3. Internal Working Parts: Stainless steel or nonferrous.

4. Operation: Vacuum breaker and float type valve assembly to automatically vent air from

system.

C. Manual Air Vents

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Taco 417, or Hoffman.

2. Body: Brass.

3. Operation: Quick venting slotted adjustment with positive shutoff ball check.

D. Expansion Tank

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Amtrol.

2. Type: Sealed-in diaphragm or removable bladder.

3. Tank: Steel

4. Tank Fittings: Manufacturer shall supply charging valve and proper tank fittings to make

all gage, fill, drain and system connections.

5. Working Pressure: 125 psig

6. Construction: Shall be in accordance with ASME code for unfired pressure vessels and

shall bear ASME label. Shall be guaranteed leakproof for air and water.

E. Relief Valves

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Bell & Gossett.

2. Relief valves shall be installed in water system at locations and in sizes noted on the

Drawings. Valves shall bear the ASME label.

F. Backflow Preventer

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Watts Series 009, or Cla Val Company.

2. Type: Reduced pressure.

3. Components: Two independently acting spring loaded toggle lever check valves with

automatically operating pressure differential relief valve and two shutoff valves.

4. Accessories: Air gap fitting.

5. Construction: Bronze body with stainless steel internal parts. 150 psig maximum working

pressure.

G. Pressure Reducing Valve

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Cash Acme Type B, or Watts.

2. Type: Diaphragm with self cleaning seat.

3. Construction: Bronze.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 235710 - 3

4. Pressure Range: 200 psig maximum inlet and factory set at discharge pressure indicated

on the Drawings.

5. Installation: Make-up (domestic cold) water line, furnished with three valve bypass as

indicated on the Drawings.

6. Standard Features: Self-contained strainer.

H. Flow Control Valve

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Bell & Gossett, or Taco, Amtrol.

2. Flow control valve shall be installed in the system where indicated on the Drawings.

Valves shall be cast iron body with brass valve seats, straight or angle pattern as required.

3. Operating Pressure: 125 psig maximum.

I. Calibrated Balancing Valves

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Bell & Gossett Model CB, or Taco.

2. Construction: Bronze body with threaded ends, brass ball construction with glass and

carbon filled TFE seat rings.

3. Standard Features: Differential pressure readout ports across valve seat area. Readout

ports to be fitted with internal EPT inserts and check valves. Valve body provided with

1/4 inch NPT tapped drain purge port. Valve furnished with calibrated nameplate

indicating specific valve setting. Valve shall be rated for 300 psig at 250 degrees F.

Provide portable master meter kit for use during start-up, testing and balancing. Meter kit

shall be delivered to Owner at completion of Work.

4. Line size(s) indicated on Drawings does not necessarily indicate required size for

calibrated balancing valves. Contractor shall be responsible to select appropriate valve

size according to flow characteristics.

J. Flow Measuring System

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Hyspan Precision Products, Inc., or Gerand Engineering

Company, Preso.

2. Flow measuring system shall be a coordinated system, including individual venturi flow

stations for use with a portable master meter, supplied by one manufacturer.

3. Each venturi station shall be complete with quick disconnect valves, safety shutoff

valves, and metal identification tag; giving pipe size, venturi series, station identification,

and meter reading at specified flow rate.

4. Venturi stations shall consist of plated cast steel venturi with weld ends.

5. Provide portable master meter kit for use during system start up, testing and balancing.

Meter kit shall be delivered to Owner at completion of Work.

2.2 STEAM SPECIALTIES

A. Float And Thermostatic Trap

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Spirax Sarco Model FT.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 235710 - 4

2. Body: Cast semi-steel.

3. Internal Working Parts: Stainless steel valve heads, seats and float mechanism.

4. Thermostatic Element: Trap shall have a thermostatic element of the balanced pressure

type to prevent air binding in trap.

B. Steam Safety Valve

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Spirax Sarco SV73.

2. Safety valve shall be installed in steam system as shown. Unit shall have cast iron body,

bronze disc, side outlet and fitting lever. Maximum service pressure; 250 psig saturated

steam. Constructed and labeled for conformance with ASME code.

C. Drip Pan Elbow

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Spirax Sarco.

2. Drip pan elbow shall be cast iron elbow of the same size as the outlet of the relief line

preceding the pan and shall be located where indicated on the Drawings.

2.3 CHEMICAL WATER TREATMENT

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Guardian, or Cascade, G.E. Betz, Keeler Co.

B. General: Furnish and install a complete water treatment program. Chemicals, service and

equipment shall be supplied by a single water treatment company for undivided responsibility.

The water treatment chemical and service supplier shall be a recognized specialist, active in the

field of industrial water treatment for at least ten years, whose major business is in the field of

water treatment, and shall have regional water analysis laboratories, development facilities and

service department.

C. Bypass Feeder:

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Neptune Model DBF, or as approved.

2. Capacity: 2 gallons.

3. Construction:

a. Shell: Steel, minimum 10 gage with wide mouth opening.

b. Head: Steel, minimum 9 gage.

c. Cap: Minimum 4 inch, cast iron with epoxy-coated underside and square ring Buna

N seat ring. Continuous threaded closure.

d. Pressure Rating: 300 psi at 200 degrees F.

e. Full bottom drain.

4. Accessories:

a. Legs with anchor bolt holes to elevate the feeder off the floor.

b. Filter Bag Kit: Filter bag supported by a stainless steel filter basket with tuning and

connectors for side stream filtering.

1) Install 50 micron filter bag during system start-up.

2) Provide Owner with additional 20 micron filter bag.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 235710 - 5

D. Water Treatment Chemicals: Furnish one year's supply of the recommended formulas for

control of scale, pitting and corrosion of the closed loop systems.

E. Testing Equipment: Furnish testing equipment for treatment control. Equipment shall include

apparatus for determination of pH, treatment residual and bleedoff control as minimum

requirements. Furnish training, instruction, and continuing supervision of Owner's operating

personnel during the service period.

F. Water Management Program: Manufacturer shall provide a water management and service

program for a period of one year from startup of the system to include the following:

1. Initial water analysis and recommendations.

2. System installation and start up assistance.

3. Training of operating personnel.

4. Periodic field service, consultation (all of the above performed by a qualified full time

local representative), laboratory and technical assistance from the manufacturer's

engineering staff.

2.4 PROPYLENE GLYCOL

A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Interstate Chemical Co., or Dow Chemical Co..

B. Heating and cooling systems shall be filled with a pre-blended water/propylene glycol mixture

consisting of 25 percent propylene glycol and 75 percent water by volume. The solution shall be

prepared by thoroughly mixing the glycol in clean containers prior to transferring into system.

Contractor shall flush, fill and test system in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations

and furnish manufacturer's published data certifying percentage of antifreeze by volume,

corresponding protection in degrees F and date of fill. The glycol shall contain inorganic

corrosion inhibitors and anti-foam agents.

C. Glycol system shall be equipped with a mix and fill tank with manual fill capabilities, hose bibb

from domestic water for tank filling, and tank level alarm interconnected with the BAS.

2.5 GLYCOL FEED SYSTEM

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Neptune Chemical Pump Co., Advantage Controls, or as approved.

B. Provide a completely, preassembled package glycol feed system with bronze rotary gear pumps;

tank, piping, and control panel.

C. Pump:

1. Type: Rotary gear

2. Capacity: 1.5 GPM at a pressure of 100 PSI.

3. Configuration: Pump mounted below the tank.

D. Tank:

1. Capacity: 50 gallon


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 235710 - 6

2. Material: Polyethylene

3. Stand: Four-leg made from carbon steel with four bolt pads, primed and painted.

4. Float switch for low level pump shutoff and alarm.

E. Control Panel:

1. Enclosure: NEMA 4X

2. Electrical: 115 volt, 1 phase with a 8 foot power cord with plug

3. Controls:

a. Hands-Off-Auto selector switch with running light. In Auto position, the pump

shall be operated by a differential pressure switch and interlocked to a low level

float switch.

b. “Low” tank level indicator light.

c. Magnetic starter for feed pump.

d. Pressure Switch: Cut-in Range: 10-45 PSI; Cut-Out Range: 20-60 PSI.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Steam and Condensate Piping

1. Steam supply mains shall be run as indicated and shall be uniformly graded in direction

indicated, a minimum of 1 inch in 40 feet of run. Provision shall be made for expansion

and all piping shall be properly supported. Where horizontal runs change size, eccentric

reducing fittings shall be used.

2. Steam supply and return branches shall be taken from mains at a 45 degree angle where

possible, and shall pitch down towards mains at least 6 inches in 20 feet.

3. Condensate return lines shall be uniformly graded in direction indicated, a minimum of 1

inch in 40 feet of run.

4. Following the installation and balancing of all piping systems, gage cocks at all pressure

gages shall be closed to prevent damage to the gage movement.

B. Hydronic Piping

1. Water piping shall be installed with a view for even flow and proper venting to and from

all apparatus without pockets. Piping system shall be installed for quick, sure and positive

drainage. Entire piping system shall present a neat appearance both as to workmanship

and grouping. A calibrated balancing valve and manual air vent shall be installed on the

return runout from each unit heater All mains shall pitch up to a high point with

automatic air vents provided for air escapement. Provide drains at all system low points.

2. Provide sufficient access for servicing concealed air vents and drain valves. Refer to

access panels specified in Section 23 05 05, HVAC Basic Materials.

3. Before the boilers or water systems are filled, the water treatment supplier shall be

consulted. Treatment chemicals shall be added at time of initial charge.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 235710 - 7

4. Following the installation and balancing of all piping systems, gage cocks and ball valves

at all pressure gages shall be closed to prevent damage to the gage movement.

C. Heat Transfer Equipment

1. Install heat transfer equipment and complete piping connections in accordance with

equipment manufacturer's recommendations. Submit manufacturer's printed installation

instructions with operating and maintenance data at completion of Work.

2. Piping systems traced with electric heating cable shall be labeled ELECTRIC TRACED

on exterior of piping insulation. Refer to pipe identification, Section 23 05 15, HVAC

Piping Specialties.

D. Chemical Water Treatment

1. All closed loops shall have a bypass feeder (pot feeder) piped into the circulation line, so

that chemical treatment can be introduced into the system. Feeder shall be installed in

strict accordance with recommendations of water treatment supplier service

representative who is to be consulted prior to installation.

2. Bypass feeders shall be installed across the circulation pump to allow for a minimum 5

psi pressure drop. The discharge side of the pump shall be piped to the bottom of the

feeder and the suction side piped to the top to allow an upward flow of material in the

feeder. The shot feeder shall be located at least 12 inches off the floor, and manual ball

valves shall be located near the bypass feeder to isolate and drain the bypass feeder. One

ball valve shall include a memory stop set to keep a trickle flow through the feeder to

keep seals wetted.

E. Glycol System

1. Do not direct-connect makeup lines to glycol systems.

2. Glycol systems should be configured so that small sections of the system can be isolated

with valves and drained to a local floor drain. Alternatively, a tank should be installed at

the glycol system fill point that is large enough to capture the entire system’s contents.

3.2 TESTS

A. Steam and condensate piping shall be leak tested at one and one half times the maximum system

working pressure, but not less than 100 psi static pressure for four hours with pressure noted

each hour. All leaks shall be repaired and proven leakproof by retesting.

B. Water piping shall be leak tested at one and one half times the maximum system design

pressure, but not less than 100 psi static pressure for four hours with pressures noted each hour.

All leaks shall be repaired and proven leakproof by retesting.

C. Following tests for piping, systems shall be cleaned by wasting water until it becomes clear

after which all strainers shall be cleaned.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 235710 - 8

3.3 CLEANING, FLUSHING AND FILLING

A. Following tests for piping, systems shall be flushed by wasting water until it becomes clear. Use

water meter to fill, record, and tag (permanent tag) the system with the actual system volume.

Chemical cleaner shall be added to remove grease, mill oil, organic soil, flux, iron oxide, etc.

All terminal control valves and valves at end of runs shall be opened so that cleaner is circulated

through the whole system. After cleaning, all strainers shall be flushed, and strainer screens

cleaned or replaced. Once closed loop is chemically cleaned, system shall be dumped and

flushed with water so that all cleaning chemical is removed from the system.


Strada WVU Shroyer Hall Renovations Central Cooling Equipment

PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 236010 - 1

SECTION 236010 – CENTRAL COOLING EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED


installation of central cooling equipment and associated specialties.


A. Section 230050, HVAC Basic Materials: Equipment nameplates and motors.




E. Section 239510, Testing and Balancing of HVAC System: Hydronic system balancing.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


1. Chillers

B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for chillers, including:

1. Selection characteristics and rated capacities.

2. Performance curves with system operating conditions indicated.

3. Sound pressure levels per ARI Standard 575 for indoor chillers and ARI Standard 370 for

outdoor chillers.

4. General specifications: Type description, material of construction, thicknesses and

finishes.

5. Motor type, ratings and electrical characteristics

6. Accessories furnished

C. Shop Drawings: Include the following:

1. Plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.

2. Details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required

clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field

connection.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 236010 - 2

3. Auxiliary water piping required for oil cooler and purge condenser, to be furnished and

installed by Contractor

4. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication, including anchorages and

attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include auxiliary motor slides and

rails, and base weights.

D. Wiring Diagrams: Submit manufacturer's electrical requirements for power supply wiring to

chiller units. Submit manufacturer's ladder-type wiring diagrams for interlock and control

wiring. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are factory-installed and portions to

be field-installed.

E. Coordination Drawings: As required to meet project complexity, show chiller room layout and

relationships between components and adjacent structural and mechanical elements. Show

support locations, type of support, and weight on each support. Indicate and certify field

measurements.

F. Maintenance Data: Submit operation and maintenance instructions, including lubrication

instructions, motor and drive replacement, and spare parts lists. Include this data, product data,

shop drawings, and wiring diagrams in maintenance manuals.

G. Cooling tower shop drawing submittals shall include performance curves in accordance with the

latest issue CTI Acceptance Test Code ATC-105, Section 11, if field acceptance testing will be

performed in lieu of CTI certification as specified in Section 23 95 10, Testing and Balancing of

HVAC Systems. A tower manufacturer’s guarantee, performance bond, or tests by tower

manufacturer will not be acceptable as an alternative to CTI certification or an independent field

test.


A. ARI Compliance: Rate and certify chiller performance according to requirements in ARI.

B. ASHRAE Compliance:

1. ASHRAE 15 for safety code for mechanical refrigeration.

2. ASHRAE 147 for refrigerant leaks, recovery, and handling and storage requirements.

3. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 OR

ASHRAE 189.1.

C. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label chillers to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure

Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1. For chillers charged with R-134a refrigerant, include an

ASME U-stamp and nameplate certifying compliance.

D. Comply with NFPA 70.

E. Comply with requirements of UL and UL Canada, and include label by a qualified testing

agency showing compliance.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 236010 - 3

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Ship each chiller from the factory fully charged with refrigerant.

B. Ship each oil-lubricated chiller with a full charge of oil. Ship oil factory installed in chiller.

1.6 CHILLER START UP SERVICE

A. Provide complete start-up services for each chiller. Start-up services shall include chiller

manufacturer inspections during construction and supervised start-up. Each component of the

refrigeration system shall be tested by the component manufacturer and a summary of all tests

shall be submitted by Contractor to the Architect.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Standard Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or

replace components of chillers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty

period of minimum of 2 years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or

replace components of chillers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty

period. Extended warranties include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Complete chiller including refrigerant and oil charge. Warranty Period: minimum of 2

years from date of Substantial Completion.

2. Complete compressor and drive assembly including refrigerant and oil charge. Extended

Warranty Period: minimum of 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PACKAGED AIR-COOLED CHILLER (OVER 60 TONS)

A. Manufacturer

1. Basis of Design: Trane.

2. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: Carrier Corp., Daikin, York International Corp.

B. Furnish unit completely assembled on a fabricated steel base with all interconnecting refrigerant

piping and internal power and control wiring. Unit shall be painted with durable, baked on

enamel before being skidded and crated for shipment.

C. Unit shall be capable of operating with variable primary pumping.

D. Evaporator

1. Type: Shell and tube, designed in accordance with ASME Code for Unfired Pressure

Vessels.

2. Tubes: Internally finned copper tubes Roller expanded into tube sheets.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 236010 - 4

3. Working Pressure: Refrigerant side - 225 psig, water side - 300 psig.

4. Heat tape with thermostat to protect the evaporator from freezing at ambient temperatures

down to -20 degrees F.

5. Shell shall include drain and vent connections, fittings for temperature control sensors,

and 3/4 inch foam plastic insulation.

E. Compressor

1. Refrigeration machine shall consist of a semi hermetic or hermetically sealed type. Motor

shall be squirrel cage induction type designed for constant speed operation and

continuous duty at 3600 RPM. Bearings shall be supplied with forced feed lubrication

from an oil pump. Motors shall be liquid refrigerant or suction gas refrigerant cooled. Hot

gas motor cooling with not be permitted.

2. Compressor shall be of screw or reciprocating design. Compressor shall be capable of

part load operation down to 15 percent load for extended periods of time chiller

manufacturer shall provide hot gas bypass if compressor cannot unload to 15 percent for

extended periods of time at design leaving chilled water and entering condenser water

temperatures.

3. Chiller unit shall be UL listed.

F. Condenser and Fans

1. Air-cooled condenser coils consisting of aluminum fins mechanically bonded to

internally finned seamless copper tubing.

2. Condenser fans shall be direct-drive, vertical discharge with permanently lubricated ball

bearings and internal thermal overload protection. Fans shall be both statically and

dynamically balanced.

G. Control Center

1. Components: Unit mounted control panel shall be supplied in a weather tight enclosure

with the following:

a. Three position on-off pump down selector switch.

b. Indicating lights to assist in locating cause of shutdown.

c. Programmed starting timer.

d. Discharge, suction, and oil pressure gages.

e. Four stage solid state operating thermostat.

f. Motor starting equipment for part winding start.

g. Non-fused power disconnect switch.

h. Control power transformer.

i. BAS/ATC communication interface to permit remote chilled water setpoint and

demand limiting by accepting a 4-20mA or 10-20Vdc analog signal.

2. Manufacturer's Accessory Field Installed Sound Attenuation Package

3. Provide acoustical material to be wrapped around compressor, oil separator, and suction

and discharge lines off the compressor.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 236010 - 5

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install refrigerant equipment and associated venting in accordance with manufacturer's

recommendations and the latest issue of ASHRAE Standard 15.

B. Install refrigeration system complete with charging valves, shutoff valves, sight glasses, oil

traps and double risers when recommended by equipment manufacturer. Chiller start-up shall be

supervised by a manufacturer's factory trained technician. Owner's personnel shall be instructed

on operation and maintenance of equipment. Submit manufacturer's printed installation

instructions with operating and maintenance data at completion of Work.

C. Consult water treatment supplier before chiller water systems are filled. Treatment chemicals

shall be added at time of initial charge.

D. Furnish and install auxiliary water piping for oil cooler and purge condenser on chiller unit in

accordance with chiller manufacturer's recommendation.

3.2 TESTS

A. Refrigerant piping shall be leak tested with a mixture of system refrigerant and dry nitrogen.

Pressurize to 350 psi and inspect for and repair all leaks. Purge system. Evacuate system and

charge system with dry nitrogen. Purge system again, evacuate and recharge with system

refrigerant.


Strada WVU Shroyer Hall Renovations Central Station Air Handling Units

PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 237310 - 1

SECTION 237310 – CENTRAL STATION AIR HANDLING UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED


installation of central station air handling units and associated components.


A. Section 230505, HVAC Basic Materials: Equipment nameplates and motors




E. Section 239510, Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of HVAC System: Testing, adjusting, and

balancing procedures.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


1. Rooftop Air Handling Units, including roof curbs

2. Wiring diagrams for power and 120 volt circuit for access section lights and receptacles

to single point power connection.

B. Manufacturer's published fan curve data shall be included with shop drawing submittal data for

air handling units. Fan curve information shall include operating point, RPM curve for

operating point, minimum and maximum RPM curves for fan, system curve and brake

horsepower curves. Tabular fan performance charts are not an acceptable substitute for fan

curve data. Shop drawing submittals for air handling equipment will be returned without

Architect's review if the fan curve data is not included with the submittal.



by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A for design, fabrication, and installation of air-

handling units and components.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 237310 - 2

C. Certification: Air-handling units and their components shall be factory tested according to

ANSI/AHRI Standard 430, "Performance Rating of Central-Station Air-Handling Units," and

shall be listed and labeled.

D. Fan rating shall be AMCA certified.


A. Fan Sound-Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating Fan

Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Test fans according to AMCA 300, "Reverberant

Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Fans shall bear AMCA-certified sound ratings seal.

B. Fan Performance Rating: Factory test fan performance for airflow, pressure, power, air density,

rotation speed, and efficiency. Rate performance according to AMCA 210, "Laboratory

Methods of Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance Rating."

1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective

covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Filters: One set(s) for each air-handling unit.

2. Fan Belts: One set(s) for each air-handling unit fan.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ROOFTOP AIR HANDLING UNIT

A. Manufacturer

1. Basis of Design: Trane.

2. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: Carrier Corp., Johnson Controls, Inc., Daikin.

B. Arrangement

1. Arrange air handling unit sections as indicated on Drawings.

C. Unit Construction

1. General

a. Designed and built specifically for outdoor installation on top of roof curb.

Weatherized indoor air handlers will not be acceptable.

b. Leakage Performance: All casings shall be constructed to minimize leakage and

shall be in accordance with duct and plenum leakage class required by the

International Energy Conservation Code or better.

1) The casing air leakage shall not exceed leak class 6 (CL = 6) per ASHRAE

111 at specified casing static pressure (P in inches w.g.) where maximum

casing leakage (cfm/100 ft2 of casing surface area) = CL x P0.65.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 237310 - 3

2) Air leakage shall be determined at 1.25 times maximum casing static

pressure up to a maximum of +/- 8 inches w.g. Specified air leakage shall be

accomplished without the use of calk. Total estimated air leakage shall be

reported for each unit in CFM, as a percentage of supply air, and as an

ASHRAE Leakage Class.

2. Floor

a. Galvanized steel, insulated.

3. Wall and Roof Panels

a. Panels and unit roof double wall construction with panel insulation system

providing a minimum R-13. Insulation shall conform to NFPA 90 requirements.

4. Unit Paint

a. Exterior surface of unit casing prepared and coated with minimum 1.5 mil enamel

finish. Factory-finish able to exceed 500 hour salt spray solution (5 percent)

without any sign of red rust when tested in accordance with ASTM B117.

Manufacturer’s standard paint color..

5. Unit Roof

a. Inner roof surface installed to prevent air bypass between internal components.

Outer roof sloped a minimum 0.125 inches per foot either from one side of unit to

the other, or from center to sides, with overhangs.

6. Pipe Cabinet

a. External, factory-assembled and supplied of construction to match unit casing.

b. Shipped separately and field-installed external to the unit.

c. Manufacturer’s standard internal pipe cabinet will be acceptable.

7. Primary Drain Pans

a. Furnish full length in all coil sections.

b. Insulated, double wall 304 stainless steel.

c. Fully accessible and cleanable.

d. Designed in accordance with ASHRAE 62.1 being of sufficient size to collect all

condensation produced from the coil and sloped in two planes, pitched toward

drain connections, promoting positive drainage to eliminate stagnant water

conditions when unit is installed level and trapped per manufacturer’s

requirements.

e. Drain connections of same material as pans, located at the lowest point of the pan

and accessible from outside the unit on both sides. Threaded connection with

stainless steel drain plug. The connection shall be sized to preclude drain pan

overflow under any normally expected operating condition.

8. Access Doors

a. All components shall be accessible via access doors and removable panels. Provide

on drive side of fan sections.

b. Formed and reinforced double wall and insulated panels of same materials and

properties as casing.

c. At least 18 inches wide by full height of unit casing up to a maximum height of 72

inches.

d. Minimum of two ball-bearing hinges or stainless steel piano hinge on each door

with two wedge-lever-type latches, operable from outside and inside the unit.

Doors attached by screws will not be acceptable.

e. Arranged to open against air-pressure differential.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 237310 - 4

f. Neoprene gasketing around full perimeter to prevent air leakage.

D. Marine Lights and Receptacles

1. Furnish in fan, filter and full-sized access sections.

2. Lights: Factory-mounted, energy efficient, long-life fluorescent, UL listed for wet

locations with junction box.

3. Receptacles: GFCI.

4. Dedicated 120 volt circuit separate from main power to unit. Wired in field.

E. Curb

1. Provided by unit manufacturer or custom curb manufacturer to match roof conditions.

2. Constructed of galvanized steel with a wood nailing strip factory installed.

3. Jointers, gasketing and bolts for assembly provided as required.

4. Unit condensate drainage system sized and trapped outside unit roof curb to provide

adequate condensate drainage at specified fan suction pressures.

5. Curb designed so that unit will be installed level.

F. Fan Sections

1. General

a. Housed fan performance certified in accordance with AHSI/AHRI Standard 430.

b. AMCA seal.

2. Wheels

a. Double width, double inlet, multi-blade type. Forward curve (FC), backward

inclined (BI) or airfoil (AF) blade design as required for stable operation and

optimum energy efficiency.

b. Statically and dynamically balanced at the factory as a complete fan assembly –

fan wheel, motor, drive, and belts.

c. Fan wheels keyed to shaft.

3. Shafts

a. Designed for continuous operation at maximum-rated fan speed and motor

horsepower, and with field-adjustable alignment.

b. Turned, ground, and polished hot-rolled solid steel with keyway. Ship with a

protective coating of lubricating oil.

c. Designed to operate at no more than 70 percent of first critical speed at top of fan's

speed range.

4. Bearings

a. Self-aligning, antifriction bearings with an L10 life of 200,000 hours. Bearings

shall be equipped with extended grease lines allowing for lubrication from the

drive side of the fan from a readily accessible location.

b. Grease lines shall be constructed of 1/ 8 inch steel tubing and terminated with flush

plugs with the relief set at 5 psig.

5. Fan Isolation

a. Fan isolated from unit casing by a flexible connection.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 237310 - 5

b. Fan and motor assembly internally isolated from unit casing with 1 inch (nominal

4000 cfm and under) or 2 inch (above 4000 cfm) deflection spring isolators,

furnished and installed by unit manufacturer.

6. Belt Drives

a. Factory mounted drive assemblies with adjustable alignment and belt tensioning.

b. Drives shall be constant speed with fixed pitch sheaves.

c. Selected at a minimum of 1.2 service factor based on rated nameplate HP.

d. Belts shall be oil-resistant, heat-resistant, non-sparking and anti-static in matched

sets for multiple-belt drives. Provide a minimum of 2 belts, each rated to carry full

load in case one breaks.

7. Motors

a. Integrally mounted to an isolated fan assembly.

b. Mounted inside unit on adjustable base to permit drive-belt adjustment.

c. Refer to Section 23 05 05 for required characteristics.

8. Fan Modulation

a. Factory mounted variable frequency drive to control fan speed for variable air

volume applications.

b. Refer to Section 23 10 20.

9. Belt Guard

a. Expanded metal mesh belt guard to allow inspection of belts and pulleys without

removal. Belt guard shall be attached with hinges and/or quick release fasteners

operable without tools. A tachometer hole shall be aligned with the fan shaft.

G. Fan Inlet Airflow Measurement System

1. Factory installed. Refer to Section 23 90 10.

2. Application: Factory installed on inlet of supply and return fans to measure fan airflow

directly or to measure differential pressure that can be used to calculate fan airflow.

3. Calibrated Range: 0 to 10,000 fpm.

4. Sensor Construction

a. Two bead-in-glass thermistors in a GFP sensor housing sealed with epoxy.

b. Stainless steel brackets.

c. Throat mount or face mount as recommended by fan manufacturer.

d. Sensors shall not affect the submitted fan performance and acoustical levels.

Devices that obstruct the fan inlet or outlet will not be acceptable.

5. Accuracy: Factory calibrated plus or minus 2 percent for airflow when operating within

stable fan operating conditions. Plus or minus 0.15 degrees F for temperature.

6. Transmitter: Heavy duty with industrial grade IC’s and aluminum chassis.

7. Probe/Transmitter Cable: Plenum rated with positive locking connector and gold-plated

pins.

8. Output Interface: Selectable 4-20 mA or 0-10 VDC linear airflow/temperature output to

building automation system. Airflow signal shall be proportional to air velocity.

H. Coil Sections

1. General:

a. Coils manufactured by the unit manufacturer.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 237310 - 6

b. All coils enclosed within unit casing. Coil headers and return bends shall not be

exposed.

c. Coils shall be mounted in unit casing to be accessible for service and removable

from unit side without disassembling the unit.

d. Capacities, pressure drops and selection procedure shall be certified in accordance

with ARI 410.

e. All coils shall be completely cleaned prior to installation into the air handling unit.

Complete fin bundle in direction of airflow shall be degreased and steam cleaned

to remove any lubricants used in the manufacturing of the fins, or dirt that may

have accumulated, in order to minimize the chance for water carryover.

f. Provide at least 24 inches of access space upstream and between each coil with

doors to facilitate installation of sensors and for inspection and cleaning.

g. All coils shall be air vented and arranged for proper drainage.

h. Fabricate coil section to allow removal and replacement of each coil segment and

to allow in-place access for service and maintenance of coil(s). Coils shall not act

as structural component of unit or support other coils.

i. Units with stacked coils shall have an intermediate drains pan to collect condensate

from each row of coils. Intermediate drain pans shall have drop tubes to guide

condensate to the main drain pan, thus preventing flooding of lower coils that

would result in moisture carryover.

j. On applications that will condense moisture, such as typical air conditioning

cooling/dehumidification and exhaust air heat recovery provide coil casings of

minimum 0.0625 inch thick stainless steel channel frames.

k. Access doors shall be provided on upstream side of all coils to facilitate inspection

and cleaning.

2. Water Coils

a. Aluminum fins and seamless copper tubes. Fins shall have collars drawn, belled

and firmly bonded to tubes by means of mechanical expansion of tubes.

b. Casing, tracks and supports

1) Hot Water: Galvanized steel.

2) Chilled Water: Stainless steel.

c. Round copper headers with vent connections at the highest point and drain

connections at the lowest point. Steel pipe headers will not be acceptable.

d. Factory tested to 300 psig according to ARI 410 and ASHRAE 33.

e. Supply and return header connections shall be clearly labeled such that direction of

coil water-flow is counter to direction of unit air-flow.

I. Filter Sections

1. Filter section(s) shall have flat or angled filter racks and guides to accommodate specified

filter types and thicknesses, at least one access door for filter replacement, and filter

block-offs to prevent air bypass around filters.

2. Factory installed Magnehelic gage to read pressure drop across each filter bank.

3. Filter media shall be UL 900 listed, Class I or Class II.

4. Pleated Media:

a. Media: 4 inch thick nonwoven fabric, treated with adhesive and continuously

laminated to a supported steel wire grid.

b. Maximum Face Velocity: 625 fpm.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 237310 - 7

c. Rating: 25-30 percent dust spot efficiency (MERV 7) when tested in accordance

with ASHRAE Standard 52.2.

J. MixingSections

1. Outside Air/Return Air, Relief Air Dampers

a. Separate dampers and operators to modulate volume of minimum outside,

economizer, return and relief air.

b. Airfoil design with metal compressible jamb seals and extruded vinyl blade edge

seals, low leakage (2%) type on all blades.

c. Dampers shall be designed in accordance with ASHRAE Guideline 16:

1) Opposed blade damper configuration for outside and relief air.

2) Parallel blade configuration for return air.

3) Minimum outside air damper sized for a minimum of 200 fpm at absolute

minimum outside airflow rate.

d. Stainless steel sleeve bearings.

e. Maximum 60 inches damper blade length.

f. Leakage Rate: Not exceeding 3 cfm/square foot at 1 inch w.g and 8 cfm/square

foot at 4 inches w.g.

g. Actuators: Refer to Section 23 90 10.

2. Internal Face and Bypass Dampers

a. Airfoil design, opposed blade type on face section, parallel blade type on bypass

section, with metal compressible jamb seals and extruded vinyl blade edge seals.

b. Stainless steel sleeve bearings.

c. Leakage Rate: Not exceeding 5 cfm/square foot at 1 inch w.g and 9 cfm/ square

foot at 4 inches w.g.

d. Dampers not linked.

e. Actuators: Refer to Section 23 90 10.

K. Other Sections

1. Inlet Hood

a. Designed to not permit moisture to enter the unit at 100 percent airflow through

hood.

b. Heavy-duty bird screen.

2. Access/Inspection

a. Supplied in length(s) and position(s) indicated on Drawings with access door to

allow additional access/inspection and space for field installed components.

3. Discharge Plenum

a. Supplied to effectively turn air and provide sound attenuation.

L. Ultraviolet Germicidal Lights

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Sanuvox Coilclean IL, or as approved.

2. General

a. Emitters and fixtures for ultraviolet-C (UV-C) lamps designed for use inside an

HVAC system.

b. Lamps installed in sufficient quantity and arranged so as to provide an equal

distribution of UV-C energy on the cooling coil and drain pan.

3. Lamps


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 237310 - 8

a. Individual Lamp Output: Measured in an ASME nozzle test apparatus using a 45

degree F air stream moving at not less than 400 feet per minute.

b. Output: Minimum of 350 microwatts per square centimeter measured at a distance

of one meter in the 245 nm to 266 nm band.

c. Lamp Life: Guaranteed for 12,000 hours.

d. Lamps shipped separately for field installation to minimize the chance for bulb

damage.

4. Electrical

a. Power Supplies: High-efficiency electronic type matched to the emitters and

capable of producing the specified output intensity.

b. Environmental Range: 45 degrees F to 170 degrees F with relative humidity up to

100 percent and air velocities up to 2000 fpm.

c. Power Source Enclosure: Aluminum, mounted in the field.

5. Mounting

a. UV-C Lamps: Clamp-mounted for easy installation, positioning and maintenance

onto a field supplied support structure.

b. Support Structure and Mounting Hardware: Non-corrosive materials.

6. Performance

a. UV-C lamps mounted to a parabolic back-reflector to redirect 90 percent of the

emitted UV-C onto the cooling coil and drain pan.

b. Equal amounts of UV-C energy shall strike the drain pan, either directly or

indirectly through reflection.

c. Irradiation intensity large enough so that bacteria requiring a lethal UV dose of

100,000 microwatts/cm2 will not survive more than 10 minutes anywhere on the

surface of the coil.

7. Safety

a. Interlock: Provide a safety interlock to de-energize power to lights when access

door is open.

b. Warning Sign: Provide a three-color warning sign on the air handling unit access

door to read: “DANGER: ULTRAVIOLET LIGHT IN USE. POTENTIAL FOR

BURNS AND LOSS OF EYESIGHT. CONTACT FACILITIES

MANAGEMENT FOR ACCESS”.

M. Controls

1. Combination Starter-Disconnects

a. Sized, mounted and wired by unit manufacturer for each fan motor.

b. Circuit breaker.

c. Control transformer with fusing and secondary grounding.

d. Hand-Off-Auto (H-O-A) switch.

e. Two normally open auxiliary contacts

f. Overload heaters.

g. Manual reset overloads.

h. Full metal enclosure, NEMA Type 3R.

2. Building Automation System Controls: Refer to Section 23 90 10.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 237310 - 9

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General:

1. Install air handling units and complete piping and wiring connections in accordance with

equipment manufacturer's published installation instructions and recognized industry

standards. Submit manufacturer's published installation instructions with operating and


2. Coordinate installation of air handling units with other Work, including roof decking,

ductwork, and piping.

3. Provide access space around air handling units for service as indicated on Drawings and

as recommended by manufacturer.

B. Support:

1. Install units level to prohibit excessive vibration and insure longer life.

2. Roof Mounted Units: Roof curbs provided as Work of this Section shall be coordinated

with requirements of the roofing subcontractor. Product data submittals for roof curbs,

with, or without, cants will be considered in compliance with roofer's requirements.

C. Piping Connections:

1. Refer to Division 23 piping and specialty sections and details on Drawings. Provide

piping, valves, gages, supports, flexible connectors and accessories as indicated.

2. Install piping adjacent to air handling units to allow service and maintenance.

3. Install condensate drain, complete with trap, on all cooling coils furnished with drain pan.

Provide trap seal according to unit manufacturer's recommendations.

D. Ductwork Connections

1. Connect ductwork to air handling units mounted on vibration isolators with flexible

connections.

E. Electrical Wiring:

1. Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be factory –

mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer’s wiring diagram to Electrical Contractor.

2. Verify that electrical wiring installation is in accordance with manufacturer’s submittal

and installation requirements of Division 26 sections.

3. Provide positive equipment ground for air handling unit components.

4. Do not proceed with equipment start-up until wiring installation is acceptable to

equipment installer.

F. Do not operate units for any purpose, temporary or permanent, until ductwork is clean, filters

are in place, bearings lubricated, and fans have been test run under observation. Replace

temporary filters used during construction with new, clean filters prior to start of air system

testing and balancing.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 237310 - 10


A. Upon completion of installation of units, and after motor has been energized with power source,

perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service

representative to demonstrate compliance with requirements:

1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed.

2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to

ducts and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload

protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect switches.

3. Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete.

4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify fan

wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive system, make

final alignments of pulleys and belt tension, and install belt guards.

5. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.

6. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts.

7. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in

connected ductwork systems are in fully open position.

B. See Section 23 95 10 for testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures. Prepare and submit test

and inspection reports.

C. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Controls and equipment will be considered defective if

they do not pass tests and inspections.

D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units that cannot be satisfactorily corrected and retest as

specified above.

3.3 START-UP SERVICES

A. Manufacturer shall provide start-up service on units to include control interface with BAS.


Strada WVU Shroyer Hall Renovations Unitary Equipment

PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 238110 - 1

SECTION 238110 – UNITARY EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED


installation of unitary equipment.


A. Section 230505, HVAC Basic Materials: Equipment nameplates and motors.


C. Section 239610, Wiring of HVAC Equipment: Controls.


1.3 SUBMITTALS


1. Ductless Split System Air Conditioners

B. Product Data: Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories for each type of

product indicated. Include performance data in terms of capacities, outlet velocities, static

pressures, sound power characteristics, motor requirements, and electrical characteristics.

C. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.

D. Samples for Color Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.

E. Field quality-control test reports.

F. Operation and Maintenance Data: To include in operation, and maintenance manuals.




intended use.

B. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 62.1, Section 5 -

"Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and System Start-up."


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 238110 - 2

C. Minimum Energy Efficiency: ANSI/ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1: Comply with applicable

requirements in Section 6 - "Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning”.

1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged

with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Filters: One set of filters for each unit.

2. Fan Belts: One set of belts for each unit.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DUCTLESS SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONER

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Mitsubishi Mr. Slim Series, or Daikin AC, EMI International, Sanyo.

B. System shall be complete with wall mounted indoor evaporator blower as indicated on

Drawings, matching outdoor condenser-compressor unit and microprocessor remote controller.

C. Indoor Evaporator Blower

1. Cabinet:

a. Enameled steel with removable panels on front and ends.

b. Discharge Grille: Steel with surface-mounted frame.

c. Insulation: Faced, glass-fiber duct liner.

d. Drain Pan: Galvanized steel, with connection for drain; insulated.

e. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with

requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004.

2. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, complying with

ARI 210/240, and with thermal-expansion valve.

3. Fan: Direct drive, centrifugal.

4. Fan Motors: Refer to Section 23 05 05.

5. Filters: Permanent, cleanable.

6. Wiring Terminations: Connect motor to chassis wiring with plug connection.

7. Condensate Pump: Unit shall be provided with integral condensate pump.

D. Air-cooled Condenser-Compressor Unit

1. Casing: Steel, finished with baked enamel in manufacturer’s standard color selected by

Architect, removable panels for access to controls, weep holes for water drainage, and

mounting holes in base. Provide brass service valves, fittings, and gage ports on exterior

of casing.

2. Compressor: Hermetically sealed with crankcase heater and mounted on vibration

isolation. Compressor motor shall have thermal- and current-sensitive overload devices,

start capacitor, relay, and contactor.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 238110 - 3

3. Compressor Type: Reciprocating.

4. Two-speed compressor motor with manual-reset high-pressure switch and automatic-

reset low-pressure switch.

5. Refrigerant: R-407C or R-410A.

6. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, complying with

ARI 210/240, and with liquid sub cooler.

7. Fan: Aluminum-propeller type, directly connected to motor.

8. Motor: Permanently lubricated, with integral thermal-overload protection.

9. Low Ambient Kit: Permits operation down to 0 degrees F.

E. Controls

1. Thermostat: Remote low voltage with sub base to remotely control compressor and

evaporator fan, with the following features:

a. Compressor time delay.

b. 24-hour time control of system stop and start.

c. Liquid-crystal display indicating temperature, set-point temperature, time setting,

operating mode, and fan speed.

d. Fan-speed selection, including auto setting.

2. Refer to Section 23 90 10.

3. Automatic-reset timer to prevent rapid cycling of compressor.

F. Refrigerant Line Kits: Soft-annealed copper suction and liquid lines factory cleaned, dried,

pressurized, and sealed; factory-insulated suction line with flared fittings at both ends.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install unitary equipment and complete piping connections in accordance with equipment



B. Filters installed in unitary equipment during the construction period will be considered

temporary. Provide new throwaway filter(s) at time of Owner acceptance of Work.

C. Install condensate drain, complete with trap, on rooftop units in accordance with manufacturer's

recommendation.

D. Install condensate drain, complete with trap, on all cooling coils furnished with drain pan.

Provide trap seal according to equipment manufacturer's recommendations.

E. Install PVC outdoor air intake and vent outlet piping on condensing furnaces in accordance with

manufacturer's recommendations; provide only long radius elbows.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 238110 - 4

F. Install pre charged refrigerant piping in accordance with equipment manufacturer's

recommendations. In lieu of pre charged refrigerant piping, Contractor may elect to provide a

field installed refrigerant piping system. Install refrigerant piping system complete with

charging valves, shutoff valves, sight glasses, oil traps and double risers when required by

equipment manufacturer. Consult manufacturer's literature for specific instructions


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test,

and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including connections, and

to assist in field testing. Report results in writing.

B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest

until no leaks exist.

2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm

proper motor rotation and unit operation.

3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and

equipment.

C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

3.3 TESTS

A. Field installed refrigerant piping shall be leak tested with a mixture of system refrigerant and

dry nitrogen. Pressurize to 350 psi and inspect for and repair all leaks. Purge system. Evacuate

system and charge system with dry nitrogen. Purge system again, evacuate and recharge with

system refrigerant.


Strada WVU Shroyer Hall Renovations Terminal Heating Units

PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 238210 - 1

SECTION 238210 – TERMINAL HEATING UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED


installation of terminal heating units.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


1. Cabinet Unit Heaters

2. Unit Heaters

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 HORIZONTAL UNIT HEATER, HOT WATER

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Trane Model P vertical and Model S horizontal, or Modine,

Airtherm, Sterling.

B. Casing: Die-formed steel, phosphatized, finished in baked enamel. Top plate shall be provided

with threaded or drilled hanger connections.

C. Heating Elements: 0.025 inch thick wall seamless copper tubing with aluminum fins

mechanically bonded to tubing.

D. Coil Test Pressure: 300 psig air tested under water.

E. Fan Guard: Removable heavy duty wire cage.

F. Motor: Continuous duty, direct connected to fan, with built-in automatic reset thermal

protection.

G. Fan: Aluminum or steel blades, statically and dynamically balanced.

H. Outlet: Adjustable discharge louver.

I. Controls: Line voltage room thermostat with heat-off-fan settings. Thermostat shall cycle fan.

Power disconnect switch.

Strada WVU Shroyer Hall Renovations Terminal Heating Units

PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 238210 - 2

2.2 CABINET UNIT HEATER, HOT WATER

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Trane Force-Flo, or Modine, Airtherm, Sterling.

B. Cabinet: Die-formed, heavy gage steel. Phosphatized, finish in baked enamel of color selected

by Architect. Removable front panel for access to interior.

C. Fans: Forward curved, double inlet aluminum centrifugal fans, mounted on double extended

shaft.

D. Filter: Throwaway fiberglass type.

E. Motors: Resilient mounted on cushion base, furnished for constant speed operation, built-in

automatic reset thermal overload protection.

F. Heating Elements: Seamless copper tubing mechanically bonded onto aluminum fins with tubes

silver brazed to supply and return headers.

G. Installation: Floor mounted, semi recessed wall mounted semi or fully recessed , as indicated

on Drawings.

H. Test Pressure: Leak tested at 300 psig air under water.

I. Controls: Refer to Section 239010, Building Automation System.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install terminal heating units and complete piping connections in accordance with unit



B. Filters installed in cabinet unit heaters during the construction period will be considered

temporary. Provide new throwaway type unit filters at time of Owner acceptance of Work.


Strada WVU Shroyer Hall Renovations Building Automation System

PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 239010 - 1

INDEX

PART 1 - GENERAL .................................................................................................................................. 3 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS ......................................................................................................................... 3 1.2 OVERVIEW ................................................................................................................................................ 3 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS ............................................................................................................................... 3 1.4 REFERENCES ............................................................................................................................................ 4 1.5 DEFINITIONS ............................................................................................................................................ 4 1.6 MANUFACTURERS .................................................................................................................................. 5 1.7 SCOPE OF WORK ...................................................................................................................................... 5 1.8 SUBMITTALS ............................................................................................................................................ 7 1.9 COORDINATION WITH OTHER CONTRACTORS ............................................................................. 12 1.10 CONTRACTOR (CSC) EXPERIENCE AND PERFORMANCE ............................................................ 12 1.11 WARRANTY AND SERVICE ................................................................................................................. 12 1.12 COMPLY – WITHOUT EXCEPTION ..................................................................................................... 13

PART 2A - PRODUCTS, HARDWARE ................................................................................................ 14 2A.1 LAPTOP COMPUTER ............................................................................................................................. 14 2A.2 NETWORKING/COMMUNICATIONS .................................................................................................. 15 2A.3 BAS INTERFACING WITH 3-PARTY SUB-SYSTEMS ....................................................................... 16 2A.4 GLOBAL BUILDING CONTROLLER /ROUTER .................................................................................. 16 2A.5 APPLICATION CONTROLLERS ............................................................................................................ 18 2A.6 AIR TERMINAL DEVICES (SBD) .......................................................................................................... 20 2A.7 AIR TERMINAL DEVICES (ZCU) ......................................................................................................... 23 2A.8 TERMINAL UNIT ELECTRIC ACTUATORS ....................................................................................... 28 2A.9 ROOM LEVEL CONTROLLERS ............................................................................................................ 29 2A.10 SPECIALTY EXHAUST CONTROLLERS ............................................................................................. 31 2A.11 SERVER .................................................................................................................................................... 34 2A.12 LAPTOP COMPUTER ............................................................................................................................. 34 2B.13 MOBILE APPLICATIONS ....................................................................................................................... 35 2A.14 FIELD HARDWARE/INSTRUMENTATION ......................................................................................... 36 2A.15 SENSORS .................................................................................................................................................. 36 2A.16 THERMOSTATS ...................................................................................................................................... 40 2A.17 VALVE AND DAMPER ACTUATORS .................................................................................................. 41 2A.18 CONTROL VALVES ................................................................................................................................ 42

PART 2B - PRODUCTS, SOFTWARE .................................................................................................. 42 2B.1 SYSTEM SOFTWARE OVERVIEW ....................................................................................................... 42 2B.2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION .................................................................................................................. 43 2B.3 GRAPHIC PROGRAMMING .................................................................................................................. 43 2B.4 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SOFTWARE .......................................................................................... 45 2B.5 SOFTWARE USER INTERFACE ............................................................................................................ 45 2B.6 LABORATORY AIR SYSTEM REPORTING REQUIREMENTS ......................................................... 51

PART 3 - EXECUTION ........................................................................................................................... 52 3.1 EXAMINATION ....................................................................................................................................... 52 3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION ................................................................................................................... 52 3.3 WIRING INSTALLATION ...................................................................................................................... 52 3.4 CONTROL DEVICE INSTALLATION ................................................................................................... 53 3.5 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS FOR CONTOL SYSTEMS .......................................................... 54 3.6 BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM INTERFACE ............................................................................. 55 3.7 CONNECTIONS ....................................................................................................................................... 56 3.8 CONTROL POWER ................................................................................................................................. 56 3.9 IDENTIFICATION ................................................................................................................................... 57 3.10 TRENDS .................................................................................................................................................... 57


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 239010 - 2

3.11 ALARMS ................................................................................................................................................... 58 3.12 SCHEDULES ............................................................................................................................................ 58 3.13 ACCEPTANCE OF COMPLETED BAS INSTALLATION .................................................................... 59 3.14 TRAINING ................................................................................................................................................ 61 3.15 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING .............................................................................................................. 62

PART 4 - SEQUENCES OF OPERATION ........................................................................................... 62 4.1 SEQUENCES OF OPERATION ............................................................................................................... 62 4.2 POINTS LISTS .......................................................................................................................................... 70


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 239010 - 3

SECTION 239010 – BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions of the Contract,

General Conduct of the Work and Special Requirements, and Division 01 Specification

Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 OVERVIEW

A. This document contains the specification and input/output summaries for the Building

Automation System (BAS) at WVU Shroyer Hall. The system architecture shall utilize

intelligent distributed control modules, located at each site, which communicate over a local

controller network. The BAS shall provide Direct Digital Control (DDC), monitored via

Microsoft Internet-Explorer, the thin-client user interface. This BAS for the air conditioning,

heating and ventilating systems shall interface with other microprocessor based building

subsystems as specified.

B. The system will consist of an open architecture that utilizes EIA standard 709.1, the LonTalk™

protocol, as the common communication protocol between all controllers and integral ANSI /

ASHRAE™ Standard 135-2001, BACnet functionality to assure interoperability between all

system components. Both the LonTalk™ protocol and the ANSI / ASHRAE™ Standard 135-

2001, BACnet protocol are required to assure that the project is fully supported by the two

HVAC open protocols to reduce future building maintenance, upgrade, and expansion costs.

C. It is the intent of this document that all control points, including those at the Application Level,

be brought to the Ethernet Network Level.

D. Contractor Alert: Many aspects of the installation and implementation of this project require

approval by the University’s Physical Plant before the BAS installation shall proceed.


A. 3rd-Party Interfacing is required on this project for sub-systems such as:

Roof Top Unit(s)

Chiller(s)

Variable Frequency Drive(s)

VAV boxes

Boilers

Fans

Pumps

Ductless Split Systems


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 239010 - 4

Lighting Controls

Electrical Monitoring

OTHER as specified by WVU

1.4 REFERENCES

A. ANSI/ASHRAE 135-2001: BACnet™ -A Data Communication Protocol for Building

Automation Systems: This shall include the Standard and all published Addenda.

B. Lon -An open architecture that utilizes EIA standard 709.1, the LonTalk™ protocol, as the

common communication protocol between all peer-to-peer controllers.

1.5 DEFINITIONS

A. BAS refers to the Building Automation System. (In the past, this may have been referred to as

CCS, Central Control System, EMS, Energy Management System, or ATC, Automatic

Temperature Control.)

B. CSC refers to the Control System Contractor. The CSC is the Contractor responsible for the

implementation of this Section of the Specifications.

C. Gateway refers to the interface (hardware and/or software) to provide seamless integration by

non-BAS equipment manufacturers. Refer to paragraph 2A.2 “BAS Interfacing with 3rd-Party

Sub-systems”.

D. I/O refers to Input/Output. Thus, "I/O device" means "Input/Output device".

E. IP refers to the Internet Protocol.

F. OEM stands for Original Equipment Manufacturer, and refers to the manufacturer of the

equipment being provided that includes a microprocessor based building sub¬system (RTU(s),

Chiller(s), VFD(s), Lighting Controls, and/or Electrical Monitoring) for this Project.

G. Object Table(s) refers to the detailed listing(s) of BACnet objects and the functional

requirements using the various operator interfaces for the system. In the past, this/these may

have been referred to as "Points List(s)" and "I/O Summary".

Note: For systems using Peer-to-Peer Lon Communications, only the information supplied at

the Ethernet level will be BACnet.

H. On-line refers to accessibility via the thin-client user interface.

I. Thin-client User Interface refers to the software program Microsoft Internet Explorer.

J. WVUIT refers to WVU’s Telecommunications and Networking Services.

K. OWS refers to an Operator Work Station, also seen as Operator Workstation.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 239010 - 5

L. “University’s Physical Plant Group” refers to University employees designated by the Office

of Facilities Management.

1.6 MANUFACTURERS

A. Siemens – Apogee/Desigo, Pittsburgh Branch.

B. No other Manufacturers are allowed.

1.7 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Control System Contractor's (CSC) Responsibilities:

The CSC shall furnish and install all necessary hardware, wiring, pneumatic tubing,

computing equipment and software required to provide a complete and functional system

necessary to perform the design intent given in the sequences of operation, and as defined

in this specification.

The CSC is fully responsible to integrate 3rd party equipment sub-systems when supplied

with a BACnet, Lon, or Modbus interface. The CSC and the 3rd party equipment supplier

shall work together to ensure proper integration of the systems. All costs associated with

the work of this Section shall be included in the CSC’s contract.

The CSC shall coordinate the CSC’s work with other trades.

B. System Requirements

All material and equipment used shall be standard components, regularly manufactured

and available, and not custom designed especially for this project. All systems and

components, except site-specific software, shall have previously been thoroughly tested

and proven in actual use prior to installation on this project.

The system architecture shall be fully modular permitting expansion of application

software, system peripherals, and field hardware.

The system, upon completion of the installation and prior to acceptance of the project,

shall perform all operating functions as detailed in this specification.

C. Equipment

System Hardware

a. The CSC shall provide the following:

1) Control modules.

2) All relays, switches, sensing devices, indicating devices, and transducers

required to perform the functions listed in Object Table(s).

3) All monitoring and control wiring and air tubing.

4) For this project, the CSC shall provide integration gateway modules and

software to interface with 3rd party equipment as specified by the Owner;

examples include RTU(s), Chiller(s), VFD(s), Lighting Controls, and/or

Electrical Monitoring.

Note: If possible 3rd party equipment manufacturers will supply controllers

utilizing BACnet IP, Lon, or Modbus, communications, limiting the

gateway modules required by the CSC.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 239010 - 6

System Software

a. The CSC shall provide all software identified in this specification. The database

required for implementation of these specifications shall be provided by the CSC,

including point descriptor, alarm limits, calibration variables, on-line graphics,

reports and point summaries. The CSC shall provide and create the system using

the latest software release, at the time of Shop Drawing approval.

b. Site-license: All required software site-license for this project shall be furnished by

the CAC.

D. Object Table(s)

The system as specified shall monitor, control, and calculate all of the points/objects and

perform all the functions as listed in sequences of operation and as shown in control

diagrams in this specification.

All objects shall be exposed as BACnet Objects, with full Functional Profile information

and XIF files (Lon), to facilitate BACnet IP communication between multiple vendors.

E. Codes and Regulations

All electrical equipment and material and its installation shall conform to the current

requirements of the following authorities:

a. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA)

b. National Electric Code (NEC)

c. National Fire Code

d. International Mechanical Code

e. International Building Code

f. International Plumbing Code

All distributed, application controllers supplied shall be in compliance with the following

listings and standards:

a. UL916 for Open Energy Management

b. FCC Part 15, Sub-Part B, Class A

c. CE Electro Magnetic Compatibility

The control system manufacturer shall have quality control procedures for design and

manufacture of environmental control systems for precise control and comfort, indoor air

quality, HVAC plant operation, energy savings and preventative maintenance.

Where two or more codes conflict, the most restrictive shall apply. Nothing in this

specification or related documentation shall be construed to permit work not conforming

to applicable codes.

F. Building Ethernet Connection Cabling: The CSC shall provide building compatible Ethernet

cabling, (typically CAT-5), between Global Building Controller(s)/Router(s) and the Building

Telecommunications Closet. The building Ethernet Connection shall be provided by the

University (cooperation between Physical Plant and WVUIT). The CSC shall provide repeaters

between Global Building Controllers /Routers and the Building Ethernet Connection as

required. Final Building Ethernet Connection shall be coordinated with the University’s

Physical Plant Group.

G. Major Systems Cabling: The CSC shall provide all required cabling, between the Global

Building Controller location and each location of an Air Handler, Heating System, and/or

Chilled Water System Panel


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 239010 - 7

H. The CSC shall provide all object mapping and programming to expose all objects to the

network level, and shall coordinate object naming conventions and network map requirements

with the University’s Physical Plant Group. The naming convention shall be submitted with the

BAS Shop Drawings for review and approval by the University’s Physical Plant.

I. The CSC shall provide a circuit from an existing Normal/Emergency power panel or an UPS for

the Global Building Controller/Routers and, if necessary, repeaters and Application Controllers

monitoring emergency equipment. A UPS is to be used only if Normal/Emergency power is not

available in the building.

J. The CSC shall provide router and software to route BACnet messages over the existing Campus

Ethernet infrastructure using BACnet standard Annex J routing (BACnet over IP). Existing

Campus Ethernet infrastructure has multiple subnets and is capable of routing IP messages.

K. Refer to Figure 1, Figure 2 and Figure 3 at the end of this Section for a graphical indication of

the Scope of Work, as it relates to the campus infrastructure and OEM equipment.

1.8 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Division 01.

A block diagram of the system showing each console item, and each Distributed

Processing Unit (DPU) and their interconnections.

The failure mode of the system with regard to both digital and analog control points.

A description of the proposed software packages and start-up and diagnostic routines

including sample screens and/or outputs of:

Typical display and log formats;

Lists of available commands, information requests, and advisory messages, and the

method of entry and reporting, including language;

The formal training programs available to the University.

B. As soon as Submittals are prepared, an electronic version shall be provided simultaneously with

the mailing of the paper copies. This version shall be transmitted in electronic format, via e-

mail, to expedite the approval process.

C. Shop Drawings: The Building Number and WVU Project Reference Number shall be part of

each piece of the Shop Drawings Submittal. All controls drawings shall be B-size (11” x 17”

sheet), C-size (24" x 18" sheet) or D-size (36" x 24" sheet), and shall be completed and

provided using AutoCAD. A minimum of four (4) copies of shop drawings shall be submitted

and shall consist of the following:

Shop Drawings shall include:

a. Original Specification Compliance Report see section 1.11

b. Index: The first sheet of the Shop Drawings shall be an Index of all sheets in the

set.

c. Legend: A description of symbols and acronyms used shall be provided at the

beginning of the set of Shop Drawings.

d. Communications Riser: A single-page diagram depicting the system architecture

complete with a communications riser. Riser shall include room locations and


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 239010 - 8

addressing for each controller. Include a Bill of Material for all equipment in this

diagram but not included with the unique controlled systems.

e. Device Addressing Scheme: Install controllers implementing an addressing scheme

consistent throughout the project, and be submitted, reviewed, and approved by the

University’s Physical Plant prior to implementation.

f. Equipment Numbering: Acronyms used for equipment installed for this project

shall be specified on a separate document within the shop drawings labeled,

“Equipment Identifier Prefix Acronym”. The numbering assigned to equipment

installed for this project shall sequentially follow the numbering of existing

equipment of the same type in the same building. The equipment-numbering

scheme shall be submitted, reviewed and approved by the University’s Physical

Plant prior to implementation.

g. Systems Summary: Drawings shall include a table listing each piece of equipment

and the area(s) served by each piece of equipment.

h. Valve Schedule: The Valve Schedule(s) shall be submitted WVU. At a minimum

the Valve Schedule shall indicate valve service, pressure class, size, type, body

material, manufacturer, model #, location, and identification tag.

i. Damper Schedule: The Damper Schedule(s) shall be submitted to WVU. At a

minimum the Damper Schedule shall indicate damper service, size, body,

manufacturer, model #, location, and identification tag.

j. Object Table: Object Table shall include all I/O points, all Alarm points and all

Trend points. Information on each point shall include the following:

1) Point type

2) Point description

3) Point name

4) Alarm limits, if applicable

5) Whether or not a Trend is Enabled on point

6) What Trend is triggered on, if applicable

7) Whether or not Trend historian (archive) is enabled on

8) point

9) Event Category

k. Plans: Drawings shall include the proposed location of all field devices and the

routing of the communications cabling.

l. System Schematic: Drawings shall include a single-line representation of the

equipment being controlled, including all field devices required for properly

controlling equipment and implementing the sequences of operation for this

project.

m. Sequence of Operation: Drawings shall include Sequences of Operation for each

piece of equipment with a unique configuration. The sequences shall be written in

English text in such a way as to clearly convey how the design sequence of

operation has been implemented by the controls design included in this Submittal.

A simple duplication of the design sequence of operation provided in the

specification for this project is not acceptable. The Sequences of Operation shall

follow the outline below for a pattern of form and content. Each device that is

referred to shall have the Device Tag identified in parentheses.

1) TITLE

2) GENERAL (include Set Points, Schedule, etc.)

3) MODES OF OPERATION

a) Unoccupied

(1) Heating

(2) Cooling


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 239010 - 9

b) Occupied

(1) Heating

(2) Cooling

4) INTERLOCKS (i.e. Fume Hoods, Exhaust Fans, etc.)

5) SAFETIES (i.e. Freeze Protection, Smoke Detector, etc.)

n. Point-to-point Wiring Details: Drawings shall include point-to¬point wiring details

and must show all field devices, start-stop arrangement for each piece of

equipment, equipment interlocks, controllers, panel devices, wiring terminal

numbers and any special information (i.e. shielding requirements) for properly

controlling equipment and implementing the required sequences of operation.

o. Bill of Material: Drawings shall include a bill of the material necessary and used

for properly controlling equipment and implementing the required sequences of

operation. As-built documents shall include the Valves and Dampers installed.

p. Configuration Details: Drawings shall include programming and parameter setup

information necessary for each controller used to properly control equipment and

implement the required sequence of operation.

q. On-line Graphics: Submit a sample of a typical graphical representation of the

equipment, logic and communication riser. The sample can be from a previous

project that had the same equipment.

r. Each unique controlled system or piece of equipment shall include the following

items (described above):

1) System Schematic

2) Sequence of Operation

3) Point-to-point Wiring Details

4) Bill of Material

5) Configuration Details

6) On-line Graphic (sample)

Shop drawings shall be submitted to and approved by the University’s Project Manager

before any aspect of the BAS installation shall proceed. Therefore, shop drawings must

be submitted in time for University’s Physical Plant review so that all installations can be

completed per the project's completion schedule. Ten working days shall be allowed for

the University’s Physical Plant to review submittals.

As-Built Drawings shall be created after the final system checkout, by modifying and

adding to the Shop Drawings. As-Built Drawings shall show exact installation. The CSC

shall deliver two hard copy sets, and two electronic (AutoCAD) sets of As-Built

Drawings with copy of the transmittal to the University’s Project Manager.

Before final configuration, the CSC shall provide Object Table(s) form(s) to the

University’s Project Manager that includes:

a. Description of all points/objects.

b. Listing of binary and analog hardware required to interface to the equipment for

each function.

c. Listing of all application programs associated with each piece of equipment.

d. BACnet device and object instances

e. Lon SNVTs with complete Functional profile Information with XIF files

f. Event Parameters.

g. Failure modes for control functions to be performed in case of failure.

The CSC shall provide an accurate graphic flow diagram for each software program

proposed to be used on the project as part of the submittal process. Revisions made as a

result of the submittal process, during the installation, start-up or acceptance portion of


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 239010 - 10

the project, shall be accurately reflected in the "as-built" graphic software flow diagrams

required by this specification.

D. Schedule:

The CSC shall submit to the University’s Project Manager a detailed schedule,

identifying all activities from the contract award to system warranty expiration. The

schedule shall be coordinated with all other Contractors and shall be submitted within 60

days after the notice to proceed. The schedule shall include, but shall not be limited to,

the following milestones:

a. notice to proceed;

b. submit Technical Proposal for review and approval by the University’s Project

Manager;

c. submit Shop Drawings, and associated hardware and software documentation;

d. receive work approval; Notice: No portion of the field installation may begin

without the Project Manager’s approval of working drawings, and hardware,

firmware and software documentation, unless specific written instructions to the

contrary are provided by the University’s Project Manager.

e. begin field installation;

f. complete installation of all thermowells;

g. complete installation of wiring runs;

h. complete installation of remote field devices;

i. deliver major BAS components and operator interface / telecommunications

equipment;

j. complete installation of panels, communication equipment, processors, etc.;

k. complete installation of operator interface and telecommunications equipment;

l. complete identification of all BAS equipment;

m. complete initial applications engineering and provide the University’s Project

Manager with programming and database for review;

n. revise programming input variables, as required;

o. submit copy of construction mark-up set for review and use in commissioning;

p. commission system;

q. notify the University’s Project Manager`, in writing, of system completion and

preparations for acceptance testing;

r. schedule acceptance testing to permit a member of the University’s Physical Plant

to be present;

s. initiate approved field training;

t. complete punch list items;

u. submit approved as-built drawings;

v. complete training;

w. initiate warranty period;

x. terminate warranty period.

The CSC shall submit similarly detailed schedule information, revised if necessary, for

any additional work which will extend the effectiveness of the BAS and is contracted

either concurrent to or immediately following the term of the present installation. It shall

be the responsibility of the CSC to alert the University’s Project Management of any

scheduling conflicts, and to defer to the judgment of the University in the resolution of

those conflicts.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 239010 - 11

The CSC shall provide additional workers and/or overtime hours as deemed necessary by

the University to meet scheduled completion dates. The CSC will bear any such

additional expense, whether the need arises from causes within the CSC’s control.

Should the CSC fail to maintain any part of the installation schedule, the University

reserves the right to require written weekly progress reports. If the University so elects,

the CSC shall provide a then-current schedule and shall provide written updates to that

schedule to the University on a weekly basis. If this option is exercised by the University,

the schedule shall be delivered to the University no later than the Thursday immediately

preceding the week during which the schedule will become effective. Bidders will note

that it remains the intent of the University to execute all available remedies under this

contract to ensure the CSC’s best efforts to satisfy the initial milestone scheduling. All

programming tools shall be provided as part of the system. CSC shall provide any system

upgrades released during the warranty period free of charge to the University.

E. Operating and Maintenance Manuals

Operating and Maintenance (O&M) manuals for the system shall include the following

categories: Workstation User's Manual and Project Engineering Handbook, and Software

Documentation. Project specific manuals shall include detailed information describing

the specific installation.

a. User's Manual shall contain as a minimum:

1) System overview.

2) Networking architecture.

3) The object tables.

4) The sequences of operation.

5) The graphical programming.

6) Established setpoints and schedules.

7) Summary of trend objects.

8) User manuals for the ‘third party’ software

b. Project Engineering Manual shall contain as a minimum:

1) System architecture overview DIVISION 23 – HVAC

2) Hardware cut-sheets and product descriptions

3) Wiring diagrams for all controllers and field hardware

4) Installation, mounting and connection details for all field hardware and

accessories

5) Commissioning and setup parameters for all field hardware

6) Maintenance procedures, including final tuning and calibration parameters.

7) Spare parts list.

8) Record Software Documentation shall contain as a minimum:

9) Graphical programming must be represented using either Visio or

AutoCAD.

10) Graphical representation of all control logic for every piece of mechanical

equipment controlled on the project, together with a glossary or icon symbol

library detailing the function of each graphical icon. 'Line by line' computer

program documentation is unacceptable.

11) Detailed description of control sequences used to achieve the specified

sequences.

F. PICS: Provide a BACnet Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement (PICS). Provide

complete description and documentation of any proprietary services and/or objects.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 239010 - 12

1.9 COORDINATION WITH OTHER CONTRACTORS

A. When the Project involves removal and/or demolition of existing BAS Panel(s) and/or BAS

cables (wire or fiber):

Contact the Project Manager and Physical Plant to coordinate the disconnection of the

equipment from the active CCS network.

Contact the Project Manager to coordinate the placement of removed equipment into an

inventory of Spare Parts for the Building being renovated.

B. Review the installation of all controlled systems such as air handling equipment, duct work,

piping, pumps, chillers, fans, and similar equipment for the purpose of providing the appropriate

installing contractor correct information for wells, relays, panels, access panels, and similar

appurtenances required for the control system. Such information shall include physical size,

proper location and orientation, and accessibility requirements.

C. The CSC shall coordinate the installation of all control devices, and shall ensure that supporting

work by others such as installation of thermometer wells, pressure taps, orifice plates and

flanges, access panels, electronic transducers, and other items required are included. The CSC

shall schedule the work to ensure that the items are installed in the proper manner at the

appropriate time.

1.10 CONTRACTOR (CSC) EXPERIENCE AND PERFORMANCE

A. The University requires a BAS that is installed, programmed, commissioned, and serviced by an

experienced CSC. To insure the University of proper BAS service and support, the CSC shall be

the authorized distributor of the BAS manufacturer for the local area and if requested by the

University shall supply proof thereof. In view of this, the CSC shall have installed a minimum

of five BASs of the same type and size as the BAS herein specified and shall provide job

names, a brief description of the scope of each BAS job, and a point of contact for each job. The

actual, local CSC or BAS branch office, rather than the BAS manufacturer, will provide this

information.

B. The CSC shall have a local office or representative staffed with factory-trained engineers, fully

capable of providing instruction, routine maintenance, and emergency maintenance service on

all system components. The CSC shall be responsible for replacement of: the controllers with

current job software, printer, PC(s), sensors, and devices at all times for a period of not less than

1 year following project completion, and shall guarantee replacement and software

reprogramming of a system in need of repair, within a 24 hour period after notification from the

University. In the case of an after-hours emergency, the CSC shall provide after-hours

emergency services which will, upon notification of an emergency situation, result in CSC

personnel being on-site within four hours if necessary.

1.11 WARRANTY AND SERVICE

A. Provide warranty under provisions of Division 01.

B. Provide all services, materials and equipment necessary for the successful operation of this

system for a period of one year. Provide all recommended preventive maintenance of the BAS


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 239010 - 13

system, which is indicated in the O&M Manuals during this period. In addition, provide two (2)

semi-annual visits for testing and evaluating the performance of the networked equipment

installed per this specification. One visit shall be during the cooling season and one visit shall

be during the heating season. Provide a written report after each visit is complete. Coordinate

service visits through the University’s Physical Plant. This service visit shall include, but not be

limited to, the following:

Check calibration and re-calibrate if needed instrumentation sensors for airflow, liquid

flow, pressure, humidity, temperature, and transducers. Written records shall be kept

indicating the performance of such calibrations along with pertinent data.

Check the operation of dampers and damper actuators to assure no lock up has occurred

and stroke is proper. Written records shall be kept indicating the performance of such

calibrations along with pertinent data.

Check the overall system field operations by performing an all-points review (by hard

copy or by documenting all-point inquiries). Verify that all monitoring and command

points are valid and active.

Written records shall be kept indicating the performance of such exercises.

C. If a problem develops at any time during the warranty/service period, the CSC shall monitor and

log the affected BAS point/object for the remainder of the warranty/service period. “A problem”

in the above statement will refer to an incident in which any of the following occur:

An alarm occurs due to defective control system components or improper installation or

programming.

Overall performance of the system is compromised due to defective control components

or improper installation or programming.

Major recalibration (by greater than 5 times the catalogued accuracy) is required for a

sensor during one of the service visits.

D. The CSC shall provide any system software upgrades released during the warranty period, free

of charge to the University.

1.12 COMPLY – WITHOUT EXCEPTION

A. Exception -Meet the functional intent. For each paragraph/subparagraph, the Contractor shall

identify all differences in specific functions stated in the given paragraph/subparagraph and

provide a description of what is excluded or how he intends to meet the function specified.

B. Does Not Comply -Cannot meet specified function and will not provide.

C. The BAS Contractor is hereby warned against indicating compliance with a given specification

item at compliance report time and subsequently including a different non-compliant item at

submittal time. References to “industry standard practices” shall not constitute a justification for

such a change. Any deviations from the original specification compliance report, a copy of

which shall be included with the shop drawing submittal, will not be accepted by the

Professional. In addition, all “exceptions” and “does not comply” responses shall be explained

in sufficient detail to the allow the Professional to evaluate the economic impact of the

difference and judge if the impact creates an unfair advantage when pricing alone is the sole

evaluation criteria for the overall system. The University reserves the right to require full


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 239010 - 14

unconditional compliance with any and all items deemed necessary and/or in the best interest of

the project. All submittal data shall clearly indicate sufficient technical information to readily

determine specification compliance.

D. It is recognized that the BAS design for this project, both hardware and software, represents a

specific approach to addressing both owner ease of operation and long-term energy efficiency

of the completed HVAC project. To that end, this specification clearly establishes MINIMUM

hardware, software, installation, commissioning and man-machine interface requirements.

While it is clear that there may be distinctions in how different ATC manufacturers configure

their hardware and software approaches/solutions for this project, it must be pointed out that

this specification establishes MINIMUM STANDARDS APPLICABLE TO ALL named

manufacturers. Named manufacturers should not assume that just because they are named as an

acceptable manufacturer, they can use lower level hardware and/or software components to

meet the functional intent of this specification. Where necessary, because a lower level panel or

terminal device fails to satisfy ALL of the specification requirements, manufacturers shall use

higher-level hardware to satisfy specification requirements, even if all requirements are

exceeded in the process. It remains the intent of this specification to require GREATER THAN

OR EQUAL TO COMPLIANCE from all manufacturers not used as the basis of design.

E. It is also recognized that the hardware and software complexities of current generation BAS

products make the equivalent nature of competing product lines ever more difficult to establish.

With this in mind, named manufacturers shall also be required to supplement their specification

compliance report with a complete technical submittal including:

BAS Overview diagram for full system indicating what type of DDC controller will be

used for each piece of HVAC equipment

full hardware specification data sheets for each type of DDC controller to be used

full hardware specification data sheets for each terminal (sensing/controlled) device to be

used

sample of implemented Sequences of Operation program code sufficient to establish

compliance with specification requirements

F. The Specification Compliance Report and associated Technical Submittal will be reviewed by

the University and named manufacturers who fail to establish “greater than or equal to“ system

design and performance will have their name removed by addendum.

PART 2A - PRODUCTS, HARDWARE

2A.1 LAPTOP COMPUTER

A. For all projects WVU will provide a laptop computer to the University’s Plant personnel prior

to the start of the Acceptance Testing (reference subsection 3.11 – Acceptance of Completed

BAS Installation).

B. The CSC shall provide and install the control system software and database on the WVU

supplied laptop computer as part of the project. The WVU supplied laptop computer shall have

the following minimum characteristics:

1. Manufacturer: Dell, Inspiron 600m


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 239010 - 15

2. Configuration: IBM compatible, Pentium M Processor 725.

3. Minimum memory: 1GB DDR SDRAM 2 DIMMs

4. Minimum processor speed: 1.6 GHz

5. Minimum Front Buss Speed: 400 MHz

6. Warranty: Manufacturer’s standard warranty, minimum 1-year.

7. Display: 15-inch XGA color monitor.

8. Floppy disk drive: 1.44MB

9. Hard disk drive: 60 GB, minimum

10. Optical drive: CD-RW

11. PC Slots: Connectors for (1) Type I or Type II cards

12. Network Interface Card: 3 com 10/100 PC card adapter

13. Wireless Networking Card: Intel PRO/Wireless 2200 Internal Wireless (802.11 b/g,

54Mbps)

14. I/O Ports:

a. 9-pin serial connector ( a must)

b. Serial infrared communication port (IrDA-1.1 compliant)

c. 15-pin monitor connector

d. USB (Universal Serial Bus) 2.0

15. Power: Lithium Ion battery, 53 WHr, A/C adapter

16. Operating system: Microsoft Windows XP Professional, SP2, with Media; and with

NTFS File System for all Operating Systems.

17. Nylon carrying case.

2A.2 NETWORKING/COMMUNICATIONS

A. The design of the hardware and software shall incorporate a new server that will communicate

with all Global Building Controllers via BACnet IP, using WVU’s existing LAN. The campus

LAN uses IP communication protocol.

Ethernet Switch: WVU will supply an Ethernet switch for each building. It is the CSC’s

responsibility to supply and install all cabling required to connect to the supplied switch.

All network parameters must be assigned and approved by the University’s Project

Manager prior to implementation.

B. The system must be fully BACnet™ compliant at the time of installation. This means that the

system must use BACnet™ as the native communication protocol between workstations or

servers on the network.

C. The BACnet communication protocol is the required protocol of the network. Note: LonTalk

and Siemens P1 are also an acceptable communications protocol for peer-to-peer

communications between Application Controllers.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 239010 - 16

2A.3 BAS INTERFACING WITH 3-PARTY SUB-SYSTEMS

A. General: The CSC shall integrate all sub-systems to the BAS, using Lon or native BACnet. A

sub-system shall be integrated via a gateway that converts the proprietary protocol to Lon or

BACnet protocol. Sub-systems include RTU(s), VFD(s), Chiller(s), Lighting Controls and/or

Electrical Monitoring provided as part of this project (refer to Figure 1, Figure 2 and Figure 3 at

the end of this specification section and related specification sections). These sub-systems shall

be controlled, monitored and graphically programmed through the Graphical User Interface

(GUI) software of the BAS. Note: 3rd party sub-systems shall communicate via BACnet IP,

Lon, Modbus if available, eliminating the need for most Gateways.

B. The CSC shall coordinate with the 3rd party sub-system supplier to ensure integration of the 3rd

party system into the BAS.

C. Gateway: The gateway(s), required for the sub-system(s), shall be provided by the OEM. The

gateway(s) is(are) further specified below:

All system information specified in the sequence of operation and related documents

shall be available to the BAS. Read and write capability, as indicated by an object table

provided by the OEM, shall be provided to the mechanical and electrical equipment

indicated and be available to the BAS system. The OEM shall provide to the CSC, a table

of gateway objects and their functionality, including normal operating limits (i.e. High

and Low Oil Temperature Limits from a Chiller control panel).

Define how the proposed gateway interaction with equipment will comply with this

section. OEMs shall bid a fully BACnet IP compliant device to facilitate interoperability

between OEM electrical/mechanical sub-systems and the BACnet BAS or provide the

necessary gateway to integrate into the web-based BACnet BAS (WebCTRL, Apogee, or

I/A) using the BACnet, Siemens P1, or LonTalk protocol.

a. The OEM shall provide any software or hardware required to access or modify any

electrical/mechanical subsystems (i.e. RTUs, VFD, Chillers, Lighting Controls

and/or Electrical Monitoring).

b. Typical gateway requirements for projects include: A BACnet interface to the

chiller manufacturer’s product(s), a BACnet interface to the lighting controls

manufacturer’s product(s), a Modbus interface to the VFD manufacturer’s

product(s), a Modbus interface to the electrical monitoring manufacturer’s

product(s) (Cutler-Hammer), a Modbus or BACnet interface to the lab equipment

manufacturer’s product(s).

If the equipment manufacturer does not have this capability, they shall contact the

authorized representative of the CSC for assistance and shall include in their equipment

price any necessary hardware and/or software obtained from the CSC to comply with this

section.

D. OEM Configuration Tools and Licenses: Configuration Tools, and all software licenses,

required to configure all OEM controllers installed on this project shall be provided.

2A.4 GLOBAL BUILDING CONTROLLER /ROUTER

A. Acceptable Products:

SIEMENS: Apogee MBC or MEC


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 239010 - 17

B. General - Global Building Controller /Router

The Global Building Controller /Router shall be a microprocessor based communications

device. One of the functions of the Global Building Controller /Router is to provide a

communications gateway between a controller network and an IP Ethernet network. The

Global Building Controller /Router shall communicate via IP and be connected to the

WVU campus Ethernet infrastructure. A sufficient number of controllers shall be

supplied to fully meet the requirements of this specification. Controller networks shall

use either BACnet, Siemens P1, or LonTalk protocol.

The Global Building Controller /Router shall support a network of at least 50 controllers.

The Global Building Controller /Router shall provide a port which can be connected to

Operator Workstations, portable computers, or modems.

Global Building Controller /Router shall provide full arbitration between multiple users,

whether they are communicating through the same or different Global Building

Controller /Routers. DIVISION 23 – HVAC

The Global Building Controller /Router shall be responsible for routing global

information from the various controller networks which may be installed throughout a

building.

C. Memory: Each Global Building Controller /Router shall have sufficient memory to support its

own operating system and databases including:

Control processes

Energy Management Applications

Alarm Management

Historical/Trend Data for all points

Maintenance Support Applications

Custom Processes

Operator I/O

Serial Communications

D. Expandability: The system shall be modular in nature, and shall permit easy expansion through

the addition of software applications, workstation hardware, application controllers, sensors,

and actuators.

E. Integrated On-Line Diagnostics: Each Global Building Controller /Router shall continuously

perform self-diagnostics, communication diagnosis and diagnosis of all subsidiary equipment.

The Global Building Controller /Router shall provide both local and remote annunciation of any

detected component failures, or repeated failure to establish communication. Indication of the

diagnostic results shall be provided at each Global Building Controller.

F. Surge and Transient Protection: Isolation shall be provided at all network terminations, as well

as all field point terminations to suppress induced voltage.

G. Powerfail Restart: In the event of the loss of normal power, there shall be an orderly shutdown

of all Global Building Controllers /Routers to prevent the loss of database or operating system

software. Non-Volatile memory shall be incorporated for all critical Global Building Controller


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 239010 - 18

/Router configuration data, and battery back-up shall be provided to support the real-time clock

and all volatile memory for a minimum of 72 hours.

Upon restoration of normal power, the Global Building Controller /Router shall

automatically resume full operation without manual intervention.

Should Global Building Controller /Router memory be lost for any reason, the user shall

have the capability of reloading the Global Building Controller /Router via the Local

Area Network (LAN).

H. Communications:

The controller network shall use BACnet™ as its native communication protocol. The

communication between controllers shall be ARCNET or MS/TP at least 38.4 Kbps.

LonTalk and is also an acceptable communications protocol for peer-to-peer

communications between Application Controllers.

The Global Building Controller /Router shall utilize FLASH memory, battery backed

RAM or firmware which shall allow for operating system updates to be performed

remotely via TCP/IP or UDP/IP.

I. UPS: Uninterruptible Power Supply(s) is(are) required for the Global Building Controller(s),

and Application Controllers that monitor emergency equipment, if Normal/Emergency Power is

not available in the building.

2A.5 APPLICATION CONTROLLERS


Siemens: Apogee System FLN Devices

B. General -Application Controllers

Application controllers must use BACnet™ , Siemens P1, or LonTalk as the native

communication protocol between controllers.

Each Application Controller must be capable of standalone direct digital operation

utilizing its own processor, non-volatile flash memory, input/output, minimum 8 bit A to

D conversion, and include voltage transient. Firmware revisions to the module must be

able to be made from the local workstation, portable operator terminals or from remote

locations over modems or LANs.

The Application Controllers shall be expandable to the specified I/O point requirements

All point data, algorithms and application software within the controllers shall be custom

programmable from the Operator Workstation.

Each Application Controller shall execute application programs, calculations, and

commands via a microcomputer resident in the controller. All operating parameters for

application programs residing in each controller shall be stored in read/write-able

nonvolatile flash memory within the controller and will be able to upload/download

to/from the Operator Workstation.

Each Application Controller shall be configured on the workstation/server software as a

BACnet™ device or Lon SNVT. All of the points shall be configured as BACnet objects

or Lon SNVTs. Each controller shall include self-test diagnostics which allow the


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 239010 - 19

controller to automatically relay to the Global Building Controller /Router any

malfunctions or alarm conditions that exceed desired parameters as determined by

programming input

Each Application Controller shall be capable of performing event notification (alarming).

Each Application Controller shall contain both software and firmware to perform full

DDC PID control loops.

Each Application Controller shall contain a port for the interface of maintenance

personnel's portable computer. All network interrogation shall be possible through this

port.

The Application Controllers shall be capable of being mounted directly in or on

equipment located outdoors.

Input-Output Processing:

a. Digital outputs shall be relays or triCSC, 24VAC or VDC minimum. Each output

shall be configurable as normally open or normally closed

b. Universal inputs shall be capable of 0-5VDC, 0-20mA, and dry contact.

c. Analog output shall be electronic, voltage mode 0-10VDC or current mode 4-

20mA.

d. Analog pneumatic outputs shall be 0-20psi. ANALOG PNEUMATIC OUTPUTS

MAY REQUIRE USE OF EXTERNAL I/P TRANSDUCER. Each pneumatic

output shall have a feedback transducer to be used in the system for any software

programming needs. The feedback transducer shall measure the actual psi output

value and not a calculated value. An LED shall indicate the state of each output.

e. All programming sequences shall be stored in non-volatile memory. All

programming tools shall be provided as part of the system. Provide documentation

of all programming including configuration files.

Each Application Controller shall execute application programs, calculations, and

commands via a microcomputer resident in the Application Controller. All operating

parameters for application programs residing in each Application Controller shall be

stored in read/write-able nonvolatile flash memory within the controller. Firmware

revisions, application programs and program modifications to the controller shall be

capable of being performed over the Wide Area Network (WAN).

Each Application Controller shall be able to support various types of zone temperature

sensors, such as temperature sensor only, temperature sensor with built-in local override

switch, with setpoint adjustment switch. DIVISION 23 – HVAC

Each Application Controller for VAV application shall have a built-in air flow transducer

for accurate air flow measurement in order to provide the Pressure Independent VAV

operation.

Each Application Controller for VAV applications shall have an integral direct coupled

electronic actuator. The actuator shall provide on-off/floating point control with a

minimum of 35 in-lb of torque. The assembly shall mount directly to the damper

operating shaft. The actuator shall not require any limit switches, and shall be

electronically protected against overload. When reaching the damper or actuator end

position, the actuator shall automatically stop. The gears shall be manually disengaged

with a button on the assembly cover. The position of the actuator shall be indicated by a

visual pointer. The assembly shall have an anti-rotational strap.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 239010 - 20

Each Application Controller shall have LED indication for visual status of

communication, power.

Astronomical Time: Astronomic capability shall allow the system to calculate sunrise and

sunset times based on geographical location, and incorporate Daylight Savings Time, for

dusk-to-dawn control or dusk-to¬time control. This is required in any Application

Controller with I/O for the Exterior lighting circuit(s), as a back-up to light level

measurement control.

In the event of a loss of communication, the Application Controller shall control from a

standalone algorithm which maintains the assigned space temperature until

communication is restored.

UPS: Uninterruptible Power Supply(s) is(are) required for any Application Controller

that monitors emergency equipment, if Normal/Emergency Power is not available in the

building.

All Application Controller level objects shall be exposed as BACnet Objects or LON

SNVTs with full Functional Profiles and XIF files provided.

2A.6 AIR TERMINAL DEVICES (SBD)


Siemens LGE, LGS Series

B. General – Air Terminal Devices (SBD)

Terminal/flow package will require AMCA610 Certification

Terminals shall have a single blade damper for airflow adjustment and shall provide the

individual airflow capacities indicated in the project airflow schedules. Terminal airflow

control shall be pressure independent using actual airflow measurement feedback as an

integral part of a closed loop control process. Units not conforming to all construction

and performance criteria listed herein will be rejected

Terminal units shall have been tested as a complete system (terminal units, actuation,

flow sensor/transmitter, controls), prior to bid

Minimum airflow sensor measurement accuracy shall be +/- 5% of actual airflow over

the entire design airflow range of each air terminal. Airflow measurement accuracy

substantiation by a qualified independent test agency shall be available upon request.

Airflow transmitter shall be factory mounted on the terminal and shall include the

necessary signal conditioning/transmitter instrumentation to provide an output

proportional to the velocity pressure. Transmitter shall have an accuracy of at least +/-

0.5% of the transmitter range and a drift no greater than 0.5% full scale/year.

Transmitters shall have an appropriate range and resolution for effectively measuring the

required flows. High and low limits shall be fully adjustable.

Airflow transmitters not meeting these drift requirements shall be provided with an auto-

zero solenoid that connects to the air velocity pressure transducer’s inlet ports for

enabling automatic periodic re-calibration to ensure drift-free airflow measurement.

Automatic re-calibration shall occur at a minimum every 24 hours without airflow

disruption to the space.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 239010 - 21

All airflow measurement signals shall be made available to the BAS

All single blade damper air terminals shall have a wide open pressure drop less than

0.25”wc at airflow equivalent to 2000 fpm inlet duct velocity.

Discharge and radiated sound power level data shall be provided for each different size

and type of air terminal as part of the submittal documentation. Sound power data shall

be obtained in accordance with ANSI/ASHRAE 130-1995 Standard Methods of Testing

for Rating Ducted Air Terminal Units. All sound data shall be obtained by a qualified,

accredited and ARI approved testing laboratory.

Room supply air terminals :

a. Shall be constructed of 22 gauge galvanized steel with mechanically locked and

gasketed seams and shall meet the mechanical standards of and be in compliance

with UL 181 and UL 723, NFPA 90A, ESTM E84 and bacteria standard ASTM

C665.

b. Air terminal casings shall have 3/4" thick fiber-free closed cell foam insulation.

Damper shafts shall be solid ½" diameter zinc-plated steel with self-lubricating

polyethylene bushings and with external indication of the damper position.

c. Terminal lining shall be fiber-free foam meeting NFPA 90A and UL181

requirements. Lining shall consist of closed cell structure foam allowing for

disinfecting and hand washing with detergents and water.

d. Damper blades shall be 22 gauge steel with a polyethylene foam gasket to enable

tight shutoff where required for smoke control applications.

e. Provide minimum four quadrant averaging Pitot tube array type of airflow sensor

located upstream from all other air terminal components. Flow sensor shall have

accuracy within 3% of flow at one duct diameter upstream straight duct run.

f. Supply terminals shall be provided with integral hot water reheat coils comprised

of copper tubing of 0.017" wall thickness and have heavy gauge sine wave coil fins

for efficient heat transfer meeting scheduled capacities. The supply terminals shall

be certified under ARI-410, and display the ARI label.

g. CSC contractor shall provide factory mounted transitions from supply terminal to

reheat coil, as required

h. Supply terminal units shall be capable of single gang airlfow control of up to 7000

cfm per unit, with a single factory mounted reheat coil.

i. Terminal casing and damper leakage must not exceed the following when tested in

accordance with ASHRAE 130-1996, “Methods of Testing for Rating Ducted Air

Terminal Units” (Data must be included in submittal). Leakage rates are exclusive

of reheat coils :

Casing Leakage Damper Leakage

Unit Size 1.0” wc 3.0” wc 6.0” wc 1.5” wc 3.0” wc 6.0” wc

4 1 2 3 4 5 6

6 1 2 3 4 6 11

8 1 2 3 5 7 10

10 1 2 3 6 7 10

12 1 2 4 8 12 19

14 2 3 5 6 10 16

16 2 4 7 13 21 38

18 3 6 12 98 154 305


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 239010 - 22

Exhaust air terminals:

a. General exhaust terminal casing, sensor and blade shall be constructed of 22 gauge

galvanized steel. Damper shafts shall be ½" diameter stainless steel with self-

lubricating Teflon bushings and with external indication of the damper position.

b. General exhaust air terminals shall be provided with an orifice ring type of airflow

sensor located upstream of the damper. Flow sensor shall have accuracy within

3% of flow at one duct diameter upstream straight duct run.

c. All fume hood exhaust terminals shall be constructed of 20 gauge, 316L stainless

steel. Damper shafts shall be ½" diameter stainless steel with self-lubricating

Teflon bushings and with external indication of the damper position.

d. Fume hood exhaust terminals shall be provided with an orifice ring type of airflow

sensor located upstream of the damper. Flow sensor shall have accuracy within 3%

of flow at one duct diameter upstream straight duct run.

e. Airflow sensing techniques that may become inoperative due to accumulation of

particulate or chemical deposits or which can catch debris and obstruct exhaust

airflow may be inappropriate for fume hood exhaust applications. Such sensors

include pitot tubes, vortex shedders, thermal anemometers and other devices that

protrude into the center of the exhaust air stream. Terminals using this type of

flow sensing technologies must be pre-approved prior to bid.

f. Terminal casing and damper leakage must not exceed the following when tested in

accordance with ASHRAE 130-1996, “Methods of Testing for Rating Ducted Air

Terminal Units” (Data must be included in submittal) :

Exhaust Terminal Casing Leakage (CFM)

Unit Size 1” WC 3.0”WC 6.0”WC Unit Size 1.0” WC 3.0” WC 6.0”WC

4 0 1 3 10 1 3 4 6 0 1 3 11 / 12 1 2 3 7 1 2 4 14 1 3 5 8 1 2 4 16 1 3 5 9 1 2 4 18 1 3 5

Closed Blade Leakage, No Seals (Per ASHRAE 130-1996)

Imperial Units (CFM, Inches Water)

Unit Size 1.0” WC 3.0”WC 6.0”WC Unit Size 1.0” WC 3.0” WC 6.0”WC

4 13 20 25 10 67 110 135 6 31 50 63 11/12 72 144 168 7 39 58 77 14 98 195 228 8 42 73 94 16 133 266 310 9 56 94 111 18 112 280 335


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 239010 - 23

Blade Seal Leakage (VOLARA; Per ASHRAE 130-1996)

Imperial Units (CFM, Inches Water)

Unit Size 1.0” WC 3.0”WC 6.0”WC Unit Size 1.0” WC 3.0” WC 6.0”WC

4 0 1 3 10 1 3 4 6 0 1 3 11/12 1 2 4 7 1 2 3 14 1 3 5 8 1 2 3 16 1 3 5 9 1 2 4 18 1 3 5

2A.7 AIR TERMINAL DEVICES (ZCU)


Siemens ZCU Series

B. General – Air Terminal Devices (ZCU)

1. Furnish and install a fully catalogued Modular Zone Control Unit (ZCU) with integral pre-

programmed controls, reheat coil, sensors and piping accessories of the sizes and capacities

as scheduled. The ZCU’s shall be UL-916 listed.

2. All integral appurtenances of the ZCU, including the piping and controls, shall be

manufactured by the same manufacturer of the ZCU. All testing, commissioning

programming, certification and validation of the ZCU shall be performed by the same ZCU

manufacturer. All electrical components including low voltage and line voltage

components and wiring shall be completed by the same ZCU manufacturer and mounted

and wired in an electrical enclosure. Units shall have a single point field wiring connection

and disconnect. Units shall be manufactured and wired per UL-1995 and in accordance

with the National Electric code.

3. The ZCU manufacturer shall provide a 2 year parts and labor warranty for the complete

ZCU including all the integral appurtenances.

4. The contractor shall furnish and install pressure independent single duct variable air

volume control assemblies with integral attenuator of the sizes, capacities and

configurations shown on the Drawings.

a. Terminals shall be constructed of not less than 22 gauge galvanized steel with a

minimum G60 zinc coating, able to withstand a 125 hour salt spray test per ASTM

B-117. Stainless steel casings, or galvanized steel casings with a baked enamel paint

finish, may be used as an alternative. Air Terminals shall be certified under ARI

standard 885-98. Terminal units shall be either UL or ETL certified. All electrical

components including low voltage and line voltage shall be mounted and wired in

an electrical enclosure.

b. Air terminal shall be insulated with 1 inch thick, 1.5 lbs/cubic foot Thermopure –

(EPFI) Engineered Polymer Foam Insulation liner, rated to prevent air flow erosion

to 6000 fpm surface velocity. The insulation shall comply with UL 181 and NFPA

255 (25/50). Material shall be chemically resistant to most hydrocarbon based


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 239010 - 24

solvents. Material shall not support mold growth or demonstrated degradation while

subject to air erosion when tested in accordance with UL 181 and UMC 10-1.2.

c. All interior features of the boxes (such as mixing baffles, damper housings, etc.)

shall be secured within the casing to avoid excessive movement or rattling with air

movement or extremely generated vibration.

d. 12 gauge universal handle brackets shall be installed on the VAV box unit casing

stiffening up the 22 gauge VAV unit casing, lowering radiated noise, connecting the

integral appurtenances and allowing the installing tradesman a location for material

handling of the ZCU without damaging it.

e. The discharge connection shall include 1” extension with slip and drive connections

for use by the contractor to secure the discharge ductwork or appurtenances to the

unit and shall be reinforced to provide a rigid assembly.

5. Inlet valve assembly shall have a seamless butt weld on a round inlet tube to minimize

leakage and prevent the damper from binding. Inlet tubes with overlapping welds or non-

continuous, skip welds are not acceptable. Damper shaft shall rotate in a self-lubricating

Kepital (acetal resin material) bearing. Damper shaft shall be die cast aluminum. Damper

shaft end shall include a casted damper position indicator. End of the shaft on which the

damper actuator is installed shall be square to prevent actuator tightening screw(s) from

slipping. Round damper shafts are not acceptable.

6. Damper tube shall be free of obstructions including damper stops to allow the free rotation

of the damper. Mechanical damper stops located in the inlet tubes are not acceptable. A

flexible split partitioned gasket mounted in the damper blade without adhesives shall

provide the damper seal. Damper gasket shall include split partitioning around the

perimeter to prevent damper noise at low flows near full close off. Damper gaskets without

perimeter split partitioning are not acceptable. Damper shall be double thickness of 24

gauge steel and leakage through the damper assembly shall be less than 1% of maximum

CFM at 3” static pressure.

7. Inlet air valve shall have structural beads machine formed into the tube. One external bead

shall be provided for the attachment of duct.

8. Inlet air valve flow sensor shall be multipoint quadrant averaging with flow sampling of

both velocity pressure and flow differential pressure from four quadrants, and shall contain

two control ports and two accessory ports. Flow sensors sampling only velocity pressure in

all four quadrants are not acceptable. Sensors reading differential pressure with less than 8

measuring points are not acceptable. All piping connections to the flow sensor must be made

with external ports that extend through the damper tube. Units with piping connections

made in the primary air stream are not acceptable. Flow sensors with plastic piping

connections of any kind are not acceptable.

9. Damper leakage: The following is the maximum damper leakage allowable for the various

size diameter inlets at 6 inches wg differential pressure. The damper leakage shall not

exceed the values listed in the table below at 6 inches S.P.,

Maximum

Allowed CFM Maximum Allowable


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 239010 - 25

Diameter (Area x 2000 fpm) CFM Damper Leakage

4”-6” 393 6.0

7”-8” 698 10.5

9”-10” 1091 16.5

11”-12” 1571 20

13”-14” 2138 30

10. Casing leakage: Assembled units shall be so constructed and sealed to limit air leakage to

the following listed quantities at 6 inches static pressure. The following is the maximum

allowable casing leakage including all components including the heating coil:

Maximum

Allowed CFM Maximum Allowable

Diameter (Area x 2000 fpm) CFM Casing Leakage

4”-6” 393 8.0

7”-8” 698 14

9”-10” 1091 22

11”-12” 1571 30

13”-14” 2138 40

11. Access plenum and door: Single duct units provided with hot water coils shall be

provided with an access section downstream of the coil for coil inspection. The

construction of the plenum shall be equal to the quality of materials and workmanship to

that of the terminal unit. The access plenum shall contain a minimum of an 8 inch diameter

or 8 inch by 8 inch access door. Door frame may be bolted, sealed or flanged to the casing.

The door shall be gasketed and insulated double wall construction. Door shall be held in

place with latches or other captive retainer devices. On single duct and double duct boxes,

an additional access panel shall be provided immediately upstream of the dampers for

inspection and service of the dampers.

12. Sound attenuator: (provide where indicated on schedule sheet) A factory supplied 24 inch

sound attenuator shall be supplied downstream of the coil. The ZCU shall ship with the

sound attenuator attached to the coil. The attenuator and coil connection shall be sealed

with a hard cast sealant and tape. The construction of the sound attenuator shall be equal

to the quality of materials and workmanship to that of the terminal unit.

13. Unit pressure drop: The static pressure across the assembly with an equivalent 2000 fpm

inlet velocity through one inlet shall not exceed .05 inches water gauge, with the total flow

through either inlet.

14. Controls enclosure: A controls panel with a sliding controls cover shall be supplied. The

controls cover shall reside in a set position without the use of any mechanical fasteners or

screws. “Quick release” sheet metal tabs/guide stops shall be supplied to keep the cover

from slipping off when in the fully open position. The “quick release” tabs/guide stops

shall be designed in such a way to allow the complete removal of the cover. A handle shall

be supplied on the controls cover for opening and closing the controls cover. Control panels

without a sliding enclosure, handle and “quick release” tabs are not acceptable. All

electrical and electronic components including both line voltage and low voltage shall be

mounted in the metal controls enclosure per applicable codes. Units shall have a single

point wiring connection. Units shall be manufactured and wired per UL-1995 and in


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 239010 - 26

accordance with the National Electric Code The control panel shall include stand-offs to

allow mounting of controls without penetrating the casing.

15. Sound:

a. Discharge sound per the schedule

b. Radiated sound per the schedule

16. Hot water coils: hot water coils shall be factory installed one or two row with a maximum

of 10 aluminum fins per inch. Air pressure drop shall be limited to 0.2” wg at box rated

coil airflow. Full fin collars shall be provided for accurate fin spacing and maximum fin-

to-tube contact. Aluminum fins shall be a minimum thickness of .0060 inch. Tubes shall

be ½ inch diameter seamless copper with a minimum wall thickness of 0.025 inch, tested

at 300 psig air pressure under water with a minimum rated burst pressure of 1500 psig.

Side and plates shall be a minimum 20 gauge galvanized sheet metal construction. All

coils shall be constructed and tested in accordance with ul and/or ari standards. Coils not

meeting the minimum thickness specified are not acceptable and shall be rejected due to

galvanic corrosion and the increased probability of leaks with the thinner wall thicknesses.

Copper tubes greater than .025 inch tube wall thickness are not acceptable as the thicker

copper wall thickness acts as an insulator. Slip and drive connections between the coil and

the VAV box shall be sealed with hard cast sealant and tape.

17. Adjustable universal handle brackets: a minimum of two adjustable universal handle

brackets with built in handles shall be supplied for every ZCU furnished. Handles shall be

constructed with a minimum of 12 gauge metal and painted using an electrostatic powder

coating system to avoid corrosion. Handle opening shall be able to accept a minimum of

the following lifting devices through the handle portion of the bracket without damaging

the product including: human hand, forklift, unistrut, pipe or other lifting devices. The

handle must have a 180 degree – “rolled up edge” to prevent injury to the human hand: raw

edges or non-rolled edges shall not be accepted.

18. Use a minimum of 4 military grade rubber grommets for elimination of galvanic corrosion

and isolation between copper piping and support handles. The rubber grommets shall be

made of a standard nitrile also known as buna-n and has excellent resistance to petroleum-

based oils and fuels, water and alcohols. Nitrile also has good resistance to acids and bases,

except those with a strong oxidizing effect.

19. Modular portable piping assembly: manufacturer shall assemble the piping assemblies to

the universal handle brackets and the re-heat coils as one assembly integral to the ZCU.

The entire unit shall be catalogued and have o & m manuals for the entire ZCU including

the integral piping. All portable piping assemblies for the ZCU’s supplied shall be identical

and interchangeable for inlet sizes of 4 inch through 22 inch. The supply and return aspect

ratios shall be identical for all ZCU’s supplied. All components supplied shall carry a

minimum of a 2 year parts and labor warranty from the manufacturer. Mechanical

contractor shall provide this documentation at bid time. Products without this

documentation are not acceptable. Field or shop assemblies of these components by a

mechanical contractor are not acceptable.

20. Valve components: the following minimum piping components shall be supplied: with

the minimum components: a valve package consisting of he following items: ball valve

with a #20 stainless steel screen to act as a strainer, union, p/t port, drain or blow-down

with ball valve integrated ¾” male garden hose end connection with a durable plastic


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 239010 - 27

retainer and brass cap. Pressure dependent balancing valve with an isolation valve, union,

and pressure temperature readout ports, corrosion free brass manual air vent piped in at the

highest point of piping to ensure excellent drainage and air removal from the coil, union

with p/t port. Piped in Siemens atc control valve with Siemens actuator with two p/t ports

and shut off valve with memory stop. Minimum 2” diameter pressure gauge rated at 1250

psig burst pressure to confirm 100% leak free product delivery. Type “l” ¾” copper pipe.

21. Pressure independent dynamic control valve flow regulation unit

22. Valve shall be an electronic, dynamic, modulating, 2-way, pressure independent control

device. A pressure independent dynamic control valve shall accurately control flow,

independent of system pressure fluctuation. Maximum flow setting shall be adjustable to

41 different settings within the range of the valve size. Flow regulation unit shall consist

of glass-reinforced polyphenylenesulfide with a hydrogenated acrylonitrile butadiene

rubber diaphragm. Flow regulation unit shall be readily accessible, for change-out or

maintenance.

23. A combination of a single flow control and control valve in one cartridge shall produce in

excess of 99.00 % accuracy of design flow. Flow regulation unit shall be externally

adjustable to 1 of 41 different flow rates; minimum range shall be capable of being

activated by minimum 4.4 psi differential operation ranges; and shall be capable of

controlling the flow within greatest of either +/-10% of controlled flow rate or+/- 2% of

maximum flow rate. The Siemens actuator shall be installed over the dynamic control

valve.

24. Pressure independent valve requiring changing out a cartridge or spring to achieve a

specific gpm from a range of 0 – 5 gpm is not acceptable. Stainless steel cartridges are not

acceptable due to dirt accumulation on the stainless steel.

25. Portable piping structure – after final assembly of the piping components, the valves shall

be charged with a gas and “blown open” per the manufacturer’s specifications, the portable

piping structure shall be charged with a gas at greater than sea level pressure at the

assembly area; seal the gas in the piping structure: test the sealed piping structure for 24

hours to determine whether the gas stays within the portable piping structure or leaks from

the portable piping structure; if the gas leaks from the portable piping structure, identify

the leak, fix it and re-test. Upon verification of the portable piping structure having zero

leakage of the gas, attach an identification tag to the portable piping structure including

testing information and identification information of the piping structure. Transport the

sealed and pressurized portable piping structure from the assembly location to the

construction site; determining a pressure of the gas at the construction site: correlating a

difference between the pressure of the gas within the portable piping structure at the

assembly location and the pressure of the gas within the portable piping structure at the

construction site with the identification information including the portable piping structure

information included on the tag; and incorporating the portable piping structure into an

hvac system if the difference between the pressure of the gas within the portable piping

structure at the assembly location and the pressure of the gas within the portable piping

structure at the construction site meets the specified standard ensuring no leaks. If product

is defective upon delivery of ZCU, the contractor shall notify the manufacturer of the

defect. Upon notice and proper verification, manufacturer shall have 3 weeks to fix

defective product or replace it.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 239010 - 28

26. Electronic/electric components – all electrical components shall be tested and certified by

the manufacturer of the ZCU. Upon completion of the wiring, installation and

programming of the electrical components the following testing procedures shall be done

at the factory prior to shipment:

27. Verify power to all electrical and electronic components.

28. Verify actuator settings by electronically stroking all actuators per the set program of the

DDC controller.

29. Verify DDC program is running correctly.

30. Digital pictures and commissioning statements shall be taken to verify these testing

procedures are being done at the factory ensuring a 100% defect free product leaving the

factory.

31. DDC controls: for each VAV, the manufacturer shall provide and ship a control package

consisting of a DDC electronic controller and room sensor, differential pressure transducer,

an electric damper actuator and an electronic control valve. All components shall be

furnished, mounted, piped and wired by the ZCU unit supplier. The ZCU manufacturer

shall program the DDC controller and test the programs at the ZCU unit manufacturer’s

factory. The ZCU shall be powered up and the program tested including stroking of the

actuators through a full cycle.

32. Coordinate with the bas contractor. If project is not using power trunks, an electrical switch

box with a disconnect switch, 24 volt transformer and low voltage wiring shall be provided

and mounted on the ZCU by the ZCU manufacturer. All relays required shall be installed

and wired in the electrical box. A single point electrical connection shall be provided to the

ZCU unit. Low voltage wire from the control valve to actuator to the ddc controller shall

be wired in flexible conduit in accordance with ul-1995 and the national electric code.

C. Disconnect switch to be ul approved. (2) 30 foot twisted pair wire shall be supplied and pre-

wired to the ZCU ddc electronic controller’s com terminals by the ZCU terminal supplier. A 25

foot (minimum) communications wire shall be supplied and pre-wired to the ZCU ddc

electronic controller’s room sensor. Size cable as needed for each room application. All of the

wiring and electrical switch boxes on ZCU’s shall meet national electrical code requirements

and ul-1995. All wiring shall be tested for conductivity and certified by the ZCU quality control

inspector prior to shipment. If factory supplied, the room sensor shall be tested and certified by

the quality control inspector prior to shipment and ship pre-wired to the terminal unit in the

electrical enclosure

2A.8 TERMINAL UNIT ELECTRIC ACTUATORS

A. All actuators shall be UL 873 or UL 60730 listed and manufactured under ISO 9002 and ISO

14000 procedures

B. All actuators shall be direct coupled type that requires no connecting linkage and shall provide a

means of manual override in the absence of power.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 239010 - 29

C. All actuators shall provide stall protection throughout the full range of rotation with an easily

visible position indicator

D. High speed electronic actuators

1. Basis of design: Siemens GNP/GAP Series

2. Provide high speed actuators for all terminal units serving rooms with VAV fume hoods

and other areas as indicated. This shall include supply, general exhaust and fume hood

exhaust

3. Performance shall be no less than 53 lb-in (16 Nm) with 90 degree stroke in 2 seconds

4. Repositioning resolution shall be a minimum of 0.4%

5. Actuators shall be fail-safe or fail-in-place as indicated on drawings and shall be direct

coupled type that requires no connecting linkages. Feedback shall be standard on all

models. Actuators shall be capable of performing all control signals (2-position, floating

and modulating – 0 to 10Vdc and 4 to 20 mA)

6. Power consumption shall be no greater than 25VA

E. Standard speed electronic actuators

1. Basis of design: Siemens GDE/GMA/GLB Series

2. Provide for all terminals not requiring high speed actuation. Actuators shall be fail-safe or

fail in place as indicated on drawings.

3. Spring return actuators shall be capable of both clockwise and counterclockwise spring

return fail-safe operation that returns the actuator to a fail-safe position in <15 seconds in

response to a loss of power. Power consumption shall be no greater than 7VA

4. Actuators shall use either floating control or analog control, as needed by the control

application the secondary network

2A.9 ROOM LEVEL CONTROLLERS

A. General: All room level controllers shall communicate directly on the primary BAS building

level Ethernet network or communicate over the secondary network via the BAS manufacturer’s

standard protocol. Manufacturers providing controllers requiring gateways or protocol translators

shall be responsible for all hardware and software interface devices as well as support labor to

ensure proper communication. Any communication issues between the room level controls and

the BAS will require onsite support from the manufacturer/vendor of the room level controller

until all communication issues are resolved. In addition the room level controller

manufacturer/vendor shall be responsible for providing documentation indicating which software

points inherent in their system will and will not be available to the BAS via gateway/translator,

prior to the bid.

B. General: All room level controllers shall communicate directly on the primary BAS BACnet/IP

Ethernet network (without gateways or protocol translators) or communicate over the secondary

network via BACnet MS/TP protocol. Manufacturers providing controllers requiring gateways or

protocol translators shall be responsible for all hardware and software interface devices as well

as support labor to ensure proper communication. Any communication issues between the room

level controls and the BAS will require onsite support from the manufacturer/vendor of the room


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 239010 - 30

level controller until all communication issues are resolved In addition the manufacturer/vendor

shall be responsible for providing documentation indicating which software points inherent in

their system will and will not be available to the BAS via gateway/translator, prior to the bid.

C. VAV/CAV GENERAL LAB AND PRESSURIZED ROOM CONTROLLERS

1. Lab and pressurized room controllers shall provide closed loop pressure independent

control of all laboratory room ventilation and ambient requirements. The room controller

shall continuously monitor all the supply and auxiliary exhaust airflow devices including

VAV fume hoods in the room.

2. Pressure control algorithm shall control supply and exhaust airflow devices in order to

maintain a volumetric offset (either positive or negative). The offset shall be field

adjustable and represents the volume of air which will enter (or exit) the room from the

corridor or adjacent spaces. Offset shall be maintained regardless of any change in flow or

static pressure. In particular, if the lead airflow device does not meet its setpoint, the

controller shall adjust to recover room offset.

3. The controller shall be configurable through the BAS for either supply tracks exhaust

(negative spaces) or exhaust tracks supply (positive spaces). In addition, the controllers

shall be configurable to either track flow setpoints or actual measured airflows. In order

to maximize pressure control reliability during compromised situations (ie actuator failure,

insufficient duct static pressure), the controller shall automatically switch to flow tracking

from setpoint tracking, if the lead device (supply or exhaust) fails to stay within (selectable,

typically 3%) flow units of its own set point for (selectable, typically 5 minutes) period of

time. Controllers relying on setpoint tracking only shall provide details of proposed

alternative.

4. Unless specifically indicated within the Sequence of Operation, volumetric offset shall be

the only acceptable means of controlling room pressurization. Systems that rely on

differential pressure as a means of control shall provide documentation that space

pressurization can be maintained if fume hood sashes are changed at the same time a door

to the space is opened.

5. Room ambient control (temperature, humidity etc.) and any other room control functions

(lighting, IAQ etc.) shall be maintained by the controller as indicated in Sequence of

Operation

6. All laboratory room controllers shall include all inputs and control outputs necessary to

perform the specified control sequences. Each laboratory room controller shall operate as

a stand alone unit, performing its specified control responsibilities independently. All input

point and control output point databases as well as the control programs shall be stored in

non-volatile EEPROM, EPROM and PROM memory, or a minimum of 100-hour battery

backup shall be provided.

7. Laboratory and Pressurized Room Controllers shall have available a SECURE MODE of

operation, in which changes to any control parameter can only be made from designated

terminals on BAS by authorized personnel, and not locally through the man-machine

interface port.

8. Momentary or extended losses of power shall not change or affect any laboratory room

controller setpoints or stored data. Upon resumption of power the controller shall resume

full normal operation exactly as before without any need for manual intervention. Upon a

power failure or operational failure within the controller, the air terminal shall


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 239010 - 31

automatically be positioned to the predetermined fully open or fully closed (failsafe)

position as indicated on the air terminal schedules in the project plANS=

9. All laboratory room controllers shall include the ability to accept a minimum of two dry

contact closure inputs from an auxiliary source into the room control sequence for such

purposes as occupied/unoccupied ventilation changeover, emergency mode sequences, etc.

10. Airflow tracking controllers shall be capable of having separate volumetric offset setpoints

for occupied modes and unoccupied modes.

11. All laboratory and pressurized room controllers shall provide a general alarm output that

may be used for auxiliary signaling or notification.

2A.10 SPECIALTY EXHAUST CONTROLLERS

A. General: All specialty exhaust controllers shall communicate over the secondary network via the

BAS manufacturer’s standard protocol. Manufacturers providing controllers requiring gateways

or protocol translators shall be responsible for all hardware and software interface devices as well

as support labor to ensure proper communication. Any communication issues between the

specialty exhaust controllers and the BAS will require onsite support from the

manufacturer/vendor of the specialty exhaust controller until all communication issues are

resolved. In addition the specialty exhaust controller manufacturer/vendor shall be responsible

for providing documentation indicating which software points inherent in their system will and

will not be available to the BAS via gateway/translator, prior to the bid.

B. General: All specialty exhaust controllers shall communicate over the secondary network via

BACnet MS/TP protocol. Manufacturers providing controllers requiring gateways or protocol

translators shall be responsible for all hardware and software interface devices as well as support

labor to ensure proper communication. Any communication issues between the specialty exhaust

controllers and the BAS will require onsite support from the manufacturer/vendor of the specialty

exhaust controller until all communication issues are resolved In addition the

manufacturer/vendor shall be responsible for providing documentation indicating which software

points inherent in their system will and will not be available to the BAS via gateway/translator,

prior to the bid.

C. Specialty exhaust controllers shall contain a start-up mode which allows the controller to be

started up without a nuisance alarm being sounded at the hood. While in startup mode, the

controller is fully operational, except the ODP only displays OFF and the red LED is ON. Alarms

or failures are not displayed while in this mode of operation. This mode is most useful while the

building is still under construction and the exhaust fans are being turned off

D. Specialty exhaust controller shall be provided with an “Out of Service” mode. During this mode,

controller shall be is fully functional, except the flow setpoint is set to 0, alarming is limited and

the ODP displays “Out of service” and “OFF”. If the sash is opened, nothing changes.

E. Any specialty exhaust controllers which do not communicate directly via BACnet MS/TP will be

required to be identified in writing by the vendor/manufacturer for approval prior to bid. {r:

facility_details = BACnet

F. VAV FUME HOOD FACE VELOCITY CONTROLLER

1. Furnish and install a UL 916 listed individual VAV fume hood controller for each VAV

fume hood which shall maintain the required average face velocity at the setpoint


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 239010 - 32

independently of the sash position. Documentation verifying the UL 916 Listing for the

fume hood controller shall be included in any proposal as well as the submittal. Also,

furnish and install sash sensors on each fume hood to indicate the position of all fume hood

sashes to the respective fume hood controller. Sash sensors shall provide an input signal

to the fume hood controller that is linearly proportional to within one half inch of the actual

sash position. All sash sensors shall be highly corrosion resistant. Sash sensor operational

life shall allow a minimum of 1 million full sash travel cycles.

2. The fume hood face velocity control process shall maintain the average fume hood face

velocity at the desired setpoint using a proportional, integral and derivative (PID) closed

loop control algorithm. The fume hood face velocity control process shall be as follows:

a. The fume hood controller shall continually determine the fume hood's total open

area by monitoring the fume hood sash position(s) by the sash sensor(s) as well as

taking account of any fume hood fixed open areas and the bypass opening(s).

b. The fume hood controller shall calculate the required fume hood exhaust airflow

necessary to maintain the average face velocity setpoint over the total open area.

The controller shall continuously perform the above exhaust airflow control

calculations ten times per second to ensure detection of and a maximum of 1 second

response to any change in sash position.

c. The fume hood controller shall control the fume hood exhaust airflow at the rate

necessary to maintain the average face velocity setpoint. The fume hood controller

shall ensure that the required fume hood exhaust to maintain the average face

velocity setpoint is always maintained independently of any variations in exhaust

system static pressure or any laboratory room conditions such as the ventilation

airflow or room static pressure that could otherwise affect the fume hood exhaust

airflow.

d. The fume hood face velocity control process shall accommodate the required fume

hood maximum to minimum exhaust airflow rate. The fume hood controller shall

always maintain the required minimum fume hood exhaust airflow recommended

by laboratory safety standards whenever the total fume hood open area requires less

than the calculated fume hood exhaust airflow necessary to maintain the average

face velocity set point. The fume hood controller shall also be capable of limiting

the maximum fume hood exhaust airflow regardless of the extent of the sash

opening.

3. The fume hood controller shall also interface to an Operator Display Panel (ODP) at the

designated measurement location on the front of the fume hood as shown on the project

plans. The ODP shall provide a continuous digital display of average fume hood face

velocity whenever the fume hood sash open area requires more than the minimum fume

hood exhaust airflow. The fume hood face velocity display shall be the true average face

velocity as calculated by the fume hood controller based upon actual measured fume hood

exhaust airflow and the total fume hood total open area. The Operator Display Panel shall

have the ability to blank out display of face velocity based on owner’s preference.

4. The ODP shall also include separate colored pilot lights that shall illuminate to indicate

fume hood operational status as:

a. Green for proper face velocity or flow.

b. Yellow for marginal face velocity or flow.

c. Red for alarm conditions such as low face velocity, general failure or emergency

purge

d. The ODP shall also sound an audible alarm device in response to face velocity alarm

conditions and the ODP digital display shall change to "LOW FACE VELOCITY"


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 239010 - 33

or "HIGH FACE VELOCITY" appropriate to the alarm condition. A SILENCE

pushbutton on the ODP shall allow the user to silence the audible alarm which shall

then remain silent until a subsequent alarm occurs.

e. The ODP shall also provide an EMERGENCY PURGE pushbutton which shall

enable a user to increase fume hood exhaust airflow to the maximum amount for a

designated period of time as required by laboratory safety standards. After the

designated time has expired the fume hood exhaust shall automatically reset to a

lower, but still elevated level to prevent excessive demand on the exhaust system.

The emergency purge mode of operation shall also be able to be cancelled at any

time by depressing the emergency purge button a second time. The ODP shall sound

its audible alarm device whenever the emergency purge mode of operation is

activated. The silence pushbutton on the ODP shall also allow the user to silence

the audible alarm which shall then remain silent until either the emergency purge

operational mode is again activated or a face velocity alarm occurs.

f. The ODP shall also provide an audible SASH open ALERT feature that can be

implemented to caution users whenever the fume hood sash opening exceeds a

predetermined amount. The audible alert shall consists of one minute repeating

cycles of a series of quick 'chirps' that continues until the sash opening is reduced to

an allowable amount. There shall be two sash alert opening settings, based on

whether hood is in use or unattended.

g. The ODP shall provide audible and visual indication whenever supervisory signal is

lost from a fume hood sash sensor or the flow input transmitter, by turning on the

Red light and the audible alarm device.

h. The ODP shall be provided with an intuitive visual effect, such as a green “leaf”

light, for indicating safe, sustainable operation, such as keeping sash closed when

not in use.

5. All fume hood control and ODP display and operational parameters shall be established

and be changeable only by authorized personnel using a portable operator's terminal. These

operational parameters shall include:

a. Fume hood average face velocity setpoint.

b. Fume hood minimum & maximum exhaust airflow.

c. Face velocity high and low alarm limits and associated alarm time delay to avoid

transient alarms.

d. Face velocity high and low warning limits.

e. Emergency purge time periods and exhaust levels.

f. Allowable maximum sash opening associated with the sash alert feature.

6. The portable operator’s terminal shall plug into the ODP as well as into the laboratory room

controller. In addition, all laboratory fume hood and laboratory room control parameters

along with all other facility control and monitoring functions shall be accessible to

authorized personnel from designated terminals on the BAS control and monitoring

network.

7. Momentary or extended losses of power shall not change or affect any VAV fume hood

control setpoints, operational parameters or stored data. Upon resumption of power after

a power failure, fume hood controllers shall resume full normal operation exactly as before

the power failure and without any need for manual intervention. Upon a power failure or

operational failure within the fume hood controller, the fume hood exhaust air terminal

shall be automatically positioned to the fully open (failsafe) position as required by

laboratory safety standards and defined herein.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 239010 - 34

8. Coordinate sash sensor requirements with the fume hood size and sash configuration

defined in the Lab Furnishings documents

G. CAV/2-STATE AUXILLIARY EXHAUST DEVICE CONTROLLERS

1. Provide a UL 916 listed controller auxiliary exhaust devices (i.e., canopy hoods, snorkels

etc). Exhaust air shall be controlled at two individual setpoints corresponding to

switch/software command as indicated in, Sequence of Operation. The exhaust control

process shall maintain exhaust at its respective setpoint in response to actual exhaust

airflow measurement to ensure full pressure independent closed loop control using a

proportional, integral and derivative (PID) control algorithm.

2. Controller shall be capable of receiving status override functions as defined in, Sequence

of Operation

3. The controller shall provide a continuous hardwired flow signal to the Lab and Pressurized

Room Controller indicating exhaust airflow to ensure stand-alone flow tracking. If the

control function is directly connected to the Lab and Pressurized Room Controller, a

dedicated controller is not required. Stand-alone controllers relying on the LAN or

“assumed flows” for input to the Lab and Pressurized Room Controller are not acceptable.

2A.11 SERVER

A. For this project, WVU will provide a fully configured server. The CSC shall provide and install

all software required by the BAS system.

2A.12 LAPTOP COMPUTER

A. For this project, the CSC shall provide the Laptop Computer to the University’s Physical Plant

prior to the start of the Acceptance Testing (reference subsection 3.11 - Acceptance Of

Completed BAS Installation).

B. Provide a new laptop computer with the control system software and database as part of the

project. The exact Model is not critical, but the new laptop computer shall have the following

minimum characteristics:

Manufacturer: Dell, Inspiron 600m

Configuration: IBM compatible, Pentium M Processor 725.

Minimum memory: 1GB DDR SDRAM 2 DIMMs

Minimum processor speed: 1.6 GHz.

Minimum Front Bus Speed: 400 MHz

Warranty: Manufacturer’s standard warranty, minimum 1-year.

Display: 15-inch XGA color monitor.

Floppy disk drive: 1.44 MB.

Hard disk drive: 60 GB, minimum.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 239010 - 35

Optical drive: CD-RW.

PC Slots: Connectors for (1) Type I or Type II cards.

Network Interface Card: 3com 10/100 PC card adapter.

Wireless Networking Card: Intel PRO/Wireless 2200 Internal Wireless (802.11 b/g,

54Mbps)

I/O Ports:

a. 9-pin serial connector (a must)

b. Serial infrared communication port (lrDA-1.1compliant)

c. 15-pin monitor connector

d. USB (Universal Serial Bus) 2.0

Power: Lithium Ion battery, 53 WHr, A/C adapter.

Operating system: Microsoft Windows XP Professional, SP2, with Media; and with

NTFS File System for all Operating Systems.

Nylon carrying case.

2B.13 MOBILE APPLICATIONS

A. iPad Application

Basis of design: Siemens Facility Prime

Provide an iPad and native iPad iOS application to directly communicate with BACnet/IP

and/or Siemens APOGEE P2 Ethernet field panels. Software connection through a web

browser is not acceptable.

IPad/application shall connect to the BAS via the site’s WiFi (802.11 a/b/g/n) network or

remote cellular connection via the customer’s VPN access.

The application shall have the following capabilities as a minimum

a. Graphical view of real time environmental conditions and linked HVAC

equipment

b. Graphical animation by displaying different image files for changed object status

c. “View only” capability requiring no logon once application has been opened.

d. Application can stay open and active without user interaction or time-out.

e. A reporting function must capture current information shown on the graphical

view and save the image as a PDF file and/or attach it to an email.

f. After proper access credentials are authenticated, a user can command points (e.g.

data values and device settings) and equipment. Commands must be able to be

logged within the BAS

g. Users must be able to navigate the graphics using custom links, from a menu list,

or by scanning QR codes.

h. Alarm Indication and Acknowledgment – must allow for display of points in

alarm, both unacknowledged and acknowledged. Acknowledgement of alarm

conditions from within the application is required.

Editing tool must be available within the application to create and manage graphics.Tool

must include the following:

a. Graphical elements library including gauges, sensors, trends, point blocks,

command buttons, embedded documents, and imported images.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 239010 - 36

b. Ability to import documents, photos, and images to be used in graphics.

c. Ability to link elements to graphics by entering point address information or by

utilizing browser and auto-discover sequences.

d. Capability to transfer graphics to other iPads

Site Wi-Fi© (802.11 a/b/g/n) network shall be provided/managed by the Owner.

Contractor shall coordinate with Owner to purchase and load application onto iPad via

Owner designated iTunes account per Apple© Terms and Conditions.

Contractor shall spend three days with Owner to assist with initial setup, provide initial

graphics/monitoring/control functions, and training on all aspects of the application

Contractor shall carry the cost of the application, an iPad (wi-fi + cellular) and any

interface devices required to communicate with the BAS

Cellular data plan shall be provided by Owner as needed

2A.14 FIELD HARDWARE/INSTRUMENTATION

A. Input Devices - General Requirements

Temperature sensors shall be of the type and have accuracy ratings as indicated and/or

required for the application and shall permit accuracy rating of within 1% of the

temperature range of their intended use.

Sensors used for mixed air application shall be the averaging type and have an accuracy

of ± 1 degrees F.

Outside air temperature sensors shall have a minimum range of -52 degrees F to 152

degrees F and an accuracy of within ± 1 degrees F in this temperature range.

Room temperature sensors shall have an accuracy, of ± 1.0 degrees F in the range of 32

degrees F to 96 degrees F.

Chilled water and condenser water sensors shall have an accuracy of ± 0.25 degrees F in

their range of application.

Hot water temperature sensors shall have an accuracy of ± 0.75 degrees F over the range

of their application.

2A.15 SENSORS

A. Electronic Sensors: Vibration and corrosion resistant; for wall, immersion, or duct mounting as

required.

Terminal Unit Space Temperature Sensor

a. Provide temperature sensors with digital displays.

b. The sensing element for the space temperature sensor must be IC-based and

provide the following.

1) Digitally communicating with the Application Specific Controller for

providing consistency of measurement reporting, more accurate

measurement, and faster updates to controller. The device shall be provided

with a single sensing element for reporting the same value to both the local

room unit display and the Application Specific Controller.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 239010 - 37

2) Mountable to and fully covering a 2 x 4 electrical junction box without the

need for an adapter wall plate.

3) IC Element Accuracy: +/- 0.9°F

4) Operating Range: 55 to 95°F (13-35°C)

5) Device shall allow display in either degrees F or C

6) Display of temperature setpoint with numerical temperature

7) Installation: Up to 100 ft. from controller

8) Local OLED Temperature Display: included

9) Display of Temperature to one decimal place

c. Auxiliary Communication Port. Each room temperature sensor shall include a

terminal jack integral to the sensor assembly. The terminal jack shall be used to

connect a portable operator's terminal to control and monitor all hardware and

software points associated with the controller. RS-232 communications port shall

allow the operator to query and modify operating parameters of the local room

terminal unit from the portable operator’s terminal.

d. Options: Provide the following options as they are called for in the sequences or

on the drawings

1) Setpoint Adjustment. The setpoint adjustment function shall allow for

modification of the temperature by the building operators. Adjustment range

shall be a user limiting, selectable range between 55 and 95°F (13-35°C) ,

Setpoint adjustment may be locked out, overridden, or limited as to time or

temperature through software by an authorized operator at any central

workstation, Building Controller, room sensor two-line display, or via the

portable operator's terminal.

2) Devices with display and setpoint adjustment shall be provided with

calibration capability allowing the displayed and communicated value to be

biased to +/- 5°F of the temperature reading, for reconciling measurement

accuracy to a calibrated handheld device.

3) Devices with display and setpoint adjustment can display setpoint either as a

numerical value or as a relative setting (colder or hotter), based on setpoint

range.

4) Override Switch. An override button shall initiate override of the night

setback mode to normal (day) operation when activated by the occupant and

enabled by building operators. The override shall be limited to two (2) hours

(adjustable.) The override function may be locked out, overridden, or

limited through software by an authorized operator at the operator interface,

Building Controller, room sensor two-line display or via the portable

operator's terminal.

5) Space Combination Temperature and Humidity Sensors.

e. Basis of design – Siemens QFA 3280 Series

f. Each controller performing space temperature control shall be provided with a

matching room temperature sensor, which also includes the ability to measure

humidity for either monitoring or control purposes. The combination temperature

and humidity sensors shall have the same appearance as the space temperature


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 239010 - 38

sensors. Humidity elements shall measure relative humidity with a +/- 2%

accuracy over the range of 10 to 90% relative humidity. Humidity element shall be

an IC (integrated circuit) sensing element. Humidity sensing elements shall be

removable and field replaceable if needed.

Thermistor temperature sensors as follows:

a. Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.5 deg F (0.3 deg C) at calibration point.

b. Wire: Twisted, shielded-pair cable.

c. Insertion Elements in Ducts: Single point, 18 inches (20 cm)long; use where not

affected by temperature stratification or where ducts are smaller than 9 sq. ft. (1 sq.

m).

d. Averaging Elements in Ducts: 72 inches long, flexible; use where prone to

temperature stratification or where ducts are larger than 9 sq. ft. (1 sq. m); length

as required.

e. Insertion Elements for Liquids: Brass socket with minimum insertion length of 2-

1/2 inches (64 mm).

f. Room Sensors: Match room thermostats, locking cover.

g. Outside-Air Sensors: Watertight inlet fitting, shielded from direct sunlight.

h. Room Security Sensors: Stainless-steel cover plate with insulated back and

security screws.

Resistance Temperature Detectors: Platinum.

a. Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.2 percent at calibration point.

b. Wire: Twisted, shielded-pair cable.

c. Insertion Elements in Ducts: Single point, 18 inches (20 cm) long; use where not

affected by temperature stratification or where ducts are smaller than 9 sq. ft. (1 sq.

m).

d. Averaging Elements in Ducts: 72 inches long, flexible; use where prone to

temperature stratification or where ducts are larger than 9 sq. ft. (1 sq. m); length

as required.

e. Insertion Elements for Liquids: Brass socket with minimum insertion length of 2-

1/2 inches (64 mm).

f. Room Sensors: Match room thermostats, locking cover.

g. Outside-Air Sensors: Watertight inlet fitting, shielded from direct sunlight.

h. Room Security Sensors: Stainless-steel cover plate with insulated back and

security screws.

Humidity Sensors: Bulk polymer sensor element.

a. Basis of design: Siemens QFA/QFM Series

b. Room Relative Humidity (QFA Series)

1) Sensor Humidity range 0 to 100%

2) Accuracy +/-2% rh (10-90% rh);

3) Sensing element Digital Sensor IC (capacitive)

4) Output signal 4-20 mA/0-5V/0-10V selectable

5) Calibration adjustment adjustable to +/-5% rh

c. Duct Relative Humidity (QFM Series)

1) Sensor Humidity range 0 to 100%

2) Accuracy +/-2% or +/- 5% as indicated in the sequences or

drawings

3) Sensing element Digital Sensor IC (capacitive)

4) Output signal 4-20 mA/0-5V/0-10V selectable

5) Calibration adjustment adjustable to +/-5% rh


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 239010 - 39

d. Humidity sensing elements shall be removable and field replaceable if needed.

e. Provide with readable LCD display where indicated in the sequences or drawings

f. Room Sensors: For rooms with temperature sensing as well, provide a combined

temperature/humidity sensor or provide units with matching cover. Provide options

as required by sequences or drawings and specified under Terminal Unit Space

Temperature Sensor “Options”.

g. Provide certificate of calibration.

Static-Pressure Transmitter: Nondirectional sensor with suitable range for expected input,

and temperature compensated.

a. Accuracy: 2 percent of full scale with repeatability of 0.5 percent.

b. Output: 4 to 20 mA.

c. Building Static-Pressure Range: 0 to 0.25 inch wg (0 to 62 Pa).

d. Duct Static-Pressure Range: 0 to 5 inches wg (0 to 1243 Pa).

Pressure Transmitters: Direct acting for gas, liquid, or steam service; range suitable for

system; proportional output 4 to 20 mA.

ROOM PRESSURE SENSORS

a. Basis of design: Setra Model 264.

b. Ultra low differential pressure transmitter with the following minimum

characteristics:

1) Pressure Range +/- 1.0 inches w.c.

2) Accuracy +/- 0.25% of Full Scale Range

B. Equipment operation sensors as follows:

Status Inputs for Fans: Differential-pressure switch with adjustable range of 0 to 5 inches

wg (0 to 1243 Pa).

Status Inputs for Pumps: Differential-pressure switch piped across pump with adjustable

pressure-differential range of 8 to 60 psig (55 to 414 kPa).

Status Inputs for Electric Motors: Current-sensing relay with current transformers,

adjustable and set to 175 percent of rated motor current.

C. Digital-to-Pneumatic Transducers: Convert plus or minus 12-V dc pulse-width¬modulation

outputs, or continuous proportional current or voltage to 0 to 20 psig (0 to 138 kPa).

D. Water-Flow Switches: Pressure-flow switches of bellows-actuated mercury or snap-acting type,

with appropriate scale range and differential adjustment, with stainless-steel or bronze paddle.

For chilled-water applications, provide vapor proof type.

E. Carbon-Monoxide Detectors: Single or multichannel, dual-level detectors, using solid-state

sensors with 3-year minimum life, maximum 15-minute sensor replacement, suitable over a

temperature range of 23 to 130 deg F (minus 5 to plus 55 deg C), calibrated for 50 and 100 ppm,

with maximum 120-second response time to 100-ppm carbon monoxide.

F. Carbon-Dioxide Sensor and Transmitter: Single detectors, using solid-state infrared sensors,

suitable over a temperature range of 23 to 130 deg F (minus 5 to plus 55 deg C), calibrated for 0

to 2 percent, with continuous or averaged reading, 4 to 20 mA output, and wall mounted.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 239010 - 40

G. Occupancy Sensor: Dual technology, with time delay, daylight sensor lockout, sensitivity

control, and 180-degree field of view with vertical sensing adjustment, for flush mounting.

2A.16 THERMOSTATS

A. Combination Thermostat and Fan Switches: Line-voltage thermostat with two-, three-, or four-

position, push-button or lever-operated fan switch.

Label switches "FAN ON-OFF," "FAN HIGH-LOW-OFF," "FAN HIGH¬MED-LOW-

OFF." Provide unit for mounting on two-gang switch box.

B. Line-Voltage, On-Off Thermostats: Bimetal-actuated, open contact or bellows-actuated,

enclosed, snap-switch type, or equivalent solid-state type, with heat anticipator, integral manual

on-off-auto selector switch.

Equip thermostats, which control electric heating loads directly, with off position on dial

wired to break ungrounded conductors.

Dead Band: Maximum 2 deg F (1 deg C).

C. Remote-Bulb Thermostats: On-off or modulating type, liquid filled to compensate for changes

in ambient temperature, with copper capillary and bulb, unless otherwise indicated.

Bulbs in water lines with separate wells of same material as bulb.

Bulbs in air ducts with flanges and shields.

Averaging Elements: Copper tubing with either single-or multiple-unit elements,

extended to cover full width of duct or unit, adequately supported.

Scale settings and differential settings are clearly visible and adjustable from front of

instrument.

On-Off Thermostat: With precision snap switches, with electrical ratings required by

application.

Modulating Thermostats: Construct so complete potentiometer coil and wiper assembly is

removable for inspection or replacement without disturbing calibration of instrument.

D. Room thermostat accessories include the following:

Insulating Bases: For thermostats located on exterior walls. DIVISION 23 – HVAC

Thermostat Guards: Locking, solid metal, ventilated.

Adjusting Key: As required for calibration and cover screws.

Aspirating Boxes: For flush-mounted aspirating thermostats.

Set-Point Adjustment: 1/2-inch-(13-mm-) diameter, adjustment knob.

E. Electric Low-Limit Duct Thermostat: Snap-acting, single-pole, single-throw, manual-or

automatic-reset switch that trips if temperature sensed across any 12 inches (300 mm) of bulb

length is equal to or below set point.

Bulb Length: Minimum 20 feet (6 m).

Quantity: One thermostat for every 20 sq. ft. (2 sq. m) of coil surface.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 239010 - 41

2A.17 VALVE AND DAMPER ACTUATORS

A. Electronic direct-coupled actuation shall be provided. Actuators shall have a minimum 5-year

equipment warranty.

B. The actuator shall be direct-coupled over the shaft, enabling it to be mounted directly to the

damper shaft without the need for connecting linkage. The fastening clamp assembly shall be of

a 'V' bolt design with associated 'V' shaped toothed cradle attaching to the shaft for maximum

strength and eliminating slippage. Spring return actuators shall have a 'V' clamp assembly of

sufficient size to be directly mounted to an integral jackshaft of up to 1.05 inches when the

damper is constructed in this manner. Single bolt or screw type fasteners are not acceptable.

C. The actuator shall have electronic overload or digital rotation sensing circuitry to prevent

damage to the actuator throughout the entire rotation of the actuator. Mechanical end switches

or magnetic clutch to deactivate the actuator at the end of rotation are not acceptable.

D. For power failure/safety applications, an internal mechanical spring return mechanism shall be

built into the actuator housing. Non-mechanical forms of fail-safe operation are acceptable for

valves larger than 4”.

E. All spring return actuators shall be capable of both clockwise or counterclockwise spring return

operation.

F. Proportional actuators shall accept a 0 to 10VDC or 0 to 20mA analog control input and provide

a 2 to 10VDC or 4 to 20mA operating range. An actuator capable of accepting a pulse width

modulating control signal is not acceptable. An actuator capable of accepting a three-point

floating control signal is not acceptable.

G. All 24VAC/DC actuators shall operate on Class 2 wiring and shall not require more than 10VA

for AC or more than 8 watts for DC applications. Actuators operating on 120VAC power shall

not require more than 10VA. Actuators operating on 230VCSChall not require more than

11VA.

H. All non-spring return actuators shall have an external manual gear release to allow manual

positioning of the damper when the actuator is not powered. Spring return actuators with more

than 60 in-lb torque shall have a manual crank for this purpose.

I. All modulating actuators shall have an external, built-in switch to allow reversing direction of

rotation.

J. Actuators shall be provided with a conduit fitting.

K. Actuators shall be Underwriters Laboratories Standard 873 listed and Canadian Standards

Association Class 4813 02 certified as meeting correct safety requirements and recognized

industry standards.

L. Actuators shall be designed for a minimum of 60,000 full stroke cycles at the actuator's rated

torque and shall have a 2-year manufacturer's warranty, starting from the date of installation.

Manufacturer shall be ISO9001 certified.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 239010 - 42

2A.18 CONTROL VALVES

A. Control Valves: Factory fabricated, of type, body material, and pressure class based on

maximum pressure and temperature rating of piping system, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Globe Valves NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem, renewable

composition disc, and screwed ends with backseating capacity repackable under pressure.

C. Globe Valves NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, plug-type

disc, flanged ends, and renewable seat and disc.

D. Hydronic system globe valves shall have the following characteristics:

Rating: Pressure class based on maximum pressure and temperature rating of piping

system.

Internal Construction: Replaceable plugs and seats of stainless steel or brass.

a. Single-Seated Valves: Cage trim provides seating and guiding surfaces for plug on

top and bottom of guided plugs.

b. Double-Seated Valves: Balanced plug; cage trim provides seating and guiding

surfaces for plugs on top and bottom of guided plugs.

Sizing: 3-psig (21-kPa) maximum pressure drop at design flow rate.

Flow Characteristics: Two-way valves shall have equal percentage characteristics; three-

way valves shall have linear characteristics. Operators shall close valves against pump

shutoff head.

E. Butterfly Valves: Pressure class based on maximum pressure and temperature rating of piping

system, unless otherwise indicated. Ductile-iron body and bonnet, extended neck, stainless-steel

stem, field-replaceable EPDM or Buna N sleeve and stem seals.

Body Style: Lug.

Disc Type: Elastomer-coated ductile iron, or disc rated for applicable service.

Sizing: 1-psig (7-kPa) maximum pressure drop at design flow rate.

F. Terminal Unit Control Valves: Characterized Ball, Forged brass body, Stainless Steel trim, two-

or three-port as indicated, replaceable plugs and seats, union and threaded ends.

Rating: Class 125 for service at 125 psig (862 kPa) and 250 deg F (121 deg C) operating

conditions, or applicable service rating per codes.

Sizing: 3-psig (21-kPa) maximum pressure drop at design flow rate, to close against

pump shutoff head.

Flow Characteristics: Two-way valves shall have equal percentage characteristics; three-

way valves shall have linear characteristics.

PART 2B - PRODUCTS, SOFTWARE

2B.1 SYSTEM SOFTWARE OVERVIEW



PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 239010 - 43

1. ALC: Eikon and WebCTRL are acceptable ALC System Software products.

Invensys: Enterprise Server, Workplace Pro and Workplace Tech are acceptable I/A

System Software products.

Siemens: Apogee

B. The CSC shall provide all software required for operation of the BAS system specified herein.

All functionality described herein shall be regarded as a minimum. The CSC shall provide the

following as a minimum:

Completed database.

Configuration of all controller and operator workstation application programs to provide

the sequence of operation indicated.

All Configuration Tools, and all software licenses, required to configure all controllers

installed on this project.

2B.2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

A. Database Creation and Modification. All changes shall be done utilizing standard procedures.

The system shall allow changes to be made either at the local site through a portable computer

or central workstation.

B. The system shall permit the operator to perform, as a minimum, the following:

Add and delete points/objects

Modify point parameters DIVISION 23 – HVAC

Create and modify control sequences and programs

Reconfigure application programs

C. All data points/objects within the database shall be completely accessible as independent or

dependent variables for custom programming, calculation, interlocking, or manipulation.

D. The University shall be provided with a software account that has unlimited privileges for the

entire site installation.

2B.3 GRAPHIC PROGRAMMING

A. The system software shall include Graphic Programming for all DDC control algorithms

resident in individual control modules. Any system that does not use a drag and drop method of

graphical icon programming as described herein shall be unacceptable. Line by line computer

code shall also be unacceptable. This graphic programming shall be used to create the

sequences of operation necessary to complete a control sequence. Blocks shall represent

common logical control devices used in conventional control systems, such as relays, switches,

high signal selectors, etc., in addition to the more complex DDC and energy management

strategies such as PID loops and optimum start. Each block shall be interactive and contain the

programming necessary to execute the function of the device it represents.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 239010 - 44

B. Graphic programming shall be performed while on screen and using a mouse; each block shall

be selected from a block library and assembled with other blocks necessary to complete the

specified sequence. Blocks are then interconnected on screen using graphic "wires", each

forming a logical connection. Once assembled, each logical grouping of blocks and their

interconnecting wires then forms a program which may be used to control any piece of

equipment with a similar point configuration and sequence of operation.

C. The clarity of the graphic sequence must be such that the user has the ability to verify that

system programming meets the specifications, without having to learn or interpret a

manufacturer's unique programming language. The graphic programming must be self-

documenting and provide the user with an understandable and exact representation of each

sequence of operation.

D. Full simulation capability shall be provided with the graphic programming. User shall be able to

fully simulate the constructed sequence on screen.

E. The following is a minimum definition of the capabilities of the Graphic Programming

software:

Program - Shall be a collection of points/objects, blocks and wires which have been

connected together for the specific purpose of controlling a piece of HVAC equipment or

a single mechanical system.

Logical I/O - Input/Output points/objects which shall interface with the control modules

in order to read various signals and/or values or to transmit signal or values to controlled

devices. DIVISION 23 – HVAC

BACnet™ Points/objects – Shall be points/objects that comply with the BACnet™

structure as defined in the BACnet™ standard.

SNVT –S hall be Standard Network Variables for their LonMark profile as documented

by the LonMark Interoperability Association.

Blocks - Shall be software devices which are represented graphically and may be

connected together to perform a specified sequence.

Wires - Shall be graphical elements which are used to form logical connections between

blocks, and between blocks and logical I/O. Different wire types shall be used depending

on whether the signal they conduct is analog or digital.

Labels - Labels shall be similar to wires in that they are used to form logical connections

between two points/objects. Labels shall form a connection by reference instead of a

visual connection, i.e. two points/objects labeled 'A' on a drawing are logically connected

even though there is no wire between them.

Parameter - A parameter shall be a value, which may be tied to the input of a block. Each

parameter will then be and can be modified to varying degrees based upon the

appropriate password level being used by the operator. Different parameter blocks shall

be used depending on whether the parameter is digital or analog.

Constant - A constant shall be a coefficient which is used in various calculations. Certain

coefficients which are used in various calculations always remain constant and therefore

should be constants which are embedded in the program and should not be parameters.

Different constant blocks shall be used depending on whether the constant is digital or

analog.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 239010 - 45

Icon - An icon shall be graphic representation of a software program. Each graphic block

has an icon associated with it which graphically describes it function.

Menu- bar Icon -Shall be an icon which is displayed on the menu bar on the screen which

represents its associated graphic block.

Passwords - each block shall have its own assignable password level.

2B.4 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SOFTWARE

A. Each control module shall perform the following functions:

Identify and report alarm condition

Execute all application programs indicated on the Object Table(s)

Execute DDC algorithms

Trend and store data

B. In the event of a loss of communication, all lower controller and components shall revert to

occupied mode..

Power failures shall cause the control module to go into an orderly shutdown with no loss

of program memory.

Upon resumption of power, the Control module shall automatically restart and printout

the time and date of the power failure and restoration at the respective Workstation

system.

The restart program shall automatically restart affected field equipment. The operator

shall be able to define an automatic power up time delay for each piece of equipment

under control.

2B.5 SOFTWARE USER INTERFACE

A. The on-line graphics, scheduling, and events shall be created using the Automated Logic

WebCTRL, Siemens Apogee, or Invensys Enterprise Server/Workplace Pro software.

B. All of the system objects, schedules, and events shall be capable of being represented as

BACnet objects by the CSC.

C. Events (Alarms):

The CSC shall provide all alarm event notification and alarm events messages for objects

on the object table provided to and approved by the University’s Physical Plant .

Alarm event notification, alarm event messages, and event routing shall be in accordance

with the existing WVU standards.

CSC implemented events objects:

a. All Input/Output objects listed on the object tables for each piece of equipment

shall have an event defined for the off-normal condition.

b. Analog objects shall list the high and low alarm limits.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 239010 - 46

c. Every device connected to the system shall also be alarmed for an off¬line

condition

d. Two notification classes shall be defined to route alarms.

1) Critical alarms shall be printed, logged, and pop-up windows shall occur via

an email notification.

2) Maintenance level alarms shall be printed and logged.

e. An event shall be generated for a device communications failure. All devices shall

have this feature implemented.

D. On-line Graphics:

The on-line graphics shall be provided by either an approved Automated Logic

Corporation (ALC) dealer, Siemens Pittsburgh branch, or an approved Invensys IFO. The

on-line graphics submittal shall be submitted to the CSC to be included with the Shop

Drawing Submittal, for review and approval by the University’s Project Manager.

On-line Graphics Submittal by the CSC shall include a list of the color graphic screens to

be provided and sample graphics for each unique mechanical system.

All mechanical equipment shall have a representative graphic.

a. Graphical representation of the mechanical equipment hierarchy for the project

including all equipment controlled by the BAS

b. Hypertext links to the cooling source and heating source of each piece of

equipment shall be defined on the graphic.

c. Object in alarm condition shall be shown red and signify “Alarm” on the graphic.

d. The device communication status shall be displayed on all equipment on-line

graphics.

e. The program run state shall be displayed on all equipment on-line graphics.

f. An on-line text description of the Sequence of Operation shall be provided as a

graphics screen.

All mechanical equipment shall also have a graphic representing the logic programming:

An on-line graphical representation of the programming logic with real-time values,

accessible via the standard thin-client user interface program Microsoft Internet Explorer.

There shall also be a graphics screen for each communication trunk showing the

communication status for each device connected to the system.

a. If a device is in communications failure, the controller color shall be magenta. If

the device communications status is normal, the controller color shall be green.

b. The program run state of each device shall also be displayed on the communication

trunk graphic. If the program is in the normal running state the color should be

green. If it is in the halted or failure state, the color should be magenta.

All floors in the building shall have a graphic screen.

a. Equipment locations and space temperatures shall be displayed on the floor plan

graphic.

b. Hypertext links to the room controller parameters shall be defined by clicking on

the room location the controller serves.

c. Hypertext links to equipment parameters shall be defined by clicking on the

equipment location on the floor plan.

d. Dynamic thermo-graphics shall be defined for each room controller to visually

depict the room alarm (event) status of the room. The color-coding is defined

below.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 239010 - 47

If the actual space temperature is in the dead band between the heating setpoint and the

cooling setpoint, the color displayed shall be green for the occupied mode, representing

ideal comfort conditions. If in the unoccupied mode, the color displayed shall be gray

representing 'after-hours' conditions.

If the space temperature rises above the cooling setpoint, the color shall change to yellow.

Upon further rise beyond the cooling setpoint plus an offset, the color shall change to

orange. Upon further rise beyond the cooling setpoint plus the yellow band offset, plus

the orange band offset, the color shall change to red indicating unacceptable high

temperature conditions. At this point an alarm shall be generated to notify the operator.

When space temperature falls below the heating setpoint, the color shall change to light

blue. Upon further temperature decrease below the heating setpoint minus an offset, the

color shall change to dark blue. Upon further space temperature decrease below the

heating setpoint minus the light blue band offset minus the dark blue band offset the color

shall change to red indicating unacceptable low temperature conditions. At this point an

alarm shall be generated to notify the operator.

All graphics screens shall be reviewed, coordinated and approved by the University’s

Project Manager prior to implementation. Graphical Screens: The following graphical

screens, as a minimum, shall be developed for this project.

a. Main Screen ( GIS Map of WVU )

b. Floor Overviews (with thermographic temperature indication)

c. Hot Water System

d. Hot Water System Setpoints

e. Chilled Water System

f. Chilled Water System Setpoints

g. AHUs

h. AHU Setpoints

i. Energy Recovery System & Setpoints as required

j. Laboratory Exhaust System as required

k. Laboratory Exhaust System Setpoints as required

l. Lab Airside Summary Screen – Each Floor as required

1) Schedules (one screen per zone)

2) Schedule Overrides (one screen per zone)

m. Holiday Schedules

n. Individual graphic Screens for all 3rd part equipment controllers

o. HVAC Over view

p. Elevator Overview ( if communications available with Elevator equipment)

q. Fire System Overview

r. Lighting System Over View

s. Miscellaneous

1) Graphics architecture shall drill down in a logical sequence. ie

a) Main Page WVU GIS MAP

b) Building Conditions

c) Room Conditions

d) Room Sensors

e) Equipment serving Room (VAV)

f) Building Equipment serving Room Equipment (Air Handler)

g) System serving Building Equipment ( Hot Water System)

h) Building Control AS-Builts Serving Room with live data

i) Available 3rd Party Equipment (boiler control panel)


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 239010 - 48

E. Scheduling:

All equipment occupied/unoccupied scheduling shall be capable of being accomplished

via a BACnet BV that is controlled by a BACnet schedule.

The CSC shall provide a BACnet BV or Lon SNVT for all VAVs, FCUs, Air Handlers,

Exhaust equipment to be implemented in schedules.

Equipment schedules shall be coordinated between the University Project Management

and the University customer.

The system shall allow the operator to designate any combination of equipment to form a

group that can be scheduled with a single operator command through the mouse interface

at the workstation.

a. Any designated group shall have the capability to be a member of another group.

b. The operator shall be able to make all schedule additions, modifications and

deletions using the mouse and appropriate dialog boxes. In addition, the operator

shall have the capability to edit all schedules and then download any or all

schedule changes to the control modules with a single operator command through

the mouse interface.

c. The operator shall be able to view a color-coded forecast of schedules for instant

overview of facilities schedules. Schedule graphic forecast shall include colored

coded indication of all types of schedules, i.e. normal, holiday and override.

F. The following applications software, per “programs” in System Points/Objects List(s), shall be

provided for the purposes of 1) emergency utility demand limiting and 2) optimizing energy

consumption while maintaining occupant comfort:

Time Scheduling

The system shall be capable of scheduling by individually controlled equipment and

groups of individually controlled equipment. Each schedule shall provide beginning and

ending dates and times (hours: minutes) Reset Source Temperature Optimization (STO))

a. The system shall automatically perform source optimization for all air handling

units, chillers and boilers in response to the needs of other downstream pieces of

equipment, by increasing or decreasing supply temperature setpoints, i.e. chilled

water, discharge air, etc. using University defined parameters. In addition to

optimization, the STO capability shall also provide for starting and stopping

primary mechanical equipment based on zone occupancy and/or zone load

conditions.

b. The STO program will allow setpoints for various equipment in the

heating/cooling chain to be reset between a University defined maximum and a

minimum setpoint based on the actual requirements of the building zones. The

actual setpoint shall be calculated based on the number of heating or cooling

requests which are currently being received from the equipment or zones served.

Once every update period, the STO program surveys the network to see if any

piece of equipment requires any additional heating or cooling from its source.

c. As an example, a VAV air handler is the source of cold air for a number of VAV

boxes. Assume that the STO program for the air handler has the following

parameters established for it by the University’s Physical Plant:

1) Optimized setpoint description: Initial setpoint 60.00, Max. setpoint 65.00,

Min. setpoint 55.00. Every 2.0 minutes, trim by 0.25 and respond by -0.50

but no more than 2.0. Every two minutes, the STO program will total up all


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 239010 - 49

of the requests and calculate a new setpoint: New setpoint = prev setpoint +

'trim by' + ('respond by' x no. of req.). Assuming four requests were received

and the previous setpoint was 57.00 degrees, the new setpoint would be:

New setpoint = 57.00 + 0.25 + (-0.50 x 4) = 55.25 Deg F

2) If the number of requests received multiplied times the 'respond by' value is

greater than the 'but no more than' value, the 'but no more than' value is used

inside the parenthesis in the above calculation.

Set Back/Set Up (Day/Night Setback (DNS))

a. The system shall allow the space temperature to drift down or up within a preset

(adjustable) unoccupied temperature range. The heating or cooling shall be

activated upon reaching either end of the DNS range and shall remain activated

until the space temperature returns to the DNS range.

b. The system shall be capable of closing all outside air and exhaust air dampers

during the unoccupied period, except for 100% outside air units.

c. Unoccupied space temperature shall be monitored by the DDC temperature sensors

located in the individual zones being controlled or within a representative room in

the building if full DDC control is not being effected.

d. User shall be able to define, modify or delete the following parameters:

1) DNS setpoint temperature(s)

2) Temperature band for night heating operation

3) Period when the DNS is to be activated

Timed Local Override (TLO)

a. The system shall have TLO input points/objects, which permit the occupants to

request an override of equipment which has been scheduled OFF. The system shall

turn the equipment ON upon receiving a request from the local input device. Local

input devices shall be push button (momentary contact), wind-up timer, or

ON/OFF switches as detailed in the Object Table(s).

b. If a push button is used the system operator shall be able to define the duration of

equipment ON time per input pulse and the total maximum ON time permitted.

Override time already entered shall be canceled by the occupant at the input point.

If a wind-up timer is used the equipment will stay in override mode until the timer

expires. Year to date, month-to-date and current day override history shall be

maintained for each TLO input point. History data shall be accessible by the

operator at any time and shall be capable of being automatically stored on hard

disk and/or printed on a daily basis.

Space Temperature Control (STC)

a. There shall be two space temperature setpoints, one for cooling and one for

heating, separated by a dead band. Only one of the two setpoints shall be operative

at any time. The cooling setpoint is operative if the actual space temperature has

more recently been equal to or greater than the cooling setpoint. The heating

setpoint is operative if the actual space temperature has more recently been equal

to or less than the heating setpoint. There are two modes of operation for the

setpoints, one for the occupied mode (example: heating = 72 degrees F, cooling =

76 degrees F and one for the unoccupied mode (example: heating = 55 degrees,

cooling = 90 degrees F).

b. The occupied/unoccupied modes may be scheduled by time, date, or day of week

via a BACnet BV or Lon SNVT.

c. All setpoints and offsets shall be operator definable. When in the occupied mode,

start-up mode, or when heating or cooling during the night setback unoccupied


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 239010 - 50

mode, a request shall be sent over the network to other equipment in the HVAC

chain, such as to an AHU fan that serves the space, to run for ventilation. The

operator shall be able to disable this request function if desired.

d. The cooling and heating setpoints may be increased (decreased) under demand

control conditions to reduce the cooling (heating) load on the building during the

demand control period. Up to three levels of demand control strategy shall be

provided. The operator may predefine the amount of setpoint increase or decrease

for each of the three levels. Each space temperature sensor in the building may be

programmed independently.

e. An optimum start-up program transitions from the unoccupied setpoints to the

occupied setpoints. The optimum start-up algorithm considers the rate of space

temperature rise for heating and the rate of space temperature fall for cooling under

nominal outside temperature conditions; it also considers the outside temperature;

and the heat loss and gain coefficients of the space envelope (AI: Space

Temperature).

f. A PID control loop, comparing the actual space temperature to its setpoint, shall

modulate the dampers and heating coil valve or heating stages in sequence to

achieve the setpoint target.

Historical Data and Trend Analysis: A variety of Historical data collection utilities shall

be provided to automatically sample, store, and display system data in all of the following

ways.

a. Continuous Point Histories: Global Building Controllers /Routers shall store Point

History Files for all analog and binary inputs and outputs. The Point History

routine shall continuously and automatically sample the value of all analog inputs

at half hour intervals. Samples for all physical hardware input and output points

shall be collected during the warranty period. to allow the user to immediately

analyze equipment performance and all problem-related events. Point History Files

for binary input or output points and analog output points shall be archived on the

server workstation hard drive.

b. Control Loop Performance Trends: Global Building Controllers /Routers shall also

provide high-resolution sampling capability with an operator-adjustable resolution

of 10-300 seconds in one-second increments for verification of control loop

performance.

c. Extended Sample Period Trends: Measured and calculated analog and binary data

shall also be assignable to user-definable trends for the purpose of collecting

operator-specified performance data over extended periods of time. Sample

intervals of 1 minute to 2 hours, in one-minute intervals, shall be provided. Each

standalone Global Building Controller /Router shall have a dedicated buffer for

trend data, and shall be capable of storing a minimum of 5000 data samples.

d. Data Storage and Archiving: Trend data shall be stored at the Global Building

Controllers /Routers, and uploaded to hard disk storage when archival is desired.

Uploads shall occur based upon either user-defined interval, manual command, or

when the trend buffers become full. All trend data shall be available in disk file

form for use in 3rd Party personal computer applications.

Runtime Totalization: Global Building Controllers /Routers shall automatically

accumulate and store runtime hours for binary input and output points as specified.

a. The Totalization routine shall have a sampling resolution of one minute or less.

b. The user shall have the ability to define a warning limit for Runtime Totalization.

Unique, user-specified messages shall be generated when the limit is reached.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 239010 - 51

Analog/Pulse Totalization: Global Building Controllers /Routers shall automatically

sample, calculate and store consumption totals on a daily, weekly, or monthly basis for

user-selected analog and binary pulse input-type points.

a. Totalization shall provide calculation and storage of accumulations of up to

99,999.9 units (e.g., KWH, gallons, KBTU, tons, etc.).

b. The Totalization routine shall have a sampling resolution of one minute or less.

c. The user shall have the ability to define a warning limit. Unique, user-specified

messages shall be generated when the limit is reached.

Event Totalization: Global Building Controllers /Routers shall have the ability to count

events such as the number of times a pump or fan system is cycled on and off. Event

Totalization shall be performed on a daily, weekly, or monthly basis.

a. The Event Totalization feature shall be able to store the records associated with a

minimum of 9,999,999 events before reset.

b. The user shall have the ability to define a warning limit. Unique, user-specified

messages shall be generated when the limit is reached.

2B.6 LABORATORY AIR SYSTEM REPORTING REQUIREMENTS

A. Performance Reporting

System shall be capable of providing the following information as part of Continuous

Commissioning and ongoing Measurement and Verification and in support of a Health

and Safety Management System. Reporting shall be offered as part of a service

agreement.

Performance data shall be continuously collected from the BAS system to verify

performance and diagnose operating issues of the laboratory ventilation control system.

Various performance metrics may be used as appropriate. These metrics shall include:

a. Supply and Exhaust air volume

b. Temperature

c. Humidity (if measured as part of this project)

d. Room volume difference

e. Room directional air flow

f. Room ventilation rate

g. Fume hood exhaust air volume

h. Fume hood sash position

i. Fume hood minimum flow

j. All air volume set points and alarms or other appropriate metrics selected by the

owner or owner’s representative.

Laboratory performance data shall be reported by groups and for individual laboratories

and equipment. Groupings shall be by facility, building wing, building section, building

floor, department and room as determined by the owner or owner’s representative.

Reports shall have daily, weekly, monthly or annually selectable time periods. Report

data intervals shall be 15, 30 or 60 minute.

Laboratory performance data trend interval shall be 5 or 15 minutes as appropriate for the

intended use of the specific information collected.

Reports and performance data shall be available through a web based server. Web based

performance reporting shall include standard tabular reports described above. Reporting

shall also include graphical based reporting for room and fume hood performance data.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 239010 - 52

Charts shall be available in 15, 30 or 60 minute intervals as well as daily and weekly.

Charts shall support multiple data points selected by the user. Data export capability

shall also be included.

Reports of laboratory room and fume hood performance shall be prepared and reviewed

with the owner monthly, quarterly, semi-annually or annually as determined by the owner

or owner’s representative as part of the service agreement. Standard reports shall be

available illustrating summary and detail laboratory room performance; summary and

detail fume hood performance, sash management effectiveness, and energy consumption

comparison to the energy use baseline.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that systems are complete and ensure that the systems are capable of being started and

operated in a safe and normal condition before attempting to operate the BAS systems.

B. Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions.

3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION

A. Install equipment level and plumb.

B. Install software in control units and, as applicable, in operator workstation desktop PC(s) and

laptop computer(s). Implement all features of programs to specified requirements and as

appropriate to sequence of operation.

C. Connect and configure equipment and software to achieve sequence of operation specified.

3.3 WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Install systems and materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, rough-in drawings

and equipment details. Install electrical components and use electrical products complying with

requirements of applicable Division 16 sections of these specifications.

B. Provide all interlock and control wiring. All wiring shall be installed neatly and professionally,

in accordance with requirements of applicable Specification Division 16 sections and all

national, state, and local electrical codes. All the wiring shall be installed in accordance with the

current National Electrical Code (NEC).

C. Provide wiring as required by functions as specified and as recommended by equipment

manufacturer's to serve specified control functions.

D. Control wiring shall not be installed in power circuit raceways. Magnetic starters and disconnect

switches shall not be used as junction boxes. Provide auxiliary junction boxes as required.

Coordinate location and arrangement of all control equipment with the University’s Physical

Plant's representative prior to rough-in.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 239010 - 53

E. The term "control wiring" is defined to include the providing of wire, conduit, and

miscellaneous materials as required for mounting and connecting electric or electronic control

devices in pilot circuits of contactors, starters, relays, etc., and wiring for valve and damper

operators.

F. Install signal, communication, and fiber-optic cables according to Division 16 Section "Control/

Signal Transmission Media", and as follows:

1. Bundle and harness multiconductor instrument cable in place of single cables where

several cables follow a common path.

2. Fasten flexible conductors, bridging cabinets and doors, along hinge side; protect against

abrasion. Tie and support conductors.

G. Connect manual-reset limit controls independent of manual-control switch positions. Automatic

duct heater resets may be connected in interlock circuit of power controllers.

H. Connect hand-off-auto selector switches to override automatic interlock controls when switch is

in hand position.

I. Provide auxiliary pilot duty relays on motor starters as required for control function.

J. All exposed control wiring and control wiring in the mechanical, electrical, telephone, and

similar rooms shall be installed in raceways. Install exposed control wiring system in conduit

for electric/electronic control systems. UL plenum-rated cable shall be provided when located in

ceiling spaces, plenum wire must be in raceway or conduit. All control wiring shall be installed

in a neat and workmanlike manner parallel to building lines with adequate support. Both

conduit and plenum wiring shall be supported from or anchored to structural members. Conduit

or plenum wiring supported from or anchored to piping, duct supports, the ceiling suspension

system, is not acceptable. Provide adequate strain relief for all field terminations.

K. Number-code or color-code conductors, excluding those used for individual zone controls,

appropriately for future identification and servicing of control system.

3.4 CONTROL DEVICE INSTALLATION

A. All room sensors and thermostats shall be mounted so as to be accessible in accordance with

ADA Guidelines, unless otherwise noted on the drawings. It is the CSC's responsibility for final

coordination of the sensor/thermostat locations with the Professional and the University’s

Project Manager.

B. Remote control devices not in local panels shall be accessible for adjustment and service below

7' above finished floor whenever possible.

C. Locate all temperature control devices wired under Division 16.

D. Install guards on thermostats in the following locations:

1. Entrances.

2. Public areas.

3. Where indicated.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 239010 - 54

E. Install damper motors on outside of duct in warm areas, not in locations exposed to outdoor

temperatures.

F. Local controllers shall be mounted at eye level for accessibility and service, and located within

50' of the system served, unless otherwise shown on the plans.

G. Freestanding enclosures and panels shall be supported on steel unistrut frames, or approved

equal, and be securely anchored to the floor and be well braced.

H. A minimum of 3' working clearance shall be provided in front of all enclosures and panels;

clearance shall be ensured to permit the enclosure door to open at least 90° from its closed

position.

I. Mounting height shall be a maximum 6'-6" to the top of the enclosure.

J. Shall be suitable for use in environments having an ambient temperature range of 31°F to 104°F

and a relative humidity of up to 95% noncondensing.

K. There shall be no pneumatic equipment or device installed in a Global Building

Controller/Router enclosure. There shall be no equipment or device installed in a Global

Building Controller/Router that is not a functional component of the campus system interface or

building BAS system.

L. A padlocking hasp and staple or keyed cylinder shall be provided for each door.

M. A field-installed, 14-gage galvanized steel drip shield shall be provided where enclosures and

panels may be subjected to dripping water.

3.5 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS FOR CONTOL SYSTEMS

A. The CSC supplier shall install all control system equipment including controllers, sensors,

damper actuators, reheat valves, fume hood sash sensors and fume hood operator display

panels. This contractor shall install and terminate all low voltage control system wiring

including wiring between each controller and between each controller and all control and

sensing devices. This contractor shall also provide 24 VAC power where required by the

control system and associated control devices. This contractor shall install pneumatic control

tubing from the nearest building air main for all control devices that are pneumatically

operated.

B. The electrical contractor shall provide 120 volt power in the laboratory ceiling spaces for

connection to the laboratory control system equipment.

C. The mechanical contractor shall install all supply air terminals, reheat coils, exhaust air

terminals, air valves and interconnecting ductwork associated with the laboratory ventilation

system

D. Air Terminal, Reheat Coils and Control Valves

1. CSC contractor shall furnish to Mechanical Contractor for installation air terminals, sound

attenuators, reheat coils and access doors as shown on drawings and according to


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 239010 - 55

manufacturer’s instructions. Mechanical Contractor shall install reheat coils control valves

furnished by BAS contractor, and shall provide necessary ductwork transitions as required

for mounting equipment provided by CSC contractor

2. Mount actuators on same side of air terminal device as coil connections to ensure service

access.

3. Connect air terminals to ductwork with removable type joints as detailed.

4. Transition from supply air terminal to reheat coil shall not exceed 15° per side.

5. Provide access doors for supply air terminals with reheat coils. Mount access door at inlet

side of coil. Refer to Section 23 3314 - Ductwork Specialties for access door requirements

E. Fume Hood Controls:

Furnish to fume hood manufacturer templates for required hood mounted devices including

vertical and horizontal sash sensors, interface boxes, and fume hood monitors required for

complete installation of fume hood exhaust air control system. Fume hood manufacturer

shall provide necessary cut outs with blank cover plates.

Fume hood size and sash configuration are called out in Lab Furnishings documents.

Verify with fume hood manufacturer fume hood sizes, sash configurations and installation

requirements for each device.

CSC manufacturer shall field install, mount and wire required hood mounted devices.

F. Control and Power Wiring:

CSC manufacturer shall provide control wiring from laboratory control panel to and

between other laboratory control system components as required for complete and proper

functioning, including but not limited to air terminals, control valves, sensors, transducers,

controllers, panels, and interface modules.

Electrical Contractor will provide one spare 20-amp circuit at each emergency power

electrical panel, serving laboratory. CSC supplier shall provide required conduit, wire,

junction boxes, disconnect switches and circuit breakers as specified in Division 26 as

required to wire electrical panel to each laboratory control panel.

G. Laboratory/Pressurized Space Control Panels and Power Supplies:

Mount laboratory and pressurized space control panels and power supplies in accessible

location within laboratory room.

Coordinate location of electrical power panels with Division 26 Contractor.

3.6 BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM INTERFACE

A. The following laboratory ventilation and environmental information shall be provided to the

BAS:

Fume hood average face velocity (fpm) and high / low alarm.

Fume hood open face area (sq. ft.)

Fume hood exhaust airflow (cfm) and high / low alarm.

Laboratory room supply minimum airflow limits (cfm) and high / low alarm


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 239010 - 56

Laboratory room supply maximum airflow limits (cfm) and high / low alarm

Laboratory room general exhaust minimum airflow limits (cfm) and high / low alarm.

Laboratory room general exhaust maximum airflow limits (cfm) and high / low alarm.

Laboratory supply air temperature (0F).

Laboratory room ambient temperature (0F) and high / low alarm.

Laboratory room humidity (%RH) and high / low alarm.

Laboratory room differential airflow (cfm).

Laboratory room differential pressure (In. W.C.) and high / low alarm.

Exhaust system static pressure (In W.C.) and high / low alarm.

Exhaust system fan status, damper position, and associated alarm parameters.

Exhaust system stack velocity (fpm)

Wind speed (mph) or and direction

B. Information may be communicated by means of protocol translators or by seamless LAN

connections. As an option the CSC supplier may provide the information by individual direct

connections (hard wired inputs). If the direct connection approach is used the CSC supplier

shall be responsible for all interconnecting wiring and any additional BAS and CSC system

control panels that may be required to accept these inputs. If the communications approach is

used the CSC supplier shall be responsible for all network wiring and any protocol translators

required by the BAS and CSC.

C. The CSC system shall accept the following control inputs from the BAS:

Room airflow tracking offset setpoint adjustment.

Room ambient temperature / humidity setpoint adjustment.

Occupied/Unoccupied state of the room for room control mode changeover

Exhaust Minimum and Maximum flow limits

Supply Minimum and Maximum flow limits

3.7 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate

general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Ground equipment: Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's

published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those

specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.

3.8 CONTROL POWER

A. Power supply for Global Building Controllers/Routers and associated BAS components shall be

connected via a dedicated circuit to the building normal-emergency panel. A grounding

conductor shall be run from building service entrance panel ground bus. Conductor shall be

insulated and isolated from other grounded conductors and building conduit system.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 239010 - 57

B. Power supply for Application Controllers used to monitor emergency equipment and/or

equipment serving critical spaces (i.e. Animal Rooms, Computer Server Rooms, etc.) shall be

connected via a dedicated circuit to the building normal/emergency panel.

C. UPS: Uninterruptible Power Supply(s) shall supply power for the Global Building Controller(s),

and Application Controllers that monitor emergency equipment, if Normal/Emergency Power is

not available in the building.

D. Provide power for Application Controllers and all associated control components from nearest

electrical control panel or as indicated on the electrical drawings— coordinate with Electrical

Contractor.

E. Power for each control panel shall be provided through a switch (standard light switch) located

inside the panel. A standard duplex receptacle shall also be provided inside the control panel.

The receptacle shall be unswitched. Control transformer(s) shall be located in rated enclosure

outside the control panel, and attached to the side of the panel.

3.9 IDENTIFICATION

A. The CSC shall label each system device with a point address or other clearly identifiable

notation inside the device cover. Labels shall be permanent, and method of labeling shall be

approved by the University’s Project Manager.

B. All control equipment shall be clearly identified by control shop drawing designation as

follows:

1. Control valves and damper actuators: brass tags or engraved bakelite tags.

2. Other Remote Control Devices: Metal tags or laser printed, adhesive backed, metalized

polyester film labels.

3. Control Enclosures and Panels: Engraved nameplate with panel number and system

served.

3.10 TRENDS

A. All input and output control and status points will have trends programmed. Each trend will

store a minimum of 1000 samples utilizing a first-in/first-out algorithm so that the oldest data is

over-written as new data is stored. The controller will also be programmed for the capability of

enabling historical trending on each trended point individually so that historical trending can be

enabled on any point without enabling it on any other trended point

B. All trends shall be programmed to be triggered according to the type of point, as follows:

1. All equipment start/stop control point trends will be triggered on the control point’s

change of state.

2. All equipment status point trends will be triggered on the status point’s change of state.

3. All space-temperature and outside-air trends will be triggered on any change of value of 2

degrees Fahrenheit.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 239010 - 58

4. All space-humidity and outside-air-humidity trends will be triggered on any change of

value of 5%.

5. All fan air temperature trends will be triggered on any change of value of 5 degrees

Fahrenheit.

6. All water temperature trends will be triggered on any change of value of 3 degrees

Fahrenheit.

7. All damper motor control point trends will be triggered on any change of value of 10% of

its control range.

8. All valve control point trends will be triggered on any change of value of 10% of its

control range.

9. All VFD motor control point trends will be triggered on any change of value of 5% of its

control range.

10. All fan air static pressure trends will be triggered on any change of value of .05 inches

water column.

11. All water pressure trends will be triggered on any change of value of 3 psi.

12. All steam pressure trends will be triggered on any change of value of 2% of the steam

pressure input range.

3.11 ALARMS

A. All Input/Output objects listed on the object tables, for each piece of equipment, shall have an

event (alarm) defined for the off-normal condition.

B. Analog objects shall list the high and low alarm limits.

C. Every device connected to the system shall also be alarmed for an off-line condition.

1. Two notification classes shall be defined to route alarms.

a. Critical alarms shall be printed, logged, and pop-up windows shall occur via an

email notification.

b. Maintenance level alarms shall be printed and logged.

D. The event objects and routing shall be reviewed by the University’s Physical Plant to identify

the class, routing, limits, and message content for each object prior to implementation.

E. An event shall be generated for a device communications failure. All devices shall have this

feature implemented.

3.12 SCHEDULES

A. A list of schedules to be implemented shall be reviewed and approved by WVU. The list shall

also include the schedule times to be implemented.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 239010 - 59

3.13 ACCEPTANCE OF COMPLETED BAS INSTALLATION

A. Acceptance of the completed BAS installation includes verification of the proper equipment

communication setup. This shall be accomplished by submitting a BACnet network analysis

capture for a period of 5-minutes. The capture file (in .TXT format) shall be submitted to the

University’s Physical Plant for Review and Approval.

For Lon System ATC Contractor must possess a LonManager Protocol Analyzer or equivalent

product and be familiar with the capabilities and use of this equipment. Protocol Analyzer shall

be utilized to observe, analyze and diagnose the behavior of the installed network. The software

package shall include the following tools: Protocol Analyzer Tool, Traffic Analysis Tool, and

Network Diagnostics Tool. ATC Contractor shall utilize a Protocol Analyzer Tool to monitor

network traffic on all installed control channels for a minimum of 24 hours per channel. ATC

Contractor shall reconfigure nodes, add repeaters and/or add routers as necessary to maintain

traffic at no more than 50% of channel bandwidth capacity.

The Physical Plant Approval shall be received, and any identified problems shall be resolved

before Acceptance Testing shall begin. Corporate assistance shall be requested and used as

necessary to resolve any network-issues in a timely fashion. Upon completion of the

installation, the CSC shall start up the system and perform all necessary calibration, testing, and

debugging operations. An acceptance test shall be performed by the CSC in the presence of the

University’s Physical Plant representative. Acceptance test shall be scheduled with at least 10

working days advance notice. The acceptance test shall be observed by at least one member

from the University’s Physical Plant.

B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect

field-assembled components and equipment installation, including piping and electrical

connections. Report results in writing.

1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm

proper unit operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.

2. Test and adjust controls and safeties.

C. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment.

1. Start, test, and adjust control systems.

2. Demonstrate compliance with requirements, including calibration and testing, and control

sequences.

3. Adjust, calibrate, and fine tune circuits and equipment to achieve sequence of operation

specified.

D. The acceptance test shall include, but not be limited to:

1. The CSC shall submit a checklist of the objects for the test. The checklist shall be

submitted to the University’s Physical Plant and reviewed and approved by the

University’s Physical Plant, prior to the test. The checklist shall include all objects that

have event (alarm) routing defined. DIVISION 23 – HVAC

2. The CSC and OEM manufacturer shall verify the proper operation of all input/outputs.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 239010 - 60

3. The CSC shall verify the proper event (alarm) routing to Physical Plant BAS operations

center for all points on the main equipment and perform a spot check of the operations of

ten percent of terminal unit’s equipment.

4. The CSC shall verify that the software programs meet the design intent of the control

sequences in the Construction Documents.

5. The CSC shall verify the proper operation of the system software on the operator

workstation.

6. The CSC and the OEM manufacturer shall verify all inputs meet or exceed

manufacturer’s stated tolerances for accuracy.

7. The CSC shall verify that all on-line graphical displays of equipment accurately represent

the real time state of the field equipment.

8. The CSC shall verify that all on-line graphical displays of programming logic accurately

represent the real time state of the field equipment.

9. The CSC shall verify the reliability of all communications of all field devices to the

appropriate operator workstation located in the Physical Plant Building.

10. The test shall include all workstation/server level integration included in the scope of this

project with the CSC and OEM manufacturers.

11. The test shall include functional verification of all interfaces and system integration

required to meet the scope of this project.

12. Final acceptance shall include acceptance by the University’s Physical Plant.

13. The Acceptance Test shall be conducted with the CSC, OEM manufacturer, the Prime

Contractor representative and a member of the University’s Physical Plant present.

E. Turnover of ALARMS to WVU BAS Operators: Alarms being turned-over to WVU BAS

Operators shall have been activated, tested for proper routing and determined to not be

producing frequent and nuisance alarms. It is expected that Alarms will not be turned-over to

WVU BAS Operators until there is final acceptance of the completed BAS installation.

F. Acceptance: When the field test procedures have been successfully demonstrated to the

University’s Physical Plant and the system performance is deemed satisfactory, the system parts

will be accepted for beneficial use and placed under warranty. At this time, a "notice of

completion" shall be issued by the University’s project representative and the warranty period

shall start.

G. All of the points which are alarmed shall be trended and archived from the time of installation

through the end of the warranty period. All archived files will be readily accessible to the

University’s Physical Plant.

H. Start-up and commission systems: Allow sufficient time for start-up and commissioning prior to

placing control systems in permanent operation.

I. Provide any recommendation for system modification in writing to the University’s Physical

Plant. Do not make any system modification, including operating parameters and control

settings, without prior approval of the University’s Physical Plant.

J. Provide certificate stating that control system has been tested and adjusted for proper operation.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 239010 - 61

K. Project Record Documentation: After a successful acceptance testing, submit project record

drawings of the completed project for final approval. After receiving final approval, supply six

(or as specified in Division 1) complete project record sets (maximum ANSI "D" size), together

with AutoCAD diskettes to the University’s Project Management.

3.14 TRAINING

A. The CSC shall provide factory-trained instructor to give full instructions to designated

personnel in the operation, maintenance, and programming of the system. Instructors shall be

thoroughly familiar with all aspects of the subject matter they are to teach. The training shall be

specifically oriented to the system and interfacing equipment installed.

B. Instructions shall include 2 parts, the “New BAS Equipment Orientation” and the “BAS Product

Training” as outlined below:

1. New BAS Equipment Orientation: Two (2) 3-hour “walk-through” sessions for the

University’s Technical Service employees. This shall include showing where equipment

is located throughout the area involved in the project, including –but not limited to-from

the major equipment to the locations of controlling and monitoring sensors.

a. General -One session will be more general in nature for the Area Services and

Weekend personnel who will be initial responders, dealing mostly with “Too Hot”

or “Too Cold” calls.

b. Technical – One session will be more technical, being oriented for the Central

Services personnel that will need to troubleshoot more complex problems.

c. Schedule “walk-through” sessions with the University with at least ten days

advance notice. Provide an Agenda, to be approved by the University’s Physical

Plant prior to scheduling Training.

d. Project Specific BAS Product Training: This training shall be provided during the

period of installation, OR at the University’s option, banked for use following the

installation period of this contract as "Factory Training Credits”. A minimum of 40

hours of instruction from a factory-trained instructor for no less than 5 technicians

shall be provided.

e. Factory Training Credits” shall be used to engage a factory-authorized service

representative to train University's maintenance personnel on-site to adjust,

operate, and maintain control systems and components

f. Train University's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for starting

and stopping, troubleshooting, servicing, Operation of portable operator's terminal

and maintaining equipment and schedules.

g. Provide operator training on modification of data display, alarm and status

descriptors, requesting data, executing command, calibrating and adjusting

devices, resetting default values, and requesting logs.

h. Provide a student binder with training modules.

i. Schedule BAS Product Training sessions with the University with at least twenty

(20) days advance notice. Provide an Agenda, to be approved by the University’s

Project Manager, prior to scheduling Training.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 239010 - 62

3.15 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Start-up: Start-up, test, and adjust electric control systems in presence of manufacturer's

authorized representative. Demonstrate compliance with requirements. Replace damaged or

malfunctioning controls and equipment.

B. Cleaning: Clean factory-finished surfaces. Repair any marred or scratched surfaces with

manufacturer's touch-up paint.

C. Final Adjustment: After completion of installation, adjust sensors, thermostats, control valves,

motors, and similar equipment provided as work of this section. Final adjustment shall be

performed by specially trained personnel in direct employ of manufacturer of primary

temperature control system.

PART 4 - SEQUENCES OF OPERATION

4.1 SEQUENCES OF OPERATION

A. CHILLER (CH-1)

Upon call for chilled water, the chiller shall stage on and operate in response to chiller

master controller.

Associated pumps P-3,P-4 are duty, standby. BAS system shall alternate which pump is

operating. Operating pump shall modulate speed via VFD to maintain differential

pressure setpoint.

B. AIR HANDLER (RTAH-1)

The Building Automation System (BAS) will send the controller Occupied, Unoccupied,

Optimal Start/Stop, Night Heat / Cool and Occupied Bypass commands. The BAS will

also send a discharge air temperature setpoint duct static pressure setpoint, and an

outdoor airflow setpoint, each calculated by optimization routines in the BAS. If

communication is lost with the BAS, the controller will operate using its default modes

and setpoints. All system setpoints are adjustable through the BAS.

Unoccupied (Heating/Cooling): In the unoccupied mode, the supply fan will be turned

off, the steam and hydronic cooling valves will be closed, the outside air (OA) damper

and exhaust air (EA) damper will be closed, and the return air (RA) damper will remain

open. If outside air temperature is below 35 degree F (adjustable) the steam valve shall

be modulated fully open.

a. During unoccupied periods, when the average space temperature is below the

unoccupied zone heating setpoint minus the unoccupied temperature differential,

unoccupied heating shall be requested. The supply fan will start and ramp-up as

described in the occupied operation sequence, the outside air damper and exhaust

air damper will remain closed and the return air damper will remain open, and the

steam heating valve will open with the face and bypass dampers modulating to

maintain the unoccupied discharge air temperature setpoint. When the space

temperature rises above the unoccupied zone heating setpoint plus the unoccupied

differential, the supply fan will stop and the steam heating valve will close.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 239010 - 63

b. When Unoccupied cooling is requested, two modes of operation shall be available

based on the condition of the outside air.

1) If a space temperature is above the unoccupied zone cooling setpoint, the

supply fan will start and modulate to maintain the duct static pressure

setpoint, the outside air damper and exhaust damper will remain closed and

the hydronic cooling valve will modulate to maintain the unoccupied

cooling discharge air temperature setpoint.

2) When all space temperatures fall below the unoccupied cooling setpoint plus

the unoccupied differential the supply fan will stop and the hydronic cooling

valve will close.

Warm-up Cycle: Thirty minutes (adjustable) prior to change over from unoccupied to

occupied mode, if the average space temperature is below the occupied zone heating

setpoint, a morning warm-up sequence will be activated. The supply fan will start and

modulate to maintain the duct static pressure setpoint, the outside air damper and exhaust

damper will remain closed, the return air damper will remain open, and the steam heating

valve and face and bypass dampers will modulate to maintain the heating discharge air

temperature setpoint. Mode will terminate when the space temperature reaches the

occupied heating setpoint or the occupied time period has started.

Cool-down Cycle: Thirty minutes (adjustable) prior to change over from unoccupied to

occupied mode, if the average space temperature is above the occupied cooling setpoint,

a morning cool-down sequence will be activated. When cooling is requested, two modes

of operation shall be available based on the condition of the outside air:

a. The supply fan will start and modulate to maintain the duct static pressure setpoint,

the outside air damper and exhaust air damper will remain closed, and the hydronic

cooling valve will modulate to maintain the unoccupied cooling discharge air

temperature setpoint.

b. Mode will terminate when the space temperature reaches the occupied cooling

setpoint or the occupied time period has started.

Occupied Heating Cycle:

a. The outside air damper shall modulate to provide the minimum required outside air

flow schedule on drawings, the return air damper will inversely track the

movements of the OA damper, the cooling coil control valve is off, and the supply

fan VFD shall operate continuously at scheduled minimum airflow and modulate

to maintain duct static pressure at setpoint. The return air fan VFD will track the

supply fan and will modulate to maintain return airflows.

b. The steam heating control valve shall open and the face and bypass dampers

modulate to maintain discharge air temperature setpoint.

c. If any zones are requesting cooling with their VAV box fully open, the discharge

temperature shall be 55. Provided that no spaces are requesting cooling with their

VAV box dampers open to 100% supply air flow, the heating shall operate to

maintain the following linear (adjustable) heating discharge air reset temperatures.

Heating Mode Reset Schedule

O.A. Temp. Supply Air Temp.

0 65

55 59

Occupied Cooling:


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 239010 - 64

a. The steam heating coil control valve is off, and the supply fan VFD shall operate

continuously and modulate to maintain duct static pressure at setpoint (adj.). The

return air fan VFD will track the supply fan and will modulate to maintain return

airflows.Two modes of cooling will be available:

1) Cooling Economizer Mode: When the enthalpy of the outside air is lower

than the enthalpy of the return air, the outside air damper will modulate

between the minimum required outside air flow and 100% open to maintain

the occupied discharge air temperature setpoint, and the return air damper

will inversely track the movements of the OA damper. If discharge air

temperature is above discharge air temperature setpoint with 100% outside

air, the cooling coil control valve will modulate to maintain the discharge air

temperature setpoint.

2) Cooling Mode: When the enthalpy of the outside air is higher than the

enthalpy of the return air. The outside air damper shall modulate to provide

the minimum required outside air, and the return air damper will inversely

track the movements of the OA damper. The cooling coil control valve will

modulate as needed to maintain the discharge air temperature setpoint.

b. The modes of cooling shall operate to maintain the following linear (adjustable)

cooling reset temperatures.

Cooling Mode Reset Schedule

O.A. Temp. Supply Air Temp.

55 59

80 55

Filter Status:

a. A differential pressure sensor located across the unit filter shall send an alarm

message, through the operator interface, when filters load to a preset pressure drop.

Smoke Detection:

a. Upon detection of products of combustion as sensed by a supply air duct mounted

smoke detector, the unit supply air and return air fans shall be de-energized by the

building fire alarm system, the outside air damper shall close, the return air damper

shall open, and an alarm shall be sent to the operator interface.

C. VAV Boxes -VAV Pressurized Space

General Description

a. This control sequence applies to general laboratory spaces and support spaces with

supply and exhaust laboratory airflow terminal devices for providing flow tracking

pressurization control

b. Each room consists of a single supply and exhaust laboratory air terminal or multiple

combinations

Steady State Operation – Normal

a. Steady state operation mode is designed to be around X air changes per hour as set

through the balance of total exhaust in the room


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 239010 - 65

Ventilation control (ACH):

a. The laboratory room controller shall continuously totalize all room exhaust airflows

as the total room exhaust airflow. The laboratory room controller shall continuously

calculate the difference between the total room exhaust airflow and the room exhaust

airflow required to maintain the room air ventilation rate (air change per hour) as listed

in the laboratory room schedule in the plans. Whenever the total room exhaust airflow

is less than the room exhaust airflow required to maintain the room minimum

ventilation rate, the laboratory room controller shall increase the room general exhaust

airflow until the total room exhaust airflow equals the required room exhaust airflow.

b. Whenever total room exhaust airflow is greater than the required room exhaust

airflow, the laboratory room controller shall decrease the room general exhaust

airflow until the total room exhaust airflow equals the required room exhaust airflow

or the general exhaust airflow is reduced to its minimum value

c. These sequences shall be able to be customized on site by adjusting parameters such

as control loop algorithm gains, temperature setpoint, alarm limits, airflow differential

setpoint, and pressurization mode.

Pressurization control by airflow tracking:

a. The laboratory room controller shall continuously totalize all room exhaust airflows

including fume hood exhausts, miscellaneous exhausts such as bench snorkels and the

room general exhaust, as applicable to individual rooms, as the total room exhausts

airflow. The laboratory room controller shall also continuously measure the room

supply airflow

b. The controller shall maintain a fixed difference between these volumes of total supply

air and total exhaust air as indicated on the terminal schedules

c. The laboratory room controller shall continuously control the room supply airflow at

the value necessary to maintain the predetermined (adjustable) airflow tracking

differential between the total room exhaust airflow and the room supply airflow as

listed in the room airflow schedule on the project plans and/or determined by Test and

Balance. For negatively pressurized rooms the room supply airflow shall always be

maintained at a lower value than the total room exhaust airflow by the airflow tracking

differential cfm (l/s). For positively pressurized rooms the room supply airflow shall

always be maintained at a higher value than the total room exhaust airflow by the

airflow tracking differential cfm (l/s)

d. For negatively pressurized spaces, the supply terminal(s) shall track the exhaust

(terminals). For positively pressurized spaces the exhaust terminals shall track the

supply terminals

e. The control algorithm shall be configurable for tracking by flow setpoints or by actual

flow measurements. Setpoint tracking shall automatically switch to flow tracking if

the device driver (supply -positive or exhaust - negative) cannot reach its setpoint.

f. The controller shall be capable of maintaining a different volume differential setpoint

during occupied mode than during unoccupied mode


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 239010 - 66

Temperature control by temperature sensing:

a. The laboratory room controller shall continuously measure the temperature in the

room by means of the room temperature sensor. The laboratory room controller shall

maintain the room temperature at its adjustable setpoint by initially modulating a

normally closed, equal percentage, reheat valve. The room temperature control action

shall utilize a proportional, integral and derivative (PID) closed loop control

algorithm. The laboratory room temperature set point shall be established by

authorized personnel through the plug-in, portable operator's terminal.

b. If room cooling needs increase when the reheat valve is fully closed, the laboratory

room controller shall increase the room general exhaust airflow (when a general

exhaust is present in the room) and the room supply airflow will increase to maintain

the room temperature as well as the airflow tracking differential at the setpoint. If

room cooling needs subsequently decrease, the laboratory room controller shall

decrease both the room general exhaust and the supply airflow while still maintaining

the room temperature setpoint and the room minimum airflow constraints.

c. If the room supply airflow is at its minimum value and a further reduction in room

cooling is needed, both the room supply airflow and room general exhaust airflow

(when present) shall be held constant and the reheat valve shall be modulated as

required to maintain the room temperature setpoint.

Planned Startup

a. Automatic startup of the room will follow its associated supply air system and exhaust

air system startup.

b. Ramp up both the exhaust and supply airflow valves to simultaneously maintain

directional airflow and achieve Steady State operation.

Planned Shutdown:

a. Automatic shutdown of the room will follow its associated supply air system and

exhaust air system shutdown. When either the supply or exhaust air systems are

proven non-operational then the room will be shutdown.

b. Close all supply and exhaust airflow valves and reheat control valve. Ramp the

airflow valves down in a manner that maintains directional airflow until the valves are

complete closed.

The room can be manually started or shutdown, via the BAS, as required for operational

and maintenance needs.

Automatic startup of the room will be timed with facility wide strategy on load distribution

and containment.

Degrade Operation – Air flow control


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 239010 - 67

a. If the central exhaust system is loaded to the extent that the general exhaust or fume

hood exhaust flows fall short of the setpoint, the controller shall continue to maintain

the scheduled offset between total supply and total exhaust flow.

Power Interruption Mode

a. When there is a power interruption to the supply or exhaust air distribution system for

the suite then the room will go into a shutdown mode. Startup will follow the planned

startup operation for the suite.

B. VAV Fume Hood

General Description

a. This control sequence applies to VAV fume hoods in a manifold fume hood exhaust

system to maintain the average fume hood face velocity at the desired setting

b. This sequence uses sash alarms and up to three face velocity setpoints to limit the air

entering the hood.

c. Each fume hood has an individual exhaust terminal connected to a central fan.

d. The face velocity setpoint shall have Attended/Unattended settings

Steady State Operation – Normal

a. The fume hood controller shall continually determine the fume hood's total open area

by monitoring the fume hood sash position(s) by the sash sensor(s) as well as taking

account of any fume hood fixed open areas and the bypass opening(s).

b. The fume hood controller shall calculate the required fume hood exhaust airflow

necessary to maintain the average face velocity setpoint over the total open area. The

controller shall continuously perform the above exhaust airflow control calculations

ten times per second to ensure detection of and a maximum of 1-second response to

any change in sash position.

c. The fume hood controller shall control the fume hood exhaust airflow at the rate

necessary to maintain the average face velocity setpoint. The fume hood controller

shall ensure that the required fume hood exhaust to maintain the average face velocity

setpoint is always maintained independently of any variations in exhaust system static

pressure or any laboratory room conditions such as the ventilation airflow or room

static pressure that could otherwise affect the fume hood exhaust airflow.

d. The controller shall maintain a minimum exhaust flow regardless of sash position as

recommended by the fume hood manufacturer, safety guidelines or as indicated on

the air terminal schedules.

e. The controller shall be capable of limiting the maximum fume hood exhaust flow

regardless of the extent of the sash opening as indicated by the air terminal schedules


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 239010 - 68

Provide Operator Display Panel (ODP) mounted on each VAV fume hood for local

indication of:

a. Face velocity in fpm

b. Green light for normal face velocity

c. Yellow light for marginal face velocity

d. Red for face velocity alarm conditions

e. Audible alarm device in response to face velocity alarm conditions

f. Temporary alarm silencing button

Sash Alert Alarm

a. Sash alert alarm shall be provided for independently configurable attended (occupied)

and unattended (unoccupied) modes

b. When the sash opens above a preset limit (adjustable), the ODP horn shall beep six

times every minute until the sash is lowered below the alarm limit

c. The sash alert alarm point shall be available to the BMS

d. The occupied/unoccupied mode for the fume hood sash alert setting shall be the same

as that being used by its associated lab space.

Setback Mode (Attended/Unattended)

a. The fume hood monitor shall continually monitor the occupied/unoccupied state of

the lab room as through device(s) defined under the Setback Mode of the VAV

General Lab Sequence of Operation.

Emergency Mode

a. The ODP shall provide an EMERGENCY PURGE pushbutton, which shall enable the

user to increase fume hood exhaust airflow to maximum for a designated period of

time. After the designated time has expired the fume hood exhaust shall automatically

reset to a lower (but elevated) level to prevent excessive demand on the exhaust

system. The emergency purge shall also be able to be cancelled at any time by

depressing the emergency purge button a second time. The ODP shall sound an

audible alarm device whenever the emergency purge mode of operation is activated.

The silence pushbutton on the ODP shall allow the user to silence the audible alarm

device, which shall then remain silent until either the emergency purge operational

mode is again activated, or an exhaust airflow alarm occurs.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 239010 - 69

b. The fume hood controller shall also be capable of an Emergency Mode based on input

from the BAS and shall operate the same as indicated by the manual command by the

ODP.

c. Emergency mode status shall be available to the BAS

Start-up Mode

a. During the start-up mode the controller will be fully functional, but the local audible

alarm will be disabled. This mode allows the controller to be started up without

nuisance alarms being sounded at hood.

Fail-safe Operation

a. Momentary or extended losses of power shall not change or affect any fume hood

controller setpoints or stored data. Upon resumption of power the fume hood

controller shall resume full normal operation exactly as before without any need for

manual intervention. Upon a power failure or operational failure within the fume hood

controller, the fume hood exhaust air terminal shall be automatically positioned to the

fully open (failsafe) position

D. Variable Air Volume Boxes for non laboratory spaces:

a. VAV boxes (VAV):

1) Occupied Cycle: On a fall in space temperature, a space temperature sensor,

through the VAV box controller, shall modulate the VAV box damper to

minimum cooling position. Upon reaching damper minimum position, and

on a continued fall in space temperature to the heating set point, the heating

coil shall energize and modulate to meet setpoint. On a rise in space

temperature, the reverse shall occur.

2) Unoccupied cycle: VAV box damper shall be indexed fully open and the

heating coil valve shall de-energized. When the rooftop air handler is

energized, the VAV box damper and heating coil shall operate to maintain

unoccupied space set point.

3) Warm-Up Cycle: VAV terminal box damper is fully open. The heating coil

is energized. When occupied space temperature is reached, VAV box is

returned to occupied cycle operation.

4) Cool-Down Cycle: VAV terminal box damper is fully open. The heating

coil is de-energized. When occupied space temperature is reached, VAV

box is returned to occupied cycle operation.

E. Roof Fans F-1,2

Fans shall normally be energized and shall be capable of being manually De-energized

for routine Maintenance. Isolation dampers shall be proven before fan starts.

The bypass damper on fans inlet plenum shall be set at minimum position to maintain the

specified airflow. The fan shall operate to maintain a minimum 3000 fpm discharge

velocity as measured by the exhaust system balancer. The value to maintain this velocity

shall be used by the fans variable frequency drive (VFD) to as the minimum fan speed.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 239010 - 70

The BAS/ATC system shall modulate the fan bypass damper to maintain the static

pressure within the exhaust duct system at the exhaust air static pressure sensor to 1” w.g.

(set point adjustable). When the inlet dampers are fully closed with the static pressure

below set point, the VFD shall ramp up the fan speed to maintain the static pressure set

point. If the static pressure in the duct rises more than 0.1” w.g. above set point

(adjustable) , the VFD shall ramp down the fan speed to set point. If fan reaches the

minimum VFD speed, the bypass dampers shall open to maintain set point.

Upon failure of the fan, an alarm shall be sent to the BAS/ATC operator interface and the

normally closed back-up system damper shall open and the normally open isolation

damper for fan shall close.

Upon failure of the bypass damper to open an alarm shall be sent to the BAS/ATC

operator interface.

F. Boilers B-1,2

Boilers shall normally be energized and controlled by boiler master control system upon

call for heating or cooling from BAS.

Associated pumps P-1,P-2 are duty, standby. BAS system shall alternate which pump is

operating. Operating pump shall modulate speed via VFD to maintain differential

pressure setpoint.

G. Electric Steam Boiler ESB-1

Boiler shall be operated by manual control and monitored by BAS system for unit status,

alarm, and steam pressure.

H. Ductless Split Systems

Monitor unit status and alarm.

4.2 POINTS LISTS

A. AIR HANDLER (RTAH-1)

Supply fan status

Supply fan discharge static pressure

Supply fan discharge airflow

Supply fan rpm or Hz

Cooling coil leaving air temperature

Heating coil leaving air temperature

Discharge supply air temperature

Outside air temperature

Outside air enthalpy

Return air temperature

Return air enthalpy


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 239010 - 71

Return fan inlet airflow

Return air damper position

Relief air damper position

Outside air damper position

Cooling coil valve position

Heating coil steam valve position

Cooling coil CHW supply temperature

Cooling coil CHW return temperature

Cooling coil chilled water flow

Duct static pressure

Filter differential pressure

B. VAV BOXES

Supply airflow

Percentage of design flow cooling

Percentage of design flow heating

Supply air temperature to zone

Zone space temperature

Reheat coil output modulation setting

C. LABORATORY AIR SYSTEMS

Fume hood average face velocity and high / low alarm

Fume hood open face area

Fume hood exhaust airflow and high / low alarm

Laboratory room supply minimum airflow limits and high / low alarm

Laboratory room supply maximum airflow limits and high / low alarm

Laboratory room general exhaust minimum airflow limits and high / low alarm

Laboratory room general exhaust maximum airflow limits and high / low alarm

Laboratory supply air temperature

Laboratory room ambient temperature and high / low alarm

Laboratory room humidity and high / low alarm

Laboratory room differential airflow

Laboratory room differential pressure and high / low alarm

Exhaust system static pressure and high / low alarm

Exhaust system fan status, damper position, and associated alarm parameters

Exhaust system stack velocity

Wind speed (mph) or and direction

D. VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 239010 - 72

VFD Start / Stop

Speed reference

Fault diagnostics

Meter points

Motor power in HP and kW

Motor kWH

Motor current

Motor voltage

Hours run

Feedback signal #1

Feedback signal #2

DC link voltage

Thermal load on motor

Thermal load on VFD

Heatsink temperature

Operating hours


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 239010 - 73


Testing, Adjusting and Balancing

Strada WVU Shroyer Hall Renovations of HVAC System

PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 239510 - 1

SECTION 239510 – TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING OF HVAC SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. The Work of this Section shall include the labor, materials, and equipment required for testing

and balancing the water systems and air distribution systems.

B. Contractor shall procure the services of an independent air balance and testing agency to be

approved by the Architect.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.

B. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau.

C. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.

D. TABB: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit documentation

that the TAB contractor and this Project's TAB team members meet the qualifications specified

in "Quality Assurance" Article.

B. Qualifications: The testing, adjusting, and balancing (TAB) agency shall submit a company

resume listing personnel and project experience in air and hydronic system balancing and a

copy of the agency's test and balance engineer (TBE) certificate.

C. Field reports indicating deficiencies in systems that would prevent proper testing, adjusting, and

balancing of systems and equipment to achieve specified performance.

D. Certified TAB reports, including instrument calibration reports, within thirty days after

substantial completion of the project. Test and balance reports shall include the following

documentation in addition to the documentation required in Part 3 - Execution:

1. Report table of contents.

2. Each individual final Reporting Form submitted must bear the signature of the person

who recorded the data and the signature of the testing and balancing supervisor of the

performing firm.

3. If more than one certified firm performs the TAB work, all final reports shall be

submitted by that certified firm having managerial responsibility.



PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 239510 - 2

4. Identification of all types of instruments used and their last dates of calibration shall be

submitted with the final report.

5. The final test report shall include appropriate reference to all problems regarding the

system(s) encountered prior to, during and after testing and what action taken to correct

the problem(s), including noise and vibration.

6. Prints (reduced in size) or sketches showing the following for easy reference to report

data:

a. Supply, return, and exhaust air outlet locations.

b. Air system(s) schematic(s) including terminal numbers and traverse locations.

c. Hydronic system(s) schematic(s) including flow station locations.

d. An approved copy of the balancing report shall be included in the Operating and

Maintenance Manual submittal.


A. TAB Contractor Qualifications: Engage a TAB entity certified by AABC, NEBB, or TABB.

1. TAB Field Supervisor: Employee of the TAB contractor and certified by AABC, NEBB

or TABB.

2. TAB Technician: Employee of the TAB contractor and who is certified by AABC,

NEBB or TABB as a TAB technician.

B. TAB Report Forms: Use standard TAB contractor's forms approved by Architect and

Commissioning Authority.

C. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, Accuracy, and Calibration: As described in ASHRAE 111,

Section 5, "Instrumentation."

1.5 PREPARATION AND COORDINATION

A. Shop drawings, submittal data, up-to-date revisions, change orders, and other data required for

planning, preparation, and execution of the TAB work shall be provided to the TAB agency no

later than 30 days prior to the start of TAB work.

B. System installation and equipment startup shall be complete prior to the TAB agency's being

notified to begin.

C. Provide seven days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates and times.

D. Perform TAB after leakage and pressure tests on air and water distribution systems have been

satisfactorily completed.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Heating, ventilating, and air conditioning equipment shall be completely installed and in

continuous operation as required to accomplish the test and balance work specified.



PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 239510 - 3

B. TAB shall be performed when outside conditions approximate design conditions indicated for

heating and cooling functions.

C. Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner may occupy completed areas of building before Substantial

Completion. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's

operations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSTRUMENTS

A. Instruments used for testing and balancing of systems shall have been calibrated within a period

of six months prior to balancing. Test and balance reports shall include a letter of certification

listing instrumentation used and last date of calibration.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 AIR SYSTEMS

A. Preliminary

1. Identify and list size, type, and manufacturer of all equipment to be tested, including air

terminals. Use manufacturers' ratings for all equipment to make required calculations

except where field tests show ratings to be impractical.

B. Air Handlers and Fans

1. Provide accessory components for motor drives, or replace complete drive package,

whenever factory furnished drives on mechanical equipment do not provide design air

flows.

2. Record equipment manufacturer, model and serial number.

3. Test and adjust fan RPM to design requirements.

4. Test and record motor voltage and running amperes including motor nameplate data, and

starter heater ratings.

5. Make pitot tube traverse of main supply, exhaust and return ducts, determine CFM at

fans, and adjust fans to design.

6. Test and record system static pressure, suction and discharge.

7. Test and adjust system for design outside air, CFM.

8. Test and adjust system for design recirculated air, CFM.

9. Test and record heating apparatus entering air temperatures, dry bulb.

10. Test and record cooling apparatus entering air temperatures, dry bulb and wet bulb.

11. Test and record heating apparatus leaving air temperatures, dry bulb.



PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 239510 - 4

12. Test and record cooling apparatus leaving air temperatures, dry bulb and wet bulb.

C. Distribution: Adjust zones or branch ducts to proper design CFM, supply and return.

D. Air terminals

1. Identify each air terminal from reports as to location and determine required flow

reading.

2. Test and adjust each air terminal to within 10 percent of design requirements.

3. Adjust flow patterns from air terminal units to minimize drafts to extent design and

equipment allows.

E. Verification

1. Prepare summation of readings of observed CFM for each system, compare with required

CFM, and verify that duct losses are within an acceptable range.

2. Verify design CFM at fans as described above.

3.2 HYDRONIC SYSTEMS

A. Preliminary

1. List all mechanical specifications of tested equipment and verify against contract

documents.

2. Open all line valves to full open position, close coil bypass stop valves then set mixing

control valve to full coil flow.

3. For each pump: Verify rotation, test and record pump shutoff head, and test and record

pump wide open head.

4. Verify proper water level in expansion tanks and in the system.

5. Verify that air vents in high points of water systems are installed and operating freely.

B. Central Equipment

1. Record equipment manufacturer, model and serial number.

2. Set chilled water and hot water pumps to proper flow quantity.

3. Adjust flow of chilled water through chiller to design value.

4. Adjust flow of hot water through boilers to design quantity.

5. Adjust steam pressure at boiler and record at each steam exchanger.

6. Observe leaving water temperatures and return water temperatures at chiller and boilers.

Reset to correct design temperatures.

7. Record pump operating suction and discharge pressures, determine final dynamic head.

C. Distribution

1. Balance flow of each hydronic coil.



PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 239510 - 5

D. Terminal Units

1. Upon completion of flow readings and adjustments at coil, mark all settings and record

inlet water and leaving water temperatures.

2. Observe pressure drop through coil at set flow rate on call for full cooling and for full

heating.

3. Set valve in bypass to match coil flow pressure drop on full bypass.

E. Verification

1. Record rated and actual running amperage for each pump motor.

2. Record total dynamic head for each pump.

3.3 BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM

A. In cooperation with the building automation system manufacturer's representative, set and adjust

automatically operated devices to achieve required sequence of operations. Refer to Section 23

90 10, Building Automation System.

B. Testing organization shall verify all controls for proper calibration, setpoints and proper

operation and list those controls requiring adjustment by building automation system installer.


Strada WVU Shroyer Hall Renovations Wiring of HVAC Equipment

PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 239610 - 1

SECTION 239610 – WIRING OF HVAC EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. The Work of this Section shall include the power and control wiring of HVAC equipment. It

shall not include control wiring specifically detailed as part of the automatic temperature control

system specified in Section 239010, Building Automation System.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. HVAC Contractor shall provide equipment with controls, starters and related items as specified

in various Sections of Division 23.

B. Where HVAC equipment is specified without starters or controllers, Electrical Contractor shall

provide same as specified herein.

C. Electrical Contractor shall provide all power wiring unless specifically noted otherwise.

D. HVAC Contractor shall furnish and install all control wiring unless specifically noted

otherwise.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Mechanical equipment shall be wired in accordance with the following schedule:

Key:



Item wired by.....


H = HVAC Contractor



O = Owner


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 239610 - 2

HVAC Equipment Wiring Schedule

Equipment


Rem

ote

Dis

con

nec

t S

wit

ch

Inte

gra

l D

isco

nnec

t S

wit

ch

Wal

l S

wit

ch

Co

rd &

Plu

g

Mag

net

ic M

oto

r S

tr

Co

mb

inat

ion

Moto

r S

tr

Man

ual

Mo

tor

Str

VF

D w

ith

Dis

con

nec

t

Co

nta

cto

r

L

ine

Volt

age

Sta

t

Lo

w V

olt

age

Sta

t

Aq

uas

tat

Du

ct S

mo

ke

Det

ecto

r

Co

ntr

ol

Pan

el

Flo

w/P

ress

/Lev

el S

wit

ch

BA

S/A

TC

Co

ntr

ol

DDC Circuits E

E

E

RTAH-1 H H H H

H H H H

E E E H

RTAH-1 UV Light H H H

H H H

E E H

CH-1 H H H H

H H H H

E E E H

B-1,2 H H H

H H H

E E H

CC-1 H E H

H E H

E E H


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 239610 - 3


Equipment


Rem

ote

Dis

con

nec

t S

wit

ch

Inte

gra

l D

isco

nnec

t S

wit

ch

Wal

l S

wit

ch

Co

rd &

Plu

g

Mag

net

ic M

oto

r S

tr

Co

mb

inat

ion

Moto

r S

tr

Man

ual

Mo

tor

Str

VF

D w

ith

Dis

con

nec

t

Co

nta

cto

r

L

ine

Volt

age

Sta

t

Lo

w V

olt

age

Sta

t

Aq

uas

tat

Du

ct S

mo

ke

Det

ecto

r

Co

ntr

ol

Pan

el

Flo

w/P

ress

/Lev

el S

wit

ch

BA

S/A

TC

Co

ntr

ol

EB-1 H H

H H

E H

P-1,2,3,4 H H H

H H H

E E H

GFS-1 H H H

H H H

E E H

F-1,2 H H H H

H H H H

E E E H

F-3,4,5,6,7,8,9 H H H

H H H

E E H

UH-1 H E H

H E H

E E H


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 239610 - 4


Equipment


Rem

ote

Dis

con

nec

t S

wit

ch

Inte

gra

l D

isco

nnec

t S

wit

ch

Wal

l S

wit

ch

Co

rd &

Plu

g

Mag

net

ic M

oto

r S

tr

Co

mb

inat

ion

Moto

r S

tr

Man

ual

Mo

tor

Str

VF

D w

ith

Dis

con

nec

t

Co

nta

cto

r

L

ine

Volt

age

Sta

t

Lo

w V

olt

age

Sta

t

Aq

uas

tat

Du

ct S

mo

ke

Det

ecto

r

Co

ntr

ol

Pan

el

Flo

w/P

ress

/Lev

el S

wit

ch

BA

S/A

TC

Co

ntr

ol

CUH-1-12 H H

H H

E H

ESB-1 (including all

accessories) H H H H

H H H H

E E E H



C. Electrical Contractor shall furnish and install wiring from duct smoke detector to fire alarm

panel. Mechanical Contractor shall furnish and install wiring from normally open auxiliary

contact on duct smoke detector to control circuitry for shut down of equipment if duct smoke

detector is activated.


Project Name

Location

BA

HVAC ALTERNATES 23 99 99 - 1

SECTION 23 99 99 – HVAC ALTERNATES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. This Section identifies each Alternate by number and describes the basic changes to be

incorporated into the Work of this Project, only when that Alternate is made a part of the Work

by specific provisions in the Agreement.

B. Portions of the Specifications noted above stipulate pertinent requirements for products and

methods to achieve the Work required for each Alternate.

C. Coordinate pertinent related work and modify surrounding work to properly integrate the Work

of each Alternate, and to provide the complete construction required by Contract Documents.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Materials and equipment not specified in other Sections of the Specifications, but required for

alternate work, are specified herein. All materials and equipment specified herein shall be

submitted for approval in accordance with specified submittal procedures, prior to installation.

1.3 ALTERNATE 1

A. Bidder shall submit the amount to be added to the Base Bid to furnish and install CUHs-

1,3,6,9,12,13,14,15 and associated piping and appurtenances as shown on drawings H2-01, H2-

02, H2-03, and H2-04.

1.4 ALTERNATE 4

A. Bidder shall submit the amount to be added to the Base Bid to furnish and install insulation on

round supply ductwork exposed in conditioned spaces as specified in section 23 07 10.

1.5 ALTERNATE 5

A. Bidder shall submit the amount to be added to the Base Bid to furnish and install lab exhaust

fans F-1,2 as identified for alternate 5 on drawing H6.02.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

(NOT USED)

Project Name

Location

BA

HVAC ALTERNATES 23 99 99 - 2

PART 3 - EXECUTION

(NOT USED)

END OF SECTION 23 99 99

Strada WVU Shroyer Hall Renovations Electrical Field Quality Control

PD 10.13.16 Project No.: 15099 260025 - 1

SECTION 260025 – ELECTRICAL FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. The Work of this Section shall consist of the labor, material, and equipment required for testing

the electrical equipment and systems.

1.2 ELECTRICAL ACCEPTANCE TESTING

A. Testing shall be performed on electrical equipment and systems to assure that equipment and

systems are operational and within applicable standards and manufacturer’s tolerances. Testing

should verify that equipment and systems are installed in accordance with design specifications.

B. Testing shall be performed by an independent organization that is professionally independent of

the manufacturers, suppliers, and installers of the equipment or systems being evaluated, which

the name of the proposed testing organization shall be submitted to the Owner for approval.

C. Qualified technicians who are trained and regularly employed for testing services shall do all

testing.

D. The testing organization will conform to the general guidelines in their entirety as of the latest

version of NETA Acceptance Testing Specifications. This includes the following:

1. Safety and Precautions

2. Suitability of Test Equipment

3. Test Instrument Calibration

4. Test Report

E. Three copies of each completed report will be furnished to the Owner.

F. The Owner shall be notified in advance of testing. A representative of the Owner shall witness

testing.

G. Inspection and testing of all applicable electrical equipment listed below shall be done in

accordance with the latest version of NETA Acceptance Testing Specifications. This will

include all tests of the following items:

1. Switchgear and Switchboard Assemblies

2. Low Voltage Circuit Breakers, to include all types, 100 amp frame and above

3. Protective Relays

4. Instrument Transformers

5. Metering Systems


PD 10.13.16 Project No.: 15099 260025 - 2

6. Grounding Systems

7. Ground Fault Protection Systems

8. Motor Starters; All types

9. Variable Speed Drives

10. Surge Protection Devices

1.3 SYSTEMS FUNCTION TESTS

A. Perform system function tests upon completion of the equipment tests as previously outlined. It

is the purpose of the system function tests to prove the correct interaction of all sensing,

process, and action devices.

B. Verify the correct operation of all safety devices for fail-safe functions in addition to design

function.

C. Verify the correct operation of all sensing devices, alarms, and indicating devices.

1.4 THERMOGRAPHIC SURVEY

A. A thermographic survey should be performed on all current carrying devices. The survey

should be performed during periods of maximum possible loading and prior to expiration of the

one year warranty period.

B. Imaging equipment shall be capable of detecting a minimum of 1-degree Celsius at 30 degrees

Celsius.

C. A level 2 certified thermographer should perform the survey.

D. A report shall be submitted to the Owner which includes the following:

1. Description of equipment tested

2. Discrepancies

3. Temperature difference between area of concern and reference area

4. Areas inspected

5. Load conditions at time of inspection

6. Provide photographs and/or thermograms of deficient areas

7. Summary which includes listing of deficient areas and corrective action taken by

contractor.

1.5 FIRE ALARM TESTING

A. All connected fire alarm devices furnished and installed under this contract shall be tested for

operation, proper programming, and verified to meet proper sequence of operation. Printout of

test showing test of all these devices and interconnected systems shall be provided. Test is to


PD 10.13.16 Project No.: 15099 260025 - 3

include all detectors, pull stations, duct smoke detectors, associated fan shutdown, any fire

alarm sub-system interconnection, etc. Final fire alarm testing is to be completed in the

presence of a representative from the Owner with sufficient prior notification.

B. System shall be tested for code compliant alarm audibility upon completion of construction.

C. Completed and accurate As-Built floor plans shall be used for final testing and copies of these

drawings shall be turned over to Owner immediately after testing. These plans shall include full

floor plans showing all fire alarm devices furnished and installed under this contract with

address and/or loop ID information. Also, a copy of the fire alarm system (as applicable)

program shall be turned over to Owner at this time.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

(NOT USED)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

(NOT USED)


Strada WVU Shroyer Hall Renovations Basic Materials

PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 260505 - 1

SECTION 260505 – BASIC MATERIALS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. The Work of this Section shall consist of the labor, material and equipment required for

furnishing and installing basic materials associated with electrical systems. The specific

application of these materials shall be as outlined in this Section and subsequent Sections of this

Specification, or as indicated on Drawings.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


1. Access Panels

2. Nameplates; Itemized Listings

3. Fire Stop Sealing Systems

4. Danger/Warning Labels

B. Submit test reports specified herein.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Hangers and supports shall be suitable for intended purpose and, where shown on Drawings,

where detailed, or as noted, shall be of the type indicated.

B. Hangers and supports shall be galvanized finish, or otherwise protected against corrosion,

unless noted otherwise.

C. All fasteners, mounting hardware and materials for supporting electrical items on the exterior

and in process buildings and areas shall be type 316 stainless steel.

D. All conduit supports for PVC coated rigid metal conduit shall be PVC coated.

2.2 ACCESS PANELS


1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Milcor Style DW, or Karp, Krueger, Boico, Acudor.



PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 260505 - 2





1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Milcor, or Karp, Acudor.




masonry anchors.

5. Closing Feature: Self-latching lock, direct action knurled knob, interior latch release

mechanism, or self-latching lock, flush key-operated cylinder lock with two keys, interior

release mechanism as directed by Owner.

6. Rating: UL listed 1/2 hour (B-label), temperature rise 30 minutes, 250 degrees F.

maximum.


1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Milcor Style M, or Karp, Krueger, Boico, Acudor.




4. Closing Feature: Flush screwdriver operated lock with steel cam or cylinder lock with

two keys as directed by Owner.

2.3 EQUIPMENT BACKBOARDS

A. Plywood

1. Material: 3/4 inch fire resistive plywood, with beveled edges and square cut corners.

Plywood shall be type A/C or better with “C” side towards wall.

2. Backboards shall be sized as required for mounting of electrical equipment at specific

locations. Anchor backboards securely to building structure.

3. Plywood shall have two coats of white fire retardant paint, both sides.

4. Where used for telecommunications, shall have ‘D’ rings, spools, etc., as required for

installing wiring neat and orderly.

2.4 SLEEVES

A. Construction: Sleeves shall be constructed of standard weight, galvanized steel pipe, square cut

ends with anchoring lugs welded to outside surface of pipe.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 260505 - 3

B. Size: Internal diameter of sleeve shall be 2 inch (minimum) larger than outside diameter of

conduit or EMT.

2.5 NAMEPLATES



B. Nameplate and lettering suitably sized for their locations, but not less than 1/4 inch high letters.

2.6 FIRE STOP SEALING SYSTEMS

A. Fire Stop Sealing System Specification No. 1

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Nelson Firestop Products CLK Silicone Sealant, or 3M Fire


2. Application: Sealing for floor, wall and ceiling conduit and cable penetrations through

fire-rated assemblies.

3. Materials: Single component, ready-to-use, water-resistant, flexible elastomeric silicone

sealant. Non-sag/gunnable grade for penetrations in vertical surfaces, self-leveling grade

for floor applications.

4. Compliance: Fire endurance tested per ASTM E-814 (UL 1479). In addition to

compliance as a fire stop, the sealing system shall prevent the spread of smoke or water.

B. Fire Stop Sealing System Specification No. 2

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: RectorSeal Metacaulk “Putty Sticks”, or Specified

Technologies (STI).

2. Application: Sealing for floor, wall and ceiling conduit and cable penetrations through

fire-rated assemblies.



C. Fire Stop Sealing System Specification No. 3

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: RectorSeal Metacaulk “Putty Pads”, “Box Guards”, “Covering

Guards”.

2. Application: Sealing for electrical cabinets, junction and pull boxes, and outlet boxes

installed in fire-rated assemblies.




PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 260505 - 4

2.7 DANGER/WARNING LABELS

A. Labels, as specified herein, need not be furnished and installed if the item of electrical

equipment specified to receive the label is furnished with a label, with similar wording as

specified herein, by the manufacturer.

B. Warning Labels For Electrical Equipment That Cannot Be De-energized:

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Clarion Safety, custom labels, or as approved.

2. Material: Premium polyester with clear over-laminate, self-adhering.

3. Size: Minimum 4 inches wide by 2 inches high.

4. Shall be placed on electrical equipment that cannot be de-energized for examination,

adjustment, servicing, repairing, maintaining, modifying, installing components within,

etc.

5. Minimum arc flash warning label requirements:

6. Where arc-flash reduction technologies are utilized on service entrance equipment, two

labels shall be provided. An orange label shall contain standard operating information, a

blue label shall contain information applicable when maintenance mode is activated.

2.8 WIRE AND CABLE TESTING AND CERTIFICATION

A. Safety and Application

1. All wire and cable shall be safety and application tested for its environment and use and

shall have the Listed Mark and associated identifiers affixed to the cable outer insulation

or, for multi-conductor jacketed cable, affixed to the outer jacket.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 260505 - 5

B. Performance

1. Where specified, wire and cable shall be included in a verification program, be

performance tested to the industry and association standards specified herein and shall

bear a “verified” mark affixed to the outer insulation or, for multi-conductor jacketed

cable, affixed to the outer jacket.

C. Manufacturer’s Information

1. Where specified, wire and cable shall have the Manufacturer’s name, month and year in

which cable was manufactured and manufacturer’s job number affixed to the outer

insulation or, for multi-conductor jacketed cable, affixed to the outer jacket.

D. All testing shall be performed by an independent testing agency.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General

1. Install products in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Hangers and Supports

1. Furnish and install suitable hangers and supports for materials and equipment to provide

rigid installation. Electrical equipment shall be installed utilizing wood screws on wood,

machine screws or lag bolts on masonry or concrete walls and ceilings. Nails will not be

permitted.

2. Spring steel clips and clamps will be permitted for hanging conduit 3/4 inch or smaller,

above accessible ceilings.

3. Perforated strap hangers will not be permitted. Tie wires will not be permitted.

4. All aluminum components in contact with concrete shall be coated with two coats of zinc

chromate primer or bituminous paint to prevent a reaction between the aluminum and the

concrete.

C. Access Panels

1. Furnish and install access panels, size as required, but not smaller than 12 inch by 16 inch

for access to concealed pull boxes, junction boxes, or similar items where no other means

of access is provided.



PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 260505 - 6



Gypsum board (dry wall) finished 2

Fire rated walls and ceilings 3

Masonry, tile, or wood finished 4

D. Equipment Backboards

1. Furnish and install backboards so that equipment will be uniformly arranged on

backboard, and connected with wireways and wiretroughs to provide a complete

installation.

2. Backboards requiring support shall have 2 inch by 2 inch by 1/4 inch minimum steel

angles, welded or bolted.

E. Sleeves

1. Furnish and install for EMT and conduit passing through floors, walls, partitions, slabs,


2. Layout, size and locate sleeves such that they will be set and installed prior to pouring

concrete, or when masonry is being constructed. In the event sleeves must be placed after

floor, wall, grade beam, etc., has been constructed, submit in writing and obtain approval

on location, quantity and proposed method of core drilling and installing.

3. Core drilled openings above grade in solid concrete need not be sleeved but openings

shall be clean and neat without cracking or spalling.

4. Sleeves shall be standard weight galvanized steel pipe having square cut ends with

anchoring lugs welded on. Horizontal sleeves through walls, grade beams, foundations,

and partitions shall be flush with finished wall faces. Vertical sleeves through floors shall

extend 2 inches above finished floor and be flush with finished ceiling or underside of

floor construction.

5. Size sleeves such that internal diameter is a minimum of 2 inches larger than OD of

conduit. Center conduit in sleeves.

6. For conduit passing through floors, slabs, walls, grade beams, or foundations at or below

grade and in pits, the sleeves shall be painted or coated with one coat of coal tar pitch

paint and the annular space between outside of conduit and inside of sleeve shall be

packed with a pliable non-hardening waterproof mastic sealer or a cement base quick-set

repair mortar.

7. For conduit passing through walls and floor above grade and with no fire or smoke rating,

the annular space between outside of conduit and inside of sleeve or concrete shall be

packed tight with batt type fiberglass insulation.

8. For conduit passing through walls and floors above grade with smoke or fire rating of one

hour or more, the annular space between outside of conduit and inside of sleeve or


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 260505 - 7

concrete shall be sealed with fire stop sealing system. Refer to Architectural Drawings

for locations of fire rated walls in the building.

F. Nameplates

1. Furnish and install a full complement of nameplates for all items of electrical equipment

installed as Work of this Division, including motor starters, disconnects, panelboards,

individual circuit breakers, and breakers on distribution panelboards and secondary

switchboards.



Epoxy cement shall not be used equipment installed outdoors.



G. Fire Stop Sealing System


shall be sealed. Refer to architectural drawings for locations of fire rated floor and walls.

2. Outlet boxes, on opposite sides of a fire rated wall and separated by a distance less than

24 inches, shall have fire stop sealants installed, unless the outlet box has been tested and

listed for use in the fire rated assembly.




similar phrase.





H. Danger/Warning Labels

1. Danger/warning labels shall be installed on all electrical equipment – switchboards,

panelboards and control panels furnished and installed under this contract. The labels

shall be located on the exterior of all switchboards and control panels and on the exterior

of panelboards located in other than finished spaces, one label on each section of the

switchboard and motor control center. For panelboards in finished spaces, the label shall

be located inside the panel door, either on the panel front or on the backside of the panel

door.

3.2 TESTS

A. After installation of wiring and apparatus has been completed, electrical conductors shall be

tested to insure continuity, proper splicing, freedom from ground (except “made ground” and

those required for protection), and insulation resistance in accordance with Underwriters

Laboratories requirements. Furnish and employ necessary instruments such as ammeters, volt

meters, meggers, etc. Preliminary testing with magnetos will be permitted, but will not be


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 260505 - 8

acceptable as final or conclusive test. Submit to Owner three copies of final insulation

resistance tests for all feeders rated 100 amps and above.

B. Equipment and wiring systems not indicated as requiring specific tests shall be tested in actual

operation to determine that design functions are obtained and that the required features are

provided.

C. Contractor shall perform all visual, physical, mechanical, etc. inspections on items and

equipment as directed by manufactures. Where specifications indicate a “prior-to-start-up” or a

specific type of test or tests to be performed, testing shall be performed by an independent

testing agency or firm. All testing on electrical equipment or items shall be performed in

accordance with the procedures of the National Electrical Testing Association. Costs for all

testing shall be the responsibility of the Contractor and shall be included in the bid.

D. All test equipment requiring calibration shall be calibrated based on manufacturer’s

recommendations, shall have been calibrated within the manufacturer’s recommended time

period, calibration shall be current and there shall be a label on the instrument indicating the

most recent calibration date and the name of the firm performing the calibration. Type of

instrument used and most recent calibration date shall appear on all submitted test reports.

E. All submitted test results shall have included a summary of the results of the tests and, where

applicable, recommendations for corrective or remedial actions to be taken if the tests results

indicate a failed or borderline condition.

F. Testing shall be scheduled such that the equipment shall be energized immediately after

successful completion of the testing.

G. All equipment or items interconnected or dependent upon other items for operation shall be

tested simultaneously to verify and ensure proper operations and functions.

H. Items, equipment, systems, etc., tested (other than existing items) that result in a failure or

borderline condition shall be corrected by the contractor and re-tested until test results are

satisfactory at no additional costs to the owner.

I. Consult with Engineer prior to testing and adjusting to determine intended function of

equipment, wiring and systems. Perform such tests and make necessary adjustments to ensure

that design function is obtained.

J. Where specific tests are specified herein to be performed on equipment or materials, tests shall

be recorded and three copies submitted to Engineer. Test records shall properly identify

equipment, or system, and indicate test date.


Strada WVU Shroyer Hall Renovations Wire And Cable, 600 Volts and Below

PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 260520 - 1

SECTION 260520 – WIRE AND CABLE, 600 VOLTS AND BELOW

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED


furnishing and installing wire and cable, 600 volts and below. The specific application of these

materials shall be as outlined in this Section and subsequent Sections of this Specification, or as


1.2 SUBMITTALS


1. Wire and Cable

2. Connectors

3. Wire Markers

4. Tape

1.3 CABLE TESTING

A. Wire and cable shall be safety and application tested and shall have this information and the

Manufacturer’s information affixed to the wire and cable as specified in Section 26 05 05, Basic

Materials.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WIRE AND CABLE

A. Acceptable manufacturers of wire and cable shall be as follows: Aetna, Okonite, South Wire,

General Cable, Belden, Amer-Cable, American (AIW), Pyrotenax, Pirelli, Berk-Tek, Kerite.

B. All wire and cable shall conform to the following:

1. Copper shall not be less than 98 percent conductivity.

2. Single conductor, unless otherwise indicated.

3. Color coded.

4. Marked with classification type, conductor size, and voltage rating, every foot, where

applicable.

5. Minimum Size: #12 AWG, unless otherwise specified.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 260520 - 2

6. Sizes #8 AWG and larger shall be stranded, sizes #10 AWG and smaller for power and

lighting circuits shall be solid conductor, unless otherwise specified.

7. UL listed.

8. Minimum size in flexible metal conduit for final connection to recessed lighting fixtures

shall be #14 AWG.

9. Wire and cable shall be manufactured no more than one year prior to installation.

10. Unless noted, insulation for wire and cable used on voltage systems 600 volts and below

shall be rated 600 volts.

11. Minimum size for control wiring shall be #14 AWG, except 24 volt and below. All

control wiring shall be stranded.

C. Aluminum conductors will not be permitted on this Project.

2.2 WIRE

A. Wire Specification No. 1

1. Type THW insulation, UL listed.

2. 600 volt insulation.

3. Ampacity based upon maximum conductor temperature of 75 degrees C. in wet or dry

locations, continuous operation.

4. Conform to ASTM B3 for solid conductors and ASTM B8 for stranded conductor.

5. Annealed, uncoated copper conductor.

6. Flame retardant, moisture and heat resistant thermoplastic (PVC) insulation.

B. Wire Specification No. 3

1. Type XHHW insulation, UL listed.


3. Ampacity based upon maximum conductor temperature of 75 degrees C. dry locations

and 75 degrees C. wet locations, continuous operation.

4. Moisture and heat resistant cross linked polyethylene (XLP) insulation.

5. Conform to applicable NEMA and IPCEA requirements.

6. Conform to ASTM B3 for solid conductors and ASTM B8 for stranded conductors.

7. Soft copper conductor.

C. Wire Specification No. 4

1. Type THHN/THWN insulation, UL listed.


3. Ampacity based upon maximum conductor temperature of 75 degrees C. dry and wet

locations, continuous operation.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 260520 - 3

4. Flame retardant, moisture and heat resistant thermoplastic (PVC) insulation with nylon

jacket.

5. Conform to applicable NEMA and IPCEA requirements.


7. Soft copper conductor.

D. Wire Specification No. 7

1. Type MC metal clad cable, UL listed.

2. Enclosure of either covering of interlocking metal tape or an impervious, close fitting,

corrugated tube, galvanized steel.

3. Internal copper grounding wire.

4. Cross linked polyethylene (XLP) insulation or individual conductors, type XHHW.

5. Two, three or four soft copper conductors, as required.



8. Ampacity based upon maximum conductor temperature of 75 degrees C., continuous

operation.

9. For wet locations, provide the following:

a. Metallic covering impervious to moisture.

b. Lead sheath or moisture impervious jacket under the metal covering.

c. Insulated conductors under the metallic covering are acceptable for use in wet

locations.

E. Wire Specification No. 8

1. Solid copper conductor.

2. PVC or rubber insulation.

3. Nylon, PVC, rubber or neoprene jacket.

4. Minimum Size: #18 AWG.

5. Number of conductors as required.

6. 600 volts, UL listed.

2.3 CONNECTORS

A. Connector Specification No. 1

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Buchanan B-cap, or Ideal Wing-nut, 3M Scotchlok.

2. Type: Splice connectors.

3. For insulated wire, 600 volt and under, #8 AWG and smaller.

4. Compression solderless connector.

5. Insulated or non-insulated.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 260520 - 4

6. UL listed.

B. Connector Specification No. 2

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Anderson, or Thomas & Betts, Penn-Union, Dossert, Burndy,

Reliable Electric, Ideal.


3. For insulated wire, 600 volts and under, #6 AWG and larger.

4. Split bolt pressure connector.

5. Bronze.

6. UL listed.

C. Connector Specification No. 3

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Anderson, or Thomas & Betts, Dossert, Burndy, MAC, 3M,

Ideal.


3. For insulated wire, 600 volts and under, #6 AWG and larger.

4. Compression or crimp connector, short sleeve.

5. Copper.

6. UL listed.

D. Connector Specification No. 4

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Anderson, or Thomas & Betts, Penn-Union, Dossert, Burndy,

MAC, 3M, Ideal.

2. Type: Lug connector.

3. For insulated wire, 600 volt and under, #8 AWG and larger.

4. Compression or crimp connector, short sleeve.

5. Copper.

6. UL listed.

E. Connector Specification No. 5

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Penn-Union, or Thomas & Betts, Anderson, Dossert, Burndy,

Ideal.


3. For insulated wire, 600 volt and under, #8 AWG and larger.

4. Bolted type pressure connection, hex head or hex socket pressure bolts.

5. Copper.

6. UL listed.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 260520 - 5

F. Connector Specification No. 6

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Penn-Union Penn Crimp, or Ideal Crimp Terminal, Thomas &

Betts Sta-Kon, Burndy Insulug, MAC MiniDent, 3M Scotchlok Terminals.


3. For insulated wire, 600 volt and under, #10 AWG and smaller.

4. Compression or crimp type.

5. Standard barrel, insulated for 600 volts.

6. Ring terminal or flanged or flared block spade terminal.

7. Copper.

8. UL listed.

2.4 WIRE MARKERS

A. Wire Marker Specification No. 2

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Thomas & Betts E-Z-Code, Type WSL, or W.H. Brady Co.

Type CAB.

2. Vinyl plastic or vinyl polyester.

3. Temperature Range: to 250 degrees F.

4. Self-sticking adhesive backing.

5. Waterproof, solvent proof.

6. Printing permanently protected.

2.5 TAPE

A. Tape Specification No. 1

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: 3M Scotch 33+, or Tomic, Okonite.

2. Type: Tape for insulation 600 volts or less.

3. Vinyl plastic all weather electrical tape.

B. Tape Specification No. 2

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Harris Industries, Griffolyn, Inc., Stanco, Inc.

2. Type: Detectable underground marker and warning tape, fully detectable using above

grade induction conduction type locaters. Consist of either aluminum foil or stainless

steel tracer wires laminated between multiple layers of polyethylene tape, overall

thickness 4.5 to 6 mils.

3. Material: Plastic, 6 inches wide, black lettering. Lettering shall be abrasion resistant,

subsurface to be protected from being scraped off and protected from underground

moisture, acids, alkalis and other soil substances.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 260520 - 6

4. Color: Red for underground electrical lines and orange for underground

telecommunications, alarm and signal lines in accordance with the American Public

Works Association Uniform Color Code.

5. Marking: Either “CAUTION - BURIED ELECTRIC LINE BELOW”, or “CAUTION -

BURIED TELECOMMUNICATIONS LINE BELOW” or similar wording as applicable.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Unless noted, products and material specified in this Section shall be installed in accordance

with the following schedule(s).

WIRE SCHEDULE - BUILDING WIRE

Application Wire Spec. No.

Install in raceways, 600 volt and below:

Feeders 1, 3 or 4

Branch circuit wiring 1, 3 or 4

WIRE SCHEDULE - CONTROL

Application Wire Spec. No.

Control wiring 1, 3 or 4

Control wiring, 24 volts and below 8

Control wiring in enclosures 1, 3 or 4

CONNECTOR SCHEDULE

Application Connector Spec. No.

Splice Connectors:

#8 AWG and smaller 1

#6 AWG and larger 2 or 3

Lug Connectors:

Connection to motor leads 4 or 6

Stranded wire connection under head of binding

screw or bolt

4 or 6

Connection to equipment bus, or screw or bolt 4, 5, 6


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 260520 - 7

CONNECTOR SCHEDULE

Application Connector Spec. No.

terminals or manufacturer supplied lugs

Note: All connectors are for use only on 600 volt or less insulated wire.

WIRE MARKER SCHEDULE

Application Wire Marker Spec. No.

All applications 2

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General

1. Shared neutral conductors for branch circuits will not be permitted. All branch circuit

phase conductors shall be paired with a dedicated neutral conductor along their entire

length.

2. Wiring shall be installed in raceways unless otherwise noted. Direct burial cable shall not

be used, unless noted.

3. Exterior of wires shall be color coded where applicable, color coding of wires shall

conform to the National Electrical Code.

a. Color coding shall clearly indicate the difference between:

1) Phase wires of different voltage systems.

2) Neutral and phase wires of each voltage system.

3) The grounding system wire.

b. All equipment grounding conductors shall be green in color. All isolated ground

conductors shall be green in color with an over-layed black or yellow stripe.

c. In sizes and insulation types where factory applied colors are not available, colored

plastic tape in overlapping turns shall be applied at all terminal points and in all

points of splicing. Tape shall be applied at minimum intervals of 6 inches along the

wire and cables.

d. Wire color coding for all voltage systems shall conform to Owner’s color coding

system if Owner has a color coding system, verify with Owner.

e. If Owner does not have a wire color coding system or unless required otherwise by

local code authorities, the following color coding scheme shall be used for 120/208

volt system:

120/208 Volt system

Phase A - Black

Phase B - Red

Phase C - Blue

Neutral - Natural Grey or White

4. Pull wire into conduit so that insulation will not be damaged. Approved pulling

compound shall be used to assist in pulling of 600 volt wire into conduit. Oil or grease


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 260520 - 8

will not be permitted. Pulling compound shall be compatible with wire insulation and

conduit. Do not exceed manufacturer’s recommended maximum pulling tensions.

5. Conductors shall be installed continuous from outlet to outlet, without splicing except

within outlet or junction boxes.

6. Noninsulated splices in insulated wire, 600 volts and under shall be factory insulated as

follows:

a. Rubber and friction tape coated with Scotchkote or similar coating.

b. Scotchfil or equivalent electrical putty with Tape Specification No. 1.

c. Insulation of splices shall provide same insulation qualities as insulation of wire

being spliced.

7. Lugs on motor leads shall be fastened with brass machine bolts, lock washers, and nuts.

8. Stranded wire shall not be placed under the head of a binding screw or bolt. Refer to Part

2 - Products, this Section, for connectors to be used in stranded wire connections under

head of binding screw or bolt.

9. Wire shall be identified by use of wire markers at termination points, including outlet

boxes, pull boxes, junction boxes, wireways and at locations where wire changes

direction within an enclosure.

10. Provide minimum of 6 inches of conductors extended from opening of each outlet box.

11. Wiring in finished area shall be concealed. Wiring serving switch legs, receptacles, and

lighting fixtures on concrete masonry unit type walls in areas such as boiler rooms and

equipment rooms shall be concealed.

12. Circuiting shall be as indicated on Drawings.

13. Feeder Identification:

a. Identify feeders using a two-segment conductor numbering scheme which defines

the origin of the conductor and the destination of the conductor. Example: DSA-

PA where DSA is the origin, and PA is the destination.

b. For conductors with one point of origin and two or more destinations, expand the

destination identification number, e.g., PA, PB, etc.

c. Make the origin and destination identification the specific names for the equipment

used in the Contract Documents. A feeder shall be as defined in the National

Electrical Code.

14. Conduit and wiring indicated on Drawings are diagrammatic. Exact routing of conduit

and placement of boxes for wiring shall be governed by jobsite conditions.

15. Tighten all screws and terminal bolts using torque wrenches and/or drivers to tighten to

the manufacturer, U.L. or code required inch-pound requirements. Re-check tightness of

all connections prior to energizing.

16. Terminals, connectors, etc., shall be of an acceptable type for the materials used.

17. Cap all spare conductors with U.L. Listed end caps.

18. Only one conductor shall be installed per terminal or lug, unless terminal or lugs are U.L.

Rated for more than one conductor.

19. Exact location, material of construction and thickness of all walls to be chased or cut for

installation of wiring shall be verified with General Contractor and Architect before

Work is begun.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 260520 - 9

20. Underground direct burial cable runs shall have marker or warning tape installed above

cable, 12 inches below finish grade. Tape shall be Tape Specification No. 2.

21. All wiring connections made at or below grade shall be waterproof with UL listed

waterproof connectors.

B. Wire Specification Nos. 7 and 13 (MC Cable)

1. MC cable may be fished in the voids of existing masonry walls for wiring to wiring

devices in lieu of cutting, patching and refinishing. MC cable may be used between the

lighting fixture and junction box in lengths that do not exceed 6 feet. Wiring directly

from recessed lay-in light fixture-to-recessed lay-in light fixture is not permitted, each

recessed lay-in light fixture shall be wired from a junction box.


Strada WVU Shroyer Hall Renovations Raceway and Fittings

PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 260530 - 1

SECTION 260530 – RACEWAY AND FITTINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. The Work of this Section shall consist of the labor, material and equipment required for the

furnishing and installing of raceways and fittings. The specific application of these materials

shall be outlined in this Section and subsequent Sections of this Specification, or as indicated on

the Drawings.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


1. Raceways and Fittings

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RACEWAY AND FITTINGS

A. Acceptable manufacturers of raceway and fittings shall be as follows:

1. Rigid Metal Conduit (RMC):

a. Allied Tube & Conduit

b. Wheatland Tube

c. Copperweld

d. Western Tube

2. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT):

a. Allied Tube & Conduit

b. Wheatland Tube

c. Copperweld

d. Western Tube

3. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) - Schedule 40:

a. Carlon

b. Scepter/Canron

c. Allied Tube & Conduit

4. Flexible Metal Conduit:

a. American Flex Conduit

b. Alflex

c. International Metal Hose

d. Electri-Flex

5. Liquid Tight Flexible Metal Conduit

a. Anaconda Type UA


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 260530 - 2

b. Electri-Flex Type LA

c. Flexi-Guard

2.2 RACEWAY SPECIFICATION NO. 1

A. Type: Rigid metal conduit (RMC).

B. Mild steel piping, galvanized inside and outside, thoroughly welded seams, circular in cross

section, uniform wall thickness.

C. Ten foot lengths, reamed and threaded at each end, with coupling on one end and protector on

opposite end.

D. Minimum Size: 3/4 inch

E. UL Listed.

F. Threads galvanized after cutting.

G. ANSI C80.1.

H. Conduit Couplings

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Thomas & Betts, Erickson, or Allied Kwik-Couple.

2. Malleable iron.

3. Galvanized.

I. Bushings

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Appleton, or Raco, Steel City, Efcor, OZ, Thomas & Betts.

2. Malleable iron.

3. Insulated throat.

4. Ground lug, where required.

5. Screw-on.

J. Expansion Joints

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: OZ Type EX with BJ bonding jumper, or Appleton.

2. Sleeve with fittings to provide for telescoping of conduits into sleeve; 8 inch movement.

3. Galvanized or cadmium finish.

4. Bonding jumper: Copper.

K. Conduit Bodies

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Appleton Unilets, or Crouse Hinds, Pyle National, Killark,

OZ, Efcor, Adalet, Neer.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 260530 - 3

2. Malleable iron or copper-free aluminum.

3. Heavy, threaded hubs.

4. Malleable iron bodies shall be finished with zinc or cadmium, both inside and outside,

after all machine work is finished.

5. Screw-on type covers.

6. Neoprene gaskets and stainless steel screws required for damp or wet locations.

L. Conduit Thru-Wall Seal

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: OZ Type WSK.

2. Consist of oversize sleeve and sealing assembly.

3. Sealing ring between the body and oversize sleeve.

4. Galvanized finish.

M. End Bells

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: OZ Type TNS.

2. Malleable iron.

3. Provide smooth rounded pulling surface.

4. Galvanized finish.

N. Conduit Seals

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Appleton Sealing Unilets, FO or F, Fiber Filler, Apello Sealing

Cement, or Crouse Hinds, Pyle National, Killark, Adalet.

2. Malleable iron or copper-free aluminum.

3. For sealing horizontal or vertical runs, as required.

4. Drain fittings, where installed in vertical conduit runs between different temperature

zones.

5. Hazardous area classification, as required.

6. Fiber filler and sealing cement.

O. Myers Hubs

1. Stainless Steel, Type 316

2. Grounding

3. Stainless Steel Ground Nut

4. “Vitron (75)” O-Ring


A. Type: Electrical metallic tubing (EMT).


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 260530 - 4

B. High grade mild steel, thoroughly welded seams, circular in cross section, and uniform wall

thickness.

C. Electro-galvanized coating on exterior and enameled or galvanized on interior.

D. Ten foot lengths; 3/4 inch minimum size.

E. UL listed.

F. Fire alarm wiring to be installed in conduits shall be installed in “Fire Alarm EMT”, red

galvanized topcoat and “E-Z” pull interior finish. (Allied tube and conduit, or as approved.)

G. Couplings and Connectors (Set Screw)

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Appleton, or Efcor, Raco, OZ, Crouse Hinds, Thomas & Betts,

Steel City, or Allied Kwik-Fit.

2. Set screw type, steel, U.L. listed for grounding. Die cast will not be accepted.

3. Concrete tight.

4. Box connectors shall have insulated throat.

H. Other Fittings: Same as Raceway Specification No. 1.


A. Type: Polyvinyl chloride (PVC), Schedule 40.

B. Extruded from virgin polyvinyl chloride compound.

C. Resistant to water, oil, outdoor aging, exposure to sunlight, underground environments, and

corrosive atmosphere.

D. Flame retardant for use above ground, resistant to low temperatures, and resistant to distortion

due to heat under conditions likely to be encountered in intended service.

E. Sufficient strength to withstand abuse, such as impact and crushing during handling,

installation, and service.

F. Ten foot lengths with one coupling furnished for each length.

G. Minimum Size: 3/4 inch.

H. Each length clearly and durably marked with manufacturer’s name. Markings shall be

permanent for PVC used above ground.

I. PVC conduit shall be UL listed.

J. Comply with applicable ASTM testing procedures and specifications.

K. Fittings:


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 260530 - 5

1. Acceptable Manufacturers: Same as PVC conduit manufacturers.

2. Conform to applicable PVC conduit specifications above.


A. Type: Flexible metal conduit.

B. Formed from a continuous length of high grade mild steel strip, zinc coated and shaped into

interlocking convolutions.

C. Minimum Size: 1/2 inch.

D. UL listed.

E. Approved for grounding.

F. Fittings:

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: OZ, or Efcor, Thomas & Betts.

2. Squeeze, 2-screw double clamp, or hinged clamp type.

3. Threadless.

4. Malleable iron, cadmium plated.

5. Approved for grounding.



A. Type: Liquid tight flexible metal conduit.

B. Made from strong, flexible, galvanized steel core with smooth, abrasion resistant, liquid-tight

polyvinyl chloride cover.

C. Minimum Size: 1/2 inch.

D. UL listed.

E. Approved for grounding or built-in, continuous copper ground.

F. Fittings.

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Appleton Type STB, or OZ, Efcor, Thomas & Betts, Ideal,

Crouse Hinds.

2. Liquid tight.


4. Steel or malleable iron, cadmium or zinc finish.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 260530 - 6

5. Approved for grounding.


A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Square D Square Duct, or Hoffman, Wiegman, Keystone.

B. Type: Wireways, NEMA 1, lay-in.

C. Code gage steel, NEMA 1 enclosure.

D. Hinged covers.

E. Provide for continuous lay-in of wiring.

F. Furnished complete with all fittings and hangers.

G. UL listed.

2.8 CONDUIT COATINGS

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Koppers No. 50 base coat, No. 28 or 33 top coat.

B. For protection of exterior steel conduit at ground penetration. Conduit shall be coated with coal

tar coating. Portion of conduit above grade, exposed to atmospheric conditions, shall have top

coat of non-volatile organic coal tar emulsion.

2.9 SURFACE METAL RACEWAY

A. Surface Metal Raceway Specification No. SMR-4

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Wiremold AL3300 Series, or as approved.

2. Two piece raceway, constructed of .060 inch thick 6063-T5 aluminum base and .060 inch

thick 6063-T5 aluminum cover. .040 inch thick galvanized steel divider.

3. Divider provided where raceway length serves both power and telecom circuits.

4. Furnish required fittings, clamps, couplings, elbows, end fittings and connectors.

5. Surface metal raceway shall be installed without devices where indicated.

6. Plates shall accommodate outlet requirements.

7. Finish: Satin anodized.

8. Unless otherwise specified, wiring devices shall be as follows:

a. Receptacles: Duplex, as specified herein

b. Voice and/or data jacks as specified herein.

9. Receptacles shall be installed as indicated on the Drawings.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 260530 - 7

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Unless noted, products and materials specified shall be installed in accordance with the

following schedule(s):

RACEWAY SCHEDULE - EXTERIOR

Applications Raceway Spec. No.

Exterior:

Underground 4

Exposed 1

Final connections to motors 6

RACEWAY SCHEDULE - INTERIOR, UNDER 600 VOLTS


Interior, 600 volts and under and all systems:

Concealed in walls & ceilings 2

Exposed within an area between floor and four

(4) feet above floor 1

Exposed, at ceiling and above four (4) feet

from floor 2

Areas subject to mechanical damage, unless

noted 1

Final connections to motors, pipe mounted

equipment and equipment exposed to vibration 6

Final connection to recessed lighting fixtures 5

RACEWAY SCHEDULE - IN OR UNDER CONCRETE SLABS


Underground beneath concrete slabs 1 or 4

In concrete slabs on grade 2 or 4


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 260530 - 8

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General

1. Install products in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

2. Raceway connectors, connections and couplings shall be pulled up tight to provide an

electrical bond throughout entire raceway system

3. Raceways shall be installed in such a manner that wires may be removed and replaced at

a later date.

4. Raceways shall be run as direct as possible to minimize number of bends and offsets.

Exposed raceways shall be installed with runs parallel or perpendicular to walls and

ceilings and with right angle turns utilizing proper connectors, conduit bodies or

symmetrical bends. In areas where vertical raceways will be exposed, raceways shall be

run on building walls or columns where possible.

5. Running threads will not be permitted on raceways requiring threads. Approved threaded

couplings or a conduit coupling shall be used where such construction is required.

6. Cylindrical metal raceways shall be bent only by use of an approved pipe bending

machine so that raceway will always retain its cylindrical shape.

7. Furnish and install No. 12 non-ferrous or 200 lb. test nylon pull string in each spare or

empty conduit. Conduit shall be identified at each end indicating destination and future

use.

8. Caps shall be installed on all open conduit ends to protect against entrance of dirt and

moisture.

B. Interior Raceways

1. Raceways shall be supported to building structure by use of beam clamps, one hole pipe

straps where applicable, or other approved fasteners. Use of tie wire to support raceways

will not be permitted.

2. Raceway runs shall be separated by a minimum of 6 inches from hot water pipes, steam

pipes and flues inside the building. If a separation of 6 inches or greater cannot be

maintained, an approved pipe covering shall be used over raceway runs for the length of

such exposures.

3. Expansion joints, as specified for particular raceway system, shall be used on all runs that

cross building expansion joints. Raceways shall cross building expansion joints at right

angles. Free ends of conduits shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s

instructions.

4. Conduit runs longer than 20 feet between junction boxes shall have circuit number(s)

labeled on the conduit at 20 foot intervals.

C. Concrete Slab Raceways


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 260530 - 9

1. Cylindrical metal or PVC schedule 40 raceways, as scheduled, may be laid below or

poured in a concrete slab on grade, depending on the fill below slab, as specified for

underground installation. Cylindrical metal raceways, as scheduled, shall be poured in a

concrete slab above grade. Maximum diameter of raceways to be placed in slab shall be

limited to 1/3 thickness of the slab. Exact placement of cylindrical raceways below or

within concrete slab shall be verified with the prime professional.

2. Where cylindrical raceways are installed in concrete slabs, or under floor slabs, the

minimum permissible size shall be 3/4 inch diameter.

3. Conduits for recessed floor boxes located in slabs on grade and slabs below grade shall

be installed totally within the concrete slab with concrete totally encasing the conduits,

including the point where conduits enter the recessed floor boxes, to ensure a watertight

system and that water does not enter the conduit system. Coordinate with General

Contractor.

4. All slab conduits for floor boxes shall be dry prior to installing cables.

5. Refer to Section 26 05 40, Boxes, for additional information on recessed floor boxes and

conduit connections to recessed floor boxes.

D. Underground Raceways

1. Raceway shall not be used in or under cinderfill where subject to permanent moisture

unless protected on all sides by a layer of non-cinder concrete at least 2 inches thick or

unless the raceway is at least 18 inches under the fill.

2. Underground raceways or duct banks shall have a marker and warning tape installed

above raceway, 12 inches below finished grade. Use Tape Specification No. 2; refer to

Section 26 05 20, Wire and Cable, 600 Volts and Below. Duct banks with widths over 12

inches shall have 6 inch wide tape runs installed side-by-side on 12 inch (maximum)

centers. Warning tape shall be continuous for entire underground conduit run.

Manufactures splices shall be used to connect tape for long runs.

3. Exterior steel conduit shall be coated with a bitumastic protective covering 6 inches

above and below point where conduit enters ground. Bitumastic coating shall be top

coated with a bituplastic coating above ground after bitumastic coating has been aged

from 2 to 4 weeks. Refer to coating manufacturer’s installation instructions.

4. Where conduits penetrate building walls, manhole walls, etc., underground penetration

shall be made watertight and conduits shall be sealed with duct seal.

E. Raceways Installed in Duct Banks

1. Slope duct bank away from building entrances.

2. Elbows shall be 36 inch radius, minimum.

3. Furnish and install suitable separators. Fasten conduits to separators.

4. Securely anchor conduits to prevent movement during concrete placement.

5. Unless noted, conduits shall be encased in a 3 inch concrete envelope with minimum 2

inch separation between conduits.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 260530 - 10

6. Where indicated, concrete for duct banks shall be reinforced. Concrete duct banks under

vehicle roadways shall be reinforced to either 10 feet beyond roadway surface or 5 feet

beyond roadway right-of-way, whichever is greater.

7. All conduits shall be capped to protect against entrance of dirt and moisture. Before use

and before installation of pull string in spare conduits, conduits shall be “swabbed”.

8. Furnish and install a pull string in all empty and spare conduits.

9. Furnish and install underground warning tape above all duct banks as specified herein for

Raceway Installation, Underground.

F. Raceway Specification No. 1

1. Rigid metal conduit shall be installed as follows:

a. Each end of every conduit run terminating in a steel enclosure of any type shall be

provided with galvanized locknut with metal insulated throat bushing inside and

galvanized locknut outside.

b. Bushing shall have ground lug where required.

c. Fittings specified under Raceway Specification No. 1 shall be used when installing

rigid metal conduit.

d. Conduit bodies shall be used on exposed conduit runs, except at locations where

impractical. At these impractical locations, factory ells shall be used. Factory ells

will not be permitted on exterior of building.

e. All electrical raceway systems located on the exterior shall be installed to maintain

a NEMA 4 rating using Myers hubs.

f. Where rigid metal conduit passes from one temperature zone to another, a conduit

seal shall be installed on warmer side of wall.

g. Conduit seals shall be installed in conduit runs as required by National Electrical

Code for hazardous areas.

G. Raceway Specification No. 2

1. Electrical metallic tubing shall be installed as follows:

a. Each end of every electrical metallic tubing run termination in a pressed steel box

of any type shall be provided with an insulated throat EMT connector and locknut

on the inside. Bushing with ground lug specified under Raceway Specification No.

1 shall be installed where required.

b. Appropriate threadless couplings and connectors shall be used with electrical

metallic tubing and made up tight so when buried in masonry or concrete, raceway

will remain dry at all times.


electrical metallic tubing.

d. Set screw connectors are acceptable for all feeders containing an equipment

grounding conductor sized in accordance with the latest edition of the National

Electric Code.

e. Set screw connectors are acceptable for branch circuits containing an equipment

grounding conductor sized in accordance with the latest edition of the National

Electric Code.

H. Raceway Specification No. 4

1. PVC conduit shall be installed as follows:


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 260530 - 11

a. Joints in PVC conduit runs shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s

recommendations.

b. Expansion joints shall be installed where expansion and contraction of PVC

conduit occurs due to changing temperature conditions.

c. PVC conduit shall not be used where subject to ambient temperature exceeding

those which conduit has been approved.

d. Fittings specified under Raceway Specifications No. 4 shall be used when

installing PVC conduit.

I. Raceway Specification No. 5

1. Flexible metal conduit shall be installed as follows:

a. Maximum length of flexible metal conduit permitted for final connection to motors

and equipment shall be 2 feet. Flexible metal conduit for final connection to belt

drives shall have sufficient slack to permit motor adjustment.

b. Maximum length of flexible metal conduit permitted for final connection to

recessed lighting fixtures shall be 6 feet and minimum size of 3/8 inch diameter.


flexible metal conduit.

J. Raceway Specification No. 6

1. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit shall be installed as follows:

a. Maximum length of liquidtight flexible metal conduit permitted for final

connection to motors and equipment shall be 2 feet. Liquidtight flexible metal

conduit for final connection to belt drives shall have sufficient slack to permit

motor adjustments.

b. Fittings specified under Raceway Specification No. 6 shall be used when installing

liquidtight flexible metal conduit.

K. Raceway Specification No. 10

1. Wireways NEMA 1, lay-in, shall be installed as follows:

a. Wireways shall be adequate size.

b. Wireways shall only be installed for exposed work.

c. Wireways shall be marked with manufacturer’s name (or trademark) which shall

be visible after installation.

L. Underground Conduit Marker

1. Bury vertically in ground at end of underground conduit or duct bank with 6 inch by 6

inch end of marker flush with grade.

M. Surface Metal Raceways

1. Install surface metal raceway in type and length indicated on Drawings.

2. Exact mounting height shall be determined at site for each location.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 260530 - 12

3. Location and type of wsiring devices in surface metal raceway shall be specified in Part 2

- Products of this Section or as indicated on Drawings.


Strada WVU Shroyer Hall Renovations Boxes

PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 260540 - 1

SECTION 260540 – BOXES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED


furnishing and installing boxes. The specific application of these materials shall be as outlined

in this Section and subsequent Sections of this Specification, or as indicated on the Drawings.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


1. Boxes

1.3 SCRUB – WATER PROTECTION

A. All floor boxes, poke-through devices, etc., shall provide for scrub-water protection.

B. The scrub-water protection shall utilize a comprehensive gasketing system to prevent the

ingress of scrub-water from mops and carpet shampooing equipment from entering floor boxes,

poke-through devices, etc. Entrance of dust, dirt and debris shall also be prevented.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 BOX SPECIFICATION NO. 1

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Steel City, or Appleton, Raco.

B. Type: Recessed outlet boxes.

C. Constructed of galvanized, 14 gage pressed steel, square corners, depth as required.

D. Plaster rings for plaster areas.

E. Masonry boxes in masonry areas.

F. Rectangular type covers in special finished area, such as block, paneling or tile.

G. Ganged, where indicated or required.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 260540 - 2


A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Crouse Hinds FS or FD cast conduit fittings, or Appleton, Pyle ional,

Killark, Adalet, OZ.

B. Type: Surface outlet boxes.

C. Constructed of copper free aluminum or rust resisting alloy of iron.

D. Heavy, threaded hubs to fit applicable conduit.

E. Cast malleable iron fittings shall be thoroughly coated with metallic zinc or cadmium, inside

and outside, after all machine work is completed.

F. Cast mounting lugs where lugs are required.

G. Gasketed, watertight covers, same construction as box, and stainless steel screws.

H. NEMA 4X, 316 stainless steel, where indicated, neoprene gasketed, watertight and stainless

steel screws.

I. NEMA 7 for hazardous areas, where indicated.


A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Steel City, or Appleton, Raco.

B. Type: Junction boxes.

C. Constructed of galvanized pressed steel, 14 gage, 4 inch square or octagon, depth as required.

D. Plaster rings for plaster areas.

E. Furnish and install fixture stud where required for lighting fixture support. Size stud as required

to support weight of fixture, 3/8 inch minimum size. Stud shall be integrally fabricated with the

box or inserted from back of box.


A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Hoffman, or Keystone, Wiegmann, McKinstry.

B. Type: Junction and pull boxes.

C. Constructed of code gage galvanized steel sheet metal, reinforced where required.

D. Riveted or welded joints.

E. Furnish and install covers of same material of construction as box, screwed to box with stainless

steel screws.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 260540 - 3

F. Box size shall be sufficient to pull, rack, and splice cables, where specific size is not indicated.

G. NEMA 3R in wet locations and on the exterior, neoprene gasketed, stainless steel screws.

H. NEMA 4X, 316 stainless steel, where indicated, neoprene gasketed, watertight and stainless

steel screws.

I. NEMA 7, where indicated.


A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Quazite Composolite PC1118DA18 box with solid base; Quazite

Composolite PC1118SA00 steel locking cover; Quazite Composolite PC1118HA00 locking

cover.

B. Type: Polymer concrete exterior service box, suitable for vehicular traffic.

C. Constructed of polymer concrete and reinforced by a heavy-weave fiberglass.

D. Stackable for extra depth.

E. Stainless steel inserts and bolts.

F. Enclosures and covers shall be rated for no less than 15,000 pounds over a 10 inch by 10 inch

area.

G. Nominal dimensions of 20 inches long by 13 inches wide by 18 inches deep.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Unless noted, products and materials specified in this Section shall be installed in accordance

with the following schedule(s):

BOX SCHEDULE - OUTLET AND JUNCTION BOXES

Application Box Spec. No.

Recessed outlet boxes for wiring devices 1

Surface outlet boxes for wiring devices 2

Splice, junction, or pull boxes, interior 3 or 4

Splice or pullboxes, exterior and wet locations 4, NEMA 3R


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 260540 - 4

BOX SCHEDULE - EXTERIOR

Application Box Spec. No.

Splice, junction, or pull boxes, recessed in concrete

floors; for exterior use - recessed in grade

35

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General

1. Install boxes in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

2. Outlet boxes shall be installed for weatherproof applications with wall plate lift covers

hinged at top, to open lifting up.

3. All boxes shall be accessible.

4. Locations indicated are approximate. Coordinate in relation to spaces and equipment

surrounding each outlet. When necessary, relocate outlets to avoid interference with

mechanical equipment or structural features.

5. Locate all boxes for light switches on strike side of doors, unless otherwise indicated, or

if building construction prohibits installation at this location. Locations at other than the

strike side of the door, even if shown on the Drawings, shall be verified with the

Architect before roughing in.

6. Locate all light fixture outlets in a symmetrical pattern according to the room layout

unless otherwise indicated.

7. Mount all boxes plumb and level. Furnish and install flush proper type extension rings or

plaster covers as required. For flush mounted boxes, make holes in the surrounding

surface no larger than required to receive the box.

8. Open no more knockouts in sheet steel boxes than are actually required. Seal any used

openings in any type box.

9. Boxes shall not be fastened to hung ceiling support wires.

10. Support all boxes independently of conduit.

11. Install boxes to maintain fire rating, where applicable.

12. Boxes shall not be installed exposed in finished areas without approval of Architect.

B. Outlet Boxes

1. Outlet boxes of proper size and type shall be furnished at all outlets. Boxes shall be

secured firmly in place and set true and square with building lines.

2. Openings for recessed outlet boxes shall be neatly cut, minimum size as needed for

installation of box. Box shall be set at a depth so wall plate, when installed, shall cover

wall opening and shall seat against the mounting surface on all sides.

3. Recessed outlet boxes shall be installed without damaging wall insulation and without

reducing its effectiveness.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 260540 - 5

4. Outlet boxes shall not be installed in walls back-to-back, provide a minimum of 6 inches

of separation except in fire walls where minimum separation shall be 24 inches.

C. Junction and Pull Boxes

1. Junction, pull, or splice boxes shall be adequate size, suitable to construction features and

independently supported.

2. Install boxes to maintain adequate head room.

3. Junction boxes shall be labeled with circuit number(s) served by box.

D. Exterior Flush with Grade Boxes

1. Box and cover shall be suitable for heavy vehicular traffic. Pull box to be flush mounted

with grade and be set in 6 inch minimum concrete, sides and bottom. All penetrations in

pull box shall be made watertight.

3.3 DIMENSIONS

A. Unless otherwise noted, dimensions are to the center of finished outlet with all wiring devices in

place. Where indicated as clear, dimensions shall be to top or bottom of wiring device, plate, or

trim.

B. Dimensions specified herein shall be verified by Architect before roughing-in outlets.

3.4 LOCATIONS

A. Locations of outlets and equipment shall be verified by Architect before roughing-in outlets or

conduit. Final location may differ from that indicated on Drawings.


Strada WVU Shroyer Hall Renovations Wiring Devices

PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 260550 - 1

SECTION 260550 – WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED


furnishing and installing wiring devices. The specific application of these materials shall be as

outlined in this Section and subsequent Sections of this Specification, or as indicated on the

Drawings.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


1. Switches

2. Receptacles

3. Wall Plates

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SWITCHES

A. Switch Specification No. 1

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Hubbell HBL1221 Series, or Bryant, Pass and Seymour,

Cooper, Leviton.

2. Type: Single or double pole, three-way or four-way 20 amp, 120/277 volts, AC.

3. Back and side wired.

4. Heavy duty, industrial specification grade.

5. Silver cadmium oxide contacts.

6. Steel, nickel plated corrosion resistant bridge.

7. Nylon toggle.

8. One piece integral grounding terminal.

9. Stainless steel automatic grounding clip.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 260550 - 2

2.2 RECEPTACLES

A. Receptacle Specification No. D12

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Hubbell HBL5362 Series 20 amp or Pass and Seymour,

Bryant, Cooper, Leviton.

2. Type: Duplex, straight blade.

3. Rate 125 volts, 2 pole, 3 wire, grounding,


5. U-shaped slot for grounding.

6. Back or side wired.

7. NEMA Configuration: 20 amp - 5-20R.

8. One piece all brass mounting strap with integral ground contacts, ground plug retention

clips, automatic grounding feature.

9. UL listed.

10. Nylon “finder groove” face and body, reinforced thermoplastic rynite base.

11. Listed “weather-resistant” type where installed in damp or wet locations.

B. Receptacle Specification No. D12GF

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Hubbell GF5362 Series 20 amp, or Pass and Seymour, Bryant,

Cooper, Leviton.

2. Type: Duplex, straight blade, ground fault circuit interrupter.

3. Rated 125 volts, 2 pole, 3 wire grounding.



6. Nylon face.

7. Back or side wired.


9. Automatic grounding feature.

10. Test and reset button features.

11. Trip Threshold; 5 plus or minus 1 mA, Class A.

12. Trip Time: 0.025 seconds.

13. U.L. listed.

14. Dielectric – withstand 1500V minimum.

15. Maximum Interrupting Capacity – 2000 amp.

16. Indicator light to indicate tripped condition.

17. Upon pressing the test button, if electronics have failed unit will be locked out and not be

resettable.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 260550 - 3

18. Listed “weather-resistant” type where installed in damp or wet locations.

C. Receptacle Specification No. S1/223/4

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Hubbell HBL8410 20 amp, or Pass and Seymour, Bryant,

Cooper, Leviton.

2. Type: Single, 125/250 volt.

3. Rated 125/250 volts, 3 pole, 4 wire grounding.

4. Slot for grounding.

5. Material and Color: 20 amp - black nylon.


7. U.L. listed.


D. Receptacle Specification No. S1/22TL4/5

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Hubbell HBL2510 Series, 20 amp, or Pass and Seymour,


2. Type: Single, twist lock.

3. Rated 120/208 volts, 4 pole, 5 wire, grounding.

4. Black nylon face.

5. NEMA Configuration: 20 amp – L21-20R.


7. U.L. listed.

E. Receptacle Specification No. S13TL

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Hubbell HBL2610 Series 30 amp, or Pass and Seymour,


2. Type: Single, twistlock.




6. NEMA Configuration: 30 amp - L5-30R.

7. UL listed.


F. Receptacle Specification No. S1/233/4

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Hubbell HBL9430A 30 amp, or Pass and Seymour, Bryant,

Cooper, Leviton.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 260550 - 4

2. Type: Single, straight blade.

3. Rated 125/250 volts, 3 pole, 4 wire grounding.




7. U.L. listed.


G. Receptacle Specification No. S22

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Hubbell HBL5461, 20 amp, or Pass and Seymour, Bryant,

Cooper, Leviton.

2. Type: Single, Straight blade.

3. Rated 250 volts, 2 pole, 3 wire grounding, 20 amps.


5. Material and Color: Brown nylon.

6. NEMA Configuration: 6-20R.

7. UL listed.



H. Receptacle Specification No. S23

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Hubbell HBL9330, 30 amp, or Pass and Seymour, Bryant,

Cooper, Leviton.

2. Type: Single, Straight blade.

3. Rated 250 volts, 2 pole, 3 wire grounding, 30 amps.


5. Material and Color: Brown nylon.

6. NEMA Configuration: 6-30R.

7. UL listed.



I. Receptacle Specification No. S23TL

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Hubbell HBL2620 Series 30 amp, or Pass and Seymour,


2. Type: Single, twistlock.



PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 260550 - 5


5. Material and Color: 30 amp – black nylon.

6. NEMA Configuration: 30 amp – L6-30R.

7. U.L. listed.


2.3 COLOR

A. Unless otherwise noted, color of all wiring devices and wall plates shall be ivory.

B. Receptacles and wall plates mounted in finished ceilings for projector power shall be white.

2.4 WALL PLATES

A. Wall Plate Specification No. W2

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Hubbell ‘SS’ Series, or Pass and Seymour, Bryant, Cooper,

Leviton.

2. Stainless steel type 302/304, .04 inch thickness, satin finish, smooth (no lines).

3. 18 percent chromium and 8 percent nickel, non-magnetic.

4. Contoured edges.

5. Wall plates indicated to be engraved, shall be engraved by manufacturer.

6. Ganged plates where devices are ganged.

7. Screws with matching head finish supplied with plate.

B. Wall Plate Specification No. W8

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: TayMac 10510 one gang duplex receptacle and 20510 one

gang GFCI receptacle, Hubbell WP826 Series, or as approved.

2. NEMA 3R rating while in use, hinged cover/enclosure clearly marked “Suitable for Wet

Locations While in Use”.

3. Grey finish.

4. There shall be a gasket between the enclosure and mounting surface and between the

hinged cover and mounting plate/base to ensure proper seal.

5. Stainless steel mounting screws.

6. Flame retardant, UV stabilized polycarbonate, impact resistant.

7. Vertical mount.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 260550 - 6

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Unless noted, products and material specified in this Section shall be installed in accordance

with the following schedule(s):

WALL PLATE SCHEDULE

Application Wall Plate Spec. No.

Interior W2

Weatherproof (While in Use) W8

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General

1. Install all wiring devices in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, plumb and

level.

2. All wall openings shall be neatly cut and covered by wall plates. Use oversize wall plates

where needed.

3. Furnish and install wall plates on all wiring devices and all blank boxes.

4. Furnish and install zinc or cadmium coated steel plates on all surface “FS” boxes.

5. Coordinate with proper entity and verify mounting height of all wiring devices in field

before rough-in.

6. Clean dirt, dust and debris from all outlet boxes, final cleaning shall be by vacuuming.

B. Switches

1. Install switches with “off” position down.

2. Switches shall not be connected to neutral conductor.

3. Switches shall be ganged where grouped at specific locations, as indicated on Drawings.

4. Switch outlets shall be located on strike side of door, unless otherwise indicated, or if

building construction prohibits installation at this location. Locations at other than the

strike side of the door, even if shown on the Drawings, shall be verified with the

Architect before roughing in.

5. Operate each wall switch with circuit energized and verify proper operation.

C. Receptacles

1. Verify that each receptacle device is energized.

2. Install receptacles with ‘U’ shaped grounding slot up or to the left (if installed

horizontally).


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 260550 - 7

3. Test each receptacle device for proper polarity.

4. Where receptacles are installed in damp or wet locations, listed “weather-resistant” type

receptacles shall be used. Damp and wet locations shall be as defined by Article 100 of

the National Electrical Code.

D. Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter Receptacles

1. Verify that each receptacle device is energized.

2. Install receptacles with ‘U’ shaped grounding slot up.

3. Test each receptacle device for proper polarity.

4. Test each ground fault interrupter device for proper operation.

5. Ground fault interrupter receptacles shall not be wired for down stream protection.

6. Ground fault receptacles shall be installed in all toilet rooms.

7. Ground fault receptacles shall be installed within 6 feet of any type sink.

8. Ground fault circuit interrupter receptacles shall be provided within twenty-five feet of all

HVAC equipment as required by the National Electrical Code.

3.3 MOUNTING HEIGHTS

A. Mounting height of outlets or receptacles serving special equipment or installed above a counter

shall be determined in field.

B. If the designated location of a switch or receptacle places it partially between two finishes, the

actual location shall be adjusted to set the plate entirely on one finished surface only, but actual

height shall not exceed mounting heights indicated herein or required by codes.

C. Outlet boxes for flush mounted wiring devices installed in concrete masonry unit (block) or

brick walls shall be installed so bottom of outlet box coincides with bottom of block or brick

that is below specified mounting height, and actual height shall not exceed mounting heights

indicated herein or required by code.

D. Mounting heights, measured to centerline, shall be as follows unless otherwise indicated,:

1. Switches: 42 inches above finished floor

2. Receptacles: 18 inches above finished floor

3. Receptacles, Above Countertop: 6 inches above backsplash.

4. Weatherproof Receptacles on Exterior of Building: 24 inches above finished grade

5. Weatherproof Receptacles on Roof: 24 inches above roof


Strada WVU Shroyer Hall Renovations Grounding Systems

PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 260560 - 1

SECTION 260560 – GROUNDING SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED


installation of grounding systems and devices. The specific application of these materials shall

be as outlined in this Section and subsequent Sections of this Specification, or as indicated on

the Drawings.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


1. Ground Rods

2. Ground Connectors

3. Grounding Bus Bars

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GROUND RODS

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Copperweld, or Penn-Union, Weaver.

B. Type: High strength steel core.

C. Construction: Copper exterior welded to the steel core.

D. Chamfered top to prevent mushrooming. Pointed end.

E. Minimum Diameter

1. 10 foot rod: 3/4 inch diameter.

2. Above 10 feet: 1 inch diameter.

F. For lengths over 10 feet, sectional rods with steel driving bolt may be furnished.

2.2 GROUND CONNECTORS

A. Ground Connectors Specification No. 1

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: OZ Types ABG, CG, DG, EG, FG, or HG, or Thomas & Betts.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 260560 - 2

2. Type: Wire to pipe connector. U-bolt, clamp type.

3. Copper alloy.

B. Ground Connector Specification No. 2

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Thomas & Betts, or Burndy.

2. Type: Ground grid clamps. Compression connection to cable or rod.

3. High conductivity cast copper fittings.

4. Cable, rod, plate or combination connector, as required.

5. Suitable for direct burial or imbedded in concrete.

C. Ground Connector Specification No. 3

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Erico Cadweld, or Burndy Thermite.

2. Type: Cadweld, exothermic welding process. Suitable for joining copper conductors.

3. Cable, rod, or surface connection, as required.

D. Ground Connector Specification No. 4

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Copperweld Type AB, or Burndy, Penn Union, Dossert,

Anderson.

2. Type: Cable to rod. Bolted pressure type.

3. Copper.

4. Nonferrous hex socket or hex head bolt.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Unless noted, ground connectors shall be installed in accordance with the following schedule(s):

GROUND CONNECTOR SCHEDULE

Application Ground Connector Spec. No.

Connection of ground wire to water pipe 1

Connection of ground wire or ground grid

cable to ground rod, building steel or

another ground grid cable

2 or 3

Connection of ground wire to ground rod 4


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 260560 - 3

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General

1. Unless otherwise specified, conductive noncurrent carrying electrical materials and

equipment shall be grounded. Non-electrical items of equipment shall be bonded together

and grounded as indicated on Drawings. Grounding and bonding shall be in accordance

with National Electrical Code requirements.

2. Bonds and jumpers shall be furnished and installed where required during construction

and where necessary to ensure both operation and safety. Jumpers shall be installed

around water meters and insulated pipe connectors.

3. Raceway system shall be grounded and shall be electrically, and mechanically continuous

from all outlet devices, power utilization equipment, and distribution equipment to

system main ground point.

4. Main system ground points shall be as noted on Drawings. Exact location and point of

connection of main system grounds shall be verified during construction.

5. Ground wire shall be installed in raceway runs where indicated on Drawings. Ground

wires shall be insulated.

6. Grounding shall be by separate insulated grounding conductors installed in all raceway

runs and pulled with phase conductors. Grounding system shall be electrically, and

mechanically continuous from all outlet devices, power utilization equipment, and

distribution equipment to system main ground point.

7. Neutral conductors shall be continuous throughout system and shall be grounded only at

the switchboard neutral.

8. Electrical service shall be grounded in accordance with the National Electrical Code.

9. Separately derived systems shall be grounded in accordance with the National Electrical

Code.

B. Ground Rods

1. Ground rods shall be installed where indicated on Drawings, where specified, or as

required by National Electrical Code.

2. Ground rods shall be driven to a depth so that top of rod is 2 feet below grade.

C. Building Structural Steel Ground

1. Building steel columns shall be connected to ground rods driven alongside column as

indicated on Drawings. Provide #4/0 wire to connect to ground rod.

3.3 TESTS

A. Ground resistance of main system grounding point shall be tested and shall not exceed values

required by National Electrical Code. Test shall be made using two auxiliary ground rod (three

point) method or other approved method. If resistance is found to be higher than that allowed by

National Electric Code, additional ground rods shall be driven until a resistance below allowed

value is obtained.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 260560 - 4

B. Outside tests shall not be performed during unusually wet conditions. Tests shall be made

during dry weather conditions.

C. Complete test record in triplicate shall be submitted to Owner stating allowable National

Electrical Code Value, showing resistance values and calculations and shall indicate method of

test.


Strada WVU Shroyer Hall Renovations Electrical Service

PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 262410 - 1

SECTION 262410 – ELECTRICAL SERVICE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED


furnishing and installing the electrical service system.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Unless noted, submit for approval in accordance with specified submittal procedures:

1. Electrical System Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study

a. Provide for review minimum of 5 copies of a detailed overcurrent protective

device coordination and short circuit analysis in accordance with the Owner’s

Design Guidelines and Construction Standards. Analysis shall begin at and include

Power Company’s nearest upstream protective device. Ground fault shall be

included. Study shall end with either main breaker or largest branch breaker in

lighting and appliance panelboards. Tie breaker, where indicated, will operate

normally open. Study will be used to determine settings of protective devices for

selective coordination. Equipment will be provided with ampere interrupting

current rating and bus bracings equal to or greater than values indicated on

Drawings, these values will not be decreased as a result of short circuit study.

Emergency electrical system shall be included in study.

b. All breakers shall be fully rated for short circuit interrupting, series connected

ratings will not be approved.

c. The overcurrent protective device coordination and short circuit analysis shall be

submitted prior to submission of switchgear, panelboards, motor control centers,

etc., shop drawings. Submittals for switchgear, panelboards, motor control centers,

etc., will not be reviewed and approved until the overcurrent protective device

coordination and short circuit analysis has been submitted.

2. Arc–Flash Hazard Analysis

a. Provide for review a minimum of 5 copies of a detailed Arc-Flash Hazard Analysis

in accordance with the Owner’s Design Guidelines and Construction Standards.

b. An Arc-Flash Hazard Analysis shall be performed on the entire facility electrical

system. The analysis shall include both existing electrical equipment items and

electrical equipment items and electrical equipment items furnished and installed

under this contract – all the electrical equipment items shown on the One Line

Diagram on the Drawings.

c. The Arc-Flash Hazard Analysis shall be performed with the aid of computer

software intended for this purpose in order to calculate Arc-Flash Incident Energy

(AFIE) levels and flash protection boundary distances.

d. The Arc-Flash Hazard Analysis shall be performed in conjunction with the

Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study and Short Circuit Analysis.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 262410 - 2

e. Results of the analysis shall be submitted in tabular form, and shall include, device

or, bus name, bolted fault and arcing fault current levels, flash protection boundary

distances, personal-protective equipment classes and AFIE levels.

f. The analysis shall be performed under worst-case arc-flash conditions, and the

final report shall be describe, when applicable, how these conditions differ from

worst-case bolted fault conditions.

g. The Arc-Flash Hazard Analysis shall be performed by a professional engineer

registered in the state where the work is to be performed and shall be performed in

compliance with IEEE standard 15842002, IEEE Guide for Performing Arc-Flash

Calculations.

h. The Arc-Flash Hazard Analysis shall include recommendations for reducing AFIE

levels and enhancing worker safety.

i. The proposed vendor shall demonstrate experience with Arc-Flash Hazard

Analysis by submitting names of at least ten actual Arc-Flash Hazard Analysis it

has performed in the past year.

j. The proposed vendor shall demonstrative capabilities in providing equipment,

services, and training to reduce arc-flash exposure and train workers in accordance

with NFPA 70E and other applicable standards.

k. The proposed vendor shall demonstrate experience in providing equipment labels

in compliance with NEC-2002 section 110 and ANSI Z535.4 to identify AFIE and

appropriate Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) classes.

l. Appropriate “Danger Labels”, as specified in Section 26 05 05, Basic Materials,

shall be placed on all items of electrical equipment. Included in the study. “Danger

Label” shall, at a minimum, indicate the word message as specified in

Section 26 05 05, for “Danger Labels” and the following:

1) Maximum voltage of the equipment.

2) Arc-flash boundary

3) Required PPE.

3. Information and data on existing electrical system components and equipment required

for completion of the Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study and Short

Circuit Analysis and Arc-Flash Hazard Analysis shall be collected by the contractor in

the field.

1.3 ELECTRICAL SERVICE

A. Power Company will furnish, install and connect the following:

1. Primary service terminal pole.

2. Underground primary service conductors from primary service riser pole to pad mounted

transformer and connections at both the riser pole and the transformer.

3. Pad mounted transformer.

4. Primary conduit on riser pole except as noted.

5. Metering conductors.

6. Meter

B. Contractor shall furnish and install the following:


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 262410 - 3

1. Excavation and backfill for underground primary and secondary service.

2. Underground conduits for primary and secondary service.

3. Ground rods and grid around perimeter of transformer pad per power company

requirements.

4. Barriers to protect transformer from vehicular traffic per power company requirements.

5. Underground secondary service conductors from pad mount transformer to incoming line

section of distribution switchboard and connections at switchboard.

6. Lugs for secondary connections at transformer.

7. System ground conductor from distribution switchboard to grounding grid.

8. Transformer pad per power company requirements.

9. Meter enclosure, per Power Company requirements.

10. 1 1/4 inch conduit with #12 fish wire from Power Company metering compartment of

distribution switchboard to meter enclosure for Power Company metering conductors.

11. A #12 fish wire in each primary service conduit.

C. Power company will furnish and Contractor shall install the following:

1. Metering transformers (CT's and PT's) in the power company metering compartment of

the distribution switchboard.

1.4 POWER COMPANY CUSTOMER SERVICE CHARGES

A. Owner will pay directly to the power company all customer service charges from Power

Company for installation of the electrical service.

1.5 ELECTRICAL POWER INTERRUPTIONS

A. Interruptions of an established power supply shall be conducted only when authorized in writing

by the Owner. Contractor shall submit a request to Owner for a service interruption and shall

state the estimated time involved during which the power supply will be interrupted. Power

supply interruptions shall be coordinated with the Owner and all other trades so there will be a

minimum of inconvenience to these trades.

B. If temporary power service is required during the power supply interruption, it shall be the

responsibility of the Contractor to furnish, install and connect the temporary service at no

additional cost to Owner.

C. Electrical work resulting in power supply interruptions to other occupied buildings on campus

shall be performed during night hours or weekends and overtime costs incurred shall be

included in the base bid.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 262410 - 4

1.6 COORDINATION OF ELECTRICAL SERVICE

A. Contact applicable departments of the power company before beginning work on electrical

service and to make arrangements to obtain permanent electrical service to the project.

B. Meter location shall be approved by Power Company prior to installation of meter base.

C. Power Company must approve location of pad mount transformer and inspect all phases of pad

installation.

D. Furnish and install lugs on secondary cables at pad mount transformer. Power Company will

bolt lugs to transformer.

E. Provide quantity and location of barriers around power company transformer pad as directed by

Power Company.

1.7 REMOVAL OF EXISTING SERVICE EQUIPMENT

A. Removal of existing service shall be coordinated with Power Company. Items are indicated on

Drawings that will be removed by Power Company. Refer to Drawings for removal of existing

service equipment as Work of this Section.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RACEWAYS

A. Underground Primary Service

1. At transformer pad and 5 feet beyond, and at terminal pole: Race Specification No. 1.

2. Elbows: Raceway Specification No. 1.

3. Between pad and terminal pole: Raceway Specification No. 4.

B. Underground Secondary Service

1. At distribution switchboard, under building and 5 feet beyond building: Raceway

Specification No. 1.

2. At transformer pad and 5 feet beyond: Raceway Specification No. 1.

3. Elbows: Raceway Specification No. 1.

4. Between pad and building: Raceway Specification No. 4.

C. Metering Conductors: Raceway Specification No. 1.

2.2 WIRE AND CABLE

A. Underground Secondary Service: Wire Specification No. 1, 3, or 4.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 262410 - 5

2.3 BUSHINGS

A. Bushings, with ground lug, shall be Raceway Specification No. 1.

2.4 CONDUIT COATING

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Koppers No. 50 base coat and Koppers No. 28 or 33 top coat.

B. For protection of exterior steel conduits at ground penetration. Conduits shall be coated with

coal tar coating. Portion of conduit above grade, exposed to atmospheric conditions, shall have

top coat of non volatile organic coal tar emulsion.

2.5 BARRIERS

A. Provide barriers around local utility's transformer. Unless otherwise required by utility

company, barriers shall consist of concrete filled 4 inch steel post installed 3 feet below grade

and a minimum of 4 feet in height above grade. Consult with utility company. Barriers located

in front of transformer shall be removable.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Conduit

1. Unless noted, PVC schedule 40 shall be encased in minimum 3 inch concrete envelope

with minimum 2 inches separation between conduits.

2. Exterior steel conduit shall be coated with a bitumastic protective covering 6 inches

above and below the point where conduit enters ground. Bitumastic coating shall be top

coated with a bituplastic coating above ground after bitumastic coating has been aged

from 2 to 4 weeks. Refer to coating manufacturer's installation instructions.

3. Each end of every conduit terminating under pad mount transformer and at the secondary

switchgear shall be provided with grounding type insulating bushing.

4. Underground primary and secondary service conduit shall be encased in concrete.

5. Cables and conduits shall not remain uncovered in trench overnight.

6. Interior of installed conduits shall be cleaned and free of any gravel, sand, or foreign

materials.


Strada WVU Shroyer Hall Renovations Switchboards

PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 262420 - 1

SECTION 262420 – SWITCHBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED


installation of switchboards.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


1. Distribution Switchboards, one line diagram, devices, components dimensions, voltages,

frame sizes, trip ratings, fault current withstand ratings, amperes interrupting current

ratings and time-current curves.

2. Refer to Section 262410, Electrical Service, for “Electrical System Overcurrent

Protective Device Coordination Study” submission requirements.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate metering compartment with power company, submit shop drawings of metering

compartment to power company for approval.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARDS

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Square D, or General Electric, Siemens, Cutler Hammer.

B. Construction: Front accessible, completely self-supporting. Refer to Drawings for number and

type of sections.

1. Devices shall be panel mounted.

2. Provide full height isolation between sections, constructed of steel or plastic non-

flammable insulation.

3. Provide plastic insulated barrier enclosing crossover bars between sections.

4. Side, top, and rear panels shall be removable screw-on code gage steel plates.

5. Furnish nameplates as specified in Section 260505, Basic Materials.

C. Protective devices shall be as listed on Drawings and as specified herein.

D. Buses


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 262420 - 2

1. Tin or silver plated aluminum buses or copper buses.

2. Temperature rise of buses shall not exceed 55 degrees C.

3. Bus work shall be arranged for future addition.

4. Bus supports shall be high impact, nontracking, insulating material.

E. Switchboards used as service entrance equipment shall carry a label indicating suitability for

service entrance.

F. Switchboard and all components shall be capable of withstanding the short circuit current

bracing indicated on Drawings. All breakers shall be fully rated for short circuit interrupting,

series connected rating will not be approved. Refer to Section 26 24 10, Electrical Service, for

requirements for “Electrical System Overcurrent Protective Device Study”.

G. Main Disconnect - Insulated Case, Non-Electric Operated, Circuit Breaker: Shall have the

following features:

1. Micrologic full function trip system with adjustable tripping characteristics as follows:

a. Long time ampere rating.

b. Long time delay.

c. Short time pick-up.

d. Short time delay (I2T In and I2T Out).

e. Instantaneous pick-up, with defeatable feature.

2. Quick-make, quick-break overcenter independent switching mechanisms.

3. Mechanically trip free so contacts cannot be held closed against abnormal currents.

Common tripping of all poles.

4. On, off and tripped position indications.

5. Front accessible, manually operated push-to-trip and push-to-close.

6. Continuous current (monitor) rating indicated on static sensor nameplate.

7. Trip indicator, LCD readout, no external power required. Display until reset.

8. Manual operating handle for emergency operation.

9. Power logic compatible communications with communication adapter and product

interface.

10. Fixed mounted.

11. Means to seal the rating plug and trip unit adjustments.

12. Two-step, stored energy closing, mechanism, closing springs charged manually.

13. Ratings as indicated on Drawings.

H. Distribution overcurrent protective devices, as specified in Section 26 24 50, Overcurrent

Protective Devices, ratings as indicated on Drawings.

I. Power Logic System, Level 1

1. Utilized to monitor main bus and main breaker.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 262420 - 3

2. Main Breaker Monitoring

a. Real-time current, including ground fault.

b. Historical Breaker Data

1) Data and time of last trip.

2) Cause of trip.

3) Phase currents at trip.

4) Ground fault current at trip.

5) Number of overload, short circuit and ground fault trips.

c. Circuit Breaker Data

1) Breaker type.

2) Sensor ratings.

3) Plug rating.

4) Long time settings - pick-up and delay.

5) Short time setting - pick-up and delay.

6) Instantaneous settings.

7) Ground fault settings - pick-up and delay.

3. Main Bus Monitoring

a. Provide a multi-function instrumentation, data acquisition and control device

system as follows:

1) UL listed (UL508).

2) Full 3-element instrumentation.

3) True RMS sensing.

4) Accepts standard CT and PT inputs (5A and 120V AC).

5) 120V AC source.

6) Industry standard RS-485/RS-422 communication.

7) Microprocessor-based control.

8) Historical data.

9) Non-volatile memory.

10) SY/MAX compatibility.

11) Energy management alarms.

12) On-board clock/calendar.

13) User configurable.

14) Standard component encompassing many voltage classes.

b. System shall be self-contained to retain all information (including clock and

calendar) for a minimum of 24 hours.

c. With programming processor, will allow the following:

1) Local initialization of user-defined parameters.

2) Establishment of communications.

3) Control commands.

4) Capacitor control.

5) Shall be IBM compatible.

6) Shall monitor main bus for the following:

RMS Current Values:

Phase A current

Phase B current

Phase C current

3-phase average current

Apparent current

RMS Voltage Values:


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 262420 - 4

Phase A-B voltage

Phase B-C voltage

Phase C-A voltage

Phase A-N voltage

Phase B-N voltage

Phase C-N voltage

Current Values:

Average demand current phase A

Average demand current phase B

Average demand current phase C

Peak demand current phase A

Peak demand current phase B

Peak demand current phase C

Real Power Values:

Average demand real power

Predicted demand real power

Peak demand real power

Energy Accumulated

Reactive Energy Accumulated.

Power Factor Values:

Phase A power factor

Phase B power factor

Phase C power factor

3-phase total power factor

3-Phase Total Power Values:

Real power, 3-phase total

Reactive power, 3-phase total

Apparent power, 3-phase total

Capability of any of all of the above information for breakers monitored

can be communicated to Owner’s remote terminal or monitored on

remote digital readouts.

d. Each current transformer shall be terminated on its own compartment shorting

block.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Switchboard

1. Install switchboard in accordance with equipment manufacturer’s recommendations.

Submit manufacturer’s printed installation instructions with operating and maintenance

data at completion of Work.

2. Coordinate with local utility for location and size of power company metering

transformers in switchboard.

3. Bolt switchboard to concrete pad.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 262420 - 5

4. Tighten accessible bus connections and mechanical fasteners.

5. Adjust and set breaker trip and time delay settings. Furnish and install fuses

recommended by switchboard manufacturer.

6. Maintain adequate clearances around switchboard.

7. Ensure there are no pipes or ductwork installed over switchboard, in accordance with

NEC.

3.2 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE

A. Provide services of manufacturer’s representative for start-up and placing in operation.

B. Provide recommended maintenance procedures and recommended intervals between

maintenance procedures.


Strada WVU Shroyer Hall Renovations Panelboards

PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 262430 - 1

SECTION 262430 – PANELBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED


furnishing and installing panelboards.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


1. Panelboards and Devices

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PANELBOARDS

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Square D, or General Electric, Siemens Industry, Cutler Hammer.

B. General: Panelboards shall be furnished complete with interior, box, trim and door, and

constructed of code gage steel.

1. Dead front construction

2. Keyed alike.

3. Furnished with manufacturer’s nameplate and panelboard rating.

4. Insert typewritten index card, verified for correctness, in frame provided on panel door.

C. Circuit breaker or fusible switch type shall be as indicated on Drawings and specified herein.

Rating shall be as indicated on Drawings.

D. Devices shall be replaceable without removing adjacent devices and main bus connectors, as

follows:

1. Bolt-on breakers.

2. Rated SWD for switching.

3. Rated HACR where required for HVAC or refrigeration equipment.

4. Rated for personnel ground fault circuit interrupter protection where indicated on

drawings.

E. Provide full height phase bus, provide full size neutral bus and ground bus, where applicable.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 262430 - 2

1. Bus arranged for sequence phasing.

2. Tin or silver plated aluminum busses or copper busses

3. Provisions shall be bussed for maximum device that can be fitted into space.

F. Panelboards used for service shall carry a label indicating suitability for service entrance.

G. Double panels shall consist of two separate panels in separate, matching back boxes and trim.

One panel shall have double lugs to feed the second panel. Feeder wires between panels shall be

same size as feeder to panel. Breakers shall be divided equally between panels.

H. Short circuit current rating of circuit breaker panelboards shall be equal to or greater than that of

lowest interrupting rated device in panel.

I. All breakers shall be mounted in the normal vertical breaker mounting space to the left or right

of the main vertical bus. “Sub-feed” breakers and “individual” mounted breakers will not be

approved.

J. 200% neutral bus, where indicated on the drawings.

K. Integral surge protection devices, where indicated on the drawings.

L. Isolated ground bus, where indicated on the drawings.

M. All breakers shall be fully rated for short circuit interrupting, series connected ratings will not

be approved.

N. Short circuit current rating of fusible switch panelboards shall be as indicated on Drawings,

symmetrical.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install panelboards in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. Submit

manufacturer’s printed installation instructions with operating and maintenance data at

completion of Work.

B. Install surface or recessed as indicated on Drawings. Install plumb.

C. Panelboards shall be mounted 6 feet from finished floor to top protective device in panel.

D. In areas with accessible ceilings, one 3/4 inch raceway, type as specified for branch wiring,

shall be extended from all recessed panelboards and stubbed out above accessible tile ceilings

for every three spare breakers and for every three provisions indicated in panel schedule.

E. Provide for adequate clearances around panelboards.

F. Ensure clear space over panels and no pipes or ducts are installed over panelboards, both in

accordance with NEC.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 262430 - 3

G. Rearrange circuits in panelboard to balance loads.

H. Inspect for tightness of all connections.

I. Panelboard indexes shall be provided to reflect installed condition. Indexes shall be typewritten

and shall indicate room numbers and type of load served by each circuit. Coordinate final room

numbers names, numbers and load descriptions with Owner.

J. Refer to Section 260505, Basic Materials, for installation of “Danger Labels”.


Strada WVU Shroyer Hall Renovations Disconnect Switches

PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 262440 - 1

SECTION 262440 – DISCONNECT SWITCHES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED


installation of disconnect switches. The specific application of these materials shall be as

outlined in this Section and subsequent Sections of this Specification, or as indicated on the

Drawings.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


1. Disconnect Switches

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DISCONNECT SWITCHES

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Square D, or General Electric, Siemens Industry, Cutler Hammer.

B. Type: Heavy duty, fusible or non-fusible as indicated on Drawings.

C. Ratings and Accessories: Refer to Drawings.

D. Standard Features:

1. NEMA 1 enclosure, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Handle padlockable in the off position, up to three padlocks.

3. Quick-make, quick-break switching mechanism.

4. Fuse clips shall have rejection type feature for the fuses specified.

E. Furnish cover interlocks to prevent unauthorized opening of switch door when switch is in the

on position, and to prevent closing switch mechanism when door is open.

F. Disconnect used for service entrance shall carry a label indicating suitability for service

entrance.

Strada WVU Shroyer Hall Renovations Disconnect Switches

PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 262440 - 2

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install disconnect switches in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Disconnect switches shall be installed 5 feet above finished floor.

C. Fuse type and size as required shall be installed in fusible safety switches.


Strada WVU Shroyer Hall Renovations Overcurrent Protective Devices

PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 262450 - 1

SECTION 262450 – OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED


furnishing and installing overcurrent protective devices. The specific application of these

materials shall be as outlined in this Section and subsequent Sections of this Specification, or as


1.2 SUBMITTALS


1. Fuses, all types

2. Circuit Breakers, All Types

3. Coordination and Current Limiting Analysis (for substitute fuse manufacturer)

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FUSES

A. Coordination and current limiting for protection of portions of the electrical system has been

designed on the base manufacturer of fuses specified herein for each type or class of fuses. The

option to provide fuses manufactured by any substitute manufacture requires the submission of

a written report verifying the substitute manufacturer’s fuses will provide proper coordination

and current limiting for those portions of the distribution system where the substitute fuses are

proposed. Manufacturer’s fuse curves for the proposed substitute fuses shall be included with

the report. This report shall be submitted in same quantity and concurrent with shop drawing

submission for fuses.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, 10 percent (or a minimum of 3) spare fuses of each size and type

shall be provided to Owner at completion of Work.

C. Fuse Specification No. 2

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Bussman, or Littelfuse, Gould.

2. Type: Buss fusetron, dual element.

3. Class RK5, with rejection feature, 600 amps and below.

4. Ratings: Refer to Drawings.

5. Fuse shall have either “blown fuse indicator” or “blown fuse indicating” fuse cover.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 262450 - 2

2.2 MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS - GENERAL

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Same as panelboard or switchboard manufacturer.

B. Constructed of glass reinforced, or equal, insulation material with current-carrying components

isolated from the handle and accessory mounting area.

C. Molded case circuit breakers shall be over-center, trip free, toggle operating, quick-make,

quick-break, manually operated, and, unless noted, with individual thermal and magnetic trip

units in each pole.

D. Individual trip mechanisms on each pole shall open all poles (common trip).

E. Mechanically trip free so contacts cannot be held closed on an overload or short circuit.

F. When tripped, circuit breaker handle shall reside in a position between “on” and “off”.

G. Clearly marked “on” and “off” positions.

H. Breakers shall be bolted to the bus, unless otherwise noted.

I. Ratings shall be as indicated on Drawings. Ampere rating and U.L. and IEC certification

standards with applicable voltage and ampere interrupting ratings shall be clearly marked on

face of breaker.

J. All breakers shall be fully rated for short circuit interrupting, series connected ratings will not

be approved.

K. Thermal trip units shall be factory preset and sealed.

L. Breakers shall be true RMS current sensing.

M. Breaker frames above 100 amps shall have a single magnetic trip adjustment accessible without

removal of the breaker, cables, etc.

N. Amperes Interrupting Current (AIC) Ratings: 120V, 208V, and 240V breaker - minimum AIC

10,000 amps.

2.3 SWITCHING DUTY BREAKERS


B. U.L. listed as SWD (switching duty) rated.

C. Suitable for switching fluorescent and HID lighting fixtures.

D. Unless noted, all 15 amp and 20 amp, single pole breakers shall be SWD rated.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 262450 - 3

2.4 HEATING, AIR CONDITIONING AND REFRIGERATION BREAKERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Same as panelboard or switchboard manufacturer.

B. U.L. listed as HACR (heating, air conditioning, refrigeration equipment) type breakers.

C. All breakers feeding heating, air conditioning and refrigeration type equipment shall be HACR

type breakers, verify with equipment installer.

2.5 ELECTRONIC TRIP MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKER WITH FULL FUNCTION TRIP

SYSTEM


B. Circuit breaker trip system shall be a microprocessor-based (micrologic) true rms sensing

design with sensing accuracy through the thirteenth harmonic.

C. The integral trip system shall be independent of any external power source and shall contain no

less than industrial grade electronic components.

D. The ampere rating of the circuit breaker shall be determined by the combination of an

interchangeable rating plug, the sensor size and the long-time pickup adjustment on the circuit

breaker. The sensor size, rating plug and switch adjustments shall be clearly marked on the face

of the circuit breaker. Circuit breakers shall be UL listed to carry 100% of their ampere rating

continuously.

E. The following time/current response adjustments shall be provided. Each adjustment shall have

discrete settings and shall be independent of all other adjustments.

1. Instantaneous Pickup

2. Long Time Pickup

3. Long Time Delay (Ground Fault Alarm Only Pickup)

4. Short Time Pickup

5. Short Time Delay (I2T IN and I2T OUT)

F. Circuit breakers with adjustable short-time function shall be provided with defeatable

instantaneous adjustment and 30 cycle short-time withstand ratings. Short-time withstand

ratings shall be specified in rms symmetrical amperes, as shown on the drawings.

G. A means to seal the rating plug and trip unit adjustments in accordance with NEC shall be

provided.

H. Local visual trip indication of overload, short circuit and ground fault trip occurrences shall be

provided.

I. An ammeter to individually display all phase currents flowing through the circuit breaker shall

be provided. Indication of inherent ground fault current flowing in the system shall be provided

on circuit breakers with integral ground fault protection. All current values shall be displayed in

True rms with 2% accuracy.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 262450 - 4

J. Long Time Pickup indication to signal when loading approaches or exceeds the adjusted ampere

rating of the circuit breaker shall be provided.

K. The trip system shall include a Long Time memory circuit to protect against intermittent

overcurrent conditions above the long time pickup point. Means shall be provided to reset Long

Time memory circuit during primary injection testing.

L. Circuit breakers shall be equipped with back-up thermal and magnetic trip system.

M. Circuit breaker trip system shall be equipped with an externally accessible test port for use with

a Universal Test Set. Disassembly of the circuit breaker shall not be required for testing. Test

set shall be capable of verifying the operation of all trip functions with or without tripping the

circuit breaker. Universal test set shall be provided and turned over to owner.

N. Communications capabilities for future remote monitoring of circuit breaker trip system, to

include phase and ground fault currents, pre-trip alarm indication, switch settings, and trip

history information shall be provided.

O. Circuit breakers shall be provided on Zone Selective Interlocking (ZSI) communications

capabilities on the short-time functions compatible with all electronic trip circuit breakers and

external ground fault sensing systems.

P. Circuit breakers shall be provided with integral equipment ground fault protection for grounded

systems. The circuit breaker shall be suitable for use on three-phase, four-wire systems.

Q. A separate neutral current transformer shall be provided as directed by the manufacturer.

R. Where indicated, circuit breakers shall be provided with communications capabilities for remote

ground fault alarm indication only (no trip) per NEC Article 700 for emergency systems.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Fuses

1. Fuses shall not be installed until installation of equipment is complete and tests and

inspections have been completed prior to energizing equipment, including thorough

cleaning, tightening of electrical connections, inspection of ground and grounding

conductors, and conductor insulation tests.

2. Equipment shall not be shipped with fuses in place.

3. Fuses identification label, indication type and size, shall be placed inside door of each

switch.

4. Fuse reducers shall be used where fuse gaps are larger than fuse dimensions.

B. Circuit Breakers

1. Install circuit breakers in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 262450 - 5

2. Test all ground fault breakers to ensure proper operation.

3. On ground fault breakers for personnel, do not connect more than 250 feet of load

conductor for the total one-way run (to prevent nuisance tripping).

4. On all adjustable trip circuit breakers, adjust all settings to values as indicated in the

“Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study”.


Strada WVU Shroyer Hall Renovations Surge Protection Devices

PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 262460 - 1

SECTION 262460 – SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED


furnishing and installing the surge protection devices.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


1. Surge Protection Devices, including performance parameters

2. Five year extended warranty certificate


A. Manufacturer of surge protection devices shall have at least five years experience in

manufacturing surge protection devices.

1.4 EXTENDED WARRANTY

A. The surge protection device shall be warranted for a period of five years incorporating unlimited

replacement of all parts, to include both parts and labor.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES – INTEGRAL

A. Surge Protection Devices – Panelboard

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Same as panelboard manufacturer, or as approved.

2. Description:

a. Integral mounted in panelboard at either location of feeder connection in

panelboard or connected directly to load side of main breakers. Unit shall be

connected directly to main bus, no cables between main bus and unit.

b. Listed and component recognized in accordance with UL 1449, 2nd Edition,

February 2007 Revision, and UL 1283.

c. Self-contained module design, each suppression element shall be metal oxide

varistor (MOV) based. Module shall consist of either a separate module for each

diversion path or all diversion paths contained in one module.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 262460 - 2

d. The smallest size MOV used shall be 40 mm diameter. Where parallel MOV’s are

used to achieve the required KA rating as specified herein, the MOV’s shall be

computer selected to provide the closest “turn-on” voltage as possible. Each

diversion path shall contain at least one set of paralleled MOV’s.

e. Each individual MOV of the surge current diversion module shall be separately

fused with a 200,000 AIC fuse, fuse designed for protection of surge current

modules, Little Fuse, or as approved. Fuse shall withstand surge currents but open

on fault currents.

f. Each MOV shall have a thermal cut-out device in direct contact with the metal

oxide disk for optimum heat transfer.

g. LED to indicate power and status of each MOV. LED shall give an indication of

both fuse opening and thermal element opening. For multiple parallel MOV’s

modules, there shall be an LED to indicate “fully operational”, a separate LED to

indicate “reduced capability”, and a separate LED to indicate “loss of suppression”

for each phase module. There shall be a LED push-to-test button for each module.

h. Shall provide surge current diversion paths between each of the following:

1) Each phase conductor and the neutral conductor.

2) Each phase conductor and ground.

3) The neutral conductor and ground.

i. Audible alarm, with both a silencing switch and test switch, to indicate when

protection has failed. Audible alarm shall sound on both “reduced capability” and

“loss of suppression”.

j. One set of dry contacts rated 5.0 amps, 250 volts, AC, for remote monitoring of

protection status.

k. Sine wave tracking.

l. Shall be connected to the bus of the panel and shall have an integral disconnect

switch to disconnect power to surge protection device for servicing and replacing.

Circuit breaker may be used for disconnect, but circuit breaker shall not deduct

from the maximum number allowed in panel per National Electrical Code. There

shall be no need to turn panel feeder breaker “off” to service device.

m. Noise Attenuation: 50 db at 100 kHz.

n. Unit shall have a transient event surge counter equipped with a manual reset and

battery to retain memory upon loss of AC power.

o. Tested and U.L. Listed for use on circuits capable of delivering up to and including

200,000 symmetrical amps. This rating shall be indicated on the face of the unit.

p. Unit shall be individually fully rated, series ratings will not be approved.

q. Surge protection devices shall be housed in a NEMA 12, metal enclosure, 14

gauge, seam welded, cold rolled steel, phosphor dipped and powder coated.

r. The components of each diversion path shall be encapsulated in a material with a

minimum dielectric of 390 volts/mil.

3. The surge protection device shall meet or exceed the following criteria:

a. Maximum surge current capability – 80 KA, each surge current diversion path.

b. Endurance – Capable of protecting against and surviving 5000 ANSI/IEEE

C62.41.1, category C transients without failure.

c. UL 1449, 2nd Edition, listed and recognized suppression voltage ratings and

maximum continuous operating voltages (MCOV) shall not exceed the following:

Voltage L-N L-G N-G MCOV

120/208, wye 330V 330V 330V 150V


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 262460 - 3

277/480, wye 700V 700V 700V 320V

These voltages shall be indicated on the face of the surge

protection device unit.

d. The ANSI/IEEE C62.41.1-2002 category C high let through voltages shall not

exceed the following:

Voltage L-N L-G N-G

120/208V, wye 520V 520V 520V

277/480V, wye 880V 880V 880V

B. Surge Protection Devices – Distribution panel.

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Same as distribution panelboard manufacturer, or as approved.

2. Description:

a. Integral mounted in panelboard or motor control center at either location of feeder

connection in panelboard or motor control center or connected directly to load side

of main breakers. Unit shall be connected directly to main bus, no cables between

main bus and unit.



c. Self contained module design, each suppression element shall be metal oxide










on fault currents.
















protection status.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 262460 - 4


l. Shall be connected to the bus of the panel or motor control center and shall have an

integral disconnect switch to disconnect power to surge protection device for

servicing and replacing. Circuit breaker may be used for disconnect, but circuit

breaker shall not deduct from the maximum number allowed in panel per National

Electrical Code. There shall be no need to turn panel feeder breaker “off” to

service device.


















120/208, wye 330V 330V 330V 150V

277/480, wye 700V 700V 700V 320V





Voltage L-N L-G N-G

120/208V, wye 520V 520V 520V

277/480V, wye 880V 880V 880V

C. Surge Protection Devices – Switchboard

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Same as switchboard manufacturer, or as approved.

2. Description:

a. Integral mounted in switchboard at either location of feeder connection in

switchboard or connected directly to load side of main breakers. Unit shall be

connected directly to main bus, no cables between main bus and unit.




PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 262460 - 5

c. Self contained module design, each suppression element shall be metal oxide










on fault currents.
















protection status.


l. Shall be connected to the bus of the switchboard and shall have an integral

disconnect switch to disconnect power to surge protection device for servicing and

replacing. Circuit breaker may be used for disconnect. There shall be no need to

turn switchboard main breaker “off” to service device.


















PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 262460 - 6


120/208, wye 330V 330V 330V 150V

277/480, wye 700V 700V 700V 320V





Voltage L-N L-G N-G

120/208V, wye 520V 520V 520V

277/480V, wye 880V 880V 880V

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General

1. Surge protection devices shall be installed and tested in accordance with manufacturer’s

instructions.

2. The surge protection device’s ground shall be connected to the ground of the equipment it

is connected to.


Strada WVU Shroyer Hall Renovations Lighting

PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 265010 - 1

SECTION 265010 – LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED


furnishing and installing lighting fixtures, complete with lamps, for each lighting outlet

indicated on the Drawings and other items associated with lighting as specified herein. The type

and wattage of each light fixture is noted on the Drawings; the letter indicates the type of light

fixture and the numeral indicates the wattage. If type and wattage are omitted from any outlet, a

light fixture of the type and size specified for a similar location shall be provided.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


1. LED Luminaires

2. Exit Signs

3. Emergency Lighting Units

4. Lighting Fixtures

1.3 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. If, in order to conform to the performance criteria shown on Drawings, a substitute

manufacturer’s quantity of lighting fixtures is greater than the quantity indicated, Electrical

Contractor shall furnish and install quantities of all lighting fixtures, junction boxes, wiring,

conduit, and other accessories which comprise the entire lighting system as required to conform

to the indicated performance criteria. Electrical Contractor shall provide all quantities required

at no additional cost to Owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 LED LUMINAIRES

A. LED array color and lumen output shall be as indicated on Drawings. Chips shall be binned to

no more than 2-step MacAdam Ellipse.

B. Minimum manufacturer stated LED lifetime shall be 50,000 hours or as indicated on fixture

schedule. Lifetime shall be considered predicted time where average lumen output reaches 70

percent of initial output as measured in accordance with IESNA LM-80 testing requirements.

C. LED luminaire manufacturers shall have a minimum of 5 years’ experience in manufacturing

LED luminaires and a minimum of 10 years in manufacturing lighting fixtures in general.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 265010 - 2

D. Driver manufacturer shall have a minimum of 10 years’ experience in manufacturing LED

drivers.

E. Driver shall be rated for 120 volt to 277 volt input.

F. Power Factor: Greater than 90 percent.

G. Minimum Efficiency: 85 percent.

H. Dimming: Where indicated on Drawings, 0-10VDC standard.

I. Luminaire shall comply with FCC Title 47 CFR Part 18 Non-consumer RFI/EMI Standards.

J. Drivers shall be reduction of hazardous substances (ROHS)-compliant.

K. Minimum 5 year warranty on all LED arrays and drivers.

L. UL listed.

2.2 EXIT SIGNS

A. Illuminated Exit Sign, LED White Thermoplastic

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Emergi-Lite (LED) Premier Series.

2. Red light emitting diodes, less than 5 watt draw.

3. Frame, backplate, faceplate and mounting canopy constructed of high impact off-white

thermoplastic.

4. Optical diffuser to protect LED’s and provide uniform LED light output.

5. 120/277 dual voltage.

6. Universal directional arrows, direction as indicated on Drawings.

7. Stencil face, red letters, minimum 5 inches high, 2 inches wide (except for “I”) and

minimum 3/4 inch stroke.

8. Distance between letters shall be 3/8 inch minimum.

9. Single face or double face as required.

10. Sealed maintenance free nickel cadmium battery to provide 90 minutes minimum of

adequate lighting. 15 year battery life expectancy.

11. Fully automatic solid state charger.

12. Test switch/pilot light.

13. Diagnostic/Self-Test

a. Shall have test switch, external “AD ON” and “Service Required” indicators.

b. Shall continuously monitor the charger assembly, battery and LED assembly

current.

c. If a fault is detected, the external “service required” indicator will illuminate.

Internal indicators will indicate nature of fault.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 265010 - 3

d. Self-test 1 minute every 30 days, 30 minutes every 60 days, and 90 minutes

annually.

14. Warranty: 5 year full warranty beginning on date of acceptance by Owner. Pro-rata

extended warranty on battery of 7 years beginning when full warranty ends.

2.3 LIGHTING FIXTURES

A. The term "acrylic", as applied to lighting fixture enclosures, shall require the side and bottom

panels, or the complete wrap around enclosure, to be formed from virgin acrylic compounds.

Mixtures of acrylic or any other plastic material will not be permitted.

B. Refer to Lighting Fixture Schedule on Drawings.

2.4 RACEWAYS

A. Underground raceways for exterior lighting fixtures shall be Raceway Specification No. 4,

minimum 1inch conduit.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Lighting Fixtures

1. Contractor shall consult room finish schedule for type of ceiling construction and shall be

responsible for installing proper fixture with required hardware for specified ceiling. All

recessed fixtures in gypsum wallboard ceilings shall include a plaster frame and a matt

white trim finish unless noted.

2. Furnish necessary supports, hangers and hardware to properly secure fixtures to building

structures. Fixtures shall be securely hung in place, properly wired and connected to

branch circuits, lamped, tested, cleaned, and left ready for operation.

3. Support all ceiling lighting fixtures in lay-in ceilings with one end of each tie wire

attached directly to each corner of the fixture and the other end of each tie wire attached

directly to the building structure above in accordance with code requirements.

4. Fixtures shall be provided only with type of LEDs recommended by fixture

manufacturer.

5. LEDs and drivers shall be compatible.

6. Diffusers, lenses, globes, etc., shall be as scheduled and shall be suitable for the light

fixture according to fixture manufacturers recommendation. All items shall be inspected

for breakage, cracks, and chips before installation. All diffusers shall be wiped clean and

dust free with a soft cloth.

7. Use of a manufacturer's catalog number shall not relieve Contractor from furnishing a

complete unit, whether a required accessory is or is not part of the catalog number

specified.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 265010 - 4

8. Rating of wire to all fixtures shall be compatible with fire rating of fixture.

9. Lighting fixtures shall be grounded by grounding wire. Suspended fixtures shall be

served with a three conductor cord or circuit using a green bond wire for connection to

the outlet box or raceway.


Strada WVU Shroyer Hall Renovations Lighting Controls

PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 265050 - 1

SECTION 265050 – LIGHTING CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED


furnishing and installing all lighting controls as specified herein.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


1. All Lighting Control System components, including wiring and interconnecting diagrams

of all items and equipment.

2. Occupancy Sensors

3. Daylight Sensors

4. Photo Controls

5. Timer Switches

6. Digital Lighting Control Systems

1.3 QUALITY CONTROL

A. All occupancy sensors shall be of the same manufacturer, unless specified otherwise herein.

B. Manufacturer shall have minimum 10 years’ experience in manufacture of lighting controls.

C. All units 100 percent tested prior to shipment.

D. All applicable products shall be UL/cUL listed.

1.4 FUNCTION

A. Lighting for laboratory classrooms indicated in building shall be wired through Digital Lighting

Management system room controllers. Digital Lighting Management system shall return

occupancy status and usage trending data to building management system in order to be

mapped to BMS graphical user interface.

B. Owner shall be able to monitor occupancy status of all rooms, change status of lighting, and re-

program low voltage control stations remotely through Digital Lighting Management system

software.

C. Digital lighting management system shall have the capability to output individual room

occupancy status to BMS for HVAC control.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 265050 - 2

1.5 WARRANTY

A. All devices and components specified herein shall be furnished with five-year manufacturer

warranty.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 OCCUPANCY SENSORS

A. Occupancy Sensor Specification No. 1

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Watt Stopper PW-100 Series, Hubbell, Leviton, or as

approved.

2. The passive infrared sensor shall be a completely self-contained control system that

replaces a standard toggle switch. Switching mechanism shall be a latching air gap relay,

compatible with electronic ballasts, compact fluorescent, and inductive loads. Triac and

other harmonic generating devices shall not be allowed. Sensor shall have ground wire

and grounded strap for safety.

3. Sensor shall be capable of detecting presence in the control area by detecting changes in

infrared energy. Small movements shall be detected, such as when a person is writing

while seated at a desk.

4. Sensor shall utilize advanced control logic based on RISC (Reduced Instruction-Set

Circuit) microcontroller.

5. Detection Signature Processing (DSP) shall be used to avoid false offs and false

activations and to provide immunity to RFI and EMI.

6. Continuously adjusting Zero Cross relay control shall be used to guarantee reliable

operation with non-linear loads (electronic, PL lamp ballasts) even with temperature

changes and product aging.

7. Sensor shall utilize SmartSet™ technology to optimize the sensor behavior to fit occupant

usage patterns and adjust sensitivity and time delay to changing conditions. The use of

SmartSet shall be selectable by user with a DIP switch.

8. Sensor shall have a time off delay that is adjusted automatically (with the SmartSet

setting) or shall have a fixed time off delay of 5, 10, 15, 20 or 30 minutes, walk-through

mode, or test mode, set by DIP switch. In walk-through mode, lights shall turn off 3

minutes after the area is initially occupied if no motion is detected after the first 30

seconds.

9. Sensor shall have the choice of light flash alert and/or audible alert of impending light

shut off, selectable with DIP switch.

10. Sensor shall have sensitivity adjustment that is set to either automatic (SmartSet setting)

or reduced sensitivity, and is set with DIP switch.

11. Sensor shall have a built-in light level feature, adjustable from 2 to 200 footcandles,

selectable with DIP switch. During set up of light level control, sensor shall learn desired

hold-off level, requiring only one step.

12. Sensor shall have automatic-ON or manual-ON operation adjustable with DIP switch.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 265050 - 3

13. Sensor shall have no minimum load requirement and shall be capable of switching 0 to

800 watts fluorescent/incandescent at 120VAC, 0 to 1200 watts fluorescent at 277VAC,

or 1/6 HP at 277VAC, 60 Hz.

14. Sensor shall utilize a temperature compensated, dual element sensor, and a multi-element

Fresnel lens.

15. For vandal resistance, Fresnel lens shall be made of hard, 1.0mm Poly IR 2 material that

offers greater sensitivity to motion and superior detection performance. Lens shall have

grooves facing in to avoid dust and residue build up which affects IR reception.

16. Sensor shall cover up to 300 sq. ft. for walking motion, with a field of view of 180

degrees.

17. Adjustments and mounting hardware shall be concealed under a removable, tamper

resistant cover to prevent tampering of adjustments and hardware.

18. Sensor shall have a 100 percent off switch with no leakage current to the load.

19. Input voltage: 120/277VAC, 60Hz.

20. UL and cUL listed.

B. Occupancy Sensor Specification No. 8

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Watt Stopper DT-300/305, Hubbell, Leviton, or as approved.

2. The Dual Technology sensor shall be ceiling mounted and capable of detecting presence

in the control area by detecting Doppler shifts in transmitted ultrasound and passive

infrared heat changes.

3. Sensors shall use patent pending ultrasonic diffusion technology that spreads coverage to

a wider area.

4. Sensor shall utilize Dual Sensing Verification Principle for coordination between

ultrasonic and PIR technologies. Detection verification of both technologies must occur in

order to activate lighting systems. Upon verification, detection by either shall hold

lighting on.

5. Sensor shall have a retrigger feature in which detection by either technology shall

retrigger the lighting system on within 5 seconds of being switched off.

6. Sensors shall provide 360 degree coverage.

7. Ultrasonic sensing shall be volumetric in coverage with a frequency of 40 KHz. It shall

utilize Advanced Signal Processing that automatically adjusts the detection threshold

dynamically to compensate for changing levels of activity and airflow throughout

controlled space.

8. To avoid false ON activations and to provide immunity to RFI and EMI, Detection

Signature Analysis shall be used to examine the frequency, duration, and amplitude of a

signal, to respond only to those signals caused by human motion.

9. The PIR technology shall utilize a temperature compensated, dual element sensor and a

multi-element Fresnel lens. The lens shall be Poly IR4 material to offer superior

performance in the infrared wavelengths and filter short wavelength IR, such as those

emitted by the sun and other visible light sources. The lens shall have grooves facing in to

avoid dust and residue build up which affects IR reception.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 265050 - 4

10. Sensors shall utilize SmartSet™ technology to optimize time delay and sensitivity settings

to fit occupant usage patterns. The use of SmartSet shall be selectable with a DIP switch.

11. Sensors shall have a time delay that is adjusted automatically (with the SmartSet setting)

or shall have a fixed time delay of 5 to 30 minutes, set by DIP switch.

12. Sensors shall feature a walk-through mode, where lights turn off 3 minutes after the area

is initially occupied if no motion is detected after the first 30 seconds.

13. Sensor shall have an additional single-pole, double throw isolated relay with normally

open, normally closed and common outputs. The isolated relay is for use with HVAC

control, data logging, and other control options.

14. Sensors shall have a built-in light level sensor that works from 10 to 300 footcandles.

15. Sensors shall have a manual on function that is facilitated by installing a momentary

switch.

16. Sensors shall have eight occupancy logic options that give the ability to customize control

to meet application needs.

17. Each sensing technology shall have an LED indicator that remains active at all times in

order to verify detection within the area to be controlled. The LED can be disabled for

applications that require less sensor visibility.

18. Sensor shall be used with “power pack” as specified herein.

C. Power Pack

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Watt Stopper BZ Series, Hubbell, Leviton, or as approved.

2. Power pack shall be a self-contained transformer and relay module.

3. Power pack shall have 1/2 inch snap-in nipple for 1/2 inch knockouts and mounting on

outside of enclosure.

4. Power packs shall have dry contacts capable of switching 20 amp ballast load, 20 amp

incandescent, 1 hp at 120 VAC, 60Hz; 20 amp ballast at 277 VAC, 60 Hz.

5. Power packs shall provide a 24 VDC, 150 mA output.

6. Power packs shall be capable of parallel wiring without regard to AC phases on primary.

7. Power pack can be used as a standalone, low voltage switch, or can be wired to sensor for

auto control.

8. Power packs shall have low voltage Teflon coated leads, rated for 300 volts, and 94V-O

plastic enclosure suitable for use in plenum applications.

9. Zero crossing switching circuitry.

10. Hold-on/Hold-off inputs.

11. LED status indicator.

12. Dual Voltage: 120/277 volts.

13. Overcurrent protection.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 265050 - 5

2.2 DAYLIGHT SENSORS

A. Daylight Sensor Specification No. 2 – Dimming Photosensor

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Watt Stopper LS-301 Series, Hubbell, Leviton, or as approved.

2. Single zone, 0-10VDC dimming, closed loop.

3. Automatic setpoint calculation.

4. Digital multi-band photosensor range: 1-1400 footcandles.

5. On setpoint range: 1-850 footcandles.

6. User adjustable parameters: on setpoint, off setpoint, off setpoint time delay, and ‘Hold

On While Occupied’.

7. Status indicator: Multi-function green LED.

8. Setup shall be performed remotely via handheld remote control.

9. UL listed.

10. Sensor shall be used with “power pack” as specified herein.

2.3 DIGITAL LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: WattStopper DLM System, or as approved.

B. System Description

1. Contractor shall furnish and install a plug-and-play, topology-free Digital Lighting

Management (DLM) system as described herein to be wired, connected, and

commissioned. System shall include all devices and equipment as defined in this section

and all system components, cabling, and accessories as required for a fully-functioning,

first-class lighting control system. System components shall include (but not be limited

to):

a. Digital Switches: Self-configuring, digitally addressable pushbutton switches,

dimmers, and scene switches with two-way active infrared (IR) communications.

b. Digital Occupancy Sensors: Self-configuring, digitally addressable and calibrated

occupancy sensors with LCD display and two-way active infrared (IR)

communications.

c. Digital Room Controllers: Self-configuring, digitally addressable one, two or

three relay controllers, with 0-10 volt or forward phase control dimming outputs

where required.

d. Digital Photo Sensors: Single-zone closed loop and multi-zone open loop

daylighting sensors with two-way active infrared (IR) communications, able to

provide switching, bi-level, tri-level or dimming control for daylight harvesting.

e. Digital Input/Output Interface: Device shall allow seamless integration with third

party devices.

f. Configuration Tools: Handheld remote for room configuration to provide two way

infrared (IR) communications to digital devices and allow complete configuration

and reconfiguration of the device / room from up to 30 feet away. Unit shall have

Organic LED display, pushbutton interface, and allow bi-directional

communication of room variables and occupancy sensor settings.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 265050 - 6

g. Computer Software: Personal computer software to allow customized room

settings, installed and configured on Owner’s equipment.

h. Network Bridge: To provide BACnet MS/TP-compliant digital networked

communication between rooms, panels and the Segment Manager or building

automation system (BAS).

i. Segment Manager: To provide a web browser-based user interface for system

control, scheduling, power monitoring, room device parameter administration and

reporting.

j. Digital Lighting Control Local Network: Free topology, plug-in wiring system

using pre-configured or field fabricated Cat 5e Ethernet cables for power and data

to room devices.

2. Refer to Drawings for sequence of operation for lighting control system.

3. Sequence of Operations:

a. Laboratory classrooms: A manual control station shall be installed at each entrance

to the classroom, as indicated. Station shall have 4 button control, arrayed in a 2x2

configuration. One column shall control the interior zone fixtures and the other

shall control the exterior zone fixtures. The top button in each column shall be tap

“on”, hold – raise. The bottom button in each column shall be tap “off”, hold –

lower. Occupancy sensors in the classroom shall automatically turn off the

lighting fixtures after a preset time of inactivity. The photo sensors in the

classroom shall automatically raise and lower the exterior zone fixtures that serve

areas of the classroom affected by natural lighting from windows. All fade times

shall be controllable from the system software.

C. Digital Wall Or Ceiling-Mounted Occupancy Sensor

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: WattStopper LMDC (Ceiling) or LMDW (Wall) Series.

2. Wall or ceiling mounted (as indicated on Drawings) dual-technology occupancy sensor.

3. Furnish the manufacturer’s system which accommodates the square-foot coverage

requirements for each area controlled, utilizing room controllers, digital occupancy

sensors and accessories which suit the lighting and electrical system parameters.

4. Digital Occupancy Sensors shall provide graphic LCD display for digital calibration and

electronic documentation. Features include the following:

a. Digital calibration and pushbutton programming for the following variables:

1) Sensitivity: 0-100% in 10% increments

2) Time Delay: 1-30 minutes in 1 minute increments

3) Test Mode: Five second time delay

4) Walk-through mode

5) Load parameters including Auto/Manual-ON, blink warning, and daylight

enable/disable when photo sensors are included in the DLM local network.

b. One or two RJ-45 port(s) for connection to DLM local network.

c. Two-way infrared (IR) transceiver to allow remote programming through handheld

commissioning tool and control by remote personal controls.

d. Device Status LEDs including:

1) PIR detection

2) Ultrasonic detection

3) Configuration mode

4) Load binding


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 265050 - 7

e. Assignment of occupancy sensor to a specific load within the room without wiring

or special tools.

f. Manual override of controlled loads.

5. Units shall not have any dip switches or potentiometers for field settings.

6. Multiple occupancy sensors may be installed in a room by simply connecting them to the

free topology DLM local network. No additional configuration shall be required.

D. Digital Wall Stations

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: WattStopper LMSW or LMDM Series.

2. Low voltage momentary pushbutton switches in 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 8 button configuration

(as indicated on Drawings).

3. Device color as directed by Architect.

4. Stations shall be compatible with standard decora-style wall plates.

5. Wall stations shall include the following features:

a. Two-way infrared (IR) transceiver for use with personal and configuration remote

controls.

b. Removable buttons for field replacement with engraved buttons and/or alternate

color buttons. Button replacement may be completed without removing the switch

from the wall.

c. Red configuration LED on each switch that blinks to indicate data transmission.

d. Blue Load/Scene Status LED on each switch button with the following

characteristics:

1) Bi-level LED

2) Dim locator level indicates power to switch

3) Bright status level indicates that load or scene is active

e. Dimming switches shall include seven bi-level LEDs to indicate load levels using

14 steps.

6. Two RJ-45 ports for connection to DLM local network.

7. Multiple digital wall switches may be installed in a room by simply connecting them to

the free topology DLM local network. No additional configuration shall be required to

achieve multi-way switching.

8. The following switch attributes shall be capable of being changed or selected using a

wireless configuration tool:

a. Load and Scene button function may be reconfigured for individual buttons (from

Load to Scene, and vice versa).

b. Individual button function may be configured to Dim, Toggle, On only or Off only

for any load or combination of loads.

c. Individual scenes may be locked to prevent unauthorized change.

d. Fade Up and Fade Down times for individual scenes may be adjusted from 0

seconds to 18 hours.

e. Ramp rate may be adjusted for each dimmer switch.

f. Switch buttons may be bound to any load on a room controller and are not load

type dependent; each button may be bound to multiple loads.

g. Individual button may have varied programmable functions based upon time of

day or occupied/unoccupied status.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 265050 - 8

E. Digital Room Controllers

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: WattStopper LMRC Series.

2. Room controllers shall automatically bind the room loads to the connected devices in the

space without commissioning or the use of any tools. Room controllers shall be provided

to match the room lighting load and control requirements. The controllers shall be simple

to install and shall not have dip switches, potentiometers or require special configuration.

3. The control units shall include the following features:

a. Automatic room configuration to the most energy-efficient sequence of operation

based upon the devices in the room.

b. Simple Rplacement: Using the default automatic configuration capabilities, a

room controller may be replaced with an off-the-shelf unit without requiring any

configuration or setup.

c. Device Status LEDs to indicate:

1) Data transmission

2) Device has power

3) Status for each load

4) Configuration status

d. Quick installation features including:

1) Standard junction box mounting

2) Quick low voltage connections using standard RJ-45 patch cable

e. Plenum rated.

f. Manual override and LED indication for each load

g. Dual voltage (120/277 VAC, 60 Hz), or 347 VAC, 60 Hz (selected models only)

h. Zero cross circuitry for each load.

4. On/Off/Dimming enhanced Room Controllers shall include:

a. Real time current monitoring

b. Multiple relay configurations:

1) One, two or three relays (LMRC-21x series)

2) One or two relays (LMRC-22x series)

c. Efficient 250 mA switching power supply

d. Four RJ-45 DLM local network ports.

e. One dimming output per relay:

1) Where indicated, one 0-10 volt analog output per relay for control of

compatible ballasts and LED drivers. The 0-10 volt output shall

automatically open upon loss of power to the Room Controller to assure full

light output from the controlled lighting.

2) Where indicated, one forward phase control line voltage dimming output per

relay for control of compatible two-wire or three-wire ballasts, LED drivers,

MLV, forward phase compatible ELV, neon/cold cathode and incandescent

loads.

f. The following dimming attributes may be changed or selected using a wireless

configuration tool:

1) Establish preset level for each load from 0-100%

2) Set high and low trim for each load

3) Set lamp burn in time for each load up to 100 hours

F. Digital Photo Sensors

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: WattStopper LMLS-400 or LMLS-500 Series.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 265050 - 9

2. Provide open or closed loop photo sensors as recommended by system manufacturer for

individual application.

3. Digital photo sensors work with room controllers to provide automatic switching, bi-level,

or tri-level or dimming daylight harvesting capabilities for any load type connected to a

room controller. Closed loop photo sensors shall measure the ambient light in the space

and control a single lighting zone. Open loop photo sensors shall measure incoming

daylight in the space, and are capable of controlling up to three lighting zones.

4. Photo sensors shall be interchangeable without the need for rewiring.

5. Digital photo sensors shall include the following features:

a. An internal photodiode that measures only within the visible spectrum, and has a

response curve that closely matches the photopic curve. The photodiode shall not

measure energy in either the ultraviolet or infrared spectrums. The photocell shall

have a sensitivity of less than 5% for any wavelengths less than 400 nanometers or

greater than 700 nanometers.

b. Sensor light level range shall be from 1-6000 footcandles (fc).

c. The capability of ON/OFF, bi-level or tri-level switching, or dimming, for each

controlled zone, depending on the selection of room controller(s) and load binding

to room controller(s).

d. For switching daylight harvesting, the photosensor shall provide a field-selectable

deadband, or a separation, between the “ON Setpoint” and the “OFF Setpoint” that

shall prevent the lights from cycling excessively after they turn off.

e. For dimming daylight harvesting, the photosensor shall provide the option, when

the daylight contribution is sufficient, of turning lights off or dimming lights to a

field-selectable minimum level.

f. Optional wall switch override to allow occupants to reduce lighting level to

increase energy savings or, if permitted by system administrator, raise lighting

levels for a selectable period of time or cycle of occupancy.

g. Infrared (IR) transceiver for configuration and/or commissioning with a handheld

configuration tool, to transmit detected light level to wireless configuration tool,

and for communication with personal remote controls.

h. Red configuration LED that blinks to indicate data transmission.

i. Blue status LED indicates test mode, override mode and load binding.

j. Recessed switch to turn controlled load(s) ON and OFF.

k. One RJ-45 port for connection to DLM local network.

l. Any load or group of loads in the room can be assigned to a daylighting zone

m. Each load within a daylighting zone shall be capable of being individually enabled

or disabled for discrete control (load independence).

6. Closed loop digital photo sensors shall include the following additional features:

a. An internal photodiode that measures light in a 100 degree angle, cutting off the

unwanted light from bright sources outside of this cone.

b. Automatic self-calibration, initiated from the photosensor, a wireless configuration

tool or a PC with appropriate software.

c. Automatically establishes application-specific setpoints following self-calibration.

For switching operation, an adequate deadband between the ON and OFF setpoints

shall prevent the lights from cycling; for dimming operation a sliding setpoint

control algorithm with separate Day and Night setpoints shall prevent abrupt

ramping of loads.

7. Open loop digital photo sensors shall include the following additional features:


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 265050 - 10

a. An internal photodiode that measures light in a 60 degree angle cutting off the

unwanted light from the interior of the room.

b. Automatically establishes application-specific setpoints following manual

calibration using a wireless configuration tool or a PC with appropriate software.

For switching operation, an adequate deadband between the ON and OFF setpoints

for each zone shall prevent the lights from cycling; for dimming operation, a

proportional control algorithm shall maintain the design lighting level in each

zone.

c. Each of the three discrete daylight zones can include any non-overlapping group of

loads in the room.

G. Digital Input/Output Interface

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Wattstopper LMIO-101 Series.

2. Input/Output interface for integration of third party devices such as building automation

systems (BAS), time clocks, photo cells, etc.

3. 24VDC isolated relay (SPDT with normally open, normally closed, and common outputs)

for output to other systems.

4. 24VDS output and four input terminals for maintained momentary switch closure inputs

or third part logic inputs.

5. Status LED for each input and output.

6. Devices shall have two RJ45 ports.

H. Room Network

1. The DLM local network shall be a free topology lighting control physical connection and

communication protocol designed to control a small area of a building. Digital room

devices shall connect to the network using CAT 5e cables with RJ-45 connectors which

provide both data and power to room devices. Features of the DLM local network shall

include:

a. Plug n’ Go automatic configuration and binding of occupancy sensors, switches

and lighting loads to the most energy-efficient sequence of operation based upon

the device attached.

b. Simple replacement of any device in the network with a standard off the shelf unit

without requiring commissioning, configuration or setup.

c. Push n’ Learn configuration to change the automatic configuration, including

binding and load parameters without tools, using only the buttons on the digital

devices in the local network.

d. Two-way infrared communications for control by handheld remotes, and

configuration by a handheld tool including adjusting load parameters, sensor

configuration and binding, within a line of sight of up to 30 feet from a sensor,

wall switch or IR receiver.

I. Configurations Tools

1. A configuration tool shall facilitate optional customization of DLM local networks, and be

used to set up open loop daylighting sensors. A wireless configuration tool shall feature

infrared communications, while PC software shall connect to each local network via a

USB interface.

2. Features and functionality of the wireless configuration tool shall include:


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 265050 - 11

a. Two-way infrared (IR) communication with DLM IR-enabled devices within a

range of approximately 30 feet.

b. High visibility organic LED (OLED) display, pushbutton user interface and menu-

driven operation.

c. Read, modify and send parameters for occupancy sensors, daylighting sensors,

room controllers and buttons on digital wall switches.

d. Save up to nine occupancy sensor setting profiles, and apply profiles to selected

sensors.

e. Temporarily adjust light level of any load(s) on the local network, and incorporate

those levels in scene setting.

f. Adjust or fine-tune daylighting settings established during auto-commissioning,

and input light level data to complete commissioning of open loop daylighting

controls.

J. Network Bridge

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: WattStopper LMBC Series.

2. The network bridge module shall connect a DLM local network to a BACnet-compliant

segment network for communication between rooms, panels and a segment manager or

BAS. Each local network shall include a network bridge component to provide a

connection to the local network room devices. The network bridge shall use industry

standard BACnet MS/TP network communication.

a. The network bridge shall be provided as a separate module connected on the local

network through an available RJ-45 port.

b. Provide Plug n’ Go operation to automatically discover room devices connected to

the local network and make all device parameters visible to the segment manager

via the segment network. No commissioning shall be required for set up of the

network bridge on the local network.

c. The network bridge shall automatically create standard BACnet objects for

selected room device parameters to allow any BACnet-compliant BAS to include

lighting control and power monitoring features as provided by the DLM room

devices on each local network. Standard BACnet objects shall be provided as

follows:

1) Read/write the normal or after hours schedule state for the room

2) Read the detection state of the occupancy sensor

3) Read/write the On/Off state of loads

4) Read/write the dimmed light level of loads

5) Read the button states of switches

6) Read total current in amps, and total power in watts through the room

controller

7) Read/write occupancy sensor time delay, PIR sensitivity and ultrasonic

sensitivity settings

8) Activate a preset scene for the room

9) Read/write daylight sensor fade time and day and night setpoints

10) Read the current light level, in footcandles, from interior and exterior photo

sensors and photocells

11) Set daylight sensor operating mode

12) Read/write wall switch lock status

13) Read watts per square foot for the entire controlled room

14) Write maximum light level per load for demand response mode

15) Read/write activation of demand response mode for the room


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 265050 - 12

16) Active/restore demand response mode for the room

K. Segment Manager

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: WattStopper LMSM/NB-ROUTER/NB-SWITCH Series.

2. The digital lighting management system shall include at least one segment manager to

manage network communication. It shall be capable of serving up a graphical user

interface via a standard web browser. Each segment manager shall have integral support

for one, two or three segment networks as indicated. Segment networks may alternately

be connected to the segment manger via external routers and switches, using standard

Ethernet structured wiring. Each router shall accommodate one segment network. Provide

the quantity of routers and switches as shown on the Drawings.

3. Operational features of the Segment Manager shall include the following:

a. Connection to PC or LAN via standard Ethernet TCP/IP.

b. Graphical user interface, compatible with Internet Explorer 8, or equal browser.

c. Log-in security capable of restricting some users to view-only or other limited

operations.

d. Automatic discovery of DLM devices and panels on the segment network(s).

Commissioning beyond activation of the discovery function shall not be required

to provide communication, monitoring or control of all local networks and lighting

control panels.

e. After discovery, all rooms and panels shall be presented in a standard navigation

tree format. Selecting a device from the tree shall allow the device settings and

operational parameters to be viewed and changed by the user.

f. Ability to view and modify room device operational parameters. It shall be

possible to set device parameters independently for normal hours and after hours

operation.

g. Ability to set up schedules for rooms and panels. Schedules shall automatically set

controlled zones or areas to either a normal hours or after hours mode of operation.

h. Ability to group rooms and loads for common control by schedules, switches or

network commands.

i. Ability to monitor connected load current and display power consumption for areas

equipped with room controllers incorporating the integral current monitoring

feature.

j. Provide capabilities for integration with a BAS via BACnet protocol. At a

minimum, the following points shall be available to the BAS via BACnet IP

connection to the segment manager: room occupancy state; individual occupancy

sensor state; scene activation; schedule mode; room lighting power; room plug-

load power; load ON/OFF state; and load dimming level.

2.4 TIMER SWITCH

A. Digital Timer Switch Specification No. 1

1. Acceptable manufacturer: Wattstopper TS-400, Hubbell, Leviton, or as approved.

2. Wall-switch replacement type digital timer switch.

3. Push-button on, manual off, or automatic off after designated time delay.

4. Adjustable on-time from 5 minutes to 12 hours.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 265050 - 13

5. Switch shall flash lights in room as warning before automatic off.

6. Adjustable manual override.

7. Back-lit LCD display.

8. 120/277VAC, 60 Hz.

9. UL listed.

10. Five-year warranty.

2.5 PHOTO CONTROLS

A. Photo Control Specification No. 1 – Surface Mount

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Precision Lumatrol T Series, or as approved.

2. Die cast aluminum vandal proof housing.

3. Weatherproof housing, hermetically sealed light sensitive element.

4. Field adjustable light level of 1 to 10 footcandles.

5. Standard turn on at 1.5 footcandles.

6. Turn on, turn off differential of .5 to 1 foot-candle.

7. Minimum time delay of 15 seconds.

8. Contact position at night, normally closed. Single pole, single throw.

9. Temperature Range: Minus 40 degrees F. to 170 degrees F.

10. Standard pipe thread nipple.

11. 1800 VA rating, voltage as required.

12. If a defect develops in the light sensitive element, the control shall move to and remain in

the closed position.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Occupancy Sensors

1. Occupancy sensors shall be installed and wired per manufacturer’s instructions.

2. Room and/or areas shown on the Drawings with occupancy sensors shall have the lighting

in those rooms controlled using occupancy sensors. Electrical Contractor shall verify

application and quantity of sensors with manufacturer based on type of space and

coverage of each sensor type and add sensors, power packs, etc., of the types directed by

the manufacturer in order to provide adequate detection throughout entire room.

3. Time-off delay times shall be set as directed by Owner.

4. Ultrasonic sensors shall be located a minimum of 4 feet away from air supply diffusers

and 6 inch from power pack.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 265050 - 14

5. All wiring shall be tested prior to installation and connection of occupancy sensors.

6. Aiming of all directional occupancy sensors shall be as directed by the manufacturer.

B. Daylight Sensors

1. Daylight sensors shall not be mounted directly above direct/indirect pendant fixtures.

2. Final aiming and location of all daylight sensors shall be per manufacturer’s

recommendations.

C. Photo Controls

1. Photo controls shall be installed where indicated on Drawings.

2. Photo controls installed on roof shall be mounted 2 feet above roof.

3. Where possible, photo controls shall be installed facing north. Exercise care when

installing photo cells to ensure no source of artificial light will inadvertently turn photo

control off.

4. Application: Photo controls shall be installed in accordance with the following schedule:

PHOTO CONTROL SCHEDULE

Application Photo Control Spec. No.

Typical, unless noted 1

Recessed 2

3.2 TESTING

A. Upon completion of all line, load and interconnection wiring, and after all fixtures are installed

and lamped, a qualified factory representative shall completely check the installation prior to

energizing the system. Each installed occupancy sensor shall be tested in the test mode to see

that lights turn off and on based on occupancy.

B. Test results shall be documented and tabulated for each sensor and shall include all settings.

Three copies shall be turned over to Owner.

C. At the time of checkout and testing, the owner’s representative shall be thoroughly instructed in

the proper operation of the system.

3.3 PROTECTION

A. Contractor shall protect installed product and finished surfaces from damage during all phases

of installation including preparation, testing, and cleanup.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 265050 - 15

3.4 SERVICE CONTRACT

A. Electrical Contractor shall include in Base Bid the costs of and turn over to Owner a one year

service contract. The service contract shall include two visits to the site during the period of the

one year service contract, one visit at 3 months and the second visit near the end of the one

year service contract. The visits shall be made by a manufacturer authorized representative

knowledgeable of the products and the operation of the product. During each visit, the

manufacturer’s representative shall check each occupancy sensor for proper operation and

make adjustments as necessary. All settings (sensitivity, time delays, etc.) shall be compared to

initial settings and adjusted as required. Make adjustments and re-set as directed by Owner due

to change in use of room, etc. Controls found to be non-operating, broken (other than miss-

use), defective or not operating properly shall be replaced under the contract standard one year

warranty at no cost to the Owner.

B. Electrical contractor shall provide to Owner manufacturer’s name and contact information to

notify for the 3 months and near end of first year visits.

3.5 DIGITAL LIGHTING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM COMMISSIONING

A. Upon completion of the installation, the system shall be commissioned by the manufacturer's

factory authorized representative who shall verify a complete fully functional system.

B. Upon completion of the system commissioning the factory-authorized technician shall visit site

to set initial scenes and lighting levels, calibrate daylight sensors, and to provide the proper

training to the owner's personnel on the adjustment and maintenance of the system.

C. Electrical Contractor shall include in Base Bid all costs for commissioning of the control

system and all components and devices by an authorized representative of the manufacturer.

The Electrical Contractor shall assist the manufacturer’s representative as required during the

commissioning. The manufacturer’s procedures and instructions shall be followed for the

commissioning and shall include, as a minimum, the following:

1. Prior to submission of shop drawings, the Electrical Contractor shall review with the

manufacturer’s authorized representative the physical details and proposed occupancy and

usage of each area indicated to receive an occupancy sensor and the type and location of

the lighting control device(s) in each area for approval by the manufacturer’s

representative. Each area shall be reviewed for sensor location and orientation relative to

occupant location, room geometry, obstacles and false triggering. A letter from the

manufacturer’s authorized representative stating that the review has been completed and

that locations and types of sensors in each area are approved shall be included with the

shop drawing submittal. If, for any reason, the manufacturer’s authorized representative

does not approve the sensor location or type for an area or areas, the letter shall include a

listing of those areas, the reason for non-approval and recommendations for changes.

2. During construction and prior to device rough-in, the manufacturer authorized

representative shall visit the site and approve the actual location of the occupancy sensor.

3. After installation, the manufacturer’s authorized representative, in coordination with the

Owner, shall adjust the functions, scheduling, sensitivity and time delays of each sensor

and input device as best for the occupancy and usage of the area as described by the

Owner. The adjustments and settings shall be based upon occupant(s) in and out for short

periods of time, occupant(s) in most of the time and out for long periods of time, etc.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 265050 - 16

4. Electrical Contractor shall submit to Owner listing of each area indicating type of device

in each area and device/sensor initial settings.

3.6 OCCUPANCY SENSOR CONTROL SYSTEM COMMISSIONING

A. Electrical Contractor shall include in Base Bid all costs for commissioning of the occupancy

sensors and, where applicable, the occupancy sensors control system(s) by an authorized

representative of the manufacturer. The Electrical Contractor shall assist the manufacturer’s

representative as required during the commissioning. The manufacturer’s procedures and

instructions shall be followed for the commissioning and shall include, as a minimum, the

following:

1. Prior to submission of shop drawings, the Electrical Contractor shall review with the

manufacturer’s authorized representative the physical details and proposed occupancy and

usage of each area indicated to receive an occupancy sensor and the type and location of

the occupancy sensor(s) in each area for approval by the manufacturer’s representative.

Each area shall be reviewed for sensor location and orientation relative to occupant

location, room geometry, obstacles and false triggering. A letter from the manufacturer’s

authorized representative stating that the review has been completed and that locations

and types of sensors in each area are approved shall be included with the shop drawing

submittal. If, for any reason, the manufacturer’s authorized representative does not

approve the sensor location or type for an area or areas, the letter shall include a listing of

those areas, the reason for non-approval and recommendations for changes.

2. During construction and prior to occupancy sensor rough-in, the manufacturer authorized

representative shall visit the site and approve the actual location of the occupancy sensor.

3. After installation, the manufacturer’s authorized representative, in coordination with the

Owner, shall adjust the sensitivity and time delays of each sensor as best for the

occupancy and usage of the area as described by the Owner. The adjustments and settings

shall be based upon occupant(s) in and out for short periods of time, occupant(s) in most

of the time and out for long periods of time, etc.

4. Electrical Contractor shall submit to Owner listing of each area with an occupancy sensor,

type of sensor in each area and settings of each sensor.


Strada WVU Shroyer Hall Renovations Special Systems

PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 266010 - 1

SECTION 266010 – SPECIAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED


furnishing and installing of special equipment specified herein.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


1. Elevator Power Disconnect Switches

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ELEVATOR POWER DISCONNECT MODULE SWITCH

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Bussman Power Module Switch, or Ferraz-Shawmut

B. Ratings as indicated on the drawings.

C. NEMA 1 enclosure.

D. Shall include a horsepower rated, 3-pole, fusible switch with a shunt trip device having a

normally open auxiliary contacts for interfacing with the battery back-up for elevator lowering.

E. Handlockable off with up to three pad locks.

F. Visible blade for visually determining the “On-Off” position of the switch.

G. Rated 200,000 amps short circuit current.

H. Included in the switch enclosure shall be the following:

1. Class ‘J’ fuses, furnish and turn over to Owner six additional spare Class ‘J’ fuses.

2. 100 VA control power transformer with both primary and secondary fuses. An additional

four spare fuses of each type shall be furnished and turned over to Owner.

3. Fire alarm interface relay to initiate the shunt trip. Relay energized by auxiliary contact(s)

from the fire alarm system and, for shunt trip testing, energized by a door mounted key

test switch. Relay to have 24 volt DC coil, from the fire alarm system.

4. Shunt trip relay to activate the shut trip device of the fusible switch.

5. Door mounted pilot light for voltage available indication.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 266010 - 2

6. Door mounted key test switch to test the shunt trip. Furnish four keys and turn over to

Owner.

7. Relay for monitoring “Loss of Power” on each of the three phases by the fire alarm

system, coil voltage for the relay from the 100 VA control power transformer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General

1. Install equipment and wiring to equipment in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions.

2. Furnish and install suitable strain relief clamps and fittings for cord connections at outlet

boxes and equipment connection boxes.

B. Elevators

1. Elevator equipment and elevator controller(s) shall be furnished and installed by General

Contractor. All wiring for elevator equipment will be furnished and installed by General

Contractor, except as follows which shall be furnished and installed as work of this

Division:

a. Furnish, install and connect power wiring to elevator controller and furnish, install,

wire and connect Elevator Power Disconnect Module Switch.

b. Furnish, install and connect control and lighting wiring to elevator controller and

furnish, install, wire, and connect control and lighting disconnect switch with

auxiliary contact.

c. Furnish, install, wire and connect wiring, light, and switch for elevator pit lighting

and for ground fault receptacle in elevator pit.

d. Furnish, install and terminate wiring from disconnect switch in Elevator

Equipment Room to junction box in elevator shaft for elevator car lighting.

2. Alarm circuit in elevator will consist of a bell in the elevator shaft which shall be

connected to the emergency stop button and the alarm button in the elevator. Elevator

supplier will furnish and install wiring from this alarm circuit to the elevator controller.

Furnish and install wiring from the elevator controller to the elevator alarm station at

location indicated on the Drawings.

3. Furnish and install telephone cable to elevator controller for telephone in elevator.

Furnish and install telephone cable to telephone outlet in elevator equipment room. Refer

to telecommunication sections for wiring specifications.

4. Furnish and install the following from the fire alarm panel to the Elevator Power

Disconnect Module Switch:

a. Wiring to monitor the power available on each of the three phase power wires,

connect to the “Loss of Power” relay contacts in the Elevator Power Disconnect

Module Switch Enclosure.

b. 24 volt DC wiring for the fire alarm interface relay, connect to the coil of the fire

alarm interface relay in the Elevator Power Disconnect Module Switch enclosure.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 266010 - 3

c. Wiring to activate the shunt trip device in the Elevator Power Disconnect Module

Switch, connect to the coil of the shut trip relay.

5. Furnish and install conduit and wire from fire alarm panel to elevator controller for

connection of fireman's return.

6. Refer to Section 28 31 10, Fire Alarm System, for Work required to install wiring for

fireman's return on elevator bank.

C. Projection Screen

1. Projection screen with motor and starter will be furnished and installed by General

Contractor. Raise lower, key operated, selector switch will be furnished by General

Contractor.

2. Furnish and install power wiring to screen, install raise lower switch, and furnish and

install wiring for raise lower switch.

D. Laboratory Fume Hoods

1. Fume hood with integral lights and base stand with integral duplex receptacle and switch

shall be furnished and installed by General Contractor.

2. Electrical Contractor shall furnish and install wiring to light and wiring between switch

and light as required.

3. Electrical Contractor shall furnish and install wiring to the duplex receptacle at hood as

required.

3.2 COORDINATION

A. Obtain verification from Architect on mounting height and location of all electrical outlets,

conduit stubs, receptacles, switches, disconnect switches, plugmold, motor starters, controls and

other electrical equipment before roughing in.

B. Before roughing in equipment, obtain verification from Architect for all equipment to be wired

as Work of this Section as follows:

1. Verify electrical loads of all equipment.

2. Verify electrical characteristics of all equipment for compatibility with electrical power

provided to the equipment.

C. Before roughing in equipment, obtain verification from Engineer for all equipment to be wired

as Work of this Section as follows:

1. Verify electrical loads of all equipment.

2. Verify electrical characteristics of all equipment for compatibility with electrical power

provided to the equipment.


Strada WVU Shroyer Hall Renovations Controls and Instrumentation

PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 269010 - 1

SECTION 269010 – CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. The Work of this Section shall consist of the labor, materials and equipment required to furnish,

install, and connect the control instrumentation equipment as specified herein and indicated on

the Drawings.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


1. Motor Starters

2. Contactors

3. Control Stations

4. Relays

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER

A. Unless otherwise indicated, acceptable manufacturers of equipment and items specified in this

section shall be one of the following:

1. Square D

2. Allen Bradley

3. General Electric

4. Siemens

5. Eaton Cutler Hammer

2.2 MOTOR STARTERS, MANUAL

A. Manual Motor Starter Specification No. MN-1.

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Square D Class 2510, single-speed, and Class 2512 two-speed.

2. Type: Manual motor starter with overloads, fractional horsepower.

3. 120/240 volts AC, single phase.

4. Surface mounted in unfinished spaces, flush mounted in finished spaces.

5. NEMA 1 enclosure.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 269010 - 2

6. Single speed, non-reversing.

7. With or without pilot light, as indicated.

8. Thermal overload protection in each ungrounded conductor.

9. 1 or 2 pole as required. Switch shall break each ungrounded conductor.

10. Handle guard/lock-off.

11. Hand-off-automatic switch, where indicated.

B. Manual Motor Starter Specification MN-2.

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Square D 2510.

2. Type: Manual motor starter without overloads.

3. AC manual motor starting switch.

4. 600 volts maximum.



7. With or without pilot light, as indicated.

8. 1, 2, or 3 pole as indicated or required. Switch shall break each ungrounded conductor.

9. Handle guard/lock-off.

2.3 COMBINATION MOTOR STARTERS

A. General: Combination motor starters shall be:

1. Manufactured and rated in accordance with NEMA standards.

2. Gravity drop-out.

3. Solid state overload protection in each ungrounded conductor as specified herein.

4. Suitable for addition of no less than four auxiliary contacts of any arrangement, normally

open (NO) or normally closed (NC), quantity as indicated on Drawings. One additional

NO auxiliary contact shall be provided in addition to the quantity indicated on Drawings.

If auxiliary contacts are not indicated, provide one NO contact.

5. Single speed, non-reversing, unless otherwise indicated.

6. Cover mounted manual reset.

7. Suitable for two or three wire control.

8. Heavy duty control devices for NEMA 1 enclosures, Control Device Specification No.1,

as specified herein.

9. Controls for other enclosures shall be suitable for the enclosure type, heavy duty.

10. Unless otherwise indicated or specified, motor starters indicated as not being combination

type shall be applicable starter type specified herein.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 269010 - 3

B. Disconnect devices for combination motor starters shall include:

1. Fusible or non-fusible disconnect switch or circuit breaker type, as indicated on

Drawings.

2. Unless otherwise noted, circuit breakers shall be as specified in Section 26 24 50,

Overcurrent Protective Devices, and disconnect switches shall be as specified in

Section 26 24 40, Disconnect Switches.

3. Padlock type disconnect handle for locking in the off position for no more than three

padlocks. Disconnect handle in continuous control of the disconnect switch or breaker.

4. Enclosure door in the closed position to permit operation of disconnect.

5. Enclosure door locking device when disconnect is in on position, unless a defeater is

deliberately activated.

6. Auxiliary normally open (NO) contact on disconnect, when indicated on Drawings.

7. Unless noted otherwise, fuse clips, for Class R rejection type fuses in fusible disconnect

switches.

C. Refer to Drawings for the following starter requirements:

1. Starter type.

2. NEMA size.

3. NEMA enclosure.

4. Ratings.

5. Control and pilot devices.

6. Control voltage.

7. Control transformer, fused secondary. (Do not provide transformer if control transformer

is not indicated.)

8. Other accessories and modifications.

D. Combination Motor Starter Specification No. CMS-1

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Square D Class 8538 switch type non-reversing, Class 8539

breaker type non-reversing, Class 8738 switch type reversing, Class 8739 breaker type

reversing.

2. Full voltage.

3. Single Speed.

2.4 CONTROL DEVICES

A. Control Device Specification No.1

1. 1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Square D Class 9001, heavy duty.

2. Heavy duty.

3. Manufactured in accordance with NEMA standards.

4. NEMA 1 enclosure, unless otherwise indicated.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 269010 - 4

5. Surface mounted, unless indicated.

6. Pushbuttons, selector switches and pilot lights as indicated on Drawings.

7. Push-to-test, 6 to 8 volt, transformer type pilot lights.

8. Colored pilot light lens as indicated on Drawings, or red if no color indicated. Colored

lens shall be interchangeable.

9. Silver contacts.

10. 600 volts AC, maximum; 10 amps continuous current carrying capacity at all AC

voltages.

11. Start pushbuttons shall have fully guarded or flush black button.

12. Stop pushbuttons shall have unguarded or extended red button.

13. Provide appropriate legend or nameplate.

14. Selector switches shall have standard operator, unless otherwise indicated.

15. Panic buttons shall have one NO and one NC contact, momentary contact, red mushroom

head.

2.5 CONTROL STATIONS

A. Control Station Specification No. 1

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Square D Class 9001.

2. NEMA 4.


4. Provide quantity of device mounting holes, as required.

2.6 RELAYS

A. Relay Specification No. 1

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Square D Class 8501.

2. Silver contacts, convertible.

3. 10 amp continuous current rating, 600 volts maximum.

4. Ratings, poles and enclosure as indicated on Drawings.

5. Electrically held, unless otherwise indicated.

2.7 TIME SWITCHES

A. Time Switch Specification No. 5

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Intermatic ET100C Series.

2. 24 hour, single channel electronic time switch.

3. Rated 30 amps per pole, 120/277 volts, single pole - single throw.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 269010 - 5

4. Up to 8 set points per 24 hours.

5. Battery carry-over.


7. Manual override.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General

1. Install control and instrumentation equipment in accordance with equipment

manufacturer’s instructions. Submit manufacturer’s printed installation instructions with


2. Individually mounted motor starter shall be mounted 5 feet above finished floor unless

otherwise noted.


Strada WVU Shroyer Hall Renovations Wiring of Mechanical Equipment

PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 269610 - 1

SECTION 269610 – WIRING OF MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. The Work of this Section shall include the labor, materials, and equipment required for

furnishing and installing the power and control wiring of mechanical equipment. It shall not

include control wiring specifically detailed as part of the building automation and automatic

temperature control system specified in Section 239010, Building Automation System.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Mechanical Contractor(s) shall furnish equipment with controls, starters and related items as

specified in various Sections of Divisions 21, 22 and 23.

B. Where mechanical equipment is specified without starters or controllers, Electrical Contractor

shall furnish and install same as specified herein.

C. Electrical Contractor shall furnish and install all power wiring unless specifically noted

otherwise.

D. Mechanical Contractor(s) shall furnish and install all control wiring unless specifically noted

otherwise.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Mechanical equipment shall be wired in accordance with the following schedule:

Key:

Item furnished by ...

Item installed by ...

Item wired by ...


P = Plumbing Contractor

F = Fire Protection Contractor

H = HVAC Contractor



O = Owner


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 269610 - 2

Fire Protection Equipment Wiring Schedule

Equipment


Rem

ote

Dis

con

nec

t S

wit

ch

Inte

gra

l D

isco

nnec

t S

wit

ch

Wal

l S

wit

ch

Co

rd &

Plu

g

Mag

net

ic M

oto

r S

tr

Co

mb

inat

ion

Moto

r S

tr

Man

ual

Mo

tor

Str

VF

D w

ith

Dis

con

nec

t

Co

nta

cto

r

L

ine

Volt

age

Sta

t

Lo

w V

olt

age

Sta

t

Aq

uas

tat

Du

ct S

mo

ke

Det

ecto

r

Co

ntr

ol

Pan

el

Flo

w/P

ress

/Lev

el S

wit

ch

BA

S/A

TC

Co

ntr

ol

Flow and Tamper

Switches F

F

E


Equipment


Rem

ote

Dis

connec

t S

wit

ch

Inte

gra

l D

isco

nnec

t S

wit

ch

Wal

l S

wit

ch

Cord

& P

lug

Mag

net

ic M

oto

r S

tr

Com

bin

atio

n M

oto

r S

tr

Man

ual

Moto

r S

tr

VF

D w

ith

Dis

connec

t

Conta

ctor

L

ine

Volt

age

Sta

t

Low

Volt

age

Sta

t

Aquas

tat

Duct

Sm

oke

Det

ecto

r

Contr

ol

Pan

el

Flo

w/P

ress

/Lev

el S

wit

ch

BA

S/A

TC

Contr

ol

Domestic Water

Heater

DWH-1

P E

P E

E E

Inline Circulation

Pump

CP-1

P E

P E

E E


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 269610 - 3


Equipment


Rem

ote

Dis

con

nec

t S

wit

ch

Inte

gra

l D

isco

nnec

t S

wit

ch

Wal

l S

wit

ch

Co

rd &

Plu

g

Mag

net

ic M

oto

r S

tr

Co

mb

inat

ion

Moto

r S

tr

Man

ual

Mo

tor

Str

VF

D w

ith

Dis

con

nec

t

Co

nta

cto

r

L

ine

Volt

age

Sta

t

Lo

w V

olt

age

Sta

t

Aq

uas

tat

Du

ct S

mo

ke

Det

ecto

r

Co

ntr

ol

Pan

el

Flo

w/P

ress

/Lev

el S

wit

ch

BA

S/A

TC

Co

ntr

ol

Sump Pump

SP-1 P P P

P P P

E E P

Air Compressor

AC-1 P P

P P

E E

Vacuum Pump

VP-1 P P

P P

E E

Distilled Water

Generator

STILL-1

P P P E

P P P E

E P E E

Water Softener

WS-1 P P

P P

E E


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 269610 - 4


Equipment


Rem

ote

Dis

con

nec

t S

wit

ch

Inte

gra

l D

isco

nnec

t S

wit

ch

Wal

l S

wit

ch

Co

rd &

Plu

g

Mag

net

ic M

oto

r S

tr

Co

mb

inat

ion

Moto

r S

tr

Man

ual

Mo

tor

Str

VF

D w

ith

Dis

con

nec

t

Co

nta

cto

r

L

ine

Volt

age

Sta

t

Lo

w V

olt

age

Sta

t

Aq

uas

tat

Du

ct S

mo

ke

Det

ecto

r

Co

ntr

ol

Pan

el

Flo

w/P

ress

/Lev

el S

wit

ch

BA

S/A

TC

Co

ntr

ol

DDC Circuits E

E

E

RTAH-1 H H H H

H H H H

E E E H

RTAH-1 UV Light H H H

H H H

E E H

CH-1 H H H H

H H H H

E E E H

B-1,2 H H H

H H H

E E H

CC-1 H E H

H E H

E E H


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 269610 - 5


Equipment


Rem

ote

Dis

con

nec

t S

wit

ch

Inte

gra

l D

isco

nnec

t S

wit

ch

Wal

l S

wit

ch

Co

rd &

Plu

g

Mag

net

ic M

oto

r S

tr

Co

mb

inat

ion

Moto

r S

tr

Man

ual

Mo

tor

Str

VF

D w

ith

Dis

con

nec

t

Co

nta

cto

r

L

ine

Volt

age

Sta

t

Lo

w V

olt

age

Sta

t

Aq

uas

tat

Du

ct S

mo

ke

Det

ecto

r

Co

ntr

ol

Pan

el

Flo

w/P

ress

/Lev

el S

wit

ch

BA

S/A

TC

Co

ntr

ol

EB-1 H H

H H

E H

P-1,2,3,4 H H H

H H H

E E H

GFS-1 H H H

H H H

E E H

F-1,2 H H H H

H H H H

E E E H

F-3,4,5,6,7,8,9 H H H

H H H

E E H

UH-1 H E H

H E H

E E H


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 269610 - 6


Equipment


Rem

ote

Dis

con

nec

t S

wit

ch

Inte

gra

l D

isco

nnec

t S

wit

ch

Wal

l S

wit

ch

Co

rd &

Plu

g

Mag

net

ic M

oto

r S

tr

Co

mb

inat

ion

Moto

r S

tr

Man

ual

Mo

tor

Str

VF

D w

ith

Dis

con

nec

t

Co

nta

cto

r

L

ine

Volt

age

Sta

t

Lo

w V

olt

age

Sta

t

Aq

uas

tat

Du

ct S

mo

ke

Det

ecto

r

Co

ntr

ol

Pan

el

Flo

w/P

ress

/Lev

el S

wit

ch

BA

S/A

TC

Co

ntr

ol

CUH-1-12 H H

H H

E H

ESB-1 (including all

accessories) H H H H

H H H H

E E E H



C. Electrical Contractor shall furnish and install wiring from duct smoke detector to fire alarm

panel. HVAC Contractor shall furnish and install wiring from normally open auxiliary contact

on duct smoke detector to control circuitry for shut down of equipment if duct smoke detector is

activated.


Common Requirements –

Strada WVU Shroyer Hall Renovations Telecommunications

PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 270515 - 1

SECTION 270515 – COMMON REQUIREMENTS – TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. The requirements stated in Section 200020, General Provisions – Electrical apply to this Section

as if fully repeated herein.

1.2 WORK INCLUDED

A. Telecommunications system work shall consist of labor, materials, and equipment required for

furnishing and installing the complete and operational telecommunications system.

B. The Telecommunications System includes work of the following Specification Sections:

1. Specifications:

Section 27 05 15 Common Requirements – Telecommunications Systems

Section 27 05 25 Grounding and Bonding for Telecommunications Systems

Section 27 05 30 Pathways for Telecommunications Systems

Section 27 11 10 Telecommunications Spaces, Equipment and Fittings

Section 27 13 10 Backbone Cabling – Telecommunications Systems

Section 27 15 10 Horizontal Distribution Cabling – Telecommunications Systems

Section 27 15 45 Faceplates and Connectors - Telecommunications Systems

Section 27 16 10 Connecting Cords, Devices and Adapters – Telecommunications

Systems

Section 27 19 10 Telecommunications Cable System Testing – Copper

Section 27 19 20 Telecommunications Cable System Testing – Fiber

Section 27 60 10 Telecommunications Systems Identification and Documentation

2. Drawings:

E0.01 Symbols, Abbreviations, & General Notes

E2.01 First Floor Plan – Power & Systems

E2.02 Second Floor Plan – Power & Systems

E2.03 Third Floor Plan – Power & Systems

E2.04 Fourth Floor Plan – Power & Systems


C. Telecommunications Work shall be bid as a subcontract to the Electrical contract.



PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 270515 - 2

1.3 TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING SYSTEM CONTRACTOR’S QUALIFICATIONS

A. Contractor shall be recognized by the manufacturer providing the cable system performance

warranty as an approved/certified installer of their product. Contractor shall be a Mohawk/CDT

accredited contractor. Furnish a certificate from the manufacturer with the shop drawings.

B. Contractor firm and all employees shall have at least 5 years experience in providing certified

communication cabling projects.

C. Contractor shall submit with shop drawings a list of the project team which shall include, as a

minimum, the project manager and foreman. Note on the list the personnel that have been

trained and certified by the data system manufacturer along with a brief description of their

experience and training. Changes to project staffing after contract award must be requested, in

writing, and approved by Owner prior to any changes.

D. At least 80% of the technicians on site shall be BICSI Level I or Level II certified with current

certificates available for review upon request. The foreman shall be, at minimum, BICSI Level

II. Contractor shall have at least one RCDD certified, or equivalent certification, designer on

staff.

E. Contractor shall have personnel trained and certified in Siemon Category 6 UTP and fiber optic

cable installation, termination and testing techniques. Personnel shall have experience using a

category rated cable tester, fiber optic light meter and power source and OTDR.

F. Submit, with shop drawings, a list of at least five certified communication cabling projects of

similar size completed and turned over to the Owner. Provide references with telephone

numbers for each project. Only provide projects where the listed project team members

participated.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Unless noted otherwise, the following items will be the responsibility of the Owner:

1. All electronics and active data networking equipment, etc.

2. Telephones, fax machines and modems, etc.

3. PC’s, printers, video display terminals, flat panel displays, etc.

4. Contact the Owner’s network and computer equipment personnel for specific instructions

before starting Work.

B. Furnish complete systems documentation as described herein, Section 27 60 10,

Telecommunications System Identification and Documentation, where required in other

specification sections and as required by Division 1.

C. Coordinate outlet locations with existing conditions and the work of other trades prior to rough-

in and installation. Any discrepancies between the work shown on the drawings and actual field

conditions shall immediately be brought to the attention of the Architect for resolution prior to

the start of construction.



PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 270515 - 3

D. Coordinate cable lengths with existing conditions and the work of other trades prior to rough-in

and installation. This coordination shall include, but is not limited to, conduit, cable tray and

pathways furnished and installed by other trades. The contractor shall verify that the installed

cables will not exceed the maximum allowable cable length, including all routing, rises, drops

and slack cable as required. Any discrepancies between the work shown on the drawings and

actual field conditions shall immediately be brought to the attention of the Architect for

resolution prior to the start of construction.

E. Coordinate with the Owner for the testing, removal from service, removal and relocation of any

cables or equipment owned and maintained by the Owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

(NOT USED)

PART 3 - EXECUTION




during construction process. These record documents shall be delivered to Owner either prior to

or with submission of Application for Final Payment.

B. Record drawings shall include:

1. The single line diagram of the building telecommunications distribution system provided

under this contract and;

2. Drawings indicating location and area served for all distribution.

3. Drawings indicating outlet locations and outlet numbers.

4. Cable distribution pathways.

5. Termination locations (other than in telecommunications spaces and outlets).

3.2 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS

A. Furnish an instructor/operator at completion of system(s) installation, who shall operate

system(s) in order to demonstrate fulfillment of contract requirements. During this time, Owner

shall be thoroughly versed in details of operation and maintenance.

B. A minimum of 2 sets of printed instructions covering operation and maintenance of each item of

equipment shall be submitted to Owner during this operating period. Required instructions from

manufacturer’s representatives shall be submitted at this time.

C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall include:



PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 270515 - 4

1. Submittal data stating equipment rating and selected options for each piece of equipment

requiring maintenance.

2. Manufacturers’ installation instructions for each cable system component and major

hardware component furnished and installed as part of this Work.

3. Operation and maintenance manuals for each piece of equipment requiring maintenance

with required routine maintenance actions clearly identified.

4. Names and addresses of at least one qualified service agency.

5. Complete narrative of how each system is intended to operate.

3.3 WARRANTIES

A. Provide a system warranty covering the installed telecommunications cable system against

defects in workmanship, components, and performance, and follow-on support after project

completion.

B. Installation Warranty: Contractor shall warrant the telecommunications cable system against

defects in workmanship for a period of two years from the date of system acceptance. The

warranty shall cover all labor and materials necessary to correct a failed portion of the system

and to demonstrate performance within the original installation specifications after repairs are

accomplished. This warranty shall be provided at no additional cost to the Owner.

C. Cable System Performance Warranty: Contractor shall facilitate a 25 Year Performance

Warranty between the manufacturer and the Owner. The performance warranty shall warrant

the installed Category rated UTP copper and the backbone optical fiber portions of the cabling

system. Copper links shall be warranted against the link performance minimum expected results

defined in the latest TIA/EIA standard, and the manufacturer's Network Cabling Contractor

Agreement. Fiber optic links shall be warranted against the link and segment performance

minimum expected results defined in the latest TIA/EIA standard, and the manufacturer's

Network Cabling Contractor Agreement. All other connectivity components shall be warranted

against defects in materials and workmanship for a period of 25 years.


Grounding and Bonding for


PD 9.15.16 Project No.: 15099 270525 - 1

SECTION 270525 – GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED


installation of the telecommunications grounding and bonding system as part of a complete and

operational telecommunications cable system. The specific application of these materials shall

be as outlined in this Section and Sections of this Division, and as indicated on the Drawings.

B. All items specified or included in this section shall be furnished and installed by Electrical

Contractor, wired and connected by Electrical Contractor and tested by Electrical Contractor,

unless noted otherwise. “Contractor” as used herein shall mean Electrical Contractor or

Electrical Contractor’s sub-contractor.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


1. Ground connectors

2. Grounding busbars

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Contractor shall furnish and install telecommunications grounding busbars, telecommunications

bonding backbone(s), grounding equalizer(s), and equipment bonding conductors to install a

complete telecommunications grounding system.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GROUND CONNECTORS

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Burndy/FCI, Thomas & Betts/Blackburn, or as approved.

B. Wire to Wire Connectors:

1. Burndy/FCI KS Series split bolt connector, or as approved.

2. Max Conductor Size:

a. Run: #3/0 AWG

b. Tap: #3/0 AWG

3. Wire Type: Solid or stranded copper.

4. Material: High conductivity copper or bronze alloy.



PD 9.15.16 Project No.: 15099 270525 - 2

5. Configuration: Split bolt.

C. Wire to Busbar/Equipment Connectors

1. Thomas & Betts/Blackburn Type L Mechanical Series, or as approved.

2. Max Conductor Size: As required.

3. Wire Type: Solid or stranded copper.

4. Material: High strength bronze alloy or copper.

5. Material: High strength bronze alloy or copper.

6. Configuration: Single conductor mechanical lug with two mounting holes in the tongue.

2.2 TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS MAIN GROUNDING BUSBAR

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Erico Electrical Products “TMGB” Series, Chatsworth or Newtown

Instrument Co.

B. Conforms to specifications of TIA/EIA 607.

C. 1/4 inch thick by 4 inches wide by 20 inches long copper bus bar with electro-tin plating.

D. BICSI hole pattern with 27 pairs of 5/16 inch holes - “A” pattern and 3 pairs of 7/16 inch holes -

“C” pattern.

E. Furnish with polyamide, glass fiber reinforced, stand-off insulators and stainless steel mounting

brackets and stainless steel fasteners.

F. All connections to the telecommunications ground bus shall be made using two-hole

compression connectors secured with two silicon bronze bolts, each with two washer, one lock

washer and nut.

2.3 TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS SECONDARY GROUNDING BUSBAR

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Erico Electrical Products “TGB” Series, Chatsworth or Newtown

Instrument Co.

B. Conforms to specifications of TIA/EIA 607.

C. 1/4 inch thick by 4 inches wide by 20 inches long copper bus bar with electro-tin plating.

D. BICSI hole pattern with 12 pairs of 5/16 inch holes - “A” pattern and 3 pairs of 7/16 inch holes -

“C” pattern.

E. Furnish with polyamide, glass fiber reinforced, stand-off insulators and stainless steel mounting

brackets and stainless steel fasteners.



PD 9.15.16 Project No.: 15099 270525 - 3

F. All connections to the telecommunications ground bus shall be made using two-hole

compression connectors secured with two silicon bronze bolts, each with two washer, one lock

washer and nut.

2.4 TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS GROUNDING BACKBONE AND BONDING

CONDUCTORS

A. Refer to Section 26 05 20, Wire and Cable, 600 Volts and Below, for types and requirements of

wire for telecommunications grounding backbone and bonding conductors.

B. Grounding and bonding conductors shall be Wire Specification No. 4.

C. Grounding and bonding conductors may be non-insulated wire.

D. Stranded or solid grounding and bonding conductors shall be selected based on wire size

requirements as indicated in Section 26 05 20, Wire and Cable, 600 Volts and Below.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Unless noted otherwise, the telecommunications grounding system shall be furnished and

installed in accordance with the TIA/EIA/J-STD-607-A, Commercial Building Grounding

(Earthing) and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications.

B. Unless noted otherwise, wires and connectors for telecommunications grounding system shall

be installed in accordance with the requirements of Section 26 05 20, Wire and Cable, 600 Volts

and Below.

C. Unless noted otherwise, ground busbars for telecommunications grounding system shall be

installed in accordance with the requirements of Section 26 05 60, Grounding Systems.

3.2 GROUNDING - GENERAL

A. Unless noted otherwise, conductive non-current carrying electrical materials and equipment

shall be grounded. Non-electrical items of equipment shall be bonded together and grounded as

indicated herein and on drawings. Grounding and bonding shall be in accordance with National

Electrical Code requirements.

B. Raceway system shall be grounded and shall be electrically and mechanically continuous from

all telecommunication rooms to system main ground point

C. Main system ground points shall be as indicated on Drawings. Exact location and point of

connection of main system grounds shall be verified during construction.

D. Grounding conductors shall be installed in telecommunications raceways unless noted

otherwise.



PD 9.15.16 Project No.: 15099 270525 - 4

E. Grounding conductors shall be bonded to raceway systems at 100 foot intervals in cable tray

systems and at the entrance and exit of conduits where grounding conductors are installed

through the conduit.

F. The contractor shall furnish and install ground wires from the telecommunications main

grounding busbar to each of the telecommunications grounding busbars in each

telecommunications space. Conductor size shall be as indicated on drawings

G. TMGBs and TGBs shall be mounted on the plywood backboards in each telecommunications

space. The mounts shall include two isolation bushings and two sets of mounting legs for each

bus bar.

H. The contractor shall furnish and install stranded ground wires from the ground bus bars in each

of the telecommunications spaces to the nearest point of connection of:

1. Local electrical distribution panel ground

2. Building steel

I. Conductor size shall be as indicated on Drawings.

J. Furnish and install ground wires, clamps, connectors, etc. as required to connect all racks,

cabinets, frames and all exposed conductive materials and equipment of each

telecommunications system to the ground bar/plate in each telecommunications space.

K. All exposed conductive elements telecommunications systems shall be bonded to the ground bar

in the telecommunications spaces.

L. Lightning protection equipment (primary and secondary protectors) shall be bonded to ground

with a minimum as required by manufacturers recommended wire size and type.

M. Cable shields and splice enclosures shall be bonded to ground as required by the manufacturer’s

recommendations, #10 AWG minimum.

N. Equipment chassis, racks, cabinets and frames shall be bonded to ground as required by the

manufacturer’s recommendations or in lieu of manufacturer’s recommendations as follows:

1. Size grounding conductors as required by the NEC for the largest amperage electrical

circuit available at the specific equipment, rack or cabinet.


Strada WVU Shroyer Hall Renovations Pathways for Telecommunications Systems

PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 270530 - 1

SECTION 270530 – PATHWAYS FOR TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED


furnishing and installing raceways as part of a complete and operating telecommunications

cabling system.


A. Section 26 05 05, Basic Materials: Fire stop sealing system.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


1. All components of the telecommunications raceway system(s), as specified herein.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Contractor shall furnish and install the following:

1. Conduits for telecommunications service and distribution.

2. Innerduct in underground conduits and innerduct inside building for fiber optic cable.

3. Conduits, raceways, sleeves, pull boxes, and outlet boxes.

4. Surface metallic raceway and all required accessories

5. Cable tray and all fittings.

6. A #14 fish wire or Jet Line No. 232 pull rope in each spare run of conduit and in each

spare run of innerduct.

7. Outlet boxes, outlet plates, straps, jacks and adapters in wall boxes.

8. Floor boxes, outlet plates, straps, jacks and adapters in floor boxes.

9. Boxes above ceilings, outlet plates, straps, jacks and adapters in boxes above ceiling.

10. Conduits from outlet boxes to above accessible ceilings in corridors (or to accessible

location if ceilings are not accessible).

11. “J” hook cable supports and associated hardware.

12. Firestopping for conduits, cable tray and conduit sleeve penetrations. Contractor shall

coordinate specific requirements with the Electrical Contractor in order to furnish and

install a UL Classified Firestop System at each penetration in rated assemblies.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 270530 - 2

B. Electrical Contractor shall furnish and install the following:

C. Coordinate location of outlets with the work of other trades prior to rough-in.

D. Coordinate location of raceways with the work of other trades prior to rough-in.

E. Coordinate location of outlets for connection to equipment (fire alarm, elevator controls,

automatic temperature controls, security, etc.) prior to rough-in.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RACEWAYS

A. Refer to Section 26 05 30, Raceways, for raceway types and requirements.

B. Raceways for interior cabling shall be Raceway Specification No. 2 in walls and above all

inaccessible ceilings.

C. Raceways above accessible ceilings shall be as noted on Drawings and as specified herein:

1. Main Pathways: J-hooks or other non-continuous raceway system.

2. Branch Pathways: J-hooks or other non-continuous raceway system.

D. Raceways in telecommunications spaces shall be Cable Tray, Cable Runway Type, Raceway


E. Surface metallic raceway shall be Surface Metallic Raceway Spec No. SMR- 4.

2.2 INNERDUCT

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Endot Industries “ENDOCOR/PL”, or Middle Atlantic.

B. Color: Orange.

C. Size(s) as indicated.

D. Corrugated duct, unless noted.

E. Factory installed pull tape

F. Interior, approved for use in air plenums.

G. Exterior, High Density Polyethylene (HDPE)

H. All fiber optic backbone cables shall be installed in innerduct.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 270530 - 3

2.3 J-HOOKS

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Erico “Caddy Fastener System – Cable CAT 32 Wide Base Cable

Support System”, or Snake Hook.

B. Specifically designed for category rated and fiber optic cables.

C. 2 inch diameter loop.

D. Wide base.

E. Steel construction.

F. With mounting hardware as required by mounting location and surface.

G. Brackets for ganging multiple hooks at a single location where more than one hook is required.

2.4 DUCT PLUGS

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Tyco Electronics Jack Moon Series, or as approved.

B. Blank, simplex, triplex, quadplex or custom plug configurations for conduits with installed

cables.

C. High impact plastic compression plates.

D. Elastic expansion gaskets.

E. Constructed of corrosive resistant materials.

F. Blank plugs shall have high-impact plastic compression hardware with pull tape tie loop on

back compression plate.

G. Cable entry seals shall be split design for retrofit and addition of cables.

H. Cable entry seals shall have stainless steel compression hardware.

I. Size and configuration as required by application.

J. Furnish and install duct plugs at all conduit entrances and exits in manholes, building entrances

and at stub-ups to telephone poles.

1. Furnish and install blank duct plugs in unused conduit and innerduct.

2. Furnish and install cable entry seal duct plugs in conduit and innerduct containing cables.

K. Furnish and install cable entry seals with all required accessories, including but not limited to

bushing sleeves and hole plugs.

L. Pull tapes shall be fed through and captured by cable entry seal duct plugs.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 270530 - 4

2.5 OUTLET BOXES

A. Refer to Section 26 05 40, Boxes, for box types and requirements.

B. Unless noted otherwise, outlet boxes shall be Box Specification No. 1. Masonry boxes shall not

be used for telecommunications outlets.

C. Furnish and install recessed boxes for wall mount telecommunications outlets as follows:

1. 4-11/16 inches x 4-11/16 inches square, 2-1/8 inches deep.

2. Single or double gang plaster ring as required by outlet type.

3. Plaster ring depth sized for wall type.

D. Furnish and install fittings for surface mount telecommunications outlets as follows:

1. Single or double gang raceway adapter as required by outlet and raceway type.

2. Items, as required, for installation of jacks and blanks, as specified in Section 26 05 40.

E. Furnish and install recessed boxes for ceiling mount telecommunications outlets as follows:



3. Plaster ring depth sized for ceiling type.

4. Tile bridge to support ceiling mount back boxes, faceplates and connections.

F. Furnish and install boxes for above ceiling telecommunications outlets as follows:



3. 4 inch L-bracket or other approved hardware for attaching box to beam clamp.

4. Beam clamp or other approved hardware for attaching box to structure above ceiling.

G. Furnish and install outlet boxes for equipment connections as follows:

1. 6 inches x 6 inches x 4 inches square NEMA 1 enclosure.

2. Minimum 1 inch conduit between NEMA 1 enclosure and equipment enclosure. Increase

conduit size if needed to enclose additional connections.

3. Surface mount box

a. 1 or 2 port as required, refer to Drawings for cable and connector type and

quantity.

b. To match manufacturer of connectors and faceplates. Refer to Section 27 15 45,

Faceplates and Connectors – Telecommunications Systems.

H. Furnish and install from each outlet box a minimum 1 inch conduit run concealed in floor

and/or wall to above accessible ceiling and stub out. Install larger conduit as indicated on

Drawings.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 270530 - 5

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General

1. All raceways, boxes and associated hardware shall be placed so as to make efficient use

of available space in coordination with other uses. All raceways and associated hardware

shall be placed so as to not impair the use or capacity of other building systems,

equipment, or hardware placed by others (or existing).

2. All raceways shall be installed as required in Section 26 05 30, Raceways.

3. All boxes shall be installed as required in Section 26 05 40, Boxes.

4. Unless noted otherwise, category rated cables shall be installed in separate raceways than

other systems cables.

5. Wiring above accessible ceilings may be installed in cable tray or on J-hooks as indicated

herein.

6. Installation of cable pathways shall allow for easily access for addition and removal of

cables in the future.

7. Do not attach raceways to pipes, conduits, ducts, etc. Do not attach to wires used for

supporting suspended ceilings.

8. The use of tie-wires or bridle rings is not acceptable for cable pathways or supports.

9. Cable pathways shall be installed to ensure that it is possible to install cables to have a

minimum bending radius greater than 10 times cable diameter.

10. Open cable pathways (e.g. cable trays and J-hooks) shall not be placed near power

sources or other items where interference could develop. Open cable pathways shall be

installed so that cables are not placed within 18 inches of light fixtures and within 3 feet

of motors, transformers, copy machines, or solid state motor starters unless cable is

installed in grounded conduit. Contractor shall furnish and install a grounding conduit

system where these minimum clearances cannot be maintained.

11. Furnish and install a #14 jet line or #232 pull rope in all raceways. Pull lines and pull

tapes in occupied conduits and cable shall be installed after all cable is pulled. Pull lines

and pull tapes installed with or used for pulling cables are not acceptable.

12. Cable raceways and pathways shall be documented on the Project Record Documents.

B. Raceways

1. Furnish and install cable tray where indicated on Drawings, and as otherwise required.

2. All cable trays shall be routed so as to avoid interference with any other service or

system, operation, or maintenance purposes such as access boxes, network equipment,

mechanical equipment access doors and covers, switches, electrical panels and lighting

fixtures. Avoid crossing areas horizontally just above or below any riser conduit.

3. Furnish and install cable tray at ceilings of all telecommunications spaces and other areas

where telecommunications terminations, racks, cabinets, enclosures and equipment are


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 270530 - 6

located. Furnish and install all fittings and accessories including by not limited to “tees”,

elbows, drop-outs, etc.

4. Furnish and install sleeves as indicated on Drawings and as required to install all

telecommunications and system cables. Refer to drawing details for additional conduit

sleeve requirements.

5. Unless noted otherwise, furnish and install sleeves through all wall penetrations to

continue cable pathways. Cable tray shall not be installed through wall penetrations.

6. Furnish and install a minimum of one 2 inch conduit sleeve to each classroom. Furnish

and install additional 2 inch conduit sleeves as required based on quantity of cables to be

installed.

7. Furnish and install hardware as required to attach raceways (including J-hooks) to

building structure. Telecommunications cable support systems shall not be attached to or

supported by conduits, boxes, pipe, ceiling support systems or the work of other trades,

other than the building structure. Cables shall not be directly supported by the work of

other trades or building structure.

C. Innerduct

1. All interior fiber optic cables shall be installed in innerduct.

a. All interior fiber cables shall be installed in innerduct to within 12 inches

maximum of termination enclosure.

b. Install pullboxes, 12 inches x 12 inches minimum, as required to limit cable pulls

to two (2) 90 degree bends or 150 feet.

c. Innerduct shall not be kinked or tightly bent in any way.

D. J-Hooks

1. Furnish and install hanger brackets/assemblies/loops as required to support all data and

voice cable at no greater than 48 inches with no greater than 3 inches sag between

supports.

2. Do not install more than 50 cables per hook.

3. All wiring in the J-hook fasteners shall be securely clamped using the plenum rated tie-

wrap Erico part number” CATTRC”, number as required.

4. J-hooks shall only support data and voice cabling. No other cabling (i.e.; HVAC control,

video, fire alarm, sound, power, etc.) shall be supported by these systems.

5. Furnish and install multiple runs of J-hooks along pathways which will have greater than

40 category rated cables.

E. Outlet Box

1. Mounting Heights

a. Install system components at the following mounting heights. Coordinate location

and mounting heights of all outlets with Owner prior to rough-in.

1) Data and Telephone Wall Outlets: 18 inches above finished floor.

2) Data and Telephone Wall Outlets, Above Counter: 6 inches above counter

backsplash. Install horizontally at same height if vertical installation is not

possible. Coordinate these conditions with Architect prior to rough-in.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 270530 - 7

3) Wireless Access Point Outlets: Install above ceiling at location shown

attached to structure with 4 inch mounting angle and beam clamp or other

detachable attachment method.

4) Equipment Outlets: Coordinate with contractor responsible for furnishing

and installing the system.

2. Contractor shall coordinate locations of telecommunications outlet boxes with boxes and

devices to be installed for other systems.

3. Unless noted otherwise, all interior wiring shall be installed in raceways where exposed

ceilings are located, Raceway Specification No. 2, one inch minimum. Furnish and install

conduit from each outlet box to above accessible ceiling and turn out. Where an outlet is

in an area without an accessible ceiling, the contractor shall continue the conduit from

above the outlet to an area of accessible ceiling or access panel.

4. Coordinate location of outlets for equipment connections to elevator controls with

General Contractor. Coordinate location of outlets for equipment connections to

automatic temperature control and building automation systems with Mechanical or

HVAC Contractor. Install outlets for equipment connections adjacent to equipment

enclosures. Outlet enclosures shall be connected to equipment enclosures with conduit

where possible. Where warranty of equipment does not allow this conduit connection

directly to the equipment enclosure, the conduit shall be installed to within 3 inches of

enclosure and the conduit and opening in the equipment enclosure shall have bushings

installed.


Telecommunications Spaces

Strada WVU Shroyer Hall Renovations Equipment and Fittings

PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 271110 - 1

SECTION 271110 – TELECOMMUNICATIONS SPACES, EQUIPMENT AND FITTINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED


furnishing and installing equipment and fittings as part of a complete and operating

telecommunications cabling system.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


1. Racks and enclosures.

2. Cable management hardware.

3. Patch panels, all types.

4. Punch down blocks.

5. Primary and secondary building entrance protection.

6. Optical fiber termination enclosures, rack and wall mount.

7. Optical fiber connectors.

8. Surge protection devices.

9. Power strips.

10. For each cable and equipment cabinet and rack, prior to construction, the vendor shall

develop and submit, for approval by Engineer, the elevation of the front of each cable and

equipment cabinet and rack.

11. For each telecommunications space, prior to construction, develop and submit, for

approval by Engineer, drawings of each telecom room indicating layout of all items of

equipment including layout of racks, cabinets, blocks, rings, cross connects, backboards,

etc., and ceiling supports for and routing of all cables (including CATV equipment where

applicable).

1.3 COORDINATION


1. Racks

2. Enclosures

3. Patch panels



PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 271110 - 2

4. Cable management panels.

5. Building entrance terminal and protectors.

6. Fiber optic termination enclosures.

7. Fiber optic connectors.

8. Fiber optic cable management.

9. Plywood backboards.

10. Primary and secondary building entrance protection

11. Surge protection devices

B. Unless noted otherwise, the following items will be the responsibility of the Owner:




C. Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner’s network and computer equipment personnel for

specific instructions before starting Work.

D. Contractor shall coordinate with the General Contractor for location and type of blocking to be

installed in the walls to support wall mounted equipment.

E. Contractor shall coordinate location of electrical receptacles to be installed on raceways, racks

or inside cabinets.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RACEWAYS

A. Raceways in telecommunications spaces shall be Cable Tray, Cable Runway Type, Raceway



A. Acceptable Manufacturer: CPI, Homaco, or Cooper/B-Line.

B. Type: Cable tray, cable runway type

C. UL Classified and Listed.

D. Rung Spacing: 9 inches on centers.

E. Loading Depth:

1. 4 inch bundles attached to cable runway.



PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 271110 - 3

2. For loading depths greater than 4 inches, contractor shall furnish and install vertical cable

retaining posts.

F. Furnish and install all connectors and fittings, as required. Where cables drop out of the cable

tray, “drop-out” fittings shall be furnished and installed.

G. Cable tray shall be approved as a ground conductor or ground conductor clamps shall be

furnished and installed for each section with appropriate sized ground wire between sections.

H. Width as indicated on Drawings.

I. Material: Steel.

J. Finish: Black powder coat

2.3 PUNCH DOWN BLOCKS

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Siemon Company, or Hubbell, AMP, Superior Modular Products.

B. Punch down blocks shall be 110-type with wall-mount legs. Punch down blocks shall be rated

for Category 6. The contractor shall furnish and install blocks and connecting clips to terminate

all telephone pairs (backbone and horizontal distribution) in each telecommunications space.

Include 25 percent spare capacity (space and connecting clips) on all horizontal distribution

punch down blocks in each closet.

C. 110-type Punch Down Blocks

1. 25-pair, 50-pair and 100-pair wiring blocks, wall mounted

a. For copper telephone backbone cables

b. 110-type with wall-mount legs

c. Material: Polycarbonate UL 94 V-O

d. Accepts Solid or Stranded 26-22 AWG copper conductors

2. Connecting clips

a. 5-pair for backbone applications, unless noted otherwise

b. 4-pair for horizontal distribution applications, unless noted otherwise

c. Category rated to match category rating of cable as required by application.

d. Material: Polycarbonate UL 94 V-O

e. Insulation Displacement Contacts

1) Contact material: Phosphor bronze

2) Contact Plating: Tin/lead solder

3) Accepts solid or 7 conductor stranded 26-22 AWG copper conductors

D. Furnish and install punch down blocks with labels and label holders.

E. Furnish and install protective covers for punch down blocks. Cover colors shall be as follows:

1. Demarcation point – Orange

2. First level backbone – White



PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 271110 - 4

3. Second level backbone – Gray

4. Network connections – Blue

5. Connection to telephone equipment – Purple

6. Horizontal distribution – Blue

7. Alarms, security, building automation systems – Yellow

8. Connections for fire alarm and life safety systems – Red

F. Furnish and install block accessories and cable management accessories including “D”-rings,

spools and clamps to manage all cables, cross-connects and patch cords.

G. Furnish and install blocks and connecting clips to terminate telephone pairs (backbone,

horizontal distribution and cross-connect from building entrance protectors and telephone

equipment) in each telecommunications space.

H. Furnish and install 25% spare capacity, block space [and connecting clips] on all horizontal

distribution punch down blocks in each closet.

2.4 PATCH PANELS

A. UTP Patch Panels (Category 6)

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Hubbell “NEXTSPEED” Series.

2. 48-port and 24-port as indicated on Drawings.

3. Non-keyed, unshielded, 4-pair

4. 8-position, 8-wire (RJ-45)

5. Accommodates T568A and T5698B wiring

6. Nose Contacts:

a. Beryllium copper with a minimum of 50-micro inch gold plating over nickel under

plating.

7. Insulation displacement terminals.

a. 110 blocks: Polycarbonate.

b. Jack Contacts: Phosphor bronze with 100 micro-inch tin lead 60/40 over nickel

under plating.

c. Terminates 22-24 AWG solid conductors.

8. Minimum Contact Force: 100 grams with FCC compliant 8-position plug

9. Mating Cycles: 2000+ with FCC compliant 8-position plug.

10. Component Performance shall meet ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1 Category 6 component

requirements.

11. Panel shall be constructed of 14 gage steel, rolled edge construction with black powder

coat finish. Panel shall be standard 19 inch rack mount.



PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 271110 - 5

2.5 FIBER OPTIC RACK MOUNT ENCLOSURE

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Hubbell FCR Series, or Superior Modular Products.

B. “Technician’s Side” for securing, storing slack, arranging and securing the fiber optic cable.

C. “User’s Side” with same features for management of fiber optic patch cords.

D. Quick release latches.

E. Patch cord tie-down features.

F. Tinted, removable Plexiglas cover.

G. 16 gage cold rolled steel construction.

H. Black powder coat finish.

I. Accepts adapter panels as specified herein. Furnish and install type as specified and quantity as

required.

J. Blank panels furnished and installed to close all unused adapter space(s).

2.6 FIBER OPTIC ADAPTER PANELS

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Hubbell “FSP” Series, or Superior Modular Products.

B. For installation in the fiber optic rack mount enclosure and in the fiber optic patch panels.

C. Single and multi-mode applications.

D. Standard density version, 6 adapter capacity.

E. Loaded with SC style fiber optic connectors.

F. Quick, snap-in installation.

2.7 FIBER OPTIC CONNECTORS

A. SC Fiber Optic Connectors – APC Finish (Epoxy)

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Corning Cable Systems.

2. Heat-cure epoxy type.

3. Singlemode and multimode SC connectors for data network cable shall be duplex

connectors.

4. Singlemode SC connectors for telephone and CATV backbone cable shall be simplex

connectors.



PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 271110 - 6

5. Zirconia ceramic ferrule.

6. TIZ/EIA-568-B.3 compliant.

7. Strain relief boot.

8. Connector parameters shall meet or exceed the following:

a. Mated pair insertion loss: >.50dB

b. Singlemode Reflectance: < -65 dB

2.8 FLOOR MOUNT RACKS


B. Extruded aluminum construction, black finish.

C. 19 inches mounting width by 84 inches height with 16 inch full width base. 500 lb. static weight

capacity.

D. Double sided 12/24 tapped holes, 5/8 inch, 5/8 inch, 1/2 inch EIA standard hole pattern, pre-

threaded holes, 45 rack mount units.

E. 6 inch deep mounting rails.

F. Furnish and install vertical wire management channels on both side of rack, type as specified.

G. Furnish and install horizontal wire management units, quantity and type as specified.

H. Furnish and install ground terminal block/lug for each rack and #6 ground wire to room ground

bus bar.

2.9 VERTICAL CABLE MANAGERS

A. Vertical Cable Manager Specification No. 1

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: CPI Double Sided Wide Vertical Cable Section.

2. For use with Floor Mount Racks

3. 7 feet height, 6 inch width, 12 inch depth (nominal).

4. Material: Steel channel and cover. Steel channel shall have coated grommet material on

exposed edges.

5. Black finish.

6. Universal mounting hole pattern.

7. Pass through holes, front to rear.

8. Integral cable latches.

9. Furnish and install with front and rear steel cover.



PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 271110 - 7

2.10 HORIZONTAL CABLE MANAGERS


B. 19 inch rack mount steel panel.

C. Front and rear finger type manager.

D. Pass through knock outs in panel.

E. Hinged front and rear cover.

F. 1 or 2 rack units high as indicated on Drawings.

G. Black finish.

H. Furnish and install a horizontal cable management unit beneath each patch panel in each rack

and indicated on the rack elevations on the Drawings..

2.11 PLYWOOD BACKBOARDS

A. 3/4 inch plywood, size as indicated for plywood backboards in Part 3 – Plywood Backboards.

B. 3-5 ply, 3-layer interior C-D plugged grade or better as defined by the National Institute of

Standards and Technology Voluntary Product Standard PS1-07.

2.12 SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Leviton Model 5500-192.

B. Furnish and install one 19 inch rack mount multi-outlet power strip with surge protection in

each rack and cabinet.

C. Strip shall have ten rear-mounted receptacles and two front-mounted receptacles.

D. Strip shall be rated for 20 Amps load current.

E. Each receptacle shall provide normal mode (L-N) and common mode (L-G, N-G) protection.

F. On/Off rocker switch.

G. Outlet polarity/ground status LED diagnostics.

H. Re-settable overload circuit breaker.

I. 12 feet length power supply load.

J. Unit shall continue to provide power if protection is lost.



PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 271110 - 8

K. UL listed, 1449, 2nd edition.

L. Tested to ANSI/IEEE C62.41 for categories A & B.

M. Maximum continuous operating Voltage – 135V.

N. Clamping performance as follows, for normal mode (common mode in parenthesis):

1. Maximum single pulse transient current (8 x 20 µs, amps peak), 33,000 A (26,000 A).

2. EMI/RFI noise rejection at 50 ohms 5 KHz; 100 KHz; 50-60dB (30-40dB).

3. CAT A ring wave (6 KV, 200A, 100 KHz); 190V.

4. CAT B ring wave (6 KV, 500A, 100 KHz); 210V.

5. CAT B impulse (6 KV, 3KVA, 8 x 20 µs); 310V.

6. UL 1449 ratings (8 x 20 µs at 500A) (L-N/L-G/N-G); 330/330/330 volts

2.13 BUILDING ENTRANCE PROTECTORS

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Porta Systems.

B. 25-pair, 50-pair and 100-pair as required by application.

C. Housing and cover constructed of 18 gage steel, epoxy powder coated.

D. Input terminations shall be 110 type.

E. Output terminations shall be 110 type.

F. Protector Modules:

1. 5-pin module.

2. Solid state heat coil.

3. Tin/lead alloy plated contact over spring tempered phosphor base metal.

4. 240V rated.

5. Clamping time less than 5 nanoseconds.

6. Furnish and install quantities sufficient for protecting all incoming and outgoing pairs.

7. Furnish 5 spares per protector.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. All termination hardware shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s recommended

procedures.



PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 271110 - 9

B. All hardware shall be placed so as to make efficient use of available space in coordination with

other uses. All wiring and associated hardware shall be placed so as to not impair the use or

capacity of other building systems, equipment, or hardware placed by others (or existing).

C. Hardware shall be installed as to avoid interference with any other service or system, operation,

or maintenance purposes such as access boxes, equipment, mechanical equipment access doors

and covers, switches or electrical panels, and lighting fixtures. Hardware shall be installed to

maintain a minimum 36 inch working clearances in the front and rear of all racks and cabinets

wherever possible.

D. Contractor shall install electrical receptacles on racks, cable runways or inside cabinets.

Electrical receptacles serving racks and cabinets shall be installed at the base of the vertical

cable managers at the rear of the rack.

E. Contractor shall attach all floor mount racks and cabinets to building structure with hardware as

required by manufacturer, 3/8 inch hardware minimum. Furnish and install seismic rated

hardware where required by local codes. Furnish and install raised floor mounting kits where

racks and cabinets are installed on raised floors.

F. Contractor shall attach all wall mount racks and cabinets to building structure with hardware as

required by the manufacturer. All wall mount racks and cabinets shall be mounted on plywood

backboards. Wall mount racks and cabinets on gypsum wall board walls shall be attached

through the plywood and fastened to wood studs or wood blocking in the wall.

G. Rack configurations indicated on Drawings are typical and may not reflect final installation in

all telecommunications spaces. Contractor shall coordinate final rack layouts with fiber

termination enclosures, patch panels, wire management panels, equipment and equipment to be

furnished and installed by the Owner prior to installation.

H. Punch down blocks shall be mounted on plywood backboard.

I. Contractor is responsible for obtaining minimum loss and reflectance in fiber connections and

polishing in accordance with manufacturer’s specifications. The contractor may fusion splice

factory terminated pigtails to obtain the fiber optic connector performance required. Contractor

shall furnish and install splice trays, splice tray holders, enclosures, splice protection, etc. for

installation of spliced pigtails. Fiber connectors shall be as specified herein. Fiber pigtails shall

be manufactured with fiber optic performance characteristics as indicated in Section 27 13 10,

Backbone Cabling – Telecommunications Systems. Contractor shall provide additional racks

and cabinets as required to accommodate splice enclosures.

J. Backbone termination blocks shall be situated on the left side of the wall mount termination

field. Horizontal distribution cables shall be situated on the right side of the wall mount

termination field.

K. Cable tray shall be installed in accordance with the requirements of Section 26 05 30, Raceways

and Section 27 05 30, Pathways for Telecommunications Systems.

L. Furnish and install quantity of Velcro wraps as required for proper cable bundling, organization

and support. Plastic or nylon cable ties will not be accepted for use on any category rated cable.



PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 271110 - 10

M. Contractor shall coordinate with General Contractor for placement of blocking in walls where

wall mount cabinets are to be installed.

N. Furnish and install 3/4 inch wide hook and loop fasteners to bundle all cables in

telecommunications spaces and other areas of telecommunications cable termination, minimum

8 inches in length; provide by Panduit or HellermanTyton.

O. All copper wires of each cable of every type system entering a building shall be provided with

proper surge and current protection where it enters (and exits) the building as close to the

entrance and exit point as possible.

P. Contractor shall install cards and connections as required to connect UPS systems to the

Owner’s network equipment. The contractor shall program and configure the UPS system to

operate on the Owner’s network. The Contractor shall coordinate installation, configuration,

network and IP addresses, etc. with the Owner as required.

3.2 PLYWOOD BACKBOARDS

A. Plywood backboards shall be installed on three walls of telecommunications rooms.

B. Plywood backboards shall be installed from corner to corner with no gaps between boards.

Plywood backboards shall be attached across a minimum of three wall studs. Install plywood

backboards in a horizontal orientation where possible to span more than three wall studs.

C. Where plywood backboards smaller than 8 foot by 4 foot are indicated, the minimum size shall

be 4 foot by 4 foot and shall be installed to span across three wall studs.

D. Install plywood backboards in telecommunications rooms at 12 inches AFF to the bottom edge

of the backboard and 108 inches to the top edge of the backboard.

E. Plywood backboards in telecommunications spaces shall be painted front and back and all edges

with two coats of white fire retardant paint.


Backbone Cabling –

Strada WVU Shroyer Hall Renovations Telecommunications Systems

PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 271310 - 1

SECTION 271310 – BACKBONE CABLING – TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED


furnishing and installing backbone cabling as part of a complete and operating


1.2 SUBMITTALS


1. Components of the telecommunications system, as specified herein.

1.3 COORDINATION


1. Inside plant fiber optic backbone cables.

2. Outside plant copper backbone cables

3. Outside plant fiber optic backbone cables

1.4 CABLE TESTING

A. Wire and cable shall be safety and application tested, performance tested and shall have this

information and the Manufacturer’s Information affixed to the wire and cable as specified in

Section 260505, Basic Materials.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FIBER OPTIC CABLES

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Mohawk/CDT or Belden.

B. Cable may be either of composite cable construction or standard cable containing single-mode

fibers in one cable sheath and multi-mode fibers in a separate cable sheath. Contractor shall

verify raceway fill requirements when furnishing and installing two standard cable

constructions to meet composite strand count requirements.

C. Fiber Cable Specification No. 6 – Inside Plant, Riser



PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 271310 - 2

1. Cable Construction:

a. Distribution type.

b. Individually jacketed bundles for strand counts greater than 24.

c. Central Strength Member:

1) Up to 24 strand: Aramid yarn.

2) Greater than 24-strand: Flexible glass/epoxy rod.

2. Jacket Material: Fire retardant PVC, OFNR rated.

3. Fiber Count: As indicated on Drawings (single mode/multimode).

4. Fiber Type:

a. Single-mode: 8.2/125.

b. Multimode: 62.5/125.

5. 900 micron tight buffered fibers.

6. Color Code: TIA/EIA-598-A, Optical Fiber Cable Color Coding.

7. Jacket Color: Orange

8. Maximum Pulling Tension:

a. Up to 12 strand: 660 N (148 lb/f) during installation, 198 N (45 lb/f) installed.

b. 18 strand and above: 1320 N (297 lb/f) during installation, 396 N (89 lb/f)

installed.

9. Storage Temperature: -40 to +70 degrees C (-40 to +158 degrees F).

10. Installation Temperature: -10 to +60 degrees C (+14 to +140 degrees F).

11. Operating Temperature: -20 to +70 degrees C (-4 to +158 degrees F).

D. Optical Fiber Performance Requirements (OSP and ISP fiber cables)

1. Glass Transmission Media - Single Mode

a. Acceptable Manufacturer: Corning SMF-28e Optical Fiber, no substitutions.

b. Dispersion unshifted, low water peak.

c. Proof tested to 100 kpsi

d. Cable cutoff wave length <1260 nm.

e. Glass Geometry:

1) Fibercurl: > 4.0mm radius of curvature.

2) Cladding Diameter: 125.0 ± 0.7 µm

3) Core: Clad Concentricity: - < 0.50 µm

4) Cladding Non Circularity: < 1.0%.

f. Cabled Fiber Optical Performance:

1) 1310 nm: - < 0.4 dB/Km, maximum

2) 1383 nm: ± 3 nm ≤ 22 dB/Km

3) 1550 nm: < 0.20 dB/Km, maximum

4) Zero Dispersion Wave Length: 1302 ≤ wavelength ≤ 1322

5) Zero Dispersion Slope: 0.086 psi/(nm.km)

6) Refractive Index Difference: 0.36%

7) Numerical Aperture: 0.14

8) In compliance with TIA/EIA 492-CAAB and Telecordia’s GR-20.

9) Enhanced water peak at 1383 nm.

2. Glass Transmission Media – Multimode 62.5/125



PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 271310 - 3

a. Acceptable Manufacturer: Corning Cable Systems ‘ENHANCED” 62.5/125 µm

Fiber, no substitutions.

b. The multimode fiber shall meet EIA/TIA-92AAAA-A-1997, “Detail Specification

for 62.5-µm Core Diameter/125-µm Cladding Diameter Class Ia Graded-Index

Multimode Optical Fibers.”

c. 100 Kpsi Proof Tested

d. Glass Geometry

1) Core Diameter: (µm) 62.5 ± 3.0

2) Core Non-Circularity: < 5%

3) Cladding Diameter: (µm) 125.0 ± 2.0

4) Cladding Non-Circularity: (µm) < 1.0%

5) Core-to-Cladding Concentricity: (µm) < 1.5

6) Numerical Aperture: 0.275 ± 0.015

7) Coating Diameter: (µm) 245 ± 5

8) Colored Fiber Nominal Diameter: (µm) 253 – 259

e. Cabled Fiber Optical Performance

1) Attenuation (dB/km): 850 nm < 3.5, 1300 nm < 1.0

2) Minimum LED Bandwidth: 850 nm, 200; 1300 nm 500

3) Cabled Effective Modal Bandwidth: (MHz•Km): 850 nm > 385

4) IEEE 802.3 GbE Distance (m): 850 nm, 500; 1300 nm, 1000

5) IEEE 802.3 10GbE Distance (m): 850 nm, 33

3. Glass Transmission Media – Multimode 50/125

a. Acceptable Manufacturer: Corning “InfiniCor” eSX+ 50/125 µm Fiber, or Hitachi

Cable Manchester.

b. The multimode fiber shall meet EIA/TIA-492AAAC-A, “Detail Specification for

50-µm Core Diameter/125-µm Cladding Diameter, Graded-Index, Multimode

Optical Fibers.”

c. 100 Kpsi Proof Tested

d. Glass Geometry

1) Core Diameter: (µm) 50 ± 2.5

2) Core Non-Circularity: < 5%

3) Cladding Diameter: (µm) 125.0 ± 2.0

4) Cladding Non-Circularity: (µm) < 1.0%

5) Core-to-Cladding Concentricity: (µm) < 1.5

6) Numerical Apeture: 0.200 ± 0.015

7) Coating Diameter: (µm) 245 ± 5

8) Coating – Cladding Concentricity < 12 µm

e. Cabled Optical Fiber Performance

1) Attenuation (dB/km): 850 nm < 3.0, 1300 nm < 1.0

2) Minimum LED Bandwidth: 850 nm, 1500; 1300 nm 500

3) Cabled Effective Modal Bandwidth: (MHz•Km): 850 nm > 2000

4) IEEE 802.3 GbE Distance (m): 850 nm, 1000; 1300 nm, 600

5) IEEE 802.3 10GbE Distance (m): 850 nm, 300

E. Fiber Optic Cable Shipping Requirements

1. All cabled optical fibers > 1000 meters in length shall be 100% attenuation tested. The

attenuation of each fiber shall be provided with each cable reel.

2. Top and bottom ends of the cable shall be available for testing on the shipping reel.



PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 271310 - 4

3. Both ends of the cable shall be sealed to prevent the ingress of moisture.

4. Each reel shall have a weather resistant reel tag attached identifying the reel and cable.

The reel tag shall include the following information:

a. Cable Number, Gross Weight

b. Shipped Cable Length in Meters, Job Order Number

c. Manufacturer Product Number, Customer Order Number

d. Date Cable was Tested, Manufacturer Order Number

e. Cable Length Markings, Item Number

1) Top (inside end of cable)

2) Bottom (outside end of cable)

5. Each cable shall be accompanied by a cable data sheet. The cable data sheet shall include

the following information:

a. Manufacturer Cable Number, Manufacturer Product Number

b. Manufacturer Factory Order Number, Customer Name

c. Customer Purchase Order Number

d. Mark for Information Ordered Length

e. Maximum Billable Length, Actual Shipped Length

f. Measured Attenuation of Each Fiber Bandwidth Specification (for lengths >

1000 m)

F. The cable manufacturer shall provide installation procedures and technical support concerning

the items contained in this specification.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General

1. All cable and associated hardware shall be placed so as to make efficient use of available

space in coordination with other uses. All cable and associated hardware shall be placed

so as to not impair the use or capacity of other building systems, equipment, or hardware

placed by others (or existing).

2. Where cable is placed in ceiling areas or other non-exposed areas, cables shall be

installed in cable trays or in non-continuous cable support system. Non-continuous cable

supports shall be placed at random intervals no greater than 48 inches. Cables in non-

continuous support systems shall be bundled using hook and loop type fasteners. Cable

sag between supports shall not exceed 3 inches. Attaching wire to pipes or other

mechanical items is not permitted. Cables shall not be bundled or tied in conduits, and in

cable trays above ceilings.

3. All cabling shall be routed so as to avoid interference with any other service or system,

operation, or maintenance purposes such as access boxes, network equipment,

mechanical equipment access doors and covers, switches or electrical panels, and lighting

fixtures. Avoid crossing areas horizontally just above or below any riser conduit. Lay and

dress cables to allow other cables to enter the conduit/riser at a later time by maintaining



PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 271310 - 5

a working distance from these openings. All cable shall be installed to allow for simple

installation and removal of cables in the future.

4. Unless noted, all interior wiring shall be installed in raceways, Raceway Specification

No. 2, one inch minimum. Wiring above accessible ceilings may be installed in cable tray

and exposed on "J" hooks.

5. All cables not in raceways shall be riser or plenum rated.

6. All cables running outside the building shall be rated for outside plant installation.

7. Backbone cables shall be grouped separately from horizontal distribution cables. Cable

for other systems shall be grouped separately from cables for telephone and data.

8. All inside cable shall be installed neatly above accessible ceilings using cable tray and "J"

hooks supported from building structure. Do not attach to pipes, conduits, ducts, etc. Do

not allow cable to rest on pipes, conduits, ducts, ceiling tiles, etc. Do not attach to wires

used for supporting suspended ceilings. Do not use tie wires or bridle rings.

9. All wires shall be marked at all junction boxes, pull boxes, cabinets, boxes and

terminations. Each cable run between terminating locations shall be one continuous cable

(no splices or connections).

10. The Contractor shall install cable in such a manner as to prevent stretching, kinking or

sharp bends. Cable damaged during installation or not passing required testing shall be

removed and replaced at no additional cost to Owner.

11. The Contractor shall replace or rework cables showing evidence of improper handling

including stretches, kinks, short radius bends, over tightened bindings, loosely twisted

and over twisted pairs at terminations, and too much jacket removed.

12. Minimum bend radius and maximum pulling tension for all cables shall be maintained

during and after installation. Install cable in accordance with manufacturer's ratings and

instructions.

13. Cables shall not be installed near power sources or other items where interference could

develop. Cables shall not be placed within 18 inches of light fixtures and within 3 feet of

motors, transformers, copy machines, or solid state motor starters unless cable is installed

in conduit. Contractor shall furnish and install a grounding conduit system where these

minimum clearances cannot be maintained.

14. In telecommunications spaces, cables shall be routed as close as possible to the ceiling,

floor, or corners to insure that adequate wall or backboard space is available for current

and future equipment and for cable terminations. Cables shall not be tie-wrapped to

existing electrical conduit or other equipment. Minimum bend radius shall be observed.

15. Dress and attach cables to the backboard along the shortest possible route run square

(horizontal and vertical) to the backboard. Bundle similarly routed cables together and

attach by means of clamps or distribution rings. Cable dress and attachment shall

minimize obstruction to future installations of equipment, backboard, or other cables.

16. Cables shall be neatly bundled with hook and loop type fasteners. Nylon tire wraps are

not acceptable. Cables must be neatly bundled in the telecommunications spaces and at

the cable service loop.

17. Cable service loops shall be provided at both ends of backbone cable runs.



PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 271310 - 6

a. At the telecommunications room, provide a minimum 8 foot service loop stored in

a figure eight pattern in the cable tray above the racks/cabinets.

b. At the telecommunications room, provide sufficient slack to properly dress and

terminate cables at the racks and cabinets.

1) Provide sufficient slack so that swing gate type racks and cabinets can open

fully

2) Provide sufficient slack so that cables do not catch or bind at swing gate

type rack or cabinet hinge and the cables do not pull taught across the hinge

or edge.

c. A minimum 25 foot service loop shall be maintained at each building entrance and

exit.

18. All interior fiber optic cables shall be installed in innerduct above accessible ceilings.

a. Innerduct shall be installed to within 12 inches of termination enclosure.

b. Install pull boxes, 12” x 12” minimum, as required to limit cable pulls to two 90

degree bends or 150 feet.

c. Innerduct shall not be kinked or tightly bent in any way.

19. All interior fiber optic cables, including Owner furnished cables, shall be installed in

innerduct in electrical metal tuhing in areas with exposed ceiling structure.

20. A break-away link shall be used for installation of cables with a cable-puller or winch.

The break-away link shall be designed to separate at or below the recommended

maximum tension of the cable being installed.

21. Any damage to Owner’s existing cabling or existing cable owned by others, caused as a

result of work performed under this scope, shall be brought to the Owner’s attention and

repaired or replaced within 48 hours.

22. Contractor shall use only cable lubricants recommended by the manufacturer for use with

the specific cable construction.

23. Should a cable become kinked, skinned or stretched during installation, the cable shall be

removed and replaced at no additional cost to the Owner. Splicing at points other than

those specified will not be acceptable.

B. Outside Plant Cable

1. Cable service loops shall be included in each manhole to allow for proper cable dressing,

splicing the cable outside the manhole in a controlled space and for repairing damaged

cable.

2. Cable service loops shall be provided as indicated herein, and as otherwise indicated

elsewhere in the contract documents and on the Drawings.

3. Install sufficient cable slack to remove cable from the manhole for splicing in a splice

van or tent.

4. In addition to the cable slack required for proper termination/splicing in a splice

enclosure, the Contractor shall install sufficient cable slack to form at least one loop of

cable along the inner perimeter of the manhole.

5. Where no cable splice is planned for a manhole, the contractor shall leave sufficient slack

to form at least twp loops of cable along the inner perimeter of the manhole.



PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 271310 - 7

6. Cable service loop lengths shall be adjusted based on manhole size, manhole depth and

existing conditions.

7. Cables slack shall be securely fastened to all four walls of the manhole. Furnish and

install bracket arms for securing and mounting of all cables where built-in racking exists.

8. If racking is not furnished in a manhole, furnish and install a cable sling of weather,

water, oil and solvent resistant material to support the cable(s) on those walls without

built in racking.

9. Cable splice enclosures shall be security fastened to mounting arm brackets attached to

manhole racking. Furnish and install racking and mounting arm brackets to support

splice cases. Cable splice enclosures shall be attached to at least two racks in the

manhole.

10. All cables shall be secured to bracket arms using cable ties and straps resistant to

weather, water, oil, fuel and solvents. Plastic or stainless steel ties/straps rated for this

application shall be acceptable for use.

11. All cable dressing in manholes shall be performed so that the minimum bend radius of

cables is not exceeded.

12. All cable splice enclosures shall be mounted either on the long wall of the manhole or on

the wall parallel with the main cable run entry and exit conduits.

13. Wherever possible in existing manholes, and as a standard for manholes furnished and

installed under this or an associated project, optical cable splice enclosures shall be

mounted on one long wall (or parallel wall as previously defined) and copper cable splice

enclosures shall be mounted on the opposite wall.

14. Wherever possible, large pair count copper cable enclosures shall be mounted at the

vertical mid-line of the manhole and fiber cable splice enclosures shall be mounted at or

above the vertical mid-line.

15. All cables shall be spliced in splice enclosures as specified herein.

a. Furnish and install the maximum slack in each enclosure as recommended by the

cable, splice system and enclosure manufacturer.

b. Furnish and install all splice trays, splice holders, splice tray holders, mounting

brackets, frames, grounding and other ancillary hardware and materials as required

by the cable manufacturer, splice system manufacturer, splice enclosure

manufacturer and standard industry practices.

c. Only technicians trained in the proper assembly of enclosures, splices and splicing

procedures shall be permitted to splice cables.


Horizontal Distribution Cabling –


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 271510 - 1

SECTION 271510 – HORIZONTAL DISTRIBUTION CABLING – TELECOMMUNICATIONS

SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED


furnishing and installing horizontal distribution cabling as part of a complete and operational


1.2 SUBMITTALS



1.3 COORDINATION


1. Copper cables.

2. Pathways as defined in Section 270530, Pathways for Telecommunications System.

1.4 CABLE TESTING



Section 260505, Basic Materials.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CABLE – GENERAL

A. Unless noted otherwise, all cable shall be constructed with solid copper conductors.

B. Four-pair UTP cable jacket shall be color coded as follows:

1. Voice – In accordance with University standards

2. Data – In accordance with University standards

3. Wireless Access Point Outlet – In accordance with University standards



PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 271510 - 2

4. CATV (UTP) – In accordance with University standards

C. Marking and labeling systems for cable shall comply with UL 969 standard for legibility,

defacement and adhesive characteristics.

D. All horizontal distribution cable shall be of the same manufacturer.

E. All horizontal distribution cable shall be plenum rated.

F. Horizontal distribution cable for telephone system, shall be Category 6.

G. Horizontal distribution cable for data network system (including wireless access point locations)

shall be Category 6.

H. Horizontal distribution cable for slab on grade floor boxes and/or installed through slab on-

grade conduit shall be outside plant rated (OSP) Category 6. OSP rated Cat6 cable shall be

installed from the slab on grade floor box or other type of box to a consolidation point installed

above the accessible ceiling. Refer to Section 27 05 30, Pathways for Telecommunications

System and Section 27 15 45, Faceplates and Connectors - Telecommunications Systems for

additional requirements for the consolidation point(s).

I. Horizontal distribution cable for CATV system shall be Series 6 Coaxial. Refer to Section 27 59

10, Television System – CATV.

J. Horizontal distribution cable for equipment connections to Automatic Temperature

Control/Building Automation System, Fire Alarm, and/or Security systems shall be Category 6.

2.2 CATEGORY 6 (Cat 6) CABLE

A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Mohawk/CDT or Belden.

B. Construction: Four (4) unshielded twisted pair (UTP).

C. Conductors:

1. Plenum: 23 AWG solid copper.

2. Riser: 24 AWG solid copper.

D. Insulation:

1. Plenum: FEP.

2. Riser: PE.

E. Jacket: Flame Retardant PVC.

F. Nominal Capacitance: 5.6 nF/100m.

G. Nominal Input Impedance: 100 ohm.



PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 271510 - 3

H. Maximum DC Resistance: 9.5 ohm/100 m.

I. Nominal Velocity of Propagation:

1. Plenum: 71 percent.

2. Riser: 67 percent.

J. Propagation Delay: </= 5.45 ns/m.

K. Specified Frequency: 250 MHz

L. Maximum Skew: </= 45 ns/100m

M. Electrical Performance:

Frequency

Attenuation

dB/100m

NEXT

dB

(min.)

ACR

dB/100m

(min.)

PSNEXT

dB (min.)

PSELFEXT

dB (min.)

PSACR

dB

(min.)

ELFEXT

dB/100m

RL

dB

(min.)

1.0 2.0 74.3 72.3 72.3 64.8 70.3 67.8 20.0

4.0 3.8 65.3 61.5 63.3 52.7 59.5 55.8 23.0

8.0 5.3 60.8 55.5 58.8 46.7 53.4 49.7 24.5

10.0 6.0 59.3 56.4 57.3 44.8 51.3 47.8 25.0

16.0 7.6 56.2 48.7 54.2 40.7 46.7 43.7 25.0

20.0 8.5 54.8 46.4 52.8 38.8 44.3 41.8 25.0

25.0 9.5 53.3 43.8 51.3 36.8 41.8 39.8 24.3

31.25 10.7 51.9 41.2 49.9 34.9 39.2 37.9 23.6

62.5 15.4 47.4 32.0 45.4 28.8 30.0 31.9 21.5

100.0 19.8 44.3 24.5 42.3 24.8 22.5 27.8 23.0

155.0 25.2 41.4 16.2 39.4 21.0 14.2 24.0 18.8

200.0 29.0 42.8 10.7 37.8 18.8 8.7 21.8 18.0

250.0 32.8 38.3 5.4 36.3 16.8 3.4 19.8 17.3

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. All cable and associated hardware shall be placed so as to make efficient use of available space

in coordination with other uses. All cable and associated hardware shall be placed so as to not

impair the use or capacity of other building systems, equipment, or hardware placed by others

(or existing).

B. Where cable is placed in ceiling areas or other non-exposed areas, cables shall be installed in

cable trays or in non-continuous cable support system. Non-continuous cable supports shall be

placed at random intervals no greater than 48 inches. Cables in non-continuous support systems

shall be bundled using hook and loop type fasteners. Cable sag between supports shall not

exceed 3 inches. Attaching wire to pipes or other mechanical items is not permitted. Cables

shall not be bundled or tied in conduits, and in cable trays above ceilings.



PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 271510 - 4

C. All cabling shall be routed so as to avoid interference with any other service or system,

operation, or maintenance purposes such as access boxes, network equipment, mechanical

equipment access doors and covers, switches or electrical panels, and lighting fixtures. Avoid

crossing areas horizontally just above or below any riser conduit. Lay and dress cables to allow

other cables to enter the conduit/riser at a later time by maintaining a working distance from

these openings. All cable shall be installed to allow for simple installation and removal of cables

in the future.

D. Unless noted, all interior wiring installed in areas with exposed structure ceilings shall be

installed in raceways, Raceway Specification No. 2, one inch minimum. Wiring above

accessible ceilings may be installed in cable tray and exposed on "J" hooks.

E. All cables not in raceways shall be plenum rated.

F. All cables running outside the building shall be rated for outside plant installation.

G. Backbone cables shall be grouped separately from horizontal distribution cables. Cable for other

systems shall be grouped separately from cables for telephone and data.

H. All inside cable shall be installed neatly above accessible ceilings using cable tray and "J" hooks

supported from building structure. Do not attach to pipes, conduits, ducts, etc. Do not allow

cable to rest on pipes, conduits, ducts, ceiling tiles, etc. Do not attach to wires used for

supporting suspended ceilings. Do not use tie wires or bridle rings.

I. All wires shall be marked at all junction boxes, pull boxes, cabinets, boxes and terminations.

Each cable run between terminating locations shall be one continuous cable (no splices or

connections).

J. Install cable in such a manner as to prevent stretching, kinking or sharp bends. Cable damaged

during installation or not passing required testing shall be removed and replaced at no additional

cost to Owner.

K. Replace or rework cables showing evidence of improper handling including stretches, kinks,

short radius bends, over tightened bindings, loosely twisted and over twisted pairs at

terminations, and too much jacket removed.

L. Minimum bend radius and maximum pulling tension for all cables shall be maintained during

and after installation. Install cable in accordance with manufacturer's ratings and instructions.

M. Cables shall not be installed near power sources or other items where interference could

develop. Cables shall not be placed within 18 inches of light fixtures and within 3 feet of

motors, transformers, copy machines, or solid state motor starters unless cable is installed in

conduit. Contractor shall furnish and install a grounding conduit system where these minimum

clearances cannot be maintained.

N. In telecommunications spaces, cables shall be routed as close as possible to the ceiling, floor, or

corners to insure that adequate wall or backboard space is available for current and future

equipment and for cable terminations. Cables shall not be tie-wrapped to existing electrical

conduit or other equipment. Minimum bend radius shall be observed.



PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 271510 - 5

O. Dress and attach cables to the backboard along the shortest possible route run square (horizontal

and vertical) to the backboard. Bundle similarly routed cables together, and attach by means of

clamps or distribution rings. Cable dress and attachment shall minimize obstruction to future

installations of equipment, backboard, or other cables.

P. Cables shall be neatly bundled with hook and loop type fasteners. Nylon tire wraps are not

acceptable. Cables must be neatly bundled in the telecommunications spaces and at the cable

service loop.

Q. Cable service loops shall be provided at both ends of cable runs.

1. At the telecommunications room, provide a minimum 8 foot service loop stored in a

figure eight pattern in the cable tray above the racks/cabinets.

2. At the telecommunications room, provide sufficient slack to properly dress and terminate

cables at the racks and cabinets.

a. Provide sufficient slack so that swing gate type racks and cabinets can open fully

b. Provide sufficient slack so that cables do not catch or bind at swing gate type rack

or cabinet hinge and the cables do not pull taught across the hinge or edge.

3. At outlet locations provide 10 feet of slack stored at the last cable support.

4. At wireless access point outlets installed above accessible ceiling, provide 20 feet of

slack stored at the outlet.

R. Any damage to Owner’s existing cabling or existing cable owned by others, caused as a result

of work performed under this scope, shall be brought to the Owner’s attention and be repaired

or replaced within 48 hours.

S. Contractor shall use only cable lubricants recommended by the manufacturer for use with the

specific cable construction.

T. Should a cable become kinked, skinned or stretched during installation, the cable shall be

removed and replaced at no additional cost to the Owner. Splicing at points other than those

specified will not be acceptable.


Faceplates and Connectors –


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 271545 - 1

SECTION 271545 – FACEPLATES AND CONNECTORS – TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED


furnishing and installing telecommunications outlets, faceplates and connectors as part of a

complete and functional telecommunications system.

1.2 SUBMITTALS



1.3 COORDINATION

A. Refer to Section 260530, Raceways and Section 260540, Boxes for raceway and boxes to be

furnished and installed for telecommunications outlets.

B. Contractor shall furnish and install the following:

1. Jacks, wallplates and connectors, both copper and fiber.

2. Boxes above ceilings, box covers and jacks in boxes above ceiling.

C. Unless noted, the following items will be the responsibility of the Owner:




D. Contact the Owner’s network and computer equipment personnel for specific instructions

before starting Work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WALL PLATES

A. Telecom Wall Plate Specification No. 1 – Flush Mount For Keystone Type Modular Jacks and

Inserts

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Siemon Company Max Series, no substitutions.



PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 271545 - 2

2. For mounting on wall boxes.

3. Faceplate, jacks and inserts shall be of the same manufacturer.

4. Supports both fiber and copper applications.

5. Stainless steel.

6. One, two, three, four or six port faceplates as indicated on Drawings.

7. Single gang or double gang as indicated on Drawings.

8. Quantity of and configuration of jacks and inserts as indicated on Drawings.

9. Label insets with clear label covers.

10. Face plate labels.

11. Blank inserts in all unused port locations.

2.2 MODULAR JACKS AND ADAPTERS

A. Jacks, Cat 6

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Siemon Company MX Series, no substitutions.

2. Non-keyed, Unshielded, 4-pair.

3. 8-position, 8-wire (RJ-45).

4. Accommodates T568A and T5698B wiring.

5. Accepts 6-position modular plug for telephone use.

6. Useable bandwidth: 500 MHz.

7. Nose Contacts:

a. Beryllium copper with a minimum of 50-micro inch gold plating over nickel under

plating.

8. Insulation displacement terminals.

a. 110 blocks: Polycarbonate.

b. Jack Contacts: Phosphor bronze with 100 micro-inc tin lead 60/40 over nickel

under plating.

c. Terminates 22-24 AWG solid conductors.

9. Minimum Contact Force: 100 grams with FCC compliant 8-position plug

10. Jack Color:

a. Data: In accordance with University Standards

b. Telephone: In accordance with University Standards

c. Wireless Access Point: In accordance with University Standards

d. CATV: In accordance with University Standards

B. Blank Inserts

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: To match outlet plates.

2. Color to match outlet plates.



PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 271545 - 3

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install all connectors in accordance with manufacturer’s recommended procedures.

B. Flush mount and surface mount outlet plates shall be installed level and plumb. Coordinate

outlet box installation with General Contractor [and Electrical Contractor] prior to rough-in.

C. Cables shall be marked at all outlet boxes and terminations.

D. Furnish and install cable, outlet plate and connector labeling as indicated in Section 27 60 10,

Telecommunication Systems Identification and Documentation.

E. Provide a minimum service loop of 12 inches in each outlet box.

F. Bending radius of cables shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. Install cable in outlet

boxes per manufacturer's instructions.

G. Furnish and install mounting hardware as required to attach consolidation points above

accessible ceiling. Consolidation points shall be securely fastened to building structure or wall.


A. Refer to Section 270545, Pathways for Telecommunications Systems, for outlet mounting

heights.


Connecting Cords, Devices and Adapters –


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 271610 - 1

SECTION 271610 – CONNECTING CORDS, DEVICES AND ADAPTERS –

TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED


furnishing and installing patch cords, equipment cords, workstation cords, connecting devices

and adapters as part of a complete and operating telecommunications system.

1.2 SUBMITTALS



1.3 COORDINATION

A. Contractor shall furnish the following:

1. UTP copper patch cords, equipment cords and workstation cords.

2. Optical fiber patch cords, equipment cords and workstation cords.

3. UTP cross-connect wire.

4. Opto-electronic converters and transceivers.

5. Adapters.

B. Owner shall furnish and install the following:

1. UTP copper patch cords, equipment cords and workstation cords.

2. Optical fiber patch cords, equipment cords and workstation cords.

3. UTP cross-connect wire.

4. Opto-electronic converters and transceivers.

5. Adapters.

1.4 CABLE TESTING



Section 26 05 05, Basic Materials.



PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 271610 - 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PATCH CORDS

A. Category 6 UTP Patch Cords, Equipment Cords and Workstation Cords

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Siemon Company MC6 Series modular cords, no substitutions.

2. 8 conductor, 24 AWG stranded, Category 6.

3. PVC jacket.

4. RJ 45, 8 position, Category 6 plugs on each end.

a. Furnish patch cords with harsh environment sealed connector bodies to match

outlet requirements as indicated on drawings.

5. 100 percent factory tested.

6. Color: To match system cable color as defined in Section 27 15 10 and Section 27 15 45.

7. Furnish hybrid cords (dissimilar connectors on opposite ends of cable) as required by

equipment connections. Coordinate equipment connector type with Owner and

Equipment Supplier prior to submitting products for review.

8. Furnish 6-foot patch cords to connect patch panels to network equipment in each

telecommunications space.

9. Furnish and install 3-foot equipment cords to connect outlets to equipment and devices

(i.e.; wireless access points; building automation systems; security systems, etc.).

10. Furnish 15-foot workstation cords to connect from outlets to Owner’s computer

equipment in classrooms, offices and work areas.

11. Furnish and install one patch cord for 100 percent of the data outlets installed as part of

the project plus 2 percent spare, minimum of 10 spare patch cords

12. Furnish and install one equipment cord for 100 percent of the equipment data outlets

installed as part of the project plus 2 percent spare, minimum of 10 spare patch cords.

13. Furnish one 15-foot workstation cord for 80 percent of the data outlets installed as part of

this project plus 5 percent spare, minimum of 10 spare patch cords.

B. Cross-Connect Wire

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Belden, or General Cable, Siemon.

2. Single-pair, 24 AWG solid copper.

3. Color Coded PVC insulated wire.

4. Color Code: Blue/White, unless noted otherwise.

5. For cross-connecting telephone circuits only.



PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 271610 - 3

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. All patch cords shall be neatly installed and dressed in the vertical and horizontal wire

management systems in each telecommunications space.

B. Patch cords shall be routed so that the wire management system provides proper support of the

connector/cord interface.

C. Patch cords shall be labeled at each end using a machine generated label. Patch cord label shall

indicate patch panel port and network equipment port connected.

D. Patch cords shall not be tied or bundled in the wire management system.

E. Patch cords shall be tied to cable runway (tray) when routed between racks, cabinets and wall

termination fields in telecommunications rooms.

F. Patch cords (where bundled) shall be neatly bundled with Velcro style fasteners. Nylon tire

wraps are not acceptable.

G. Patch cords, equipment cords and workstation cords shall not be installed above accessible

ceiling.

H. Patch cords, equipment cords and workstation cords shall not be installed in conduit except in

short sections of conduit installed from an enclosure for an equipment connection outlet to the

equipment enclosure being served.

I. Install cables along the shortest route in the wire management system. Use the shortest patch

cords available to connect two points.

J. Patch cord slack shall be neatly stored in the wire management system.

K. Equipment cords shall be turned over to equipment supplier for connection between outlet and

equipment.

L. Workstation area cords shall be turned over to Owner.

M. Install patch cords, equipment cords and workstation area cords in a manner to protect cable

from stretching, kinking or sharp bends. Cords damaged during installation shall be removed

and replaced at no additional cost to Owner.

N. Bending radius of patch cords shall not exceed manufacturer’s recommended bend radius.

O. Install patch cords between outlets for equipment connection and equipment enclosures through

conduit stub. Coordinate placement and connection of patch cords with contractor responsible

for equipment enclosure. Not more than 3 inches of patch cords shall be exposed between

outlet for equipment connection and equipment enclosure.

P. Cross-connect wiring shall be installed along the shortest route between termination points.



PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 271610 - 4

Q. Cross-connect wiring shall be routed through distribution rings and around distribution spools in

a manner which provides full support of the wire and termination without additional support.

R. Cross-connect wires shall be installed with a minimum 3/4 inch drip loop at either end of the

wire to allow manual tracing of the connected circuit.

S. Furnish and install voice grade cross-connect wiring at the telecommunications entrance

facility, MDF and each IDF for all equipment outlets including but not limited to: elevator

equipment room telephone, elevator cab telephone, fire-alarm communications, security

system(s) communications, area of rescue assistance communication, other emergency

communication system(s) and building automation system. Coordinate the requirements for the

cross-connects with system installer as required. Complete the dial-tone circuits from the

service provider demarcation to the point of connection to the equipment. Coordinate dial-tone

requirements with system installer. The Owner shall coordinate service requirements with their

service provider.


Telecommunications Cable Systems

Strada WVU Shroyer Hall Renovations Testing - Copper

PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 271910 - 1

SECTION 271910 – TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLE SYSTEMS TESTING – COPPER

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. The Work of this Section shall consist of the labor, materials and equipment required for testing

the copper backbone and horizontal distribution system as part of a complete and operating


1.2 SUBMITTALS


1. Contractor’s test procedures

2. Sample test reports

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

(NOT USED)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 COPPER CABLE TESTING – MULTI-PAIR, OTHER THAN CATEGORY RATED

A. Copper cable backbone shall be tested for the following. Each wire/pair shall be tested at both

ends for the following:

1. Termination order

2. Polarity

3. Continuity

4. Shorts

5. Grounds

6. Cable length

3.2 CABLE SYSTEM PERFORMANCE TESTING – CATEGORY RATED

A. Cables and termination hardware shall be 100 percent tested for defects in installation and to

verify cable performance under installed conditions. All conductors of each installed cable shall

be verified usable by the contractor prior to system acceptance. Any defect in the cable system



PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 271910 - 2

installation including but not limited to cable, connectors, feed through coupler, patch panels,

and connector blocks shall be repaired or replaced in order to ensure 100 percent usable

conductors in all cables installed.

B. General Requirements

1. Every cabling link in the installation shall be tested in accordance with the field test

specifications defined in the most recent standard of the Telecommunications Industry

Associations (TIA)/Electronics Industry Association (EIA).

2. The installed twisted-pair horizontal links shall be tested from the data or

telecommunications room to the jack in the wall outlet against the “Permanent Link”

performance limits specification as defined by TIA/EIA.

3. 100% of the installed cabling links must be tested and must pass the requirements of the

TIA/EIA standards. Any failing link must be diagnosed and corrected. The corrective

action shall be followed with a test to prove that the corrected link meets the performance

requirements. The final and passing result of the tests for all links shall be provided in

the test results documentation.

4. Trained technicians who have successfully attended an appropriate training program and

have obtained a certificate as proof thereof shall execute the tests. Appropriate training

programs include but are not limited to installation certification programs provided by

BiCSi (Building Industry Consulting Services International) or the ACP (Association of

Cabling Professionals).

5. The test equipment (tester) shall comply with or exceed the accuracy requirements for the

Level III field testers as defined by TIA. The tester including the appropriate interface

adapter must meet the specified accuracy requirements.

6. The tester shall be within the calibration period recommended by the vendor in order to

achieve the vendor-specified measurement accuracy.

7. The tester interface adapters must be of high quality and the cable shall not show any

twisting or kinking resulting from coiling and storing of the tester interface adapters. In

order to deliver optimum accuracy, preference is given to a permanent link interface

adapter for the tester that can be calibrated to extend the reference plane of the Return

Loss measurement to the permanent link interface. The contractor shall provide proof

that the interface has been calibrated within the period recommended by the vendor. To

ensure that normal handling on the job does not cause measurable Return Loss change,

the adapter cord cable shall not be of twisted-pair construction.

8. The Pass or Fail condition for the link-under-test is determined by the results of the

requirements individual tests. Any Fail or Fail* results yields a Fail for the link-under-

test. In order to achieve an overall Pass condition, the results for each individual test

parameter must Pass or Pass*.

9. A Pass or Fail result for each parameter is determined by comparing the measured values

with the specified test limits for the parameter. The test result of a parameter shall be

marked with an asterisk (*) when the result is closer to the test limit than the accuracy of

the field tester. The field tester manufacturer must provide documentation as an aid to

interpret results marked with asterisks.

10. The Contractor shall coordinate with the cable system manufacturer providing the

extended performance warranty to determine whether the manufacturer will accept Pass*



PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 271910 - 3

results for their warranty. Only test results which meet the requirements of the

manufacturer’s warranty will be acceptable.

11. The Owner shall be invited to witness field testing. The Owner shall be notified of the

start date of the testing phase 5 business days before testing commences.

12. The Owner (or his authorized representative) may select a random sample of 5%

(minimum of three) of the installed links. The Owner shall test these randomly selected

links and the results are to be stored as specified herein. The results obtained shall be

compared to the data provided by the Contractor. If more that 2% (minimum of 1) of the

sample results differ in terms of the pass/fail determination, the Contractor under

supervision of the Owner’s representative shall repeat 100% testing and the cost shall be

borne by the Contractor.

C. Performance Test Parameters

1. Cables shall be performance tested in accordance with the requirements of the Cable

Category Rating as defined by TIA/EIA. The test of each link shall contain all of the

following parameters: In order to pass the test all measurements (at each frequency in the

TIA/EIA specified test frequency range) must meet or exceed the limit value listed by

TIA/EIA.

a. Wire Map

b. Length

c. Insertion Loss (Attenuation)

d. Near-End Cross-Talk (NEXT) Loss, Pair-to-Pair

e. Power Sum NEXT (PSNEXT) Loss

f. Equal Level Far-end Cross-Talk (ELFEXT) Loss, pair-to-pair

g. Power Sum ELFEXT (PSELFEXT) Loss

h. Return Loss

i. Attenuation to Cross-talk Ratio (ACR)

j. Power Sum ACR (PSACR)

k. Propagation Delay

l. Delay Skew

D. Test Results Documentation

1. The test result information for each link shall be recorded in the memory of the field

tester upon completion of the test.

2. The test result records saved by the tester shall be transferred into a Windows™-based

database utility that allows for the maintenance, inspection and archiving of these test

records. A guarantee must be made that these results are transferred to the PC unaltered,

i.e., “as saved in the tester” at the end of each test and that these results cannot be

modified at a later time. Use cable testers that transfer the numeric measurement data

from the tester to the PC in a format which cannot be manipulated by the user.

a. Comma Separated Value (CSV) format does not provide adequate protection and

shall not be acceptable.

3. The database for the completed job, including twisted-pair copper cabling links if

applicable, shall be stored and delivered on CD-ROM; this CD-ROM shall include the

software tools required to view, inspect, and print any selection of test reports.



PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 271910 - 4

4. A paper copy of the test results shall be provided that lists all the links that have been

tested with the following summary information:

a. The identification of the link in accordance with the naming convention defined in

the overall system documentation and as coordinated with Owner

b. The overall Pass/Fail evaluation of the link-under-test including the Attenuation

worst case margin (margin is defined as the difference between the measured value

and the test limit value).

c. The date and time the test results were saved in the memory of the tester

5. General information to be provided in the electronic data base containing the test result

information for each link:

a. The identification of the customer site as specified by the Owner.

b. The overall Pass/Fail evaluation of the link-under-test.

c. The name of the standard selected to execute the stored test results.

d. The cable type and the velocity of propagation used for length calculations.

e. The date and time the test results were saved in the memory of the tester.

f. The brand name, model and serial number of the tester.

g. The revision of the tester software and the revision of the test standards database in

the tester.



Strada WVU Shroyer Hall Renovations Testing - Fiber

PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 271920 - 1

SECTION 271920 – TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLE SYSTEMS TESTING – FIBER

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. The Work of this Section shall consist of the labor, materials and equipment required for testing

the fiber optic backbone and horizontal distribution system as part of a complete and operating


1.2 SUBMITTALS


1. Contractor’s test procedures

2. Sample test reports

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

(NOT USED)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FIBER OPTIC CABLE SYSTEM TESTING

A. All fiber terminations shall be visually inspected with a minimum 100 X microscope to ensure

that no surface imperfections exist after termination.

B. All fiber terminations shall be cleaned in accordance with manufacturer’s recommended

procedures prior to testing.

C. Terminated fiber strands shall be tested for insertion loss (attenuation) with an optical power

meter and light source.

D. Un-terminated fiber strands shall be tested for continuity and length with and optical time

domain reflectometer (OTDR) or meter using similar technology.

E. General Requirements – Contractor shall test and document the following:

1. Attenuation and location of any splice and single-point discontinuity. Contractor shall

indicate the location and loss of every splice in each optical fiber cable link, including

existing splices.



PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 271920 - 2

2. Attenuation testing shall be performed as defined herein and as defined in the most recent

version of the ANSI/TIA/EIA 568B Standard document.

3. The test shall include the representative connector performance at the connecting

hardware associated with the mating of patch cords. The test shall not, however, include

the performance of the connector at the interface with the test equipment.

4. 100 percent of the installed optical fiber links shall be tested and shall pass the

requirements of the ANSI/TIA/EIA standards. Any failing link shall be diagnosed and

corrected. The corrective action shall be followed with a test to prove that the corrected

link meets the performance requirements. The final and passing result of the tests for all

links shall be provided in the test results documentation.

5. Each outside plant fiber optic cable shall be tested with an ODTR to verify installed

length and to document the installation.

6. Inside plant fiber cables may be tested with an OTDR or meter using similar technology

to verify installed cable length.

7. All fiber optic strands of an inside or outside plant cable where any of the strands of the

cable will be spliced as part of this installation shall be tested and documented with an

OTDR. OTDR testing shall be performed on cables splices at building entrance

transitions. OTDR testing is not required for splicing of pigtails where there are no mid-

span (intermediate) splices in the fiber cable.

8. Trained technicians who have successfully attended an appropriate training program and

have obtained a certificate as proof thereof shall execute the tests. These certificates may

have been issued by any of the following organizations or an equivalent organization:

a. The manufacturer of the fiber optic cable and the fiber optic connectors

b. The manufacturer of the test equipment used for the field certification

c. Training organizations authorized by BiCSi (Building Industry Consulting

Services International) or by the ACP (Association of Technology Professionals)

Technology Business Institute located in Dallas, Texas.

F. Field test instruments for optical fiber testing shall meet the requirements of the latest standard

of ANSI/TIA/EIA.

1. The tester shall be within the calibration period recommended by the vendor in order to

achieve the vendor-specified measurement accuracy. . The Contactor shall furnish a

valid calibration certificate from the manufacturer or an approved calibration laboratory

with the test documentation. Test dates must fall within the dates of the valid calibration.

2. The fiber optic launch cables and adapters shall be of high quality and the cables shall not

show excessive wear resulting from repetitive coiling and storing of the tester interface

adapters.

3. The Pass or Fail condition for the link-under-test shall be determined by the results of the

required individual tests specified herein.

G. The Owner shall be invited to witness field testing. The Owner shall be notified of the start date

of the testing phase 5 business days before testing commences.



PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 271920 - 3

H. The Owner (or his authorized representative) may select a random sample of 5% (minimum of

three) of the installed links. The Owner shall test these randomly selected links and the results

shall be stored as specified herein. The results obtained shall be compared to the data provided

by the Contractor. If more than 2% (minimum of one) of the sample results differ in terms of

the pass/fail determination, the installation contractor under supervision of the Owner shall

repeat 100% testing and the cost shall be borne by the installation contractor.

I. All fiber optic cable test results shall be stored on a CD-ROM along with any required viewing

software, and incorporated into the “Record Documents” package.

3.2 PERFORMANCE TEST PARAMETERS – FIBER OPTIC CABLE

A. ANSI/TIA/EIA standards prescribe that the single performance parameter for field testing of

fiber optic links is link attenuation (alternative and equivalent term: insertion loss), when

installing components compliant with this standard.

1. The link attenuation shall be calculated by the following formulas specified in

ANSI/TIA/EIA 568B:

a. Link Attenuation = Cable_Attn + Connector_Attn + Splice_Attn

2. Cable_Attn (dB) = Attenuation_Coefficient (dB/km) * Length (Km)

3. The values for the Attenuation_Coefficient are listed in the table below:

Type of Optical Fiber Wavelength (nm)

Attenuation_Coefficient

(dB/km)

Multimode 62.5/125 μm 850 3.5

1300 1.5

Multimode 50/125 μm 850 3.5

1300 1.0

Single-mode (Inside

plant)

1310 1.0

1550 1.0

Single-mode (Outside

plant)

1310 0.5

B. Connector_Attn (dB) = number_of_connector_pairs*connector_loss (dB)

C. Maximum allowable connector_loss = 0.75 dB

D. Splice_Attn (dB) = Number of splices * splice_loss (dB).

E. Maximum allowable splice_loss = 0.3 dB.

F. Link attenuation shall not include any active devices or passive devices other than cable,

connectors, and splices, i.e. link attenuation shall not include such devices as optical bypass

switches, couplers, repeaters, or optical amplifiers.

G. Use test equipment that automatically calculates the link loss based on the above formulas.



PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 271920 - 4

H. Test limit attenuation is based on the use of the One Reference Jumper Method specified by

ANSI/TIA/EIA. The contractor shall follow the procedures established by these standards or

application notes to accurately conduct performance testing.

I. The backbone link (multimode) shall be tested in both directions at both operating wavelengths

to account for attenuation deltas associated with wavelength.

J. Multimode backbone links shall be tested at 850 nm and 1300 nm in accordance with

ANSI/EIA/TIA. The “Link Attenuation Equation”, as previously stated, shall be used to

determine limit (acceptance) values for multimode backbone cable.

K. Test the attenuation of backbone fibers in both directions at both wavelengths.

1. Single mode backbone links shall be tested in both directions at 1310 nm and 1550 nm in

accordance with ANSI/TIA/EIA 526-7, Method A1, One Reference Jumper. All single

mode links shall be tested with test equipment using laser light sources at 1310 nm and

1550 nm.

2. Multi-mode backbone links shall be tested in both directions at 850 and 1300 nm in

accordance with ANSI/TIA/EIA 526-14, Method B. All multi-mode links shall be tested

using laser light sources as indicated below

3. For Gigabit Ethernet compliant certification (IEEE std. 802.3z application) test

equipment, use a VCSEL (Vertical cavity surface emitting laser) at 850 nm (compliant

with 1000BASE-SX) and an FP laser at 1310 nm (compliant with 1000BASE-LX).

3.3 OTDR TESTING

A. OTDR testing shall be performed in accordance with the EIA/TIA-455-60, Two-Point Method

A.

B. Test set up shall use a launch fiber which exceeds the dead zone of the OTDR equipment used

for the test.

C. Identify the start of the fiber under test and the end of the fiber under test for each strand.

D. Identify splices, discontinuities or other anomalies in the fiber on the test documentation.

Attenuation of each splice and discontinuity shall be included for each fiber where they occur.

Attenuation for splices to install pigtail connections is not required.

E. The use of an OTDR is not acceptable for end-to-end insertion loss (attenuation) testing.

3.4 TEST RESULT DOCUMENTATION

A. The test result information for each link shall be recorded in the memory of the field tester upon

completion of the test.

B. The test result records saved by the tester shall be transferred into a Windows™-based database

utility that allows for the maintenance, inspection and archiving of these test records. A



PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 271920 - 5

guarantee must be made that these results are transferred to the PC unaltered, i.e., “as saved in

the tester” at the end of each test and that these results cannot be modified at a later time. Use

cable testers that transfer the numeric measurement data from the tester to the PC in a format

which cannot be manipulated by the user.

1. Comma Separated Value (CSV) format does not provide adequate protection and shall

not be acceptable.

C. The database for the completed job, including twisted-pair copper cabling links if applicable,

shall be stored and delivered on CD-ROM; this CD-ROM shall include the software tools

required to view, inspect, and print any selection of test reports.

D. A paper copy of the test results shall be provided that lists all the links that have been tested

with the following summary information:

1. The identification of the link in accordance with the naming convention defined in the

overall system documentation and as coordinated with Owner

2. The overall Pass/Fail evaluation of the link-under-test including the Attenuation worst

case margin (margin is defined as the difference between the measured value and the test

limit value).

3. The date and time the test results were saved in the memory of the tester

E. General information to be provided in the electronic data base containing the test result

information for each link:

1. The identification of the customer site as specified by the Owner.

2. The overall Pass/Fail evaluation of the link-under-test.

3. The name of the standard selected to execute the stored test results.

4. The cable type and the value of the ‘index of refraction’ used for length calculations.

5. The date and time the test results were saved in the memory of the tester.

6. The brand name, model and serial number of the tester.

7. The revision of the tester software and the revision of the test standards database in the

tester.

F. The detailed test results data to be provided in the electronic database for each tested optical

fiber must contain the following information

1. The identification of the link/fiber in accordance with the naming convention defined in

the overall system documentation and as coordinated with Owner.

2. The insertion loss (attenuation) measured at each wavelength, the test limit calculated for

the corresponding wavelength and the margin (difference between the measured

attenuation and the test limit value).



PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 271920 - 6

3. The link length shall be reported for each optical fiber for which the test limit was

calculated based on the formulas


Strada WVU Shroyer Hall Renovations Multi-Media Support System

PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 274115 - 1

SECTION 274115 – MULTI-MEDIA SUPPORT SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. Work in this Section consists of the labor, materials and equipment required for furnishing and

installing a complete interface and audio amplification system for individual Owner-furnished

classroom projectors.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


1. Media control equipment

2. Media interface outlets

3. Amplifiers

4. Speakers

5. Wire and cable

B. Any variations of materials and equipment specified shall be completely described listing all

variances from that specified. This information shall be submitted with Shop Drawings of

equipment.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Location of projector outlet shall be coordinated with Owner-furnished projector location as

shown on Drawings.

B. Location of projector mounts and outlets in classrooms shall be coordinated with the center of

the projector screen and/or white board. The distance from the wall shall be coordinated with

the throw distance rating of the projector model to be furnished and installed by the Owner. The

projector mount and projector outlet location shall facilitate a picture size equal to the maximum

viewing area of the interactive white board as specified by the interactive white board

manufacturer. Coordinate exact location with the Owner and Architect.

C. Locations of the media interface outlets shall be as shown on Drawings and coordinated with

other low-voltage outlets and power receptacles. The location of wall mount controls shall be

coordinated with the location of white boards, tack boards, wall mount telephones, thermostats,

etc. as furnished and installed by this contractor and as the work of other trades.

D. Contractor shall coordinate testing of multimedia support system and testing with installation of

interactive white boards and projectors by Owner.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 274115 - 2

1.4 FUNCTION

A. Equipment interface to Owner furnished wall or ceiling-mounted projectors and program source

equipment.

B. Media interface outlets shall be capable of supporting multiple protocols of video transmission

to the projectors.

C. Speakers shall provide a means for distribution of source audio signals across the student

audience area.

1.5 EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER

A. The equipment shall be supplied by a manufacturer certified distributor. Manufacturer's written

certification of the distributorship shall be provided when requested.

B. When requested, the manufacturer or his certified distributor shall provide evidence that

distributor maintains a fully equipped factory authorized service organization, stocked with

factory approved replacement parts and is capable of furnishing adequate inspection and service

to the equipment.

C. Equipment suppliers employing personnel for local service on a contract basis will not be

acceptable.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 BOXES

A. Refer to Section 27 05 30, Pathways for Telecommunications Systems, for general box types

and installation requirements.

B. Furnish and install recessed boxes for wall-mount AV/multi-media outlets as follows:

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Hubbell HBL260.


3. 66.7 cubic inch capacity.

4. One or two-gang plaster ring as required by outlet type.

5. Concentric knockouts from 1/2" to 2”

6. Plaster ring depth sized for wall type.

7. For use with standard decorator-style wall plates.

8. Furnish with AV/telecommunications devices as indicated on drawings.

C. Furnish and install recessed boxes for wall-mount television/monitor outlets as follows:

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Hubbell NetSelect NSAV62M (Box) and NSAV62C (Cover).

2. Two-gang, 3-1/2 inches deep, recessed combination AV in-wall enclosure.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 274115 - 3

3. Furnish with duplex receptacle and CATV/telecommunications devices as indicated on

drawings.

2.2 MEDIA INTERFACE PLATE

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Extron AAP Series, or as approved.

B. Mounting Frame

C. USB extender/CATV adapter plate: One category 6 jack, yellow, one F connector female to

female barrel.

D. Computer video and audio adapter plate: HDMI connector female and one 3.5 mm adapter

barrel.

E. Audio adapter plate: Two RCA to captive screw terminal – audio, red/white.

F. RJ-45 adapter plate: Two RJ-45 jacks, green, for future use by Owner.

G. Outlet plate color as coordinated with Architect.

2.3 MEDIA INTERFACE CABLES

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Extron, West Penn, or as approved.

B. Control cables: As recommended by media controller manufacturer.

C. USB extender cable category 6, 4 pair UTP , yellow, with RJ-45 jacks at both ends as specified

in 27 15 10, Horizontal Distribution Cabling – Telecommunications and 27 15 45, Faceplates

and Connectors – Telecommunications Systems as shown on Drawings. Furnish and install

surface mount box to house category 6 jack behind projector screen.

D. CATV Cable: As specified in Section 27 59 10, Television System – CATV.

E. PC Audio Cable: 3 conductor shielded with male top ring sleeve connectors.

F. Composite Video: HDMI cable with male connectors.

G. Media interface to projector data cables: Category 6, 4 pair UTP, blue, with RJ-45 jacks at both

ends as specified in 27 15 10, Horizontal Distribution Cabling – Telecommunications and

27 15 45, Faceplates and Connectors – Telecommunications Systems and as shown on

Drawings. For future use by Owner.

H. Furnish and install length as required.

I. Connect audio cables to amplifier above projector mounting plate.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 274115 - 4

2.4 AMPLIFIER

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Extron MPA 181T Series, or as approved.

B. Inputs:

1. Balanced/unbalanced stereo/mono, captive screw connector.

2. Unbalanced stereo, RCA connectors.

3. Stereo, 3.5 mm jack.

C. Outputs:

1. 18 watts into 70 volt system

2. 14 watts into 4 ohms

3. 8 watts into 8 ohms

D. Front panel bass, treble and input level controls.

E. Clip limiter.

F. Compatible with media controller for volume, on/off and input selector controls.

G. Frequency Response:

1. 8 ohm: 20 Hz to 20 kHz

2. 70 volt: 110 Hz to 80 kHz

H. Total Harmonic Distortion: 0.1% at 1 kHz nominal.

I. Signal to noise ratio: Greater than 72 dB at 20 Hz to 20 kHz at maximum output.

J. Tone Adjustments:

1. Bass: plus/minus 10dB at 100 Hz

2. Treble: plus/minus 10dB at 10 kHz

K. Dimensions: 1.7 inches high by 4.3 inches wide by 6 inches deep.

L. Operating Temperature: +32 degrees F to +122 degrees F.

M. Furnish and install with power supply.

N. Furnish and install with mounting hardware as required by location and application.

2.5 MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM SPEAKER

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Atlas Sound FA136, or as approved.

B. For multimedia audio in classrooms, conference rooms and instructional areas.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 274115 - 5

C. Power Rating: 35 watts.

D. Dispersion: 130 degrees.

E. Nominal Impedance: 8 ohms (selectable).

F. Frequency Response: 80 Hz – 20 kHz

G. Sensitivity: 88 dB at 1w/1m.

H. Woofer Material: 6 inch poly cone, butyl rubber surround.

I. Woofer Magnet: 14 oz.

J. High frequency driver, 19 mm (3/4 inch) coaxially mounted. PEI dome tweeters.

K. Dimensions: 12-1/2 inch diameter, 8.48 inches high.

L. Color: Black with black grille.

M. Furnish and install with swivel wall mounting bracket.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Furnish and install all equipment necessary for a complete and operable system. Final

connections between equipment and the wiring system, testing and placing system in operation,

shall be completed in the presence of the Owner’s representative.

B. All wires shall be marked at all junction boxes, pull boxes, cabinets, boxes and terminations. All

wiring shall be tested for continuity and freedom of all grounds and short circuits. Each cable

run between terminating locations shall be one continuous cable (no splices or connections).

C. Proceed with caution when installing cable to protect cable from stretching, kinking or sharp

bends. Cable damaged during installation shall be removed and replaced at no additional cost to

Owner.

D. Unless noted, two additional feet of cable shall be provided at each outlet box.

E. Contractor and manufacturer shall correct any condition producing cross talk, appreciable loss

of volume, or distortion in the system after installation has been completed.

F. All interior wiring shall be installed in raceways, Raceway Specification No. 2, except above

accessible concealed ceilings where wiring may be exposed using approved cable and proper

supports. Furnish and install (2) 1 inch conduit from each wall outlet box to above accessible

ceilings and turn out.

G. Furnish and install conduit above all non-lay in tile ceilings and in all other non-accessible areas

in the building.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 274115 - 6

H. Installation shall allow for easily replacing cables in the future.

I. All system cable shall be installed neatly above accessible ceilings using J-hooks or other

Owner approved method and attached to building structure. Do not attach to pipes, ducts, etc.

Do not allow cable to rest on pipes, ducts, ceiling tiles, etc. Do not use tie wires on bridle rings.

J. Contractor shall test the function of the multi-media support system controls in conjunction with

the interactive white boards. Projectors and source equipment furnished and installed by Owner.


A. Contractor shall provide three (3) complete sets of operating instructions, including circuit

diagrams and other information, necessary for complete installation, operating and maintenance

service. One copy of this information shall be submitted for review and will be returned to

Contractor after which three copies shall be delivered to Owner upon the installation and final

testing of the equipment.

B. Upon acceptance of the system by Owner, contractor and equipment supplier shall provide

training for Owner's personnel in proper operation of the system.

3.3 SUPERVISION

A. Installation of this system shall be supervised by a factory trained representative who shall

accompany Owner's representative on an inspection of the entire system and shall demonstrate

satisfactory system performance.

B. A complete operational test of the system and all individual components shall be performed

under the supervision of the manufacturer's representative. Final tests and checks shall be

completed in the presence of the Owner's representative.

C. Contractor and equipment supplier shall provide a set of operating instructions to Owner,

including circuit diagrams and other information necessary for proper installation, operation and

maintenance.

D. Contractor and equipment supplier shall assume complete responsibility for equipment and

services supplied, and for complete supervision of system installation and correction of all

malfunctions. Contractor and equipment supplier shall be responsible for correct operation of

the system.


Strada WVU Shroyer Hall Renovations Television System - CATV

PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 275910 - 1

SECTION 275910 – TELEVISION SYSTEM – CATV

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED


furnishing and installing a complete and fully operational cable television (CATV) system.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


1. CATV system components.

2. System calculations used to select all components. Calculations shall be coordinated with

the wiring and interconnecting diagram. Sample calculations which only address a

portion of the system are not acceptable.

3. When requested, submit for approval all information required under the “Equipment

Supplier” paragraph prior to any other product and/or system information.

4. Wiring and interconnecting diagram of all items of equipment, indicating all components,

tap values and estimated db levels at all outlets. Typical drawings will not be acceptable.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Electrical Contractor shall furnish and install the following:

1. Conduit for CATV service connection in Learning Resource Center.

2. All service, backbone and horizontal pathway, surface raceways, conduits, cable tray, etc.

as indicated and as required.

3. All backboards.

4. Grounding as required, to include ground wire and ground clamps.

5. Power supply to CATV equipment.

6. A #14 fish wire or Jet Line No. 232 pull rope in each empty run of conduit.

7. Outlet boxes.

8. Wallplates.

9. Connectors and jacks.

10. Cable.

11. Coaxial connection cables for each CATV wall outlet from the CATV wall outlet to the

television unit.

12. A complete, fully functional, CATV system that includes all distribution amplifiers,

splitters, couplers, taps, cable, jacks and all other required components.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 275910 - 2

B. Owner will furnish and install the following:

1. Television units.

C. Contact the Owner’s CATV Company for coordination of extension of existing CATV services

and the utility’s regulations governing the Work of this Section.

D. Contact the Owner’s CATV equipment supplier, for specific instructions before starting Work.

1.4 CATV COMPANY CUSTOMER SERVICE CHARGES

A. Owner will pay all costs directly to the CATV Company for work and services performed by

cable company.

1.5 FUNCTION AND PERFORMANCE

A. Provide CATV signal throughout the building as indicated.

B. All components shall meet FCC and FAA radiation shielding requirements.

C. Furnish and install cable from designated rooms to CATV system equipment backboards, racks,

consoles, etc. as indicated.

D. The system shall receive cable television signals, amplify these signals with amplifiers, quantity

as required, and distribute these signals to all TV outlets to permit the connection of standard

cable ready television receivers commonly manufactured for the standard frequency bands. The

system shall be designed with a minimum bandwidth of 750 MHz.

E. The system, as installed, shall be capable of passing standard NTSC color television signals

without the introduction of noticeable effects on the color fidelity or intelligence.

F. The system and all equipment shall be designed and rated for 24 hours per day continuous

operation.

G. The system carrier to noise ratio shall not be less that 43dB and cross-modulation of -46dB, or

better at output of last amplifier in system.

H. The loss difference between the shortest and longest drop cables from a tap shall be no more

than 7dB. This loss shall be calculated for the full frequency range of the system.


A. The equipment shall be supplied by a manufacturer certified engineering distributor with full

manufacturer’s warranty privileges. Manufacturer’s written certification of the engineering

distributorship shall be provided.




PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 275910 - 3

factory approved replacement parts and is capable of furnishing adequate inspection and service

to the equipment.

C. System installer shall have a minimum of 5 years experience in providing CATV systems.

D. When requested, submit the system installer’s project team which includes, as a minimum, the

project manager and foremen. List the personnel along with a brief description of their

experience and training. The installer’s project team shall be employees of the equipment

supplier. Equipment suppliers employing personnel for local service on a contract basis will not

be acceptable.

1.7 WIRE AND CABLE


Information and the Manufacturer’s information affixed to the wire and cable as specified in

Section 26 05 05, Basic Materials.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEM COMPONENTS

A. Furnish and install television signal distribution systems, of types, performance, capabilities and

channels/frequencies as indicated; RF amplifiers, modulators, splitters, taps, signal combiners

and other components as required for a complete installation. Except as otherwise indicated,

furnish and install manufacturer’s standard television distribution system components as

indicated by published product information, designed and constructed as recommended by

manufacturer.

2.2 SPLITTERS/COUPLERS/TAP-OFFS/DIPLEXERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Blonder Tongue.

B. Performance rated at system frequency bandwidth, minimum.

C. RF shielding.

1. Taps: -100dB

2. Splitters: -80dB

D. Die Cast Housing.

E. Loss ratings and tap values as required.

F. Furnish and install splitters/couplers/tap offs/diplexers as required.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 275910 - 4

2.3 COAX CABLES

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: West Penn, Belden, Commscope.

B. RG 6U type coaxial cable for all drop cables. RG-11/U type coaxial cable for trunkline cables.

C. Plenum rated - CATVP markings.

D. Integral copper conductor with two outer shields (quad shield).

E. Attenuation (nominal) shall be as follows:

Frequency

(MHZ)

RG-6U

(dB/100 ft.)

RG-11U

(dB/100 ft.)

1 MHz 0.37 dB 0.15 dB

10 MHz 0.66 dB 0.45 dB

50 MHz 1.41 dB 0.90 dB

100 MHz 1.92 dB 1.28 dB

200 MHz 2.64 dB 1.85 dB

400 MHz 3.73 dB 2.75 dB

700 MHz 5.05 dB 3.92 dB

900 MHz 5.79 dB 4.72 dB

1000 MHz 6.11 dB 5.04 dB

2.4 CONNECTORS

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Gilbert Engineering, Blonder Tongue or same manufacturer as data

jacks if specified in Section 27 10 10, Telecommunications System.

B. Furnish and install television wall connectors/outlets at locations indicated on Drawings.

C. Television connectors shall be coax `F' connector jacks as specified herein. All connectors shall

be compression type, thread-on and crimp ring types will not be permitted.

D. Connector jacks shall be rated for the full frequency range of the system and approved for use

with the specific coaxial cable that is used.

E. Connector must be rated to withstand 40 pounds, minimum, of pull force without separating

from cable that is used.

2.5 COAX CONNECTION CABLE

A. Furnished and installed between wall connector jack and TV set.

B. Use same cable that is used for cable distribution system.

C. Six feet length.

D. Cable terminated with connectors on both ends.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 275910 - 5

E. Furnish and install a coax connector cable for each TV connector jack plus 10 percent

(minimum of 3) spares.

2.6 RACEWAYS

A. Underground conduit to building shall be Raceway Specification No. 4.

B. Raceway for interior CATV system shall be Raceway Specification No. 2.

2.7 BOXES

A. Television outlet boxes for installation in masonry or dry wall:

1. Acceptable Manufacturers: Steel City GW-235C.

2. Two gang, 2-1/2 inches deep, with plaster ring and adapter plate.

3. Furnish and install two gang box cover.

B. Recessed outlet boxes for wall-mount television/monitor outlets:

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Hubbell NetSelect NSAV62M (Box) and NSAV62C (Cover).

2. Two-gang, 3-1/2 inches deep, recessed combination AV in-wall enclosure.

3. Furnish with duplex receptacle and CATV/telecommunications devices as indicated on

drawings.

2.8 WALL PLATES

A. Furnish and install wall plates on all CATV outlets. Wall plates shall be as specified in

Section 26 05 50, Wiring Devices, for interior use.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install CATV system in accordance with system manufacturer's instructions. Provide all

equipment necessary for a complete and operable system. Final connections between equipment

and the wiring system, testing and placing system in operation, shall be completed under direct

supervision of a representative of the manufacturer. Submit manufacturer's printed installation

instructions with operation and maintenance data at completion of Work.

B. All wires shall be marked at all junction boxes, pull boxes, cabinets, boxes and terminations. All



C. Proceed with caution when installing cable to protect cable from stretching, kinking or sharp

bends. Cable damaged during installation shall be removed and replaced at no additional cost to

Owner.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 275910 - 6

D. Unless noted, 6 feet of additional cable shall be provided at each rack and at each console.

E. Contractor and manufacturer shall correct any condition producing cross talk, appreciable loss

of volume, or distortion in the system after installation has been completed.

F. Installation of CATV equipment shall be supervised by an accredited video engineer. Video

engineer shall be responsible to check and inspect system installation to the satisfaction of

Owner.

G. All connections in video cable shall be made with suitable connectors. Splicing of cable in

conduit will not be permitted. Splicing of coaxial cable will not be permitted. Connectors shall

be used for connection of all video cable to equipment. All couplers, splitters, taps, etc., shall be

located in closets at backboards. Run a separate coax homerun to each television outlet from

backboards.

H. All cables shall be fastened securely with suitable hardware to avoid sharp bends, to prevent

rubbing against sharp corners, and in a manner to prevent damage or physical distortion.

I. Video cables shall be installed in a manner that shall prevent sharp bends and pressure points

which may cause the cable to lose its concentricity due to core migration.

J. All system components shall be labeled.

K. Install terminating resistors at end of each cable distribution run as required.

L. Cable shall have double shielding where two or more cables are run in the same conduit.

M. Furnish and install a #14 fish wire or Jet Line No. 232 pull rope in each unused conduit.

N. Amplifiers and other electronic equipment shall be mounted on backboards. All equipment shall

be protected by grounding to an approved electrical ground. All equipment shall be installed to

permit access for maintenance. All equipment shall be located to avoid interference with

servicing of other nearby equipment.

O. All interior wiring shall be installed in raceway, Raceway Specification No. 2.

3.2 COAX CABLE TESTING

A. Prior to testing the system, align and balance the system to match the specified signal levels by

adjusting the gain or sensitivity of the system’s amplifiers. Use a signal level meter (SLM),

Wavetech CLI-1450 or equivalent, for this preliminary work and document the measurements

for each outlet.

B. Test finished cable system for the following using a SLM and a time domain reflectometer and

document the final measurements for each outlet.

1. Distortion.

2. Signal Uniformity.

3. Signal-To-Noise Ratio.

4. Signal Ingress.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 275910 - 7

5. Hum Modulation.

C. Submit test results for approval by owner and architect prior to substantial completion.


A. Equipment manufacturer shall provide three complete sets of operating instructions, including

circuit diagrams and other information, necessary for complete installation, operation and

maintenance service. One copy of this information shall be submitted for review and will be

returned to Contractor after which three copies shall be delivered to Owner upon the installation

and final testing of the equipment.

B. Upon acceptance of the system by Owner, manufacturer shall provide training for Owner's

personnel in proper operation of the system.

3.4 SUPERVISION


accompany Owner's representative on an inspection of the entire system and shall demonstrate



under the supervision of the manufacturer's representative. Final tests and checks shall be

completed in the presence of the Owner's representative.

C. Equipment manufacturer shall provide a set of operating instructions to Owner, including circuit

diagrams and other information necessary for proper installation, operation and maintenance.

D. Equipment supplier shall assume complete responsibility for equipment and services supplied,

and for complete supervision of system installation and correction of all malfunctions.

Equipment supplier shall be responsible for correct operation of the system.


A. Electrical Contractor shall include in Base Bid cost of and shall provide Owner with a one year

service contract effective from the date of acceptance of the Work. Service contract shall

provide for maintenance and inspection service for the complete system. Provide a minimum of

two inspections during the contract year. Equipment manufacturer shall make available, and if

requested by Owner, the option to extend the service agreement, to provide all parts, labor and

mileage beyond the first year contract period.


A. Unless noted, CATV system components shall be mounted at the following heights:

1. Wall Outlets for Floor, Desk, Tabletop, Etc., Mounted TV Sets: 18 inches above finished

floor.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 275910 - 8

2. Wall Outlets for Wall Bracket or Ceiling Mounted TV Sets: 80 inches above finished

floor.

3. Wall Outlets for Wall Bracket TV Sets: As noted on Drawings.



Strada WVU Shroyer Hall Renovations Identification and Documentation

PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 276010 - 1

SECTION 276010 – TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLE SYSTEMS IDENTIFICATION AND

DOCUMENTATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED


documenting the complete telecommunications cabling system.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


1. Sample labels

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Contractor shall coordinate exact numbering and identification scheme(s) for all

telecommunications spaces, equipment, hardware, devices and cables with the Owner prior to

rough-in. The numbering and identification scheme(s) shall include, but not be limited to

schemes for:

1. Backbone cables.

2. Horizontal distribution cables

3. Telecommunications outlet plates and jacks

4. Racks

5. Patch panels

6. Punch-down/termination blocks

7. Fiber termination enclosures and panels

8. Telecommunications spaces

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SELF-ADHESIVE CABLE LABELS

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Panduit.

B. Labels shall have a clear laminate over wrap to protect printed surface after installation.

C. Size as required to legibly identify cables using the approved labeling scheme.



PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 276010 - 2

D. Label field shall be white with black printing unless noted otherwise.

2.2 SELF-ADHESIVE HARDWARE LABELS

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Panduit, or Hubbell, hardware manufacturer.

B. Labels shall have a clear laminate overlay to protect printed surface after installation

C. Clear laminate overlay shall overlap the label on all edges

D. Size as required to legibly identify cables using the approved labeling scheme.

E. Label field shall be white with black printing unless noted otherwise.

F. Shall only be installed on smooth surface areas.

2.3 TERMINATION HARDWARE LABELS

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Panduit or hardware manufacturer.

B. Paper labels as furnished with termination hardware or as manufactured to fit the termination

hardware.

C. Machine printed.

D. Fitted behind plastic protective cover as part of or attached to termination hardware.

E. Color coded in accordance with TIA/EIA-606 requirements and as specified herein.

2.4 OUTSIDE PLANT CABLE LABELS

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Seton.

B. Labels shall be embedded characters on cable tags and shall be attached to cable with cable ties.

1. Cable ties for attaching labels shall be UV resistant, resistant to fuels, oils and chemicals

and shall be rated for use in manholes and other outside environments.

C. Cable tags shall be indelible, resistant to chemicals, and designed to withstand underground

environments.

1. Fiber cable tags shall be orange and shall state “FIBER OPTIC CABLE”.

2. Copper cable tags shall be yellow and shall state “CUSTOMER OWNED COPPER

CABLE”.

D. Cable tags shall allow a minimum of 15 character labeling for the cable ID.



PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 276010 - 3

2.5 WARNING LABELS

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Seton.

B. Orange background with the text “CAUTION, FIBER OPTIC CABLE” in embossed black

lettering.

C. Warning labels shall be indelible, resistant to chemicals, and designed to withstand underground

environments.

2.6 UNDERGROUND WARNING TAPE

A. Underground warning tape shall be Tape Specification No. 2. Refer to Section 26 05 20, Wire

and Cable, 600 Volts and Below.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 LABELING

A. General

1. Using the drawings as a reference, clearly identify all components of the system: racks,

cables, panels and outlets.

2. Label all cables using the labeling scheme as indicated on the Drawings and as

coordinated with the Owner. The final labeling scheme shall be approved by Owner

prior to start of labeling.

3. Handwritten labels are not acceptable.

B. Inside Plant Cable System Labeling

1. Faceplate and cable labels shall be machine printed on adhesive labels. The font shall be

at least 1/8 inch in height, block characters, and legible.

2. Labels shall be white background with black lettering unless noted otherwise.

3. Patch panels ports and punch down blocks for horizontal distribution cables shall be

labeled to indicate outlet number and each cable serving a given outlet.

4. Patch panel ports and punch down blocks for backbone cables shall be labeled to indicate

cable and pair number.

5. Labels on patch panel ports and punch down blocks shall be numerically sequential.

6. Each horizontal distribution cable shall be labeled at both ends with an adhesive label

bearing its respective cable number. The cable number shall include designators for the

telecommunications space, patch panel, and outlet. Refer to details on the Drawings for

specific requirements.



PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 276010 - 4

7. Each backbone cable shall be labeled at both ends with an adhesive label bearing its

respective cable number. The cable number shall include designators for the origin and

destination telecommunications space and building where applicable.

8. Each multi-pair backbone cable binder group shall be tied off with its respective

identifying ribbon at each break-out point.

9. Outlet plates shall be labeled in the label insert space with a clear plastic cover. Outlet

plates that do not have a label insert space shall be labeled a clear label tape with black

lettering.

10. Room numbers shall not be used for telecommunications cable system identifiers (outlet,

cable, telecom space, etc.) unless specifically requested by the Owner.

11. The labeling system for cables shall designate the cable’s origin and destination.

12. Backbone cables, coax and voice, shall designate the cables origin (Entrance Facility,

MDF or TC room number) and destination (Entrance Facility, MDF or TC room

number).

13. Racks and cabinets shall be identified with engraved laminate labels by

telecommunications space number and a unique rack/cabinet identifier.

14. Patch panels and termination enclosures shall be identified with adhesive laminated

labels by telecommunications space number, rack/cabinet number and a unique

panel/enclosures identifier.

15. All labeling information shall be recorded on the record document drawings. Test

documents shall reflect the approved labeling scheme.

C. Outside Plant Cable Labeling

1. Each outside plant cable shall have a cable label installed within 12 inches of:

a. Each manhole entrance/exit.

b. Each splice case.

c. Building entrance.

d. Each termination field.

2. Each outside plant fiber optic cable shall have a warning label installed within 18 inches

of:

a. Each manhole entrance/exit.

b. Each splice case.

c. Building entrance.

d. Each termination field.

3. Furnish and install warning tape in trench above all conduits and duct banks where

optical fiber cable will be installed.

4. Furnish and install warning tape in trench above all direct buried cables.

3.2 SYSTEM DOCUMENTATION

A. Contractor will be provided with one set of drawings at the start of the project. This set will be

designated as the central location to document all record document information as it occurs

throughout the project. The central set will be maintained by the Contractor on a daily basis, and



PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 276010 - 5

shall be available to the Owner's Representative upon request during the course of the project.

No variations will be allowed to the planned termination positions of horizontal and backbone

cables and hardware unless approved in writing by the Owner.

B. Provide an advanced copy of the central drawing set to the Owner’s Information Technology

personnel prior to substantial completion. This copy of the drawing shall properly identify each

outlet and termination location with the final outlet and cable identifiers as specified and as

coordinated with the Owner. This copy of the central drawing set shall be available to the

Owner’s Information Technology personnel at least 30 days prior to the Owner’s scheduled date

of occupancy.

C. Provide the central drawing set to the Owner upon completion of the installation. The marked

up drawing set shall accurately depict the installed status of the system including termination

locations, cable routing, and all administration labeling for the cable system. In addition, a

narrative shall be provided that describes any areas of difficulty encountered during the

installation that could potentially cause problems to the telecommunications system.

3.3 WARRANTY DOCUMENTS

A. Furnish the original warranty certificates(s) and any supporting information to the Owner as

part of the record documents.


Strada WVU Shroyer Hall Renovations Television Conduit

PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 Distribution System - CCTV

282330 - 1

SECTION 282330 – TELEVISION CONDUIT DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM – CCTV

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED


furnishing and installing a conduit distribution system for a future closed circuit television

(CCTV) system.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


1. Wall Plates

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Contractor shall provide the following:

1. Conduit and pull boxes for television distribution system.

2. Outlet boxes and blank wall plates for wall television outlets.

3. Ground wire and ground clamps.

4. Power supply to cable TV equipment.

5. A #14 fish wire or Jet Line No. 232 pull rope in each run of conduit.

B. The following items will be the responsibility of the Owner:

1. Wire and cable.

2. CCTV distribution equipment.

3. Cameras.

4. Monitors.

5. Wall receptacles for CCTV.

C. Contact the Owner's CCTV equipment supplier, for specific instructions before starting Work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RACEWAYS

A. Raceway for interior CCTV system shall be Raceway Specification No. 2.

Strada WVU Shroyer Hall Renovations Television Conduit

PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 Distribution System - CCTV

282330 - 2

2.2 BOXES

A. Television outlet boxes for installation in masonry or dry wall:

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Steel City GW 335C.

2. Two gang, 2 1/2 inches deep.

3. Furnish and install plaster ring, single gang adapter plates and single gang cover.

2.3 WALL PLATES

A. Furnish and install blank wall plates on all CCTV outlets. Wall plates shall be Wall Plate

Specification No. W2.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Furnish and install a #14 fish wire or Jet Line No. 232 pull rope in each run of conduit.

B. Where sleeves are indicated on Drawings, furnish and install a measured length of conduit, size

as indicated, capped at both ends.


A. Unless noted, CCTV system components shall be mounted at the following heights:

1. Wall Outlet for Interior Cameras (9' 6" ceiling area and below): 6 inches below finished

ceiling

2. Wall Outlet for Interior Cameras (other than 9' 6" ceiling areas): 8’-0”

3. Wall Outlets for Desk, Tabletop, Etc., Mounted Monitors: 18 inches above finished

floor.


Strada WVU Shroyer Hall Renovations FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 283110 - 1

SECTION 283110 – FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. Work of this Section shall consist of labor, materials, and equipment required for furnishing and

installing a complete operating intelligent microprocessor based fire alarm system as follows:

1. Addressable Analog System: A system that shall utilize both on-off initiating devices that

have discrete identification and the on-off status individually identified and sensors that

have discrete identification and the varying degree of condition monitored. System shall

not require separate circuits for fire alarm initiation zones, but shall provide for individual

initiation device annunciation.

2. Alarm tone evacuation: Control panels shall be equipped with the necessary hardware to

allow for pulsed, steady state and temporal alarm tones.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


1. All fire alarm system components.

2. Wiring and interconnecting diagrams of all items of equipment.

3. All system product and component data sheets shall have all components highlighted to

indicate the specified products, components, features, and functions. All substitute items

submitted under this contract must provide a detailed line-by-line comparison of how the

submitted product meets, exceeds, or does not comply with this specification.

4. System power and battery charts with performance graphs and voltage drop calculations

to assure that the system will operate per the prescribed backup time periods and under

all voltage conditions per UL and NFPA standards.

5. Product certification signed by the manufacturer of the fire alarm system components

certifying that their products comply with the requirements of the project and all codes

and regulations.

6. Certificate bearing the system designer’s signature and NICET III certification number

certifying that the design complies with the requirements of the project and applicable

codes, regulations and standards.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Fire alarm control panel shall contain supervised digital communicator for connection to an off-

site monitoring station. Modules shall notify off- site monitoring for both alarm and trouble

separately. Contractor shall coordinate with Owner and fire alarm equipment supplier for

central station monitoring agreement.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 283110 - 2

B. Furnish and install wiring from main fire alarm panel to elevator bank control panels in elevator

equipment room and make connections. Elevator installer will perform all work required on

elevator control system for fireman’s return. Coordinate with elevator installer.

C. Furnish and install wiring between the fire alarm control panel and the Elevator Power

Disconnect Module for elevator shunt trip shut-down and for monitoring elevator shunt trip

voltage.

D. Furnish, install, and wire four (4) fire alarm relay modules for each elevator controller. Relay

modules shall be for Shunt, Primary Recall, Secondary Recall, and Service.

E. OS&Y valves with supervisory switch and water flow switches will be furnished and installed

as Work of Division 21 and shall be wired as Work of this Section. Electrical contractor shall

furnish and install fire alarm monitor module for each tamper and flow switch.

F. Electric alarm bell will be furnished and installed as Work of Division 21 and wired as Work of

this Section. Electrical Contractor shall furnish, install, and wire fire alarm relay module for

electric alarm bell.

G. Duct smoke detectors for the control of mechanical equipment shall be installed in air ducts,

where indicated on Drawings. Furnish duct smoke detectors and furnish and install remote relay

modules and fire alarm system wiring. Installation of duct smoke detector will be by HVAC.

Wiring from detector to remote relay module for control of mechanical equipment shall be

furnished and installed by Electrical Contractor. Wiring from the remote relay module for

control of mechanical equipment will be furnished and installed as Work of Division 23.

Coordinate location of duct smoke detector with HVAC Contractor.

H. Duct smoke detectors for the control of smoke dampers shall be installed in air ducts where

indicated on Drawings. Furnish duct smoke detectors and furnish and install remote relay

modules and fire alarm system wiring. Installation of duct smoke detector will be by HVAC

Contractor. Wiring from detector and remote relay module to smoke dampers shall be furnished

and installed by the Electrical Contractor. Coordinate location of duct smoke detector with

HVAC Contractor.

I. Gas solenoid valves will be furnished and installed by the Plumbing Contractor. Furnish and

install relay modules as indicated and required to shut off gas valves in laboratories, kitchen,

laundry, etc. Coordinate valve wiring requirements with Plumbing Contractor.

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Furnish and install a complete intelligent, addressable fire alarm system as described herein and

as shown on the Drawings; to be wired, connected, and left in first class operating condition.

Include a control panel, manual pull stations (fire alarm boxes), automatic fire and smoke

detectors, horns, annunciator, remote control devices, all wiring, connections to devices, outlet

boxes, junction boxes, and all other necessary material for a complete operating system.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 283110 - 3

1.5 FUNCTION

A. When an alarm is initiated at the fire alarm control panel, the audible alarm devices shall sound

and visual alarm devices shall provide notification throughout the protected premises and notify

off-site monitoring station.

B. The system shall be capable of being reset by use of the reset switch located at the fire alarm

control panel(s) and on remote annunciators.

C. Power failure, an open circuit, or other abnormal conditions shall cause audible trouble signal(s)

to sound and visual trouble lamp(s) to light at the fire alarm panel(s) and on remote

annunciators and notify the off-site monitoring station. Audible trouble signal(s) may be

silenced but visual trouble lamp(s) shall remain lit until the trouble condition(s) is/are corrected

and restored to normal.

D. Fire alarm system shall signal elevator control, upon an alarm condition, to cause all elevators

to move to the floor (either preferred or alternate) designated by the Owner and to stop. During

these conditions the elevator shall be under manual operation. Provide override of this signal for

testing and drills.

E. Smoke detectors in elevator lobbies, hoistways, and machine rooms upon being activated, shall

cause audible alarm to be initiated at the fire alarm control panel, and shall signal elevator

control to cause all elevators to move to the Owner’s designated floor (either preferred or

alternate) and to stop. Provide three (3) zones; Zone 1 – primary recall landing; Zone 2 – typical

landings; Zone 3 – elevator machine room/hoist way. During these conditions, the elevator shall

be under manual operation.

F. Activation of a heat detector in hoistway(s) or elevator machine room(s) shall activate shunt trip

in the elevator power disconnect module(s) and shut down power to the elevator(s).

G. Upon sensing smoke in air ducts, duct smoke detector(s) shall activate remote relay module(s)

and cause alarm to be initiated at the fire alarm control panel. Remote relay modules(s), where

connected to smoke dampers, shall have a normally closed contact to open upon detector

activation and stop voltage to smoke damper motors causing dampers to close. Remote relay

modules(s), where connected to air handler control circuits, shall have a normally closed contact

to open upon detector activation and open air handler control circuit causing air handler to shut-

down.

H. OS&Y valve supervisory switch activation (closing of an OS&Y valve) shall cause a

supervisory signal to be transmitted to the fire alarm control panel and a local signal to sound.

I. Water flow switch in the sprinkler main shall, when activated, cause alarm to be initiated at the

fire alarm control panel.

J. Activation of a flow switch in the sprinkler branch piping of each floor, when activated, shall

cause an alarm to be initiated at the fire alarm control panel. Indication shall be provided at the

fire alarm control panel on to indicate which floor water flow switch has been activated.

K. Activation of a Knox box tamper switch shall when activated, shall cause a supervisory signal

to be initiated at the fire alarm control panel.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 283110 - 4

L. Owner will provide for off-site monitoring or on-site central monitoring under separate contract.

Electrical Contractor shall furnish and install wiring (either copper or fiber optic, as indicated,

and jacks) between fire alarm control panel and telecom service entrance backboard and make

all connections as required. Coordinate dial-tone with Owner. Fire alarm equipment supplier

shall provide all programming necessary to allow the digital communicator to transmit to the

central monitoring station.

M. Priority of Signals:

1. Fire alarm events have highest priority.

2. Subsequent alarm events are queued in the order received and do not affect existing alarm

conditions.

3. Priority Two, Supervisory and Trouble events have second-, third-, and fourth-level

priority respectively.

4. Signals of a higher-level priority take precedence over signals of lower priority even

though the lower-priority condition occurred first.

5. Annunciate all events regardless of priority or order received.

N. Non-interfering:

1. An event on one zone shall not prevent the receipt of signals from any other zone.

2. All zones shall be manually resettable from the FACP after the initiating device or

devices are restored to normal.

3. The activation of an addressable device shall not prevent the receipt of signals from

subsequent addressable device activations.

O. Transmission to Remote Central Station:

1. Automatically route alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals to a remote central station

service as provided by Owner under another contract.

2. System shall be capable of transmitting specific point data to the central station including

type of alarm (smoke, heat, manual, sprinkler, etc.) and location within the building.

P. Annunciation:

1. Operation of alarm and supervisory initiating devices shall be annunciated at the FACP

and the remote annunciator, indicating the location and type of device.


A. The fire alarm system shall be furnished and installed to be in compliance with applicable codes

and regulations. Due to there being differences (loudness, brightness, spacing requirements,

etc.) between various fire alarm system components, it shall be the Electrical Contractor and the

fire alarm system supplier’s responsibility to review the Contract Documents (Specifications

and Drawings) in depth and modify the component and device lay-out to ensure the furnished

and installed system complies with applicable codes and regulations.

B. Each and all items of the fire alarm system shall be listed as a product of a single fire alarm

system manufacturer under the appropriate category by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL),


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 283110 - 5

and shall bear the "U.L." label. All control equipment is to be listed under UL category UOJZ as

a single control unit. Partial listing shall not be acceptable.

C. The equipment and installation supervision furnished under this specification shall be provided

by a manufacturer who has been engaged in production of this type of equipment for at least ten

(10) years, and has a fully equipped service organization within fifty (50) miles of the

installation. A list of five (5) references of similar installations within fifty (50) miles of this

project shall be provided upon request.

D. The organization furnishing and installing this equipment shall employ factory trained and

NICET certified technicians, and shall provide a list of certified technicians indicating current

certification status upon request.

E. All control equipment shall have transient protection devices to comply with UL864

requirements.

F. In addition to the UL UOJZ requirement mentioned above, the system controls shall be UL

listed for Power Limited Applications per NEC 760. All circuits must be marked in accordance

with NEC article 760 10.

G. Wire and cable shall be safety and application tested, performance tested and shall have this

information and the manufacturer’s information affixed to the wire and cable as specified in

Section 26 05 10, Basic Materials


A. The equipment shall be supplied by a manufacturer-certified engineering distributor.

Manufacturer’s written certification of the engineering distributorship shall be provided when

requested.



factory approved replacement parts, and is capable of furnishing adequate inspection and

service to the equipment.

C. Equipment suppliers employing personnel for local service on a “contract basis” will not be

acceptable.

D. Equipment supplier shall employ factory trained and NICET Level III Certified technicians.

1.8 VARIATIONS TO SPECIFIED MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

A. Any variations of materials and equipment specified shall be completely described listing all

variances from that specified. This information shall be submitted with shop drawings of

equipment.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 283110 - 6

1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. General: Furnish and turn over to Owner extra materials, packaged with protective covering for

storage, and identified with labels clearly describing contents as follows:

1. Fire Alarm Stations: Furnish quantity equal to 2 percent of number of units installed, but

not less than one.

2. Visual Alarm (strobes) and Recessed Ceiling Speaker Units: Furnish quantity equal to 2

percent of the number of each type of units installed, but not less than one.

3. Audible/Visual Alarm Units: Furnish quantity equal to 2 percent of the number of units

installed, but not less than one.

4. Smoke Detectors or Sensors, Ionization Detectors, Fire Detectors, Heat Detectors, and

Flame Detectors: Furnish quantity equal to 10 percent of the number of units of each type

installed but not less than one of each type.

5. Detector or Sensor Bases: Furnish quantity equal to 2 percent of the number of units of

each type installed but not less than one of each type.

6. Relay Modules: Furnish quantity equal to 2 percent of the number of units of each type

installed but not less than one of each type.

7. Pull Station Lexan Shields with Sounders: Furnish six.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL (FACP)

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Simplex 4010ES Series fire alarm control panel, or Edwards,

Notifier, Siemens, FCI-Gamewell.

B. Listing: UL Listed to UL Std. 864, Fire Detection and Control (UOJZ).

C. Power limited base panel with cabinet and door, 120 VAC, 60 HZ input power.

D. Minimum of 250 addressable point capacity per node inclusive of inputs and outputs in any

combination.

E. Minimum of 250 points of annunciation where one (1) point of annunciation of equals one (1)

output or 1 switch input on an I/O module.

F. Minimum of three (3) Class B/Style Y Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC) rated 3 A @ 24

VDC, resistive.

G. Minimum of two (2) form “C” Auxiliary Output Circuits rated 2 A @24 VDC, respective.

1. Operation is programmable for trouble, alarm, supervisory or other selective control

operations.

2. Provide capability for switching up to 1/2 A @ 120 VAC, inductive loads.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 283110 - 7

H. Connectivity: Minimum of four (4) RS -232-C control and communications ports, Ethernet port

for remote installation, programming, and troubleshooting

I. Supervised serial communication channel for control and monitoring of remotely located LCD

annunciators and I/O panels.

J. System shall include a Digital Alarm Communicating Transmitter (DACT), capable of

reception and transmission of any system-wide activity.

K. Integral power supply and battery charger.

L. Cabinet: Steel, with a locking, transparent front door. 24” wide, height as required for

application.

M. Mounting: Surface-mounted.

N. Front panel controls for testing, operation and maintenance from the front of the enclosure.

O. Alphanumeric display and system controls:

1. Minimum 80 character LCD display to indicate alarm supervisory, and component status

messages

2. Keypad for use in entering and executing commands

P. System Operations

1. A system alarm shall include:

a. Indication of alarm condition at the FACP and the annunciator(s).

b. Identification of the device /zone that is the source of the alarm at the FACP and

the annunciator(s).

c. Transmission of alarm signal to remote central station.

d. Operation of audible and visible notification devices until silenced at FACP.

e. Closing doors normally held open by magnetic door holders.

f. Shutting down supply and return fans serving zone where alarm is initiated.

g. Notifying the local fire department.

h. Initiation of elevator recall in accordance with ASME/ANSI A17.1, when specified

detectors or detectors are activated.

i. Recording of the event in the FACP historical log.

2. A supervisory alarm from a supervisory device shall include:

a. Activation of the system supervisory service audible signal and illumination of the

LED at the FACP and the remote annunciator.

b. Record the event in the FACP historical log.

c. Transmission of supervisory signal to remote central station.

d. Correction of the condition shall cause the supervisory LED to clear and restore

the system to normal.

3. Alarm Silence, when activated from the FACP or annunciator shall cause all audible

alarm signals to cease operation.

4. System Reset shall be used to return the system to its normal state. The system shall

verify all circuits or devices are restored prior to resetting the system to avoid the

potential for re-alarming the system.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 283110 - 8

a. Display messages shall provide operator assurance of the sequential steps involved

in reset as they occur.

b. Should an alarm condition continue, the system shall remain in an alarmed state.

5. A manual evacuation (drill) switch shall be provided to operate the notification

appliances without causing other control circuits to be activated. Transmission to the

central station shall be suppressed during manual evacuation.

6. The system shall have the capacity of eight (8) programmable pass code protected one

person testing groups, such that only a portion of the system need be disabled during

testing. Test mode shall operate as follows:

a. The central station connection and any suppression release circuits shall be

bypassed for the testing group.

b. Control relay functions associated with the testing groups shall be bypassed.

c. The control unit shall indicate a trouble condition.

d. The alarm activation of any initiation device in the testing group shall cause the

audible notification appliances assigned only to that group to sound a code to

identify the device or zone.

e. The unit shall automatically reset itself after signaling is complete.

f. Any opening of an initiating or notification appliance circuit wiring shall cause the

audible signals to sound for 4 seconds indicating the trouble condition.

Q. Distributed Module Operation: FACP shall be capable of allowing remote location of the

following modules. Interface of such modules shall be through a supervised serial

communications channel (SLC):

1. Amplifiers, voice and telephone control circuits

2. Addressable Signaling Line Circuits

3. Initiating Device Circuits

4. Notification Appliance Circuits

5. Auxiliary Control Circuits

6. Graphic Annunciator LED/Switch Control Modules

R. Power Requirements

1. The control unit shall receive AC power via a dedicated circuit breaker.

2. The system shall be provided with sufficient battery capacity to operate the entire system

upon loss of normal AC power in a normal supervisory mode for a period of 24 hours

with 15 minutes of alarm operation at the end of this period. The system shall

automatically transfer to battery standby upon power failure. All battery charging and

recharging operations shall be automatic.

3. All circuits requiring system-operating power shall be 24 VDC and shall be individually

fused at the control unit.

4. The incoming power to the system shall be supervised so that any power failure will be

indicated at the control unit. A green "power on" LED shall be displayed continuously at

the user interface while incoming power is present.

5. The system batteries shall be supervised so that a low battery or a depleted battery

condition, or disconnection of the battery shall be indicated at the control unit and

displayed for the specific fault type.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 283110 - 9

6. The system shall support 100 percent of addressable devices in alarm or operated at the

same time, under both primary (AC) and secondary (battery) power conditions.

7. Loss of primary power shall sound a trouble signal at the FACP. The FACP shall indicate

when the system is operating on an alternate power supply.

S. Analog Smoke Sensors

1. The FACP shall individually monitor sensors for calibration, sensitivity and alarm

condition, and shall individually adjust for sensitivity. The control unit shall determine

the condition of each sensor by comparing the sensor value to the stored values.

2. The FACP shall maintain a moving average of the sensor's smoke chamber value to

automatically compensate for dust, dirt, and other conditions that could affect detection

operations.

3. Photoelectric smoke sensors shall have 7 selectable sensitivity levels ranging from 0.2%

to 3.7%, programmed and monitored from the FACP.

4. The FACP shall provide sensor reports that meet NFPA 72 calibrated test method

requirements. The reports shall be viewed on a display or printed for annual recording

and logging of the calibration maintenance schedule.

5. The FACP shall automatically indicate when an individual sensor needs cleaning. The

system shall provide a means to automatically indicate when a sensor requires cleaning.

a. When a sensor's average value reaches a predetermined value, 3 progressive levels

of reporting are provided.

b. The first level shall indicate if a sensor is close to a trouble reporting condition and

will be indicated on the FACP. This condition provides a means to alert

maintenance staff of a sensor approaching dirty condition without creating a

trouble in the system.

c. If this indicator is ignored and the second level is reached, a "DIRTY SENSOR"

condition shall be indicated at the FACP. The sensor base LED shall glow steady

giving a visible indication at the sensor location. The "DIRTY SENSOR"

condition shall not affect the sensitivity level required to alarm the sensor.

d. If a "DIRTY SENSOR" is left unattended, and its average value increases to a

third predetermined value, an "EXCESSIVELY DIRTY SENSOR" trouble

condition shall be indicated at the FACP.

6. The FACP shall continuously perform an automatic self-test on each sensor which will

check sensor electronics and ensure the accuracy of the values being transmitted. Any

sensor that fails this test shall indicate a "SELF TEST ABNORMAL" trouble condition.

7. It shall be possible to program relay and sounder bases to operate independently of their

associated sensor.

T. Fire Suppression Monitoring

1. Water Flow: Activation of a water flow switch shall initiate general alarm operations.

2. Sprinkler Valve Tamper Switch: The activation of any valve tamper switch shall activate

system supervisory operations.

3. Water flow switches and sprinkler valve tamper switches shall be capable of existing on

the same initiating zone. Activation of any device shall distinctly report which device is

in alarm on the initiating zone.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 283110 - 10

U. Software

1. The FACP shall allow for loading or editing special instructions and operating sequences

as required. The system shall be capable of on-site programming to accommodate

expansion, building parameter changes, or changes as required by local codes. All

software operations shall be stored in a non-volatile programmable memory within the

FACP. Loss of primary and secondary power shall not erase the instructions stored in

memory.

2. The ability for selective input/output control functions based on Boolean logic–

(ANDing, Oring, NOTing), timing and special coded operations shall be incorporated in

the resident software programming of the system.

3. To accommodate and facilitate job site changes, initiation circuits shall be individually

configurable on-site to provide either alarm/trouble operation, alarm only, trouble only,

current limited alarm, no alarm, normally closed device monitoring, a non-latching circuit

or a alarm verification circuit.

4. To accommodate and facilitate job site changes, notification appliance circuits shall be

individually configurable on-site to provide, upon activation, a temporal code until

silenced or reset, upon any output circuit.

5. To accommodate and facilitate job site changes, all hard-wired initiation and control

circuits shall be individually configurable, on-site, in any combination, to provide

initiating circuit, notification circuit, or auxiliary control circuit operation.

V. History Logs: The system shall provide a means to recall alarms and trouble conditions in

chronological order for the purpose of recreating an event history. A separate alarm and trouble

log shall be provided.

W. Recording of Events: Record all alarm, supervisory, and trouble events by means of a system

printer. The printout shall include the type of signal (alarm, supervisory, or trouble), the device

identification, date and time of the occurrence. The printout shall differentiate alarm signals

from all other printed indications.

X. Storage: Panel shall have dedicated compact flash memory for archiving of status and event

logs.

2.2 FIRE ALARM ANNUNCIATOR PANEL

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Same as FACP manufacturer, or as approved.

B. Remote LCD annunciator(s) as required with a front panel interface similar to the FACP

operator interface. The remote LCD annunciator shall feature the same primary operator

controls as the FACP.

C. Annunciator shall receive its operating power from the FACP.

D. Annunciator shall have super-twist LCD display with a minimum of two lines of 40 characters

each. Annunciator shall be provided with a minimum of three (3) programmable LEDs.

E. Under normal conditions the LCD shall display a “SYSTEM IS NORMAL” message and

current time and date.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 283110 - 11

F. Should an abnormal condition be detected the appropriate LED (Alarm, Supervisory or

Trouble) shall flash. The unit audible signal shall pulse for alarm conditions and sound steady

for trouble and supervisory conditions.

G. The LCD shall display the following information relative to the abnormal condition of a point in

the system:

1. Type of device (e.g. smoke, pull station, water flow)

2. Point status (e.g., alarm, trouble).

H. Operator keys shall be key switch enabled to prevent unauthorized use. The key shall only be

removable in the disabled position. Acknowledge, Silence and Reset operation shall be the same

as the FACP.

2.3 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCE CIRCUIT (NAC) POWER EXTENDER PANEL


B. Input Voltage: 120VAC.

C. The NAC power extender panel shall be a stand-alone panel capable of powering a minimum of

4 notification appliance circuits. Notification appliance circuits shall be Class B Style Y, rated

at 2 amps each.

D. The internal power supply & battery charger shall be capable of charging up to 12 Ah batteries,

internally mounted.

E. NAC Power Extender Panel shall be connected to the addressable loop (SLC), and notification

appliance circuits shall be selectively activated by this connection.

F. Alarms from the host fire panel shall signal the NAC power extender panel to activate. The

panel shall monitor itself and each of its notification appliance circuits for trouble conditions

and shall report trouble conditions to the host panel.

G. NAC power extender panel shall be a standard product offering of the fire alarm system

manufacturer.

2.4 MANUAL FIRE ALARM BOX (PULL STATION)


B. Manual addressable pull station.

C. Double action push-pull type.

D. Break-glass type stations are not acceptable.

E. Construction: Red LEXAN

F. Molded raised-letter identification and operating instructions of contrasting color.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 283110 - 12

G. Mechanical latch upon operation.

H. Key operated manual reset.

I. Keying common with control units.

J. Communication transmitter and receiver.

K. Unique identification.

L. Capability for status reporting to the FACP.

M. Furnish and install a tamperproof, clear LEXAN protective shield and red frame over manual

pull stations.

1. Protective shield shall include a battery operated sounder, activated by opening cover.

2.5 DETECTION DEVICES


B. Smoke Detector

1. Photoelectric type.

2. UL listed to with UL 268, Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems.

3. Factory Nameplate: Serial number and type identification.

4. Operating Voltage: 24 VDC, nominal.

5. Self-Restoring: Detectors shall not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to

restore normal operation.

6. LED indicator:

a. Flash when scanned by FACP.

b. Steady during alarm condition.

7. Magnetically actuated test switch.

8. Communication transmitter and receiver

9. Unique identification.

10. Capability for status reporting to the FACP.

11. Removal of the detector head for cleaning shall not require the setting of addresses.

12. Relay base

13. Detector electronics shall include:

a. Environmental compensation

b. Programmable sensitivity settings

c. Status testing

d. Monitoring of detector dirt accumulation

e. Detector type identification.

14. Detector status shall be communicated to the FACP during each polling cycle.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 283110 - 13

15. The detector's electronics shall be immune from false alarms caused by EMI and RFI.

C. Smoke/Heat Detector

1. Multi-sensor shall feature both photoelectric smoke sensing and thermal sensing in a

single detector head.

2. Thermal sensing component shall be of the epoxy encapsulated electronic design. It shall

be thermistor-based, rate-compensated, self-restoring and shall not be affected by thermal

lag.

3. Heat sensing component shall be a combination fixed-temperature and rate-of-rise unit,

with the following set-points:

a. Fixed Temperature Setpoint: 135 degrees F, unless noted otherwise on Drawings.

b. Rate-of-rise: 15 degrees F per minute.

4. Detectors shall comply with UL 268, Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling

Systems.

5. Factory Nameplate: Serial number and type identification.

6. Operating Voltage: 24 VDC, nominal.

7. Self-Restoring: Detectors shall not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to

restore normal operation.

8. LED indicator:

a. Flash when scanned by FACP.

b. Steady during alarm condition.

9. Magnetically actuated test switch.

10. Communication transmitter and receiver

11. Unique identification.

12. Capability for status reporting to the FACP.

13. Removal of the detector head for cleaning shall not require the setting of addresses.

14. Relay base

15. Detector electronics shall include:

a. Environmental compensation

b. Programmable sensitivity settings

c. Status testing

d. Monitoring of detector dirt accumulation

e. Detector type identification.

16. Detector status shall be communicated to the FACP during each polling cycle.

17. The detector's electronics shall be immune from false alarms caused by EMI and RFI.

D. Duct Detector

1. Duct smoke detector housing.

2. Detector head as specified above

3. Sampling tube of design and dimensions as recommended by the manufacturer for the

specific duct size and installation conditions where applied.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 283110 - 14

4. Relay control trouble indicator Yellow LED.

5. Transparent cover to monitor for the presence of smoke.

6. Cover shall secure to housing by means of captive fastening screws.

7. Two (2) test ports for measuring airflow and for testing. These ports shall allow aerosol

injection in order to test the activation of the duct smoke detector.

8. Magnetic test area and red detector status LED.

9. For maintenance purposes, it shall be possible to clean the duct housing sampling tubes

by accessing them through the duct housing front cover.

10. Remote Indicator and Test Station

a. Single gang wall mount

b. Alarm indicator LED

c. Keyed test switch, where indicated.

11. Supervised relay contact drivers for connection to remote relay(s) for control of air

handlers, fans and dampers as required by code.

a. Remote Relay

1) Fully encapsulated circuitry with wire leads for connection to fire alarm

circuits and equipment.

2) Addressable with fully programmable output.

3) End of line resistors as required.

4) Furnish and install in a separate back box within three feet of the equipment

to be controlled.

2.6 ADDRESSABLE CIRCUIT INTERFACE MODULE


B. Addressable circuit interface modules will be capable of mounting in a standard electric outlet

box. Modules shall include cover plates to allow surface or flush mounting.

C. Modules shall receive their operating power from the signaling line or a separate two wire pair

running from an appropriate power supply as required.

D. Fire Alarm Monitor Module

1. Furnish and install for all system components that are not otherwise equipped for

addressable communication. Modules shall be used for monitoring of water flow, valve

tamper and all other non-addressable devices.

2. Individually addressable that has both its power and its communications supplied by the

two wire multiplexing signaling line circuit.

3. Location specific addressability to a fire alarm initiating device by monitoring normally

open dry contacts.

4. Location specific addressability for up to five supervisory devices by monitoring

normally closed or normally open dry contacts.

5. Capability of communicating four zone status conditions (normal, alarm, current limited,

trouble) to the FACP.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 283110 - 15

E. Fire Alarm Relay Module

1. Furnish and install for all devices which require a change of state during fire alarm

conditions. Modules shall be used for control of air handlers, smoke dampers, elevators,

door holders, etc.

2. Individually addressable that has both its power and its communications supplied by the

two wire multiplexing signaling line circuit.

3. Location specific addressability to a fire alarm point of control.

4. All circuit interface modules shall be supervised and uniquely identified by the control

unit. Module identification shall be transmitted to the control unit for processing

according to the program instructions.

5. On-board LED to provide an indication that the module is powered and communicating

with the FACP. The LEDs shall provide a troubleshooting aid since the LED blinks on

poll whenever the peripheral is powered and communicating.

2.7 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES

A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Same as FACP manufacturer, or as approved.

B. Horn/Strobe (A/V) Appliance

1. Listed to UL 1971 and UL 464.

2. 24 VDC, supplied by the FACP.

3. Wall or ceiling mounted as indicated on Drawings.

4. Red in color.

5. Strobe Light: Xenon flash tube and associated lens/reflector system, with selectable

minimum flash intensities of 15 cd, 75 cd and 110 cd. Capable of synchronized operation.

6. Horn Component: Minimum sound pressure level of 85 dBA @ 24 VDC.

7. Enclosure shall mount directly to standard single gang, double gang or 4 inch square

electrical box, without the use of special adapters or trim rings.

8. Notification appliance circuit shall provide synchronization of strobes at a rate of 1 Hz

and shall operate horns with a continuous pattern. The circuit shall provide the capability

to silence the audible signals, while the strobes continue to flash, over a single pair of

wires. The capability to synchronize multiple notification appliance circuits shall be

provided.

C. Strobe Only (V/O) Appliance

1. Listed to UL 1971.

2. 24 VDC, supplied by the FACP.

3. Wall or ceiling mounted as indicated on Drawings.

4. Red in color.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 283110 - 16

5. Strobe Light: Xenon flash tube and associated lens/reflector system, with selectable

minimum flash intensities of 15 cd, 75 cd and 110 cd, and shall be capable of

synchronized operation.

6. Enclosure shall mount directly to a standard single gang, double gang or 4 inch square

electrical box without the use of special adapters or trim rings.

7. Notification appliance circuit shall provide synchronization of strobes at a rate of 1 Hz.

The capability to synchronize multiple notification appliance circuits shall be provided.

2.8 KNOX BOX

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Knox 3200 Series, no substitutions.

B. Surface mounted with hinged door.

C. UL Listed Tamper Switches: One tamper switch for unauthorized box removal and one tamper

switch for unauthorized box opening.

D. 1/4 inch plate steel housing.

E. 1/2 inch thick steel door with interior gasket seal and stainless steel door hinge.

F. 1/8 inch thick stainless steel dust cover over lock with tamper seal. Item necessary for installing

tamper seal furnished and turned over to Owner.

G. UL listed lock with double-action rotating tumblers and hardened steel pins accessed by a

biased cut key.

H. Weather resistant, dark bronze finish.

I. The Contractor shall contact the local fire department to obtain the proper key-code for the

device.

J.

2.9 WIRE AND CABLE

A. Wire and cable type, quantity and size shall be as directed by the fire alarm system equipment

supplier.

B. Wiring/Signal Transmission:

1. Transmission shall be hard-wired, using separate individual circuits for each zone of

alarm operation as required or addressable signal transmission, dedicated to fire alarm

service only.

2. Connections for initiating device circuits shall be Class B/Style B.

3. Connections for notification appliance circuits shall be Class B/Style Y.

4. Connections for signaling line circuits shall be Style 4.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 283110 - 17

5. Circuit Supervision: Circuit faults shall be indicated by a trouble signal at the FACP.

Provide a distinctive indicating audible tone and alphanumeric annunciation.

C. Wire and cable shall be a type listed for its intended use by an approval agency acceptable to the

Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) and shall be installed in accordance with the appropriate

articles from the current approved edition of NFPA 70: National Electric Code (NEC).

D. Contractor, through the equipment supplier, shall obtain from the fire alarm system

Manufacturer written instruction regarding the appropriate wire/cable to be used for this

installation. No deviation from the written instruction shall be made by the Contractor without

the prior written approval of the fire alarm system manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install fire alarm system in accordance with NFPA standards and system manufacturer’s

instructions. Furnish and install all equipment necessary for a complete and operable system.

Final connections between equipment and the wiring system, testing, and placing system in

operation shall be completed under direct supervision of a representative of the manufacturer.

Submit manufacturer’s printed installation instruction, with operation and maintenance data at

completion of Work.

B. Installation personnel shall be supervised by persons who are qualified and experienced in the

installation, inspection, and testing of fire alarm systems. Examples of qualified personnel shall

include, but not be limited to, the following:

1. Factory trained and certified personnel.

2. National Institute of Certification in Engineering Technologies (NICET) fire alarm level

II certified personnel.

3. Personnel licensed or certified by state or local authority.

C. Smoke detectors shall not be installed until all major construction and clean-up have been

completed (substantial completion). After major construction and clean-up have been

completed, dust covers shall be installed on all smoke detectors until acceptance by Owner. For

analog addressable systems, the sensitivity of all smoke sensors shall be evaluated for the area

where the detector is installed and the detectors shall be cleaned as required.

D. Smoke detectors shall be installed at a minimum distance of 3 feet from air diffusers.

E. All wires shall be marked at all junction boxes, pull boxes, cabinets, boxes and terminations. All



F. Equipment, devices, wire and cable damaged during installation shall be removed and replaced

at no additional cost to Owner.

G. Contractor and equipment supplier shall correct any condition producing cross talk, appreciable

loss of volume, or distortion in the system after installation has been completed.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 283110 - 18

H. Color Coding: Color-code fire alarm conductors differently from the normal building power

wiring. Use one color code for alarm initiating device circuits wiring and a different color code

for supervisory circuits. Color-code notification appliance circuits differently from alarm-

initiating circuits. Paint fire alarm system junction boxes and covers red.

I. Mark all fire alarm system disconnecting means in red and permanently identify the location of

the disconnecting means at all fire alarm panels. Handle locking devices shall be installed on all

breakers serving fire alarm system components.

J. All interior wiring shall be installed in raceways, Raceway Specification No. 2.

K. Furnish and install 1 inch conduit from each wall outlet box to above accessible ceilings and

turn out.

L. Furnish and install conduit above all non-lay-in tile ceilings and in all non-accessible areas in

the building, as well as building areas with exposed structure.

M. Furnish and install conduit sleeves as indicated on Drawings and as required to install all cables.

Refer to Drawings for additional conduit sleeve requirements. Cap all unused conduit sleeves at

both ends. Firestop all wall and floor penetrations as indicated in Section 26 05 05, Basic

Materials.

N. Installation shall allow for easily replacing cables in the future.

O. All signal cable shall be installed neatly above accessible ceilings using J-hooks or other

approved method and attached to building structure. Fire alarm wire and cable shall be installed

in dedicated raceways and cable supports separate from other low voltage system cables.

P. Do not attach to pipes, conduits, ducts, etc. Do not allow cable to rest on pipes, conduits, ducts,

ceiling tiles, etc. Do not attach to wires used for supporting suspended ceilings. Do not use tie

wires or bridle rings.

Q. All cable not in raceways shall be rated plenum, riser, etc.

3.2 WIRE AND CABLE TESTING

A. The following tests, as applicable, shall be performed on all cable pairs:

1. Opens

2. Shorts (within and between pairs)

3. Polarity reversals

4. Transpositions

5. AC voltage

6. Lengths

7. Noise Susceptibility

8. Connector pinouts (wire mapping) to prevent crossed pairs and split pairs.

B. All abnormalities found shall be corrected prior to energizing system.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 283110 - 19

3.3 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS AND TRAINING

A. Contractor, through equipment supplier, shall provide three complete sets of operating

instructions, including circuit diagrams and other information, necessary for complete

installation, operation, and maintenance service to include all features and operating sequences,

both automatic and manual. One copy of this information shall be submitted for review and will

be returned to Contractor after which three copies shall be delivered to Owner upon the

installation and final testing of the equipment. A list of all input and output points in the system

shall be provided with a label indicating location or use of IDC, NAC, relay, sensor, and

auxiliary control circuits.

B. Upon acceptance of the system by Owner and the authority have jurisdiction (AHJ), Contractor,

through equipment supplier, shall provide the services of a factory-authorized service

representative to demonstrate the system and train Owner’s maintenance personnel as specified

below.

1. Train Owner’s maintenance personnel in the procedures and schedules involved in

operating, troubleshooting, servicing, and preventive maintenance of the system.

2. Schedule training with the Owner at least seven days in advance.

C. Provide the names, addresses and telephone numbers of the manufacturer’s authorized service

organization.

3.4 SUPERVISION


accompany Owner’s representative on an inspection of the entire system, and shall demonstrate



under the supervision of the manufacturer’s representative. Final tests and checks shall be

completed in the presence of the Owner’s representative.

C. Contractor and equipment supplier shall assume complete responsibility for equipment and

services supplied, and for complete supervision of system installation and correction of all

malfunctions. Contractor and equipment supplier shall be responsible for correct operation of

the system.


A. Electrical Contractor shall include in Base Bid cost of and shall provide Owner with a one year

service contract effective from the date of acceptance of the Work. Service contract shall

provide for maintenance and inspection service for the complete system. Provide a minimum of

two inspections during the contract year. Inspections shall include all visual inspection points

as required by the NFPA 72 (latest edition) and as required by the system manufacturer.

Equipment supplier shall make available, and if requested by Owner, the option to extend the

service agreement, to provide all parts, labor and mileage beyond the first year contract period.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 283110 - 20


A. Unless noted otherwise, fire alarm system components shall be mounted at the following

heights. Where a range of heights is given, the Contractor shall install all devices and

appliances of the same type at the same height throughout the building:

1. Manual fire alarm boxes (pull stations): The operable part of each manual fire alarm box

shall not be lower than 42 inches above finished floor and not be higher than 48 inches

above finished floor.

2. Fire Alarm Visual Devices: No part of the lens of the devices shall be lower than 80

inches above finished floor, and not higher than 96 inches above finished floor. Where

low ceiling heights do not allow for 80” mounting height, device shall be mounted less

than 6 inches below finished ceiling.

3. Fire Alarm Audible Devices: No part of the speaker of the devices shall be lower than 90

inches above finished floor, or less than 6 inches below finished ceiling.

4. Fire Alarm Audible/Visual Devices:

a. Individual audible/visual devices shall be installed in accordance with their

respective requirements as indicated above.

b. Combination audible/visual devices shall be installed in accordance with the

requirement of the fire alarm visual device as indicated above.

5. Fire Alarm Annunciator Panel: 48 inches above finished floor to the top most control

device within the unit. Coordinate exact location and height with the AHJ and Architect

before rough-in.

6. Remote Alarm Indicators/Test Stations: 48 inches above finished floor to the top of the

test switch, in the immediate vicinity of the detector indicated.

7. Knox Box: Coordinate with the AHJ and Architect.

3.7 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING

A. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris from all fire alarm system components

and devices. Clean all smoke detector units internally using methods and materials

recommended by manufacturer. Vacuum clean the interiors of all control panels.

B. Within one year of date of acceptances, provide on-site assistance in adjusting sound levels and

adjusting controls and sensitivities to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to

the site for this purpose.


A. Provide services of a factory-authorized service representative to supervise the field assembly

and connection of components and the pretesting, testing, and adjustment of the system.

B. Service personnel shall be qualified and experienced in the inspection, testing, and maintenance

of fire alarm systems. Examples of qualified personnel shall be permitted to include, but shall

not be limited to, individuals with the following qualifications:

1. Factory trained and certified.


PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 283110 - 21

2. National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies (NICET) fire alarm

certified.

3. International Municipal Signal Association (IMSA) fire alarm certified.

4. Certified by a state or local authority.

5. Trained and qualified personnel employed by an organization listed by a national testing

laboratory for the servicing of fire alarm systems.

C. All devices shall be programmed into the system and verified to ensure the programming is

correct. It shall be the Contractors and fire alarm equipment suppliers joint responsibility to

verify and ensure that all fire alarm system components and devices (pull stations, detectors,

water flow switches, etc.) are installed, connected to the fire alarm system wiring and operating

properly. Contractor and supplier shall take whatever means necessary to accomplish this and

provide to Owner written documentation indicating that this has been performed and method(s)

used to verify this.

D. Determine, through pretesting, the conformance of the system to the requirements of the

Drawings and Specifications and NFPA. Correct deficiencies observed in pretesting. Replace

malfunctioning or damaged items with new and retest until satisfactory performance and

conditions are achieved.

E. The completed fire alarm system shall be tested in accordance with NFPA 72 by the system

manufacturer’s authorized representative, in the presence of the Owner’s representative and, if

required, the local AHJ. Three copies of computer generated or typewritten testing report shall

be submitted, indicating each device tested, type of test performed, and test result. Control

panels, remote processing units, and annunciators shall also be tested and list measured battery

voltages with and without charger, supply voltage, and circuit breaker number and location.

Handwritten reports will not be accepted for this final inspection report.

F. Provide a 10-day minimum notice in writing when the system is ready for final acceptance

testing.

G. Test the system according to the procedures outlined in NFPA 72.

H. Correct deficiencies indicated by tests and completely retest work affected by such deficiencies.

Verify by the system test that the total system meets the Specifications and complies with

applicable standards.

I. Provide a written record of inspections, tests, and detailed test results in the form of a test log

and include Final Test, Certificate of Completion, and Certificate of Occupancy.

J. Test the system as required by the authority having jurisdiction in order to obtain a certificate of

occupancy.

K. Provide the Owner with a point identification (or zone) print-out and verify with Owner that the

point identification matches exactly the area served.


Strada WVU ShroyerHallRenovations Geotextiles PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 312514-1

SECTION 312514 – GEOTEXTILES

PART – 1 GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment and appurtenances, and materials necessary for the installation of Geotextiles in the completion of the Site Work in accordance with the Contract Specifications, WVDOH Specifications, and Drawings or as directed by the Owner/Owner’s Representative.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. West Virginia Division of Highways (WVDOH) Standard Specifications, Roads and Bridges, latest edition and subsequent supplements and addendums.

B. Approved Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP).

1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Except as modified herein, the Work shall conform to the applicable portions of WVDOH Specifications, Sections 715.11.

PART – 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Unless as modified herein, materials shall be as specified in the WVDOH Specifications, Sections 715.11.

PART – 3 EXECUTION

3.1 CONSTRUCTION

A. Install as per Manufacturer’s specifications.


Strada WVU ShroyerHallRenovations Aggregate Base Courses PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 321123-1

SECTION 321123 – AGGREGATE BASE COURSES

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Construction of compacted aggregate on a prepared subgrade area including the preparation of subgrade. This subbase is applicable to all types of paved surfaces designed for vehicular travel.


A. Section 310516 – Aggregates for Earthwork.

B. Section 312214 – Subgrade.

1.3 REFERENCES



A. Except as modified herein, the Work shall conform to the applicable portions of WVDOH Specifications, Section 307.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Aggregate: 1. WVDOH Class 1 Coarse Aggregate per WVDOH Specifications, Section 307.2.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 CONSTRUCTION

A. All equipment, materials and methods of application shall be in accordance with WVDOH Specifications, Section 307.


Strada WVU ShroyerHallRenovations Bituminous Tack Coat PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 321218-1

SECTION 321218 – BITUMINOUS TACK COAT

PART 1 – GENERAL


A. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment and appurtenances, and materials necessary for the conditioning and treating of an existing surface with an application of bituminous bonding material, as directed by the Engineer.


A. Section 321219 – Bituminous Base Course.

B. Section 321220 – Bituminous Wearing Course.

1.3 REFERENCES



A. Except as modified herein, the Work shall conform to the applicable portions of WVDOH Specifications, Section 408.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Provide a certificate indicating the asphalt residue content of the material being used. Contractor shall not start work until Engineer has reviewed and approved the proposed mix.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. WVDOH Specifications, Section 408.2.


3.1 CONSTRUCTION

Strada WVU ShroyerHallRenovations Bituminous Tack Coat PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 321218-2

A. All equipment, materials and methods of application shall be in accordance with WVDOH Specifications, Section 408.3.


Strada WVU ShroyerHallRenovations Bituminous Base Course PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 321219-1

SECTION 321219 – BITUMINOUS BASE COURSE

PART 1 – GENERAL


A. Construction of Hot-Mix Asphalt: Dense, hot laid, hot-mix asphalt mix approved by WVU, at 4” depth, on a prepared surface.


A. Section 321123 – Aggregate Base Courses.

B. Section 321218 – Bituminous Tack Coat.

C. Section 321220 – Bituminous Wearing Course.

1.3 REFERENCES



A. Except as modified herein, the Work shall conform to the applicable portions of WVDOH Specifications, Section 401, the City of Morgantown, and WVU.

B. Asphalt Manufacturer shall be a paving-mix manufacturer registered with and approved by the WVDOH.

C. All paving thicknesses shall be minimums NOT an average.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals

1. Design Data and Calculations. Prepare and submit a mix design, quality control plan and job mix formula before start of Work. Do not start Work until Engineer has reviewed and approved quality control plan and job-mix formula. Resubmit (as applicable) before using new material or when requiring a new formula due to unsatisfactory results. Certification, by authorities having jurisdiction, of approval of each job mix proposed for the Work. This may involve the DOT or the City of Morgantown as well as WVU.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS


2.1 Asphalt Materials

A. Hot-Mix Asphalt: Dense, hot laid, hot-mix asphalt mix (WVDOH Base 2) approved by WVU, at 4” depth, on a prepared surface.

B. Tack coat as per specification section 321218 – Bituminous Tack Coat.


3.1 PREPARATION

A. Provide zero (0”) inch tolerance at handicap ramps and flush curbs. Base courses deficient in depth that cannot be satisfactorily corrected are considered defective.

B. Proof rolling of sub-base shall be done in the presence of the owner’s representative and the paving contractor prior to installation of the base material. Sub-grade must be dry and properly compacted before placement of base material.

C. Monitoring points must be surveyed by a West Virginia registered surveyor.

D. Do not apply asphalt materials if subgrade is wet or excessively damp or the following conditions are not met:

1. Asphalt tack coat, Base Course, and Surface (Wearing) Course: Minimum surface temperature of 40 deg F and rising at time of placement.

E. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to hot-mix asphalt paving including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Review proposed sources of paving materials, including capabilities and location of plant that will manufacture hot-mix asphalt.

2. Review condition of subgrade and preparatory work. 3. Review requirements for protecting paving work, including restriction of traffic during

installation period and for remainder of construction period. 4. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's

personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

3.2 TESTING

A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and to prepare test reports.

3.3 TACK COAT

A. Apply tack coat uniformly to vertical surfaces abutting or projecting into new, hot-mix asphalt paving at a rate of 0.05 to 0.15 gal. /sq. yd.


3.4 COMPACTION

A. Intermediate Rolling: Begin intermediate rolling immediately after breakdown rolling while hot-mix asphalt is still hot enough to achieve specified density. Continue rolling until hot-mix asphalt course has been uniformly compacted to the following density:

1. Average Density: 96 percent of reference laboratory density according to AASHTO T 245, but not less than 94 percent nor greater than 100 percent.

3.5 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Thickness: Compact each course to produce the thickness indicated within the following tolerances:

1. Base Course: 1/2 inch plus, no minus.

B. Surface Smoothness: Compact each course to produce a surface smoothness within the following tolerances as determined by using a 10-foot straightedge applied transversely or longitudinally to paved areas:

1. Base Course: 1/4 inch.


Strada WVU ShroyerHallRenovations Bituminous Wearing Course PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 311220-1

SECTION 321220 – BITUMINOUS WEARING COURSE

PART 1 – GENERAL


A. Construction of Hot-Mix Asphalt: Dense, hot laid, hot-mix asphalt mix approved by WVU, at 2” depth, on a prepared surface.


A. Section 321218 – Bituminous Tack Coat.

B. Section 321219 – Bituminous Base Course.

C. Section 321723 – Pavement Markings.

1.3 REFERENCES



A. Except as modified herein, the Work shall conform to the applicable portions of WVDOH Specifications, Section 401, the City of Morgantown, and WVU.

B. Asphalt Manufacturer shall be a paving-mix manufacturer registered with and approved by the WVDOH.

C. All paving thicknesses shall be minimums NOT an average.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals

1. Design Data and Calculations. Prepare and submit a mix design, quality control plan and job mix formula before start of Work. Do not start Work until Engineer has reviewed and approved quality control plan and job-mix formula. Resubmit (as applicable) before using new material or when requiring a new formula due to unsatisfactory results. Certification, by authorities having jurisdiction, of approval of each job mix proposed for the Work. This may involve the DOT or the City of Beckley as well as WVU.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS


2.1 Asphalt Materials

A. Hot-Mix Asphalt: Dense, hot laid, hot-mix asphalt mix (WVDOH Wearing 1) approved by WVU, at 2” depth, on a prepared surface.

B. Tack coat as per specification section 321218 – Bituminous Tack Coat.

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Provide zero (0”) inch tolerance at handicap ramps and flush curbs. Base courses deficient in depth that cannot be satisfactorily corrected are considered defective.

B. Monitoring points must be surveyed by a West Virginia registered surveyor.

C. Do not apply asphalt materials if subgrade is wet or excessively damp or the following conditions are not met:

1. Asphalt tack coat, Base Course, and Surface (Wearing) Course: Minimum surface temperature of 40 deg F and rising at time of placement.

D. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to hot-mix asphalt paving including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Review proposed sources of paving materials, including capabilities and location of plant that will manufacture hot-mix asphalt.

2. Review condition of subgrade and preparatory work. 3. Review requirements for protecting paving work, including restriction of traffic during

installation period and for remainder of construction period. 4. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's

personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

3.2 TESTING

A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and to prepare test reports.

3.3 TACK COAT

A. Apply tack coat uniformly to vertical surfaces abutting or projecting into new, hot-mix asphalt paving at a rate of 0.05 to 0.15 gal. /sq. yd.

3.4 COMPACTION

A. Intermediate Rolling: Begin intermediate rolling immediately after breakdown rolling while hot-mix asphalt is still hot enough to achieve specified density. Continue rolling until hot-mix asphalt course has been uniformly compacted to the following density:


1. Average Density: 96 percent of reference laboratory density according to AASHTO T 245, but not less than 94 percent nor greater than 100 percent.

3.5 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Thickness: Compact each course to produce the thickness indicated within the following tolerances:

1. Wearing Course: plus 1/4 inch, no minus.

B. Surface Smoothness: Compact each course to produce a surface smoothness within the following tolerances as determined by using a 10-foot straightedge applied transversely or longitudinally to paved areas: 1. Wearing Course: 1/8 inch.


Strada WVU ShroyerHallRenovations Pavement Markings PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 321723-1

SECTION 321723 – PAVEMENT MARKINGS

PART 1 – GENERAL


A. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment and appurtenances, and materials necessary for the satisfactory application of traffic lines and pavement markings, in accordance with the Contract Specifications, WVDOH Specifications, and Drawings or as directed by the Owner/Owner’s Representative.

B. This item shall also include the satisfactory disposal of all unsuitable and surplus material.


A. Section 321220 – Bituminous Wearing Course

1.3 REFERENCES



A. Except as modified herein, the Work and material shall conform to the applicable portions of WVDOH Specifications, Section 623.

B. Work must comply with the Manual for Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD).

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. At least fifteen (15) days prior to beginning Work, provide the Engineer with a list of materials, including paint formulations, and a schedule of painting operations.

B. Provide the Engineer with the manufacturer’s instructions for the mixing ratios for the materials, application temperatures, proper mixing techniques, and any other data on proper installation.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers shall be approved by WVDOH.

Strada WVU ShroyerHallRenovations Pavement Markings PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 321723-2


3.1 CONSTRUCTION

A. Pavement markings shall be applied in accordance with the Contract Drawings and WVDOH Specifications, Section 623 and MUTCD.

B. Satisfactorily clean and dry the roadway surfaces. Blow or sweep the surface free of loose dirt and other debris. Areas to be painted must be approved for painting by the owner’s representative prior to painting.

C. Provide satisfactory cone barriers at crosswalks for at least 30 minutes or until paint is dry and tack free from vehicular traffic. Repaint or re-apply markings as directed by the owner’s representative.


Strada WVU Shroyer Hall Renovations Segmental Retaining Walls PD 10.14.16 Project No.: 15099 323223-1

SECTION 323223 - SEGMENTAL RETAINING WALLS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes single-depth segmental retaining walls with and without soil reinforcement.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 312000 "Earth Moving" on the WVU design guidelines and construction standards for excavation for segmental retaining walls.

1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Basis of Design: Design of segmental retaining walls is based on products indicated. If comparable products of other manufacturers are proposed, provide engineering design for proposed products, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer registered in West Virginia, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

B. Structural Performance: Engineering design shall be based on loads due to soil pressures resulting from grades indicated and be according to NCMA's "Design Manual for Segmental Retaining Walls."

1.3 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING

A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform the following preconstruction testing:

1. Test soil reinforcement and backfill materials for pullout resistance according to ASTM D 6706.

2. Test soil reinforcement and backfill materials for coefficient of friction according to ASTM D 5321.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Samples: For each color and texture of concrete unit required.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For segmental retaining walls indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation and registered in West Virginia.


1. Compliance Review: Qualified professional engineer responsible for segmental retaining wall design shall review and approve submittals and field quality-control reports for compliance of materials and construction with design.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Preconstruction test reports.

B. Field quality-control reports.

C. Predesign geotechnical investigation

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SEGMENTAL RETAINING WALL UNITS

A. Concrete Units: ASTM C 1372, Normal Weight, except that maximum water absorption shall not exceed 7 percent by weight and units shall not differ in height more than plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) from specified dimension.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Versa-Lok Standard Retaining Wall Units or comparable product by a licensee of one of the following:

a. Allan Block Corporation. b. Anchor Wall Systems, Inc. c. GeoWestern, Inc. d. ICD Corporation. e. Keystone Retaining Wall Systems, Inc.; a Contech company. f. Risi Stone Systems; a division of Rothbury International. g. Rockwood Retaining Walls, Inc. h. Tensar Earth Technologies, Inc.

2. Provide units that comply with requirements for freeze-thaw durability. 3. Provide units that interlock with courses above and below by means of non-metal

pins/clips fabricated for this specific use.

B. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

C. Shape and Texture: Provide units with machine-split textured flat exposed faces.

D. Shape and Texture: Provide units matching basic shape, dimensions, and face texture indicated by referencing manufacturer's pattern designation.


2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS

A. Pins and Clips: Product supplied by segmental retaining wall unit manufacturer for use with units provided, made from nondegrading polymer reinforced with glass fibers.

B. Cap Adhesive: Product supplied or recommended by segmental retaining wall unit manufacturer for adhering cap units to units below.

C. Leveling Base: Comply with requirements in Section 312000 "Earth Moving" and design build engineer’s calculations for base material.

D. Drainage Fill: Comply with requirements provided by design-build engineer for "Subdrainage."

E. Soil Fill: Comply with requirements in Section 312000 "Earth Moving" and requirements provided by design-build engineer for satisfactory soils.

F. Drainage Geotextile: Nonwoven needle-punched geotextile, manufactured for subsurface drainage applications, made from polyolefins or polyesters; with elongation greater than 50 percent.

1. Apparent Opening Size: No. 70 to 100 (0.212- to 0.150-mm) sieve, maximum; ASTM D 4751.

2. Minimum Grab Tensile Strength: 110 lb (49.9 kg); ASTM D 4632.

G. Subdrainage Pipe and Filter Fabric: Comply with requirements provided by design-build engineer.

H. Soil Reinforcement: Product specifically manufactured for use as soil reinforcement and as follows:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Versa-Grid Geogrids or comparable product by one of the following:

a. Colbond Inc. b. Huesker, Inc. c. Luckenhaus Technical Textiles, Inc. d. Mirafi Construction Products; Ten Cate Nicolon. e. Propex Fabrics Inc.; Civil Engineering Fabrics. f. Strata Systems, Inc. g. Synteen Technical Fabrics, Inc. h. Tenax Corporation; Subsidiary of Tenax Group. i. Tensar Earth Technologies, Inc. j. Webtec, Inc.

2. Product Type: Molded geogrid made from high-density polyethylene.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RETAINING WALL INSTALLATION

A. General: Place units according to NCMA's "Segmental Retaining Wall Installation Guide" and segmental retaining wall unit manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Lay units in running bond. 2. Form corners and ends by using special units or cutting units with motor-driven saw.

B. Leveling Base: Place and compact base material to thickness indicated and with not less than 95 percent maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698.

C. First Course: Place first course of segmental retaining wall units for full length of wall. Place units in firm contact with each other, properly aligned and level.

1. Tamp units into leveling base as necessary to bring tops of units into a level plane.

D. Subsequent Courses: Remove excess fill and debris from tops of units in course below. Place units in firm contact, properly aligned, and directly on course below.

E. Cap Units: Place cap units and secure with cap adhesive.

3.2 FILL PLACEMENT

A. General: Comply with requirements in Section 312000 "Earth Moving," NCMA's "Segmental Retaining Wall Installation Guide," and segmental retaining wall unit manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Fill voids between and within units with drainage fill. Place fill as each course of units is laid.

C. Place, spread, and compact drainage fill and soil fill in uniform lifts for full width and length of embankment as wall is laid. Place and compact fills without disturbing alignment of units. Where both sides of wall are indicated to be filled, place fills on both sides at same time. Begin at wall and place and spread fills toward embankment.

1. Use only hand-operated compaction equipment within 48 inches (1200 mm) of wall, or one-half of height above bottom of wall, whichever is greater.

2. Compact nonreinforced-soil fill to comply requirements provided by design-build engineer."

3. Place drainage geotextile against back of wall and place layer of drainage fill at least 12 inches (300 mm) wide behind drainage geotextile to within 12 inches (300 mm) of finished grade. Place another layer of drainage geotextile between drainage fill and soil fill.

D. Wrap subdrainage pipe with filter fabric and place in drainage fill as indicated, sloped not less than 0.5 percent to drain.


E. Place soil reinforcement in horizontal joints of retaining wall where indicated and according to soil-reinforcement manufacturer's written instructions. Embed reinforcement a minimum of 8 inches (200 mm) into retaining wall and stretch tight over compacted backfill. Anchor soil reinforcement before placing fill.

1. Place additional soil reinforcement at corners and curved walls to provide continuous reinforcement.

2. Place geosynthetics with seams, if any, oriented perpendicular to segmental retaining walls.

3. Do not dump fill material directly from trucks onto geosynthetics. 4. Place at least 6 inches (150 mm) of fill over reinforcement before compacting with

tracked vehicles or 4 inches (100 mm) before compacting with rubber-tired vehicles. 5. Do not turn vehicles on fill until first layer of fill is compacted and second layer is placed

over each soil-reinforcement layer.


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Comply with requirements requirements provided by design-build engineer for field quality control.

1. In each compacted backfill layer, perform at least 1 field in-place compaction test for each 150 feet (45 m) or less of segmental retaining wall length.
